# Point of sale

**What:** The Jimani POS is a point-of-sale system for hospitality and retail businesses with a free
basic version. It handles orders, payments, receipt printing and day closings, and stays usable when
the internet connection drops (paying with cash or Pay other, printing the customer receipt, searching
today's receipts; no card payments via Mollie). The POS shares
its database with the other Jimani modules (reservations, webshop, ticketing, activities, salon,
hotel), so a webshop order, for example, appears on the same POS screen as an
order placed at the POS itself.

**Who it is for:** Hospitality and retail businesses looking for a POS system without fixed monthly costs,
with a separate version for treatment salons.

**Core features:**
- Ordering, paying and receipt printing, with cash drawer control via the receipt print signal
- Offline operation: paying with cash or Pay other, printing the customer receipt and searching
  today's receipts (card payments via Mollie and Tap to Pay need a live connection)
- Multiple tills/points of sale under one company account
- Day closing with a revenue overview, as PDF and by email
- Receipt printer and cash drawer control via ESC/POS; card payments via Mollie
- Handheld ordering at the table, with the same ordering function as the POS
- Kitchen and handout screen (€5 per kitchen screen per month)
- Tips as an option that can be switched on and off

**Price:** The first POS is free. At the start you pay a one-off €279 in onboarding costs (excl. VAT). Extra POS €15 per month, handheld €5, kitchen screen €5. See "What does Jimani cost?".

**Difference from competitors:** SumUp works with a comparable freemium model (free basic POS,
paid Plus tier from €49/month per location). Lightspeed and unTill are continuously paid
subscriptions (Lightspeed from roughly $69-189/month, unTill €80-200/month) — no free basic version
found for these two.

**Source:** `Jimani.Domain/Entities/Company.cs:235` (`freePos`); `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/PosController.cs`; `Jimani.MVC/wwwroot/lib/jimani/Kassa/offlinewachtrij.js`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** hospitality POS system, free POS, retail POS, POS system without subscription, POS with reservations

**Related questions:**
- Is the Jimani POS really free, and what does onboarding cost?
- Does the POS still work when the internet goes down?
- Can I link multiple tills or points of sale to one account?

---

# Receipt printer, cash drawer and card terminal integration

**What:** The Jimani POS controls receipt printers via the ESC/POS network protocol, opens the cash drawer
when paying with cash, and connects card terminals via Mollie. Card terminals (PAX A35 and PAX A920-PRO) and receipt printers can be ordered
in the Jimani webshop. Card payments cost 1.5% per transaction without a subscription, or with the card payment subscription
€20 per month per card terminal plus €0.06 + 0.2% per transaction (excl. VAT).

**Who it is for:** Hospitality and retail businesses setting up their POS.

**How it works:** Network printers are controlled via the ESCPOS_NET library (Epson
command set, TCP port 9100); a separate manufacturer SDK operates the built-in printer of the
POS device itself. You connect the cash drawer yourself: at the receipt printer (Which cash drawer?) or at the POS screen
(Connected cash drawer). Without a connected drawer, no cash payments can be made on that POS. Card payments run via a linked Mollie account per company;
no other payment provider was found in the code.

**Difference from competitors:** No public comparison material found. ESC/POS is an open,
widely used protocol, so this is standard practice rather than a distinguishing point.

**Source:** `C:\JimaniV5-app\ESCPOS_NET\Printers\NetworkPrinter.cs`; `Jimani.MVC/Views/Settings/_CreateExternalDevice.cshtml`; `Jimani.Application/Contracts/Infrastructure/IMollieService.cs`; pintarieven: Martijn, 15-10-2026 (zie "Wat kost pinnen?"); `Jimani.Application/Helpers/Pinapparaatsoort.cs`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** connect receipt printer, cash drawer, connect card terminal, ESC/POS, Mollie terminal

**Related questions:**
- Which receipt printers work with the Jimani POS?
- Do I have to connect the cash drawer separately, or does it happen automatically? You connect it yourself at the receipt printer or the POS screen.
- Which card terminal provider does Jimani use, and what do card payments cost?

---

# Kitchen and handout screen

**What:** Orders in the Jimani POS are automatically sent on to a kitchen screen (being
prepared) and a handout screen (ready to hand over), without a separate kitchen display subscription. A kitchen screen costs €5 per screen per month (excl. VAT) and requires the Restaurant and Courses add-ons (€10 per month; free until 1 January 2027 if you already use it).

**Who it is for:** Hospitality businesses with a kitchen or pickup counter.

**How it works:** A single shared order model routes orders by status and type
(delivery, pickup, dine-in) to the right screen tab. A business without kitchen work automatically
sees these screens empty instead of error messages. Because the kitchen and handout screens use
the same data source as the POS, an order appears on the right screen without delay
as soon as it is placed.

**Difference from competitors:** No public comparison material found on kitchen display
costs at Lightspeed, unTill or SumUp specifically.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/WebshopOrderManagementController.cs` (`_Kitchen.cshtml`, `_OrderHandout.cshtml`, `HeeftVerkooppuntKeukenwerkQuery`); prijs: `Jimani.Application/Helpers/Toestelprijzen.cs`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** kitchen screen, kitchen display system, handout screen, kitchen printer

**Related questions:**
- Does Jimani have a kitchen screen, and does it cost extra?
- How does the kitchen screen know which orders to show?
- Why choose a kitchen screen instead of a kitchen printer?

---

# Hospitality / Reservations

**What:** Jimani's reservation system lets guests book a table online at a restaurant, with
online deposits, an automatic confirmation email and the option to combine a table, activity and
ticket in one booking. Reservations share the same database as the POS, webshop and
ticketing.

**Who it is for:** Hospitality businesses and their guests.

**Core features:**
- Online table reservation via a booking widget on your own website
- Combination reservation: table, activity and ticket in one booking
- Online deposit or prepayment when booking
- Guests can change or cancel their own reservation
- Automatic confirmation email with PDF and calendar file (iCal)
- Warning when booking an already occupied table, with the deliberate choice recorded

**Price:** No monthly fee (pricing decision 14-10-2026). See "What does Jimani cost?".

**Difference from competitors:** Lightspeed offers reservations only through a separately purchased add-on or
an integration with a third party. unTill has no built-in reservation module in its core price and
integrates with external systems such as Formitable or Guestplan. Jimani has reservations natively in
the same system, without a separate licence or integration.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/ReservationCombinationController.cs`; `Jimani.React/jimani.react.client/src/widgets/horecaWidget/Widget.js`; prijs: prijsbesluit 14-10-2026 (modules € 0)

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** hospitality reservation system, online table reservation, restaurant booking software, restaurant booking widget

**Related questions:**
- Does Jimani have a built-in reservation system, or do I have to connect one separately?
- Can I arrange a table, activity and ticket in one booking with Jimani?
- What does the reservation system cost per month?

---

# Online table reservation

**What:** Guests book a table themselves online via the hospitality business's website, with a
time and table size of their choice.

**Who it is for:** Hospitality businesses and their guests.

**How it works:** A booking widget shows available times and table sizes; the reservation
is recorded immediately through a command in the reservation system. If a guest (or staff member)
books a time at which a table is already occupied, since 14-09-2026 the system responds with a
warning instead of a silent overwrite: the guest widget refuses the booking, while a
staff member at the POS or dashboard gets a warning and can deliberately continue.

**Difference from competitors:** No public comparison material found that was checked here.
Jimani has reservations natively in the same system, without a separate integration.

**Source:** `Jimani.React/jimani.react.client/src/widgets/horecaWidget/Widget.js`, `BooknowForm.js`; `Jimani.Application/Features/Reservations/Commands/CreateReservationWidget`; `Jimani.Application/Common/Tafelbezetting.cs`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** online restaurant reservation, table reservation website, hospitality reservation system

**Related questions:**
- How does online booking at a restaurant work with Jimani?
- Can I, as a guest, choose my own time and table size?
- What happens if a guest tries to book a table that is already occupied?

---

# Combination reservation (table, activity and ticket in one booking)

**What:** A guest can combine a table, an activity and a ticket in one booking, for example
dinner plus bowling or dinner plus a show.

**Who it is for:** Hospitality businesses that also offer activities or events.

**How it works:** Three separate commands (for hospitality, activity and ticketing) are linked
through one shared combination identifier, so that after booking one part the guest is automatically
passed on to the next. The booking remains one coherent process for the guest,
even though it touches three separate modules in the underlying data.

**Difference from competitors:** None of the three competitors examined combines reservations,
table, activity and ticketing in one system with a shared booking — at Lightspeed,
unTill and SumUp this requires separate products or integrations between separate systems.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/ReservationCombinationController.cs`; `Jimani.Application/Features/ReservationCombination/Commands/AddCombinationReservation*`

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** combination reservation, book table and activity, combine dinner and ticket

**Related questions:**
- Can I arrange a table, activity and ticket in one booking with Jimani?
- How is this different from booking separately in separate systems?

---

# Changing or cancelling a reservation yourself

**What:** Guests can change or cancel their own reservation online, without calling the
business owner.

**Who it is for:** Guests of hospitality businesses.

**How it works:** A change or cancel command in the reservation system is linked to a
screen in the guest widget. The guest does not need an account for this: the cancel screen identifies
the reservation through a `key` and a secret `secretkey` that are parameters in the link — the same
link the guest receives in their confirmation email. In the template of that email you place those
links with the tags {ChangeWidget} (change) and {CancelWidget} (cancel).

**Difference from competitors:** No public comparison material found on guests changing
reservations themselves at Lightspeed, unTill or SumUp specifically.

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Features/Reservations/Commands/UpdateReservationCommandHandler.cs`; `Jimani.React/.../horecaWidget/CancelReservation.js`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** change reservation, cancel reservation, edit reservation yourself

**Related questions:**
- Can a guest change or cancel their own reservation?
- Does a guest need an account to change their reservation?

---

# Booking via AI

**What:** A separate command structure exists for creating reservations from an
AI channel, but no public access to this feature was found.

**Who it is for:** Cannot be determined yet.

**How it works:** A separate command marks a reservation as created by AI, with no
further public integration in the code examined. This means the feature currently
cannot be presented as something a guest can use today.

**Difference from competitors:** Cannot be assessed as long as the feature is not publicly confirmed.

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Features/Reservations/Commands/CreateReservationForOpenAI`

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Note:** do not use for marketing claims until public availability is confirmed.

**Keywords:** AI booking, ChatGPT reservation, book via chatbot

**Related questions:**
- Can I book a table at a Jimani restaurant via ChatGPT or an AI assistant? *(feature exists in the code, public availability not confirmed)*

---

# Upsell products for a reservation or booking

**What:** A business owner can set up separate upsell products (name, price, VAT, product group) that
are offered to guests while booking a reservation or activity.

**Who it is for:** Hospitality, activity and salon businesses.

**How it works:** Each upsell product is separate from the regular POS products, with its own
price and VAT rate, and can be switched on or off per module (hospitality, activities, salon).
For activity reservations, the chosen upsell products are linked to the reservation.

**Difference from competitors:** No public comparison material found on built-in
upsell products when booking at Lightspeed, unTill or SumUp specifically.

**Source:** `Jimani.Domain/Entities/UpsaleProduct.cs`; `Jimani.React/.../widgets/Component/UpsaleProduct.js`, `UpsaleProductCombination.js`, `UpsaleProductSalon.js`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** upsell reservation, booking add-on sales, extra products with appointment

**Related questions:**
- Can I offer guests extra products while they book a reservation?
- Does upsell work the same for hospitality, activities and salon?

---

# In what order does a guest go through a combination reservation?

**How it works exactly:** The order of steps in a combination booking (for example first
table, then activity, then ticket) is set separately per combination by the business owner, not
hardcoded in one fixed order for all businesses.

**Rules:**
- Each combination has its own navigation list that determines which step comes after which.
- The navigation is retrieved per language, so that step names are shown in the guest's own
  language.
- A guest goes through the steps in the order set by the business owner, not in an order
  fixed by Jimani.

**Edge cases:** No rollback or compensation logic was found for a combination booking
abandoned halfway, or for a part that turns out to be no longer available during booking — input
from Martijn is needed to confirm how this is handled in practice.

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Features/ReservationCombination/Queries/GetReservationCombinationNavigation`

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** combination booking order, steps combination reservation, navigation table activity ticket

**Related questions:**
- Do I decide myself in what order table, activity and ticket are booked in a combination?

---

# Can I book combinations with different times and my own order?

**Answer:** Yes, the order of steps in a combination booking (for example first table, then
activity, then ticket) is set separately per combination by the business owner.

**Explanation:** Each combination has its own navigation list that determines which step comes after which, and
retrieves the matching step names in the guest's language. So there is no fixed order
imposed by Jimani: the business owner decides how the combination of table, activity and ticket
is run through.

**Example:** A restaurant with an adjacent bowling alley sets it up so that guests first book a table
and then a time slot for bowling, in that order.

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Features/ReservationCombination/Queries/GetReservationCombinationNavigation`

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** combination booking own order, table activity ticket order, combination times

**Note:** how the times of the individual parts relate to each other within that order has
not been investigated beyond the navigation itself — input from Martijn is needed for more detail.

**Related:** [In what order does a guest go through a combination reservation?](../combinatiereservering/volgorde-van-stappen.md)

---

# Webshop

**What:** Jimani's webshop lets guests order online from a hospitality or retail business, with
a choice of pickup, delivery, shipping or eat here. The webshop shares its database with the
POS, so an online order lands on the same kitchen and order screen as a
POS order.

**Who it is for:** Hospitality and retail businesses that want to offer online ordering.

**Core features:**
- Customers choose: pickup, delivery, shipping or eat here
- Delivery costs and a minimum order amount configurable per postcode area
- Choosing a time slot when ordering
- Supplements and product sets (combo deals) in the shopping cart
- Online payment via Mollie; business customers can order on account via Customer CRM (€20 per month)
- Managing orders in Order management and following them on the kitchen screen

**Price:** No monthly fee (pricing decision 14-10-2026). See "Which features cost money?".

**Difference from competitors:** Lightspeed sells eCommerce/delivery functionality as a separately purchased
add-on. unTill integrates with delivery platforms such as Thuisbezorgd, with its own one-off licence costs
(in one example found, €295 for the licence plus €395 for the integration). Jimani has this
built in, without a monthly fee and without a separate licence per integration.

**Source:** `Jimani.API/Controllers/WebshopController.cs`; `Jimani.React/jimani.react.client/src/widgets/WebshopWidget/`; prijs: prijsbesluit 14-10-2026 (online webshop gratis)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** hospitality retail webshop, order online webshop, webshop module price, webshop with POS

**Related questions:**
- Can I offer pickup, delivery and dine-in ordering with Jimani?
- What does the webshop module cost per month?
- Does a webshop order land on the same screen as a POS order?

---

# Choosing a time slot and spreading busy periods

**What:** Guests choose a time slot for their order; the system can limit the number of orders per
time slot to spread the load on the kitchen.

**Who it is for:** Hospitality businesses with online ordering.

**How it works:** A time slot choice in the widget is linked to a setting for the maximum
number of orders per time period. **Delivery:** with Own delivery and delivery scheduling, a time slot (quarter-hour slots) is full when there are
already as many deliveries for that time as the maximum under Order Restrictions (for webshop or
kiosk) allows. The widget then shows the slot as unavailable and the server rejects the
order with "This delivery time is full. Choose another time." For pickup and eat here this has
not been checked.

**Difference from competitors:** No public comparison material found.

**Source:** `Jimani.React/.../WebshopWidget/TimeSlots.js`; `Jimani.Application/Features/Webshop/CrowdControl/*`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** order time slot, spread busy periods webshop, maximum orders per time period

**Related questions:**
- Can a hospitality business limit the number of orders per time slot?

---

# Paying online and ordering on account

**What:** The webshop supports direct online payment via Mollie, and business customers can order
on account via Customer CRM (€20 per month).

**Who it is for:** Hospitality and retail businesses, and their business customers (invoiced).

**How it works:** An order is paid through the business owner's Mollie connection; for
customers on account the invoice email contains the Payment link placeholder and you set the status manually
to Unpaid or Paid. This is a separate flow alongside direct payment, meant for customers who buy on account instead of
paying per order.

**Difference from competitors:** No public comparison material found.

**Source:** `Jimani.API/Controllers/WebshopController.cs` (`CreateOrder`, `UpdateWebshopPaymentForPayOnAccount`)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** pay online webshop, Mollie integration, order on account webshop

**Related questions:**
- Which online payment methods does the Jimani webshop support?
- Can a business customer order on account?

---

# Promotional prices and temporary offers

**What:** A product can be given a temporary promotional price, with its own start and end date.

**Who it is for:** Hospitality and retail businesses.

**How it works:** Besides the normal price, a product can have a separate promotional price with a
`specialpricefrom` and `specialpriceto` date; outside that period the normal price simply applies. The
webshop can include these promotional prices when retrieving the product list.

**Difference from competitors:** No public comparison material found on temporary
promotional prices at Lightspeed, unTill or SumUp specifically.

**Source:** `Jimani.Domain/Entities/Webshop/WebshopProductSpecialPrice.cs`; `Jimani.Application/Features/Webshop/WebshopProducts/Queries/GetWebshopProductListForWidget` (`GetSpecialPrice`)

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** promotional price webshop, temporary product offer, set discount period

**Related questions:**
- Can I put a product on temporary offer with its own start and end date?
- Does a promotional price automatically stop applying outside the set period?

---

# Integration with unTill

**What:** Jimani has its own integration with unTill: tables and sales areas from
unTill are synchronised, and Jimani reservations are linked to unTill table numbers and
transactions.

**Who it is for:** Hospitality businesses that already use unTill as their POS system and want to use Jimani
for reservations.

**How it works:** Through a separately configurable integration (`CompanyPlugin`), Jimani retrieves the
sales areas and tables from unTill and keeps them synchronised with its own table and
room layout. A reservation made in Jimani stores the unTill table number and the
associated transaction, so both systems refer to the same table.

**Difference from competitors:** This qualifies the earlier picture in the Jimani vs unTill
comparison articles that unTill is purely a competitor: for the POS side, a business owner can
keep using unTill and use Jimani alongside it for reservations, thanks to this integration.

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Features/UntillTables/Command/SyncUntillTable`; `Jimani.Application/Features/UntillSpaces/Command/SyncUntillSpace`; `Jimani.Domain/Entities/UntillReservation.cs`, `UnTillTable.cs`

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** unTill integration, unTill link, Jimani alongside unTill, synchronise unTill tables

**Related questions:**
- Can I use Jimani for reservations if I already have unTill as my POS system?
- Are tables synchronised automatically between Jimani and unTill?

---

# Can I set different VAT rates per ticket type?

**Answer:** Yes, each ticket type has its own VAT percentage, independent of the other ticket types for
the same event.

**Explanation:** Besides its own name, price and maximum number of tickets, a ticket type has its own
VAT field.

**Example:** A museum charges 9% VAT on an adult ticket and makes a child ticket for under 4s with a price of 0.00.

**Source:** `Jimani.Domain/Entities/EntityModels/TicketTypeForReservation.cs` (`vat`, `PaymentNotRequiredInWidget`)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** VAT per ticket type, free ticket with price 0.00, event VAT rate

**Related:** [Can I offer a variety of ticket types?](verschillende-tickettypes.md)

---

# Automatic reminder email before the booking

**What:** A business owner sets up communication rules that automatically send an email before
(or after) an activity or ticket reservation, with a configurable number of days, hours and minutes.

**Who it is for:** Activity and ticketing businesses.

**How it works:** A communication rule defines how many days, hours and minutes before (or after) the
booking an email must be sent, linked to an email type and an on/off switch. Each
reservation is assigned its own send time (`NextMailSendTime`) based on this rule.
For hospitality too, Jimani schedules the pre-arrival messages 1 to 4 when sending the
confirmation: message 1 in hours before arrival, messages 2 to 4 in days with a time
(default 12:00). You set them under Settings > Communication > Email > Customer contact >
Send times.

**Difference from competitors:** No public comparison material found on configurable
reminder emails at Lightspeed, unTill or SumUp specifically.

**Source:** `Jimani.Domain/Entities/CompanyCommunication.cs`; `Jimani.Domain/Entities/ActivitiesReservationEmailSchedule.cs`, `TicketingReservationEmailSchedule.cs`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** booking reminder email, automatic email before reservation, set communication rule

**Related questions:**
- Can I automatically send a reminder email before an activity or event?
- Can I set how many days or hours in advance the reminder is sent?
- Does this also work for regular table reservations? Yes, hospitality also schedules pre-arrival messages.

---

# Which payment methods does Jimani support?

**What:** At the POS the payment methods are Cash, Card, Card payment (external), Tap to Pay, Pay other, On
account and (only for change back) Gift voucher, plus coins/tokens and prepaid credit. Shrinkage
and staff consumption are recorded as Own consumption.

**Who it is for:** Hospitality and retail businesses.

**How it works:** Every payment gets one of these fixed payment methods, regardless of which screen
(POS, webshop, reservation) it comes in through. With "on account" and "own consumption" no
money comes in at the moment of payment — these are different cases for accounting (a
debtor, or own consumption) than cash or card, and an accounting link therefore books them differently.
Coins/tokens is a separate, less common payment method, relevant for example for arcades or
attractions that work with coins.

**Difference from competitors:** No public comparison material found on the full
range of payment methods at Lightspeed, unTill or SumUp specifically.

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Helpers/Betaalwijzen.cs`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** POS payment methods, which payment methods jimani, pay with coins tokens, pay on account

**Related questions:**
- Which payment methods can I accept with Jimani?
- Can a customer pay on account instead of paying immediately?
- Does Jimani support paying with coins or tokens?

---

# How do I get insight into customer details and treatment history?

**Answer:** On the Add reservation screen, under Guest Reservation, you see the guest's earlier appointments
and reservations.

**Explanation:** The Guest Reservation table shows for each earlier reservation the Module, Reservation type,
Reservation date, Reservation time, Quantity, Revenue and Method. There is also a separate, searchable customer overview that also works for Salon.

**Example:** A hairdresser scheduling an appointment sees in the Guest Reservation table that this customer has
been before and what those appointments brought in.

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/ViewModels/Salon/SalonReservations/SalonReservationVm.cs`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** salon customer history, customer treatment history, salon no-show customer

**Related:** [Searching and filtering customers](../../horeca/klanten-zoeken-en-filteren.md), [How do I get insight into customer details and reservation history?](../../horeca/faq/klantgeschiedenis-inzien.md)

---

# Switching between modules on the same POS

**What:** One POS device remembers which module is active (hospitality, webshop, salon, activities,
ticketing) and adapts the menu accordingly; a user can switch this themselves via a dropdown.

**Who it is for:** Business owners who combine multiple modules on the same POS device.

**How it works:** The active module is remembered for thirty days per device/user. If the
POS is on the hospitality module, the shared POS screen shows the reservation menu and the
table floor plan; with another module the corresponding menu appears. Without a valid,
known module the system falls back to the company's own main module, so the POS never
gets stuck in the wrong menu.

**Difference from competitors:** No public comparison material found on a comparable
shared POS interface that can be switched per module at Lightspeed, unTill or SumUp specifically.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/PosController.cs` (cookie `MainModuleDropdown`)

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** switch module POS, POS to reservation screen, switch hospitality webshop salon

**Related questions:**
- Can I switch on the same POS between, for example, booking and just taking payment?
- Does the POS remember which module I used last?

---

# Can I manage multiple events at the same time?

**Answer:** Yes, event tickets (with their own dates and times) and standard tickets (a ticket per
open day) are managed side by side on two tabs, Event tickets and Standard tickets, each with
tiles.

**Explanation:** A standard ticket is a ticket with a price and a quantity per day, on sale on the days when
ticket sales are open (think of a day pass). You manage them in Ticketing management or Ticket sales and can offer as many
side by side as you like. This way a business owner with multiple events does not have to switch between
separate screens to manage them.

**Example:** An amusement park manages both the single day ticket and three
separate evening events side by side on two tabs.

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Features/TicketingReservation/Queries/GetAllEventsOrStandardTickets`; `Jimani.Domain/Entities/EventTicket.cs:37` (`IsStandardTicket`)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** manage multiple events, events overview, standard ticket vs event

**Related:** [Online ticket sales with time slots and capacity](../online-kaartverkoop.md)

---

# How are cancelled webshop orders handled?

**Answer:** You can refund a return with Gift voucher; the customer then receives a gift card with
the amount. An unpaid online order that is cancelled returns the stock.

**Explanation:** The credit voucher belongs to a return: with a refund by Gift voucher, a real
gift card is created if the business works with Gift cards. Cancelling an unpaid
online order puts the stock back.

**Example:** A customer returns a product; the business owner refunds the amount with Gift voucher and the
customer receives a gift card for the same amount.

**Source:** `Jimani.Domain/Entities/Webshop/WebshopOrder.cs` (`Cancelled`, `hasCouponRefund`, `couponRefundClaimed`, `couponRefundAmount`)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** refund cancelled order, credit voucher cancellation, webshop refund

**Related:** [Gift cards](../../kassa/cadeaukaarten.md)

---

# Attachments and change history for a reservation

**What:** Files can be linked to a reservation, and every change to the
reservation is recorded with who made the change and when.

**Who it is for:** Hospitality businesses and their staff.

**How it works:** An attachment has a name, the file itself and a creation date, linked to
one specific reservation — for example for a signed contract with a group booking or a
special request by email. Separately, for every change to a reservation the system records
a line with what changed, by whom and when, so that a staff member can see afterwards what happened
to a reservation.

**Difference from competitors:** No public comparison material found on attachments and a
change history per reservation at Lightspeed, unTill or SumUp specifically.

**Source:** `Jimani.Domain/Entities/Attachment.cs`; `Jimani.Domain/Entities/ReservationHistory.cs`; `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/CancellationsController.cs`

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** reservation attachment, link file to booking, reservation change history, reservation audit trail

**Related questions:**
- Can I link a file (for example a contract) to a specific reservation?
- Can I see who changed a reservation and when?

---

# Setting up your own booking fields, including dynamic fields

**What:** A business owner puts together extra fields for the booking form (for example a
dietary requirement, a question about children, or a comments field), with its own type, required/optional,
and visibility.

**Who it is for:** Hospitality, hotel and activity businesses.

**How it works:** Each field has a name, a type, choice options (for a choice field), a
help text, and settings for whether the field is required,
publicly visible, and whether it is shown in list overviews. A field can also be made **dynamic**:
it then only appears when another field (the "main field") has a specific
answer — for example a field "Number of children" that only appears when "Are children
coming along?" is answered yes. A field can also be set to appear only when
drawing up a quotation, not for a regular booking.

**Difference from competitors:** No public comparison material found on a comparable
dynamic, conditional form mechanism at Lightspeed, unTill or SumUp specifically.

**Source:** `Jimani.Domain/Entities/Field.cs` (`isSpecificRule`, `idChildField`, `selectedChildFieldOption`, `onlyInQuotationMode`)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** own booking fields, dynamic field reservation, conditional form field, customise booking form

**Related questions:**
- Can I add extra fields to the booking form myself?
- Can a field appear only depending on the answer to another field?
- Can a field appear only for a quotation, not for a regular booking?

---

# Activities

**What:** Jimani's activities module lets guests book a time slot for an activity online,
with the business owner managing capacity per "spot" — a lane, table, boat, bike or other bookable
object. Bowling was never a separately used part and was merged into
Activities on 13-09-2026; there is no separate Bowling functionality any more.

**Who it is for:** Rental businesses (bikes, boats), bowling alleys, escape rooms, amusement parks.

**Core features:**
- Booking a time slot online with generic capacity management per spot
- Online deposit when booking an activity
- Price per person or per duration

**Price:** No monthly fee (pricing decision 14-10-2026). See "What does Jimani cost?".

**Difference from competitors:** The generic, non-sector-specific data model makes Activities
usable for a wide range of rental and activity businesses without a separate sector version. No
public comparison material found that points to a comparable built-in activities module
at Lightspeed, unTill or SumUp.

**Source:** `Jimani.API/Controllers/ActivitiesController.cs`; `Jimani.Domain/Entities/EntityModels/Activities/ActivitiesSchedulerModel.cs`; prijs: prijsbesluit 14-10-2026 (modules € 0)

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** activities module, rental booking system, activities software price, bowling activities

**Related questions:**
- Is Jimani suitable for rental businesses (bikes/boats) or only for bowling/escape rooms?
- What does the activities module cost per month?
- Does "Bowling" still exist as a separate part of Jimani?

---

# Deposit on an activity reservation

**What:** Guests can pay a deposit online when booking an activity.

**Who it is for:** Rental businesses and activity businesses.

**How it works:** A separate entity and command record the deposit when the
reservation is made, linked to the business owner's Mollie connection.

**Difference from competitors:** No public comparison material found.

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Features/ActivitiesReservation/Commands/CreateReservationActivitiesDownpayment`; `Jimani.Domain/Entities/ReservationActivitiesDownpayment.cs`

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** activity deposit, prepayment rental, prevent no-shows activities

**Related questions:**
- Can a guest pay a deposit online when booking an activity?
- What does a deposit cost when booking an activity? *(no fixed percentage/amount found in the code)*

---

# Online deposit via Mollie when booking at a salon

**What:** Guests can pay (a deposit) online when booking a salon appointment.

**Who it is for:** Salon businesses.

**How it works:** The widget booking uses the salon's Mollie connection to pay immediately
when reserving. The guest pays online through a Mollie payment that belongs to the appointment; a
refund goes through the Refunds overview.

**Difference from competitors:** No public comparison material found.

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Features/Salon/SalonReservations/Commands/CreateSalonReservationForWidget/CreateSalonReservationForWidgetCommandHandler.cs`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** salon online payment, beauty salon deposit, Mollie salon

**Related questions:**
- Can a customer pay a deposit online when booking a salon appointment via Jimani?

---

# Jimani vs Lightspeed for POS

**Summary:** Jimani's first POS is free, with a one-off €279 in onboarding costs; Lightspeed
is a continuously paid subscription (roughly $69-189/month) with no free basic version.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | Lightspeed |
|---|---|---|
| Base price | Free + €279 one-off | From roughly $69-189/month |
| Reservations | Native, in the same price | Separately purchased add-on or integration with a third party |
| Delivery/eCommerce | Native, no monthly fee | Separately purchased add-on |
| Working offline | Pay with cash and Pay other, print customer receipt, search today's receipts, sync automatically | No public comparison material found |
| Split the bill | Not built (button disabled in the interface) | No public comparison material found |
| Multiple tills/points of sale | €15/month per extra till beyond the first | No public comparison material found |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** the entry price is considerably lower — free POS use versus a
continuous monthly subscription at Lightspeed. Reservations and delivery are in the same
system at Jimani without a monthly fee, whereas Lightspeed uses separate add-ons that must be bought
separately for these. The POS remains usable at Jimani (with limitations) without an internet connection.

**Where Lightspeed is stronger:** Lightspeed is a larger, internationally established platform with a
longer track record and a broader ecosystem of integrations with third parties. Splitting the bill
at checkout is not yet built at Jimani, whereas comparable POS systems more often have it
as standard. This research found no direct confirmation of whether Lightspeed works offline
when the internet goes down — so that remains an open question rather than an established disadvantage.

**Conclusion:** For hospitality and retail businesses that want to start without fixed monthly costs, and that want to combine
reservations or delivery in the same system, Jimani is the cheaper and more
integrated choice. Business owners who need bill splitting at the POS, or who already
rely on Lightspeed's broader integration ecosystem, will not (fully) find that now at
Jimani.

**Source:** `Jimani.Domain/Entities/Company.cs`, `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/PosController.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Features/FreePosOnboarding`, `Jimani.MVC/Views/Pos/_ReceiptAndPayment.cshtml`, `Jimani.MVC/wwwroot/lib/jimani/Kassa/offlinewachtrij.js`, `Jimani.MVC/wwwroot/lib/jimani/Kassa/offlinekopie.js`, `Jimani.MVC/wwwroot/lib/jimani/Kassa/offlinedatabase.js`; Lightspeed-prijsindicatie en add-on-structuur op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** jimani vs lightspeed, Lightspeed alternative, compare POS systems, jimani POS alternative

---

# Jimani vs unTill for POS

**Summary:** Jimani's first POS is free, with a one-off €279 in onboarding costs; unTill is
a continuously paid subscription (roughly €80-200/month) that integrates with external systems for booking and delivery.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | unTill |
|---|---|---|
| Base price | Free + €279 one-off | Roughly €80-200/month |
| Reservations | Native, in the same price | No built-in module in the core price, integrates with Formitable or Guestplan |
| Delivery/eCommerce | Native, no monthly fee | Integrates with delivery platforms such as Thuisbezorgd; in one example found €295 licence + €395 integration costs |
| Working offline | Pay with cash and Pay other, print customer receipt, search today's receipts, sync automatically | No public comparison material found |
| Multiple tills/points of sale | €15/month per extra till beyond the first | No public comparison material found |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** reservations and delivery are native in the same system without a
monthly fee; at unTill this requires an integration with an external system plus its own one-off
licence and integration costs that can run to several hundred euros. The entry price of the
POS itself is zero at Jimani, versus a continuous monthly subscription at unTill.

**Where unTill is stronger:** unTill is a longer-established Dutch provider with a broad
hardware ecosystem and experience in more complex hospitality environments. This research found no direct
confirmation of how unTill handles internet outages, so that remains an open question rather than
an established disadvantage of unTill.

**Important nuance:** a business owner does not necessarily have to choose. Jimani has its own integration
that synchronises tables and sales areas with unTill, so that unTill can keep running as the POS system
while Jimani handles reservations alongside it.

**Conclusion:** For business owners who want booking and delivery in one system without separate integration costs,
Jimani is cheaper and simpler to set up. Business owners who are already in the unTill ecosystem
or need specific hardware integrations that unTill has supported for years can
keep unTill via the existing integration and add Jimani instead of having to choose.

**Source:** `Jimani.Domain/Entities/Company.cs`, `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/PosController.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Features/FreePosOnboarding`, `Jimani.React/.../WebshopWidget/DeliveryTypeScreen.js`, `Jimani.React/.../horecaWidget/Widget.js`, `Jimani.Application/Features/Reservations/Commands/CreateReservationWidget`, `Jimani.Application/Features/UntillTables/Command/SyncUntillTable`, `Jimani.Domain/Entities/UntillReservation.cs`; unTill-prijsindicatie en koppelkosten op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** jimani vs untill, unTill alternative, compare POS systems, jimani POS alternative

---

# Jimani vs SumUp for POS

**Summary:** Both work with a freemium model, but SumUp offers bill splitting and
table management in the free or first paid tier, whereas Jimani has not yet built this specific
feature.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | SumUp |
|---|---|---|
| Base price | Free + €279 one-off | Free basic POS, Plus tier from €49/month per location |
| Split the bill | Not built (button disabled) | Available, standard in the free basic version |
| Table management / moving orders | Handheld uses the same ordering function as the POS | Available in the paid Plus tier (€49/month per location) |
| Tips | Option that can be switched on and off | Mentioned as part of the free basic POS |
| Reservations | Native, in the same price | No public comparison material found as a core feature |
| Handheld ordering | €5 per month per handheld | Part of the paid Plus tier |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** reservations, webshop and ticketing are native in the same system,
which was not found as a core feature at SumUp. Handheld ordering costs €5 per month per handheld at Jimani
versus a full Plus tier upgrade (€49/month per location) at SumUp for comparable
table functionality.

**Where SumUp is stronger:** bill splitting is already available in the free tier at SumUp; at
Jimani this button is still disabled in the interface. Table management (moving orders
between tables) is also available at SumUp via an upgrade, whereas at Jimani this was not found as a standalone,
confirmed feature in this research.

**Conclusion:** For business owners who want to combine reservations, webshop or ticketing in the same system,
Jimani is the broader choice. For business owners for whom bill splitting at the table is a
hard requirement, that is a real difference today to Jimani's disadvantage — not to be glossed over as long as that
feature is not built.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Views/Pos/_ReceiptAndPayment.cshtml`, `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/PosController.cs`, `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/HandheldController.cs`, `Jimani.Domain/Entities/Company.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Features/FreePosOnboarding`; SumUp-prijsindicatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** jimani vs sumup, SumUp alternative, compare POS systems, jimani POS alternative

---

# Jimani vs Lightspeed for Hospitality/Reservations

**Summary:** Jimani has reservations natively in the POS environment without a monthly fee; Lightspeed
offers reservations only through a separately purchased add-on or an integration with a third party.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | Lightspeed |
|---|---|---|
| Reservations | Native, no monthly fee | Separately purchased add-on or external integration |
| Combination reservation (table + activity + ticket) | Native, one shared booking | No public comparison material found |
| Online deposit | Yes, via Mollie | No public comparison material found |
| Double-booking prevention | Warning for an occupied table, with the choice recorded | No public comparison material found |
| No-show prevention | Automatic marking after 30 minutes + deposit | No public comparison material found |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** booking, table, activity and ticket can be combined in Jimani in
one booking without an integration between separate systems — at Lightspeed this requires separate products or
integrations. The recent table occupancy fix (14-09-2026) means a staff member must deliberately
confirm a double booking, instead of it happening silently.

**Where Lightspeed is stronger:** this research could not compare any concrete, verified Lightspeed
reservation functionality because booking there runs as an add-on or integration —
which makes an honest comparison at feature level difficult. Business owners who are already in the broader
Lightspeed ecosystem do not have to switch to another platform for the rest of
their operations.

**Conclusion:** For hospitality businesses that want to combine reservations, activities and ticketing in one system
without separate add-on costs, Jimani is the easier choice to understand. For
business owners who already work with Lightspeed and are happy with an external reservation integration,
the added value of switching is less clearly established in this research.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/ReservationCombinationController.cs`, `Jimani.Application/ViewModels/Reservations/ReservationVm.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Features/Reservations/Commands/UpdateReservationToNoShowIn30Minutes`, `Jimani.Application/Common/Tafelbezetting.cs`; Lightspeed-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** jimani vs lightspeed, Lightspeed alternative, compare reservation systems, hospitality software alternative

---

# Jimani vs unTill for Hospitality/Reservations

**Summary:** Jimani has reservations natively without a monthly fee; unTill has no built-in
reservation module in its core price and integrates with external systems such as Formitable or Guestplan,
with their own licence and integration costs.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | unTill |
|---|---|---|
| Reservations | Native, no monthly fee | No built-in module, external integration needed |
| Combination reservation | Native, table + activity + ticket in one booking | No public comparison material found |
| Deposit | Yes, via Mollie | No public comparison material found |
| No-show prevention | Automatic after 30 min + deposit | No public comparison material found |
| Table floor plan | Built in, linked to occupancy check | No public comparison material found |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** one system for booking, POS and the rest of the operations,
without separate integration costs. At unTill, booking comes via an external system, with its own subscription
and integration costs on top of the unTill subscription already paid (roughly €80-200/month).

**Where unTill is stronger:** as a longer-established Dutch provider, unTill may have more
experience with complex, large-scale hospitality environments and a broader hardware ecosystem. This
research did not examine the actual functionality of the external reservation integrations (Formitable,
Guestplan) themselves, so a purely feature-by-feature comparison is only partly possible here.

**Important nuance:** this is not just a "vs" comparison. Jimani has its own integration
with unTill that synchronises tables and sales areas and links reservations to unTill table numbers. A business owner who already has unTill as their POS system can use Jimani alongside it for
reservations without switching POS systems.

**Conclusion:** For hospitality businesses that want reservations without separate integration costs, Jimani is
simpler and cheaper as a standalone system. For business owners who already work with unTill, this does not
have to be a replacement: the existing integration makes it possible to keep unTill as the POS and
add Jimani for reservations.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/ReservationCombinationController.cs`, `Jimani.Application/ViewModels/Reservations/ReservationVm.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Features/Reservations/Commands/UpdateReservationToNoShowIn30Minutes`, `Jimani.Application/Features/UntillTables/Command/SyncUntillTable`, `Jimani.Domain/Entities/UntillReservation.cs`; unTill-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** jimani vs untill, unTill alternative, compare reservation systems, hospitality software alternative

---

# Jimani vs SumUp for Hospitality/Reservations

**Summary:** Jimani has a built-in reservation system without a monthly fee; reservations were
not found in this research as a core feature of SumUp.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | SumUp |
|---|---|---|
| Reservations | Native, no monthly fee | No public comparison material found as a core feature |
| Combination reservation | Native, table + activity + ticket | No public comparison material found |
| Deposit when booking | Yes, via Mollie | No public comparison material found |
| Double-booking prevention | Warning for an occupied table | No public comparison material found |
| Table management at the POS | Via handheld, same ordering function as the POS | Available in the paid Plus tier (€49/month per location) |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** reservations are a core part of the platform at Jimani; SumUp
seems to focus mainly on the POS and payment side, without a comparable built-in
reservation system. For hospitality businesses that want to handle both booking and payment in one system,
Jimani covers that without a separate integration.

**Where SumUp is stronger:** SumUp offers table management (moving orders between tables) already in the
paid Plus tier, which is closer to hospitality-specific service than SumUp's POS side
on its own. This research found no SumUp reservation functionality to fairly set against
Jimani — that is a gap in the comparison, not an established disadvantage of SumUp.

**Conclusion:** For hospitality businesses that need reservations, Jimani offers a core feature that
was not found at SumUp. Business owners who mainly want a POS and payments and already arrange reservations
somewhere else get less to hold on to from this comparison point.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/ReservationCombinationController.cs`; SumUp-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** jimani vs sumup, SumUp alternative, compare reservation systems, hospitality software alternative

---

# Jimani vs Lightspeed for Webshop

**Summary:** Jimani's webshop has no monthly fee; Lightspeed
sells eCommerce/delivery functionality as a separate add-on that must be bought separately.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | Lightspeed |
|---|---|---|
| Price | No monthly fee | Separate add-on, no fixed amount found |
| Pickup/delivery/eat here | All three natively configurable | Separate add-on |
| Link with POS/kitchen | Direct, same data source as the POS | No public comparison material found |
| Promotional prices | Per product, with start and end date | No public comparison material found |
| Pay afterwards on invoice | Yes, via QR code | No public comparison material found |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** the webshop shares its database with the POS, so an online
order appears on the same kitchen screen as a POS order without an extra integration step. There is
no monthly fee, instead of an add-on that has to be negotiated separately.

**Where Lightspeed is stronger:** Lightspeed is a larger, international platform with possibly more
ready-made integrations with external delivery services and marketing tools. This research could not establish a
concrete price point for the Lightspeed eCommerce add-on, so a direct
price comparison is not fully possible here.

**Conclusion:** For business owners who want a simple, fixed-price webshop that works directly with the
POS, Jimani is a more predictable choice. Business owners who already rely on Lightspeed's broader
ecosystem of add-ons and integrations may find more freedom of choice there.

**Source:** `Jimani.API/Controllers/WebshopController.cs`, `Jimani.React/.../WebshopWidget/DeliveryTypeScreen.js`, `Jimani.Domain/Entities/Webshop/WebshopProductSpecialPrice.cs`; Lightspeed-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** jimani vs lightspeed, Lightspeed alternative, compare webshops, online ordering system alternative

---

# Jimani vs unTill for Webshop

**Summary:** Jimani's webshop has no monthly fee; for delivery unTill integrates with external
platforms such as Thuisbezorgd, with in one example found a one-off licence of €295 plus €395
in integration costs.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | unTill |
|---|---|---|
| Price | No monthly fee | Integration with delivery platform, in one example €295 + €395 one-off |
| Pickup/delivery/eat here | All three natively configurable | Via external integration |
| Stock management | Automatic, totalled per point of sale | No public comparison material found |
| Link with POS | Direct, same data source | Via the external delivery integration |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** the webshop is built in without a monthly fee, without the
one-off licence and integration costs found with an unTill delivery integration. Stock
is tracked automatically without manual synchronisation between systems.

**Where unTill is stronger:** an integration with an existing delivery platform such as Thuisbezorgd possibly gives
access to that platform's reach and brand recognition, which a built-in
own-website webshop like Jimani's does not automatically bring.

**Conclusion:** For business owners who want their own, cheap webshop on their own website without
separate integration costs, Jimani is better value. For business owners who want to piggyback on the reach of
an existing delivery platform, an unTill integration with such a platform is a different consideration than
a price comparison alone.

**Source:** `Jimani.API/Controllers/WebshopController.cs`, `Jimani.Persistance/Repositories/Webshop/Repositories/WebshopProductRepository.cs`; unTill-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** jimani vs untill, unTill alternative, compare webshops, online ordering system alternative

---

# Jimani vs SumUp for Webshop

**Summary:** Jimani's webshop has no monthly fee and shares its database with the POS; a
comparable built-in webshop was not found in this research as a core feature of SumUp.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | SumUp |
|---|---|---|
| Webshop | Native, no monthly fee | No public comparison material found as a core feature |
| Pickup/delivery/eat here | All three natively configurable | No public comparison material found |
| Order status + TV screen | Built in | No public comparison material found |
| Pay on invoice (QR) | Yes | No public comparison material found |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** a full webshop with pickup, delivery, order status and a
TV screen is in the same system as the POS at Jimani; this was not found at SumUp as a
core feature in this research.

**Where SumUp is stronger:** SumUp is strongly positioned around simple and fast card payments, also on the go
or at small, mobile points of sale — a use case that is further removed from a webshop comparison.
This research found no SumUp webshop functionality to set feature-by-feature against Jimani,
which keeps the comparison limited here.

**Conclusion:** For business owners who want online ordering as a core part of their operations,
Jimani offers a feature that was not found at SumUp. For business owners who mainly want to
take card payments quickly and on the go without online ordering, the comparison lies more on the
POS and payment side than on the webshop.

**Source:** `Jimani.API/Controllers/WebshopController.cs`; SumUp-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** jimani vs sumup, SumUp alternative, compare webshops, online ordering system alternative

---

# Jimani vs Lightspeed for Ticketing

**Summary:** Jimani has a built-in ticketing module without a monthly fee, at €0.49 per ticket
sold; ticket sales were not found in this research as a core feature of
Lightspeed.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | Lightspeed |
|---|---|---|
| Ticket sales | Native, no monthly fee, €0.49 per ticket sold | No public comparison material found as a core feature |
| QR scan with rescan rules | Configurable per event (Rescanable, ScanOnePerDay, time interval) | No public comparison material found |
| Multiple ticket types per event | Yes | No public comparison material found |
| Delay the start of sales | Yes, with a configurable start date | No public comparison material found |
| Combining with reservations/activities | Native, via combination reservation | No public comparison material found |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** ticketing is native in the same system as the POS, reservations and
activities, with a well-developed rescan rule system per event. Combination bookings (for example
dinner + a show) can be arranged without an integration between separate systems.

**Where Lightspeed is stronger:** this research found no Lightspeed ticketing functionality
to fairly set against Jimani. As a larger, international platform, Lightspeed is
possibly stronger in retail and hospitality functionality outside ticketing.

**Conclusion:** For event organisers, amusement parks and museums that need ticketing as a core feature,
Jimani is the party with a demonstrably developed ticketing module; at Lightspeed
none was found in this research.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/TicketingReservationsController.cs`, `Jimani.Domain/Entities/EventTicket.cs`; Lightspeed-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** jimani vs lightspeed, Lightspeed alternative, compare ticketing systems, ticket sales software alternative

---

# Jimani vs unTill for Ticketing

**Summary:** Jimani has a built-in ticketing module; ticket sales were not found in this research
as a core feature of unTill.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | unTill |
|---|---|---|
| Ticket sales | Native, no monthly fee, €0.49 per ticket sold | No public comparison material found as a core feature |
| QR scan at the door | Built in, with rescan rules | No public comparison material found |
| Link with POS device | Yes, configurable per event | No public comparison material found |
| Bulk discounts | Two-step tiered discount configurable | No public comparison material found |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** ticketing, POS and booking share the same data source, which means
an event can be linked directly to a specific POS device for sales at the door
alongside online sales.

**Where unTill is stronger:** this research found no unTill ticketing functionality to set
against Jimani. unTill's longer track record in more complex hospitality environments says nothing
specific about ticketing, which does not appear to be a core part of the platform here.

**Conclusion:** For organisers who want ticketing natively in the same system as their POS,
Jimani offers a developed solution that was not found as a comparable core feature at unTill.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/TicketingReservationsController.cs`; unTill-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** jimani vs untill, unTill alternative, compare ticketing systems, ticket sales software alternative

---

# Jimani vs SumUp for Ticketing

**Summary:** Jimani has a built-in ticketing module; ticket sales were not found in this research
as a core feature of SumUp.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | SumUp |
|---|---|---|
| Ticket sales | Native, no monthly fee, €0.49 per ticket sold | No public comparison material found as a core feature |
| QR scan with rescan rules | Built in | No public comparison material found |
| E-ticket by email as PDF | Automatic | No public comparison material found |
| Free entry-level version | No subscription, only €0.49 per ticket sold | Free basic POS exists, ticketing not found as a comparable option |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** besides a free POS, Jimani offers ticket sales without a monthly fee or
subscription: only €0.49 per ticket sold, which suits smaller organisers who do not want to pay
upfront.

**Where SumUp is stronger:** this research found no SumUp ticketing functionality to set against
Jimani. SumUp's freemium POS model is in itself comparable to Jimani's approach,
but that says nothing about ticketing specifically.

**Conclusion:** For event organisers, Jimani is the party with a demonstrably developed
ticketing module, without a monthly fee (€0.49 per ticket sold); at SumUp none was found in this research.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/TicketingReservationsController.cs`; SumUp-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** jimani vs sumup, SumUp alternative, compare ticketing systems, ticket sales software alternative

---

# Jimani vs Lightspeed for Activities

**Summary:** Jimani offers a generic, non-sector-specific capacity model for
activities and rentals without a monthly fee; a comparable built-in activities module was not found in this
research at Lightspeed.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | Lightspeed |
|---|---|---|
| Activity/rental bookings | Native, no monthly fee | No public comparison material found as a core feature |
| Generic capacity model (lane/table/boat/bike) | Yes, one data model for a wide range of activities | No public comparison material found |
| Deposit when booking | Yes, via Mollie | No public comparison material found |
| Combining with hospitality/ticketing | Native, via combination reservation | No public comparison material found |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** the generic data model makes Jimani usable for a wide range of
rental and activity businesses (bikes, boats, bowling, escape rooms) without a separate sector version,
and activities can be combined with hospitality and ticketing in one booking.

**Where Lightspeed is stronger:** this research found no Lightspeed activities functionality
to set against Jimani. Lightspeed's broader retail and hospitality functionality outside
activities was not compared here.

**Conclusion:** For rental and activity businesses that need bookings, capacity management and
combinations with other modules, Jimani offers a developed solution that was not found as a comparable core feature at
Lightspeed.

**Source:** `Jimani.API/Controllers/ActivitiesController.cs`; Lightspeed-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** jimani vs lightspeed, Lightspeed alternative, compare activity booking systems, rental software alternative

---

# Jimani vs unTill for Activities

**Summary:** Jimani offers a built-in, generic activities module without a monthly fee; a
comparable feature was not found in this research at unTill.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | unTill |
|---|---|---|
| Activity/rental bookings | Native, no monthly fee | No public comparison material found as a core feature |
| Capacity management per spot | Generic data model | No public comparison material found |
| Combining with hospitality | Native | Would have to run via an external integration, just like reservations |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** at Jimani, activities, hospitality and POS share the same data source, which
makes combination bookings (for example eating + bowling) possible without integration costs — at unTill
even booking itself already runs via an external integration with additional costs.

**Where unTill is stronger:** this research found no unTill activities functionality to set
against Jimani. unTill's longer track record says nothing specific about activity or
rental management.

**Conclusion:** For businesses that combine activities with hospitality or other modules, Jimani is the
party with a demonstrably integrated solution; at unTill none was found here.

**Source:** `Jimani.API/Controllers/ActivitiesController.cs`; unTill-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** jimani vs untill, unTill alternative, compare activity booking systems, rental software alternative

---

# Jimani vs SumUp for Activities

**Summary:** Jimani offers a built-in activities module without a monthly fee; a comparable
feature was not found in this research at SumUp.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | SumUp |
|---|---|---|
| Activity/rental bookings | Native, no monthly fee | No public comparison material found as a core feature |
| Capacity management | Generic per spot | No public comparison material found |
| Deposit | Yes, via Mollie | No public comparison material found |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** rental and activity businesses can handle bookings, capacity and
payments in one system, something not found as a core feature at SumUp.

**Where SumUp is stronger:** this research found no SumUp activities functionality to set
against Jimani. SumUp's strong point (simple and mobile card payments) lies outside the
activity booking domain.

**Conclusion:** For rental and activity businesses, Jimani offers a developed solution that was not found
as a comparable core feature at SumUp.

**Source:** `Jimani.API/Controllers/ActivitiesController.cs`, `Jimani.Domain/Entities/ReservationActivitiesDownpayment.cs`; SumUp-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** jimani vs sumup, SumUp alternative, compare activity booking systems, rental software alternative

---

# Jimani vs Lightspeed for Salon

**Summary:** Jimani offers salon bookings per specific stylist without a monthly fee; this was
not found in this research as a core feature of Lightspeed.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | Lightspeed |
|---|---|---|
| Appointment with a specific stylist | Native, no monthly fee | No public comparison material found as a core feature |
| Automatic end time based on treatment duration | Yes | No public comparison material found |
| Online payment (deposit) via Mollie | Yes | No public comparison material found |
| Terminal payment automatically linked to appointment | Yes | No public comparison material found |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** salon bookings per stylist, with automatic end time calculation and
a card payment that automatically links to the right appointment, were found concretely in the code
— this was not found at Lightspeed as a comparable core feature.

**Where Lightspeed is stronger:** this research found no Lightspeed salon functionality to set
against Jimani. Lightspeed's broader retail functionality outside salon bookings was not
compared here.

**Conclusion:** For hair salons, beauty salons and nail studios that need bookings per stylist,
Jimani offers a developed solution that was not found at Lightspeed.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/SalonReservationController.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Features/Salon/SalonReservations/Commands/TerminalPaymentForSalonReservation`; Lightspeed-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** jimani vs lightspeed, Lightspeed alternative, compare salon software, salon appointment system alternative

---

# Jimani vs unTill for Salon

**Summary:** Jimani offers salon bookings per stylist without a monthly fee; this was not found in this
research as a core feature of unTill.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | unTill |
|---|---|---|
| Appointment with a specific stylist | Native, no monthly fee | No public comparison material found as a core feature |
| Add-on sales alongside treatments | Separate upsell products | No public comparison material found |
| Terminal payment linked to appointment | Automatic | No public comparison material found |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** salon bookings, add-on sales and payment are handled in one system at Jimani,
with a card payment that automatically links to the right appointment.

**Where unTill is stronger:** this research found no unTill salon functionality to set against
Jimani. unTill's broader hospitality hardware ecosystem says nothing specific about
salon bookings.

**Conclusion:** For salons that need bookings per stylist with integrated payment,
Jimani offers a developed solution that was not found at unTill.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/SalonReservationController.cs`; unTill-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** jimani vs untill, unTill alternative, compare salon software, salon appointment system alternative

---

# Jimani vs SumUp for Salon

**Summary:** Jimani offers salon bookings per stylist without a monthly fee, with automatically
linked terminal payment; this was not found in this research as a core feature of SumUp.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | SumUp |
|---|---|---|
| Appointment with a specific stylist | Native, no monthly fee | No public comparison material found as a core feature |
| Terminal payment automatically linked to appointment | Yes | No public comparison material found |
| Deposit against no-shows | Yes, via Mollie | No public comparison material found |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** salons can handle booking, deposits and card payments at the counter in one
coherent system, with a payment that automatically ends up with the right appointment.

**Where SumUp is stronger:** this research found no SumUp salon functionality to set against
Jimani. SumUp's strong point (simple, mobile card payments) is closer to the POS side
than to salon bookings specifically.

**Conclusion:** For salons that want bookings and payments integrated, Jimani offers a developed
solution that was not found at SumUp.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/SalonReservationController.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Features/Salon/SalonReservations/Commands/TerminalPaymentForSalonReservation`; SumUp-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-09-22

**Keywords:** jimani vs sumup, SumUp alternative, compare salon software, salon appointment system alternative

---

# Jimani vs Lightspeed for Hotel

**Summary:** Jimani offers room reservations with room type and facility; hotel reservations
were not found in this research as a core feature of Lightspeed. Jimani's hotel module
has no monthly fee.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | Lightspeed |
|---|---|---|
| Room reservation with room type/facility | Native | No public comparison material found as a core feature |
| Breakfast, late check-out, early check-in as extras | Breakfast is part of a rate plan (per person per night, online price possible); early check-in and late check-out exist as a product in Hotel management, but are not offered in the online booking flow | No public comparison material found |
| Extra products during booking | Built and live: the hotel widget shows the business's Additional products (Complete your stay), with price, maximum quantity and VAT | No public comparison material found |
| Hotel module price | No monthly fee (pricing decision 14-10-2026) | No public comparison material found |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** room reservations with facilities and paid extras (breakfast,
late check-out) were found concretely in the code, aimed at small hotels and B&Bs —
a niche not found as a core feature at Lightspeed.

**Where Lightspeed is stronger:** this research found no Lightspeed hotel functionality to set
against Jimani. Lightspeed's broader retail and hospitality functionality was not
compared here.

**Conclusion:** For B&Bs and small hotels that need room reservations with facilities and extras,
Jimani offers a developed solution that was not found at Lightspeed. The
hotel module has no monthly fee at Jimani.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/Hotel/HotelReservationController.cs`, `Jimani.Domain/Entities/Hotel/HotelReservationBreakfast.cs`; Lightspeed-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** jimani vs lightspeed, Lightspeed alternative, compare hotel software, hotel booking system alternative

---

# Jimani vs unTill for Hotel

**Summary:** Jimani offers room reservations with room type and facility; hotel reservations
were not found in this research as a core feature of unTill.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | unTill |
|---|---|---|
| Room reservation with room type/facility | Native | No public comparison material found as a core feature |
| Paid extras (breakfast, check-out times) | Native | No public comparison material found |
| Hotel module price | No monthly fee (pricing decision 14-10-2026) | No public comparison material found |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** room reservations with facilities and paid extras were found concretely in
the code, aimed at B&Bs and small hotels.

**Where unTill is stronger:** this research found no unTill hotel functionality to set against
Jimani. unTill's experience with more complex hospitality environments says nothing specific about
hotel bookings.

**Conclusion:** For B&Bs and small hotels, Jimani offers a developed solution that was not found at
unTill. The hotel module has no monthly fee at Jimani.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/Hotel/HotelReservationController.cs`; unTill-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** jimani vs untill, unTill alternative, compare hotel software, hotel booking system alternative

---

# Jimani vs SumUp for Hotel

**Summary:** Jimani offers room reservations with room type and facility; hotel reservations
were not found in this research as a core feature of SumUp.

**Comparison table:**

| Feature | Jimani | SumUp |
|---|---|---|
| Room reservation with room type/facility | Native | No public comparison material found as a core feature |
| Paid extras (breakfast, check-out times) | Native | No public comparison material found |
| Extra products during booking | Built and live: the hotel widget shows the business's Additional products (Complete your stay), with price, maximum quantity and VAT | No public comparison material found |

**Where Jimani is stronger:** room reservations with facilities and paid extras, aimed at
B&Bs and small hotels, were found concretely in the code.

**Where SumUp is stronger:** this research found no SumUp hotel functionality to set against
Jimani. SumUp's strong point (simple, mobile card payments) lies outside the
hotel booking domain.

**Conclusion:** For B&Bs and small hotels, Jimani offers a developed solution that was not found at
SumUp. The hotel module has no monthly fee at Jimani.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/Hotel/HotelReservationController.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Features/Hotel/Commands/CreateHotelExtraProducts`; SumUp-informatie op gezag van eerder webonderzoek (22-09-2026), niet uit Jimani-code

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** jimani vs sumup, SumUp alternative, compare hotel software, hotel booking system alternative

---

# Can I ask for deposits when booking to reduce no-shows?

**Answer:** Yes, guests can pay (a deposit) online when booking a salon appointment through the
salon's Mollie connection.

**Explanation:** The widget booking uses the salon's Mollie connection to pay immediately when
reserving. Whether a treatment is a deposit, you set per treatment under "Is this a deposit?".

**Example:** A nail studio asks for a €10 deposit when booking an extended treatment,
so that a no-show does not cost the business owner the full value of the time slot.

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Features/Salon/SalonReservations/Commands/CreateSalonReservationForWidget`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** salon deposit, prevent salon no-show, prepay salon appointment

**Related:** [Online deposit via Mollie when booking at a salon](../aanbetaling-mollie.md)

---

# Can I sell products alongside treatments (add-on sales)?

**Answer:** Yes, through separate upsell products that a salon sets up itself, with its own name, price
and VAT rate.

**Explanation:** You create extra products on the Products tab of Salon management and link them to a
treatment; the guest chooses them when booking, or you choose them when making the appointment. The
price includes VAT.

**Example:** A hair salon offers a care product as a separate add-on sale when a haircut is booked.

**Source:** `Jimani.Domain/Entities/UpsaleProduct.cs`; `Jimani.React/.../widgets/Component/UpsaleProductSalon.js`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** salon add-on sales, sell products alongside treatment, hair salon upsell

**Related:** [Upsell products for a reservation or booking](../../horeca/upsell-producten.md)

---

# Terminal payment linked to the appointment

**What:** If a guest books an appointment online with an amount, Jimani creates a Mollie payment
for that amount, linked to that specific salon reservation.

**Who it is for:** Salon businesses.

**How it works:** The guest completes the payment online (via a link from Mollie) and the payment
automatically belongs to the appointment, without a staff member having to link it manually. If
payment is switched off in the widget, nothing is paid. Nothing is sent to a card terminal.

**Difference from competitors:** No public comparison material found.

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Features/Salon/SalonReservations/Commands/TerminalPaymentForSalonReservation`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** salon online payment, link payment to appointment, automatic payment link

**Related questions:**
- How are payments automatically linked to the right appointment?
- Does an online payment automatically belong to the appointment?

---

# What does Jimani cost?

**Answer:** The POS and the modules (online booking, appointments, activities and hotel) have no
monthly fee. For ticket sales you pay €0.49 per ticket sold. At the start you pay a one-off
€279 in onboarding costs. Beyond that you only pay for extra or special features, for SMS and AI credit
and for equipment. All amounts exclude VAT.

**Explanation:** Jimani charges per feature, not per package. The basics are free:

| Item | Price |
|---|---|
| POS (the first POS) | €0 per month |
| Online reservations, Appointments, Activities, Hotel | €0 per month |
| Ticket sales | €0.49 per ticket sold |
| Onboarding costs | €279 one-off: we set up your POS, products and equipment and help you get started personally |
| Paid features | €5 to €29 per month per feature, see [Which features cost money?](welke-functies-kosten-geld.md) |
| SMS | bundles from €12 for 100 SMS |
| AI (Jim, Write with AI, translating) | via AI credit, €5 welcome credit |

A paid feature costs the same with the free POS as with a subscription. You pay per month
by direct debit. Prices are per month and exclude 21% VAT.

**Example:** A café with the free POS, two handhelds and a kitchen screen pays 2 × €5 for the
handhelds and €5 for the kitchen screen: €15 per month excl. VAT. At the start it pays a one-off
€279 in onboarding costs, plus the equipment it orders.

**Related questions:**

- What are Jimani's costs per month?
- How much does the POS system cost?
- Do I pay per package or per feature?
- What does it cost to use online booking?
- Are there hidden costs?

**Keywords:** what does jimani cost, jimani prices, POS system costs, free POS, reservation system price, ticket sales price

**Related:** [Is the Jimani POS really free?](is-de-kassa-echt-gratis.md), [Which features cost money?](welke-functies-kosten-geld.md), [What do ticket sales cost?](wat-kost-kaartverkoop.md)

---

# Is the Jimani POS really free?

**Answer:** Yes. The first POS costs €0 per month, with no revenue commission. At the start you pay a
one-off €279 in onboarding costs. Beyond that you only pay if you turn on extra tills, handhelds or other
paid features, and for equipment you buy.

**Explanation:** The free POS includes paying, receipts, products, VAT, the day closing and the POS in the
dashboard. Product variants, discounts, refunds, printing labels and product sets are also free.
Features that cost money, you turn on yourself in Settings. See [Which features cost money?](welke-functies-kosten-geld.md).

The POS in the dashboard (the web POS) does not count as an extra POS. A second POS costs €15 per month.

At the start you pay a one-off €279 in onboarding costs: we set up your POS, products and equipment
for you and help you get started personally. See [What do I pay one-off at the start?](wat-betaal-ik-bij-de-start.md).

Card payments go through Mollie. Mollie charges an amount per payment. That is not a commission from Jimani.

**Example:** A snack bar with one POS screen and only free features pays €279 in onboarding costs
at the start and nothing per month to Jimani after that.

**Related questions:**

- Is the POS system really free, or is there a catch?
- What is included in the free POS?
- What do I pay for if I use the free POS?
- Is the POS free without a subscription?
- Are discounts and refunds free?

**Keywords:** free POS, POS without subscription, free hospitality POS system, hidden POS costs, POS commission

**Related:** [What does Jimani cost?](wat-kost-jimani.md), [What does an extra POS, handheld or kitchen screen cost?](extra-kassa-handheld-keukenscherm.md)

---

# What do I pay one-off at the start?

**Answer:** At the start you pay a one-off €279 in onboarding costs, excluding VAT. We set up your
POS, products and equipment for you and help you get started personally until you can continue
on your own. In addition you pay for the equipment you order. There is no discount on the onboarding costs.

**Explanation:** When you sign up, Jimani draws up a quotation from your answers. It contains:

- as the first line the onboarding costs of €279, one-off;
- the equipment that suits your business (you adjust the quantity or leave it out with "Continue without equipment");
- the modules and features with their monthly price.

You pay the onboarding costs once, together with the equipment. They do not depend on the features you
choose: even with only the free POS you pay €279. If you have already paid for the start at a dealer,
the onboarding costs appear on your quotation as €0, with the dealer's name next to it.

**Example:** A restaurant chooses two kitchen screens (€5 per screen per month) and orders no
equipment. The quotation shows Onboarding costs €279 one-off and Kitchen screen 2 × €5 per month.

**Related questions:**

- What are Jimani's start-up costs?
- What are onboarding costs?
- What is on the quotation when signing up?
- Do I have to buy equipment at the start?
- What do I pay one-off before I can get started?

**Keywords:** POS start-up costs, onboarding costs, POS onboarding, one-off costs jimani, 279 euro

**Related:** [What does Jimani cost?](wat-kost-jimani.md), [Is the Jimani POS really free?](is-de-kassa-echt-gratis.md)

---

# Which features cost money?

**Answer:** Most features are free. A fixed list of extra and special features costs an
amount per month, from €5 to €29. You turn them on and off yourself in Settings. The price is the same with the
free POS and with a subscription. All amounts exclude VAT.

**Explanation:** Paid features per month:

| Feature | Price per month |
|---|---|
| Extra POS | €15 per POS beyond the first |
| Handheld | €5 per handheld or phone |
| Kitchen screen | €5 per screen |
| Buzzers | €10 per POS screen with buzzer |
| Tap to Pay | €5 |
| Courses | €10 (free until 1 January 2027 if you already use it) |
| Dynamic Prices | €10 |
| Gift voucher | €10 |
| Gift cards | €10 |
| Customer CRM | €20 |
| Purchasing (with warehouse locations) | €10 |
| Subcategories | €5 |
| Allergens (NVWA) | €5 (free until 1 January 2027 if you already use it) |
| QR codes (only with the online webshop) | €10 |
| Accounting link | €15 |
| Time tracking | €15 |
| Survey | €5 |
| Newsletters | free up to 500 emails per month, above that €5 per month |
| Own sender (emailing from your own address) | €10 |
| Website | €29 |
| Multilingual (website), up to two extra languages | €10 |

Accepting repairs at the POS costs €150 one-off. SMS and AI you pay for via credit.

Free include: product variants, discounts, refunds, printing labels, waste and
waste overview, product sets, stock, suppliers, supplements, tracking tips, coins, online
webshop, online reservations, ticket sales settings, extra languages, import and export, price per unit,
own consumption and the SMS integration itself.

**Example:** A business with an accounting link and time tracking pays €15 + €15 = €30 per month
excl. VAT.

**Related questions:**

- Which Jimani features are free and which are paid?
- What does an extra feature cost per month?
- Where do I see what a feature costs before I turn it on?
- Is the price the same with and without a subscription?
- Which add-ons cost money?

**Keywords:** paid features jimani, integrations price, extra POS options, what does a kitchen screen cost, what does an accounting link cost

**Related:** [What does Jimani cost?](wat-kost-jimani.md), [Can I try a paid feature first?](betaalde-functie-proberen-en-opzeggen.md)

---

# What does an extra POS, handheld, kitchen screen or buzzer cost?

**Answer:** These four are counted per device: €15 per month per POS beyond the first, €5 per handheld,
€5 per kitchen screen and €10 per POS screen with buzzer. Amounts exclude VAT. The first POS and
the POS in the dashboard are free.

**Explanation:** Jimani counts the linked devices of your business (not deleted):

| Device | Price per month | What counts |
|---|---|---|
| Extra POS | €15 | every POS beyond the first |
| Handheld | €5 | every handheld and every phone with the handheld app |
| Kitchen screen | €5 | every kitchen screen |
| Buzzers | €10 | every POS screen on which the buzzer is turned on |

The POS in the dashboard (web POS) does not count as a POS. A second web POS does.

The invoice shows the quantity, for example "Kitchen screen (2 × €5.00)". If you link a device
in the middle of the month, you pay pro rata for the rest of that month. Tap to Pay costs €5 per month for the business,
regardless of the number of devices.

**Example:** A restaurant with two POS screens, three handhelds and one kitchen screen pays
€15 + 3 × €5 + €5 = €35 per month excl. VAT.

**Related questions:**

- What does a second POS cost?
- What does a handheld cost per month?
- What does a kitchen screen or buzzer cost?
- Do I also pay for a phone I use as a handheld?
- How much do extra devices cost per month?

**Keywords:** extra POS costs, handheld costs, kitchen screen price, buzzer price, POS licence

**Related:** [Which features cost money?](welke-functies-kosten-geld.md), [Is the Jimani POS really free?](is-de-kassa-echt-gratis.md)

---

# Can I try a paid feature first, and how do I cancel it?

**Answer:** If you choose a paid feature when signing up, you try it free for 14 days. If you
turn on a paid feature yourself later, you immediately pay pro rata for the rest of the month.
You cancel by turning the feature off in Settings; it then stays on until the end of the
month.

**Explanation:**

- **Trial at the start.** Every paid module or feature on your quotation gets a 14-day trial after you pay for the
  starter package. A feature gets only one trial. Three days before the end you receive
  an email: if you do not want to keep it, turn it off in Settings.
- **Turning on later.** In Settings you choose the feature and see the price. If you already have a mandate for
  direct debit, it goes on immediately and you pay pro rata for the rest of this month (today counts
  too). If you do not have a mandate yet, you first pay the rest of the month via Mollie; that payment also provides
  the mandate. After that the feature appears on the monthly invoice on the first of the month.
- **What belongs together.** Some features only work together with another. A kitchen screen requires
  Courses, Courses requires Restaurant. Tap to Pay, handheld, deposits and transaction costs require a
  Mollie connection. The screen tells you what to turn on first.
- **Cancelling.** Turn the feature off. A paid feature stays on up to and including the last day of the month
  and no longer appears on the next direct debit. If you turn it back on before the end of the month, it continues
  without a new invoice. A free feature goes off immediately.

**Example:** On 21 October you turn on time tracking (€15 per month). You pay 11/31 of the share for
October and from 1 November €15 per month. If you turn it off on 5 December, it keeps working until and including
31 December.

**Related questions:**

- Can I try a paid feature for free?
- How do I turn a paid feature off again?
- How do I cancel a subscription or module?
- How long does the trial period last?
- Can I try a feature a second time for free?

**Keywords:** trial period jimani, try feature, cancel integration, cancel subscription jimani, pro rata

**Related:** [Which features cost money?](welke-functies-kosten-geld.md), [What happens if a payment to Jimani fails?](mislukte-incasso.md)

---

# I am already a customer: what do the new October 2026 prices mean for me?

**Answer:** Features you already used that start to cost money or become more expensive because of the new prices
stay free until one year after your registration with Jimani. Features that become free cost nothing
from next month.

**Explanation:** On 14 October 2026 the prices of the features were set: a free POS that works well,
and paying for extra or special features. For existing customers the following applies:

- **Becomes free** (product variants, discounts, refunds, labels, waste, waste overview,
  product set): you no longer pay anything for them from next month.
- **Becomes paid or more expensive**: if the feature was already on for you, it stays free until the day before your
  registration date plus one year. If you have been a customer for more than a year, you pay the new price from
  the next monthly direct debit.
- **After the free year**: 30 days before the end you receive an email and a notification in Jimani with the
  amount you are going to pay. You agree or you turn the feature off. If you do not respond, paying
  starts automatically. 7 days before the end you receive a reminder.
- **Per device**: extra POS, handhelds, kitchen screens and buzzers are counted per item. That counts towards
  the question of whether a feature becomes more expensive for you.
- If you had agreed your own price with Jimani, it stays in place.

**Example:** You have been a customer since 1 March 2026 and use a kitchen screen. It cost nothing and becomes
€5 per screen. It stays free until and including 28 February 2027. Around 29 January 2027 you receive an
email with the amount and around 21 February a reminder. If you do not turn the kitchen screen off, you pay
from 1 March 2027 €5 per month.

**Related questions:**

- What changes in the prices for me as an existing customer?
- Are features I used to pay for now free?
- Will my monthly amount go up because of the new prices?
- When do the new rates take effect?
- Do I still pay for product variants and discounts?

**Keywords:** new prices jimani, price change, existing customer, free year, pricing decision October 2026

**Related:** [Which features cost money?](welke-functies-kosten-geld.md), [What does an extra POS, handheld or kitchen screen cost?](extra-kassa-handheld-keukenscherm.md)

---

# What does ticket selling via Jimani cost?

**Answer:** Ticket sales have no monthly fee and no subscription. You pay €0.49 excluding VAT per ticket sold.
The tickets of a month appear on the monthly invoice of the month after.

**Explanation:** Jimani counts per month the tickets of paid, non-cancelled ticket reservations. It
is about tickets, not orders: an order with four tickets counts as four. The invoice
shows the line "Sold tickets" with the quantity × €0.49.

There is no trial period for ticket sales per ticket, because there is no monthly fee.

Online payment goes through your own Mollie account. Mollie charges its own rate per payment for that.
If you want to pass costs on to the buyer, you can do so with the Transaction costs feature (requires a
Mollie connection).

**Example:** A theatre sells 600 tickets in November. The invoice of 1 December shows
600 × €0.49 = €294 excl. VAT.

**Related questions:**

- What does it cost to sell tickets?
- What do I pay per ticket sold?
- How are ticket sales charged?
- Do I also pay for cancelled tickets?
- Is there a trial period for ticket sales?

**Keywords:** ticket sales costs, price per ticket, ticket sales fees, ticketing system price, 0.49 per ticket

**Related:** [What does Jimani cost?](wat-kost-jimani.md)

---

# What happens if a payment to Jimani fails?

**Answer:** You immediately get a notification on the POS and an email with a payment link. Jimani tries
again after 3 and after 7 days. After 14 days the paid features are paused; the POS keeps working.
After 30 days the POS stops too. If you pay, everything switches back on immediately.

**Explanation:** Jimani debits on the first of the month via Mollie's direct debit. If that
fails, for example due to insufficient balance or a withdrawn mandate, an arrears arises:

| Days after the failed direct debit | What happens |
|---|---|
| 0 | Notification in the POS and an email with payment link |
| 3 and 7 | New attempt to debit |
| 14 | Paid modules and features paused, the POS still works |
| 30 | The POS stops |

If you pay via the link or a new attempt succeeds, Jimani restores everything as it was.

**Example:** The direct debit of 1 November fails. On 4 and 8 November Jimani tries again. If you pay
on 10 November via the link, you notice nothing else.

**Related questions:**

- What happens if my direct debit fails?
- My Jimani invoice was not debited, what now?
- Is my POS blocked if I pay late?
- How do I still pay an outstanding invoice?
- When does Jimani debit the amount?

**Keywords:** direct debit failed, jimani payment failed, outstanding invoice, POS blocked, arrears

**Related:** [Can I try a paid feature first, and how do I cancel it?](betaalde-functie-proberen-en-opzeggen.md)

---

# What does using AI in Jimani cost?

**Answer:** AI in Jimani (the assistant Jim, Write with AI, website texts, AI images and translating)
is paid for with AI credit. Every business receives a one-off €5 welcome credit. After that you top up from €10
to €1,000 at a time, plus 21% VAT. When the credit is used up, the AI stops.

**Explanation:**

- **Viewing the balance.** In Settings there is the tile "Jimani AI credit" with your balance, the usage per
  feature and the Top up button.
- **Usage.** Every AI action is deducted from your credit. How much depends on how long the question and the
  answer are. Examples (averages, excl. VAT):

| Action | Approximately per time |
|---|---|
| A question to Jim | €0.05 to €0.10 |
| Write with AI (an email text) | €0.20 |
| Having website texts written | €0.23 |
| An AI photo | €0.13 |

So with the welcome credit of €5 you can ask Jim well over 50 questions.

- **Topping up.** Choose 10, 20, 50 or 100 euros, or your own amount up to €1,000. You pay via Mollie;
  the credit grows by the amount excluding VAT. Credit does not expire.
- **Automatic top-up.** If you set this to Yes, Jimani tops up as soon as the balance falls below your threshold
  (by default top up €20 at €2). That is only possible with a mandate for direct debit.
- **Almost used up.** Below 20% of your last top-up (minimum €1) you receive an email.

Jim always proposes changes first; you choose Apply or Cancel.

**Example:** You top up €20. You pay €24.20 and your credit increases by €20.

**Related questions:**

- What does it cost to use AI in Jimani?
- How do I see how much AI credit I have left?
- How do I top up my AI credit?
- Why is my AI credit used up so quickly?
- What does a question to Jim cost?

**Keywords:** ai credit, jim costs, ai assistant costs, top up, write with ai

**Related:** [What does Jimani cost?](wat-kost-jimani.md)

---

# How do I send text messages from Jimani, and what does it cost?

**Answer:** Turn on the SMS integration (free) and buy a bundle: 100 SMS for €12, 500 for €50
or 1,000 for €90, excluding VAT. After that you set up text messages under Settings > Communication > SMS.
Jimani sends via Spryng.

**Explanation:**

- **Turning on.** Settings > Add-ons, category Communication, SMS. Turning on SMS is only possible once you have credit;
  so buy a bundle first. You pay via Mollie.
- **What an SMS costs.** An SMS is 160 characters per part, 153 when there are multiple parts. Each part costs one SMS of your
  credit. Anything longer than 3 parts is not sent.
- **Characters.** Jimani always sends in the standard SMS character set: é becomes e, emoji are dropped. This way
  a message never unexpectedly costs more.
- **Sender.** Maximum 11 characters: letters, digits and spaces, with at least one letter. If left empty, Jimani derives
  it from your business name.
- **Daily limit.** By default 100 SMS per day, adjustable up to 1,000.
- **Auto top-up.** Below 20 SMS Jimani can buy a new bundle. That is only possible with a
  mandate for direct debit.
- **Status.** For each SMS you see Sent, Delivered or Failed. If Failed, you get the credit back. Without a
  mobile number or above the daily limit no SMS is sent and it costs nothing.
- **Test SMS.** To your own confirmed number or an entered number, maximum 5 per quarter of an hour. Costs
  credit.

**Example:** A reminder of 120 characters costs 1 SMS. With the bundle of 500 that is €0.10 excl. VAT.

**Related questions:**

- How can I send text messages to my guests?
- What does an SMS cost at Jimani?
- How do I buy an SMS bundle?
- Why can't I turn on SMS?
- How many characters can an SMS be?

**Keywords:** send sms, sms costs, sms bundle, sms reservation, spryng

**Related:** [Can I automatically send guests a text message?](automatische-sms.md)

---

# Can I automatically send guests a text message, for example a reminder?

**Answer:** Yes. You create automatic text messages yourself per moment, such as confirmation, reminder
before arrival, after the visit or for an open deposit. No text messages are on by default. With
"SMS times" you manually offer a guest free times with a link to book directly.

**Explanation:** Under SMS choose "+ New SMS". For each SMS you choose:

- **For whom:** reservations, appointments, tickets, activities or webshop (webshop only confirmation).
- **Moment:** confirmation, change, cancellation, days before arrival (1 to 30), hours before arrival (1 to
  72), after the visit (1 to 168 hours), survey (with the Survey integration), open deposit or no-show.
- **Reservation type:** an SMS for a specific type takes precedence over the general SMS.
- **Text per language,** with tags such as {Zaak}, {Naam}, {Datum}, {Tijd} and {Personen}. For an open deposit
  {Bedrag} and {Link} are added, for the survey {Link}. The screen shows per moment which tags fit.

Rules: one SMS per booking per moment. If an SMS falls between 21:00 and 8:00 (adjustable), it is sent at 8:00.
If a reminder would then only arrive after the arrival, Jimani skips it. An SMS after
the visit only goes to guests who want to receive news. A new SMS is not sent for
moments that had already passed when you created it; a reminder for an existing booking that is still to
come is sent.

**SMS times:** under Reservations you choose a date, number of people and up to 4 free times, and enter the
mobile number. The guest receives a short link. The booking widget opens with it already filled in. The link
works until the end of that day. In the overview you see sent, opened or booked.

**Example:** "{Zaak}: see you soon, {Naam}! We'll see you on {Datum} at {Tijd}." as an SMS 1 day before arrival.

**Related questions:**

- Can I automatically send customers an SMS reminder for their reservation?
- How do I send an SMS shortly before an appointment or visit?
- Can I have an SMS sent after the visit?
- How do I set up an automatic SMS for a confirmation or cancellation?
- Can Jimani send guests an SMS if they did not show up?

**Keywords:** sms reminder reservation, automatic sms, no-show sms, sms times, free times sms

**Related:** [How do I send text messages from Jimani, and what does it cost?](sms-versturen-en-kosten.md)

---

# What do card payments cost with Jimani?

**Answer:** Card payments run through your own Mollie account. Without a subscription you pay 1.5% per
transaction. With the card payment subscription you pay €20 per month per card terminal and then €0.06 + 0.2% per
transaction. Tap to Pay costs €5 per month for an unlimited number of devices. The handheld feature
costs €5 per month per handheld. All amounts exclude VAT.

**Explanation:**

| Choice | Fixed | Per transaction |
|---|---|---|
| Without subscription | €0 | 1.5% |
| Card payment subscription | €20 per month per card terminal | €0.06 + 0.2% |
| Tap to Pay | €5 per month, unlimited number of devices | the rate of your choice above |
| Handheld feature | €5 per month per handheld | - |

- **Connecting Mollie.** The owner connects Mollie in Settings with "Connect with Mollie" and approves the
  permissions at Mollie. Mollie checks your details.
- **Card payment subscription.** You pay 12 months in advance, or per month if you already have a monthly direct debit at Jimani.
  Cancelling runs until the end of the paid period.
- **Per card terminal.** The subscription applies per linked card terminal; a Tap to Pay terminal or a Mollie Tap also counts. With 3 card terminals you pay 3 × €20 = €60 per month (excl. VAT); the invoice says "Card payment subscription (3 × €20.00)". The subscription counts at least one device.
- **Card terminals.** You order the PAX A35 (fixed, with cable) and the PAX A920-PRO (wireless) in the
  Jimani webshop. Jimani sets the device up on your Mollie account. In the POS settings you choose
  which card terminal that POS uses for payment.
- **Tap to Pay.** Card payments on a handheld or Android tablet with the Mollie Tap app. On a fixed POS screen
  it does not work. You link the device with a QR code under Settings > Till and products > Tills
  and equipment.
- **Tips.** With card payments you can add a tip just as with cash; the amount and tip go together to the
  device.

**Example:** With the card payment subscription and a payment of €50 you pay €0.06 + €0.10 = €0.16 in
transaction costs. Without a subscription that is €0.75.

**Related questions:**

- What does a card terminal cost via Jimani?
- How much do I pay per card transaction?
- What does Tap to Pay cost?
- Is the card payment subscription worth it?
- What does paying with the phone as a card terminal cost?

**Keywords:** card payment costs, card payment subscription, mollie card rate, card terminal POS, tap to pay, card transaction costs

**Related:** [What does an extra POS, handheld, kitchen screen or buzzer cost?](../../prijzen/faq/extra-kassa-handheld-keukenscherm.md)

---

# Does the Jimani POS meet the requirements of the Belastingdienst (Dutch Tax Authority)?

**Answer:** Jimani is built according to the Belastingdienst's guidance for a reliable checkout system.
Every sale goes into a cash register journal that can no longer be changed, the lines are
chained together, and you download an audit file (XAA) for the Belastingdienst. Jimani has no (yet)
quality mark.

**Explanation:**

- **Cash register journal.** Every closed receipt, payment and event goes into the journal. A closed
  receipt can no longer be changed or deleted by the database. A paid receipt cannot be
  crossed out; for that you use Refund.
- **Chain.** Each line gets a code that includes the previous line. This way any later change stands out.
  Each POS also has its own continuous sequence number.
- **Events.** Opening the drawer, logging out, the X report, deposits, withdrawals and partial payments
  are also in the journal.
- **Check.** On Day closing there is the Cash register journal button: "Chain intact" or the location of a break,
  plus gaps per POS. Jimani also checks the chain every night.
- **Audit file.** On Day closing you download the Auditfile Afrekensystemen (XAA 3.2) for a period.
  Within your business only the owner can do this.
- **Practice receipt.** A practice receipt is called "*** PRACTICE RECEIPT ***" and does not count in the totals.

If you work in Germany, Austria, Belgium or France, their own rules for POS systems apply there. Jimani
does not yet support those.

**Example:** The Belastingdienst asks for the POS data for 2026. The owner chooses the period under Day closing
and downloads the XAA audit file.

**Related questions:**

- Is Jimani an approved POS system for the Belastingdienst?
- Can I change or delete a receipt afterwards in the POS?
- Does my POS comply with the POS law?
- How do I correct a wrongly paid receipt?
- Is everything I ring up kept for the accounting and inspection?

**Keywords:** POS Belastingdienst, reliable checkout system, audit file POS, xaa, cash register journal, fiscal POS

**Related:** [What is on the receipt?](wat-staat-er-op-de-kassabon.md), [How does the day closing work?](dagafsluiting-en-kas-tellen.md)

---

# What is on the receipt?

**Answer:** Every customer receipt shows the name, address, VAT number and Chamber of Commerce number of your business,
the receipt number, the date and time, the employee number and the VAT per rate. Receipt number and date cannot
be turned off.

**Explanation:**

- **Header:** name, address, VAT number and Chamber of Commerce number of the business, from your company details.
- **Lines:** the products with quantity and amount.
- **VAT:** per rate the VAT amount. This also applies to the receipt of a reservation.
- **Footer:** receipt number, date and time (your business's clock) and the employee number ("Employee: M" with a number).
- **Practice receipt:** in practice mode "*** PRACTICE RECEIPT ***" appears above the receipt and "*** PRACTICE RECEIPT - not a valid
  receipt ***" below it.

If your VAT number is empty, or consists only of punctuation, it counts as not filled in and you see an
orange notification in Help. Fill it in under your company details.

**Example:** Receipt 1042 of 14-10-2026 at 12:31, employee M5381, with 9% VAT €1.49 and 21% VAT €0.87.

**Related questions:**

- What details are on a Jimani receipt?
- Are my VAT number and Chamber of Commerce number on the receipt?
- What is at the bottom of the receipt?
- Which VAT amounts are shown on the receipt?
- Where does the employee number on the receipt come from?

**Keywords:** receipt requirements, what must be on a receipt, VAT on receipt, receipt number, hospitality receipt

**Related:** [Does the Jimani POS meet the requirements of the Belastingdienst (Dutch Tax Authority)?](eisen-belastingdienst.md)

---

# How does the day closing and counting the cash work?

**Answer:** At the day closing Jimani creates the Z receipt with the revenue per VAT rate, per payment method and
the credit notes. If "The cash is counted" is on, you then count the coins and notes at the POS and Jimani books
the difference. An interim status without closing is the X report.

**Explanation:**

- **Z receipt.** Each day closing has a sequence number per point of sale. A new Z always starts where the
  previous one ended. The amounts come from the cash register journal.
- **X report.** The example PDF of the day closing is the interim status. Opening goes into the journal.
- **Counting cash.** Turn on "The cash is counted" under Settings > Money and figures > Accounting link, tab Cash differences (off by default). That screen exists only with the Accounting link add-on (€15 per month, excl. VAT). If it is off, the Count the cash screen says so and points to Settings > Add-ons. After closing, the POS shows a counter for all
  euro coins and notes with the difference alongside. Jimani books the difference to the Cash difference account.
  Per day there is one count per cash drawer. The overview is under Settings > Money and figures > Accounting link > Cash differences.
- **Expected in the drawer.** Starting balance + cash received + deposits - withdrawals.
- **Fixed change.** With "Fixed change in the drawer" (cogwheel on the Day closing page) the counter tells you
  how much to take out, for example "leave €150". Jimani books that skimming as a withdrawal.
- **Own consumption** appears separately on the Z receipt and does not count as revenue.

**Example:** Expected is €412.50. You count €410.00. Jimani books €2.50 cash difference.

**Related questions:**

- How do I close the POS at the end of the day?
- What is a Z receipt and what is an X report?
- How do I count my POS and what if there is a difference?
- Can I view the revenue in between without closing?
- How do I turn on cash counting at the day closing?

**Keywords:** day closing POS, z receipt, x report, cash difference, count cash, change

**Related:** [How do I book money in or out of the cash drawer?](kas-storten-en-opnemen.md), [Does the Jimani POS meet the requirements of the Belastingdienst (Dutch Tax Authority)?](eisen-belastingdienst.md)

---

# How do I book money in or out of the cash drawer?

**Answer:** At the POS you choose Other > Cash. There you choose Deposit or Withdrawal, enter the amount and, for
a withdrawal, the reason. After that the drawer opens. A deposit or withdrawal does not count as revenue, but
does appear in the cash register journal.

**Explanation:**

- **Cash window.** You see today's starting balance (adjustable), the choice Deposit or Withdrawal, an
  amount field with quick amounts and a print slip Yes or No (default No).
- **Reasons for a withdrawal:** Deposit to bank, Purchasing/supplier, Tip paid out, or Other with your own
  text.
- **Permission.** By default the Owner and Manager roles may do this. If an employee does not have the permission,
  someone with the permission can enter their PIN code. The permission is called "Deposit/withdraw cash" under
  User rights (block Till and orders).
- **Fixed change.** At the cogwheel on the Day closing page, set "Fixed change in the drawer" to Yes and enter the
  amount. The first time the drawer is opened after a day closing, the POS then records the starting balance itself.
- **Day closing.** Expected in the drawer is starting balance + cash + deposits - withdrawals.

**Example:** You take €200 out of the drawer to bring to the bank. Choose Cash > Withdrawal, €200,
Deposit to bank. At the day closing the POS expects €200 less.

**Related questions:**

- How do I take money out of the cash drawer without selling?
- How do I book a cash deposit or cash withdrawal?
- How do I empty the cash drawer to deposit it at the bank?
- How do I book tips paid out or money for purchasing from the cash?
- How do I adjust the POS's starting balance?

**Keywords:** deposit cash, money out of POS, cash withdrawal, POS change, deposit to bank, cash drawer

**Related:** [How does the day closing and counting the cash work?](dagafsluiting-en-kas-tellen.md)

---

# How do I book own consumption, staff consumption or shrinkage?

**Answer:** Turn on the free Own consumption feature. At the POS the payment window then shows the
Own consumption button. You choose the type (own use, staff, on the house or shrinkage) and optionally
a reason. The receipt goes to €0: no revenue, no VAT, but less stock.

**Explanation:**

- **Turning on.** Settings > Add-ons > Own consumption (category Stock and purchasing). Free.
- **Booking.** Ring up the products and choose Own consumption in the payment window (under On account). This
  works on the web POS, the POS app and the handheld.
- **Not possible** with a return, a repair, Miscellaneous or a table with earlier rounds.
- **Permission.** The role permission "Record own consumption". It is on by default for Owner, Manager and roles
  with the POS permission; you can turn it off per role.
- **Where you see it.** The Z receipt shows own consumption separately per type, outside revenue, VAT and payment methods.
  The financial overview shows a block per type. In the webshop's financial overview, the Own consumption button opens an overview per
  type per month, with Excel and PDF. The journal contains the sales value and the cost price
  (purchase price × quantity), if you have entered purchase prices.

**Example:** An employee drinks two coffees. Book them as Own consumption > Staff. The receipt is
€0 and the coffee is deducted from stock.

**Related questions:**

- How do I book a coffee for staff without it counting as revenue?
- How do I register breakage or shrinkage in the POS?
- How do I book something on the house?
- Can I charge staff consumption at the POS for 0 euros?
- How do I take products out of stock without a sale?

**Keywords:** own consumption POS, staff consumption, on the house, shrinkage, book breakage

**Related:** [How does the day closing and counting the cash work?](dagafsluiting-en-kas-tellen.md)

---

# Does my webshop need a withdrawal button, and how does it work in Jimani?

**Answer:** If you sell at a distance to consumers, a customer must be able to withdraw from the purchase online.
That follows from Directive (EU) 2023/2673 (new Art. 11a in the Consumer Rights Directive), applicable from 19 June 2026. For this Jimani has the Withdrawal button. You
turn it on under Settings > Guests and bookings > Delivery and pickup > Webshop settings (or type "Webshop settings" in Search for a setting…), block Webshop legal rules. By default it is on for
shops and off for hospitality and treatments.

**Explanation:**

- **For the customer.** In the webshop and below the confirmation email of an order it says "Withdraw
  from contract here". The customer enters name, order number and the email address of the order, with
  an optional explanation, and chooses "Confirm withdrawal". An account is not needed. The customer immediately
  receives a confirmation with date and time.
- **Period.** 14 days after receipt. If the receipt is not known, 30 days after ordering.
- **Which orders.** Only distance orders: not the POS, the kiosk, eat here or a
  manual order.
- **For you.** You receive an email with the amount. The order shows "Withdraw" with date and time.
  You arrange the return and the refund yourself, within 14 days.
- **Terms.** Before paying, the customer sees that they agree to the terms and conditions
  which include the right of withdrawal.

Perishable products, custom-made goods and services on a fixed date are usually outside the
right of withdrawal. That is why the button is off by default for hospitality.

**Example:** A clothing shop ships a jacket. The customer withdraws on day 10 via the link in the email.
The shop sees "Withdraw" and refunds after receiving the jacket.

**Related questions:**

- Does my webshop need a withdrawal button?
- How can a customer withdraw from an online order?
- How do I turn on the withdrawal button?
- What is the new law on withdrawal for online purchases?
- Where will the Withdraw from contract here button appear?

**Keywords:** withdrawal button, right of withdrawal webshop, webshop return, art 11a, cooling-off period online

**Related:** [How does OSS VAT work in my webshop?](oss-btw.md)

---

# How does OSS VAT work in my Jimani webshop?

**Answer:** If you sell online to consumers in other EU countries for more than €10,000 per year,
you charge the VAT of the buyer's country. To do so, turn on "OSS active" under Settings >
Guests and bookings > Delivery and pickup > Webshop settings (or type "Webshop settings" in Search for a setting…). Jimani then converts the VAT and creates a quarterly report per country for your OSS return.

**Explanation:**

- **Turning on.** Settings > Guests and bookings > Delivery and pickup > Webshop settings (or type "Webshop settings" in Search for a setting…), block Webshop legal rules:
  "OSS active (VAT of the buyer's country)", Yes or No,
  default No. Below it you see how much you sold to other EU countries this year. If you reach €10,000 or
  more, the OSS report warns you; you decide yourself.
- **When it applies.** Only when shipping to another EU country. Not for the Netherlands, countries outside the
  EU, the POS or pickup.
- **What changes.** The price including VAT stays the same; only the VAT is converted to the
  country's rate (high, low or 0%). The confirmation email and the invoice show for example "VAT DE
  19%".
- **Report.** In the financial overview (Settings > Money and figures > Reports) there is the button "Foreign VAT report (OSS)": per year and quarter, per country and rate the revenue excl. VAT, the
  VAT, the revenue incl. VAT and the number of orders. Downloadable as CSV. Only paid, non-cancelled
  and non-withdrawn orders count.
- **Return.** You file that yourself via the OSS portal of the Belastingdienst. A refund in a later
  quarter you correct in that quarter.

**Example:** A customer in Germany buys for €119 incl. VAT. With OSS on, that is €100 + €19 VAT
(DE 19%) instead of NL 21%.

**Related questions:**

- How does VAT work when selling to customers in other EU countries?
- What is OSS and do I need to turn it on?
- From what amount do I have to charge the VAT of the buyer's country?
- How do I file my OSS return?
- Can I have foreign VAT calculated automatically in my webshop?

**Keywords:** oss vat webshop, foreign vat webshop, one stop shop, eu vat sales, 10000 euro threshold

**Related:** [Does my webshop need a withdrawal button?](herroepingsknop.md)

---

# Which pricing model can I choose for an activity: price per time or price per person?

**Answer:** Per activity you choose between Price per time (the price depends on the chosen duration and the date, per lane or location) and Price per person (each guest pays their own price, with up to five price lines such as adults and children). The Activities module has no monthly fee.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Activities management and open the Products tab. Click the plus button at the top right and choose Products. In the Products window choose Main product.
- **Step 2.** Under Choose a product type, choose between Price per time and Price per person.
- **Price per time.** You choose which Time blocks (durations) the product has, set a price per time block per date (see [How do I set the price per duration?](prijs-per-tijdsblok-instellen.md)) and set Extra time between reservation and Can be booked per?. The price on a reservation is the price of the chosen duration on that date, multiplied by the number of chosen locations (lanes). Booking two lanes is therefore twice the price.
- **Price per person.** You enter one or more prices. The names of the price lines (for example Adults or Children) come from your widget's settings. The amount is per person and includes VAT. The price of a reservation is the number of guests per price line times that price.
- **Step 3.** Link the product to an activity: open Activities management > Activities, choose or create the activity, and under Choose a product type choose the same type (Price per time or Price per person) and the product. See [How do I add an activity?](activiteit-toevoegen.md).
- **Additions.** An Extra product (for example a drink or rental equipment) or Transaction costs are added to the price. See [How do extra products and transaction costs work?](extra-product-en-transactiekosten.md).
- **How the price appears in the widget.** In the widget (View tab, Activities block) you use Show price as to choose whether the guest sees the price per person (the amount divided by the number of people) or the total the group pays together.
- **VAT.** For each product you choose a Product group (VAT group). The prices for Price per person, Extra product and Transaction costs include VAT.

![The Activities management screen with the tabs Opening times, Activities, Products, Fields, Locations, Crowd reduction and Time limitation](/kennisbank/beelden/prijsmodellen-per-tijd-of-per-persoon-1.webp)

**Example:** A padel court with Price per time has the time blocks 60 minutes and 90 minutes, with its own price per date. A guest who books two courts for 90 minutes pays twice the price of 90 minutes on that date. A children's party with Price per person has two price lines: Adults and Children. With 3 adults and 8 children, the price counts 3 times the first and 8 times the second.

**Related questions:**

- Can I charge a price per person, with separate prices for children?
- What is the difference between price per time and price per person?
- Does the activities module cost a monthly fee?
- How do I charge a price per hour per lane?

**Keywords:** price per person activity, price per hour lane, pricing model activities, price per time, price children adults, lane rental rate

**Related:** [How do I set the price per duration?](prijs-per-tijdsblok-instellen.md), [How do extra products and transaction costs work?](extra-product-en-transactiekosten.md), [What does Jimani cost?](../../prijzen/faq/wat-kost-jimani.md)

---

# How do I set the price per duration with time blocks?

**Answer:** For a product with Price per time you turn on the durations you want to sell (the Time blocks) and then enter a price per date for each time block. You can do this in the price table itself or via Excel: first export, fill in and import again. The price table covers this year, next year and the year after.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Activities management > Products, click the plus button at the top right and choose Products > Main product > Price per time. Enter the Name and choose the Product group (VAT group).
- **Step 2.** Under Time blocks, turn on the durations you want to offer. The list runs from 5 minutes (in steps of 5 minutes up to 55 minutes), via 1 hour, 75 minutes, 90 minutes and 1 hour 45 minutes up to 24 hours, then from 1 to 31 days, from 1 to 12 months and 1 year. If you turn none on, you get the message Select at least one time.
- **Is the duration not there?** Click the plus button below the time blocks. This opens the Manage the time settings window, where each duration has a Yes/No button that saves immediately. You will also find the same overview under Settings > Guests and bookings > Time blocks.
- **Step 3.** Under Extra time between reservation choose how much time you keep free after a booking (for example to clean) and under Can be booked per? at which minutes a guest may start. If you set this to 15 minutes, starting is only possible at :00, :15, :30 and :45. If you set it to 1 hour, only on the full hour.
- **Step 4.** In the last step you choose the year with the year buttons and see a table with all dates of that year and a column per time block turned on. Enter the price in each cell.
- **Quick fill with Excel.** Click the Excel icon to export the prices of all three years. Fill in the prices in Excel, choose the file via Select Excel file and click the import icon. The first column contains the date, the following columns the prices in the same order as the time blocks. Amounts such as 25.50 or €25.50 are read correctly. After importing you get Data has been applied; then save with Save.
- **When booking.** In the dashboard a staff member chooses a Duration from the product's time blocks. In the widget the guest also chooses the duration themselves, unless you set Let guest choose duration to No in the widget (View tab, Activities block): the widget then uses the activity's first duration. Jimani takes the price of that time block on the chosen date. If there is no price for that date, you see the message The price amount is not configured for this date. at the reservation.

![The Time blocks page with a Yes/No button for each duration](/kennisbank/beelden/prijs-per-tijdsblok-instellen-1.webp)

**Example:** You offer 60 and 90 minutes. In the table you set 60 minutes to 28 and 90 minutes to 40 for Saturday, and 24 and 34 for weekdays. A guest who books 90 minutes on Saturday sees 40 per lane.

**Related questions:**

- How do I set prices for an hour, two hours or a day?
- Can I fill in and import prices per date in Excel?
- Where do I choose which durations I sell?
- How do I change the price for a specific day?

**Keywords:** price per hour, price per duration, time blocks, import prices excel, price table activity, price per date, rate per day

**Related:** [Which pricing model can I choose for an activity?](prijsmodellen-per-tijd-of-per-persoon.md), [How do Time blocks work in Settings?](../naslag/tijdsblokken.md)

---

# Can I offer rental and equipment with an activity and ask for a deposit?

**Answer:** Yes, you can offer equipment with an activity in two ways: as an Extra product that you link to the activity, or as a separate activity that acts as an extra product (for example shoes or bikes with their own quantity). Jimani does not have a separate security deposit setting with refund for activities. You can, however, have an amount paid in advance that is fully settled on arrival.

**Explanation:**

- **Option 1: Extra product.** Create an Extra product (Activities management > Products > plus button > Products > Extra product) with Name, Description, optionally a photo, the Price and the Product group (VAT group). Set Show in widget to Yes if guests may choose it online (you only see that choice if the Online reservations add-on is on). Then set Add extra products to Yes on the activity and in the next step choose the extra products under Product list. Guests choose the quantity when reserving.
- **Option 2: an activity as an extra product.** Create an activity with Price per time, for example Rent shoes. Create a Location for each item (Shoes 1, Shoes 2, and so on; you can create up to 50 at once) and link those locations to the activity. Set Acts as extra product to Yes on the activity.
- **How that works when reserving.** If you make a reservation for another activity in the dashboard, you see the activity as an extra product with a quantity. You cannot choose more than the number of free locations of that activity in that time period. The price is the price of that activity's product for the same duration and date as the main reservation. If that product has no price for that duration, it shows 0.
- **Paying in advance and settling.** Set Is this a deposit? to Yes on the activity. The screen states that this product is fully credited when the guest arrives. You only see this part if the Products and down payments add-on is on and a main product has been chosen for the activity.
- **Security deposit.** There is no Deposit field and no function to refund a security deposit separately. So you arrange a security deposit outside Jimani, or as a regular Extra product that you settle yourself.

**Example:** A bike rental has the activity Rent bike with Price per time and 10 locations (Bike 1 through Bike 10). A guest books a boat tour in the dashboard and adds two bikes. There are 10 bikes, of which 3 are already rented in that time period, so you can choose at most 7.

**Related questions:**

- Can I rent out shoes or bikes with an activity?
- Can I ask for a security deposit for rented items?
- How do I have guests pay an amount in advance?
- How do I offer equipment as an extra product?

**Keywords:** rental equipment, activity rental, security deposit, deposit amount, extra product, link equipment, rent bikes, rent shoes

**Related:** [How do extra products and transaction costs work?](extra-product-en-transactiekosten.md), [How do I set up locations and capacity?](locaties-en-capaciteit.md), [Which pricing model can I choose for an activity?](prijsmodellen-per-tijd-of-per-persoon.md)

---

# Can I set a minimum age or other restrictions for an activity?

**Answer:** Jimani has no fixed age check: the system does not verify age. You can handle it with two settings, however: a field of the type Terms and conditions that the guest must tick (with your text, for example "I am 16 years or older"), and the minimum and maximum number of guests per reservation.

**Explanation:**

- **Having age or rules confirmed.** In Activities management > Fields create a new field with the type Terms and conditions. Put the sentence the guest ticks under Explanation and the link to your rules under The link to the Terms and conditions. Set Required to Yes and Show in widget to Yes. In the widget the guest can only continue once the box is ticked. Link the field to the activity, under Fields in the activity's window.
- **Informing only.** If you only want to have something read, for example "From 12 years, under 16 only with supervision", create a field of the type Label. The guest sees the text but fills in nothing.
- **Asking for a date of birth or a choice.** Use the types Date, Radio button or Text box. Jimani does not check the answer; you see it in the reservation and can refuse the guest if necessary.
- **Number of guests.** In the activity's window you set Minimum number of guests and Maximum quantity of guests per reservation. The widget only shows the activity for a suitable number of guests.
- **Location and time.** Which locations an activity may use you set under Location; when booking is not possible you set with a [Time limitation](tijdsbeperking-tijdvak-blokkeren.md).

![The Fields tab in Activities management with the list of fields](/kennisbank/beelden/minimumleeftijd-en-restricties-1.webp)

**Example:** A climbing park sets the field "I am 14 years or older, or go along with an adult" (type Terms and conditions, Required Yes) on the activity High ropes course and sets Minimum number of guests to 1 and Maximum quantity of guests to 6.

**Related questions:**

- Can I set a minimum age for an activity?
- How do I have guests agree to my terms when booking?
- Can I set a minimum and maximum number of people per reservation?
- Does Jimani check guests' age?

**Keywords:** minimum age activity, age limit, booking restrictions, accept terms, required tick box, minimum number of guests, required field

**Related:** [How do I let guests answer extra questions when booking?](velden-extra-vragen.md), [How do I add an activity?](activiteit-toevoegen.md)

---

# Can I add photos and videos to my activity?

**Answer:** Photos yes, videos no. For every activity, category and for the products Main product with Price per person and Extra product you can upload one image (maximum 5 MB). Uploading or embedding a video is not possible for activities; the upload box only accepts images.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Activities management > Activities and open the activity (or choose the plus button to create a new one).
- **Step 2.** Under Activity type there is the Image box with the text "Drag an image here" and the Browse button. Drag a photo into the box or click Browse. A photo larger than 5 MB is refused with the message Maximum file size: 5 MB.
- **Step 3.** You crop the photo to the 4:3 ratio. Click Save to keep the activity.
- **Where do you see the photo?** In the widget the photo appears with the activity in the list the guest chooses from, and with the category if you use Categories. In the dashboard it appears on the activity's tile.
- **Products.** For a Main product with Price per person and for an Extra product you find the same upload box. Not for Price per time and not for Transaction costs.
- **Widget background.** You set the image at the top of the widget itself in the widget, not on the activity.
- **Showing a video?** Put the video on your own website (for example on the page where you embed the widget) and let the guest watch it there first.

**Example:** An escape room uploads a photo per room. In the widget the guest sees the photo next to the name and description of the room.

**Related questions:**

- Can I put a photo on my activity?
- Can I upload a video for an activity?
- How large may an image be?
- For which parts can I add an image?

**Keywords:** photo activity, image activity, video activity, upload photo, picture for activity, widget image

**Related:** [How do I add an activity?](activiteit-toevoegen.md), [How do Categories work for activities?](categorieen-activiteiten.md)

---

# How do I add an activity in Jimani?

**Answer:** Go to Activities management, click the plus button at the top right and choose Activities. You go through the steps name and description, photo, product type and product, color and quantities, optionally extra products and transaction costs, locations and fields, and click Save at the end. Preferably create the product and the locations first, then you can link them immediately.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1: name and description.** Enter the Name (maximum 50 characters, visible for all types of reservations) and the Description (visible when reserving via the widget). If you have more languages on, you enter them per language.
- **Step 2: photo.** Optionally add an image (see [Can I add photos and videos?](foto-en-video-bij-activiteit.md)).
- **Step 3: product type and product.** Under Choose a product type choose between Price per time and Price per person, and below it choose the product. For Price per time the products are under Product list; an activity has one main product. Is the product not there yet? Use the plus button below the choice to create a new product right away.
- **Step 4: color, quantities and duration.** Choose a Color (for internal use only, so the overview per activity is easy to read), the Minimum number of guests and Maximum quantity of guests per reservation, and the Minimum time until the reservation. For Price per time choose the Duration (the reservation duration, from the product's time blocks), for Price per person the Duration of the activity.
- **Manual times.** Set Manual times may differ to Yes if you want to be able to make a shorter reservation in the dashboard than the reservation duration. Then choose the Minimum booking time. Whether a guest chooses a duration themselves in the widget, you determine in the widget with Let guest choose duration.
- **Step 5: extra products and transaction costs.** Set Add extra products and Add transaction cost to Yes if something belongs with it. You then get a step to choose them; with No the step is skipped.
- **Step 6: locations.** In the Tables step you choose under Location the locations (lanes, rooms) that belong to this activity. Choose at least one, otherwise you get the message Please select at least one table. With Add new table you create one directly.
- **Step 7: fields.** Under Fields choose the questions the guest gets when reserving. You can drag the order.
- **Saving.** After Save you see Your details have been saved! and the activity is on the Activities tab. You can change it later by clicking the tile.
- **Booking online.** Also put the activity in the widget (in the widget you choose which activities it shows) and make sure the opening times are right, otherwise there are no times to choose. See [Why does a guest see no available times?](geen-beschikbare-tijden.md).

![The Activity window with the first step: the name and the description of the activity](/kennisbank/beelden/activiteit-toevoegen-1.webp)

**Example:** You create the activity Padel 90 minutes: Price per time with the product Padel court, Duration 90 minutes, Minimum number of guests 2 and Maximum quantity of guests 4, linked to the locations Lane 1 through Lane 4.

**Related questions:**

- How do I create a new activity, such as a lane or workshop?
- Which steps do I go through when creating an activity?
- What do I need to create first before I add an activity?
- Where do I click to add an activity?

**Keywords:** add activity, new activity, create activity, add lane, create reservation type, activities management

**Related:** [How does Activities management work?](../naslag/activiteiten-beheer.md), [How does the Add or edit activity window work?](../naslag/activiteit-toevoegen-en-wijzigen.md), [Can I temporarily turn off, copy or delete an activity?](activiteit-uitzetten-kopieren-verwijderen.md)

---

# Can I temporarily turn off, copy or delete an activity?

**Answer:** Yes. Every tile in Activities management has an Actions menu with Deactivate (or Activate), Create a Copy and Send to Trash. A deactivated activity is kept, gets the label Inactive and can no longer be booked in the widget; what is in the trash you bring back with the Show only deleted items switch.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Activities management and open the Activities tab (or Products, Categories). Open the Actions menu on the tile.
- **Turning off temporarily.** Choose Deactivate. The tile turns grey with the label Inactive. All settings remain. Later choose Activate to use the activity again. This works the same for products.
- **Copying.** Choose Create a Copy and confirm with Yes at Do you want to make a copy of this item?. You get Copy created successfully. The copy gets its own name and takes over the languages, the photo, the order of the fields and the extra products; you can then adjust it, for example with a different duration.
- **Deleting.** Choose Send to Trash and confirm at Delete this object with Do you want to delete the data?. You get Successfully removed!. The activity is then not really gone: it is turned off and marked as deleted.
- **Restoring.** At the top right turn on the Show only deleted items switch. The page reloads and shows only what is in the trash (the plus button is then gone). On such a tile choose Activate to put it back. Then turn the switch off again.
- **Drag the order.** On the Activities tab (and for Categories and Locations) you can drag the tiles; the new order is saved immediately.
- **Want to know what something is linked to?** Click the i icon on the tile: you see "... is linked to the following:" with the linked products, reservation duration, fields and locations.

![The Activities tab with the activities' tiles and at the top right the Show only deleted items switch](/kennisbank/beelden/activiteit-uitzetten-kopieren-verwijderen-1.webp)

**Example:** A bike rental sets the activity Electric bike to Deactivate in winter. In spring they choose Activate and the activity is back with all prices and locations.

**Related questions:**

- How do I temporarily turn off an activity so guests cannot book it?
- Can I copy an activity instead of entering it again?
- How do I bring a deleted activity back from the trash?
- What happens to reservations if an activity is inactive?

**Keywords:** pause activity, turn off activity, hide activity, copy activity, delete activity, trash, inactive, deactivate

**Related:** [How do I add an activity?](activiteit-toevoegen.md), [How does Activities management work?](../naslag/activiteiten-beheer.md)

---

# How do I set the opening hours for my activities?

**Answer:** Go to Activities management and open the Opening times tab. Choose the year and the month, set the switch per day to Open or Closed and enter Open from and Open until; every change is saved immediately. Guests can only choose times on days that are set to Open.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** At the top choose the year (this year, next year or the year after) and then the month. You see all days of that month listed with the columns Date, Open from, Open until and Open/Closed.
- **Step 2.** For a day on which you are open, set the switch to Open and enter the times. A day that has not yet been filled in is set to Closed, with 10:00 as Open from and 21:00 as Open until as a suggestion.
- **Saving.** You do not have to press anything: changes are saved automatically, per day. If a time does not go through, you get a message and nothing is kept. For example Not saved: enter a valid time (hh:mm). or Not saved: opening and closing time are equal. Open all day? Choose 00:00 to 23:59.
- **Open until after midnight.** If Open until is before Open from (for example 11:00 to 02:00), the business closes the next day. The hours after midnight belong to the day on which you opened.
- **Filling in many days at once.** Use the Excel icon to export three years of opening times (the columns are called Opening date, Opening time, Closing time and Company open). Adjust them in Excel, choose the file via Select Excel file and click the import icon. The file must contain all days of this year, next year and the year after, otherwise you get The number of lines does not match the number of dates in this year, next year and the year after. In Excel, Opening time must be before Closing time (going past midnight is only possible on the screen itself) and you leave the Company open column as it comes out of the export, or enter 1 (open) or 0 (closed).
- **Start times.** Guests can start from the opening time, in steps of Can be booked per? (on the product), until just before the closing time. A reservation may therefore end after the closing time. Today, times that have already passed can no longer be chosen, except the quarter of an hour you are currently in.
- **Closing a whole day.** Set the day to Closed, or use a Time limitation with Day restriction. See [How do I block a time period or a whole day?](tijdsbeperking-tijdvak-blokkeren.md).

![The Opening times tab with the Open or Closed switch per day and the times Open from and Open until](/kennisbank/beelden/openingstijden-instellen-1.webp)

**Example:** You are open Tuesday through Sunday from 10:00 to 22:00 and closed on Monday. In each month you set the days Tuesday through Sunday to Open with 10:00 and 22:00, and leave Monday on Closed.

**Related questions:**

- How do I set when my activities are open?
- How do I close a day for bookings?
- How do I adjust opening times for a whole month?
- Why can't guests book on some days?

**Keywords:** opening hours activities, set opening hours, open closed, import opening hours, opening hours excel, day closed, closing time

**Related:** [Why does a guest see no available times?](geen-beschikbare-tijden.md), [How do the Opening times of Activities management work?](../naslag/openingstijden.md)

---

# Why can't a guest see available times for my activity?

**Answer:** Jimani only shows a start time when all conditions are met: the day is set to Open under Opening times, the activity is active and fits the number of guests, there is a free location with enough places, and the time does not fall within a Time limitation. Go through the list below; usually one item is missing.

**Explanation:**

- **The day is not open.** Go to Activities management > Opening times and check whether the day is set to Open with an Open from and Open until. A day set to Closed cannot be chosen in the widget, and a day you have never set up gives no times. See [How do I set the opening hours for my activities?](openingstijden-instellen.md).
- **The whole day is blocked.** A Time limitation with Day restriction set to Yes closes that day. It then cannot be chosen in the widget.
- **A time period is blocked.** A Time limitation blocks the start times between Time from and Time to, for the chosen activities and dates. Please note: if you want to block until 19:00, enter 18:59. See [How do I block a time period or a whole day for my activities?](tijdsbeperking-tijdvak-blokkeren.md).
- **The activity does not fit.** The widget only shows activities that are active, that have been selected in the widget and for which the number of guests is between Minimum number of guests and Maximum quantity of guests. A deactivated activity (label Inactive) therefore disappears.
- **No location is free.** The activity must have Locations. For the widget, each location must also have Can be reserved via widget set to Yes. A location does not count as free if there is already a reservation on it in that time period, including the Extra time between reservation. If the number of guests does not fit in one location, Jimani combines several free locations until there are enough places; if that does not work, the time is not available.
- **The start time itself.** The times follow the step of Can be booked per? on the product, starting at the opening time. Times today that have already passed disappear; the quarter of an hour you are in right now remains available.
- **No price for that date.** If the product has no price under Price per time for that date and duration, you see The price amount has not been configured for this date. at the reservation. Enter the price, see [How do I set the price per duration with time blocks?](prijs-per-tijdsblok-instellen.md).
- **Does the guest not see the day at all?** Then also check the widget itself: the activity must be ticked there.

**Example:** A guest wants a lane for 4 places on Saturday at 14:00 with 6 people. There are two lanes of 4 places, but lane 2 has Can be reserved via widget set to No. Jimani can then only use lane 1 (4 places) and does not show the time. If you set lane 2 to Yes, Jimani combines the two lanes.

**Related questions:**

- Why can't guests choose a start time for my activity?
- My activity cannot be booked online, what is wrong?
- Why is a certain time missing in the widget?
- What do I check if no times appear?

**Keywords:** no times available, time slot not visible, widget shows no times, cannot book activity, activity availability, no location available, day cannot be selected

**Related:** [How do I set the opening hours for my activities?](openingstijden-instellen.md), [How do I set up locations and capacity for my activities?](locaties-en-capaciteit.md), [How do I block a time period or a whole day for my activities?](tijdsbeperking-tijdvak-blokkeren.md)

---

# How do I set up locations and capacity for my activities?

**Answer:** A location is a lane, room, boat, bike or anything else that you rent out per time period. You create locations under Activities management > Locations, give each location a name and a Number of guests (the capacity), and link them to the activity. A location can only belong to one reservation at the same time; the capacity determines how many guests fit on it.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Activities management, click the plus button at the top right and choose Locations. You get the Locations window with the text Create a new location.
- **Step 2.** Under Number of locations enter how many locations you want to add in one go (1 to 50). For each location enter the Location name and maximum quantity of guests; the name is only visible internally (maximum 50 characters), the number of people is at least 1.
- **Step 3.** Under Can be reserved via widget choose Yes if guests may book the location online. If this is set to No, you do see the location in the dashboard, but not in the widget.
- **Step 4.** Click Save and then link the locations to your activity, in the Tables step under Location (see [How do I add an activity in Jimani?](activiteit-toevoegen.md)). In the window of an activity you can also create a location straight away with Add new table.
- **Changing the capacity.** In the list on the Locations tab, click the number of people: a minus and a plus appear, and every step is saved immediately. With the Edit button on a row you open the window where you can also change the name and Can be reserved via widget. The edit icon at the top right of the list puts the list in edit mode: you change names and numbers, tick locations to delete several at once and click Save.
- **How Jimani uses the capacity.** For a booking, Jimani first looks for the smallest free location that fits all guests. If the number of guests does not fit in one location, more free locations are used together (the largest first) until there are enough places. If too little is free in that time period, the time is not available.
- **Order.** Drag the locations in the list to change the order.
- **What is a location linked to?** Click the i icon: you see which activities the location belongs to.

![The Locations tab with the list of locations, the number of people and Can be reserved via widget](/kennisbank/beelden/locaties-en-capaciteit-1.webp)

**Example:** A bowling centre creates 8 locations (Lane 1 through Lane 8) each with Number of guests 6. A group of 10 guests gets two free lanes. A group of 5 gets one lane.

**Related questions:**

- How do I set how many people fit on a lane or in a room?
- What is a location in activities?
- Can two reservations be on the same lane at the same time?
- How do I link a lane to an activity?

**Keywords:** add location, add lane, set capacity, number of people per lane, create lanes, add room, maximum number of guests

**Related:** [How do I add an activity in Jimani?](activiteit-toevoegen.md), [Why can't a guest see available times for my activity?](geen-beschikbare-tijden.md), [How do the Locations of Activities management work in Jimani?](../naslag/locaties.md)

---

# How do I block a time period or a whole day for my activities?

**Answer:** Use a Time limitation: go to Activities management > Time limitation, click the plus button and choose Time limitation. Enter a name, choose Day restriction Yes (whole day) or No (time period), choose the activities and the dates, and click Save. Guests can then no longer start in that time period.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1: name and type.** Under Name enter a name (only visible internally, for example "Staff outing"). Under Day restriction choose: Yes for the whole day, No for a time period. The window is called Create a new time block.
- **Whole day (Yes).** You do not need to choose times or activities: the limitation applies to the whole day for all activities. Continue to the dates. Guests cannot choose that day in the widget.
- **Time period (No).** Enter Time from and Time to. Please note: if you want to block something until 19:00, enter 18:59. The block stops the start times that fall between Time from and Time to (up to and including that last time). If the time period runs past midnight (for example 20:31 to 01:30), you see +1 day and it also applies to the tail end on the following day. Time from and Time to may not be the same; for a whole day choose Day restriction Yes.
- **Step 2: activities.** Under Activity type choose which activities the time period applies to. If you choose none, you get Please select at least one ticket type.
- **Step 3: dates.** In the calendar click the days, weeks or months on which the limitation applies and use the arrows for other years. Without a date you get Select a date.
- **Saving.** Click Save. The overview shows the columns Name, Date, Blocking of, Block up to and Ticket type. A limitation with more than one date shows More than one date has been selected.
- **Changing or deleting.** Click the limitation in the overview. In the window you can change everything and save, or click Delete and confirm with Are you sure?.

![The Time limitation tab with the list of time limitations](/kennisbank/beelden/tijdsbeperking-tijdvak-blokkeren-1.webp)

**Example:** Because of illness you can handle fewer lanes on Saturday between 14:00 and 17:00. You create the Time limitation "Illness Saturday" with Day restriction No, Time from 14:00 and Time to 16:59, choose the activity Bowling and the date of that Saturday. Guests can no longer start between 14:00 and 16:59 that afternoon.

**Related questions:**

- How do I block an afternoon because I have too little staff?
- How do I close a whole day for one activity?
- How do I make sure guests can no longer start in a certain time period?
- Where do I create a time limitation?

**Keywords:** time limitation, block time period, day closed activity, block staff shortage, stop reservations, closed for holiday, block for cleaning

**Related:** [Why can't a guest see available times for my activity?](geen-beschikbare-tijden.md), [How does the Time limitation of Activities management work in Jimani?](../naslag/tijdsbeperking.md)

---

# How do I prevent too many guests arriving at the same time (crowd reduction)?

**Answer:** You spread the crowds with the capacity of your Locations, the Extra time between reservation and a Time limitation: Jimani only offers a time if there is a free location with enough places. In addition you have the Crowd reduction tab, where you enter a maximum number of reservations per arrival time. Do not use that tab as your only measure, because the available times of activities do not take it into account at the moment.

**Explanation:**

- **Capacity via locations.** Each Location can only belong to one reservation in a time period. So do not create more locations than you can serve at the same time. See [How do I set up locations and capacity for my activities?](locaties-en-capaciteit.md).
- **Time between reservations.** On the product set Extra time between reservation (for example 15 minutes) and set Can be booked per? to a larger step, so guests do not all arrive at the same moment.
- **Closing a busy period.** Block a time period or a whole day with a Time limitation, see [How do I block a time period or a whole day for my activities?](tijdsbeperking-tijdvak-blokkeren.md).
- **The Crowd reduction tab.** Go to Activities management > Crowd reduction, click the plus button and choose Crowd reduction. Enter a Name (only visible internally), under Activity type choose the activities the limitation applies to, and then enter the Maximum number of reservations per time. With the fields in the header you fill in all times at once. Click Save.
- **Changing.** Click the limitation in the overview and change the numbers. The overview shows the columns Name and Activities.
- **Intended for.** The screen says: "This prevents too many guests or reservations from coming in at the same moment, and spreads the crowds more."

![The Crowd reduction tab with the list of crowd reductions](/kennisbank/beelden/druktebeperking-wachtrij-1.webp)

**Example:** You have 6 lanes, but only two staff members who can receive guests. You create 6 locations with Number of guests 6, set Extra time between reservation to 15 minutes and use a Time limitation to block the peak hours when you have too little staff.

**Related questions:**

- How do I prevent too many people coming at the same time?
- Can I set a maximum number of reservations per start time?
- How do I spread the crowds over the day?
- Is the crowd reduction tab enough to prevent too many guests?

**Keywords:** crowd reduction, queue limit, too many guests at once, spread crowds, maximum number of reservations, peak hours, staff shortage

**Related:** [How do I set up locations and capacity for my activities?](locaties-en-capaciteit.md), [How do I block a time period or a whole day for my activities?](tijdsbeperking-tijdvak-blokkeren.md), [How does the Crowd reduction of Activities management work in Jimani?](../naslag/druktebeperking.md)

---

# How do I create a reservation for an activity in the dashboard?

**Answer:** In the left menu open Activities (the timeline) and click Create reservation at the top right, or click an empty box on the timeline. A side panel opens with the tabs Reservation, Fields, Products and Totals. Choose the activity, the number of guests, the time and the location, enter the guest details and click Save or Pay.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1: starting.** Click an empty box on the timeline (next to the mouse you see a green box with a plus and Create reservation) and the lane, date and time are already filled in. Or click Create reservation at the top right and choose everything yourself.
- **Step 2: activity and guests.** Under Activities choose the activity (without a choice you get Select an Activity Type). Enter the number of guests per price line, with the names from your widget (for example Adults and Children); with the plus button under a line the next line is added.
- **Step 3: time.** Choose the Date and under From the start time. To and Duration go together: if you choose a Duration, Jimani fills in To. For an activity with Manual times may differ: Yes, the Duration may be shorter than the reservation duration, down to the Minimum booking time. In the full screen (Add reservation) the clock icon opens Available times, a list of the times that are free.
- **Step 4: location.** Under Locations the chosen lane is shown. Click the edit icon to open Available locations, tick one or more locations (or choose Select all) and click Save. If it says No location available, nothing is free in that time period.
- **Step 5: guest.** Enter the guest details that Jimani shows and choose the Guest's language. Set Passer-by (no guest details) to Yes for a guest without details; the field Reservation name then appears, the only name you enter. Set Check in now to Yes if the guest is already there; the reservation then immediately gets the status Arrived. In the full screen you can look up an existing guest with Search (the Find guests window).
- **Step 6: products and fields.** On the Products tab you see the main product with the price, the extra products and any transaction costs. On the Fields tab you answer the extra questions and you can add an Internal memo. On Totals you find the bill: Total amount, Total paid and Outstanding amount.
- **Step 7: save or pay.** Save stores the reservation. Pay opens the choice Cash, Pay later or Other. Cash shows the Return amount; with Other the payment is recorded as paid; with Pay later the reservation is recorded without payment, with the choices Remain in Pay Later status and Send email with Invoice. If Passer-by (no guest details) is set to No, you must fill in the required guest details and when saving Jimani asks What action should be taken? with Send email or No email.

**Example:** A guest calls for Saturday 14:00 with 4 people. You click the empty box of Lane 2 at 14:00, choose the activity Bowling, set Adults to 4, enter the Reservation name and click Save. The guest pays later on arrival.

**Related questions:**

- How do I book an activity myself for a customer who calls?
- How do I create a reservation on the timeline?
- Can I have the guest pay straight away for a manual reservation?
- What details do I enter for a new reservation?

**Keywords:** create reservation activity, create reservation, reserve lane, manual booking, add reservation, check in guest, check in now, walk-in guest

**Related:** [How do I change, move or cancel a reservation for an activity?](reservering-wijzigen-verplaatsen-annuleren.md), [How do I see my reservations for activities per day, week or month?](reserveringen-bekijken.md), [How does the Create and change reservation screen work for Activities?](../naslag/reservering-aanmaken-en-wijzigen.md)

---

# How do I change, move or cancel a reservation for an activity?

**Answer:** Click the reservation on the timeline or in a list: the Reservation information window opens. There you change details with Edit details or Open reservation, set the status to Arrived or Left, and cancel with Cancel. To move a reservation to another lane or time, drag the block on the timeline.

**Explanation:**

- **Opening.** Click the block on the timeline or a row in the List view. At the top are the status and the guest's details; at the bottom the buttons.
- **Edit details.** Click Edit details to change the guest details, the language and the remark. With Open reservation (where that button is shown) you open the full Update reservation screen, with Arrival date, Departure date, From, To, Duration, Locations, Products and the Internal memo.
- **Internal memo.** On the Overview tab there is an Internal memo with its own Save button.
- **Moving.** Drag the block on the timeline to another lane or time. While dragging, a preview block shows whether the spot is valid; do not let go on a spot where it does not fit. If the reservation belongs to a combination, the other part moves along if it fits.
- **Guest is here.** Click Arrived when the guest is here and later Left. The status goes from Waiting for guest to Arrived and Left. If the reservation is still on Waiting for guest while the start time has passed, the buttons Set to No-show and Set to No-show in 30 minutes appear.
- **Cancelling.** Click Cancel at the bottom left. You get the question Cancel booking? with a field Reason for cancellation. If the setting Reason required when cancelling is set to No, you only get Are you sure you want to cancel the reservation?. Who cancelled is always recorded. A reservation that is already Arrived or Left can no longer be cancelled; the button is then off or gone.
- **Payments and receipts.** Under More you find Cash, Pay later and Other (as long as there is an outstanding amount), Send email, Print receipt and Print (PDF). Order opens the order page if the guest has arrived.
- **What else do you see?** The tabs Attachment(s), History, Email History, Tickets and Reservation list are only there if there is something in them.
- **Automatic.** In the Advanced settings of Activities you find Automatically check in at start time, Automatically check out at end time, A reservation may overlap a running reservation and Reason required when cancelling.

**Example:** A guest calls to say they will arrive an hour later. You open the reservation on the timeline, drag the block one hour to the right on the same lane and let go. The reservation is now an hour later.

**Related questions:**

- How do I move a reservation to another lane or time?
- How do I cancel a guest's booking?
- How do I change the details of a reservation?
- How do I set a guest to arrived or left?

**Keywords:** change activity reservation, move reservation, cancel reservation, guest arrived, no-show, drag reservation timeline, edit details

**Related:** [How do I create a reservation for an activity in the dashboard?](reservering-maken.md), [How do I see unpaid reservations and no-shows for my activities?](onbetaald-en-no-show.md), [How do I see my reservations for activities per day, week or month?](reserveringen-bekijken.md)

---

# How do I let guests answer extra questions when booking?

**Answer:** Create a field under Activities management > Fields and link it to the activity. A field is a question or text when booking: a text box, a drop-down, a date, a checkbox for your terms and more. You decide whether it is required and whether the guest sees it themselves in the widget or only you do when booking manually.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Activities management, click the plus button at the top right and choose Fields. The window is called Create a new field.
- **Step 2: Extra field.** Tick the activities the field applies to (or choose Select all). Without a choice you get Please select at least one ticket type.
- **Step 3: Field type.** Choose the Type. The options are: Text box, Large text box, Time slot, Timefield list with quantity, Date, Arrival or end date (+/- days), Checkbox, Selection box multiple choices, Radio button, Number field, Phone, Drop-down, Label, Link, Terms and conditions and Delivery cost field.
- **Step 4: Name and description.** Enter the Name (maximum 50 characters) and an Explanation: that is the light grey text in the field itself. For a Drop-down, Radio button or Selection box multiple choices you enter the Options, one per line. If you put XXX at the end of a line, that option is preselected.
- **Step 5: Settings.** The Label is the tag of the field; if you leave it empty, Jimani uses the automatically generated tag. Choose Yes or No for Show field name, Required, Show when booking manually, List view and Show in widget. With List view the answer is shown in the memos of the reservation overview.
- **Step 6.** Click Save. You can also create the link from the activity, in the Fields step of the activity window; there you also drag the fields into the order you want.
- **Overview.** The Fields tab shows the columns Name, Label, Type, Required, List view, Manual reservation and Show in widget. You filter with Search and with Activity.
- **Dynamic.** With the Dynamic reservation fields add-on you can choose under Do you want to make this field dynamic? that a field only appears after a choice in another field: you choose the main field (Which field is the main field?) and the value (Show this field when the following is selected).
- **Special types.** With Timefield list with quantity you enter times and numbers and choose whether all times become available again when all places are full. With Arrival or end date (+/- days) you choose the Arrival date or Departure date and the number of days. With Link you enter Link to website and Link title.

![The Fields tab with the columns Name, Label, Type, Required and Show in widget](/kennisbank/beelden/velden-extra-vragen-1.webp)

**Example:** A children's party business creates the field Allergies (type Large text box, Required No, Show in widget Yes, List view Yes) and links it to Children's party. The organiser sees the question when booking and you read the answer in the memo of the reservation overview.

**Related questions:**

- How do I ask guests for their shoe size or allergy when booking?
- Can I have a box ticked for my terms?
- Can I make a question required?
- How do I create a drop-down as a question to the guest?

**Keywords:** extra question booking, add field, ask allergies, required field, customise booking form, input field, accept terms and conditions, drop-down

**Related:** [Can I set a minimum age or other restrictions for an activity?](minimumleeftijd-en-restricties.md), [What can you set under the Fields of Activities management?](../naslag/velden.md)

---

# How do I see unpaid reservations and no-shows for my activities?

**Answer:** Open the Unpaid and no-show page via Settings > Guests and bookings > Guest payments. Choose a period with Date as of and Date to, choose the Filter and click Search. You see the number of no-shows, the number of unpaid reservations and the total loss, with the guest, the activity and the amount for each reservation.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Guest payments. If you have the Activities module, the Unpaid and no-show page is there with the text Search by date range and quickly view no-shows and unpaid reservations.
- **Step 2.** Date as of is by default set to one month ago and Date to to today. With the minus and plus buttons you move one day, and the list then reloads immediately. You cannot choose a date in the future.
- **Step 3.** Under Filter choose between No-show only and Unpaid Only. Click Search.
- **What you see.** Above the list are Total 'No-show', Unpaid reservations and Total loss. The list contains Name, Email, Phone, Activity, Reservation date, Time, Total amount and Status. The status is No-show, or No-show and customer didn't pay. Click the information icon on a row to open the reservation.
- **Setting no-show.** A reservation becomes No-show when you do that in Reservation information (the buttons Set to No-show and Set to No-show in 30 minutes, as soon as the start time has passed).
- **Customer did not pay.** For a reservation without payment, in the Payment method: later window you choose the button Customer did not pay. The reservation then counts towards Unpaid reservations and Total loss.
- **No data?** Then it says No data found. If loading fails, or you do not choose a valid date, it says Unable to load data.; then try again.

**Example:** You want to know how much you missed out on in the past quarter because guests did not show up. You set Date as of to the first day of the quarter, Date to to today, choose No-show only and click Search. Under Total loss you see the amount of the no-shows that did not pay.

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see which guests did not come?
- How do I see which reservations remained unpaid?
- How much revenue do I miss because of no-shows?
- Can I look up no-shows over a certain period?

**Keywords:** no-show activities, unpaid reservations, not showing up, no-show loss, customer did not pay, unpaid overview

**Related:** [How do I change, move or cancel a reservation for an activity?](reservering-wijzigen-verplaatsen-annuleren.md), [What can you see on the Unpaid and no-show page of Activities?](../naslag/onbetaald-en-no-show.md)

---

# How do extra products and transaction costs work for an activity?

**Answer:** Besides the main product you can attach two kinds of products to an activity. An Extra product is an optional addition that the guest chooses, for example a drink or a rental item; Transaction costs are a fixed amount per reservation. You create both under Activities management > Products.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1: creating.** Click the plus button, choose Products and then Extra product or Transaction costs.
- **Extra product.** Enter Name, Description (visible when booking) and optionally a photo, set the Price (including VAT) and choose the VAT group. Set Show in widget to Yes if guests may choose it online.
- **Transaction costs.** Enter Name, Description and the Price per reservation (including VAT) and choose the VAT group.
- **Step 2: linking to the activity.** Open the activity and set Add extra products or Add transaction cost to Yes. In the next step, under Product list, you choose which extra products belong to it, or for transaction costs which product applies. If you choose No transaction cost, nothing is added. If the step is set to No, it is skipped.
- **When booking.** On the Products tab of the booking screen a staff member chooses the quantity per extra product; the price is added to the total. In the widget the guest has a step Extra products for this. You can turn that step off per widget: at the widget, on the View tab, in the Activities block, Extra products is set to Yes or No.
- **Add-on needed.** You only see Transaction costs if the Transaction costs add-on is on. See Settings > Add-ons.
- **Costs for you.** Extra products and transaction costs are not on the list of paid features. See [What does Jimani cost?](../../prijzen/faq/wat-kost-jimani.md).

**Example:** For the activity Mini golf you create the Extra product Ice cream (Price 2.50) and for Children's party the Transaction costs Booking fee (Price 1.50). A group books Mini golf with 3 ice creams; the bill shows the main product and 3 times 2.50. If they book Children's party, 1.50 is added once.

**Related questions:**

- How do I offer a drink or rental item as an extra with an activity?
- Can I charge a booking fee per booking?
- What is the difference between an extra product and transaction costs?
- Where do I create extra products?

**Keywords:** extra product activity, upsell activity, transaction costs reservation, booking fee, add a drink, addition to booking

**Related:** [Can I pass transaction costs on to my guests?](../../algemeen/faq/transactiekosten-doorberekenen.md), [Can I offer rental and equipment with an activity and ask for a deposit?](verhuur-materialen-en-borg.md), [Which pricing model can I choose for an activity: price per time or price per person?](prijsmodellen-per-tijd-of-per-persoon.md), [How do the Products of Activities management work in Jimani?](../naslag/producten.md)

---

# How do I divide my activities into categories?

**Answer:** In the Advanced settings of Activities, turn on the setting Categories for your activities. The Categories tab then appears in Activities management, where you create categories (for example sports, workshops or children's parties) and link activities to them. In the widget the guest first chooses a category and then the activity.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1: turning on.** Turn on Categories for your activities. The screen says: "If you turn this on, you can divide your activities into categories. You manage the categories in Activities management, on the Categories tab." The Categories tab sits between Opening times and Activities.
- **Step 2: creating a category.** Click the plus button at the top right and choose Categories. Enter the Name (maximum 50 characters) and the Description (visible when booking via the widget), optionally add an image and under Activity type choose which activities belong to it. If the activity is not there yet, you can create one with the plus button below the choice. Click Save.
- **Changing.** Click the category on the Categories tab; the window is called Update category. With the i icon you see which activities belong to it.
- **Searching and sorting.** Above the list choose an activity in the Activities filter to see which category it is in. Drag the tiles to set the order.
- **Turning off, copying, deleting.** The Actions menu on the tile works here too, see [Can I temporarily turn off, copy or delete an activity?](activiteit-uitzetten-kopieren-verwijderen.md).

**Example:** An amusement park creates the categories Water fun, Quiet and Children's parties and links each activity to one of them. In the widget the guest first chooses Water fun and then sees only the water sports.

**Related questions:**

- How do I group my activities, for example sports and children's parties?
- Why don't I see the Categories tab?
- Can the guest first choose a type of activity in the widget?
- How do I link activities to a category?

**Keywords:** activity categories, divide activities, groups of activities, add category, choose category widget

**Related:** [How do I add an activity in Jimani?](activiteit-toevoegen.md), [How do the Categories of Activities management work in Jimani?](../naslag/categorieen.md)

---

# How do I see my reservations for activities per day, week or month?

**Answer:** In the left menu open Activities. There you find the tabs Overview (the timeline per lane), List view (one day), Weekly list, Last 100 reservations, Upcoming reservations and Totals; at the top choose the date and filter by status or activity. You can print the lists or export them to Excel.

**Explanation:**

- **Overview.** The timeline with the blocks of the reservations per location. Choose the day with the minus and plus button, filter with All activities on one activity, and use the cog View timeline to decide what the blocks look like (Normal, Compact or Extra compact, the number per location, the text size, the grid lines). Click a block to open Reservation information. Cancelled reservations are not on the timeline.
- **List view.** Overview of reservations on: the chosen day, with columns such as Reservation status, Date, Arrival time, Departure date, Departure Time, Name, Quantity, Activity, Duration, Locations, Payment, Created and Memo. The Payment is Paid or Unpaid.
- **Weekly list.** The same columns for the week, from the first to the last day.
- **Last 100 reservations.** The List of the last 100 reservations.
- **Upcoming reservations.** Under Reservation for the month: choose the month you want to see; months in the past are off. The list has pages with Back and Next.
- **Totals.** Day totals and Week totals as cards: per activity the number of guests per price line (Adults, Children, and so on) and the Total.
- **Filtering.** Above the lists you choose Select status and Select Type, and you turn on Hide "Guest left" or Hide "Guest arrived" to leave out those reservations.
- **Choose columns.** The filter icon opens Visible columns: set a column to No to hide it; your choice is remembered.
- **Print and Excel.** With the printer icon (Print) you print exactly what the view shows; with the Excel icon you export the list.

**Example:** At the start of the day you open the List view, turn on Hide "Guest left" and print the list with Print. That gives you a list of who is still coming or is here.

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see all reservations of today?
- How do I view this week's reservations?
- Can I print the reservation list or export it to Excel?
- How do I filter reservations by status or activity?

**Keywords:** view reservations, daily overview activities, weekly list, upcoming reservations, print reservations, timeline, total guests

**Related:** [How do I create a reservation for an activity in the dashboard?](reservering-maken.md), [How do I change, move or cancel a reservation for an activity?](reservering-wijzigen-verplaatsen-annuleren.md), [How does the Activities screen with the timeline and the lists work in Jimani?](../naslag/reserveringsoverzicht.md)

---

# How does Activities management work in Jimani?

**Answer:** Activities management is where you set up everything for your activities: opening hours, activities, products, fields, locations and limitations. You open it via the left menu. At the top are tabs; with the plus button at the top right you add something new and with the Actions menu on a tile you turn something off, copy it or remove it.

**Where to find it:** Left menu > Activities management (`/Activities`)

**Explanation:** The tabs are Opening times, Categories (only if you have the setting Categories for your activities on), Activities, Products, Fields, Locations, Crowd reduction and Time limitation. With the plus button at the top right the Activities window opens with a tile for each part: Categories, Activities, Products, Fields, Locations, Crowd reduction and Time limitation. A tile in the overview opens the details so you can change them. The i icon on a tile shows which other parts it is connected to. You change the order of activities, categories and locations by dragging them. In the POS module the menu item Activities management is only there if the Activities add-on is on; the permission is called Activities overview in Users and permissions.

![The Activities management screen with the tabs Opening times, Activities, Products, Fields, Locations, Crowd reduction and Time limitation](/kennisbank/beelden/activiteiten-beheer-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Opening times | The tab to set each day to open or closed. | First, otherwise there are no times to book. | See [Opening times](openingstijden.md). |
| Activities | The tab with the activities that guests book. On the screen: "View all activities here. Add new activities with the Add button, or edit existing activities. Link all types of products, locations, and fill in important details." The Product filter shows the activities of one product. | For creating and changing activities. | See [Add or change an activity](activiteit-toevoegen-en-wijzigen.md). |
| Products | The tab with the products, with the filters Activity and Product types. | For prices and extra products. | See [Products](producten.md). |
| Fields | The tab with the questions to the guest, with the filters Search and Activity. | For extra information when booking. | See [Fields](velden.md). |
| Locations | The tab with the lanes and spaces and their capacity. | For availability. | See [Locations](locaties.md). |
| Crowd reduction | The tab with maximums per arrival time. | For spreading the crowds. | See [Crowd reduction](druktebeperking.md). |
| Time limitation | The tab to block a time period or day. | For a staff shortage or a cleaning moment. | See [Time limitation](tijdsbeperking.md). |
| Categories | The tab to group activities. | Only if the setting is on. | See [Categories](categorieen.md). |
| Show only deleted items | The switch at the top right shows only what is in the trash; the plus button then disappears. | To get something back with Activate. | The page reloads. Turn the switch off again afterwards. |
| Actions | The menu on a tile with Deactivate (or Activate), Create a Copy and Send to Trash. | To turn a tile off, copy it or delete it. | See [Turn off, copy, delete](../faq/activiteit-uitzetten-kopieren-verwijderen.md). |
| Inactive | The label on a tile that is off. | Information. | The tile is then grey and cannot be booked. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I set up everything for my activities?
- Which tabs does the management of activities have?
- How do I quickly add something new in the management?
- How do I turn something off or copy it?

**Keywords:** activities management, set up activities, activities tabs, add activity, deleted items, activities menu

**Related:** [How do I add an activity in Jimani?](../faq/activiteit-toevoegen.md), [How do I set the opening hours for my activities?](../faq/openingstijden-instellen.md), [How does the Activities screen with the timeline and the lists work in Jimani?](reserveringsoverzicht.md)

---

# How does the Add or change activity window work in Jimani?

**Answer:** In this window you create an activity (for example Pool, Padel or Children's party) or change one. You choose the name, the photo, the pricing model with the product, the colour, the number of guests, the duration, the extra products, the locations and the fields. The window is called Add activity or Change activity and consists of steps with Previous, Next and Save.

**Where to find it:** Activities management > Activities tab > plus button > Activities, or click a tile to change it (`/Activities`)

**Explanation:** An activity is what the guest books. It belongs to one main product (Price per time or Price per person), has locations, and can have extra products, transaction costs and fields. The steps are: Activity type (name, description, photo), Type and category (product type and product), Colour, numbers and duration, optionally Extra products and Transaction costs, Tables (locations) and Fields. You only get a step for extra products or transaction costs if you set them to Yes. The step-by-step version is in [How do I add an activity in Jimani?](../faq/activiteit-toevoegen.md).

![The Activity window with name, description and image](/kennisbank/beelden/activiteit-toevoegen-en-wijzigen-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name | The name of the activity, maximum 50 characters, per language. On the screen: "Enter a name. The name is visible for all types of reservations." | Always; the guest and you see this name everywhere. | Required. |
| Description | The text the guest sees with the activity in the widget. On the screen: "Enter a description. The description is visible while booking via the widget." | To explain what the guest gets. | Can be filled in per language. |
| Choose a product type | Chooses the pricing model: Price per time or Price per person. On the screen: "Select the product type that applies to the activity." | When creating; it determines which product you can link and which fields you see. | If you switch type, also choose a product of that type. |
| Price per person | The price depends on the number of guests per price line (see the product). You choose one product and a fixed Duration. | For children's parties, workshops, guided tours. | See [Which pricing model can I choose?](../faq/prijsmodellen-per-tijd-of-per-persoon.md). |
| Product list | The list of products of the chosen type. On the screen: "Select the products that belong to this activity. Several products can be selected." With the plus button you create a new product. | To choose the main product of the activity. | An activity stores one main product. |
| Acts as extra product | Sets the activity itself as an optional extra product for other activities. On the screen: "This product can be set as an extra product. When this option is enabled, it can be added together with a main product during the booking or ordering process as an optional addition." | For equipment that you rent out per piece (shoes, bikes). | See [Rental and equipment](../faq/verhuur-materialen-en-borg.md). Works for manual booking in the dashboard. |
| Is this a deposit? | The product is paid in advance and fully credited on arrival. On the screen: "Indicate whether this product is a deposit or not. If it is, this product will be fully credited when the guest arrives." | If you want part of the amount paid in advance. | Only visible with the Products and down payments add-on and when a main product has been chosen. |
| Pay afterwards | Does not let the guest pay when booking. On the screen: "When Payment not required in widget is active, the guest does not have to make a payment while booking. The guest then only sees an overview of the total costs that still have to be paid on arrival. This can be useful for higher amounts." | If you want guests to pay on site. | In this window the block is hidden. The choice works via Pay afterwards in the settings of the widget. |
| QR tickets at the till | After paying at the till, the receipt printer prints a ticket with a QR code per lane. On the screen: "After paying at the till, a ticket with a QR code comes out of the receipt printer per lane." | If guests must enter at the lane with a QR code. | Yes or No. |
| Colour | The colour of the activity in the overview. On the screen: "The colour is for internal use only. Preferably use as many different colours as possible, so that the reservation overview is shown clearly and neatly per activity." | Choose a different colour for each activity. | Internal only. |
| Minimum number of guests | The smallest number of guests per reservation. On the screen: "Indicate the minimum number of guests per reservation." | If a group must be at least a certain number of people. | The widget only shows the activity for a fitting number. |
| Maximum quantity of guests | The largest number of guests per reservation. On the screen: "Indicate the maximum number of guests per reservation." | To keep out groups that are too large. | Must be at least the minimum. |
| Minimum time until the reservation | The shortest period between booking and coming. On the screen: "When may the guest book? Usually a guest can place a reservation straight away, for example within 10 minutes for a bowling lane or padel court. In some cases, however, it is necessary to know a few hours or even days in advance who is coming. Think of children's parties." | Choose the period that suits your activity. | The choices run from 00:00 (immediately) in quarters of an hour up to 23:45, then 1 to 6 days and 1 to 4 weeks. |
| Duration | The duration of the reservation. With Price per time you choose from the time blocks of the product; with Price per person from a list of times. In the Change activity window the choice for Price per time is called Reservation duration. | Always. | In the widget guests book the reservation duration, unless the widget allows Let guest choose duration. |
| Reservation duration | The same choice as Duration, as it is called in the Change activity window. | To change the default duration. | If a duration does not fit, choose a time block that the product has. |
| Manual times may differ | If Yes, a reservation that you place yourself in the dashboard may be shorter than the reservation duration, down to the minimum booking time. On the screen: "If Yes, a reservation that you place yourself in the dashboard may be shorter than the reservation duration, down to the minimum booking time. Guests in the widget always book the reservation duration." | If you also let guests play for a shorter time. | Only visible with Price per time. |
| Minimum booking time | The shortest duration that you may book manually. On the screen: "The shortest duration that you may book manually." | After Manual times may differ: Yes. | Is set to 30 minutes by default. |
| Add extra products | Gives the activity extra products. On the screen: "Indicate whether this activity has extra products." | For upselling such as drinks. | With Yes you get a step to choose them. |
| Add transaction cost | Charges a fixed cost per reservation. On the screen: "Indicate whether this activity has transaction costs." | For booking fees. | Only visible with the Transaction costs add-on. |
| Show in widget | Determines whether the activity and the linked products are in the widget. On the screen: "Indicate whether the activity and linked products are visible in the widget." | No longer needed. | Is hidden (12-10-2026): the widget itself chooses which activities it shows. |
| Location | The locations (lanes, spaces) that belong to the activity. On the screen: "Select the locations that belong to this activity. Several locations can be selected." | Always; without a location there is nothing to book. | Choose at least one, otherwise: Please select at least one table. |
| Create a new table | Creates a new location in this window. | If the location does not exist yet. | See [Locations](locaties.md). |
| Fields | The questions the guest gets when booking. | For extra information such as allergies or terms. | You can drag the order. |
| can fill in the total number of locations | Lets several reservations share one location until the capacity is used up. On the screen: "Allows several reservations to share the same location until the total seating capacity of that location has been fully used" | Not available to customers. | Is always removed from the screens. |
| Previous | To the previous step. | To change something. | - |
| Next | To the next step. | After filling in the step. | First checks the required fields. |
| Save | Stores the activity. | On the last step. | You see Your details have been saved! |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| Please select at least one table. | You have not chosen a location. | Under Location choose at least one location. |
| Invalid data. | The server could not read the data. | Check the fields and try again. |
| The data has not been saved! | Saving failed. | Try again; if it keeps failing, contact us. |

**Related questions:**

- Which details can I set for an activity?
- How do I change an existing activity?
- How do I set the duration and the number of guests of an activity?
- How do I choose the colour of an activity on the timeline?

**Keywords:** set up activity, activity window, minimum number of guests, reservation duration, activity colour, manual times, QR tickets, product type

**Related:** [How do I add an activity in Jimani?](../faq/activiteit-toevoegen.md), [How does Activities management work in Jimani?](activiteiten-beheer.md), [How do the Products of Activities management work in Jimani?](producten.md)

---

# How do the Products of Activities management work in Jimani?

**Answer:** Under Products you create what a guest buys or rents with an activity: the Main product with its price per time or per person, an Extra product and Transaction costs. You create them with a window of steps (Products) and change them later with the same window. Each product gets a Name, a VAT group and a price.

**Where to find it:** Activities management > Products tab > plus button > Products (`/Activities`)

**Explanation:** The window starts with three choices: Main product, Extra product and Transaction costs. If you choose Main product, you then choose under Choose a product type between Price per time and Price per person. Price per time has steps for name, VAT group and time blocks, for the extra time and the start times, and for the price table per date. Price per person has name, description, photo, extra time, start times, VAT group and up to five prices. The Products tab has filters on Activity and Product types and a menu Actions on each tile. At the top of the tab there is currently the text "Easily block a time period or a whole day. You can even choose to temporarily block certain ticket sales, for example in case of a staff shortage." That text is about the Time limitation; under Products you do not set a time period. See [Which pricing model can I choose?](../faq/prijsmodellen-per-tijd-of-per-persoon.md) and [How do I set the price per duration?](../faq/prijs-per-tijdsblok-instellen.md).

![The Products tab with the tiles of the products and the filters Activity and Product types](/kennisbank/beelden/producten-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Choose a product type | Chooses between Price per time and Price per person. On the screen: "There are 2 product types, "Price per time" and "Price per person". Both work in a different way." | For a new Main product. | You choose the type when creating. |
| Name | The name of the product, maximum 50 characters, per language. On the screen: "Enter a name. The name is visible for all types of reservations." | Always. | Required. |
| Description | Text about the product. On the screen: "Give more information about the product if needed. Please note, this information is visible while booking." For Extra product: "Give the product a description. The description is visible when booking via the widget." | To tell what the guest gets. | Visible to the guest. |
| VAT group | The VAT group of the product. On the screen: "Select the VAT group" (when changing: "Choose the VAT group"). | Always; it determines the VAT percentage. | Required. |
| Time blocks | The durations that you sell with this product (only Price per time). Turn on at least one duration, otherwise you get Select at least one time. | To determine which durations a guest can choose. | If a duration is not there, use the plus button. See [Time blocks](tijdsblokken.md). |
| Extra time between reservation | Time that you keep free after a booking. On the screen: "In some cases it can be useful to keep extra time free between bookings, for example for cleaning." You choose a number and a unit (Minutes, Hours in advance or Day). | For cleaning or changeover. | The location is occupied during that time. Preferably choose Minutes. |
| Can be booked per? | The step the start times follow. On the screen: "Indicate here at what time interval within each hour the activity can be booked. If you set this to 15 minutes, for example, bookings can only be made at XX:00, XX:15, XX:30 and XX:45 within the opening hours." For Price per person: "How many minutes apart may a reservation take place? If you set this to 15 minutes, the booking steps are always per quarter of an hour on the full hour. So 14:00 or 14:15 or 14:30 or 14:45 etc. If you set the step to 1 hour, you can only book on the full hour." | To determine at which minutes a guest can start. | Choices: 5 to 45 minutes in steps of 5, or 1 hour. |
| Select Excel file | Chooses the Excel file with the prices to import. | To fill in many prices at once. | Export first, then fill in. |
| Choose a file | The button to find the file. | When importing. | Only .xlsx. |
| Price | The amount. For Main product with Price per person there are up to five prices (the names come from your widget): "Enter the product price. This is per person, and including VAT." For Extra product: "Enter the price. The amount includes VAT." For Transaction costs: "Enter the price per reservation here. Please note: the price includes VAT." | Always, except with Price per time (there the price is in the table per date). | All amounts include VAT. |
| Second to fifth price | The extra price lines of Price per person, with the names from your widget (for example Children). | If you have more types of guests than one. | On the screen there is still a technical text here instead of an explanation. |
| Show in widget | Shows the Extra product in the widget. On the screen: "Indicate whether the field is visible while booking via the widget." | If guests may choose it online. | Only visible with the Online reservations add-on. |
| Active | Turns the product on or off. On the screen: "Turn the product on or off. A product that is turned off cannot be chosen." | Not needed. | Is hidden in the window; use Deactivate in the Actions menu. |
| Delete | Deletes the product (to the trash) after a confirmation. | If you no longer use the product. | See [Turn off, copy, delete](../faq/activiteit-uitzetten-kopieren-verwijderen.md). |
| Previous | To the previous step. | - | - |
| Next | To the next step. | - | - |
| Save | Stores the product. | On the last step. | You see Created. and Your details have been saved! |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| Select at least one time. | You have not turned on a time block. | Turn on at least one duration. |
| No table found | The price table was not loaded when importing. | Open the last step and try again. |
| Select a year | No year was chosen when importing. | Click one of the three years. |
| No data found | The Excel file contains no readable lines. | Use the file that you exported. |
| Data has been applied | The prices from the file are in the table. | Click Save to keep them. |
| Error loading products. See the console for details. | The list of products could not be loaded. | Reload the page; if it keeps failing, contact us. |

**Related questions:**

- What is a main product for an activity?
- Which details does a product for an activity have?
- How do I set the VAT of a product?
- How do I change an existing product?

**Keywords:** product activity, main product, extra product, transaction costs, VAT group product, time blocks product, add product, price per person

**Related:** [How do I set the price per duration with time blocks?](../faq/prijs-per-tijdsblok-instellen.md), [How do extra products and transaction costs work for an activity?](../faq/extra-product-en-transactiekosten.md), [How does the Add or change activity window work in Jimani?](activiteit-toevoegen-en-wijzigen.md)

---

# What can you set under the Fields of Activities management?

**Answer:** A field is an extra question or text that the guest gets when booking, such as an allergy, a drop-down or a box for your terms. You create fields under Activities management > Fields, choose the type, the name, the options and whether the field is required, and link it to one or more activities.

**Where to find it:** Activities management > Fields tab > plus button > Fields (`/Activities`)

**Explanation:** The window is called Create a new field and has four parts: Extra field (for which activities), Field type (the type), Name and description and Settings. The overview shows the columns Name, Label, Type, Required, List view, Manual reservation and Show in widget, with the filters Search and Activity. The screen says: "View all fields here. Add new fields with the Add button, or edit existing fields. Use fields to easily request and share information while booking, such as terms and conditions." The step-by-step version is in [How do I let guests answer extra questions when booking?](../faq/velden-extra-vragen.md).

![The Fields tab with the list of fields and the filters Search and Activity](/kennisbank/beelden/velden-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Field type | The second part of the window ("What kind of answer you ask for: a text, a choice, a date or a time."). Under Type you choose what kind of answer you ask for. On the screen: "Select the field type." The choices: Text box, Large text box, Time slot, Timefield list with quantity, Date, Arrival or end date (+/- days), Checkbox, Selection box multiple choices, Radio button, Number field, Phone, Drop-down, Label, Link, Terms and conditions and Delivery cost field. | When creating. | The other fields in the window adapt to the type. |
| Extra field | The first part of the window ("A question that the guest answers when booking, for example an allergy or a seat preference."). Under Type you tick the activities the field applies to. On the screen: "Select the activities that apply. Several selections are possible." | Always; with Select all you choose them all. | Without a choice: Please select at least one ticket type. |
| Name | The name of the field that the guest sees, maximum 50 characters. On the screen: "Enter a name." | Always. | Required; per language. |
| Description | The explanation with the field. On the screen: "Enter an explanation for the field. It is shown in the field itself as light grey text." For Terms and conditions it is the text next to the box, for Link the link to the website. | To explain what you are asking. | The heading changes with the type. |
| Options | The choices for a Drop-down, Radio button or Selection box multiple choices, one per line. On the screen: "View the options here." For Terms and conditions the link to the terms is here, for Link the title of the link. | For types with choices. | If you put XXX at the end of a line, that option is preselected. |
| Label | The tag of the field. On the screen: "Give the field its own tag, or use the automatically generated tag." | If you want a recognisable tag. | Leave empty for the automatic tag. |
| Show field name | Shows the name of the field when booking. On the screen: "Indicate whether the name of the field is shown while booking." | Set to No if the explanation is enough. | Yes or No. |
| Required | The guest must fill in the field. On the screen: "Indicate whether the field must be filled in during the reservation." | For details you need. | For Terms and conditions the guest must always tick the box. |
| Show when booking manually | Shows the field in the dashboard under Create reservation. On the screen: "Indicate whether the field is shown while booking manually." | If your staff must fill it in too. | Yes or No. |
| List view | Shows the answer in the memo of the reservation overview. On the screen: "When active, the answer will be shown in the memos in the reservation overview." | For answers that you want to see quickly. | Yes or No. |
| Show in widget | Shows the field to the guest in the widget. On the screen: "Indicate whether the field is visible while booking via the widget." | For questions to the guest. | Only visible with the Online reservations add-on. |
| Do you want to make this field dynamic? | Makes the field only appear after a choice in another field. On the screen: "When you make this field dynamic, you can show this field when a choice has been made in another field. This way this field is only visible if an answer was chosen in a previous question." | For follow-up questions. | Only visible with the Dynamic reservation fields add-on. |
| Which field is the main field? | Chooses the field whose choice determines whether this field appears. | After Do you want to make this field dynamic?: Yes. | Choose one of the values from the list. |
| Show this field when the following is selected | The value of the main field for which this field appears. | After choosing the main field. | On the screen: "At which value should this field be shown? Choose one of the values from the list." |
| Message when the address is outside the range | The text the guest sees if the address falls outside the delivery area (type Delivery cost field). | Only for delivery costs. | Maximum 50 characters; example: Sorry, we do not deliver in this area. |
| Do not accept orders outside this range | Refuses addresses outside the range (type Delivery cost field). | Only for delivery costs. | Belongs to webshop orders. |
| Make all times available again as soon as all slots are filled (reset) | For Timefield list with quantity: as soon as all places are full, the counting starts again. | For time periods with a limited number of places. | Yes or No. |
| Hide field when all timeslots are filled | For Timefield list with quantity: hides the field when nothing is free any more. | Same. | Yes or No. |
| Active | Turns the field on or off. | Not needed. | Is hidden in the Change field window. |
| Save | Stores the field. | At the end. | - |

**Related questions:**

- Which types of fields can I create for guests?
- How do I ask about an allergy when booking?
- How do I link a field to an activity?
- Can I make a field required?

**Keywords:** activity fields, extra field, field type, dynamic field, terms and conditions field, drop-down field, required field

**Related:** [How do I let guests answer extra questions when booking?](../faq/velden-extra-vragen.md), [Can I set a minimum age or other restrictions for an activity?](../faq/minimumleeftijd-en-restricties.md), [How does Activities management work in Jimani?](activiteiten-beheer.md)

---

# How do the Locations of Activities management work in Jimani?

**Answer:** A location is a lane, room, boat or anything else that you rent out per time period. Under Activities management > Locations you create locations with a name and a capacity (the number of people), decide whether guests can book them online and link them to activities.

**Where to find it:** Activities management > Locations tab (`/Activities`)

**Explanation:** The Locations tab shows a list with the columns Locations, Number of guests and Can be reserved via widget and on each row the button Edit. The screen says: "View all locations here. Add new locations with the Add button, or edit existing locations. Add a name and the location capacity." With the plus button you create one or more at once (up to 50). The edit icon puts the list in edit mode, where you change names and numbers and delete several locations at once. A click on the number of people gives a minus and a plus; every step is saved immediately. The step-by-step version is in [How do I set up locations and capacity for my activities?](../faq/locaties-en-capaciteit.md).

![The Locations tab with the columns Locations, Number of guests and Can be reserved via widget](/kennisbank/beelden/locaties-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Number of locations | The number of locations that you add in one go. On the screen: "How many locations do you want to add?" | For a new series of lanes or rooms. | From 1 to 50. |
| Location name and maximum quantity of guests | A name and a capacity for each location. On the screen: "Location name and maximum quantity of guests". The example shows Location 1, Location 2 and so on. | Always. | The name is a maximum of 50 characters. |
| Number of guests | The capacity of the location. On the screen: "Indicate the capacity of the location." | Always. | At least 1. For a booking, Jimani looks for the smallest free location that fits the guests. |
| Name | The name of the location. On the screen: "Enter a name. The name is only visible internally." | With Add new table from an activity. | Only visible internally. |
| Can be reserved via widget | Determines whether guests can book the location online. On the screen: "When this is active you can reserve or buy this via the widget. When it is off it will not be visible." | Set to No for locations that you only book yourself. | The location can still be booked in the dashboard. |
| Edit | Opens the Locations window with the details of the location (the title shows the name). | To change a name or number. | On the screen: "Modify an existing location." |
| Delete | Deletes the location after the question Delete location / Are you sure? | If the location no longer exists. | - |
| Change the number of people | The number in the list; click it for a minus and a plus. | For a quick change. | Every step is saved immediately. |
| Save | Stores the new locations or the changes in edit mode. | After filling in. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| Please select at least one table to delete. | You have not ticked a location. | Tick a location first. |
| Deleting tables | The question to delete several locations. | Confirm with Yes or cancel. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I create a lane or boat to rent out?
- Can guests book a location online themselves?
- How do I set the capacity of a location?
- How do I link locations to activities?

**Keywords:** activity locations, add lane, location capacity, number of people lane, delete location, can be reserved via widget

**Related:** [How do I set up locations and capacity for my activities?](../faq/locaties-en-capaciteit.md), [Why can't a guest see available times for my activity?](../faq/geen-beschikbare-tijden.md), [How does Activities management work in Jimani?](activiteiten-beheer.md)

---

# How does the Crowd reduction of Activities management work in Jimani?

**Answer:** With a Crowd reduction you enter a maximum number of reservations per activity and per arrival time. You find it under Activities management > Crowd reduction. You give the limitation a name, choose the activities and enter a maximum for each time.

**Where to find it:** Activities management > Crowd reduction tab > plus button > Crowd reduction (`/Activities`)

**Explanation:** The tab shows the limitations with the columns Name and Activities. The screen says: "View all crowd reductions here. Add new crowd reductions with the Add button, or edit existing crowd reductions. This prevents too many guests or reservations from coming in at the same moment, and spreads the crowds more." The Crowd reduction window has two steps: Name and limit, and Per time slot. Also read [How do I prevent too many guests arriving at the same time (crowd reduction)?](../faq/druktebeperking-wachtrij.md): for the free times of activities, the capacity of the Locations and the Time limitation are decisive.

![The Crowd reduction tab with the list of crowd reductions](/kennisbank/beelden/druktebeperking-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name | The name of the limitation. On the screen: "Enter a name. The name is only visible internally." | Always. | Only visible internally; give it a recognisable name. |
| Maximum number of characters | The length of the name. | Information. | The name is a maximum of 50 characters. |
| Activity type | Chooses the activities the limitation applies to: "Choose the activities to which this limitation applies." | Always. | Choose at least one, otherwise: Please select at least one ticket type. |
| Maximum number of reservations | Per time the largest number of reservations that may start at that arrival time. The fields in the header fill in all times at once. | For spreading the crowds. | A time starts at 0. |
| Active | Turns the limitation on or off. On the screen: "Turn the limitation on or off. If it is off, it does not apply." | Not needed. | Is hidden in Change crowd reduction. |
| Previous | To the previous step. | - | - |
| Next | To the next step. | After Name and limit. | - |
| Save | Stores the limitation. | On the last step. | - |

**Related questions:**

- How do I set a maximum number of reservations per arrival time?
- Where do I find the crowd reduction?
- Can I set the crowd reduction for several activities at once?
- How does a crowd reduction per activity work?

**Keywords:** crowd reduction, queue limit, maximum number of reservations, spread crowds, arrival time maximum

**Related:** [How do I prevent too many guests arriving at the same time (crowd reduction)?](../faq/druktebeperking-wachtrij.md), [How does the Time limitation of Activities management work in Jimani?](tijdsbeperking.md), [How does Activities management work in Jimani?](activiteiten-beheer.md)

---

# How does the Time limitation of Activities management work in Jimani?

**Answer:** With a Time limitation you block a time period or a whole day for one or more activities, for example in case of a staff shortage or a cleaning moment. You find it under Activities management > Time limitation. Guests can no longer start in that period.

**Where to find it:** Activities management > Time limitation tab > plus button > Time limitation (`/Activities`)

**Explanation:** The tab shows the limitations with the columns Name, Date, Blocking of, Block up to and Ticket type. The screen says: "View all time limitations here. Add new time limitations with the Add button, or edit existing time limitations. This prevents reservations when there is temporarily no possibility for them, such as in case of a staff shortage or illness." The window is called Time limitation, with the subtitle Create a new time block, and has the parts Time block (name, whole day or time period, times), Activity type and Dates. The step-by-step version is in [How do I block a time period or a whole day for my activities?](../faq/tijdsbeperking-tijdvak-blokkeren.md).

![The Time limitation tab with the columns Name, Date, Blocking of and Block up to](/kennisbank/beelden/tijdsbeperking-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name | The name of the limitation. On the screen: "Enter a name. The name is only visible internally." The example in the field is Restriction name. | Always. | Only visible internally. |
| Day restriction | Determines whether the limitation applies to the whole day. On the screen: "Indicate whether the time limitation applies for the full duration of the selected dates." With Yes you do not need to choose times or activities. | Yes for a closed day, No for a time period. | With Yes the limitation applies to all activities. |
| Time from | The start of the blocked time period. On the screen: "Indicate from which time to which time you want to block something. Please note, if you want to block something until 19:00, for example, set the time to 18:59." The field is called Start time in the window. | With Day restriction: No. | The minus button and plus button move one hour. |
| Time to | The end of the time period. | With Day restriction: No. | The start times up to and including this time are blocked. If it is before Time from, the block runs past midnight (+1 day). Equal times are refused. |
| Activity type | Chooses the activities the time period applies to: "Choose the activities to which this limitation applies." | With Day restriction: No. | Without a choice: Please select at least one ticket type. |
| Date | Chooses the days on which the limitation applies. On the screen: "Indicate on which dates the time limitation is active. Choose single days, weeks, or months by clicking them, and use the arrows to navigate to other years." | Always. | Without a date: Select a date. |
| Active | Turns the limitation on or off. On the screen: "Turn the limitation on or off. If it is off, it does not apply." | Not needed. | Is hidden in Change time limitation; deleting is possible. |
| Delete | Deletes the limitation after Are you sure?. | If the limitation is no longer needed. | Is in the Change time limitation window. |
| Previous | To the previous step. | - | - |
| Next | To the next step. | - | - |
| Save | Stores the limitation. | On the last step. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| Please select at least one ticket type. | You have not chosen an activity. | Choose at least one activity. |
| Select a date | You have not chosen a date. | Click the days in the calendar. |
| Not saved: from and to are equal. Block the whole day? Choose 00:00 to 00:00. | Time from and Time to are equal. | Change the times or choose Day restriction: Yes. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I block a cleaning moment for my activities?
- How do I close a time period for one or more activities?
- Where do I find the time limitation?
- Can guests start during a time limitation?

**Keywords:** time limitation, time block, day restriction, time from, time to, block reservations, staff shortage

**Related:** [How do I block a time period or a whole day for my activities?](../faq/tijdsbeperking-tijdvak-blokkeren.md), [Why can't a guest see available times for my activity?](../faq/geen-beschikbare-tijden.md), [How does the Crowd reduction of Activities management work in Jimani?](druktebeperking.md)

---

# How do the Opening times of Activities management work in Jimani?

**Answer:** Under Opening times you set for each day whether you are open and from what time to what time. Guests can only choose times on days that are set to Open. You change days one by one, or you export all days to Excel, change them there and import them again.

**Where to find it:** Activities management > Opening times tab (`/Activities`)

**Explanation:** At the top choose the year (this year, next year or the year after) and the month. You then see every day of that month with Date, Open from, Open until and the Open/Closed switch. Changes are saved automatically. The screen says: "Enter the opening hours per day here. Please note: the times 'open from' and 'open until' are only used when the business is marked as open. To quickly fill in the opening hours for the next two years, we advise making an export. This way the data can be changed easily and efficiently in Excel. When the changes have been made, click 'Import'." The step-by-step version is in [How do I set the opening hours for my activities?](../faq/openingstijden-instellen.md).

![The Opening times tab with the Open or Closed switch per day](/kennisbank/beelden/openingstijden-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Open | Sets the day to open. The times Open from and Open until then apply. | For every day that you offer activities. | A new day is set to Closed, with 10:00 to 21:00 as a suggestion. |
| Closed | Sets the day to closed. | For days that you are closed. | Such a day cannot be chosen in the widget. |
| Open from | The first time at which a guest can start. | With Open. | Start times follow the step Can be booked per? on the product. |
| Open until | The time at which you close. | With Open. | If it is before Open from, you close the next day. Equal times are refused. |
| Select Excel file | Chooses the Excel file to import. | To fill in many days at once. | The file must contain all days of three years. |
| Choose a file | The button to find the file. | When importing. | Only .xlsx. |
| Import | Reads in the chosen file (the icon next to the file box). | After changing it in Excel. | Overwrites the days in the file. |
| Export | Downloads all days of three years as an Excel file (the Excel icon). | As the first step for filling in quickly. | The columns are called Opening date, Opening time, Closing time and Company open. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| The number of lines does not match the number of dates in this year, next year and the year after. | The file does not contain exactly all days of three years. | Use the file that you exported and leave the rows as they are. |
| Invalid data. | The server did not get usable data to save. | Try again. |
| Not saved: enter a valid time (hh:mm). | The time is not a valid time. | Enter a time such as 10:00. |
| Not saved: opening and closing time are equal. Open all day? Choose 00:00 to 23:59. | Open from and Open until are equal. | Change the times. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I change opening hours for a whole year at once?
- Can I export opening hours to Excel?
- How do I set per day from when to when I am open?
- Can guests book on a day that is closed?

**Keywords:** activity opening hours, open closed, import opening hours, export opening hours excel, day closed, open from open until

**Related:** [How do I set the opening hours for my activities?](../faq/openingstijden-instellen.md), [Why can't a guest see available times for my activity?](../faq/geen-beschikbare-tijden.md), [How does Activities management work in Jimani?](activiteiten-beheer.md)

---

# How do the Categories of Activities management work in Jimani?

**Answer:** With Categories you divide your activities into groups, for example sports, workshops or children's parties. In the widget the guest first chooses a category and then an activity. The Categories tab is only in Activities management if the setting Categories for your activities is on.

**Where to find it:** Activities management > Categories tab > plus button > Categories (`/Activities`)

**Explanation:** The Add category window asks for a name, a description, an image and the activities that belong to it. The Update category window has the same parts and the explanation Manage the category. In the overview you can drag the tiles, filter by activity and use the Actions menu. The step-by-step version is in [How do I divide my activities into categories?](../faq/categorieen-activiteiten.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name | The name of the category, maximum 50 characters. On the screen: "Enter a name. The name is visible for all types of reservations for activities." | Always. | Required (This field is required.). |
| Description | The text with the category. On the screen: "Enter a description. The description is visible when booking via the widget." | To explain what belongs to it. | Visible to the guest. |
| Image | A photo of the category (maximum 5 MB, ratio 4:3). | To make the category recognisable. | Images only. |
| Activity type | The activities in this category. With the plus button you create a new one. | To fill the category. | When updating you also see which activities have already been chosen. |
| Save | Stores the category. | At the end. | - |

**Related questions:**

- What do categories do for activities?
- How do I create a category?
- How do I turn on categories for my activities?
- What does the guest see in the widget with categories?

**Keywords:** activity categories, add category, divide activities, groups of activities, update category

**Related:** [How do I divide my activities into categories?](../faq/categorieen-activiteiten.md), [How does the Add or change activity window work in Jimani?](activiteit-toevoegen-en-wijzigen.md)

---

# How do the Time blocks in Settings work in Jimani?

**Answer:** Under Time blocks you determine which durations (5 minutes, 1 hour, 2 days and so on) you can offer with a product with Price per time. Each duration has a Yes or No button that saves immediately. You can only choose durations set to Yes in the details of a product.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Time blocks (`/ActivitiesSettings/TimeSettings`), or in the window of a product with the plus button under the time blocks

**Explanation:** The page is called Time blocks and shows, under the Time slots tab, all durations with a Yes/No button. The screen says: "View all time blocks here. Easily activate or deactivate them at the press of a button. The time blocks that are active can be selected in the details of a product." If you open the list from a product, the window is called Manage the time settings; there too every choice is saved immediately and there is no Save or Previous button. The durations run from 5 minutes to 1 year. How you fill in the prices per duration is in [How do I set the price per duration with time blocks?](../faq/prijs-per-tijdsblok-instellen.md).

![The Time blocks page with a Yes/No button for each duration](/kennisbank/beelden/tijdsblokken-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Time slots | The tab with all durations. | Always. | - |
| Yes | Turns the duration on: you can choose it for a product. | For the durations that you sell, such as 60 minutes or 1 day. | Saves immediately. |
| No | Turns the duration off: it is no longer in the choice for a product. | For durations that you do not offer. | Removes the duration from the choice for a product. |
| Manage the time settings | The window in which you turn durations on or off from a product. | If the duration you want is not in the product's list. | There is no Save button; close the window with the cross. |

**Related questions:**

- Which durations can I offer with a product with price per time?
- Where do I turn 1 hour or 2 hours on or off?
- Why can't I choose a certain duration for a product?
- How do I turn on a duration such as 2 days?

**Keywords:** time blocks, durations, set durations, product times, time slots, 5 minutes to 1 year

**Related:** [How do I set the price per duration with time blocks?](../faq/prijs-per-tijdsblok-instellen.md), [How do the Products of Activities management work in Jimani?](producten.md)

---

# How does the Create and change reservation screen work for Activities?

**Answer:** With this screen you create a reservation for an activity yourself or change one. You choose the activity, the number of guests, the date and time and the location, fill in the Reservation name and save or let the guest pay. On the timeline it opens as a side panel with the tabs Reservation, Fields, Products and Totals.

**Where to find it:** Activities > Create reservation, or an empty box on the timeline; change via Reservation information > Open reservation (`/ActivitiesReservations/AddActivitiesReservations`, `/ActivitiesReservations/UpdateActivitiesReservations`)

**Explanation:** The side panel is called Add reservation; as a full screen it is called Add reservation or Update reservation. At the bottom are Save and Pay; with Pay you choose Cash, Pay later or Other. The step-by-step version is in [How do I create a reservation for an activity in the dashboard?](../faq/reservering-maken.md) and [How do I change, move or cancel a reservation for an activity?](../faq/reservering-wijzigen-verplaatsen-annuleren.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Activities | Chooses the activity of the reservation. Without a choice: Select an Activity Type. | Always. | If you switch activity, the products, the price and the durations change with it. |
| Date | The day of the reservation (Arrival date when changing). | Always. | Today or later. |
| Departure date | The end date of the reservation. | Only in the full screen. | Today or later. |
| From | The start time, with minus and plus. | Always. | Also fills in To and Duration. |
| To | The end time. | If you want to determine the time yourself. | Must be after From. |
| Duration | How long the reservation lasts. | With Price per time. | You choose from the time blocks of the product. |
| Locations | The chosen lane or space; the edit icon opens Available locations. | If you want a different location. | If it says No location available, nothing is free in that time period. |
| Language | The guest's language (for messages). | If the guest speaks a different language. | The choices are the languages your business has turned on. |
| Reservation name | The name the reservation is under. | For a walk-in guest (a guest without details). | The field only appears in the side panel when Passer-by is set to Yes; otherwise you fill in the guest details. |
| Internal memo | A remark for yourself and your team. | For arrangements that do not belong on the bill. | Is under Extra information and under Fields. |
| Add to quote | Includes the memo in a quotation. | Only in quotation mode. | Is hidden by default. |
| Passer-by (no guest details) | Books without guest details. | For a guest who arrives on the spot. | Yes or No; with Yes Jimani does not ask for guest details. |
| Check in now | Sets the reservation to Arrived straight away. | If the guest is already there. | Yes or No. |
| Search | Looks up an existing guest (Find guests: Last name, First name, Address, Postal code, Place of residence, Phone, Email). | If the guest is already known. | Only in the full screen; choose the guest in the list. |
| Available times | The clock icon opens a list of free times. | To see what is free. | Only in the full screen. Takes opening hours, locations and time limitations into account. |
| Pay | Opens the choice Cash, Pay later or Other. | If the guest pays straight away. | The reservation is saved as well. |
| Save | Stores the reservation. | If the guest pays later. | For a guest with details Jimani asks What action should be taken? (Send email or No email). |
| List of devices | The terminals for a card payment. | Not reachable in Activities. | See the note below the table. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| Select an Activity Type | No activity has been chosen. | Choose an activity. |
| No location available | There is no free location in the chosen time period. | Choose a different time or a different day. |
| The price amount has not been configured for this date | The product has no price for that date. | Enter the price under Products. |
| Invalid request. | The move on the timeline could not be carried out. | Try again. |

**Related questions:**

- Which tabs does the reservation screen have?
- How do I let the guest pay for a manual reservation?
- What is the reservation name?
- How do I change a reservation in the side panel?

**Keywords:** create reservation, add reservation, update reservation, reservation name, walk-in guest, check in now, choose location, timeline side panel

**Related:** [How do I create a reservation for an activity in the dashboard?](../faq/reservering-maken.md), [How do I change, move or cancel a reservation for an activity?](../faq/reservering-wijzigen-verplaatsen-annuleren.md), [How do I see my reservations for activities per day, week or month?](../faq/reserveringen-bekijken.md)

---

# How does the Activities screen with the timeline and the lists work in Jimani?

**Answer:** The menu item Activities opens the reservation overview of your activities: a timeline per location, lists per day, week and month and day totals. From here you create a reservation, open Reservation information and set the status to Arrived or Left.

**Where to find it:** Left menu > Activities (`/ActivitiesReservationViews`). The management is in Activities management.

**Explanation:** At the top are the date with minus and plus, the filter All activities, the cog View timeline and the button Create reservation. Below that are the tabs Overview, List view, Weekly list, Last 100 reservations, Upcoming reservations and Totals. Click a reservation to open Reservation information. The step-by-step version is in [How do I see my reservations for activities per day, week or month?](../faq/reserveringen-bekijken.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Overview | The timeline with the blocks of the reservations of the chosen day per location. | To see what is free and to drag blocks. | Cancelled reservations are not on it. |
| List view | The reservations of one day as a list. Above the list it says Overview of reservations on: the date. | For the daily planning. | Print and export with the icons. |
| Weekly list | The reservations of the week. | For the weekly planning. | - |
| Last 100 reservations | The last 100 reservations. | To find reservations you just made. | - |
| Upcoming reservations | The reservations after today, per month. | To look ahead. | Months in the past are off. |
| Reservation for the month: | Chooses the month in Upcoming reservations. | To view a month. | - |
| Totals | Day totals and Week totals: per activity the number of guests per price line. | For purchasing and occupancy. | - |
| Hide "Guest arrived" | Leaves reservations with the status Arrived out of the list. | To see who is still to come. | Applies to that list. |
| Hide "Guest left" | Leaves reservations with the status Left out. | To hide the reservations that have been dealt with. | Applies to that list. |
| Select status | Filters by a status. | To see, for example, only Waiting for guest. | - |
| Select Type | Filters by an activity. | To see one activity. | - |
| Paid | Shows in the Payment column that the reservation has been paid. | To see what is still outstanding. | - |
| Unpaid | Shows in the Payment column that it has not been paid yet. | Same. | - |
| Internal memo | In Reservation information: a remark for yourself with the Save button. | To write down something that does not belong to the guest. | Is on the Overview tab of Reservation information. |
| View timeline | The cog: Normal, Compact or Extra compact, the number per location, text size, grid lines and half-hour times. | To make the timeline readable. | Applies to everyone in the business. |
| Create reservation | Opens the side panel to create a reservation. | For a reservation by phone or on the spot. | An empty box on the timeline works too. |

**Related questions:**

- What can I see in the reservation overview of activities?
- How do I see the day totals of my activities?
- How do I open the details of a reservation?
- Where do I find the timeline per lane?

**Keywords:** activities timeline, reservation overview, list view, weekly list, upcoming reservations, day totals, hide left, paid unpaid

**Related:** [How do I see my reservations for activities per day, week or month?](../faq/reserveringen-bekijken.md), [How do I create a reservation for an activity in the dashboard?](../faq/reservering-maken.md), [How do I change, move or cancel a reservation for an activity?](../faq/reservering-wijzigen-verplaatsen-annuleren.md)

---

# What can you see on the Unpaid and no-show page of Activities?

**Answer:** The Unpaid and no-show page shows the reservations of your activities where the guest did not come, with the total loss. You choose a period and a Filter and click Search. You find the page under Settings > Guests and bookings > Guest payments.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Guest payments > Unpaid and no-show (`/ActivitiesSettings/UnpaidAndNoShow`)

**Explanation:** The screen says: "Search by date range and quickly view no-shows and unpaid reservations." When opened, Date as of is set to one month ago and Date to to today. Below the filters are three blocks: Total 'No-show', Unpaid reservations and Total loss, with the list below them. The step-by-step version is in [How do I see unpaid reservations and no-shows for my activities?](../faq/onbetaald-en-no-show.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Date as of | The start of the period. The minus and plus buttons move one day and reload the list immediately. | Always. | Not in the future. |
| Date to | The end of the period. | Always. | Not in the future. |
| Filter | Chooses what you see: No-show only or Unpaid Only. | To limit the list. | Unpaid Only shows the no-shows whose customer has not paid. |
| Search | Loads the list with the chosen period and filter. | After changing the period or the filter. | - |
| Total loss | The total amount of the reservations where the customer has not paid. | To see the loss. | Only reservations with No-show and customer didn't pay. |
| Status | Per row: No-show, or No-show and customer didn't pay. | To see which guests have not paid. | Click the information icon to open the reservation. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| Unable to load data. | The list could not be retrieved, or the dates are invalid. | Check the dates and click Search again. |
| No data found. | There are no reservations in the period. | Choose a longer period. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I find the overview of no-shows for activities?
- How do I see the total loss from guests who did not come?
- How do I choose the period for the no-show overview?
- Where are the guest payments?

**Keywords:** unpaid and no-show, no-show activities, unpaid reservations, total loss, guest payments, not showing up

**Related:** [How do I see unpaid reservations and no-shows for my activities?](../faq/onbetaald-en-no-show.md), [How do I change, move or cancel a reservation for an activity?](../faq/reservering-wijzigen-verplaatsen-annuleren.md)

---

# How do I add an employee and decide what they may do?

**Answer:** Go to Settings > Your business > Users and permissions and click the plus button. Enter name, email, phone, language and the role (the field is called Rights) and click Save. What a role may do is set by the owner per section to Yes or No on the User rights tab. You give a PIN for the POS in the same window, if Log in on the till is on.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Your business and open Users and permissions. You land on the Users tab with a card per employee. You can create an unlimited number of users.
- **Step 2.** Click the plus button at the top right. The Manage user data window opens. In the Employee block enter the First name, Last name, Email, Phone (a mobile number is required), Language and Rights (the role). Click Next.
- **Step 3.** Optionally enter Postal code, Address and Place of residence and click Save. You see Created. The employee receives an email to confirm their email address; after that they create their own password.
- **Step 4.** If you want to decide what a role may do, open the User rights tab. Under Role choose the role and set Yes or No per section. With All you set a whole block in one go. A change is saved immediately.
- **Roles.** The roles are Owner, Manager and User. With Add role, four more are added: User2, User3, User4 and User5. A business with a hotel also has the role Housekeeping. The Owner may always do everything; those rights are fixed on.
- **Who may give what.** Only the owner can change rights; others only see on User rights what each role may do. Whoever has the Users right can add users, but only with a role that is lower than their own role (Owner above Manager above User). You can never change your own role yourself.
- **Rights at the POS.** In the POS and orders block there are, among others, Give discounts, Open cash drawer without a sale, Record own consumption and Deposit/withdraw cash. In the Reports and accounting block there is View revenue and reports: without that right an employee sees no revenue, no amounts of the day closing and no charts on the dashboard, and starts at the POS after logging in.
- **Register device.** Under Role the last item is Register device. That is the fixed role of a linked POS on which nobody is logged in with a PIN. By default it may only do POS work: POS, orders, reservations, search, announcements and, of the settings, only the day closing. Sections marked Not for a register device (such as Users, Everything about payments and Integrations) cannot be turned on for this role. With Back to default you reset your own choices for the register device. If someone logs in with their PIN, their own rights apply.
- **PIN.** Under Settings > Your business > Your team set Log in on the till to Yes. The employee's window then has the field POS PIN code: exactly 4 digits, not 0000 and not the same as a colleague's. If you leave it empty for a new employee, they get 1015, or a free code if 1015 already belongs to someone.
- **Hiding guest details per role.** Under Settings > Guests and bookings > Guests set the line Guest details: who sees what to Yes. User rights then has the Guest details block with, per field (name, email, phone, address and your extra fields), a Yes or No per role. No means that role sees 'hidden', also in search, exports and details. The owner always sees everything.

![The User rights tab with the Role choice at the top and a Yes/No button per section](/kennisbank/beelden/medewerker-toevoegen-rechten-en-pincode-1.webp)

**Example:** You want your waiting staff to be able to check out but not give discounts. On User rights choose the role User and set Give discounts to No. A colleague with the right can still give a discount on that POS with their own PIN.

**Related questions:**

- How do I add an employee?
- How do I give an employee a PIN for the POS?
- How do I decide what an employee may and may not see?
- How do I create a role with limited rights?
- How many employees can I add?

**Keywords:** add employee, create user, employee permissions, set roles, POS PIN, staff permissions, hide guest details

**Related:** [What is on Users and User rights?](../naslag/gebruikers-en-rechten.md), [How do employees track their hours in Jimani?](urenregistratie.md), [How do I book money in or out of the cash drawer?](../../kassa/faq/kas-storten-en-opnemen.md)

---

# What is on Users and User rights?

**Answer:** On Users you create employees and change their details, role and PIN. On User rights the owner sets Yes or No per role and per section. Both are under Settings > Your business > Users and permissions, as two tabs.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Your business > Users and permissions (`/CompanyUsers`), User rights tab (`/settings/roles`)

**Explanation:** The Users tab shows a card per employee with name and role. Click a card to change it, or the plus button at the top right for a new employee. The window is called Manage user data and has two steps: first the Employee block, with Next to Contact details (and, with time tracking on, Employment details). With Save you store everything. On User rights you choose the Role at the top and set Yes or No per line; a change is saved immediately and you see Saved.

![The Users tab with a card per employee and the plus button at the top right](/kennisbank/beelden/gebruikers-en-rechten-1.webp)

![The Manage user data window with the Employee block](/kennisbank/beelden/gebruikers-en-rechten-2.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Create an unlimited number of users with the Add button. Add user rights for each individual user. | The explanation above the Users list. | - | The button is a plus sign at the top right. |
| Edit user data, manage roles and configure account settings for business users. | The explanation in the Manage user data window. | - | - |
| First name, Last name | The name of the employee; it is on the card and with their orders. | Always. | Required. |
| Email | The address the employee logs in with. A new employee receives an email on this to confirm it. | For a new employee. | If the account already exists at another business, it also comes to your business. |
| Phone | The mobile number, for login help and linking a POS by SMS. | For a new employee. | Required and a mobile number. |
| Language | The language in which the employee sees Jimani. | Always. | If you change the language and save, you are logged out and log in again. |
| Rights | The role of the employee: Owner, Manager, User, User2 through User5, and for a hotel Housekeeping. | Always. | You can only give a role that is lower than your own; the owner may do everything. |
| POS PIN code | The code the employee uses to log in on the POS. Exactly 4 digits. | If Log in on the till is on. | Empty for a new employee gives 1015, or a free code if 1015 already belongs to someone. Not 0000 and not the same as a colleague's. |
| Postal code, Address, Place of residence | The contact details of the employee. | If you need them for the roster or payslip. | - |
| Personal email address, Phone number, Position within the company | Extra contact details when changing an employee. | As desired. | - |
| Staff number, Date of birth, Employed from, Employed until, Contract hours per week | What the payroll provider needs. | With time tracking on. | Only the owner and the manager see and change this. |
| Can log in | Whether the employee has access to Jimani. Someone who never stands behind a screen does not need access; clocking is still possible. | For someone who only clocks. | Is on by default. |
| Clocks hours | Whether the employee clocks in and out on the POS. An owner usually does not clock. | For whoever has to register hours. | Only with time tracking on. |
| Last login | When the employee last logged in. | To see whether someone uses Jimani. | Only when changing. |
| Set language | The language that belongs to the account. | - | Only when changing. |
| Email confirmed | Whether the employee has already confirmed their email address. | If someone cannot log in. | Only when changing. |
| Resend email validation | Sends the confirmation email once more. | If the email did not arrive. | - |
| Reset password | Sends the employee an email to choose a new password. | If someone has lost their password. | - |
| Delete | Removes the employee from your business. | If someone has left. | The owner may always do this; someone else only with the Users right and only for an employee with a lower role. |
| Role | On User rights: the role whose rights you see and set. | Always. | Register device is last: that is not an employee but a linked POS without a PIN. |
| Add role | Puts the next free role (User2 through User5) in the list. It is kept as soon as a right is set on it. | If you want an extra group of employees with their own rights. | Only the owner. After User5 no more roles can be added. |
| All | Sets a whole block of rights to Yes or No in one go. | To set up a role quickly. | - |
| Back to default | Resets the rights of the Register device to the Jimani default. | If you changed the POS role and want to start over. | Only visible with Register device. |
| Not for a register device | This right can never be given to a POS without a PIN. | - | Applies to Users, Company Information, POS & Hardware, Export, Refund via Mollie at the POS, Everything about payments, Fiscalization, Integrations, Order POS and equipment and Accounting. |

**The old Users list:** the task Add your employees with a PIN on your to-do list still opens the old list (`/settings/users`). There it shows per employee First name, Last name, Email, Rights, Language, Last login and Confirmed, with the buttons Send activate email, Send reset password email, Edit and Delete. You create a new employee there with First name, Last name, Email address, Mobile number, Language and Rights, and Save. It works the same as the Users tab; you set the PIN on the Users tab.

**The rights per block:** these are the lines on User rights (you only see what belongs to your modules and add-ons that are turned on). In brackets is the name in the rights table if it is different.

| Block | Lines |
|---|---|
| Reservations | Reservations, Appointments, Cancellations, Request, Quotations, Search, Announcements and the overviews per module |
| Restaurant | Reservations, Floorplan, Restaurant management, Search |
| POS and orders | POS, Order management, Delivery, Takeaway, Eat here, POS connections and Points of sale (Where to buy), Printers and card terminals (Printers and terminals), POS & Hardware, Day closing, Discounts (Discount overview), Tokens, Gift cards, Labels (Label printing), Order POS and equipment (Tills and equipment), Repairs, Give discounts (Give discounts at the POS), Open cash drawer without a sale, Record own consumption, Deposit/withdraw cash (Deposit and withdraw cash) |
| Refunds | Refunds overview, Salon refunds, Returns at the POS (Refunds overview), Refund via Mollie at the POS (Refund via Mollie) |
| Payments | Everything about payments |
| Stock and purchasing | Stock (Stocks), Suppliers |
| Purchasing | Order suggestion and orders (Purchasing), Book receipt (Purchasing book receipt) |
| Online store | Products, Online store widget (Store Widget Setting), Online store customer details (Webshop Guest Details), Delivery settings (Header 5-EN), Eat here settings (Eat Here settings), Pickup settings (Pickup settings), Delivery area (Delivery postcodes), Busyness (Order Restrictions), Customers (Webshop CRM), Courses, Online store settings (Webshop settings) |
| Reports and accounting | View revenue and reports, Dashboard, Financial overview (Financial reporting), Financial overview POS (Financial overview), Progress (Progress report), Ticket sales progress (Ticket sales progress report), Accounting, Unpaid and no-show (Unpaid and No Show), Outstanding prepayments, Fiscalization, Revenue per employee |
| Staff and hours | Hours overview, Users |
| Settings | Settings, Company Information, Menu and settings (Menu & Settings), Customer contact, Newsletters, Send from your own address (EigenAfzender), Currency and VAT (VAT groups), Guest details, Combinations (Packages), Languages, Your app (Your App), Layout (Printing labels), Times of products (Time blocks), Widgets, Survey, Integrations, QR codes |
| General | Export, Filters, Print |
| Other | Rights without a fixed place, such as Jimani AI credit and Price per unit. The rights of the hotel settings (Advanced, Guest register & tourist tax, Online check-in, Housekeeping, Codes & keys, iCal calendars and Online payment) are here under their internal name, such as hotel-geavanceerd and hotel-codes |
| Guest details | Only with Guest details: who sees what on Yes: per guest field Yes (visible) or No ('hidden') per role |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| Created. | The new employee has been saved. | Have them confirm their email address. |
| Updated. | The change has been saved. | - |
| Saved | On User rights: the right is set as you set it. | - |
| Check the fields: the PIN may only contain digits. | POS PIN code contains something other than digits. | Enter 4 digits. |
| You may not add a user with this role. | The chosen role is equal to or higher than yours, or you do not have the Users right. | Choose a lower role or ask the owner. |
| You do not have the right to manage users. You can only change your own details. | Your role does not have the Users right. | Ask the owner. |
| You cannot change your own role. You can change your other details. | You are trying to change your own role. | Have the owner do that. |
| Only the owner can change the owner. | The employee you are changing is Owner. | Have the owner do it. |
| You can only change users with a lower role than your own. | The employee is at the same level as you or higher. | Ask someone with a higher role. |
| You cannot give a role that is equal to or higher than your own. | The new role is too high. | Choose a lower role. |
| This account also belongs to another business and the role applies there too. Only Jimani or your dealer can change the role. You can change the other details. | A role belongs to the account, and this account also works at another business. | Ask Jimani or your dealer. |
| You may not delete this user. | You do not have the right, or the employee has an equal or higher role. | Ask the owner. |
| Only the owner can change permissions. | Someone other than the owner tried to set a right. | Have the owner do it. |
| Only the owner can change rights. Here you see what each role may do. | The explanation at the top of User rights for someone who is not the owner. | - |
| The owner may always do everything. These rights are fixed on. | You chose the Owner under Role. | - |
| This is how a linked POS without a PIN works. If someone logs in with their PIN, their own rights apply. | You chose Register device under Role. | - |
| First switch on the Anonymise guest details integration. | You set a guest field while Guest details: who sees what is off. | Set that line to Yes under Settings > Guests and bookings. |
| Off: this role sees 'hidden' here, also in search, exports and details. | The explanation for a guest field. | - |
| Extra field of your business. Off: this role sees 'hidden' here. | The explanation for your own extra field. | - |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I manage my employees?
- How do I change an employee's role or PIN?
- Where do I set the rights per role?
- Who may change user rights?

**Keywords:** users, user rights, employee role, set permissions, POS PIN, register device, delete employee, reset employee password

**Related:** [How do I add an employee and decide what they may do?](../faq/medewerker-toevoegen-rechten-en-pincode.md), [What is in the Jimani menu?](menu.md), [How do Hours overview, My hours and Revenue per employee work?](uren-en-medewerkeromzet.md)

---

# How do employees track their hours in Jimani?

**Answer:** Turn on the Time tracking add-on (€15 per month, excl. VAT) and turn on Clocks hours for each employee. When that employee logs in with their PIN on the POS or handheld, Jimani asks whether they want to clock in or clock out. You see the hours under Settings > Your business > Time tracking (the Hours overview), and with File for the payroll provider you download them as CSV.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Add-ons, look for Time tracking (category Team) and turn it on.
- **Step 2.** Under Settings > Your business > Your team set Log in on the till to Yes: clocking happens when logging in with the PIN.
- **Step 3.** Open Users and permissions, click an employee and in the Employment details block turn on Clocks hours. Also fill in Staff number, Employed from and Contract hours per week here if your payroll provider needs them. For someone who never stands behind a screen, turn off Can log in; clocking is still possible then.
- **Step 4.** At the POS: after logging in with the PIN the POS asks Do you want to clock in? with the buttons Clock in and Not now. Someone who is already clocked in is asked whether they want to clock out, with the time since they clocked in. If clocking fails once, the POS simply opens.
- **Step 5.** View the hours under Settings > Your business > Time tracking: that opens the Hours overview. Choose From and To and click Search. You see per week and per employee Worked, Break, Evening, Night, Saturday, Sunday, Public holiday, Extra hours and Overtime, and below that The shifts.
- **Step 6.** Click File for the payroll provider. You get a CSV file with a line per employee per day, in the form that Loket.nl and Nmbrs use.
- **Who sees what.** The owner sees everyone's hours, a manager those of their own point of sale and a user only their own hours. An employee also sees their own hours on My hours.
- **Locking.** Once the hours of a week have been processed, click Lock for that week. It then says locked and the hours of that week no longer change.
- **Note the labels.** A shift can say corrected (adjusted by hand) or automatic (nobody clocked out; the night closing closed the shift). For young people Please note can appear with a rule from the Dutch Working Time Act: Jimani warns, but does not stop anything.
- **If Time tracking is off**, you see Time tracking is turned off. Turn it on under the paid options to track hours.

![The Hours overview with the fields From and To and the buttons Search and File for the payroll provider](/kennisbank/beelden/urenregistratie-1.webp)

**Example:** Lisa logs in at 17:58 with her PIN and taps Clock in. After her shift she logs in again and chooses clock out. In the Hours overview her shift is under The shifts, with Where (POS or handheld).

**Related questions:**

- How do I let my staff clock in and out?
- Can Jimani keep track of the hours employees have worked?
- How do I download the hours for the payroll administration?
- What does time tracking cost?

**Keywords:** time tracking, clock in POS, clock out, staff hours, export hours, payroll provider, Loket, Nmbrs

**Related:** [How do Hours overview, My hours and Revenue per employee work?](../naslag/uren-en-medewerkeromzet.md), [How do I add an employee and decide what they may do?](medewerker-toevoegen-rechten-en-pincode.md), [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md)

---

# How do Hours overview, My hours and Revenue per employee work?

**Answer:** Hours overview shows the clocked hours per week and per employee, My hours shows an employee only their own hours, and Revenue per employee shows the POS revenue per employee of the salon. The first two work with the Time tracking add-on, the third with the Salon add-on.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Your business > Your team > Time tracking, which opens the Hours overview (`/Urenoverzicht`); My hours (`/MijnUren`); Settings > Money and figures > Reports, Revenue per employee tab (`/Medewerkeromzet`)

**Explanation:** The Hours overview opens on the last four weeks. Choose a different period with From and To (with the minus and plus buttons you move a day) and click Search. My hours shows the last eight weeks, and if contract hours have been filled in also Your contract is set at ... hours per week. Revenue per employee counts the paid receipts in the chosen period, on the employee of each receipt line.

![The Revenue per employee report with the Period choice](/kennisbank/beelden/uren-en-medewerkeromzet-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| From, To | The period of the Hours overview. | To view a different period. | To counts the whole day. |
| Search | Loads the hours of the chosen period. | After choosing From and To. | - |
| File for the payroll provider | Downloads a CSV with a line per employee per day: staff number, name, date, break and the hours per type. | Every pay period. | Whoever may only see their own hours also gets only their own hours in the file. |
| Per week | The table with Employee, Week, Worked, Break, Evening, Night, Saturday, Sunday, Public holiday, Extra hours and Overtime, with the Total at the bottom. | To see who has worked how much. | Hours are shown as hours:minutes, 7:30 is seven and a half hours. |
| Lock | Locks a week: the hours have been processed and no longer change. After that it says locked. | When the week has gone to the payroll provider. | Only whoever manages staff (owner or manager). |
| Revenue per hour worked | Per week the hours worked, the Revenue and the amount Per hour. | To see your staff costs next to your revenue. | Only if there are closing receipts from the POS. |
| The shifts | Every shift with Employee, Date, From, To, Break, Worked and Where (POS or handheld). | To check a shift. | - |
| corrected | This shift was adjusted by hand. | - | - |
| automatic | Nobody clocked out; the night closing closed the shift. | Check this shift before it goes onto a payslip. | - |
| Please note | A warning from the rules for young people in the Dutch Working Time Act. | - | Jimani warns, but does not stop anything. |
| What you've clocked from ... to | On My hours: the period that you see. | - | My hours shows only your own hours, without colleagues. |
| Does something not look right? Report it to your manager; they can correct it. A correction is added as a new line next to the old one, so that what it said before can always be checked. | The explanation on My hours. | - | - |
| Period | On Revenue per employee: Today, This week, This month, Last month or Custom. | To see the revenue over a period. | With Custom you fill in From and Up to and including. |
| Employees | The table with per employee Receipts, Items, Revenue incl. VAT and Revenue excl. VAT, with the Total. | - | Lines without an employee are at the bottom as No employee; what is on pay later does not count yet. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| No clocking took place in this period. | There are no shifts in the chosen period. | Choose a different period. |
| Time tracking is turned off. Turn it on under the paid options to track hours. | The Time tracking add-on is off. | Turn it on under Settings > Add-ons. |
| The Time tracking option is turned off. | You asked for hours or a file while the add-on is off. | Turn on Time tracking. |
| Only someone who manages staff may lock a period. | Your role may not lock a week. | Have the owner or a manager do it. |
| That's not a week. | The week number is not right. | Refresh the page and try again. |
| Only someone who manages staff is allowed to do this. | An action for the payroll provider that only the owner or manager may do. | Ask the owner. |
| Only someone who manages staff may correct hours. | Only the owner or manager can correct a shift. | Ask the owner. |
| Only someone who manages staff may clean up hours. | Only the owner or manager can clean up old hours. | Ask the owner. |
| No revenue in this period. | On Revenue per employee there are no paid receipts in the period. | Choose a different period. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see the hours my staff have worked per week?
- How do employees see their own hours?
- How do I check the hours of a different period?
- How many contract hours does an employee have per week?

**Keywords:** hours overview, my hours, hours worked, hours per week, revenue per employee, salon revenue employee, payroll provider file

**Related:** [How do employees track their hours in Jimani?](../faq/urenregistratie.md), [How do I see the revenue per employee?](../faq/omzet-per-medewerker.md), [What is on Users and User rights?](gebruikers-en-rechten.md)

---

# How do I see the revenue per employee?

**Answer:** Go to Settings > Money and figures > Reports and open the Revenue per employee tab. Choose a Period and you see per employee the receipts, the items and the revenue including and excluding VAT. This report belongs to the Salon add-on, which has no monthly fee.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Make sure the Salon add-on is on (Settings > Add-ons, category Modules). If Salon is off, the report is not there, not even for the owner.
- **Step 2.** Go to Settings > Money and figures > Reports and choose the Revenue per employee tab.
- **Step 3.** Under Period choose Today, This week, This month, Last month or Custom. With Custom you fill in From and Up to and including.
- **What counts.** Paid receipts in the period, on the employee of each receipt line. What is on pay later does not count yet. Lines without an employee are at the bottom as No employee.
- **Who may see it.** The right is called Revenue per employee (block Reports and accounting on User rights). The owner may always.
- **Hours next to revenue.** With the Time tracking add-on you also see Revenue per hour worked in the Hours overview, per week for the whole business.

**Example:** You want to know what each hairdresser made this month. Choose This month: you see per hairdresser the number of receipts, the items and Revenue excl. VAT.

**Related questions:**

- How do I see how much an employee has sold?
- Where do I find the revenue per hairdresser or practitioner?
- Why don't I see the revenue per employee report?
- How do I compare the performance of my staff?

**Keywords:** revenue per employee, revenue per hairdresser, employee revenue, salon revenue, employee report

**Related:** [How do Hours overview, My hours and Revenue per employee work?](../naslag/uren-en-medewerkeromzet.md), [How do employees track their hours in Jimani?](urenregistratie.md)

---

# What is in the Jimani menu?

**Answer:** The menu on the left only shows the parts that your role may open and that belong to your modules and the add-ons that are turned on. With the POS you have, among others, Dashboard, Point of sale and products, Order, Order management and Settings; with Restaurant, Activities, Salon, Ticket sales or Hotel a block of its own is added.

**Where to find it:** On the left in the dashboard, on every page

**Explanation:** Every line in the menu is a right on User rights. If the owner sets a right to No, that line disappears for that role. A block of an add-on (such as Salon) disappears as soon as the add-on is turned off. What you make invisible under Menu settings is also not in the menu; your rights then stay the same.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Dashboard | The start screen with today's figures. | After logging in. | The figures and charts only with the right View revenue and reports. |
| Point of sale and products | Manage your products and categories (`/webshop`). | To change the menu or the range. | Is called Online store in the rights table. |
| Order | The POS: checking out and entering orders (`/webshoporder`). | At the POS. | With the free POS for shops and treatments this is called Order Overview. |
| Order management | Look up, change and process orders. | To find a receipt or order. | - |
| Delivery, Takeaway, Eat here | The orders per type from the online webshop. | With online ordering. | - |
| Refunds overview | View and process refunds. | With a return or cancellation. | In the POS module only with the Refund add-on on. |
| Reservations | View, create and change reservations. | Every day. | There is a separate line per module (restaurant, activities, ticket sales, hotel, salon). |
| Floorplan | The tables on the floor plan. | For a restaurant. | With Restaurant on. |
| Restaurant management | Tables, spaces, reservation types and the rest of the restaurant. | When setting up. | Is called Restaurant in the rights table (page `/Horeca`). |
| Search | Look up guests and reservations. | When a guest calls. | - |
| Announcements | The announcements for the day. | At the start of the shift. | See Announcements under Settings > Communication. |
| Request | Approve or reject reservation requests. | With the Request add-on. | - |
| Cancellations | Process cancelled reservations. | - | Also for the salon. |
| Quotation | Create and send quotations. | With the Quotations add-on. | - |
| Activities, Activities management | The timeline and the management of your activities. | With the Activities add-on. | - |
| Salon, Salon management | The calendar and the management of the salon. | With the Salon add-on. | - |
| Tickets, Ticketing management | The tickets sold and the management of the ticket sales. | With the Ticket sales add-on in the POS. | In a separate ticket sales module they are called Reservations and Ticket sales. |
| Hotel, Hotel management, Housekeeping | The hotel reservations, the management and the cleaning of rooms. | With the Hotel module. | The rights table calls the management Hotel module. |
| Settings | The Settings page with all settings of your business. | To set something up. | A POS without a PIN only sees Day closing here. |

**Related questions:**

- Why don't I see certain parts in the menu?
- What is in the menu on the left?
- How do I hide a menu item for an employee?
- Why is my colleague's menu different from mine?

**Keywords:** jimani menu, left menu, menu item gone, part not visible, where is, menu dashboard

**Related:** [What is on Users and User rights?](gebruikers-en-rechten.md), [How is the Settings page organised?](instellingen.md)

---

# How is the Settings page organised?

**Answer:** Settings has five groups as large tiles: Your business, Till and products, Money and figures, Guests and bookings and Communication, with the Add-ons tile last. Click a group and you see Frequently used at the top and below it the parts per heading. With Search for a setting… you find everything, including what is not in view.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Settings (`/Settings`); you can open a group directly with, for example, `/Settings?groep=Zaak`

**Explanation:** You only see the parts that your role may open and that belong to your modules and add-ons. Each group tile shows how many parts it contains. A part with its own screen opens with a click; a free feature without its own screen has a Yes/No button that saves immediately. Behind some parts there is a short status, such as Mollie connected, Not complete yet, Published or Balance €4.20. With the i button you read what the part is, what it does and why you need it. A new business sees at the top Set up your business: 2 of 7 done, with a button to the next step (such as Fill in business details, Connect Mollie for payments, Set up logo and branding, Add your menu or products, Add staff, Set up online booking, Publish your website and Advice for your business).

![The Settings page with the five group tiles, the Add-ons tile and the search bar](/kennisbank/beelden/instellingen-1.webp)

![The Your business group open, with Frequently used and the headings Your business and Your team](/kennisbank/beelden/instellingen-2.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Search for a setting… | Searches the names, the explanation, the tabs and the keywords of all parts, also in Dutch if you work in another language. | If you do not know in which group something is. | Also finds parts that are not in view; they are then under Also found. |
| Show: Active, All | Per group: Active shows what your business uses or has on, All also the add-ons that are off and what is only shown if you use it. | If you are missing a part. | Jimani remembers your choice per group. An add-on that is off shows Off and takes you to Add-ons. |
| Frequently used | Quick buttons to the parts that you open most often. | Every day. | For a new user first a fixed set. |
| Add-ons | Turn all add-ons and connections on or off, with the number that are on. | To choose a feature. | Only for whoever may turn on integrations. |
| Yes, No | Turns a free feature without its own screen on or off straight away. | With Log in on the till, Customer details on the POS, Keep track of tips and Guest details: who sees what. | Only for whoever may turn on integrations. |
| New | This part is new. | - | - |
| Runs until | The add-on has been cancelled and works until that date. | - | - |

**What is where:**

| Group | Heading | Parts |
|---|---|---|
| Your business | Your business | Business details and opening hours, Branding (logo, colours, Font and Corner radius), Languages (with Extra languages and Multilingual (website)) |
| Your business | Your team | Users and permissions, Log in on the till (Yes/No), Time tracking |
| Your business | Website | Website |
| Your business | Hotel module | Housekeeping |
| Till and products | Menu and products | Menu and settings (your menu and products), VAT groups, Import and export, Label printing, Price per unit, Subcategories, Product notes |
| Till and products | Prices and rules | Prices and promotions (Discounts, Dynamic Prices, Product set), Allergens (NVWA) |
| Till and products | Hardware | Tills and equipment (POS & Hardware), Repairs |
| Till and products | Stock and purchasing | Stock and purchasing (Purchasing, Stocks, Suppliers) |
| Till and products | Ordering and kitchen | Courses, Kitchen screen, Parking tables, QR codes, Buzzers |
| Till and products | Payment and returns | Refund, Customer details on the POS (Yes/No), Keep track of tips (Yes/No), Own use and waste |
| Money and figures | Figures | Reports (Financial reporting, Progress report, Discounts, Refunds overview, Waste overview, Revenue per employee), Day closing |
| Money and figures | Payments | Payments (Mollie) (Everything about payments, Mollie), Guest payments (for a business without reservations), Gift cards and gift vouchers, Pay with tokens, Transaction costs |
| Money and figures | Administration and costs | Invoicing and costs, Jimani AI credit, Accounting link |
| Money and figures | Hotel module | Guest register & tourist tax, Online payment |
| Guests and bookings | Guests | Search guests and reservations, Guest information, Customer CRM, Guest details: who sees what (Yes/No) |
| Guests and bookings | Book | Online bookings (widget), Reservation blocks, Packages, Guest payments (Unpaid and No Show, Outstanding prepayments), Time blocks |
| Guests and bookings | Online ordering | Online webshop, Delivery and pickup (Delivery methods and shipping costs, Delivery times and postcodes, Webshop settings), Order Restrictions |
| Guests and bookings | Hotel module | Advanced, Online check-in, Codes & keys |
| Communication | Messages to guests | Email (Customer contact, Newsletters, Send from your own address), Documents, SMS, Survey |
| Communication | For your team | Announcements |

Only to be found with search: Add-ons (formerly Connections), Jimani webshop (ordering tills, printers and card terminals; also via Buy equipment in the Jimani webshop under Add-ons) and iCal calendars. A tile that does not belong anywhere goes under Other.

**Related questions:**

- Where do I find a setting in Jimani?
- How is the settings screen built up?
- How do I quickly search for a setting?
- Why don't I see some settings?

**Keywords:** settings, where is, find setting, your business, till and products, money and figures, guests and bookings, communication

**Related:** [Which add-ons does Jimani have and what do they cost?](uitbreidingen.md), [What is in the Jimani menu?](menu.md), [What do you enter under Company details?](bedrijfsgegevens.md)

---

# Which add-ons does Jimani have and what do they cost?

**Answer:** Under Add-ons you turn features and connections on or off. Most are free; a fixed list costs €5 to €29 per month (excl. VAT), Repairs costs €150 one-off and ticket sales €0.49 per ticket sold. You open it with the Add-ons tile at the bottom of Settings.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Add-ons (`/Settings/ExtraPaidOptions`)

**Explanation:** Each add-on is a card with a name, a line of explanation, the price (or Free) and the button Turn on. With the i button you read What it is and What you get. At the top you filter with All or On, with the buttons per category (Modules, Bookings, Restaurant and kitchen, Products, Stock and purchasing, Devices and POS, Payments and money, Website and web shop, Communication, Team) and with Search for an add-on…. Click Turn on: the card shows Selected and appears on the right in Your invoice with Subscription, Price, Quantity and Total, Total excluding VAT, VAT and Total including VAT. Click Pay. The amount is charged automatically per month; this month you only pay the days that are left. If an add-on is on, the card shows Settings (to its screen) or On, and the button Deactivate. A paid add-on that you turn off keeps working until the end of the month: the card then shows Runs until.

![The Add-ons page with the category buttons, the cards with Turn on and on the right Your invoice](/kennisbank/beelden/uitbreidingen-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Please note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Activities | The activities module in your POS: the timeline with reservations, your lanes and activities. | For bowling, padel, escape rooms and the like. | Free. Category Modules. |
| Salon | The salon module in your POS: the calendar with appointments, your treatments and employees. | For a hairdresser or salon. | Free. Also gives the Revenue per employee report. |
| Hotel module | The hotel module in your POS: rooms or cottages, rate plans, seasonal prices and the floor plan. | For a hotel, B&B or park. | Free. |
| Online check-in | Guests check in online beforehand via the link in their confirmation email. | For a hotel. | Free. Only works together with Hotel module. |
| iCal | Link your rooms with iCal to Booking.com, Airbnb and other sites; occupied nights go back and forth every 15 minutes. | If you also rent out via booking sites. | Free. Only works together with Hotel module. |
| Ticket sales | The ticket module in your POS: events, ticket types, tickets with QR code and sales at the door. | For events and ticket sales. | €0.49 per ticket sold, no monthly fee. |
| Online ticket sales | Visitors buy their ticket themselves on your website, via a widget. | For online ticket sales. | Only works together with Ticket sales. |
| Events | Sell tickets for a show or day with its own date and time. | For events. | Only works together with Ticket sales. |
| Standard ticket sales | Tickets that are valid all year, such as a day pass or subscription. | For day passes. | Only works together with Ticket sales. |
| Restaurant | Reservations, creating a reservation and the floor plan. | For a restaurant with tables. | Free. Category Bookings. |
| Online reservations | Guests book themselves via the widget on your website. | If guests must be able to book online. | Free. Only works together with Restaurant, Activities or Salon. |
| Reservation blocks | Stop a reservation on a location, because of busyness or at a time. | When full or closed. | Free. |
| Request | A guest requests a reservation; you approve or reject it. | If you want to look at every reservation yourself. | Free. |
| Quotations | A quotation that the guest approves first. | For groups and parties. | Free. |
| Dynamic reservation fields | A field that only appears when another field has a certain value. | For an extensive booking form. | Free. |
| Total number of locations | A reservation type may fill in the total number of locations itself. | - | Free. |
| Guest groups | Divide guests into groups with a reservation, for example adults and children. | With different prices per person. | Free. Only works together with Online reservations. |
| Products and down payments | Products with a reservation, with a down payment in advance. | Against no-shows. | Free. Only with a Mollie connection. |
| Packages | Book several parts in one go, such as bowling with dinner. | For combinations. | Free. |
| Customer CRM | A customer file with the details and order history of your regular customers. | For customers on account. | €20 per month. |
| Courses | Divide products into courses, so the kitchen knows what must be ready at the same time. | For a restaurant with starter, main course and dessert. | €10 per month. Only works together with Restaurant. Free until 1 January 2027 if you already use it. |
| Kitchen screen | A screen in the kitchen with the orders per course. | Instead of or next to the kitchen printer. | €5 per month per screen. Only works together with Courses. |
| Parking tables | Put an order on a table and continue with it later. | For open bills. | Free. |
| Combine tables | Two tables that together form a larger table. | For groups. | Free. Only works together with Restaurant. |
| QR codes | A QR code on the table with which the guest orders themselves. | For ordering at the table. | €10 per month. Only works together with Online webshop. |
| Import and export | All your lists in or out of Jimani in one go with an Excel or CSV file. | At the start or for large changes. | Free. |
| Label printing | Labels with barcode, name and price. | In a shop. | Free. |
| Price per unit | Sell per metre, gram, kilo or litre instead of per item. | For a butcher, cheese shop or fabric shop. | Free. |
| Product Variants | A product in several versions, such as size or colour. | In a shop. | Free. |
| Subcategories | An intermediate layer under your categories, such as Phone › Samsung. | For a large range. | €5 per month. |
| Product notes | Fixed questions with fixed answers per product, which you tap at the POS. | For repairs or custom work. | Free. |
| Supplements | Extra choices on a product, such as small, medium or large. | For toppings and sizes. | Free. |
| Related products | Suggestions with a product: whoever orders this may also want this. | To sell more. | Free. |
| Allergens (NVWA) | The fourteen allergens that the NVWA prescribes, per product. | In hospitality. | €5 per month. Free until 1 January 2027 if you already use it. |
| Discounts | Temporary prices and discounts. | For promotions. | Free. |
| Dynamic Prices | A different price per way of ordering or per moment. | For an evening rate or takeaway price. | €10 per month. |
| Product set | Sell several products as a whole, such as a menu. | For menus and packages. | Free. |
| Stock | Keeps track of how much you still have of each product. | If you want to keep track of stock. | Free. |
| Suppliers | An address book of the companies you buy from. | For purchasing. | Free. Only works together with Stock. |
| Purchasing | Order from your suppliers from Jimani, with an order suggestion. | For regular orders. | €10 per month. Only works together with Stock; Suppliers is turned on with it. |
| Warehouse locations | Keep track of stock per place, such as Store or Shelf 1A. | With several storage places. | €0, only works together with Purchasing. |
| Own consumption | Record at the POS what you use yourself, what staff drink, what you give away or what breaks, without revenue. | For VAT and your administration. | Free. |
| Waste, Waste overview | Keep track of what is thrown away and why, with an overview per day and product. | For fresh products. | Free. |
| Extra POS Licence | A second or further POS screen next to the screen in your package. | With more tills. | €15 per month per POS beyond the first. |
| Handheld Terminal | A handy device with which an employee orders at the table. | For service at the table. | €5 per month per handheld or phone. Only with a Mollie connection. |
| Tap to Pay | Card payments on the phone itself, without a separate card terminal. | On a handheld or tablet. | €5 per month. Only with a Mollie connection. |
| Phone App | The Jimani POS app on an Android device. | On an Android POS or tablet. | Free. |
| POS for Windows | The POS as a program on a Windows computer, with the receipt printer via USB or network. | On a Windows POS. | Free. |
| Buzzers | The pager that a customer takes along and that goes off when their order is ready. | For takeaway at the counter. | €10 per month per POS screen with buzzer. Jimani puts the buzzer number on the receipt; you make the buzzer itself go off with your own buzzer system. See [How do I use buzzers at the till?](../../kassa/faq/buzzers-op-de-kassa.md). |
| Scanner | The scanner button on the till. | For barcodes. | Free. |
| Repairs | Accept repairs at the POS and keep track of them until the customer picks them up. | In a repair shop. | €150 one-off. |
| Your dealer's suppliers | The suppliers that your dealer set up for you, under the Suppliers button at the top. | Only for customers of a dealer. | Free. |
| Gift cards | Gift cards with their own card number and balance. | To sell credit. | €10 per month. |
| Gift voucher | Vouchers that a customer buys and hands in later, with the balance in the POS. | For paper gift vouchers. | €10 per month. |
| Pay with tokens | Pay with tokens or vouchers. | At a festival or for an association. | Free. |
| Refund | Give money back to a customer: a whole order or part of it. | For returns. | Free. If this is off, nothing negative can be booked anywhere. |
| Transaction costs | Costs that you pass on with an online payment. | For online payment. | Free. Only with a Mollie connection. |
| Accounting link | Your daily revenue goes to your accounting package automatically after the day closing. | To save double work. | €15 per month. |
| Website | A ready-made website for your business, live from Jimani. | If you do not have a site of your own. | €29 per month. |
| Online webshop | Your own order page where customers order and pay themselves. | For takeaway and delivery. | Free. |
| Extra languages | Your products, categories and texts in a second or third language. | For foreign guests. | Free. |
| Multilingual (website) | Your website in at most two extra languages. | For foreign visitors. | €10 per month. Only works together with Website. |
| SMS | Send your guests an SMS from Jimani. | For reminders and free times. | The add-on is free; you pay per bundle (100 SMS for €12). |
| Newsletters | Newsletters to your own guests, with your logo and colour. | To reach regular guests. | Free up to 500 emails per month, above that €5 per month. |
| Send from your own address | All your emails to guests go from your own email address. | For a recognisable sender. | €10 per month. |
| Survey | A short questionnaire after the visit. | To hear what guests thought. | €5 per month. |
| Time tracking | Your employees clock in and out at the POS. | With staff on payroll. | €15 per month. Category Team. |
| Log in on the till, Customer details, Keep track of tips, Anonymise guest details | Free features without their own screen. | - | No card here: they are Yes/No in their group under Settings (Customer details is called Customer details on the POS there, Anonymise guest details is called Guest details: who sees what). |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| Only works together with ... Turn on ... first. | This add-on needs another one. | Turn on the mentioned add-on first. |
| A one-off amount is paid once, together with the first payment; not again after that. | The explanation for a one-off price, as with Repairs. | - |
| free until ... | An add-on from your starter package is free until that date. | Turn it off if you do not want to keep it afterwards. |
| No integrations found | Your search word does not match any add-on. | Search for a different word or choose All. |
| No data found. | There is nothing in this filter. | Choose All. |

**Related questions:**

- Which extra features are there and what do they cost?
- What does the repairs module cost?
- How do I filter the add-ons by category?
- Which add-ons are free?

**Keywords:** add-ons, integrations, connections, turn on feature, what does it cost, extra options, jimani modules

**Related:** [How do I turn an add-on on or off?](../faq/uitbreiding-aanzetten-of-uitzetten.md), [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md), [How is the Settings page organised?](instellingen.md)

---

# How do I turn an add-on on or off?

**Answer:** Go to Settings and click the Add-ons tile. At the add-on click Turn on and then on the right in Your invoice click Pay. You turn it off with Deactivate on the same card; a paid add-on then keeps working until the end of the month.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings and click the last tile, Add-ons. The tile shows how many add-ons are on.
- **Step 2.** Find the add-on with Search for an add-on… or choose a category, such as Restaurant and kitchen or Communication. With the i button you read what it does.
- **Step 3.** Click Turn on. The button becomes Selected and the add-on appears on the right in Your invoice, with the price, the quantity and the total including VAT.
- **Step 4.** Click Pay. A paid add-on is charged automatically per month; this month you only pay the days that are left. A free add-on costs nothing.
- **Step 5.** The card now shows Settings (to the add-on's screen) or On.
- **Turning off.** Click Deactivate. A paid add-on keeps working through the last day of the month; the card then shows Runs until. A free add-on goes off immediately.
- **Only works together with.** Some add-ons need another one, for example Kitchen screen asks for Courses and Courses asks for Restaurant. Handheld Terminal, Tap to Pay, Products and down payments and Transaction costs ask for a Mollie connection. The card says what you must turn on first.
- **Free features without their own screen** (Log in on the till, Customer details on the POS, Keep track of tips and Guest details: who sees what) are not under Add-ons but are Yes/No in their group under Settings.
- **Who may do this.** You need the Integrations right. A POS without a PIN can never turn on add-ons.

**Example:** You want a kitchen screen. First turn on Restaurant (free), then Courses (€10 per month; free until 1 January 2027 if you already use it), then Kitchen screen (€5 per month per screen). Amounts exclude VAT.

**Related questions:**

- How do I turn on an extra feature?
- How do I turn a paid add-on off again?
- Where do I find the add-ons?
- Until when does an add-on work after I turned it off?
- Do I still have to pay something after turning it on?

**Keywords:** turn on add-on, activate integration, turn off feature, deactivate, turn on connection, cancel feature

**Related:** [Which add-ons does Jimani have and what do they cost?](../naslag/uitbreidingen.md), [Can I try a paid feature first, and how do I cancel it?](../../prijzen/faq/betaalde-functie-proberen-en-opzeggen.md)

---

# What do you enter under Company details?

**Answer:** Under Company details you enter the name, logo, type of business, address and contact details of your business. These details appear on your invoices, order and reservation confirmations and in the widget. You can find it under Settings > Your business > Business details and opening hours.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Your business > Business details and opening hours (Company details window, `/Settings/CompanyInfo`)

**Explanation:** The Company details window has two steps. The first step contains the logo, name, type of business, language, address and phone number. Use the arrow to go to the second step with the VAT number, website, Chamber of Commerce number and the email addresses. Click Save. As long as something is still missing, Not complete yet appears next to the line on Settings.

![The Company details window with the logo, the company name and Type of business](/kennisbank/beelden/bedrijfsgegevens-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Enter the company details. The details are used on invoices, order and reservation confirmations and in the widget. | The explanation at the top of the window. | - | - |
| Customer number | Your customer number at Jimani, at the top of the window. | When you call or email Jimani. | - |
| Logo | The logo of your business. Any proportions are fine: wide or square. | At the start. | It appears on the receipt and in your webshop. Use the cross to remove it. |
| Company name | This is how your business appears on receipts, invoices and in the widget. | At the start. | Required. |
| Type of business | Hospitality, Retail or Treatments. | At the start or when your business changes. | For retail and treatments, "Eat here" is called "Sales" everywhere. This applies immediately after saving. |
| Language | The default language of your business. | At the start. | Required. |
| Address, Addition | Street and house number, and optionally a floor or unit. | At the start. | Address is required, Addition can be left empty. |
| Postal code, City, Province, Country | Where your business is located. | At the start. | Postal code, City and Country are required; Province is not. |
| Phone | Where customers and Jimani can reach you. | At the start. | Required, with country code. |
| VAT number | Shown on your invoices. | If you are VAT-registered. | - |
| Website | The address of your own website. | If you have a website. | - |
| Chamber of Commerce number | Your registration number at the Chamber of Commerce (Kamer van Koophandel). | For a Dutch business. | Outside the Netherlands this field is called Commercial register number: your registration number in the commercial register of your country. |
| Email | The general email address of your business. | At the start. | Required. |
| Invoicing e-mail | Invoices from Jimani are sent here. | If the invoices must go to a different address, for example your bookkeeper. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Company name is required | The name is missing. | Enter the name. |
| Address is required / Zipcode is required / City is required / Country is required | An address field is missing. | Fill in the field. |
| Phone is required / Email is required / Language is required | A required contact field is missing. | Fill in the field. |
| Images only (png, jpg, gif, webp). | The file for the logo is not an image. | Choose a png, jpg, gif or webp. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I enter the address and VAT number of my business?
- How do I change my company name or logo?
- Why does it say Not complete yet next to Company details?
- Which details appear on my invoice and confirmations?

**Keywords:** company details, change company name, upload logo, chamber of commerce number, VAT number, Jimani invoice address, type of business

**Related:** [How is the Settings page organised?](instellingen.md), [How do you set VAT rates?](btw-groepen.md)

---

# How do you set VAT rates?

**Answer:** The VAT rate of a product depends on its VAT group. You create the VAT groups under Settings > Till and products > VAT groups: a name and a VAT rate. Jimani sets the rates themselves and the currency; those tabs are hidden.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Till and products > VAT groups (`/settings/vatsetup`)

**Explanation:** The page shows the VAT group tab with a card for each VAT group, with the name and the percentage after it. Click the plus button for a new VAT group: enter the Name of the VAT group, choose the rate under Select tax and click Save. After that, for each product you choose the VAT group (field VAT group, Select a VAT group).

![The VAT group tab with a card for each VAT group and the plus button](/kennisbank/beelden/btw-groepen-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| VAT group information | The explanation above the list of VAT groups. | - | - |
| Plus button | Opens Create a new VAT group. | When you need a new group, for example Food 9% and Drinks 21%. | - |
| VAT group name | The name you choose for a product. | For a new group. | The percentage is added automatically on the card. |
| Select tax | The VAT rate of the group. | For a new group. | You choose from the rates that Jimani has set. |
| Choose a file | Choose a file to import VAT groups, and import it with the button next to it. With the button VAT groups you download the list. | To set many groups at once. | Only with the Import and export add-on turned on. |
| Add new VAT percentages. | The explanation of the hidden VAT tab. | - | VAT rates are set by Jimani, not by the business owner. |
| Choose the right currency | The explanation of the hidden Currency tab. | - | The currency is set by Jimani. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| No VAT groups were found. | There is no VAT group yet. | Create one with the plus button. |
| No VAT rates are available. | There are no rates available to choose from. | Contact Jimani. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I create VAT groups?
- How does the VAT rate of a product work?
- Why can't I change the VAT rates and currency?
- Can I import VAT groups?

**Keywords:** set up VAT, VAT rate product, VAT group, 9 percent VAT, 21 percent VAT, currency

**Related:** [How do I set the VAT rate of my products?](../faq/btw-tarief-instellen.md), [What do you enter under Company details?](bedrijfsgegevens.md)

---

# How do I set the VAT rate of my products?

**Answer:** Give each product a VAT group. A VAT group has a name and a VAT rate, and you create it under Settings > Till and products > VAT groups. The VAT rates themselves (such as 9% and 21%) are already available; Jimani sets them.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Till and products > VAT groups.
- **Step 2.** Click the plus button. Enter the Name of the VAT group, for example Food, and choose the rate under Select tax. Click Save. The card then shows the name with the percentage.
- **Step 3.** Open the product under Point of sale and products and choose the right group under VAT group (Select a VAT group).
- **Many products at once.** With the Import and export add-on turned on, you can import VAT groups with Choose a file and download them as a list.
- **VAT number.** You enter your own VAT number under Company details (field VAT number); it appears on your invoices.

**Example:** A lunchroom creates two groups: Food (9%) and Alcohol (21%). A sandwich gets Food, a glass of wine gets Alcohol.

**Related questions:**

- How do I set 9% or 21% VAT for my products?
- Where do I choose the VAT rate of a product?
- How do I create a new VAT group?
- Why can't I add a VAT percentage myself?

**Keywords:** set up VAT, change VAT product, create VAT group, 9% VAT, 21% VAT, low rate

**Related:** [How do you set VAT rates?](../naslag/btw-groepen.md), [What do you enter under Company details?](../naslag/bedrijfsgegevens.md)

---

# What do you set under Languages?

**Answer:** Under Languages you choose in which languages your guests see your widgets and confirmations: which language is the Main language, which is the fallback (General settings) and which languages are Visible, at most five. You can find it under Settings > Your business > Languages.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Your business > Languages (`/Settings/Languages`)

**Explanation:** The page shows a table with all languages. For each language you use a round button to choose the Main language and the language under General settings, and you turn Visible on or off with the switch. Then click Save; you see Your details have been saved!. In the Translations column you see for each language how far your products and texts have been translated. A language can only become visible once everything in it has been translated: Jimani never falls back to another language. The language in which you and your employees see the dashboard is chosen per user under Users (field Language).

![The Languages page with the choices Main language, General settings and Visible for each language](/kennisbank/beelden/talen-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Language | The name of the language. | - | - |
| Main language | The main language is the language in which the widget is shown by default. | At the start. | There is exactly one main language. |
| General settings | The default language is the language in which the widget is shown when the language is not available or has not been translated. | If you get guests from many countries. | Usually English or your main language. |
| Visible | Turns the language on for your guests. | When you want to offer a language. | At most 5 languages at a time. Grey (cannot be turned on) as long as the language has not been fully translated. |
| Translations | The status of the translation: Not in use, Main language, Completed or for example 40 of 52. | To see whether a language is ready. | - |
| We are translating your products. As soon as that is done, they will be online in the chosen language. | Shown as long as the translation of a language is still in progress, with for each language how many are already done. | - | Only with the Extra languages add-on turned on. |
| Translations, Choose a file | Import a file with translations with the button next to Choose a file, or download the translations with the button Translations. | To improve translations yourself in Excel. | Only with the Extra languages add-on turned on. |
| Save | Saves the choices. | After a change. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| A maximum of 5 languages can be visible! | You set a sixth language to Visible. | Turn off another language first. |
| This language cannot be invisible if it is the main language or a default! | You turned off the main language or the language under General settings. | Choose another main language or fallback language first. |
| Your details have been saved! | The languages have been saved. | - |
| No data found | There are no languages in the list. | Refresh the page; if it stays like this, contact Jimani. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I set the main language of my business?
- How many languages can I show to guests at the same time?
- How do I see how far my translations are?
- Why can't I make a language visible?

**Keywords:** set languages, widget language, main language, English widget, multilingual booking, translations, guest language

**Related:** [Which languages does Jimani work in?](../faq/in-welke-talen-werkt-jimani.md), [Which add-ons does Jimani have and what do they cost?](uitbreidingen.md)

---

# Which languages does Jimani work in?

**Answer:** Jimani works in 13 languages: Dutch, English, Danish, German, Greek, Spanish, Finnish, French, Italian, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese and Swedish. These are the same languages as the Jimani website. You choose which languages your guests see (at most five at a time), and each employee chooses their own language for the dashboard.

**Explanation:**

- **Your own dashboard.** Each user has their own Language under Users and permissions. If you change it, you log in again and see Jimani in that language.
- **The widgets and emails for guests.** Go to Settings > Your business > Languages. Choose the Main language, the language under General settings (the fallback) and set the languages you want to offer to Visible. At most 5 languages can be visible.
- **Translating your products and texts.** With the Extra languages add-on, Jimani translates your products, categories, supplements and labels. A language can only become visible once everything in it has been translated; until then it shows how many are already done. Extra languages has no monthly fee.
- **Your website.** The Multilingual (website) add-on puts your website in at most two extra languages. For the website you choose from Dutch, English, Deutsch, Français, Español and Italiano. The AI translates the texts and you improve them per text. That costs €10 per month and only works together with Website (€29 per month). All amounts exclude VAT.
- **Paying.** A guest pays online in the Mollie payment screen in their own language, as long as Mollie supports that language. Mollie does not support Greek; the guest then sees English.

**Example:** A hotel on the coast with German and Danish guests sets German and Danish to Visible, with Dutch as the main language and English under General settings. A Swedish guest then sees English.

**Related questions:**

- Which languages does Jimani support?
- Can I use Jimani in English or German?
- How do I set up my widget in multiple languages for foreign guests?
- Can each employee choose their own language?

**Keywords:** jimani languages, english POS, multilingual widget, website in german, how many languages, product translation

**Related:** [What do you set under Languages?](../naslag/talen.md), [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md)

---

# How do Announcements work in Jimani?

**Answer:** With Announcements you prepare a message for your employees, with a start date, an end date and a type (Informative, Warning or Beware!). An announcement appears in the help centre on the chosen days, or only at the top of the reservation screen if you set Visible when booking to Yes.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Announcements, or Settings > Communication > Announcements (`/settings/alerts`)

**Explanation:** The Announcements page shows a list with Start date, End date, Name, Announcement, Cannot be deleted and Visible when booking. Click the plus button at the top right for the Add announcement window, or click a row to change it. You can turn the two checkmarks in the list on or off straight away. On Settings, the Announcements line only appears under the filter All, until you use it.

![The Add announcement window with Name, Description, the Yes/No choices and Type of communication](/kennisbank/beelden/mededelingen-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Create internal announcements for all employees and give them a priority status, so that everyone can act appropriately. You can show this notification for certain dates, but also only when booking. | The explanation above the list. | - | - |
| Name | Enter a name. It is not visible, but it makes it easy to find the announcement in the list. | Always. | At most 50 characters. |
| Description | Enter the announcement you want to share internally here. | Always. | At most 3000 characters. In the list this column is called Announcement. |
| Cannot be deleted | Yes: when this is checked, the message can NOT be deleted by the user. This means the message always stays visible within the selected dates. | For something everyone must read. | Default No. |
| Visible when booking | Yes: when this is checked, this announcement will appear when creating a reservation. This prevents miscommunication when taking new reservations. | For example "Terrace closed today". | Default No. With Yes it appears at the top of the reservation screen for that day, not in the help centre. |
| Type of communication | There are 3 types of announcements: Informative, Warning and Beware!. | To show how important it is. | - |
| Date | Enter the start date here, when the notification should become visible. | Always. | A date in the past is not allowed. |
| End date | Enter the end date here, until when the notification is visible. | Always. | Must not be before the start date. |
| Save, Cancel | Saves the announcement or closes the window without saving. | - | - |
| Edit the notification that appears in the widget. | The explanation in the window to change an announcement. | - | See Note. |
| A notification appears in the widget, for example to let guests know something before they book. | The explanation in the Add announcement window. | - | See Note. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| No data found. | There are no announcements yet. | Create one with the plus button. |
| Your details have been saved! | The announcement has been saved. | - |

**Related questions:**

- How do Announcements work?
- What is the difference between Informative, Warning and Beware?
- How do I show a notification at the top of the reservation screen?
- How do I change an existing announcement?

**Keywords:** employee announcement, internal notification, staff message, reservation announcement, warning notification

**Related:** [How do I prepare an announcement for my employees?](../faq/mededeling-voor-medewerkers.md), [What is in the Jimani menu?](menu.md)

---

# How do I prepare an announcement for my employees?

**Answer:** Go to Announcements in the menu and click the plus button. Enter a Name and the Description, choose the Type of communication and the Date and End date, and click Save. Your employees see the announcement on those days in the help centre, or at the top of the reservation screen if you set Visible when booking to Yes.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Announcements in the menu (or Settings > Communication > Announcements).
- **Step 2.** Click the plus button at the top right. The Add announcement window opens.
- **Step 3.** Enter the Name (only for yourself, to find it again) and the text for your team under Description.
- **Step 4.** Set Cannot be deleted to Yes if nobody may click it away; it then stays visible until the end date.
- **Step 5.** Set Visible when booking to Yes if the announcement is about reservations, for example "No tables outside today".
- **Step 6.** Under Type of communication choose Informative, Warning or Beware!, enter the Date and the End date and click Save.
- **Who may do this.** The permission is called Announcements. Employees without that permission do see the announcements, but cannot create any.
- **Announcements are internal.** Guests do not see them.

**Example:** You set "Supplier arrives at 10:00, back door open" from today to today, type Informative. Your team sees it in the help centre today and can click it away once it has been read.

**Related questions:**

- How do I let my staff know something in Jimani?
- How do I create an announcement that appears when booking?
- Can I show a message for my team on a certain day?
- How do I post a memo for employees?

**Keywords:** announcement, team message, internal announcement, employee notification, announcement when booking

**Related:** [How do Announcements work in Jimani?](../naslag/mededelingen.md), [How do I add an employee and decide what they may do?](medewerker-toevoegen-rechten-en-pincode.md)

---

# What makes Jimani different from other POS systems?

**Answer:** With Jimani the POS is free and you only pay for extra features that you turn on yourself. POS, reservations, appointments, activities, ticket sales, hotel, webshop and website are in one system with one dashboard. You turn components on or off per month under Add-ons.

**Explanation:**

- **Free basis.** The first POS and the modules (online reservations, appointments, activities and hotel) have no monthly fee. Ticket sales cost €0.49 per ticket sold. At the start you pay a one-off €279 onboarding costs. All amounts exclude VAT.
- **Pay per feature.** A fixed list of extra features costs €5 to €29 per month, such as Courses (€10; free until 1 January 2027 if you already use it), Time tracking (€15) or Website (€29). You see the price on the card before you turn it on. A paid feature that you turn off runs until the end of the month.
- **Everything in one.** In the POS you turn on Restaurant, Activities, Salon, Ticket sales or the Hotel module; a block of its own is then added to the menu. The online webshop, the widgets for your website and a ready-made website are also included.
- **On your own devices.** The POS works in the browser, as a Phone App and as POS for Windows; you connect handhelds, kitchen screens and buzzers to it.
- **In 13 languages.** The dashboard, the widgets and the website are available in 13 languages.
- **Card payments via Mollie.** Without a subscription you pay 1.5% per card transaction. With the card subscription €20 per month per card terminal plus €0.06 and 0.2% per transaction.

**Example:** A café with the free POS, two handhelds and a kitchen screen pays 2 × €5 for the handhelds and €5 for the kitchen screen: €15 per month excl. VAT, plus a one-off €279 at the start.

**Related questions:**

- Why should I choose Jimani and not another POS system?
- How does Jimani differ from other POS systems?
- Can I use POS, reservations and webshop in one system?
- Is Jimani an all-in-one package for my hospitality business or shop?

**Keywords:** why jimani, what makes jimani unique, free POS, compare POS systems, everything in one system

**Related:** [What does Jimani cost?](../../prijzen/faq/wat-kost-jimani.md), [Which add-ons does Jimani have and what do they cost?](../naslag/uitbreidingen.md)

---

# Which messages can you get when saving settings?

**Answer:** These are the messages Jimani gives when something under Settings is not possible or fails, with the screen they belong to and what you do. Most of them say who may do something (often only the owner) or that an add-on must be turned on first.

**Where to find it:** Settings (`/Settings`) and the screens below it

**Explanation:** A message appears in the window or as a bar on the screen. If you see a message saying "may only", ask the owner. If you see "is turned off", turn on the add-on under Settings > Add-ons. For a technical message: refresh the page and try again; if it persists, report it via Help.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Delivery postcodes | The tab in the Excel list that you download under Delivery times and postcodes. | To check your delivery area in Excel. | Columns: Zipcode from:, Zipcode to:, Delivery costs, Minimum order amount and Delivery time. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Only the owner can connect Mollie. | When connecting or disconnecting Mollie: only the owner (or your dealer) may do that, because it determines where your guests' money goes. | Let the owner do it. |
| Unable to generate Mollie authorization URL. | The link to Mollie to connect could not be created. | Try again in a moment. |
| Your Mollie account has been disconnected. Guests can no longer pay you; connect again when you want to sell again. | You have disconnected Mollie. | Connect again under Settings > Money and figures > Payments (Mollie) when you want to sell again. |
| No store has been chosen. | When disconnecting Mollie it is not known which business it concerns. | Log in again and choose your business. |
| Invalid company context. | When connecting Mollie it is not known which business it concerns. | Log in again and choose your business. |
| This invoice has already been paid or cannot be paid now. Refresh the overview or try again in a moment. | Under Invoicing and costs: the invoice from Jimani has already been paid or cannot be paid online right now. | Refresh the overview. |
| The Gift cards option is turned off. | Under Gift cards: the add-on is turned off. | Turn on Gift cards under Add-ons. |
| Choose between one month and ten years. | Under Gift cards: the validity of a card must be between one month and ten years. | Choose a different validity. |
| A course with this name already exists. | Under Courses: each course has its own name. | Choose a different name. |
| There is no receipt printer yet. Add one under External devices, then this text will appear on the receipt. | In the text on the receipt: no receipt printer has been connected yet. | Connect a receipt printer first under Registers and hardware. |
| Images only (png, jpg, gif, webp). | The chosen file (for example your logo) is not an image. | Choose a png, jpg, gif or webp. |
| No files uploaded. | No file was sent. | Choose a file first. |
| Files uploaded successfully. | The files are in. | - |
| You may not change this user or their role. | When sending an activation or password email: you may not manage that user. | Ask the owner. |
| Enter a valid email address | When emailing a day closing: the address is not valid. | Check the address. |
| The email could not be sent. | When emailing a day closing: the email did not go out. | Try again later. |
| Record not found | When emailing a day closing: the closing does not (or no longer) exist. | Refresh the list. |
| Something went wrong while processing the JSON data. | When saving an online store widget, something unreadable came in. | Refresh the page and try again. |
| Error: | Something went wrong when fetching an image; the error follows after it. | Refresh the page; if it persists, report it via Help. |
| Edit GuestDetail | The title of the window to edit a guest field. | - |

**Related questions:**

- What does the message that something may only be done by the owner mean?
- What does the message that an add-on is turned off mean?
- What do I do about a technical error message in Settings?
- Why can't I save my setting?

**Keywords:** settings error message, only the owner, mollie connect message, is turned off, saving failed

**Related:** [How is the Settings page organised?](instellingen.md), [Which add-ons does Jimani have and what do they cost?](uitbreidingen.md)

---

# What is in the steps Edit guest details and Send email for a reservation?

**Answer:** In the Reservation information of tickets, activities and the salon, you change the guest's details in the step Edit guest details, with their Language and a Comment. In the step Send email you choose an email and adjust the subject and text for this one email.

**Where to find it:** Open a reservation under Activities, Salon or Ticket sales > Reservation information

**Explanation:** Both steps open in the reservation window and have Previous at the bottom. In the step Edit guest details you first see the guest fields of the module, below them Language and Comment, and the Save button. In the step Send email you choose the template under Email; set Edit email text to Yes to change the text for this one email, and click Send.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Language | The guest's language, which is saved with their details. | For a foreign guest. | Without a choice it says Make a choice. |
| Comment | For example an allergy or a standing wish; visible on every reservation of this guest. | For anything you always want to know about this guest. | At most 1000 characters. |
| Save | Saves the guest details. | After changing them. | - |
| Email | The template you send. | When sending an email. | On the left it shows which address the email goes to. |
| Edit email text | Yes: shows the Email subject and the Email text to adjust. | If you want to add something for this guest. | Only for this email to this guest; the template itself stays unchanged. |
| Email subject | The subject of this email. | With Edit email text set to Yes. | - |
| Send | Sends the email to the guest. | - | - |
| Previous | Back to the Reservation information. | - | - |

**Related questions:**

- How do I change the details of a guest in a reservation?
- How do I send a guest an email about their reservation again?
- Can I adjust the text of one email before I send it?
- How do I change the language of a guest?

**Keywords:** edit guest details, guest comment, guest language, send reservation email, adjust email text

**Related:** [What do you set under Languages?](talen.md)

---

# What do you choose in the Own consumption window at checkout?

**Answer:** At checkout, under On account, there is the button Own consumption. You choose the Type of consumption (Own use, Staff, On the house or Shrinkage), optionally enter a reason or name and click Book. The receipt closes at zero and does not count as revenue; the stock does go down.

**Where to find it:** POS > checkout > Own consumption (under On account); also on the handheld

**Explanation:** The button only appears if the Own consumption add-on is turned on and your role has the permission Book own consumption. Choose a type: below the choices it immediately shows what that type means. You can only book once you have chosen a type.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Own consumption | Opens the choice in the same payment window. No revenue: the receipt closes at zero. The stock goes down as with a sale. | When something is not sold but does leave the stock. | - |
| Type of consumption | Own use: The business owner takes something for private use. Staff: Staff consumption. On the house: Free for a guest or contact. Shrinkage: Broken or thrown away. | Always. | Without a choice it says Choose the type. |
| Reason or name (optional) | A short explanation, for example the name of the employee or the reason for shrinkage. | If you want to be able to find it later. | Optional. |
| Back | Back to the payment methods. | If you just want to check out normally after all. | - |
| Book | Books the receipt as own consumption. | After choosing the type. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Booked as own use. | The receipt is at zero in the journal. | - |
| A return can't be booked as own use. | There is a return on the receipt. | Simply check out the return. |
| Own consumption can only be booked on a new receipt, not on a table with earlier rounds. | The table already has rounds. | Create a new receipt. |
| Own consumption can only be booked with products, not with Miscellaneous. | There is a Miscellaneous line on the receipt. | Use a product. |
| Part has already been paid. Settle the rest with a payment method. | It has already been partly paid. | Settle the rest. |
| There is nothing on the receipt. | The receipt is empty. | Put products on the receipt first. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I book products that the staff use up themselves?
- How do I give something on the house without booking revenue?
- What is booking shrinkage on the POS?
- Where do I find the Own consumption button at checkout?

**Keywords:** own consumption, staff drinks, on the house, shrinkage, broken, private withdrawal, giving away for free

**Related:** [How do I book own consumption, staff consumption or shrinkage?](../faq/eigen-verbruik.md), [What is in the Own consumption overview?](eigen-verbruik-overzicht.md), [How do I add an employee and decide what they may do?](../../algemeen/faq/medewerker-toevoegen-rechten-en-pincode.md), [Which add-ons does Jimani have and what do they cost?](../../algemeen/naslag/uitbreidingen.md)

---

# What is in the top bar of the POS?

**Answer:** At the top of the POS there is a bar with the buttons that belong to your business. With reservations (Restaurant, Activities, Salon, Ticket sales or Hotel in the POS) these are Create reservation, Reservations, Floorplan, Order and POS. Without reservations they are Order, Order overview or Search order, and POS.

**Where to find it:** At the top of the POS screen (`/WebshopOrder/NewOrder?layout=pos`) and on the handheld

**Explanation:** Which buttons are shown depends on your add-ons, your permissions and whether your POS works with the kitchen (a kitchen printer or kitchen screen). On the handheld, Create reservation and Order are under the plus at the front.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Create reservation | Creates a new reservation: a side screen or a choice window if you have more reservation components. | When a guest books at the POS or by phone. | Only with a reservation component in the POS. |
| Reservations | Opens the reservation overview of the component you chose last. | To see who is coming. | You switch component at the top of the screen. |
| Floorplan | Opens the floorplan with your tables. | For a restaurant. | Only with Restaurant and the Floorplan permission. |
| Order | The overview of the orders and the rounds on the tables. | To find an open order. | Without reservations only if your POS works with the kitchen. |
| Order overview | Opens Order management: look up and handle all orders. | To find a receipt. | Called Search order if your POS does not work with the kitchen. Only with the Order management permission. |
| Search order | The same as Order overview, for a POS without a kitchen. | To find a receipt. | - |
| POS | Back to the POS screen to check out. | Always. | - |

**Related questions:**

- What do the buttons at the top of the POS mean?
- Why do I see Floorplan or Create reservation at the top?
- Where do I find Search order on the POS?
- Why do I see different buttons at the top of my POS than on a colleague's?

**Keywords:** POS top bar, POS menu, order overview, search order, floorplan POS, create reservation POS

**Related:** [What is in the Jimani menu?](../../algemeen/naslag/menu.md)

---

# Why does Jimani ask for a text message code when logging in?

**Answer:** If you are the owner and have confirmed your mobile number, Jimani asks for a 6-digit code by text message when you log in on a computer or phone that Jimani does not know yet. Enter the code under **Enter code** and optionally choose **Remember this device for 30 days**; Jimani then does not ask for a code on that device for 30 days.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Log in as usual with your email address and password and press **Log in**.
- **Step 2.** If Jimani does not know the device, you see the screen **Enter code** with the text "You are logging in on a device we don't know yet. We have sent a 6-digit code to your mobile number."
- **Step 3.** Type the code from the text message in the field **Code from the text message**. Check **Remember this device for 30 days** if it is your own computer or phone.
- **Step 4.** Press **Log in**. Didn't receive a text message? Press **Send a new code**. With **Back to login** you start again.
- **Who it is for.** Only for the role Owner, and only if the owner's mobile number has been confirmed. Employees with a different role do not get this question. POS devices that have been paired with a pairing code do not log in via this screen.
- **Verify mobile number.** Open your own user details via the **Profile** button at the top right. Under the phone number is **Verify mobile number**. Press **Verify**, enter the code from the text message and press **Confirm**. After that it says **Verified**. The number is only used for login help and pairing a POS, never for advertising.
- **On or off.** After confirming, the owner sees the choice **SMS code when logging in on a new device** with **Yes** or **No**. After confirming it is set to Yes. Only the owner can change it on their own account.
- **The code.** A code is valid for 10 minutes. After 5 wrong codes you have to log in again. At most 3 codes per hour are sent to the same number.
- **Text message not working?** Then Jimani sends the code to your email address. You then see "We couldn't send a text message. You have received a 6-digit code by email."
- **Different number?** If you change your mobile number, the confirmation lapses, and so does the remembered device. Confirm the new number again.
- If sending text messages has not been set up in Jimani yet, you do not see the Verify mobile number block and Jimani does not ask for a code either.

**Example:** You log in at home on a new laptop. After your password you receive a text message saying "Your Jimani login code is ...". You type in the code, check Remember this device for 30 days and you are in. For the next 30 days that laptop does not ask for a code.

**Related questions:**

- Why do I get a text message code when I log in?
- How often do I have to enter a text message code?
- How do I remember my device so that I no longer have to enter a code?
- I'm not getting a text message with a login code, what now?

**Keywords:** sms code login, two-step verification jimani, code when logging in, log in new device, verify mobile number, verification code sms

**Related:** [I forgot my password, how do I set a new one?](wachtwoord-vergeten.md), [How do logging in, logging out and the security of your account work?](../naslag/inloggen-en-beveiliging.md), [Which details are kept for a user and how do you confirm a mobile number?](../naslag/mijn-gegevens.md)

---

# I forgot my password, how do I set a new one?

**Answer:** On the login screen, click **Forgot your password?**, enter your email address and press **Send**. You receive an email with a link that works for 24 hours and once. If you have a confirmed mobile number, you can also choose **Send code by text**.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to the login screen and click **Forgot your password?**.
- **Step 2.** Enter your email address and press **Send**. You see the screen **Confirmation**: "If we know this address, you will receive an email within a few minutes." You always see that text, even for an unknown address, so nobody can find out who has an account.
- **Step 3.** Open the email and click the button **Create a password**. You arrive at **Password recovery** with the text **New password for** and your email address.
- **Step 4.** Type your new password under **Password** and once more under **Confirm password**. Under **Your password needs:** the requirements are ticked off while you type, for example at least 6 characters, a capital letter, a lowercase letter, a digit, a punctuation mark (such as ! ? # or @) and both passwords the same.
- **Step 5.** Press **Reset**. You return to the login screen with "Password changed, you can now log in." and your email address is already filled in.
- **By text message.** In step 2, press **Send code by text** instead of Send. If the account has a confirmed mobile number, you receive a text message with a 6-digit code (valid for 10 minutes). On the next screen, enter your email address, the **Code from the text message** and your new password twice and press **Reset**. If the account has no confirmed number, you still receive the email with the link. The button Send code by text only appears if sending text messages has been set up in Jimani.
- **Link expired?** You see "This link has expired or has already been used. Request a new one." Press **Request new link**. If you requested more than one link, always use the newest email: a new link invalidates the previous one.
- **Blocked after wrong attempts?** After a new password the block is lifted immediately.
- **Never had a password?** For example if you signed up without a password or your confirmation email had expired: enter your email address on the login screen and press Log in. You see "You don't have a password yet. We have sent you an email to create one." Forgot your password works too, and setting a password immediately confirms your email address.

**Example:** You click Send twice. You receive the email only once within half a minute; the link in that email works. If you click again an hour later, only the link in the newest email works.

**Related questions:**

- I can't log in anymore, I lost my password.
- How do I request a new password?
- The link to reset my password no longer works, what now?
- Can I reset my password with a text message?

**Keywords:** forgot password, new password jimani, reset password, link expired, password by text message, can't log in

**Related:** [Why does Jimani ask for a text message code when logging in?](inloggen-met-sms-code.md), [How do logging in, logging out and the security of your account work?](../naslag/inloggen-en-beveiliging.md)

---

# How do I delete my Jimani account?

**Answer:** Go to the page **Delete account** (`/Auth/DeleteAccount` on the address of your dashboard), enter your email address and password, check **I understand that this is permanent.** and press **Delete my account**. Your login account is then deleted immediately and you are logged out. This cannot be undone.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** In your browser, open the address of your dashboard with `/Auth/DeleteAccount` after it. You see **Delete account** and "We are sorry to see you go."
- **Step 2.** Read the warning under **Please note**: "If you delete your account, your profile is permanently erased. This cannot be undone."
- **Step 3.** Enter your email address under **Email** and your password under **Password**.
- **Step 4.** Check **I understand that this is permanent.** Only then can you press **Delete my account**.
- **Step 5.** Done: you see "The request to delete the account has been sent." and you are logged out. You can no longer log in with this email address and password.
- **Is the email address or password wrong?** Then you see "Invalid email or password." Entering a wrong password too often counts towards the temporary block of your account, just as when logging in.
- **Not working?** With "Unable to delete account." nothing has been deleted. Try again later or contact Jimani.
- **Only your login.** This page deletes your login account. Your business and your subscription are not cancelled by this. Deleting an employee is done by the owner or manager under Users.

**Example:** A former employee wants to get rid of their account. They open `/Auth/DeleteAccount`, enter their details, check the box and press Delete my account. Their login is gone; the business where they worked notices nothing else.

**Related questions:**

- How do I delete my account at Jimani?
- Can I permanently erase my login account?
- I want to stop using Jimani and have my data removed, how do I do that?
- Can I undo deleting my account?

**Keywords:** delete account, cancel jimani account, erase profile, delete data, delete login, permanently delete account

**Related:** [How do logging in, logging out and the security of your account work?](../naslag/inloggen-en-beveiliging.md), [How do I add an employee and give them permissions and a PIN code?](medewerker-toevoegen-rechten-en-pincode.md)

---

# How do logging in, logging out and the security of your account work?

**Answer:** You log in to the dashboard with your email address and password on the screen **Welcome to Jimani**. That is also where you find **Forgot your password?**. The owner with a confirmed mobile number receives a code by text message on an unknown device. After a few wrong attempts an account is temporarily blocked.

**Where to find it:** The login screen is the start address of the dashboard (`/` and `/Auth`). Forgot password: `/Auth/ForgotPassword`. Logging out: in the menu, under the name of your business (`/Auth/LogOut`).

**Explanation:** After logging in you arrive at the dashboard. If you are not allowed to see the dashboard, you arrive at the POS or at the first page you do have permission for. You stay logged in until you log out yourself, even if you close the browser or the POS app. After logging in, your language becomes the language set on your user. If you were given a POS PIN code by Jimani, you see it once after logging in in a message ("Your POS PIN code is ... Change it under Users.").

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Email | The email address of your account. Spaces before or after the address do not count. | Always when logging in. | Use the address you were invited or signed up with. |
| Password | Your password. | Always when logging in. | If you leave this empty and you don't have a password yet, you receive an email to create one. |
| Log in | Checks the email address and password and logs you in. | After filling them in. | After too many wrong attempts the screen Account blocked follows. |
| Forgot your password? | Opens the screen to request a new password. | When you have lost your password. | See [I forgot my password](../faq/wachtwoord-vergeten.md). |
| Register (Online within 15 minutes) | Opens the sign-up for a new business. | If you don't have Jimani yet. | Not for a second account at an existing business: the owner creates that under Users. |
| Privacy Statement, Data processing agreement, Subprocessors, Helpdesk, Terms and conditions, Cookie Policy | Links at the bottom of the login screen to the legal documents and the helpdesk. | To read the terms. | The data processing agreement and the list of subprocessors are on the dashboard itself. |
| Enter code | The screen for the text message code when logging in (owner only, unknown device). | After your password, if Jimani does not know the device. | The screen works for 15 minutes; after that log in again. |
| Code from the text message | The field for the 6-digit code. | On the Enter code screen and for password by text message. | A code is valid for 10 minutes. |
| Remember this device for 30 days | Jimani does not ask for a text message code on this computer or phone for 30 days. | On your own device. | Lapses if your mobile number changes. Logging out does not erase it. |
| Send a new code | Sends a new text message code; the previous one lapses. | If the text message did not arrive. | At most 3 codes per hour. |
| Back to login | Back to the login screen. | To start again. | - |
| Send | Sends the email with the link for a new password. | On Forgot your password. | No second email is sent within half a minute. |
| Send code by text | Sends a code to your confirmed mobile number instead of an email. | If you have confirmed your mobile number. | Only visible if text messaging has been set up in Jimani. Without a confirmed number the email is sent after all. |
| Password, Confirm password, Reset | Enter the new password twice and save it. | On Password recovery. | The requirements under Your password needs: are ticked off live. |
| Request new link | Back to Forgot your password for a new link. | If the link has expired or has already been used. | A link works for 24 hours and once. |
| Request a new code | Back to Forgot your password for a new text message code. | For password by text message. | - |
| Log out | Logs you out. | At the end of your work or on a shared computer. | The pairing of the computer with the POS, the remembered device, your language and your cookie choice remain. |

**Screens:**

| Screen | When you see it | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Welcome to Jimani (log in) | The start screen of the dashboard. | Enter your email address and password. |
| Enter code | Owner with a confirmed mobile number on an unknown device. | Type in the code from the text message. |
| Forgot your password? | After the link on the login screen. | Enter your email address and choose Send or Send code by text. |
| Confirmation | After Send: "An email has been sent to reset your password." | Open the email. After 20 seconds you automatically return to login. |
| Password recovery | After the link in the email, or after Send code by text. | Choose a new password and press Reset. |
| Your password has been reset | Confirmation that the password has been changed. | Log in with your new password. |
| Not activated | Your email address has not been confirmed yet: "Your account is not (yet) activated." | Click the link in the confirmation email, or use Forgot your password: a new password also confirms your address. |
| Email confirmed | After the link in the confirmation email: "Thank you for confirming your email." | You then receive an email to create your password. After a few seconds you return to login. |
| Problem observed | The confirmation link is not valid: "Account not found, or activation code incorrect." | Request a new link via Forgot your password. |
| Account blocked | After too many wrong passwords: "This account has been banned". | Wait a few minutes or set a new password; that lifts the block immediately. |
| Log out | After logging out: "You've been logged out successfully". | After a second you return to login. |
| No access | You open a page your role has no permission for. | Press To the dashboard or Go to home screen, or ask the owner to turn on the permission under User permissions. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Logging in did not work. Check your email address and password. | The email address is unknown, the password is wrong, or the user is set to inactive. | Check the details or use Forgot your password? |
| Your account is not set up to log in. Ask your manager for access. | On your user, Can log in is off (for example someone who only clocks in). | Ask the owner or manager to turn on Can log in. |
| You don't have a password yet. We have sent you an email to create one. | Your account does not have a password yet. | Open the email and create a password. At most one email per five minutes. |
| Logging in is not working right now: we couldn't send you a code. Try again in a few minutes. | The text message code when logging in could not be sent by text message or by email. | Try again in a few minutes. |
| We couldn't send a text message. You have received a 6-digit code by email. | The text message failed; the code is in your email. | Type in the code from the email. |
| This code is incorrect. | The code you typed is wrong. | Type the code again; after 5 mistakes it lapses. |
| Wrong code entered too many times. Request a new code. | A wrong code 5 times. | When logging in: log in again. Otherwise: request a new code. |
| This code has expired or has already been used. Request a new one. | The code is older than 10 minutes or has already been used. | Request a new code. |
| Please log in again. | Follows a message about the code: the code screen has been closed. | Log in again with your password. |
| This code is incorrect or has expired. Request a new code. | For password by text message: the email address and code do not belong together, or the code has expired. | Press Request a new code. |
| Password changed, you can now log in. | Your new password has been saved. | Log in; your email address is already filled in. |
| This link has expired or has already been used. Request a new one. | The link in the email is older than 24 hours, has already been used, or there is a newer link. | Press Request new link and use the newest email. |
| The link works for 24 hours and once. If you request a new link, this one will no longer work: always use the newest email. After that you log in with your email address and the new password. | Text in the email to set your password. | Click Create a password in the email. |
| You don't have permission to open this page. Ask the owner to turn it on under User permissions. | Your role may not open this page. | Ask the owner to give you the permission. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I log in to the dashboard?
- What happens after a few wrong passwords?
- Do I stay logged in if I close the browser?
- How does the security of my account work?

**Keywords:** log in jimani dashboard, log out, account blocked, no access, confirm email, login code sms, can't log in

**Related:** [I forgot my password, how do I set a new one?](../faq/wachtwoord-vergeten.md), [Why does Jimani ask for a text message code when logging in?](../faq/inloggen-met-sms-code.md), [How do I delete my Jimani account?](../faq/account-verwijderen.md), [Which details are kept for a user and how do you confirm a mobile number?](mijn-gegevens.md), [Users and permissions](gebruikers-en-rechten.md)

---

# Which details are kept for a user and how do you confirm a mobile number?

**Answer:** For each user there are a name, address, phone numbers, email addresses, job description and language. You open your own details with the **Profile** button at the top right. Under the phone number you confirm your mobile number with **Verify** using a text message code; the owner also chooses there whether they want an **SMS code when logging in on a new device**.

**Where to find it:** Your own details: Profile button at the top right in the header, or `/Account/UpdateUsers`. Details of an employee: Settings > Your business > Users and permissions (`/CompanyUsers`), or via the Users list (`/Settings/Users`) and then the user (`/Settings/Update`).

**Explanation:** The fields are the same in all three places. Change what is needed and press **Save**. If you choose a different language under **Language**, the dashboard is immediately in that language after saving and you stay logged in. On `/Settings/Update` and `/Account/UpdateUsers` all fields are required except Last name, Place of residence and Country; an empty required field is marked red. You may only change a colleague's details if you may manage that user (see [Users and permissions](gebruikers-en-rechten.md)); your own details always.

- **Step 1.** Under **Personal phone number** enter a mobile number, for example +31 6 12345678, and save.
- **Step 2.** Under **Verify mobile number** press **Verify**. You receive a text message with a 6-digit code.
- **Step 3.** Type in the code and press **Confirm**. You see **Verified** with the date (**Verified on**).

![The screen with your own user details: name, address, phone numbers, email addresses, job description and language](/kennisbank/beelden/mijn-gegevens-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| First name | The first name of the user. | Always fill in. | - |
| Last name | The last name. | Always. | - |
| Address | The home address. | For the staff administration. | - |
| Postal code | The postal code of the home address. | Together with Address. | - |
| Place of residence | The place of residence. | Together with Address. | - |
| Country | The country of the home address. | Together with Address. | - |
| Language | The language of the dashboard for this user. | If someone prefers to work in a different language. | After logging in the user always gets this language. |
| Personal phone number | The mobile number of the user. | For login help by text message, the text message code when logging in and pairing a POS. | Only a mobile number can be confirmed. If you change the number, the confirmation lapses. |
| Work phone number | A second phone number. | If someone has a business number. | - |
| Personal e-mail | The private email address. | For the staff administration. | This is not the address you log in with. |
| Work email | The business email address. | For the staff administration. | This is not the address you log in with. |
| Job description | The role, for example service or kitchen. | For your own overview. | - |
| Save | Saves the details. | After changing them. | Empty required fields are marked red. |
| Verify mobile number | The block under the phone number to confirm the number. | Once, and again after a new number. | Only for login help and pairing a POS, never for advertising. Only visible if text messaging has been set up in Jimani. |
| Verify | Sends a 6-digit code to the mobile number. | After saving the number. | If an administrator does this for an employee, the code goes to the employee's number. At most 3 codes per hour. |
| Confirm | Checks the code you typed and confirms the number. | After receiving the text message. | The code is valid for 10 minutes; after 5 mistakes you request a new one. |
| Verified | The number has been confirmed. | - | - |
| SMS code when logging in on a new device | Yes: Jimani asks for a code by text message when you log in on a computer or phone that Jimani does not know yet. No: only your password. | Leave on Yes for extra security. | Only for the owner, only on their own account and only after confirming the number. After confirming it is set to Yes. |
| Key button (Forgot your password?) | Sends an email with a link to reset your password to your own email address. | If you want to change your password. | Only on `/Account/UpdateUsers`. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| No mobile number yet. Enter it and confirm it: then you can log in with a text message code if you lose your password. | There is no phone number. | Enter a mobile number and save. |
| This is not a mobile number. Confirming is only possible with a mobile number. | The number is a landline or unknown. | Enter a mobile number. |
| Save the new number first; after that you can confirm it. | You changed the number but have not saved it yet. | Press Save first. |
| Not verified yet. | The number is there, but has not been confirmed. | Press Verify. |
| First enter a valid mobile number (for example +31 6 12345678) and save it. | The saved number is not a valid mobile number. | Correct the number and save. |
| We have sent a text message with a code to | The code has been sent; you only see the last two digits of the number. | Type in the code and press Confirm. |
| The text message could not be sent; we have sent the code to your email address. | The text message failed; the code is in your email. This applies to the login code and the pairing code, not to confirming. | Use the code from your email. |
| The text message could not be sent. Try again later. | Sending failed. | Try again later. |
| Sending text messages has not been set up yet. Try again later. | Jimani's text message service is not turned on. | Try again later. |
| Sending text messages is not possible today. Try again tomorrow. | The daily limit for text messages has been reached. | Try again tomorrow. |
| 3 codes have already been sent in the past hour. Try again in an hour. | At most 3 text message codes per hour per user and per number. | Wait an hour. |
| Enter the 6-digit code. | There are not 6 digits in the code field. | Type the full code. |
| The mobile number has been confirmed. | Success. | - |
| This code is incorrect. | The code is wrong. | Type it again. |
| Wrong code entered too many times. Request a new code. | A wrong code 5 times. | Press Verify again. |
| This code has expired or has already been used. Request a new one. | The code is older than 10 minutes or has already been used. | Press Verify again. |
| The number has changed. Request a new code. | The number changed after the code was sent. | Request a new code for the new number. |
| First confirm your mobile number in your user details. | For this function (for example the pairing code by text message) your number must be confirmed. | Confirm your number with Verify. |
| This pairing code has expired or has already been used. Request a new one. | The pairing code for the POS that you wanted to send by text message is no longer valid. | Create a new pairing code. |
| That didn't work. Please try again. | Something went wrong while sending or checking. | Try again. |
| The data hasn't been saved! | Saving your own details failed. | Try again. |
| Internal server error: | Switching the language failed. | Refresh the page and try again. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I change my own details?
- How do I confirm my mobile number?
- How do I change my language in the dashboard?
- How do I turn on the text message code for a new device?

**Keywords:** change my details, profile jimani, confirm mobile number, verify phone number, change dashboard language, turn on sms code

**Related:** [Why does Jimani ask for a text message code when logging in?](../faq/inloggen-met-sms-code.md), [How do logging in, logging out and the security of your account work?](inloggen-en-beveiliging.md), [Users and permissions](gebruikers-en-rechten.md)

---

# How does the advice session when signing up work and what is on the quote?

**Answer:** After signing up, Settings shows the step Advice for your business under Set up your business. You answer a few short questions; on the right you see Your advice with equipment, card payments and integrations and what it costs. With Send quote, Jimani turns on the free integrations and emails you the quote. The first line on the quote is the onboarding costs of €279 one-off (excl. VAT), followed by the equipment and the features with their monthly price.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings. At the top is Set up your business with the steps in this order: Fill in business details, Connect Mollie for payments, Advice for your business, Set up logo and branding, Add your menu or products, Add staff, Set up online booking and Publish your website. Click Advice for your business.
- **Step 2.** Answer the questions; with Next and Previous you go back and forth. You can always stop and continue later. On the right (at the bottom on a phone) Your advice grows along: What we advise, with the prices from the Jimani shop.
- **Step 3.** Look at the cards in Your advice: Onboarding, Tills and equipment, Card payments with Mollie and Integrations. For an integration you choose Remove or Add, for equipment you adjust the quantities. Under Tills and equipment you choose a Fixed register or Laptop or tablet (the web POS in your browser, No purchase).
- **Step 4.** Click Send quote. You see the question Send quote? with We turn on the free integrations and email you the quote. You then accept and pay it online. With Save only you save the advice without an email.
- **Step 5.** The quote is in the email. You accept and pay it online. With Download as PDF you save it; if you changed something afterwards, use Resend quote.
- **What is on the quote.** As the first line Onboarding costs, €279 one-off: we set up your POS, products and equipment for you and help you personally until you can continue on your own. Then the equipment that suits your business; with Continue without equipment, I work from my laptop or tablet you leave that out. Then the modules and features with their monthly price. There is no helpdesk line and no discount on the onboarding costs.
- **Card payments with Mollie.** Without a subscription you pay 1.5% per transaction, no fixed costs. With a subscription €20 per month per card terminal (as many times as there are card terminals on the quote), plus €0.06 + 0.2% per transaction.
- **Trial.** You try a paid feature on the quote free for 14 days after you have paid the starter package.
- **Who.** Only the owner or a manager sees the advice session.

![The advice session Advice for your business with a question on the left and the Your advice overview on the right](/kennisbank/beelden/adviesgesprek-en-offerte-1.webp)

**Example:** A café chooses a fixed register and two handhelds in the advice. The quote shows Onboarding costs €279 one-off, the register and the handhelds as equipment, and the handheld feature at €5 per month per handheld.

**Related questions:**

- How do I get a quote from Jimani?
- What is the advice session when signing up?
- Which equipment suits my business and what does it cost?
- What is on the quote and what are the onboarding costs?
- How do I ask for advice on card payments and POS equipment?

**Keywords:** advice session, jimani quote, onboarding costs, starter package, advice for your business, equipment advice, sign-up costs

**Related:** [What do I pay one-off at the start?](../../prijzen/faq/wat-betaal-ik-bij-de-start.md), [Can I try a paid feature first, and how do I cancel it?](../../prijzen/faq/betaalde-functie-proberen-en-opzeggen.md), [How does signing up for Jimani work, step by step?](../naslag/aanmelden-en-registreren.md)

---

# I sign up via a dealer: what do I pay and how does it work?

**Answer:** You sign up on your dealer's sign-up page, or the dealer signs you up themselves. Your POS is then set up as a copy of the dealer's demo shop. If the dealer settles the starter package at their shop, the onboarding costs on your quote are €0, with the dealer's name next to them. Otherwise you pay the starter package to Jimani yourself; the onboarding costs are then €279 one-off (excl. VAT).

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open the link you received from your dealer. At the top are the dealer's logo and Jimani's, with You are signing up via ... and Your POS is set up immediately as a copy of the demo shop of ....
- **Step 2.** Enter Your Chamber of Commerce number and click Search by KvK number: name and address are then filled in and you can still change everything. Also fill in Your business name, Your email address and optionally Street and house number, Postal code, City, Your VAT number, Your phone number and Your website.
- **Step 3.** Check the terms and conditions and click Sign up. You see Please wait a moment: your POS is being set up, followed by Check your email. Click the link in the email to confirm your email address; that also logs you in.
- **If the dealer signs you up themselves,** your shop is ready immediately and you receive the same confirmation email. The dealer then chooses whether to settle the starter package at their shop, or whether you pay Jimani yourself.
- **The quote.** If the dealer has settled it, the first line is called Onboarding costs (settled at the dealer's name), for €0. The rest of the quote (equipment, features with monthly price) works as with any sign-up.
- **Your dealer's suppliers.** With a dealer you get the button Suppliers at the top with the suppliers your dealer has set up for you: contact person, phone, email, address and a button to the website. Your dealer maintains that list.
- **If it doesn't work,** Signing up via this page is not possible yet. Contact ... may appear: the dealer has not chosen a demo shop yet. Then contact your dealer.

**Example:** You buy your POS from a dealer and settle the starter package there. The dealer signs you up. Your quote shows Onboarding costs (settled at your dealer) €0, and the features you choose with their monthly price.

**Related questions:**

- I am being signed up by my supplier or dealer, what do I pay?
- What are the onboarding costs if I start via a dealer?
- What is a copy of the dealer's demo shop?
- Do I have to pay the starter package myself if my dealer signs me up?

**Keywords:** dealer, sign up via dealer, starter package dealer, onboarding dealer, settled at dealer, POS via reseller

**Related:** [What do I pay one-off at the start?](../../prijzen/faq/wat-betaal-ik-bij-de-start.md), [How does signing up for Jimani work, step by step?](../naslag/aanmelden-en-registreren.md)

---

# I still work in the old Jimani: how do I switch to the new Jimani?

**Answer:** Your business is already set up in the new Jimani, with your future reservations available to view. Log in and click Switch now in the bar at the top, or go to Switch to the new Jimani and click Switch now. After that the reservation widget on your website automatically moves to the new Jimani and you only work there. Only the owner can switch, and there is no way back.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Log in to the new Jimani with your usual email address and password: your password from the old Jimani has been carried over. If you had no password there, use the button Set password from the email or Forgot your password.
- **Step 2.** At the top it says Your reservations still come from the old Jimani and are only here to view. Take your time looking around: as long as you have not switched, you work in the old Jimani.
- **Step 3.** Click Switch now. The page Switch to the new Jimani shows what happens: first we carry over the latest changes from the old Jimani, then the reservation widget on your website moves to the new Jimani (you don't need to change anything on your website) and from that moment you only book and change here.
- **Step 4.** Click Switch now and confirm the question. You see Switch in progress and then You've switched. For a week the top shows Switched to the new Jimani. From now on you only work here.
- **An option** from the old Jimani is called a Request in the new Jimani, and you have to confirm it.
- **Reminders to guests** that fall after the moment of switching are scheduled by the new Jimani itself.
- **What it costs.** You get the regular rate of the new Jimani, without a trial period. Reservations (Restaurant and Online reservations) are turned on immediately, and Activities if you had them in the old Jimani. See [What does Jimani cost?](../../prijzen/faq/wat-kost-jimani.md)
- **Emails.** Jimani can send you emails about the switch, such as {zaak} is ready in the new Jimani and reminders with a date on which you switch automatically at 6:00. Jimani sends these emails by hand per business; if a date is stated, that date applies.

**Example:** You open the new Jimani, already see your reservations for next week and click Switch now. A minute later it says You've switched; a guest who books on your website now ends up in the new Jimani.

**Related questions:**

- How do I switch from the old to the new Jimani?
- Can I go back to the old Jimani after switching?
- Will my reservations be kept if I switch?
- Who may switch to the new Jimani?
- Is my password the same in the new Jimani?

**Keywords:** switch to new jimani, old jimani, V1 to V3, switch now, move reservation widget, jimani migration

**Related:** [What is on the page Switch to the new Jimani?](../naslag/overstappen-naar-het-nieuwe-jimani.md), [I forgot my password, how do I set a new one?](wachtwoord-vergeten.md)

---

# What is demo mode and how do I try the POS without it counting?

**Answer:** A new shop starts in demo mode: every sale is a practice receipt, card payment is simulated and nothing counts as revenue. At the top of the POS it then says Demo mode with the button Go live. You can also try a device later, with the button Demo in the Jimani webshop or in your advice: that opens Try it yourself, a practice copy of your shop with your own products.

**Explanation:**

- **Recognising it.** In demo mode the top of the POS says Demo mode – practice sales don't count, card payments are simulated, with the button Go live.
- **The demo of your own POS.** In the Help centre open Tutorials and click Try your own POS yourself (only in demo mode). A window opens with your POS and, where that fits your business, the handheld, the kitchen screen, the receipt and the payment terminal side by side. On the right are the Tasks; they tick off automatically as you do them. When you are done you see Done! Continue with your steps.
- **Receipt and card payment in the demo.** Check something out on the POS, and the receipt appears with PRACTICE RECEIPT – not a valid receipt. Choose Card on the POS, and the simulated payment terminal shows Payment successful.
- **Go live.** Click Go live: you arrive at your steps (the to-do list). You can go live when all steps have been completed or skipped and paid. When you go live, the practice reservations and the demo devices disappear; from then on every sale is real revenue.
- **Try it yourself (a device).** In the Jimani webshop and in Your advice, a device has the button Demo (Try this device with your own products). The first time you see Your demo is being set up with your own products..., then the device as a real Jimani screen. Nothing counts: no revenue, no stock, no email, no printer, and the card payment is simulated. With Order this device you order it straight away.
- **Please note.** Try it yourself works on a computer and stays open for an hour. If you don't have any products yet, the demo shows example products for your type of business.

**Example:** You are unsure about a handheld. In the Jimani webshop click Demo on the handheld, take an order with your own products and watch it arrive on the POS. If you like it, click Order this device.

**Related questions:**

- Can I try out the POS without it counting?
- What does it mean when it says Demo mode at the top of the POS?
- How do I go live with my POS?
- Why is the card payment not real in the POS?
- How do I try a device before I buy it?

**Keywords:** demo mode, practice POS, practice receipt, go live, demo POS, try it yourself, try the POS

**Related:** [What do you see in the demo and under Try it yourself?](../naslag/demo.md), [How does signing up for Jimani work, step by step?](../naslag/aanmelden-en-registreren.md)

---

# How does signing up for Jimani work, step by step?

**Answer:** You sign up on the Register page with your email address and your website (or I don't have a website). You receive an email with a link that works for 48 hours. After the click, Jimani reads your website, asks a few short questions and sets up your shop. If you sign up via a dealer, you use that dealer's sign-up page and get a copy of their demo shop.

**Where to find it:** Register (`/registreren`); via a dealer the dealer's sign-up page (`/start/<code van de dealer>`); the older sign-up (`/companyregistration/register`)

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** On Register enter your Email address and Website. If you don't have a website, click I don't have a website; with Enter a website after all you go back. Check I agree with the terms and conditions and the privacy statement and click Ready to go. At the top you choose the language (13 languages).
- **Step 2.** You see Check your email. Click the link in the email; it works for 48 hours. No email? Check your spam, or click Send again or Different email address.
- **Step 3.** You arrive at the screen We're getting everything ready for you. Jimani reads your website and looks for your logo, opening hours and menu. Meanwhile you answer the questions (Question 1 of ...), such as What type of business do you have? and What do you sell?. Without a website you look up your business with Find your business on Google (Your business name and City), and you choose This is my business or My business is not listed.
- **Step 4.** You can send a photo or PDF of your menu or price list, also with your phone via the QR code (screen Photo of your menu, button Take a photo). A file can be at most 10 MB.
- **Step 5.** At Everything is ready! you see your POS PIN code (Your POS PIN code is ...; change it under Users). With Click here to start you go to your dashboard. If a website was also made for you, you choose Use this website or I'll keep my own website. The website costs €29 per month, the first 14 days free.
- **After that.** On Settings is Set up your business with the steps, including Advice for your business. See [How does the advice session when signing up work and what is on the quote?](../faq/adviesgesprek-en-offerte.md)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Email address | The address you log in with and where the confirmation link goes. | Always. | A disposable address is not allowed. |
| Website | Your own website; Jimani reads it to set up your shop. | If you have a website. | The field starts with https://www. |
| I don't have a website | Skips the website; you will get a few short questions shortly. | Without a website. | - |
| Ready to go | Sends your sign-up. | After filling it in. | This screen does not ask for a name or password. |
| Send again, Send a new link | Sends the confirmation email again, or a new one if the link no longer works. | If the email did not arrive or has expired. | - |
| Find your business on Google, This is my business, My business is not listed | Fetches your details from Google, or leaves them out. | Without a website. | - |
| Skip, I will do it later | Skips a question. | If you don't know it now. | - |
| Take a photo | Sends a photo of your menu from your phone. You can send several one after another. | To have products read in. | The link on the phone works only briefly; otherwise scan the QR code again. |
| Use this website, I'll keep my own website | Chooses whether you use the website that was made. | At the end of the setup. | If you keep your own site, you put the code for booking or ordering on it. |
| A dealer's sign-up page | The same fields as when the dealer signs you up: Your Chamber of Commerce number with Search by KvK number, Your business name, Street and house number, Postal code, City, Your VAT number, Your phone number, Your email address and Your website. | If your dealer gave you the link. | Your POS is set up immediately as a copy of your dealer's demo shop. |
| Older sign-up | The screen Start with Jimani today (or Free registration): you choose the type of business and what you want to offer, and fill in company name, name, email, phone and password. | Only if the new sign-up is turned off. | After that you see Check your inbox! |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Signing up didn't work right now. | Something went wrong while sending. | Try again in a moment. |
| An account with this email address already exists. | A login already exists with this address. | Log in, or use Forgot your password. |
| Please use your own email address. | The address looks like a disposable address. | Use a permanent email address. |
| Enter a valid email address. | The email address is not valid. | Check the address. |
| We can't find your registration. | The sign-up does not belong to this session or no longer exists. | Sign up again. |
| We are still working on your website. One moment. | Jimani is still reading your website. | Wait a moment. |
| Choose at least one component for your business. | Nothing was chosen in the questions. | Choose what your business does. |
| Also answer: | A question about a chosen component is still open. | Answer that question. |
| We couldn't fetch that business. | Google did not return the chosen business. | Choose again or fill it in yourself. |
| We couldn't fetch that business. | The company was not found. | Fill in the details yourself. |
| Send a photo (jpg, png) or PDF of at most 10 MB. | The file is too large or not a photo or PDF. | Send a smaller file. |
| Send a photo (jpg, png) or PDF of up to 10 MB. | The same, on the phone page. | Send a smaller file. |
| We couldn't recognise any products in it. Try a sharper photo. | There were no readable products in the photo. | Take a sharper photo. |
| We couldn't extract any products from it. Try a sharper photo. | The same. | Take a sharper photo. |
| You can't send any more files. Add your products later in your dashboard. | The maximum number of files has been reached. | Add products later. |
| You can't send any more files. Add your products later in your dashboard. | The same. | Add products later. |
| Your choices have already been made. | The questions have already been completed. | Continue to your dashboard. |
| Did you mean {0}? | On a dealer's sign-up page: a suggestion for a typo in the email address. | Accept the suggestion if it is right. |
| That is not a valid website address. | The website address is not valid. | Check the address. |
| That is not a valid phone number. Use a Dutch number or a number with a country code (+32...). | The phone number is not valid. | Check the number. |
| There is no KvK key available in this environment. Fill in the details yourself. | Search by KvK number is not possible right now. | Fill in your details yourself. |
| Enter company name, Enter first name, Enter last name, Enter email address, Enter phone number, Enter password, Enter confirmation password | In the older sign-up a field is empty. | Fill in the field. |
| Please enter a valid email address | In the older sign-up the email address is not valid. | Check the address. |
| You selected modules: | In the older sign-up: the modules you chose. | - |
| Select one or more reservation types to show in | In the older sign-up: choose the reservation types of a module. | Choose at least one. |
| Could not load the reservation types. Try again later. | The list could not be fetched. | Try again later. |
| Click sign up to activate the account. | The last step of the older sign-up. | Click Sign up. |
| The setup could not start ({0}). Try again or contact Jimani. | Setting up the shop did not start. | Try again. |
| Form submitted successfully! | The answers to the questions of the older sign-up have been saved. | - |
| Welcome to Jimani | Email when Jimani creates your shop for you. | - |
| Set your password for {0} | The subject of that email. | Click Set password. |
| Your shop {0} is ready. You log in with {1}. First choose a password yourself; the button works for seven days. | The text of that email. | Choose a password within seven days. |
| Does the button no longer work? Then request a new link via Forgot your password: {0} | After seven days the button no longer works. | Use Forgot your password. |
| You have access to {0} | Email when your existing account also gets access to a new shop. | - |
| You can now also use your existing account ({0}) in {1}. Log in as usual and choose the shop at the top. | The text of that email. | Log in and choose the shop at the top. |
| Your order {0} at Jimani: complete your details and pay | Email after a conversation in which you ordered something from Jimani. | Click Complete details and pay. |
| As discussed, your order is ready. Use the button to complete your company details and finish the payment. After paying you receive the invoice by email. | The text of that email. | Complete your details and pay. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I sign up for Jimani?
- I don't have a website, can I still sign up?
- The sign-up link in my email no longer works, what now?
- What happens after registering?
- How long is the confirmation link valid?

**Keywords:** sign up jimani, register, create account, confirmation email, link expired, set up shop, sign up via dealer, menu photo

**Related:** [How does the advice session when signing up work and what is on the quote?](../faq/adviesgesprek-en-offerte.md), [What do I pay one-off at the start?](../../prijzen/faq/wat-betaal-ik-bij-de-start.md), [I sign up via a dealer: what do I pay and how does it work?](../faq/startpakket-via-een-dealer.md)

---

# What is on the page Switch to the new Jimani?

**Answer:** On this page a business from the old Jimani switches to the new Jimani, with the button Switch now. The page first says what happens; after the switch it says You've switched. You get there via the bar at the top of the dashboard or via the button in the switch email.

**Where to find it:** the bar at the top of the dashboard > Switch now (`/V1Overstap`)

**Explanation:** As long as your business has not switched, your reservations come from the old Jimani and are only available to view in the new Jimani. The switch first carries over the latest changes, then switches the reservation widget on your website over and turns the business on in the new Jimani. If the last round fails, nothing changes and you can try again later.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Your reservations still come from the old Jimani and are only here to view. | The bar at the top as long as you have not switched. | - | Only the owner sees the button Switch now in the bar. |
| Ready to switch? | The block with the explanation: First we carry over the latest changes from the old Jimani. Then the reservation widget on your website moves to the new Jimani. You don't need to change anything on your website. From that moment you only book and change here. There is no way back. | Before you switch. | An option from the old Jimani is called Request here and you have to confirm it. |
| Switch now | Starts the switch, after the question Switch now? The widget on your website moves to the new Jimani and there is no way back. | When you are ready to work only in the new Jimani. | Owner only; others see Only the owner can switch. |
| Switch in progress | Please wait, we are transferring the last reservations. Refresh this page in a minute. | During the switch. | - |
| You've switched | Your reservation widget on your website now works with the new Jimani. From now on you only work here; you no longer need to use the old Jimani. | After the switch. | - |
| Switched to the new Jimani. From now on you only work here. | The bar after the switch, for a week, with Close. | - | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| You've switched to the new Jimani. | The switch succeeded. | Work in the new Jimani from now on. |
| Only the owner can switch. | Your role is not Owner. | Let the owner switch. |
| The switch is already in progress. Please wait. | Switch now has already been clicked. | Wait a moment and refresh the page. |
| This business has already switched. | The switch has already been done. | Nothing. |
| This business has not been transferred to the new Jimani yet. | Your business is not ready in the new Jimani yet. | Contact Jimani. |
| Switching is not possible right now: the business is in status | The business is in a state in which switching is not possible. | Contact Jimani. |
| The switch did not succeed: {0} Nothing has changed; you can try again later. | The switch has been rolled back; with the reason. | Try again later. |
| The last mirroring round failed: | A reason for a failed switch: carrying over the latest changes gave errors. | Try again later. |
| The last mirroring round could not run. | A reason: the latest changes could not be carried over. | Try again later. |
| The last mirroring round suddenly saw many disappeared reservations in V1 and cancelled nothing. Have Jimani check this. | A reason: many reservations disappeared at once in the old Jimani; as a precaution nothing was transferred. | Contact Jimani. |

**The switch emails:** Jimani sends these emails by hand per business, never automatically. They begin with Dear {naam}, and have a button Log in, Set password or Switch now.

| Subject | Text |
|---|---|
| {zaak} is ready in the new Jimani | The future reservations of {zaak} are already in the new Jimani. Look around and switch whenever it suits you, no later than {datum}. |
| Your switch to the new Jimani: {zaak} | On {datum} at 6:00 you will switch to the new Jimani automatically. Do you want to choose the moment yourself? Use the button. |
| Two more weeks until the switch: {zaak} | In two weeks, on {datum} at 6:00, you will switch to the new Jimani automatically. |
| One more week until the switch: {zaak} | In one week, on {datum} at 6:00, you will switch to the new Jimani automatically. |
| Tomorrow you will switch automatically: {zaak} | Tomorrow, on {datum} at 6:00, you will switch to the new Jimani automatically. You don't need to do anything. |
| {zaak} has switched to the new Jimani | {zaak} switched on {datum}. New reservations now only arrive in the new Jimani. Put this code on your website: (with the code of your widget) |

**Related questions:**

- What happens when I click Switch now?
- What if the switch fails?
- Where do I find the button to switch?
- What happens to my reservation widget when I switch?

**Keywords:** switch, new jimani, old jimani, switch now, switch email, reservation widget, V1

**Related:** [I still work in the old Jimani: how do I switch to the new Jimani?](../faq/overstappen-naar-het-nieuwe-jimani.md)

---

# What do you see in the demo and under Try it yourself?

**Answer:** The demo shows your own POS on real screens side by side, with tasks that tick off automatically; it is only there as long as your shop is in demo mode. Try it yourself opens a device in a practice copy of your shop, even if you are already live. In both, nothing counts.

**Where to find it:** Help centre > Tutorials > Try your own POS yourself (`/Demo`); the button Demo at a device in the Jimani webshop or in Your advice (`/Demo/Probeer`)

**Explanation:** The demo opens in a window over the dashboard. On the left or at the top are the screens (POS and, if they fit your business, handheld, kitchen screen, receipt and payment terminal), on the right the Tasks. Close the window with Close. Try it yourself sets up a copy of your shop the first time; after that you see the chosen device with what works together with it, and on the right How it works.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Try it yourself | The heading of the demo and of Try it yourself. In the demo: This is your own POS. Everything you do here is practice and does not count. | To get to know the POS. | - |
| Tasks | The list of what you can try; a task ticks off automatically when you do it. | In the demo. | - |
| Done! Continue with your steps | Appears when all tasks have been done. | Continue with your steps to go live. | - |
| Receipt | The screen with the receipt of the last order, with Customer, Total, VAT and Paid by, and at the top PRACTICE RECEIPT – not a valid receipt. | After checking out in the demo. | First it says Check something out on the POS, then the receipt appears here. |
| Payment terminal | The simulated payment terminal. First it says Choose Card on the POS, after checking out by card Payment successful. | To practise card payments. | No real payment is made. |
| With your own products, in a practice copy of your shop. Nothing counts: no revenue, no stock, no email, no printer, and the card payment is simulated. | The explanation at the top of Try it yourself. | - | - |
| How it works | The explanation for the device you are trying. | - | - |
| Also try | Other devices you can try. | To look at a different device. | - |
| Order this device | Goes to the Jimani webshop to order the device. | If you like the device. | - |
| Close | Closes the demo or Try it yourself. | - | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Your demo is being set up with your own products... | The practice copy of your shop is being made. | Wait a moment. |
| This demo stays open for an hour. | After an hour Try it yourself closes. | - |
| This demo has expired. Close it and open it again. | The hour is over. | Close and open again. |
| Try it yourself works on a computer. Open the dashboard on a larger screen. | It is not possible on a phone or narrow screen. | Use a computer. |
| You don't have any products yet; we show example products for your type of business. | Your shop has no products yet. | Add your own products later. |
| The demo is there as long as your shop is practising (demo mode). You are already live: your POS is real. | The demo of your own POS is only possible in demo mode. | Use Try it yourself for a device. |
| This is already a demo. | You are already in a practice copy. | Close the demo first. |
| No demos are available. | No demo has been set up for this device. | Choose a different device. |
| This demo is currently unavailable. | The demo cannot be shown right now. | Try again later. |
| The demo could not be set up. Try again in a moment. | Making the practice copy did not work. | Try again in a moment. |

**Related questions:**

- How does the demo of my own POS work?
- What is Try it yourself?
- Does what I do in the demo count in my revenue?
- Why can't I see the demo anymore?

**Keywords:** demo POS, try it yourself, practice copy, practice receipt, practise payment terminal, try a device

**Related:** [What is demo mode and how do I try the POS without it counting?](../faq/demo-modus.md)

---

# How do you schedule, reschedule or cancel a demo appointment with Jimani?

**Answer:** You schedule an introduction or online demo with Jimani yourself on the booking page: choose a day and a time, fill in your details and click Schedule appointment. The confirmation email contains the link for the call and the buttons to reschedule or cancel. You don't need an account for this.

**Where to find it:** the button for a demo on the Jimani website, or the link in an invitation (`/boek/...`); manage your appointment via the link in your confirmation email (`/afspraak/...`)

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** On Choose a date and time choose a day in the calendar (with Previous month and Next month) and then a time. Under Time zone you choose your own time zone. The time is then held for you for a moment.
- **Step 2.** On Your details (Enter your details) fill in your Name, Email address, Company, Website (or I don't have a website) and Phone number, and under Briefly tell us what you do and what you are looking for. what you want to see. Click Schedule appointment.
- **Step 3.** You see Appointment booked with Done, your appointment is booked. The confirmation is in your mailbox, with the link for the call and a calendar entry. With Go to the call you open the video call.
- **Rescheduling.** Open the link from your confirmation email. On Your appointment choose Reschedule (Reschedule appointment), choose a new time and confirm with Yes, reschedule my appointment. Your old time stays until the new one is fixed. After that you see Done, your appointment has been moved.
- **Cancelling.** On Your appointment choose Cancel (Delete appointment) and then Yes, delete the appointment, or Never mind, keep it. You see Appointment deleted and receive a confirmation by email; with Make a new appointment you schedule a new one.
- **Reminder.** The reminder email contains three buttons. After your choice you see Great, see you soon, No worries, we'll wait or Too bad, but no problem (with Schedule a new appointment).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name, Email address | Who makes the appointment and where the confirmation goes. | Always. | Required. |
| Company | The name of your business. | Always useful. | - |
| Website, I don't have a website | Your website, so that we can already look at your business. | If you have one. | - |
| Phone number | How we can call you. | Optional. | - |
| Briefly tell us what you do and what you are looking for. | What kind of business you have and what you want to see, so that the demo fits. | Always useful. | - |
| Schedule appointment | Confirms the appointment. | After filling it in. | - |
| Reschedule, Cancel | On Your appointment: choose a different time or remove the appointment. | If it doesn't suit. | Only with the link from your confirmation email. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| That time has just gone. Choose another. | Someone else just booked that time. | Choose a different time. |
| That time can't be booked. Choose another. | The time is no longer available. | Choose a different time. |
| You held the time for too long. Choose it again. | You took too long to fill it in. | Choose the time again. |
| Enter your name and email address. | Name or email address is missing. | Fill them in. |
| This invitation has expired. Choose a time yourself below. | The personal link from an invitation no longer works. | Choose a time yourself. |
| An appointment has already been scheduled via this invitation. If you want another appointment, choose a time below. | This link has already been used to book. | Choose a time if you want another appointment. |
| This link is not (or no longer) valid. Choose a time yourself below. | The link is unknown. | Choose a time yourself. |
| Not found | The booking page or the appointment does not (or no longer) exist: This page doesn't exist or We don't recognise this appointment. | Check your confirmation email or request a new link. |
| This appointment has been cancelled | The appointment is not going ahead. | Make a new appointment if you want. |
| This appointment has already taken place | Nothing can be changed anymore. | - |

**Related questions:**

- How do I schedule a demo with Jimani?
- How do I reschedule my appointment with Jimani?
- How do I cancel a demo?
- Do I need an account to schedule an introduction?

**Keywords:** demo jimani, make an appointment, introduction, online demo, reschedule appointment, cancel appointment

**Related:** [How does signing up for Jimani work, step by step?](aanmelden-en-registreren.md)

---

# Where do I find my notifications, my steps and help in Jimani?

**Answer:** Everything is behind the round button Help at the top right of the dashboard. The number on that button counts your open notifications and the improvement points of your shop; if the button is red, something is urgent. In the Help window you find the tiles Notifications, Your steps to go live, Try it yourself, Balance, Integration advice, Explanations and videos, Ask Jim and Contact helpdesk.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Click Help at the top right. The window opens with the text Can't remember? Here you find your notifications, your steps, demos, explanations and help.
- **Step 2.** Open the tile Notifications. At the top are the notifications you still need to check or deal with; click a notification away when you are done. Below it is Store check with what you can still improve. With the bell you snooze a warning; with the button ... snoozed warnings show again you bring them back. A point often has Fix it now, which takes you to the place where you fix it.
- **Step 3.** Open Your steps to go live for your to-do list. With See all steps you go to the page Your steps to go live. There you tick off each step (Done), skip it (Skip) or restore it (Restore). As long as you are in demo mode, sales are practice sales. When everything is done and your starter package is paid, you click Go live: from then on every sale counts.
- **Step 4.** On the tile Balance see how much AI credit and text message credit you have. An orange dot (Almost used up) means that one of the two is almost used up: less than 10% of your last top-up or bundle, or, without an earlier top-up, less than €1 of AI credit or fewer than 10 text messages. Here you choose Top up, Buy bundle and set Automatic top-up and Auto top-up to Yes or No.
- **Step 5.** If you have a question, choose Ask Jim (or the button Ask Jim at the bottom right). Jim is Jimani's assistant: you ask your question in plain language and Jim looks it up or makes a proposal with the button Apply. After applying you can choose Undo. Jim uses your AI credit and does not work on the POS screen.
- **Step 6.** If you can't work it out, open Contact helpdesk: Get help (the helpdesk on the internet), Create a ticket, Ask your question (chat) or Question from guest.
- **What stays at the top of a page.** Only what holds back your POS, such as an outstanding invoice or a POS that works in a limited way, still stays at the top of every page. Everything else is in Help.

![The page Your steps to go live with the steps per group and the button Go live](/kennisbank/beelden/hulp-jim-en-meldingen-1.webp)

**Example:** The Help button says 4. In Notifications it says Your logo is still missing. Add it, then it appears on the receipt and in your webshop. You click Fix it now, add your logo and the counter goes down.

**Related questions:**

- Where do I find help in Jimani?
- What does the number on the round button at the top right mean?
- Where do I see my notifications?
- How do I ask Jim a question?
- How do I contact the helpdesk?

**Keywords:** jimani help, dashboard notifications, to-do list, steps to go live, Jim assistant, orange dot balance, helpdesk ticket

**Related:** [How do the Help window, Jim and the helpdesk tickets work?](../naslag/hulp-en-jim.md), [How does the dashboard work?](../naslag/dashboard.md), [What does using AI in Jimani cost?](../../prijzen/faq/ai-tegoed.md)

---

# How do the Help window, Jim and the helpdesk tickets work?

**Answer:** You open the Help window with the round button Help at the top right. There you find your notifications, your steps to go live, demos, your balance, advice, tutorials, Jim the assistant and the helpdesk. You create a ticket for the helpdesk on the page Your ticket.

**Where to find it:** the button Help at the top right in the header; Jim with the button Ask Jim at the bottom right; tickets via Help > Contact helpdesk > Create a ticket (`/HelpTicket`); tutorials via Help > Explanations and videos (`/Uitleg/Tutorials`)

**Explanation:** The number on the Help button is the number of open notifications plus the points of the Store check. Snoozed points do not count. The button turns red for a notification or an urgent point. Jim only helps within your own business and with your permissions: he looks things up immediately, a change he proposes first. What Jim has done is in his history.

![The page Your ticket with the list of helpdesk tickets](/kennisbank/beelden/hulp-en-jim-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Help | Opens the Help window. | When you are looking for something or want to check a notification. | The number is notifications plus improvement points. |
| Notifications | What you still need to check or deal with, and the Store check. | A moment every day. | Click a notification away when you are done; with the bell you snooze a warning. |
| Your steps to go live | The to-do list with progress, and See all steps. | At the start. | Only for businesses from the new sign-up. |
| Try it yourself | Try a POS, handheld or kitchen screen with your own products, before you order anything. | Before you order equipment. | - |
| Balance | Your Jimani AI credit and your text message credit, with Latest deductions and Latest sent SMS. | To see your balance. | An orange dot Almost used up means a balance is almost used up. Not on the POS. |
| Top up | Opens Jimani AI credit to buy credit. | When your AI credit is low. | Amounts exclude VAT. |
| Automatic top-up | Yes: Jimani tops up your AI credit automatically. | If you don't want to run out of AI. | Requires a mandate (Direct debit). |
| Buy bundle | Opens SMS to buy a bundle. | When your text message credit is low. | Each text message is deducted from your credit. |
| Auto top-up | Yes: Jimani buys text message credit automatically. | With many text messages. | One mandate for automatic top-ups and extra purchases. |
| Turn on SMS | Takes you to the SMS add-on. | If SMS is turned off. | - |
| Integration advice | What Jimani recommends for your business, based on your own figures, with View all integrations. | To see what else you can use. | At most one tip per day. |
| Resolve with AI | Jimani resolves what can safely be done automatically; you first see what happens and what it costs. Then Start. | With many improvement points in your online store or POS. | Prices and other money matters remain yours: Jimani does not adjust products at 0.00, discounts or stock. |
| Connect a POS | Add External Device (printer, card terminal, cash drawer) or Pairing code (pair a POS, handheld or app). | With a new device. | - |
| Explanations and videos | Tutorials, Manual, Data processing agreement, Subprocessors and Restart tour. | When you want to see how something works. | - |
| Ask Jim | Opens Jim, the assistant. | For a question in plain language. | Costs AI credit; not on the POS screen. |
| Contact helpdesk | Get help (the helpdesk on the internet), Create a ticket, Ask your question (chat) and Question from guest. | If you can't work it out yourself. | - |
| Webshop | The Jimani webshop for POS devices, printers and card terminals. | To order equipment. | Only if you may open it. |
| Tutorials | Tiles with a video and the duration per topic. | - | Without videos you see: No videos are available yet. |
| New chat | Starts over with Jim; files you had added are removed. | With a new question. | - |
| Apply, Cancel | Apply a proposal from Jim or not. | After a proposal. | Jim only applies after your click. |
| Undo | Reverses Jim's last action. | If it turned out not to be right. | Only the last action in the conversation. |
| File with Jim | Send a photo (jpg, png, webp), a PDF or a product list (csv, xlsx) along, for example your menu. | To have products read in. | At most 3 files per question and 10 MB per file; they are kept for at most 24 hours. |
| Choose how we can help you | For a ticket: Found a bug, Have a complaint/problem?, Have a question?, Request a new position. | Always. | - |
| Subject, Description | The heading and the explanation of your ticket. | Always. | - |
| Adding images | Screenshots with your ticket. | If you want to show something. | - |
| We offer a reward system of €15.00 per bug found. The discount is deducted from the next invoice. Please note: The reward is paid out only once, to the first reporter. | The text under Description for a new ticket. | - | - |
| Reaction, Status | For an existing ticket: your reply and the status (Open, Pending, Urgent, Closed). | To respond to the helpdesk. | Jimani sets the status. |
| Customers, User | Fields with which Jimani creates a ticket for a customer. | - | Only for Jimani itself. |
| Your ticket | The list of your tickets: Ticket number, Date, Subject, Ticket type, Status, Requirement and Assigned to. | To see your tickets again. | Without tickets: No tickets created. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Your Jimani AI credit has run out. Top up to use AI again. | AI functions no longer work. | Choose Top up. |
| Your balance is lower than the estimate. Jimani stops when it runs out; top up to resolve everything. | With Resolve with AI: your credit is too low for everything. | Top up or resolve part of it. |
| Resolving did not work. Try again later. | Resolve with AI did not work. | Try again later. |
| Only the last action can be undone. | You wanted to reverse an older action by Jim. | Reverse the last one or adjust it yourself. |
| Undo failed. | Jim could not reverse the action. | Adjust it yourself. |
| Jim can't do this anymore. | The proposal can no longer be applied. | Ask your question again. |
| You don't have permission to change this. | Your role may not change this screen; Jim can't for you either. | Ask the owner. |
| That did not work. | Jim could not carry out the action. | Try again or ask the helpdesk. |
| You have already used Jim a lot today. Tomorrow it is possible again; for now the helpdesk can help you. | The daily limit has been reached. | Use the helpdesk. |
| This file is empty. | The file for Jim has no content. | Choose a different file. |
| This file is too large (at most 10 MB). | The file is larger than 10 MB. | Make it smaller. |
| Jim can't read this file. Choose a photo (jpg, png, webp), a PDF or a product list (csv, xlsx). | A different type of file. | Choose one of these types. |
| You have already added a lot of files in the past hour. Try again in a moment. | There is a limit per hour. | Wait a moment. |

**Related questions:**

- What can Jim, Jimani's assistant, do?
- How do I create a ticket for the helpdesk?
- Why is the Help button red?
- Can Jim change things for me in my business?

**Keywords:** help button, Jim assistant, ask Jim, helpdesk ticket, tutorials, balance almost used up, automatic top-up

**Related:** [Where do I find my notifications, my steps and help in Jimani?](../faq/hulp-jim-en-meldingen.md), [How does the dashboard work?](dashboard.md), [What does using AI in Jimani cost?](../../prijzen/faq/ai-tegoed.md)

---

# How does the dashboard work?

**Answer:** The dashboard is Jimani's start screen with the figures of your business: revenue, products sold and charts per module. What you still need to deal with is no longer on the dashboard but in the Help window, under Notifications and Store check.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Dashboard (`/Dashboard`)

**Explanation:** What you see depends on your modules. With the POS there is the block Online store with filters and cards; with ticket sales there are counters at the top for today's visitors; with restaurant, salon and activities there are charts with reservations and guests. You only see the revenue and the charts with the permission View revenue and reports. Without that permission you start at the POS after logging in.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Period (Today, This week, This month, Last 3 Months, Last 6 Months, This year) | The period of the figures in the block Online store. | To look at a different period. | Default This month. |
| All channels | Filters on how the order was placed: Eat here, Delivery or Takeaway. | To see one channel separately. | - |
| All categories | Filters on a product category. | To see one category separately. | - |
| Total revenue, Products sold, Gross profit, Average margin, Best product, Worst selling | The cards with the key figures of the chosen period. | For a quick picture. | - |
| Best selling products, Worst selling products | Tables with Product, Category, Quantity and Revenue. | To assess your range. | - |
| Sales by Category | The revenue divided over your categories. | - | - |
| Number of guests | With ticket sales: how many visitors are already inside today (Arrived). | During an event. | - |
| Expected persons | With ticket sales: how many visitors are still to come (Yet to arrive). | During an event. | - |
| Open tickets | With ticket sales: tickets that are still open. | During an event. | - |
| Store check | In Help > Notifications: the list of what is still not right in your settings. | After setting up and when something doesn't work. | Each point has Fix it now or Connect / Link now. |
| Fix this now, This costs you money or goes wrong for the customer, This doesn't look good, but nothing breaks | The three groups (red, orange, grey) in the check of the online store and POS. | Start with red. | - |
| Create your first product | A point in the check if you don't have a product yet. | At the start. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| All good. There are no warnings. | The check found nothing. | - |
| Your logo is still missing. Add it, then it appears on the receipt and in your webshop. | There is no logo. | Add your logo under Settings > Your business > Branding. |
| Your opening hours are not entered yet. Without opening hours no orders come in. | There are no opening hours. | Fill them in under Business details and opening hours. |
| The widget address must be filled in, otherwise many widgets won't work. | The Widget URL in your company details is empty. | Fill it in. |
| All your Locations in the location tab are inactive, so the Widget will not work! | No location (room) is turned on. | Turn on a location. |
| The Availability is not active, so the Widget will not work! | No Availability is turned on. | Turn on an availability. |
| All your Reservation types are not active, so the Widget will not work! | No reservation type is turned on. | Turn on a reservation type. |
| A time is not active today. During that period you will not receive reservations via the widget. | A time block of today is turned off. | Check the times. |
| The field texts are missing for | A Fields row is missing texts in a language, so the Widget does not work correctly in this language. | Fill in the texts. |
| No employee available for today, No employee available for this date | In the salon no employee (Employee, Employees) has working hours on that day. | Create a schedule. |
| Workstations, Treatment group, Treatment, Table, Product, Email type, Availability | Types of components a point in the check is about, for example a Table that is not attached to a location or a Treatment without an employee. | Click the point to fix it. |
| You have new email templates ready to import | Jimani has prepared new email templates. | Import them under Customer contact. |
| New email templates are ready to use | The same. | Import them under Customer contact. |
| No data for this period yet. | A chart has no data. | Choose a different period. |

**Related questions:**

- What do I see on the dashboard?
- Why don't I see revenue on my dashboard?
- Where are my tasks and notifications now?
- Which charts are on the start screen?

**Keywords:** jimani dashboard, dashboard revenue, best selling products, store check, widget warnings, start screen

**Related:** [Where do I find my notifications, my steps and help in Jimani?](../faq/hulp-jim-en-meldingen.md), [How do the Help window, Jim and the helpdesk tickets work?](hulp-en-jim.md), [What is on Users and User rights?](gebruikers-en-rechten.md)

---

# How do I put my products or other data into Jimani in one go with Excel?

**Answer:** Go to Settings > Till and products > Import and export. Under the type (for example Products) choose Example file or Export, fill in the Excel or CSV file and choose Import. You first see per row what will happen; only when you press Import in step 3 is anything saved. Import and export is free.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Settings > Till and products > Import and export. Per group (Till and products, Guests and reservations, and your modules such as Hospitality, Salon, Ticketing and Hotel) each type has the buttons Import, Export and Example file.
- **Step 2.** Choose Export to see what is currently in Jimani (Excel or CSV), or Example file for an empty file with the right columns, an example row and a tab with explanation. Tip: export first, adjust the file and put it back. Empty cells leave what was there.
- **Step 3.** Choose Import. The window has four steps: File, Check, Confirm and Done. Drag your file into the box or click to choose: Excel (.xlsx) or CSV (with ; or ,).
- **Step 4.** Under Check each row shows New, Changed, Unchanged or Error, with what is wrong. Nothing has been saved yet. Columns that Jimani does not know are skipped.
- **Step 5.** Under Confirm you see for example 12 new, 30 changed, 2 errors (will be skipped). Press Import to save the rows.
- **Step 6.** Under Done you see how many rows have been saved. If there were incorrect rows, choose Download incorrect rows: you get an Excel with a column What's wrong. Correct those rows and import that file again.
- **Recognition.** An existing product is recognised by the EAN code, otherwise by the name. Many types have a column Number (do not change); with it you can also change the name. Guests are recognised by their email address: one guest per address, no duplicates.
- **Export only.** Some types you can only download, such as Users, Reservations and orders, Events and the hotel lists Guest register and Tourist tax per month.
- **Permissions.** You only see the types for which you may manage the screen; exporting guests and reservations requires the permission Export.
- **Also above the lists.** Above many lists are the buttons Import (CSV/Excel) and Export (CSV/Excel) with the same window.

![The page Import and export with the buttons Import, Export and Example file per type](/kennisbank/beelden/importeren-en-exporteren-1.webp)

**Example:** You want to raise all your prices. Under Products choose Export, adjust the price column in Excel and import the file. Under Check the adjusted products show as Changed; after Import the new prices are in Jimani.

**Related questions:**

- How do I import my products from Excel?
- Can I upload my product list in one go?
- How do I export my data to Excel or CSV?
- Where do I find an example file for importing?
- Does importing cost anything?

**Keywords:** import products, excel import, import csv, export products, example file, incorrect rows, import guests

**Related:** [What is on Import and export?](../naslag/importeren-en-exporteren.md), [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md)

---

# What is on Import and export?

**Answer:** On Import and export you put your data into Jimani in one go with an Excel or CSV file, or get it out. Each type has the buttons Import, Export and Example file. Importing happens in four steps and only saves anything when you press Import in step 3.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Till and products > Import and export (`/ImporterenExporteren`)

**Explanation:** The types are listed per group. You only see what belongs to your modules and add-ons and what you may manage. Till and products: Products, Categories, Subcategories, Notes, Stock, Stock settings per product, Suppliers, VAT groups, Supplements, Supplements per product, Labels and tags, Labels per product, Discounts, Product variants, Tables (POS), Warehouse locations, Stock per warehouse location, Gift cards and Delivery postcodes. Guests and reservations: Guests and Reservations and orders. Hospitality: Opening hours, Availability, Reservation types, Fields, Locations (rooms), Tables for reservations and Combination tables. Salon: Workstations, Treatments and Employees. Ticketing: Events. Hotel: Hotel types, Rooms, Rate plans, Seasons and prices, Reservations, Guest register and Tourist tax per month. General: Users. For Hospitality and Activities you can also import Reservations, for Salon Appointments.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Import | Opens the Import window for this type. | To import data. | Only for types you can import. |
| Export | Downloads what is currently in Jimani, with readable headings, as Excel or CSV. The window is called ... export. | As the start of an adjustment or as an overview. | You can adjust the file and import it again unchanged. For lists with dates you choose From and Up to and including. |
| Example file, Download example file | An empty Excel file with the right columns, an example row and a tab Explanation. | If you don't have anything in Jimani yet. | - |
| What do you want to import? | In step 1 (File): the type you are importing. | - | - |
| Drag your file here, or click to choose | The box for your file: Excel (.xlsx) or CSV (with ; or ,). | In step 1. | - |
| Different file, Choose a different file | Starts again with a different file. | If you chose the wrong file. | - |
| Check | Step 2: per row New, Changed, Unchanged or Error, with the reason in the column What happens. | Check the rows; incorrect rows are skipped. | Nothing has been saved yet. The first 1000 rows are shown here; the rest is checked in the same way. |
| ... new, ... changed, ... unchanged (stays as is), ... errors (will be skipped) | Step 3 (Confirm): the count of what is going to happen. | - | - |
| Import (in step 3) | Saves the new and changed rows. Press Import to save the ... rows. | When the check is correct. | Incorrect rows are not included. |
| Done | Step 4: ... rows saved (or 1 row saved), and ... rows with an error not (or 1 row with an error not). | - | - |
| Download incorrect rows | An Excel with the incorrect rows as they were in your file, with a column What's wrong. | If there were errors. | Download the incorrect rows, correct them in the column "What's wrong" and import that file again. |
| Import (CSV/Excel), Export (CSV/Excel) | The buttons above many lists in Jimani; they open the same window or download the list. | From the list itself. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Checking ...… | The file is being read. | Wait a moment. |
| Tip: export first, adjust the file and put it back. Empty cells leave what was there. Nothing is saved until you press Import in step 3. | The explanation in step 1. | - |
| Choose a file first. | No file was chosen. | Choose a file. |
| I can't use this file | The file is not a readable Excel or CSV. | Save it as .xlsx or as CSV. |
| There are no rows below the header row. | The file only has headings. | Fill in rows. |
| No rows. | There is nothing in the check. | Choose a different file. |
| I don't know these columns and I'm skipping them: ... | A column heading does not belong to this type. | Leave it or give it the name from the example file. |
| Row ...: | The start of an error message for a row. | Read the reason behind it. |
| There is nothing new or changed to import. | Everything in the file is already like that in Jimani. | - |
| Nothing has been saved yet. | You are still in the check. | Continue to Confirm. |
| The file could not be checked. | Something went wrong while reading. | Try again. |
| The file could not be checked. Please try again. | The same. | Try again. |
| The check has expired. Choose the file again. | Too much time passed between checking and importing. | Choose the file again. |
| This file has already been imported. | You pressed Import twice. | Nothing; it is already there. |
| You can't import this type here. | You can only export this type. | Create it in the screen itself. |
| Saving failed. Part may have been saved; check the list. | Saving stalled halfway. | Check the list and import the rest again. |
| Something went wrong while saving. Part may have been saved; check the list. | The same. | The same. |
| Something went wrong while saving. | A row could not be saved. | Check the row. |
| Could not be saved. | The same. | Check the row. |
| This row could not be saved. Check whether all fields are correct or contact Jimani. | The same. | Check the fields or ask Jimani. |
| The window could not be opened. Refresh the page and try again. | The window did not load. | Refresh the page. |
| Choose a period: the second date is on or after the first. | When exporting, Up to and including is before From. | Choose the dates again. |
| Name: at most ... characters (now ...). | The name is too long. | Make it shorter. |
| Discount (%) must be between 0 and 100. | For Discounts. | Enter a percentage from 0 to 100. |
| Fill in Stock (new) or Add stock, not both. | For Stock: both columns are filled in. | Fill in one. |
| Group '...' does not exist; enter 1, 2, 3 or related. | For Supplements per product. | Enter 1, 2, 3 or related. |
| Type '...' does not exist; enter Label or Tag. | For Labels and tags. | Enter Label or Tag. |
| The category ... is managed by Jimani; you can't change the name. | A fixed category of Jimani. | Leave the name. |
| Main category '...' does not exist. | For Subcategories. | Create the main category first. |
| Main category '...' appears ... times. Give them their own name in Jimani. | Two main categories have the same name. | Give them their own name. |
| Write the subcategory as Main category › Subcategory, for example Phone › Samsung. | The format is not correct. | Write it like this. |
| This number belongs to '...'. You give a different name in Jimani itself; leave the number empty for a new one. | The number and name do not belong together. | Leave the number empty for a new one. |
| Give at least two answers, separated by ;. | For Notes. | Enter at least two answers. |
| Create the course first under Settings > Courses. | For Products: the course does not exist. | Create the course first. |
| This is a lane of Activities. You manage a lane in Activities management under Locations, not with the POS tables. | For Tables (POS): it is a lane. | Change it in Activities management. |
| '...' is not a valid email address. | For Guests. | Correct the address. |
| This is the email address of your business (or of Jimani). A guest needs their own address; without an address they are a walk-in. | For Guests: the address belongs to your business. | Use the guest's address or leave it empty. |
| Enter a name or an email address, so that you know whose reservation it is. | For Reservations or Appointments: no name and no address. | Fill in one of the two. |
| The number of people must be at least 1. | The number of people is 0. | Enter 1 or more. |
| empty = Left in the past, Open in the future | The explanation for the status column. | - |
| A balance can't be below zero. | For Gift cards. | Enter 0 or more. |
| Delivery time '...' is not a time; write it as .... | For Delivery postcodes. | Write the time as hours:minutes, for example 00:45. |
| Postcode from is higher than postcode up to and including. | For Delivery postcodes. | Swap them. |
| The end time isn't after the start time. | A time is not correct. | Correct the times. |
| ...: the end time isn't after the start time. | For Opening hours or Availability. | Correct the times. |
| Number of seats must be at least 1. | For tables or combination tables. | Enter 1 or more. |
| A combined table has at least two tables. | For Combination tables. | Enter at least two tables. |
| Minimum quantity must be at least 1. | For Reservation types (group size). | Enter 1 or more. |
| Maximum quantity is less than minimum quantity. | For Reservation types. | Correct the numbers. |
| Duration (minutes) must be at least 1. | For Reservation types or Treatments. | Enter the duration. |
| Image '...' does not exist. Use a code such as .... | For Tables for reservations: the code of the table image is not correct. | Use a code such as 04P-RO, or leave it empty. |
| Field type '...' does not exist. Choose from: .... | For Fields. | Choose a type from the list. |
| Field type ... needs choices: fill in the column Choices. | For Fields with a choice list. | Fill in the choices. |

**Related questions:**

- Which data can I import with Excel?
- How does importing in four steps work?
- Can I also import my stock or suppliers?
- When is anything actually saved during an import?

**Keywords:** import export, excel csv, example file, download incorrect rows, what's wrong, import error

**Related:** [How do I put my products or other data into Jimani in one go with Excel?](../faq/importeren-en-exporteren.md), [Which buttons and messages do you see everywhere in Jimani?](algemene-knoppen-en-meldingen.md)

---

# Which buttons and messages do you see everywhere in Jimani?

**Answer:** Many buttons, lists and messages work the same on every screen of Jimani: the buttons at the bottom of a window, the search field and the paging buttons of a list, the names on icons and the error messages that say what is wrong. They are all collected here.

**Where to find it:** on all screens of the dashboard

**Explanation:** If something has been saved, you see a small block on the right instead of a window. If something goes wrong, the message says what is wrong. For an error on Jimani's side, a small error code is shown below it; pass it on to the helpdesk. A field that has not been filled in correctly turns red with the reason below it.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Save changes | The button at the bottom right of a window on the last step: saves everything. | When you are done. | On earlier steps it says Next; Delete is on the left. |
| One step back, One step forward | The arrows between the steps of a window. | To go back or forward. | Nothing is saved. |
| Select all, Deselect all | Turns all choices in a list on or off. | With long choice lists. | If everything is on, the button is called Deselect all. |
| Add everything, Remove everything | Adds everything in a choice list or removes everything. | When linking many components. | - |
| Search the table | Searches in all columns of a list. | To find something in a long list. | - |
| Show ... results | How many rows per page. | To see more or fewer. | - |
| ... to ... of ... results | Which rows you are seeing now. | - | After searching it says: (filtered from ... results). |
| : click to sort ascending, : click to sort descending | A click on a column heading sorts the list. | To sort. | - |
| Export to Excel | Downloads the list as Excel. | For an overview outside Jimani. | - |
| Configure columns | Chooses which columns a list shows. | To keep the list clear. | - |
| Mark as read | Marks a message as read. | - | - |
| More options | Opens a menu with more actions. | - | - |
| Snooze notification | The bell: snoozes a warning. | If you want to fix it later. | You can bring it back in Help. |
| Cash payment | The name on the icon of a cash payment. | - | Icons without text get such a name when you hover over them. |
| Make a choice, Make a selection | The text in a choice list in which nothing has been chosen yet. | - | - |
| Import (CSV/Excel), Export (CSV/Excel) | The buttons above many lists. | To import or export a list. | See Import and export. |
| Request pairing code | On the Mollie card at Tap to Pay: requests a code with QR to pair a phone as a Tap. | With a new Tap. | Jimani then checks every ten seconds for ten minutes whether the Tap is there. |
| Fetch devices | Fetches the card terminals that are ready at Mollie. | After pairing at Mollie. | - |
| Approve permissions | Sends you to Mollie to approve the permissions again. | When Mollie asks for it. | - |
| Disconnect Mollie | Disconnects your Mollie account. | Only if you want to stop paying via Mollie. | After that guests can no longer pay you. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Not everything has been filled in correctly. | One or more fields are not correct. | Check the red fields. |
| Not everything has been filled in correctly: | The same, with the list of what is not correct. | Correct those fields. |
| These fields have not been filled in | Required fields are empty. | Fill them in. |
| This is required. | You have to fill in this field. | Fill it in. |
| At least ... characters. | The text is too short. | Make it longer. |
| At most ... characters. | The text is too long. | Make it shorter. |
| Enter a valid number. | There is no number. | Enter a number. |
| This value is not valid. | The input does not fit the field. | Correct the input. |
| You've been logged out. Please log in again. | Your session has expired. | Log in again. |
| You don't have permission for this action. | Your role may not do this. | Ask the owner. |
| Not found or not part of this business. | What you are opening does not (or no longer) exist or belongs to a different business. | Refresh the list. |
| Someone else has just changed this. Reload the page and try again. | A colleague saved something at the same time. | Reload the page. |
| File too large. | The file is too large to upload. | Choose a smaller file. |
| Too many requests for a moment, try again shortly. | Too many requests came in at once. | Wait a moment. |
| Something went wrong on our side. Try again; if it persists, report it via Jim/Help. | An error at Jimani. | Try again; otherwise pass on the error code. |
| Error code: ... | The number of the error. | Pass it on to the helpdesk. |
| No connection to the server. Check the internet connection and try again. | Your request did not reach Jimani. | Check your internet. |
| Something went wrong | The heading of a message when the server cannot be reached. | Check your internet. |
| That did not work. Please try again. | An action did not work. | Try again. |
| Saved failed! | Saving in an old screen did not work. | Try again. |
| Your details have been saved! | Saving worked. | - |
| Button text is required | The text on a button is empty. | Fill in a text. |
| Email sent, Email not sent | Whether an email (such as a confirmation) has gone out. | If not sent: try again. |
| Error loading company details. | Your company details did not load. | Refresh the page. |
| Error loading data | A list did not load. | Refresh the page. |
| Missing selection | You have not chosen anything. | Choose something. |
| No items selected yet. Go back to previous steps and select options. | Nothing has been chosen yet in a window with steps. | Go back and choose. |
| There is nothing in the list to export. | The list is empty. | Choose a different period or filter. |
| Export failed | The Excel or PDF file of a report did not arrive. | Try again. |
| No results, No results found, Nothing to show yet | The list is empty or your search found nothing. | Search for something else. |
| We have detected that you are currently using an unsupported old Internet Explorer browser. | Jimani does not work in Internet Explorer. | Use a newer browser. |
| Scan the QR or type this code into the Mollie Tap app | After Request pairing code. | Scan the code with the phone. |
| Scan the code with the Mollie Tap app. As soon as the device is paired, it appears here automatically. | Jimani is waiting for the Tap. | Wait until the device appears. |
| The Tap has been paired and is now under POS & Hardware. | The Tap is ready. | - |
| Nothing new was ready at Mollie. You have ... card terminal(s). | Fetch devices found nothing new. | Pair at Mollie first. |
| Mollie does not provide a pairing code via Jimani for your account. Create it in your Mollie dashboard: Point-of-sale, Add terminal, Activate Tap. Scan that code with the Mollie Tap app; the device then appears here automatically. | Mollie does not supply the code via Jimani. | Create the code in your Mollie dashboard. |
| Taking you to Mollie... | After Approve permissions. | Wait a moment. |
| Mollie is not reachable at the moment. Try again in a few minutes. | Mollie does not respond. | Try later. |
| Are you sure? After disconnecting, guests can no longer pay you until you connect again. | The question at Disconnect Mollie. | Only choose OK if you really want to disconnect. |

**Related questions:**

- What do the icons and buttons in Jimani mean?
- What is the error code at the bottom of an error message?
- Why has a field turned red?
- How do I search and page through a list?

**Keywords:** jimani error message, not everything filled in correctly, no permission for this action, error code, save changes, search table, pair tap

**Related:** [What is on Import and export?](importeren-en-exporteren.md), [How do the Help window, Jim and the helpdesk tickets work?](hulp-en-jim.md)

---

# What can you set under Documents?

**Answer:** Under Documents you decide what appears on the PDFs your guests receive: which company details are at the bottom, whether the PDF is attached to the email, and the text per document and per language. On the right you immediately see a preview.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Communication > Documents (`/Documenten`)

**Explanation:** The page has three blocks: What's on your PDFs, Attach and Text per document. On the right is the Preview; on a narrow screen you open it with View preview. Click Save to keep your choices. Save applies to the PDFs of all your modules.

![The Documents screen with the Yes/No lines for the PDF and the preview on the right](/kennisbank/beelden/documenten-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| What's on your PDFs | Per line Yes or No: Company name, Address, City, Email address, Phone number, Website address, VAT number and Chamber of Commerce number at the bottom of each PDF. | To put your details on the confirmation, quote and invoice. | The details come from your company details. If a line has never been saved, it is not on the PDF. |
| PDF as email attachment | Yes: the confirmation email to your guest includes the PDF. | Always, unless you don't want an attachment. | Default Yes. |
| Text per document | A tab per language of your business, with a text at the bottom of the PDF per document. The guest gets the language of their reservation. | For example for your cancellation terms. | Without languages you see: Your business has no languages yet. First choose your languages under Languages. |
| Document | The documents: Reservation confirmation, Quotation, Invoice and Request. | - | - |
| Text on the PDF | The text at the bottom of this document in this language. | - | At most 2000 characters. |
| File name | The name of the PDF for an appointment. Empty = the default name. | Only for appointments (salon). | At most 100 characters. |
| Preview | Shows the PDF of this document with what you have set now. | Before you save. | The preview does not save anything. |
| View preview | Opens the preview on a narrow screen. | On a phone or tablet. | - |
| Preview language | The language of the PDF in the preview. | With more languages. | - |
| Open the PDF in a new tab | Opens the preview separately. | If your device does not show the PDF in the page. | - |
| Save | Saves all choices. | When you are done. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Saved | Your choices have been saved. | - |
| Saving did not work. Please try again. | Saving did not work. | Try again. |
| Create preview | The preview is being made. | Wait a moment. |
| The preview did not work. Please try again. | The PDF could not be made. | Try again. |
| Your device does not show the PDF in the page. Open the preview in a new tab. | Your browser does not show a PDF in the page. | Choose Open the PDF in a new tab. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I adjust the PDFs my guests receive?
- Can I attach the PDF to the email?
- How do I change the text on my confirmation or invoice?
- Which company details are at the bottom of my PDFs?

**Keywords:** set up PDF, confirmation PDF, invoice text, chamber of commerce number on invoice, VAT number on PDF, PDF email attachment, documents

**Related:** [Which buttons and messages do you see everywhere in Jimani?](algemene-knoppen-en-meldingen.md)

---

# How do I send a newsletter to my guests, and what does it cost?

**Answer:** Turn on the Newsletters add-on. Newsletters are free up to and including 500 emails per month; if you send more in a month, that month costs €5 (excluding VAT), on your monthly invoice for the month after. You create the newsletter under Settings > Communication > Email, tab Newsletters, with the button + Newsletter.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1. Turn on.** Go to Settings > Add-ons and turn on Newsletters. The price is shown at the add-on; how turning on, trying and cancelling works, you can read in [Can I try a paid feature first, and how do I cancel it?](../../prijzen/faq/betaalde-functie-proberen-en-opzeggen.md).
- **Step 2. New newsletter.** Go to Settings > Communication > Email and choose the tab Newsletters. Click + Newsletter at the top right.
- **Step 3. Recipients.** Under 1. Recipients you give the newsletter a name (only for yourself) and choose who receives it. Below the filter is a counter with the number of recipients. See [How do I choose who receives my newsletter?](nieuwsbrief-ontvangers-kiezen.md).
- **Step 4. Content.** Under 2. Content you choose a subject per language and build the email from blocks: Heading, Text, Image, Button and Reserve now. Your logo, your business address and the unsubscribe link are added automatically. On the right you see the email as the guest sees it.
- **Step 5. Test email.** Under 3. Send you enter your own address under Test email to and click Test email. The test email goes in the language you are currently viewing under Content and does not count towards the 500 per month.
- **Step 6. Send or schedule.** Click Send now (you can't undo that) or choose a date and time under Schedule for and click Schedule. Until that moment you can still change the newsletter or cancel it with Cancel scheduling. A changed, scheduled newsletter goes back to draft: schedule it again afterwards.
- **Free up to 500.** You may send 500 newsletter emails per calendar month for free. At the top of the overview, sent this month shows how many have already gone out. If you send more than 500 in a month, sending simply continues and that month costs €5 (excluding VAT), on your monthly invoice for the month after. If a newsletter takes you above 500, Jimani tells you when scheduling.
- **After sending.** In the overview you see for each sent newsletter the number of recipients, what percentage opened it and clicked on it, how many guests unsubscribed and how many emails were not delivered. You can no longer change a sent newsletter; with Copy you make a new draft of it.
- **Sender, reply address and colour.** You set those at the bottom of the overview under Settings. If you want the newsletter to really come from your own email address, also turn on Send from your own address: [How can I send email from my own email address?](mailen-vanaf-eigen-adres.md).

![The Newsletters screen with the counters sent this month and the list of newsletters](/kennisbank/beelden/nieuwsbrief-versturen-1.webp)

**Example:** You have 380 guests with consent and in October you already send a newsletter to 300 of them. In November you send another newsletter: the counter at Newsletters is then at 0 of 500 and all 380 recipients can be included.

**Related questions:**

- How do I make a newsletter?
- What does sending a newsletter cost?
- How many newsletters may I send per month?
- Can I schedule a newsletter or send a test email first?

**Keywords:** send newsletter, make newsletter, mailing guests, newsletter cost, 500 emails per month, schedule newsletter, test email newsletter

**Related:** [Who may I send a newsletter to under GDPR?](nieuwsbrief-toestemming-en-afmelden.md), [How does the Newsletters screen work in Jimani?](../naslag/nieuwsbrieven-overzicht.md), [How does the Newsletter window work in Jimani?](../naslag/nieuwsbrief-maken.md), [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md)

---

# Who may I send a newsletter to under GDPR, and how do guests unsubscribe?

**Answer:** By default only guests who have turned on the checkbox "I want to receive news" themselves receive your newsletter. Every newsletter has an unsubscribe link; anyone who unsubscribes never receives a newsletter from your business again. You can also email existing guests, but then you are responsible for that yourself.

**Explanation:**

- **The checkbox.** If the Newsletters add-on is on, the reservation widget shows a checkbox with the text "I want to receive news and offers from (your business) (you can unsubscribe at any time)". It is off by default: the guest has to turn it on themselves. The Newsletters screen gives the widget or the reservation itself as the source. At the top of the Newsletters screen you see how many guests have given this checkbox.
- **Signing up via your website.** If your Jimani website has the Newsletter block, a visitor enters their email address there and turns on the checkbox for consent. This works with double opt-in: they first receive a confirmation email and the consent only applies once they click the link in that email. The link works for 7 days, and a confirmation email goes to the same address at most once every 10 minutes. The form always gives the same answer, so nobody can see who is already on your list.
- **Who never takes part.** Unsubscribed addresses, walk-ins (guests without details), the email address of your own business and guests with a no-show (if you leave that filter on) do not receive a newsletter.
- **Also email existing guests.** Under Settings, at the bottom of the Newsletters screen, choose the option Existing guests too under Who are you allowed to email?. Jimani then shows the question Also email existing guests? with a warning about the GDPR. Only when you click I understand, turn it on is the choice saved. If you cancel the question, the choice Only guests with the checkbox remains. Jimani records who agreed and when. The warning says that under the GDPR you usually may not simply send a newsletter to guests without consent, unless they have been a customer of yours, you offer similar services and they could refuse at the time of their visit.
- **Unsubscribing by the guest.** At the bottom of every newsletter is an unsubscribe link. The guest then sees the page "You have been unsubscribed" (in Dutch, German, French or English, according to the language of the email). If they unsubscribe by accident, they can click Sign up again after all. Unsubscribing works without logging in and applies to your business.
- **One click is enough.** The unsubscription happens as soon as the guest opens the link in their browser; they don't have to fill in anything. Programs of companies that only check links therefore do not unsubscribe anyone by accident.
- **What you see.** In the overview, the column Unsubscribed shows for each sent newsletter how many guests unsubscribed.

![At the bottom of the Newsletters screen the Settings block with the choice Who are you allowed to email?](/kennisbank/beelden/nieuwsbrief-toestemming-en-afmelden-1.webp)

**Example:** A guest books via your widget and leaves the checkbox off. They do not receive your newsletter, even if they come often. If you turn on Existing guests too, they do receive it, until they unsubscribe.

**Related questions:**

- May I send a newsletter to all my guests under the GDPR?
- How do guests unsubscribe from the newsletter?
- When does a guest receive my newsletter?
- Can I email existing guests without consent?

**Keywords:** newsletter gdpr, newsletter consent, unsubscribe newsletter, double opt-in, I want to receive news, gdpr mailing

**Related:** [How do I send a newsletter to my guests, and what does it cost?](nieuwsbrief-versturen.md), [How do I choose who receives my newsletter?](nieuwsbrief-ontvangers-kiezen.md), [What does a guest see when they unsubscribe from the newsletter?](../naslag/nieuwsbrief-afmeldpagina.md)

---

# How do I choose who receives my newsletter?

**Answer:** Under 1. Recipients of a newsletter you set filters: module, period, reservation type, number of visits, revenue, how long ago and language. The counter below the filters shows right away how many guests the newsletter goes to. Without filters, everyone who has given consent receives it.

**Explanation:**

- **Name.** Only for yourself, in the list. The guest sees the subject.
- **Modules.** Only if your business has guests from more than one module (Hospitality, Ticketing, Online store and POS, Salon, Hotel or Activities). Nothing selected = all modules.
- **Visited between.** Guests who visited or booked in this period. Enter a date in From and Up to and including; empty means always.
- **Reservation type.** Only guests who booked this type of reservation. Nothing selected = all types. For the online store and the POS there is no type here.
- **Minimum number of visits.** For example 3 for regular guests. Empty = everyone.
- **Minimum revenue.** What the guest has spent in total. Empty = everyone.
- **Hasn't been back since.** A number of days, to win guests back. Empty = everyone.
- **Guest's language.** Only if your business has more than one language. Each guest receives the version in their own language; if that is missing, the first language.
- **Skip guests with a no-show.** Is set to Yes by default: guests who have ever failed to show up receive nothing. If you set this to No, they are included.
- **Always excluded.** Unsubscribed addresses, walk-in guests, the address of your own business and duplicate addresses (each address receives one email). Without the choice Existing guests too, only guests with the checkbox are included.
- **Subscribers via your website.** Anyone who signed up (and confirmed) via the Newsletter block on your website is included as long as your filter only concerns language and no-shows. If you choose a filter about visits (module, period, type, number, revenue or not been back), subscribers without a booking drop out.
- **The counter.** Below the filters you see the number of recipients and, per language, how many there are. This matches the moment you click Send now or Schedule: when scheduling, the recipients are determined again.

![The block 1. Recipients of a new newsletter with the filters and the counter](/kennisbank/beelden/nieuwsbrief-ontvangers-kiezen-1.webp)

**Example:** You want to win back regular guests: set Minimum number of visits to 3 and Hasn't been back since to 90 days. The counter immediately shows how many guests that is.

**Related questions:**

- How do I send a newsletter only to regular guests?
- How do I filter recipients by revenue or number of visits?
- How do I see how many people will receive my newsletter?
- Can I send a newsletter only to guests of one module?

**Keywords:** newsletter recipients, newsletter filter, email regular guests, win back guests, newsletter target group, newsletter language

**Related:** [How do I send a newsletter to my guests, and what does it cost?](nieuwsbrief-versturen.md), [Who may I send a newsletter to under GDPR, and how do guests unsubscribe?](nieuwsbrief-toestemming-en-afmelden.md), [How does the Newsletter window work in Jimani?](../naslag/nieuwsbrief-maken.md)

---

# How can I send email from my own email address instead of noreply@jimani.nl?

**Answer:** Turn on the add-on Send from your own address (€10 per month, excluding VAT). After that, confirmations, reminders, invoices and newsletters are sent from your address, for example info@yourbusiness.nl. You can choose from three ways to connect.

**Explanation:**

- **Turn on.** Go to Settings > Add-ons and turn on Send from your own address. After that you find the screen under Settings > Communication > Email, tab Send from your own address.
- **Step 1. Enter the address.** Under Email address enter the address you want to send from. Under Sender name enter the name as it appears in your guest's inbox; empty = the name of your business. Click Continue. Jimani checks where this address is managed (for example Google Workspace, Microsoft 365 or your own provider) and marks the best way as recommended.
- **Step 2. Choose one of the three ways.**
  - **Verify your own domain** (recommended for an address on your own domain): you add three DNS records to your domain. It works with every provider, even if you later change the password of your mailbox. See [How do I connect my own domain with three DNS records?](eigen-adres-dns-regels.md).
  - **Own mail server (SMTP):** with the details of your mailbox. With Google and Microsoft often with an app password.
  - **Connect with Google or Microsoft:** log in with your Google or Microsoft account, without a password and without DNS records. This only appears if this connection has been set up on the Jimani server; otherwise it says "Not available yet". See [How do I connect my mailbox via SMTP, Google or Microsoft?](eigen-adres-mailserver-google-microsoft.md).
- **Free addresses.** An address from a free provider such as gmail.com or outlook.com is not yours: the Verify your own domain route is then turned off. In that case choose logging in with Google or Microsoft, or your own mail server.
- **Test email.** As soon as it is connected, click Test email. You receive an email from your own address, just like all your confirmations, reminders and invoices will be.
- **If it fails once.** If an email cannot be sent from your own address, it still goes out via Jimani (noreply@jimani.nl), with replies going to your business. So a guest never misses an email. With the Test email, Jimani reports that the email was sent via Jimani, with the last error message.
- **Disconnect.** Click Disconnect and confirm. Emails then go via Jimani again, with replies going to your business.

![The Send from your own address screen with the status and the field for the email address](/kennisbank/beelden/mailen-vanaf-eigen-adres-1.webp)

**Example:** Your restaurant sends email from info@restaurantvoorbeeld.nl. You choose Verify your own domain, add the three DNS records, click Check and then Test email. From that moment your address is the sender on every confirmation.

**Related questions:**

- How do I make emails come from my own email address?
- Why do my confirmations come from noreply@jimani.nl?
- What does sending from my own address cost?
- Which ways are there to connect my own email address?

**Keywords:** send from own address, own sender, own email address as sender, noreply jimani, confirmation email own domain, spf dkim

**Related:** [How do I connect my own domain with three DNS records?](eigen-adres-dns-regels.md), [How do I connect my mailbox via SMTP, Google or Microsoft?](eigen-adres-mailserver-google-microsoft.md), [How does the Send from your own address screen work in Jimani?](../naslag/eigen-afzender.md), [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md)

---

# How do I connect my own domain with three DNS records?

**Answer:** Under Send from your own address choose the route Verify your own domain and click Create the DNS records. Jimani shows three records that you add to your domain, and then you click Check. Whoever manages your domain, for example your web developer, can be sent the records by email.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Communication > Email, tab Send from your own address. Enter your address, click Continue and under 2. Choose how to connect choose Verify your own domain with the button Create the DNS records.
- **Step 2.** The screen shows the block DNS records for (your domain) with a table: Type, Name (host), Value and Status. Next to each name and value there is a copy button. Add these three records to the domain, at your provider or web developer.
- **Note when adding them.** For a CNAME, do not put a dot at the end, and keep "proxy" (Cloudflare) turned off.
- **Step 3. Check.** Click Check. If a record is correct, the Status column shows "correct"; otherwise "not yet". After adding them it can take up to a few hours before the records are visible: try again later if the message says "Not all records are correct yet".
- **Still waiting for the records?** At the top of the screen it then says that Jimani is waiting for the DNS records for your address. Until they are in place, emails go via Jimani. With Start over you begin again from the start.
- **Let your web developer do it.** Under Let your web developer do it enter your web developer's email address and click Send the records. Jimani emails him the three records with the request to add them to the domain. Without an address the screen says: Enter your web developer's email address.
- **Done.** Once the domain is verified, Jimani reports "Your domain is verified. Now send a test email." and at the top it says Emails are sent from (your address). Click Test email.
- **Advantage.** This route keeps working if you change the password of your mailbox, and works with every provider.

**Example:** Your domain is with a provider that you manage yourself: you create three CNAME records, wait an hour and click Check. All three records show "correct".

**Related questions:**

- What are DNS records and where do I add them?
- How do I verify my domain so I can send email?
- How do I have my web developer set up the DNS records?
- What does the status of a DNS record mean?

**Keywords:** dns records email, verify domain, cname email, send email own domain, web developer dns, check dns

**Related:** [How can I send email from my own email address instead of noreply@jimani.nl?](mailen-vanaf-eigen-adres.md), [How does the Send from your own address screen work in Jimani?](../naslag/eigen-afzender.md)

---

# How do I connect my mailbox via SMTP, Google or Microsoft?

**Answer:** Under Send from your own address choose the route Own mail server (SMTP) and enter the server, port, username and password of your mailbox, or choose Connect with Google or Microsoft and log in. After that, all emails are sent from that address.

**Explanation:**

- **Route Own mail server (SMTP).** Click Enter details. Jimani pre-fills the Outgoing mail server and the Port based on your provider (for example smtp.gmail.com for Google); change them if yours is different. The port is usually 587.
- **Username and Password.** The Username is usually your email address; if you leave it empty, Jimani uses the address above. Under Password enter the password of the mailbox, for Google and Microsoft often an app password. Leave a saved password empty if you do not want to change it.
- **Test connection and link.** Click Test connection and link. Jimani logs in and sends a test email from your own address to the email address you are logged in with. If that works, the screen reports "Success: there's a test email in (your address). All emails are now sent from (your address)". A Test email button and Disconnect then also appear.
- **Error messages.** Without a server or port: Enter the server and the port (usually 587). Without a password: Enter the password. If the server is not open on the internet: This mail server cannot be reached from the internet. Enter your provider's server.
- **Route Connect with Google or Microsoft.** Click the Google or Microsoft button (the button of your own provider comes first) and log in with that provider. You give permission and return to Jimani with a message that it is connected. This also works for gmail.com and outlook.com addresses. If the connection is not turned on, the screen says: Connecting with (Google or Microsoft) is not available yet.
- **Connection revoked.** If you revoke access at Google or Microsoft, or it expires, the screen shows: The connection has been revoked. Reconnect; until then emails go via Jimani. Click Reconnect. In the meantime emails simply go out via Jimani, with replies going to your business.
- **Which route when?** If you have an address on your own domain, Jimani recommends the DNS route. For a free address, Jimani recommends logging in if that is possible, otherwise your own mail server.

**Example:** You use a gmail.com address for your small business. You choose Connect with Google, log in and give permission. You click Test email and the test email arrives from your Gmail address.

**Related questions:**

- How do I connect my Gmail or Outlook address to Jimani?
- Which SMTP details do I need to enter?
- Which port do I use for my mail server?
- What happens if sending from my own mailbox fails?

**Keywords:** connect smtp, app password gmail, connect google email, connect microsoft 365 email, set up mail server, connect outlook

**Related:** [How can I send email from my own email address instead of noreply@jimani.nl?](mailen-vanaf-eigen-adres.md), [How do I connect my own domain with three DNS records?](eigen-adres-dns-regels.md), [How does the Send from your own address screen work in Jimani?](../naslag/eigen-afzender.md)

---

# How do I automatically send guests a survey after their visit, and what does it cost?

**Answer:** Turn on the add-on Survey (€5 per month, excluding VAT). Every business has a survey ready per module (the starter set). After that, Jimani sends the guest an email with a link to the survey, a number of hours after departure. This works for hospitality, activities, ticketing, salon and the online webshop.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1. Turn on.** Go to Settings > Add-ons and turn on Survey. Without this add-on the starter set sends nothing. Businesses that already had their own survey before the starter sets keep sending it.
- **Step 2. See what is ready.** Go to Settings > Communication > Survey. On the Survey tab there is a survey per module with a status dot (active or not active): for example Restaurant survey or Salon survey. If a module still has no survey, the button Use starter set appears at the top right. One click sets up the starter set for every module without a survey; a second click does nothing.
- **Step 3. Adjust the survey (optional).** Click the survey. In the window you change the name, choose the Reservation types it applies to (all = applies to everything in that module), choose which Survey fields (questions) it contains and in which order, and set it to Active Yes or No. See [Which questions are in the survey, and can I add my own?](enquete-vragen-en-nps.md).
- **Step 4. Decide when the email goes out.** Go to Settings > Communication > Email, tab Customer contact, and click Send times at the top right. Choose the Survey tile. Under Hours after enter "In how many hours will this email be sent?". See [When are automatic emails sent to guests?](berichten-verzendtijden-instellen.md).
- **Step 5. Adjust the email (optional).** The text of the survey email is under Customer contact as a template with email type Survey. Leave the link to the survey in it (the tag {Survey}). See [How do I change the text of an email to guests?](mailsjabloon-aanpassen.md).
- **Which survey does a guest get?** Jimani chooses the active survey that mentions the guest's reservation type. If no survey mentions that type, the guest gets the module's active survey without types (the starter set). If it is a tie, the oldest wins.
- **Per module.** Hospitality, activities and ticketing send the email after the guest has been marked as departed. For a salon, the end of the appointment counts. For the online webshop, the order counts. If Hours after for a salon appointment or webshop order is set to 0, the email goes out after about five minutes.
- **What the guest sees.** The link opens the survey in your widget, in the guest's language. The guest answers the questions and enters their details; there are two checkboxes: whether their response may be published and whether that may be anonymous.
- **Also by SMS.** If you have the add-on SMS, you can create an automatic SMS there with the moment Survey (with the survey link): 0 to 72 hours after departure, where 0 = immediately. See [How does the SMS screen work in Jimani?](../naslag/sms.md).
- **Once.** For a salon appointment or webshop order, Jimani schedules only one survey email.

![The Survey screen with the surveys per module and the button Use starter set](/kennisbank/beelden/enquete-na-bezoek-instellen-1.webp)

**Example:** A salon turns on Survey and leaves Hours after at 24. A customer has an appointment on Tuesday at 14:00 that ends at 15:00. On Wednesday around 15:00 she receives the email with the link to Salon survey.

**Related questions:**

- How do I ask guests for a review or rating after their visit?
- What does the survey cost?
- When does the guest receive the survey?
- Which modules does the survey work for?
- Why is no survey being sent?

**Keywords:** survey after visit, guest feedback, nps, satisfaction survey, send survey, collect reviews, survey starter set

**Related:** [Which questions are in the survey, and can I add my own?](enquete-vragen-en-nps.md), [How does the Survey screen work in Jimani?](../naslag/enquetes.md), [When are automatic emails sent to guests?](berichten-verzendtijden-instellen.md), [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md)

---

# Which questions are in the survey, and can I add my own?

**Answer:** The starter set has four star-rating questions per module, the question "Would you recommend us?" (a number from 0 to 10, the NPS) and the open question "What could we do better?". You can add your own questions on the Survey fields tab; these are star-rating questions. The questions of the starter set are available in all 13 languages of Jimani.

**Explanation:**

| Starter set | Four star-rating questions |
|---|---|
| Restaurant | Food, Service, Atmosphere, Value for money |
| Activities | Activity, Guidance, Organisation beforehand, Value for money |
| Salon | Result, Expertise, Atmosphere and hygiene, Helped on time |
| Tickets | Event, Entrance and organisation, Location, Value for money |
| Store | Product, Delivery, Easy ordering, Value for money |
| Hotel | Room, Sleep, Breakfast, Staff |

- **What the guest sees.** For a star-rating question the guest chooses stars (from half a star to five) and can type a comment. For "Would you recommend us?" they choose a number from 0 to 10; 0 counts as an answer. The open question is plain text and does not have to be answered. In the starter set only the open question is optional.
- **Adding your own question.** Go to Settings > Communication > Survey and open the Survey fields tab. Click Add (the plus) at the top right, choose Survey fields and enter a Name and a Description for each language. Under Example you see the question with the stars and the texts Poor and Excellent. Click Next (between languages) and then Save.
- **Choosing a question from your module's set.** If your module's set contains questions you do not have yet, a second plus button appears on the Survey fields tab. With it you choose questions from the set and copy them to your own list.
- **Changing or deleting a question.** Click the question in the list. Deleting first asks whether you are sure.
- **Putting questions in a survey.** Open the survey on the Survey tab. Per language there is a list of all questions: tick the questions you want. On the right you see the chosen questions; drag them into the order in which the guest gets them.
- **Other types of questions.** A question you create on the screen is a star-rating question. The question Would you recommend us? (number 0 to 10) and the open question cannot be created yourself; they are only in the starter set.

**Example:** A restaurant keeps the four star-rating questions of Restaurant survey and adds its own question Terrace: on Survey fields Add, Name "Terrace", Description "How did you like our terrace?". Then it ticks the question in the survey and drags it below Atmosphere.

**Related questions:**

- Which questions are in the survey by default?
- Can I add questions myself to the customer satisfaction survey?
- What is the NPS question Would you recommend us?
- Are the survey questions also available in other languages?

**Keywords:** survey questions, nps score, would you recommend us, own survey question, survey fields, survey starter set

**Related:** [How do I automatically send guests a survey after their visit, and what does it cost?](enquete-na-bezoek-instellen.md), [How does the Survey screen work in Jimani?](../naslag/enquetes.md)

---

# When are automatic emails sent to guests, and can I change that?

**Answer:** Yes. A confirmation goes out when the booking is made. You set the pre-arrival notices and the survey yourself under Settings > Communication > Email, tab Customer contact, with the button Send times. There you choose a message and enter when it goes to the guest. You set automatic text messages separately under SMS.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Communication > Email and choose the tab Customer contact. Click Send times at the top right.
- **Step 2.** The Send times window shows the tiles Pre-arrival notice 1, 2, 3 and 4 and Survey. Click a tile to set the time. With Previous you go back to the list; with Save you store the time.
- **Pre-arrival notice 1** is the email with Hours before arrival: enter "How many hours in advance do you want to send the email?".
- **Pre-arrival notice 2, 3 and 4** go out a number of days before arrival: under Days before arrival enter "How many days in advance do you want to send the email?" and under Time the time of day ("At what time do you want to send the email?"). This way you can, for example, send a reminder a week in advance at 12:00 and another 24 hours in advance. If no time is entered, Jimani uses 12:00.
- **Survey** goes out a number of hours after the guest's departure: under Hours after enter "In how many hours will this email be sent?". See [How do I automatically send guests a survey after their visit?](enquete-na-bezoek-instellen.md).
- **What gets sent.** Jimani only sends a message if you have an email template of that type, for the guest's reservation type. You change the text under Customer contact; see [How do I change the text of an email to guests?](mailsjabloon-aanpassen.md).
- **Too late.** If the calculated moment is already in the past (for example for a reservation for tomorrow while you set a message a week in advance), that message no longer goes out.
- **SMS.** For automatic text messages you choose the moment under SMS > New SMS (confirmation, change, cancellation, days or hours before arrival, after the visit, survey, open deposit, no-show). A text message is not sent in the middle of the night between 21:00 and 8:00 (adjustable): it then goes out at 8:00. See [Can I automatically send guests a text message, for example a reminder?](automatische-sms.md).
- **WhatsApp.** Automatic WhatsApp messages cannot be set up in the dashboard.

![The Customer contact screen with the list of emails and the button Send times](/kennisbank/beelden/berichten-verzendtijden-instellen-1.webp)

**Example:** You leave Pre-arrival notice 2 at 7 days at 12:00 and set Pre-arrival notice 1 to 24 hours. A guest with a reservation for Saturday at 19:00 receives the first reminder on the Saturday a week earlier at 12:00 and the second on Friday at 19:00.

**Related questions:**

- When does the guest receive a reminder email?
- How do I set how many days in advance an email is sent?
- When is the survey email sent and can I change that?
- Can I set up multiple pre-arrival notices?

**Keywords:** set up reminder email, pre-arrival notice, send times, automatic guest email, survey email when, confirmation email when

**Related:** [How do I change the text of an email to guests?](mailsjabloon-aanpassen.md), [How does Customer contact work in Jimani?](../naslag/klantcontact.md), [Can I automatically send guests a text message, for example a reminder?](automatische-sms.md)

---

# How do I change the text of an email to guests?

**Answer:** Go to Settings > Communication > Email, tab Customer contact, and click the email you want to change. In three steps you choose the language, type and reservation types, write the email with subject, text and tags, and optionally add an attachment or Bcc. If you want a new email, click the plus at the top right.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1. Choose the email.** There is a tab with the emails for each language of your business. You filter by Email type and, if your business has reservation types, by Reservation type. The columns are Email subject, Email type and Reservation types. If you open the screen for the first time, Jimani fills in whatever is still missing for your module.
- **Step 2. Language, type and reservation types.** In the Update email template window you choose the Language and the Email type (for example a confirmation, a pre-arrival notice or the survey). Under Reservation types you choose which types of reservation this email applies to ("Choose the Reservation types for which you want to send this specific email"); with Select all you choose them all. Click Next.
- **Step 3. Subject and text.** Enter the Email Title (the subject) and write the Email body. Open the Tags block to insert details of the reservation, the customer or your company. The tags are on five tabs: Reservation details, All fields, Customer details, Company details and Description, with the columns Name and Label. Click the copy icon to copy a label and paste it into the text.
- **Write with AI.** Click Write with AI, enter what the email should say under What should the email do? (up to 2000 characters) and optionally choose a Tone (optional): No preference, Friendly, Professional, Enthusiastic or Formal. Click Generate. You first see a Preview; with Use it goes into the editor. With Try again you have a new version made and with Undo you restore the previous content. If the AI uses a tag that is not in the Tags list, Jimani removes it. The usage is deducted from your Jimani AI credit: see [What does using AI in Jimani cost?](../../prijzen/faq/ai-tegoed.md).
- **Step 4. Bcc and attachment.** Click Next. Under Bcc enter an extra email address that receives a copy, and under Upload a pdf file here choose an attachment. An attachment can be a document or image up to 10 MB; otherwise Jimani reports: This file cannot be an attachment: only documents and images up to 10 MB.
- **Save.** Click Save. With Previous you go back one step and with Delete you delete the email.
- **New email.** Click the plus at the top right (Create a new email template). You go through the same steps.
- **What the guest sees.** Only the emails for which a template exists for the guest's reservation type are actually sent. When they are sent, you set under Send times: see [When are automatic emails sent to guests?](berichten-verzendtijden-instellen.md).
- **From which address.** By default the email comes from Jimani, with replies going to your business. With the add-on Send from your own address it is sent from your address: [How can I send email from my own email address?](mailen-vanaf-eigen-adres.md).
- **Own mail server.** At the top right there is also the button Email server. If the add-on Send from your own address is turned off, the button points to Add-ons; if it is turned on but no address has been connected yet, it opens the screen of that add-on. Once it is connected, the button is gone.

**Example:** You want to put the sentence "Parking is available at the door" in the confirmation email. You open the confirmation on the Dutch tab, type the sentence below the existing text and click Save via Next.

**Related questions:**

- How do I change the text of the confirmation email?
- How do I add an attachment to an automatic email?
- How do I create a new email for my guests?
- Can I have a copy of the email sent to myself (Bcc)?
- What are tags in an email text?

**Keywords:** edit email template, change confirmation email text, email template, tags in email, write email with ai, email attachment, bcc

**Related:** [When are automatic emails sent to guests?](berichten-verzendtijden-instellen.md), [How does Customer contact work in Jimani?](../naslag/klantcontact.md), [How can I send email from my own email address?](mailen-vanaf-eigen-adres.md)

---

# How does the Newsletters screen work in Jimani?

**Answer:** On the Newsletters screen you see all your drafts, scheduled and sent newsletters with the results per newsletter, and at the bottom you set who you may email, under which name and in which color. The screen only exists if the add-on Newsletters is turned on.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Communication > Email, tab Newsletters (`/Nieuwsbrieven`)

**Explanation:** At the top right is + Newsletter to create a new newsletter; see [How does the Newsletter window work in Jimani?](nieuwsbrief-maken.md). The block Your newsletters shows two counters: "sent this month" (for example 120 / 500: the free limit of 500 emails per month; if it is more, it says below that this month costs €5) and the number of guests with the checkbox "I want to receive news". Below that is the list. The Settings block at the bottom determines who you may email. Free up to 500 emails per month, above that €5 per month, the screen says (see [How do I send a newsletter to my guests, and what does it cost?](../faq/nieuwsbrief-versturen.md)).

![The Newsletters screen with the list and the Settings block at the bottom](/kennisbank/beelden/nieuwsbrieven-overzicht-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| + Newsletter | Opens an empty newsletter | To start a new newsletter | - |
| All, Drafts, Scheduled, Sent | Filters the list by status | To quickly see a group | Sent also shows newsletters that are in progress or have been stopped |
| Name, Status, Date and time | The name for yourself; the status (Draft, Scheduled, Being sent, Sent, Stopped); the scheduled or completed moment | To see what is going on | A red message under the name says why a newsletter was stopped |
| Recipients, Opened, Clicked, Unsubscribed, Not delivered | The results of a sent newsletter. Opened and Clicked are shown as percentages of the recipients | To see how the newsletter was received | Only filled after sending |
| Edit | Opens a draft or scheduled newsletter | To change the text or recipients | A scheduled newsletter goes back to draft after editing |
| View | Opens a sent newsletter, read-only | To read back what you sent | A sent newsletter can no longer be changed |
| Cancel | Moves a scheduled newsletter back to the drafts | If you do not want it to go out after all | Jimani first asks Cancel shipment? and you confirm with Cancel shipment |
| Copy | Makes a new draft from a newsletter | To reuse an old newsletter | Reports Copy created; the name gets "(copy)" added |
| Delete (trash can) | Removes the newsletter from the list, including the results of a sent newsletter | To tidy up | Jimani first asks Delete newsletter?; it is not possible while sending |
| Who are you allowed to email? | Choice between Only guests with the checkbox and Existing guests too. Saves immediately | To decide who is included | For Existing guests too, Jimani warns about the GDPR; see below |
| Sender name | The name under which the newsletter appears in the inbox (maximum 100 characters) | To replace your business name with something else | Empty = the name of your business |
| Replies go to | The address where guests' replies arrive | If you want a different address than that of your business | Must be a valid email address; empty = the email address of your business |
| Color | The stripe at the top and the buttons in the newsletter, as #rrggbb | To put the newsletter in your house style | Empty = Jimani blue (#0d3fd6) |
| Save | Stores name, reply address and color | After a change in Settings | Who are you allowed to email? saves itself |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Also email existing guests? | Question when choosing Existing guests too, with the warning that under the GDPR you usually may not simply email guests without consent | Read the text; click I understand, turn it on or cancel |
| You usually may not simply send a newsletter to guests who have not given consent under the GDPR. Only if they have been a customer of yours and you offer similar services, and they could refuse during their visit. | First part of the warning | Check whether this applies to your guests |
| If you choose this, you are responsible for it yourself. Every email has an unsubscribe link; anyone who unsubscribes never receives anything again. | Second part of the warning | Only confirm if you accept this |
| I understand, turn it on | The button with which you accept the warning | Jimani records who agreed and when |
| The reply address isn't a valid email address. | The field Replies go to does not contain a usable address | Correct the address |
| Choose a color as #rrggbb. | The Color is not six digits/letters with a hash sign | Enter, for example, #0d3fd6 |
| Cancel shipment? | Question on Cancel | Choose Cancel shipment to move the newsletter back to the drafts |
| Cancel shipment | The confirmation button of that question | - |
| Delete newsletter? | Question on Delete | Confirm to delete it |
| Newsletter deleted | The newsletter is gone | - |
| This newsletter is being sent now; you can delete it afterwards. | Deleting while sending is not possible | Wait until sending is finished |
| This newsletter no longer exists. | The newsletter has already been deleted | Refresh the screen |
| Copy created | The copy is among the drafts | Edit the copy and send it |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see the results of my sent newsletters?
- How many newsletters have I already sent this month?
- Under which name does my newsletter go out?
- How many guests have given consent for my newsletter?

**Keywords:** newsletters screen, newsletter overview, newsletter results, opened clicked unsubscribed, who may you email, newsletter sender name

**Related:** [How do I send a newsletter to my guests, and what does it cost?](../faq/nieuwsbrief-versturen.md), [Who may I send a newsletter to under GDPR, and how do guests unsubscribe?](../faq/nieuwsbrief-toestemming-en-afmelden.md), [How does the Newsletter window work in Jimani?](nieuwsbrief-maken.md)

---

# How does the Newsletter window work in Jimani?

**Answer:** In the Newsletter window you create a newsletter in three blocks: 1. Recipients, 2. Content and 3. Send. On the right you see the email as the guest sees it. You can save it as a draft, send a test email, send it right away or schedule it.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Communication > Email, tab Newsletters, button + Newsletter or open an existing newsletter with Edit (`/Nieuwsbrieven/Bewerk`)

**Explanation:** A new newsletter is called "New newsletter"; an existing one has its own name. A sent newsletter opens read-only, with a message that it has already been sent and that you can make a copy in the list. Steps and explanation about the recipients: see [How do I choose who receives my newsletter?](../faq/nieuwsbrief-ontvangers-kiezen.md).

![An empty newsletter with the blocks Recipients, Content and Send](/kennisbank/beelden/nieuwsbrief-maken-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Save | Stores the newsletter as a draft (top right) | In between, without sending | If the newsletter is scheduled, it goes back to draft: schedule it again |
| Name | The name in your list | To find the newsletter again | Only for yourself; the guest sees the subject. Empty = the subject or the date |
| Modules | Guests of these modules (Hospitality, Ticketing, Online store and POS, Salon, Hotel, Activities) | To choose a group | Only visible with more than one module; nothing selected = all |
| Visited between | Guests who visited or booked in this period (From, Up to and including) | For a campaign around a period | Empty = always |
| Reservation type | Only guests who booked this type | For a mailing per type | More than 12 types? Use Show all (number) and Show less |
| Minimum number of visits | Only guests with at least this many visits | For regular guests (for example 3) | Empty = everyone |
| Minimum revenue | Only guests who spent at least this amount in total | For your best guests | Empty = everyone |
| Hasn't been back since | Only guests who have not been back for longer than this many days | To win guests back | Empty = everyone |
| Guest's language | Limited to guests with a language | For a newsletter in one language | Only with more than one language; nothing selected = all |
| Skip guests with a no-show | Yes/No: guests who ever failed to show up are skipped | Default Yes | Set to No to email them anyway |
| recipients | The counter with the number of recipients, per language | To check before you send | Follows your filters |
| Subject | The subject per language (maximum 150 characters) | Always | What the guest sees in their inbox |
| Headline | Adds a headline (maximum 150 characters) | For a title | - |
| Text | Adds a text block (maximum 5000 characters) | For the content | An empty line creates a new paragraph |
| Image | Adds an image with an address (https://) or Upload, plus a description | For a photo or banner | jpg, png, gif or webp up to 4 MB |
| Button | Adds a button with text and an address (maximum 60 characters for the text) | For a link | Only http or https addresses |
| Reserve now | Adds a button that goes to your reservation widget | To bring in reservations | The address is filled in automatically; the button text is in the language of the version |
| Move up, Move down, Delete (on a block) | Moves or deletes a block | To arrange the order | - |
| Test email to | The address for the test email | Before you send | Your own address by default |
| Test email | Sends the newsletter as a test | To see the email in your inbox | In the language you are viewing under Content; does not count toward the 500 per month |
| Schedule for | Date and time (time of the business) at which it is sent | For sending later | Until that moment you can edit or cancel it |
| Schedule | Sets the newsletter up for the chosen moment | After choosing Schedule for | Without a moment Jimani reports: Choose the moment first under "Schedule for". |
| Cancel scheduling | Moves a scheduled newsletter back to draft | If the schedule is no longer right | Only visible for a scheduled newsletter |
| Send now | Sends right away | For a newsletter that must go out now | Cannot be undone |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Send now? | Confirmation question on Send now | Check the recipients and choose Send |
| The newsletter will go out | Start of the question: "The newsletter will go out now to (number) recipients. You cannot undo this." | Check the number |
| The newsletter will go out on | Start of the question when scheduling: "The newsletter will go out on (date) at (time) to (number) recipients." | Check the date and number |
| Choose a date and a time. | The moment under Schedule for is missing or invalid | Choose a valid moment |
| Enter a subject and a block to see the preview. | The preview on the right stays empty as long as the subject or the blocks are missing | Enter a subject and at least one filled block |
| No blocks yet. Add a headline, text, image or button below. | You have no blocks yet | Use the buttons under Content |
| Choose an image. | You clicked Upload without a file | Choose a file |
| The image is too large (at most 4 MB). | The file is larger than 4 MB | Make the image smaller |
| Only jpg, png, gif or webp. | The file type is not allowed | Choose a jpg, png, gif or webp |
| Show all {0} | Button under Reservation type with the number of types | Click to see all types |
| Show less | Collapses the list of types again | - |
| This newsletter no longer exists. | The newsletter has been deleted | Go back to the overview |

**Related questions:**

- How do I create a newsletter in three steps?
- Can I save a newsletter as a draft?
- How do I send a test email of my newsletter?
- Can I copy a sent newsletter?

**Keywords:** create newsletter, newsletter blocks, test email newsletter, schedule newsletter, newsletter image, reserve now button

**Related:** [How do I send a newsletter to my guests, and what does it cost?](../faq/nieuwsbrief-versturen.md), [How do I choose who receives my newsletter?](../faq/nieuwsbrief-ontvangers-kiezen.md), [How does the Newsletters screen work in Jimani?](nieuwsbrieven-overzicht.md)

---

# What does a guest see when they unsubscribe from the newsletter?

**Answer:** The guest clicks the unsubscribe link at the bottom of the newsletter and sees the page "You have been unsubscribed". There they can subscribe again with one button. The page is in Dutch, German, French or English, according to the language of the newsletter.

**Where to find it:** This is a page for your guest, not a screen in your dashboard. The address is in the unsubscribe link of every newsletter (`/Nieuwsbrief/Afmelden/(code)`).

**Explanation:** The link contains a personal code for that email address at your business. The guest does not have to log in. If the guest opens the link in their browser, they are unsubscribed immediately; they briefly see "You are being unsubscribed..." and then the confirmation. Only without javascript is there an Unsubscribe button. An unsubscribed address never receives a newsletter from your business again, unless the guest subscribes again themselves.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Unsubscribe from the newsletter | The heading of the page and the unsubscription itself | The guest opens the link | You see the unsubscription back in the Unsubscribed column of the newsletter |
| Unsubscribe | Button for those without javascript | Only if the unsubscription does not happen by itself | - |
| You have been unsubscribed | Confirmation: "You will no longer receive newsletters from (your business)." | After unsubscribing | - |
| Subscribe again after all | Puts the guest back on the list | If the guest unsubscribed by accident | Afterwards the page reports: You are subscribed again. You will receive the newsletter again. |
| This link no longer works | Error page: "Copy the whole link from the email, or reply to the email asking to be unsubscribed." | The code is wrong or missing | The page itself says what the guest can do |
| This is an example | In a test email the link reports: "In the real newsletter, this link unsubscribes the guest." | If you try the link in a test email yourself | In a test email the link unsubscribes nobody |

**Related questions:**

- What does a guest see when they unsubscribe from my newsletter?
- Can a guest subscribe again after unsubscribing?
- Does a guest have to log in to unsubscribe?
- In which languages is the unsubscribe page available?

**Keywords:** unsubscribe newsletter, newsletter opt-out, unsubscribe link, resubscribe newsletter, unsubscribe

**Related:** [Who may I send a newsletter to under GDPR, and how do guests unsubscribe?](../faq/nieuwsbrief-toestemming-en-afmelden.md), [How does the Newsletters screen work in Jimani?](nieuwsbrieven-overzicht.md)

---

# How does the Send from your own address screen work in Jimani?

**Answer:** On this screen you connect your own email address, so that confirmations, reminders, invoices and newsletters are sent from that address. At the top is the Status; below it you choose an address and a way of connecting in two steps. The screen only exists if the add-on Send from your own address is turned on (€10 per month).

**Where to find it:** Settings > Communication > Email, tab Send from your own address (`/EigenAfzender`)

**Explanation:** Without a connection, the Status block says that emails are sent from noreply@jimani.nl, with replies going to the address of your business. The block then shows the status of your connection: waiting for DNS records, connected or revoked. If sending from your own address fails once, the email still goes out via Jimani, with replies going to your business. A Last message at the bottom of the Status block shows the last error message with date and time. You find the steps in [How can I send email from my own email address?](../faq/mailen-vanaf-eigen-adres.md).

![The Send from your own address screen](/kennisbank/beelden/eigen-afzender-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Email address | The address you want to send from | Step 1. Which email address do you want to send from? | By default the address of your business; for example info@yourbusiness.nl |
| Sender name | The name in your guest's inbox | Step 1 | Maximum 100 characters; empty = the name of your business |
| Continue | Checks where the address is managed and shows the routes | After entering the address | Jimani says who manages the address, for example Google Workspace, Microsoft 365 or your own provider |
| Verify your own domain | Route with three DNS records, marked as recommended for your own domain | For an address on your own domain | Turned off for a free address such as gmail.com |
| Create the DNS records | Creates the three records and shows them | After choosing Verify your own domain | You add them to your domain yourself |
| Check | Checks whether the DNS records are correct | After the records are in place | Can take a few hours after adding them |
| Let your web developer do it, Send the records | Emails the records to your web developer's address | If someone else manages your domain | Without an address: Enter your web developer's email address. |
| Type, Name (host), Value, Status | The columns of the DNS table; Status shows correct or not yet | When adding the records | Copy with the copy icon; no dot at the end of a CNAME, proxy (Cloudflare) off |
| Own mail server (SMTP), Enter details | Route with the details of your mailbox | If you cannot add DNS records | With Google and Microsoft often with an app password |
| Outgoing mail server | The server through which the email goes | With SMTP | Suggested by Jimani based on your provider |
| Port | The port of the server | With SMTP | Usually 587 |
| Username | The login of the mailbox | With SMTP | Usually your email address; empty = the address above |
| Password | The password or app password | With SMTP | Saved; leaving it empty = no change |
| Test connection and link | Tests the connection with a real test email and connects | After entering the details | Only saved on success |
| Connect with Google or Microsoft, Google, Microsoft | Log in with your account | For an address at Google or Microsoft (also gmail.com and outlook.com) | If it says "Not available yet", that connection has not been set up |
| Test email | Sends a test email from your own address | After connecting | The message shows whether it really went from your own address |
| Reconnect | Takes you back to logging in with the same provider | If the connection has been revoked or has expired | Until then emails go via Jimani |
| Disconnect | Removes the connection | If you want to send via Jimani again | Jimani first asks for confirmation |
| Start over | Resets the pending connection | If you are waiting for DNS records and want something else | Emails go via Jimani in the meantime |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Start at step 1 first. | You clicked Check or Send the records without DNS records having been created | First enter an address and create the DNS records |
| {0} is managed by {1}. | Jimani has recognized where the address is hosted (for example: info@yourbusiness.nl is managed by Google Workspace) | Choose the recommended route |
| An address from {0} is not yours but the provider's; you cannot verify that. Use an address on your own domain, or connect your own mail server. | You chose Verify your own domain for a free address | Use SMTP or log in with Google or Microsoft |
| {0} is an address from {1}: that domain is not yours, so verifying is not possible. Connect your mailbox with the details of your mail server. | A free address; logging in has not been set up | Choose Own mail server (SMTP) |
| {0} is an address from {1}: that domain is not yours, so verifying is not possible. Connect with your {2} account or with the details of your mail server. | A free address; logging in is possible | Choose Google or Microsoft or SMTP |
| your own provider | What Jimani fills in if the address is not at Google or Microsoft | - |
| DNS records for sending from {0} | Subject of the email to your web developer, and the heading of the DNS block | - |
| Hello, {0} wants to send email from {1} via Jimani. Would you like to add these three DNS records to the domain {2}? | Start of the email to your web developer | - |
| For a CNAME, do not put a dot at the end, and keep 'proxy' (Cloudflare) turned off. After that the business can click Check in Jimani. | End of the email to your web developer | - |
| Name (host) | Column heading in the email to your web developer | - |
| Sent to {0} | The email with DNS records has been sent | Ask your web developer to add them |
| Sending failed. | The email to your web developer did not arrive, or the test email could not be sent | Try again |
| Creating it failed. | The DNS records could not be created | Try again |
| Enter the server and the port (usually 587). | Server or port is missing for SMTP | Enter both |
| Enter the password. | No password is known yet | Enter the password or app password |
| This mail server cannot be reached from the internet. Enter your provider's server. | The address of the server is not public | Use your provider's server |
| Test email: sending from your own address | Subject of the test email with SMTP | - |
| This email comes through your own mail server. Connecting worked. | Text of that test email | - |
| Success: there's a test email in {0}. All emails are now sent from {1}. | SMTP connected | Check your inbox for the test email |
| Your address hasn't been verified yet. | A test email is not possible before the address is verified | First finish the connection |
| There is no email address to send the test email to. | There is no address for the test email | Log in with an email address |
| Test email from {0} | Subject of the test email with your business name | - |
| This email was sent from {0}, just like all your confirmations, reminders and invoices will be. | Text of that test email | - |
| The connection has been revoked. Reconnect; until then emails go via Jimani. | Access to Google or Microsoft has been revoked or has expired | Click Reconnect |
| Disconnect? Emails will then go via Jimani again, with replies going to your business. | Question on Disconnect | Confirm with Disconnect or choose Cancel |
| Disconnected. Emails go via Jimani again, with replies going to your business. | Your address has been disconnected | - |
| Connecting with {0} is not available yet. | The connection with Google or Microsoft has not been set up | Choose SMTP or DNS records |
| You did not give permission. Nothing has been connected. | You refused at Google or Microsoft | Try again and give permission |
| Logging in did not work. Nothing has been connected. | Logging in failed | Try again |
| This return does not belong to your request. Please try again. | The return from Google or Microsoft did not belong to your session | Start again |
| No code came back. Please try again. | Google or Microsoft did not send a code | Start again |
| Connecting with {0} did not work. Please try again. | The exchange with Google or Microsoft failed | Start again |
| {0} did not return an email address. Please try again. | Google or Microsoft did not give an address | Start again |
| Connected with {0}. All emails are now sent from {1}. Send a test email to see it. | Connection with logging in succeeded | Click Test email |
| Enter a valid email address. | The address is not right | Check the address |
| The email could not be sent from your own address; it was sent via Jimani. | The test email went via Jimani, with the last error behind it | Check the connection or reconnect |

**Related questions:**

- How do I see whether my own email address is connected properly?
- What does waiting for DNS records mean?
- From which address are my emails sent if I do not connect anything?
- Where do guests' replies arrive?

**Keywords:** own sender screen, connect own email address, dns records email, smtp settings, connect google, disconnect email

**Related:** [How can I send email from my own email address instead of noreply@jimani.nl?](../faq/mailen-vanaf-eigen-adres.md), [How do I connect my own domain with three DNS records?](../faq/eigen-adres-dns-regels.md), [How do I connect my mailbox via SMTP, Google or Microsoft?](../faq/eigen-adres-mailserver-google-microsoft.md)

---

# How does Customer contact work in Jimani?

**Answer:** Under Customer contact you manage the emails your guests receive automatically, such as confirmation, reminder and survey, and you decide via Send times when they go out. Per language of your business there is a list of templates.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Communication > Email, tab Customer contact (`/CustomersCommunication`)

**Explanation:** At the top of the screen is the explanation: "Create and manage Email templates and indicate when the emails should be sent." There is a tab for each language of your business. In the table you see the columns Email subject, Email type and, if your business has reservation types, Reservation types. For the first three reservation types you see names; if there are more, you click the +number or the info button for the full list. A click on a row opens the template. How to write a template is in [How do I change the text of an email to guests?](../faq/mailsjabloon-aanpassen.md). When emails go out is in [When are automatic emails sent to guests?](../faq/berichten-verzendtijden-instellen.md).

![The Customer contact screen with the emails per language and the button Send times](/kennisbank/beelden/klantcontact-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Email server | Opens the connection of your own mail server | If you want to send emails from your own address | Only visible if the add-on Send from your own address is turned off or not yet connected |
| Send times | Opens a window with the messages that go out at a set time | To schedule reminders and the survey | Choose a tile; with Previous you come back |
| Create a new email template (plus) | Creates a new email | For an extra template, for example per reservation type | You go through the same steps as when editing |
| Email type (filter) | Shows only emails of one type | To quickly find the right email | - |
| Reservation type (filter) | Shows only emails for one reservation type | For businesses with reservation types | Not visible without reservation types |
| Pre-arrival notice 1 | The reminder in hours before arrival | A short reminder just before arrival | Here you can indicate when your email "Pre-arrival notice 1" is sent to the guest. |
| Hours before arrival | The number of hours before arrival | For Pre-arrival notice 1 | "How many hours in advance do you want to send the email?" |
| Pre-arrival notice 2, 3 and 4 | Reminders in days before arrival | For a reminder one or more days in advance | Here you can indicate when your email "Pre-arrival notice 2, 3 or 4" is sent to the guest. |
| Days before arrival | The number of days before arrival | For Pre-arrival notice 2, 3 and 4 | "How many days in advance do you want to send the email?" |
| Time | The time of day at which the email goes out | For Pre-arrival notice 2, 3 and 4 | "At what time do you want to send the email?" |
| Survey (in Send times) | The survey email after departure | To schedule the survey | "Send survey email" is the explanation on this tile |
| Hours after | The number of hours after departure | For the survey | "In how many hours will this email be sent?" |
| Save (in Send times) | Stores the time and closes the window | After filling it in | The page stays with the chosen module |
| Write with AI | Has the AI write an email | In the template, if you want help | The usage is deducted from your Jimani AI credit |
| What should the email do? | Your instruction to the AI, up to 2000 characters | For Write with AI | For example: confirm the reservation, mention date and time and ask about allergies. |
| Tone (optional) | The writing style: No preference, Friendly, Professional, Enthusiastic or Formal | For Write with AI | Without a choice the AI chooses itself |
| Generate | Has the AI write | After your instruction | Takes half a minute to a full minute |
| Preview, Use, Try again, Undo | View the result; adopt it in the editor; have another version made; restore the previous content | After generating | Use puts the email in the editor and in Email Title |
| Email template | The heading of the first block with Language, Email type and Reservation types | For every template | "The fixed form of an email: the subject, the text and the details that are filled in automatically." |
| Tags | A collapsible block with details you can put in the email | To fill in names, dates and times | Five tabs: Reservation details, All fields, Customer details, Company details, Description |
| Email Title, Email body | The subject and the text of the email | Always | In the list the title is called Email subject |
| Bcc | An extra address that receives a copy | If you want a copy yourself | An email address |
| Upload a pdf file here | An attachment to the email | For example for terms or directions | Documents and images up to 10 MB |
| Next, Previous, Save, Delete | Through the steps; stores; deletes the template | In the template window | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| This file cannot be an attachment: only documents and images up to 10 MB. | The attachment is not a document or image, or larger than 10 MB | Choose another file |
| The AI is writing your email. This usually takes half a minute to a full minute. | The AI is working | Wait a moment |
| Writing did not work. Please try again. | The AI could not write the email | Click Generate again |
| Removed because not in the Tags list: | The AI used a tag that does not exist; Jimani removed it | Check the email |
| The email is in the editor. Review it and save. | You clicked Use | Read the email and click Save |
| The previous content has been restored. | You clicked Undo | - |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I manage the emails that guests receive automatically?
- How do I find the email with a certain subject?
- Where do I set the send times of the emails?
- Where are the email templates per language?

**Keywords:** customer contact, email templates, email template, send times, pre-arrival notice, email with ai, email tags

**Related:** [How do I change the text of an email to guests?](../faq/mailsjabloon-aanpassen.md), [When are automatic emails sent to guests?](../faq/berichten-verzendtijden-instellen.md), [How can I send email from my own email address?](../faq/mailen-vanaf-eigen-adres.md)

---

# How does the Survey screen work in Jimani?

**Answer:** On the Survey screen you manage the questionnaires your guests receive after their visit. The Survey tab shows your surveys, the Survey fields tab the individual questions. The screen is under Communication; sending only works if the add-on Survey is turned on (€5 per month).

**Where to find it:** Settings > Communication > Survey (`/Survey`)

**Explanation:** At the top of the screen it says: "View all surveys here. Add new surveys with the Add button, or edit an existing one. Send them automatically to customers, and receive useful feedback." On the Survey tab it says: "Easily create surveys per reservation type and link an unlimited number of questions to each survey." On the Survey fields tab it says: "View all survey fields here, and add new ones with the Add button. Easily choose the language in which the content of the field is written." A new business already gets a survey per module (the starter set); how sending works is in [How do I automatically send guests a survey after their visit?](../faq/enquete-na-bezoek-instellen.md).

![The Survey screen with the tabs Survey and Survey fields](/kennisbank/beelden/enquetes-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Add (plus at the top right) | Opens the window where you choose between Survey and Survey fields | To create a new survey or a new question | The page for Survey is called "Survey(s)" |
| Survey | Tab and tile: your questionnaires, each with a status dot for active or not active | To open a survey | The name is below the tile |
| Survey fields | Tab and tile: the individual questions | To create or change questions | To be filled in per language |
| Use starter set | Sets up the starter set for every module without a survey | For an existing business without a survey | Only visible if a module has no survey yet; a second time does nothing |
| Second plus button on Survey fields | Chooses questions from your module's set and copies them | To quickly adopt questions | Only visible if the set contains questions you do not have yet |
| Name (survey) | The name of the survey (maximum 50 characters) | When creating or editing | Only for yourself |
| Module (list) | Which module the survey is for | When creating or editing | Determines which reservation types you see |
| Reservation types | The types of reservation the survey applies to | To send a separate survey per type | If you choose nothing, it applies to everything in that module (the starter set works this way); a survey that mentions the type takes precedence |
| Survey fields (checkmarks per language) | The questions that go into the survey, per language | To choose questions | On the right you drag the chosen questions into the right order |
| Active (Yes/No) | Status of the survey | To temporarily turn a survey off | Only when editing |
| Next, Previous | Through the steps | In the window | - |
| Delete | Deletes the survey or the question | In the window | Jimani first asks whether you are sure |
| Name (question) | The question as the guest reads it (maximum 150 characters) | For a new question | To be filled in per language |
| Description | An extra explanation with the question (maximum 500 characters) | For a new question | To be filled in per language |
| Example | Shows the question with the stars and the texts Poor and Excellent | For a new question | A custom question is a star-rating question |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Create a new survey. Select the survey fields that apply, and link the reservation types. | Explanation at the top of the window where you create a survey | Choose the questions and the reservation types |
| Create a new survey field. Add important questions and feedback as content for the customer to fill in. | Explanation at the top of the window where you create a survey field | Enter Name and Description |
| No data found. | You have no surveys yet | Click Use starter set or Add |
| Something went wrong. Please try again. | Use starter set failed | Try again |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I manage my surveys?
- What is the difference between the Survey tab and Survey fields?
- How do I link a survey to a reservation type?
- How do I receive feedback from my guests?

**Keywords:** survey screen, survey fields, create survey, use starter set, survey reservation types, survey active

**Related:** [How do I automatically send guests a survey after their visit, and what does it cost?](../faq/enquete-na-bezoek-instellen.md), [Which questions are in the survey, and can I add my own?](../faq/enquete-vragen-en-nps.md)

---

# How does the SMS screen work in Jimani?

**Answer:** On the SMS screen you turn SMS on, choose a sender name, buy a bundle, set a daily limit and create automatic texts per moment. At the bottom you see the last 100 sent texts and your purchases. The screen only appears if the add-on SMS is turned on.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Communication > SMS (`/Sms`)

**Explanation:** Bundle prices, the length of a text and automatic top-up are in [How do I send text messages from Jimani, and what does it cost?](../faq/sms-versturen-en-kosten.md). Creating an automatic text with the rules for the night is in [Can I automatically send guests a text message, for example a reminder?](../faq/automatische-sms.md). Below, each field is explained. On/off and the daily limit save immediately; for Yes/No choices you do not need to click Save.

![The SMS screen with SMS on, the sender name, the credit and the bundles](/kennisbank/beelden/sms-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| SMS on | Yes/No: whether any text is sent from your business | To turn SMS off or on in one go | You can only turn it on once you have credit; if it is off, no text is sent, even with credit |
| Sender name | The name the recipient sees | Set once | At most 11 characters: letters, digits and spaces |
| How your SMS will look | Shows an example of a text with your sender name | To check | - |
| Text for SMS times: Language | The language in which you edit the text for SMS times | To create a separate text per language | The guest gets the text in the language of the screen from which you send |
| Text for SMS times: Text | Your own text for SMS times, with tags | To replace the default text | Click a tag to insert it; empty = the default text |
| Default text | Restores the default text | If you do not want your change | - |
| Replace | Replaces characters that do not fit in a normal text | If Jimani says characters are replaced or left out | A message with special characters counts as more texts |
| Test SMS, Send me a test text | Sends the text to your own mobile number | To try the text | Costs texts from your credit; Jimani asks for another click; maximum 5 per quarter of an hour |
| Your message credit | The number of texts you still have | To see when you need to top up | A text of more than 160 characters counts as 2 texts |
| Bundles, Buy, By direct debit | Buys a bundle (100, 500 or 1,000 texts) with iDEAL or card, or via your direct debit authorisation | When your credit is almost used up | Prices excluding VAT; credit does not expire |
| Auto top-up | Yes/No: automatically buys a bundle | To never run out of credit | Only possible with an authorisation for automatic direct debit |
| Which bundle | The bundle that is bought automatically | For Auto top-up | Only appears when you set Auto top-up to Yes |
| Maximum per day (Daily limit) | The maximum number of texts per day | To prevent many texts being sent by accident | Between 1 and 1,000 |
| Automatic SMS | The list of your automatic texts | To see them, turn them on or off or change them | Without a module with reservations, appointments, tickets, activities or webshop there is nothing to create |
| New SMS | Opens the window where you first choose the moment | To create an automatic text | Then Name, For, Applies to, the number, Language and Text |
| On (in the list and in the window) | Yes/No: whether this text is sent or not | To temporarily turn a text off | Saves immediately |
| Name, Applies to, When | The columns of the list | To see which text belongs to which moment | Name is only for yourself |
| For | For which bookings: reservations, appointments, tickets, activities or webshop orders | When creating | Webshop only has the confirmation |
| Applies to | All reservation types or Specific types | When creating | A text for specific types takes precedence over the text for all types; a guest only ever gets one |
| Days or hours | Days before arrival or Hours before arrival | For the moment "X days or hours before arrival" | Days 1 to 30, hours 1 to 72 |
| How many days | The number of days or hours (the name changes with your choice) | For the moments with a number | After the visit 1 to 168 hours; Survey 0 to 72 hours after departure (0 = immediately); Deposit 1 to 72 hours after booking |
| Language | The language of the text you are writing now | A separate text per language | If you write nothing in a language, the guest gets the default text |
| Text | The text itself, with tags | Always | At most 480 characters and 3 texts; click a tag to insert it. The counter also counts the longest case |
| No SMS from (hour) | The hour at which night rest begins | To prevent texts at night | Default 21 |
| SMS again from (hour) | The hour at which texts are allowed again | Same | Default 8; the same hour twice = no night rest |
| Sent texts | The last 100 texts with date, number, type, number of texts and status | To check what has gone out | Of the number you only see the start and end. Status: Sent, Delivered or Failed (for Failed the credit comes back) |
| Purchases and invoices | Your purchased bundles with status and invoice | For your administration | Also found under Invoicing and costs |
| Previous | Back to Settings > Communication | - | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| SMS is not available right now. You can still buy a bundle and set everything up. | The SMS service is temporarily unreachable | Set everything up; sending happens as soon as possible |
| You can only turn this on once you have credit. | You can only set SMS on to Yes with credit | Buy a bundle first |
| Your credit is used up. Buy a bundle to send texts. | The credit is zero | Buy a bundle |
| Your credit is running low. | Fewer than 20 texts left | Buy a bundle or turn on Auto top-up |
| The sender is at most 11 characters: letters, digits and spaces, with at least one letter. | The Sender name does not meet the rules | Change it |
| Choose a daily limit from 1 to {0}. | The daily limit is outside the allowed range | Choose a number between 1 and 1,000 |
| Auto top-up is only possible with an authorisation for automatic direct debit. | There is no authorisation yet | Give an authorisation first |
| Too long: at most {0} texts. | The text is too long | Shorten it |
| These characters do not fit in a normal text and will be replaced: {0} | For example an accent | Click Replace or change the text |
| This is the default text. | Your text is the same as the default text | - |
| This costs {0} texts from your credit. Click once more to send. | Confirmation on Test SMS | Click once more |
| Delete this automatic SMS? | Question on Delete | Confirm with Yes |
| Choose the moment first. | You tested without choosing a moment | Choose a moment |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I set up SMS?
- How do I choose a sender name for my texts?
- Where do I see which texts have been sent?
- Can I set a daily limit for texts?

**Keywords:** sms screen, set up sms, sms sender name, sms daily limit, automatic sms, sms night rest, buy sms bundle

**Related:** [How do I send text messages from Jimani, and what does it cost?](../faq/sms-versturen-en-kosten.md), [Can I automatically send guests a text message, for example a reminder?](../faq/automatische-sms.md), [How does the SMS times window work in Jimani?](sms-tijden.md)

---

# How does the SMS times window work in Jimani?

**Answer:** With SMS times you send a guest a few available times by text, with a link. The guest taps a time and the reservation is made. You open the window on the Reservations screen, or from a guest's details.

**Where to find it:** Reservations > button SMS times; also via the SMS icon in a guest's reservation information (`/Smstijden/Venster`)

**Explanation:** The window has three blocks: To, When and The message. At the bottom are Previous and Send with the number of texts it costs, for example Send (1 SMS). The available times are the same as in your reservation widget. You set the text of the message under SMS (block Text for SMS times); how the link and the status work is in [Can I automatically send guests a text message, for example a reminder?](../faq/automatische-sms.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Mobile number | The guest's number, with a country code in front (default +31) | Always | Only a mobile number; for a guest from the overview it is already filled in |
| Search for a guest | Searches your guests by name, number or email | To avoid typing a number | The list opens below the field |
| Date | The day for which you offer times | Always | From today; with - and + you step one day |
| Number of guests | For how many people the guest wants to book | Always | Between 1 and 500; default 2 |
| Reservation type | The type of reservation | Always | Only types of your business |
| Available times | The times that are free on that day | To tick times | At most 4 times |
| Selected times | Only the times you tick are included | If you want to offer a few times | Default |
| All times | The guest may choose from all available times | If you do not want to make a choice | The message then says that all times are possible |
| Preview | Shows the message as the guest sees it, with a counter | To check | A message of more than 160 characters counts as more texts |
| Send | Sends the text | When everything is right | Costs texts from your credit |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| No available times on this day. Choose another date or a different number of guests. | There are no times available | Choose another day or number |
| You choose at most {0} times, or all times. | You chose too many times | Choose a maximum of 4, or choose All times |
| Enter a mobile number, for example +31 6 12345678. | The number is empty or not a mobile number | Enter a mobile number |
| A text can only be sent to a mobile number. | The number is a landline | Use a mobile number |
| Choose a date from today onwards. | The date is in the past | Choose another date |
| One or more times are no longer available. Choose again. | A time has been taken in the meantime | Choose again |
| Your SMS credit is not enough for this message. Buy a bundle. | Too little credit | Buy a bundle under SMS |
| The daily limit for SMS has been reached. Tomorrow it works again, or raise the daily limit under SMS. | The daily limit has been reached | Raise the daily limit or wait until tomorrow |
| SMS is off. Turn on SMS under Settings > Integrations > SMS. | SMS is off | Turn on SMS under Settings > Add-ons, category Communication (the message still uses the old name Integrations) |
| The text has been sent. Your credit: {0} texts. | Sent | You see the status back under Sent texts |
| The text could not be sent. Your credit has been restored. | Sending failed | Try again later |
| You have just sent many texts. Wait a minute and try again. | You are sending too quickly in a row | Wait a minute |

**Related questions:**

- How do I send a guest available times by text?
- Can a guest choose a time themselves via a text link?
- What does a text with available times cost?
- Where do I change the text of the SMS message with times?

**Keywords:** sms times, send available times, sms link booking, offer guest times, reservation via sms

**Related:** [How does the SMS screen work in Jimani?](sms.md), [Can I automatically send guests a text message, for example a reminder?](../faq/automatische-sms.md)

---

# How do I connect Mollie to Jimani?

**Answer:** The owner goes to Settings > Money and figures > Payments (Mollie) and chooses **Connect with Mollie**. You log in at Mollie with your own account (or create one), approve the permissions in one go and automatically return to Jimani. Mollie then checks your details; this usually takes 1 to 3 working days.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Money and figures. Under the heading Pay you find **Payments (Mollie)**. You can also type "Mollie" in **Search for a setting…**. The **Mollie** window opens.
- **Step 2.** Choose **Connect with Mollie**. As long as you are not connected, this is the only button in the window. Jimani sends you on to Mollie.
- **Step 3.** Log in at Mollie, or create an account there. If you come via the button in the Mollie email or via **Continue to Mollie**, your company details from Jimani (name, address, country, KvK and VAT number) are already pre-filled at Mollie.
- **Step 4.** Approve the permissions. Jimani asks for all permissions in one go: payments, refunds, payouts, card terminals and payment methods. After that you automatically return to the Mollie window.
- **Step 5.** Look in the window to see what is still needed. At the top is the status, for example "Mollie is reviewing your details." or "Mollie still needs details from you.". Under **What's still needed** there is a button **Finish at Mollie** for each step, sometimes with a date **Due by**. As soon as Mollie is done, Jimani automatically makes your store live: it then says "Your payments are on.".
- **Owner only.** Connecting Mollie determines where your guests' money goes. That is why only the owner may do this. An employee gets the message "Only the owner can connect Mollie.".
- **Connection link by email.** As a new business you receive an email with the subject "Connect Mollie and receive payments from day one", with the heading "Receive payments with Mollie" and the text "Your account at Jimani is ready. Your payments go through Mollie; we have already filled in your details for you.". The email is signed "Team Jimani". The button **Connect Mollie** in that email also works without logging in and always gives a fresh link. Jimani can also email you that connection link again later.
- **Test phase.** A new store can first try everything out with test payments: "Your store is in the test phase." Guests then do not really pay yet. When you start selling for real (opening your webshop, turning on payment for reservations or buying hardware), Jimani asks "Ready to start receiving real payments?" with the buttons **Continue to Mollie** and **Later**.
- **Old connection.** If you were connected before but have not yet approved the current permissions, the window only says "One more step: approve permissions at Mollie" with the button **Approve permissions**. Without that step, card payments, Tap to Pay and View my Mollie do not work.

![The Money and figures group in Settings with the line Payments (Mollie) under Pay](/kennisbank/beelden/mollie-koppelen-aan-jimani-1.webp)

**Example:** You open a new business and receive the Mollie email. You click Connect Mollie, create a Mollie account and approve the permissions. Two days later the Mollie window says "Your payments are on." and guests can pay online.

**Related questions:**

- How do I connect Mollie to my POS?
- How can I turn on online payments and card payments?
- How long does it take before Mollie has approved my account?
- I don't have a Mollie account yet, can I create one via Jimani?
- Who may connect Mollie?

**Keywords:** connect mollie, mollie connect, receive payments, mollie account jimani, connect with mollie, approve permissions mollie, connection link mollie

**Related:** [What can you set in the Mollie window?](../naslag/mollie-venster.md), [Where do I see my Mollie balance, payouts and payments in Jimani?](mollie-saldo-en-betalingen-bekijken.md), [What do card payments cost with Jimani?](../../kassa/faq/wat-kost-pinnen.md)

---

# Where do I see my Mollie balance, payouts and payments in Jimani?

**Answer:** In the **Everything about payments** screen: Settings > Money and figures > Payments (Mollie). There you see, in tabs, your balance, payouts, payments, refunds, payment methods and the invoices from Mollie. You can also refund a payment and turn a payment method on or off there, without logging in at Mollie.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Money and figures and under Pay choose **Payments (Mollie)**. If your Mollie account is connected, Everything about payments opens. The Mollie window also has the button **View my Mollie**; it opens the same screen in a new tab.
- **Step 2.** Choose a tab: **Balance**, **Payouts**, **Payments**, **Refunds**, **Payment methods** or **Mollie invoices**.
- **Balance.** **Available** is what Mollie sends to your account with the next payout. **Pending** has been paid, but not yet released.
- **Refund.** Go to the Payments tab. For a paid payment from which something can still be refunded, there is the button **Refund**. Jimani asks "How much do you want to refund? At most ... euros." with the highest amount already filled in; you can also refund part of it. After that it says "The refund is ready at Mollie." and the screen refreshes. The refund then also appears in the Refunds tab.
- **Payment methods.** For each method you see whether it is on, with the button **Turn on** or **Turn off**. You see "The payment method is turned on." or "The payment method is turned off.". Some methods have to be approved by Mollie first; Mollie then does not accept the change.
- **Bank account.** You manage your bank account and your company details at Mollie itself, not in Jimani.
- **Who may do this.** The owner always. Other employees only with the role permission **Everything about payments** in Users and permissions. That permission is off by default, also for the Manager.

**Example:** A guest paid a €60 deposit online and cancels. You look up the payment in the Payments tab, choose Refund and enter 60. After a few seconds the refund appears in the Refunds tab.

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see my Mollie balance?
- How do I view my payouts from Mollie?
- Can I refund a payment without logging in at Mollie?
- How do I turn a payment method such as iDEAL or Bancontact on or off?
- Where do I find the invoices from Mollie?

**Keywords:** mollie balance, mollie payout, view mollie payments, refund mollie, turn on payment method, turn on ideal, everything about payments

**Related:** [How does Everything about payments work?](../naslag/alles-over-betalingen.md), [How do I connect Mollie to Jimani?](mollie-koppelen-aan-jimani.md)

---

# How do I take out or cancel a card payment subscription?

**Answer:** In the Mollie window, in the Card payments block, under **Card payments: with or without a subscription**. Choose **Take out a subscription** to start, **Don't renew** to cancel and **Continue anyway** if you want to undo the cancellation. The card payment subscription costs €20 per month per card terminal (a Tap to Pay terminal counts too, at least one), plus €0.06 + 0.2% per transaction (excl. VAT); see [What do card payments cost with Jimani?](wat-kost-pinnen.md).

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open the Mollie window: Settings > Money and figures, and type "Mollie" in **Search for a setting…** (or choose Payments (Mollie) if you are not connected yet). The Card payments block only appears once Mollie is connected and the permissions have been approved.
- **Step 2.** Under **Card payments: with or without a subscription** read how you currently take card payments. Without a subscription it says "You currently take card payments without a subscription: no fixed costs, but a higher rate per card payment."
- **Step 3.** Choose **Take out a subscription**.
  - If you already pay Jimani monthly via automatic direct debit, the subscription starts immediately and is included in your monthly payment: "Your card payment subscription starts and is included in your monthly payment."
  - Otherwise you receive an invoice for 12 months in advance: "The invoice is ready; you can pay it right away with the link in the email. As soon as it is paid, your subscription starts."
- **Per card terminal.** The amount is €20 times the number of linked card terminals. Under Card payments: with or without a subscription you see how many devices you have now and what that comes to per month. If you link a device or unlink one, the amount of the next monthly payment or renewal adjusts.
- **Renewing.** A 12-month subscription: thirty days before the end, Jimani sends the invoice for the next period.
- **Cancelling.** Choose **Don't renew**. Your subscription continues until the end of the paid period (for a monthly subscription until the end of this month). After that the rates without a subscription apply.
- **Continue anyway.** As long as the period is still running, **Continue anyway** undoes the cancellation: "Your subscription simply continues."
- **Calculator.** In Everything about payments, tab Payment methods, "Which Mollie card payment plan suits you best?" uses your card revenue of the last months to work out which plan is cheaper for you.

**Example:** You already pay Jimani monthly via direct debit. You choose Take out a subscription; the card payment subscription is included in your monthly payment from today. In March you choose Don't renew: it then still runs until 1 April.

**Related questions:**

- How do I cancel my card payment subscription?
- Where do I take out a subscription for the card terminal?
- I cancelled by accident, can I undo that?
- What does a card payment subscription cost per month?

**Keywords:** card payment subscription, cancel card subscription, mollie subscription, lower card rate, don't renew, take out subscription card payments

**Related:** [What do card payments cost with Jimani?](wat-kost-pinnen.md), [What can you set in the Mollie window?](../../algemeen/naslag/mollie-venster.md)

---

# Can I connect Jimani to my accounting package?

**Answer:** Yes. With the accounting link (€15 per month, excl. VAT), Jimani sends every day close as a journal entry to Exact Online, Twinfield, SnelStart or Odoo. We do not connect other packages; in that case you export your figures from Reports to Excel or pdf.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on the add-on Accounting link under Settings > Add-ons. After that, **Accounting** appears under Settings > Money and figures, under Administration and costs.
- **Step 2.** Open the **Administration** tab. Under **Package** choose your accounting package. "Only the packages we can connect with today are in the list."
- **Step 3.** Fill in **Server address** (the web address where you log in to the package yourself), **Administration** (for Odoo the name of the database), **Key** and **Journal** (the journal in which the day close lands). The key is stored encrypted and cannot be read back afterwards.
- **Step 4.** Turn on **The link is switched on** and choose **Save link**. Then choose **Test connection**: this test uses what you have saved. If it works, you see your journals and VAT codes, and Jimani fills the drop-down lists of the chart of accounts with the accounts from your package.
- **Step 5.** Fill in the **Chart of accounts**: which general ledger account belongs to each VAT rate (Revenue accounts, VAT payable), each payment method (Cash and bank accounts) and the rest (Other). Choose **Save scheme**. "The chart of accounts has not been filled in yet. Until then nothing can go to the accounting package."
- **When it goes out.** Every night at 06:00 all day closes that are still open go to the package. Each day close goes once. In the **Sent** tab you see per day whether it worked; with **Send everything outstanding now** or **Send now** you do it right away.
- **Cash differences.** If **The cash is counted** is on, a counter appears after the day close and the difference goes along in the journal entry. A business without a cash drawer turns this off.
- **Export without a link.** In Settings > Money and figures > Reports every report has the buttons **Export** (Excel, one tab per section) and **Print** (pdf), with the filters you have chosen. You export the Foreign VAT report (OSS) as CSV.

![The Accounting screen, Administration tab, with the fields Package, Server address, Administration, Key and Journal and the buttons Test connection and Save link](/kennisbank/beelden/boekhoudkoppeling-en-export-1.webp)

**Example:** Your accountant works in Exact Online. You turn on the accounting link, connect Exact, choose the accounts for 21%, 9%, card and cash and save the scheme. From the next morning every closed day appears as a journal entry in Exact.

**Related questions:**

- Can I connect the POS to Exact Online or SnelStart?
- Does Jimani work with Twinfield or Odoo?
- How do I get my revenue into my accounting?
- What does the accounting link cost?
- My accounting package is not supported, how do I still get my figures out?

**Keywords:** accounting link, connect exact online, twinfield integration, snelstart integration, odoo integration, export revenue, journal entry day close

**Related:** [How does the Accounting screen work?](../naslag/boekhouding.md), [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md), [How does Financial reporting work?](../../algemeen/naslag/financiele-rapportage.md)

---

# How do I view and export my revenue over a period?

**Answer:** Go to Settings > Money and figures > Reports. Choose the Financial reporting tab (reservations) or, in the POS, the Financial overview. Set the period, click **Search** and choose **Export** for Excel or **Print** for a pdf.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Money and figures and under Figures choose **Reports**. At the top are the tabs you may see, such as Financial reporting and Progress report.
- **Step 2.** If your business has more modules, choose the module at the top, for example Restaurant or Activities.
- **Step 3.** Choose **From date** and **Date to**. With minus and plus you shift one day. Optionally filter by reservation type, **Availability** or **Payment method**.
- **Step 4.** Click **Search**. You see the total revenue (with In advance, Register and Open), the number of reservations and guests, the averages and the payment methods, with the reservations below that.
- **Step 5.** Choose **Export** for an Excel file with a tab per section, or **Print** for a pdf. Both use the filters you have chosen.
- **In the POS.** In the POS view Export and Print are not there; open the report in the dashboard instead.
- **Permissions.** An employee only sees this with the role permissions Financial reporting and View revenue and reports.

**Example:** Your accountant asks for the revenue of the third quarter. You choose 01-07 up to and including 30-09, click Search and then Export, and email the Excel file.

**Related questions:**

- How do I view my revenue for this month?
- How do I download my revenue to Excel?
- Where do I find the financial overview?
- How do I print a revenue overview for my accountant?

**Keywords:** view revenue, export revenue, excel report, revenue per month, financial report, quarterly revenue

**Related:** [How does Financial reporting work?](../naslag/financiele-rapportage.md), [Can I connect Jimani to my accounting package?](../../kassa/faq/boekhoudkoppeling-en-export.md)

---

# How do I compare my revenue and reservations with last month or last year?

**Answer:** With the Progress report: Settings > Money and figures > Reports, tab Progress report. Choose a **Period**, under **Compare with** choose Previous period, Last week, Last month or Last year and click **Search**. Jimani compares on the same weekdays.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Money and figures > Reports and open the Progress report tab.
- **Step 2.** Under Period choose **Today**, **This week**, **This month**, **This year** or **Custom period**.
- **Step 3.** Under Compare with choose what you want to compare with. Below the field you see the dates of the comparison period.
- **Step 4.** Optionally choose a filter (reservation type, Source, Part of day) and the **View** per day, week or month. Click **Search**.
- **Same weekday.** Last week is 7 days back and last year 52 weeks: you compare a Saturday with a Saturday. Last month is the previous calendar month (October against September).
- **No-shows and cancellations** are not counted by default; turn them on with **Include no-shows** and **Include cancelled**.
- **Save.** Export with **Export** (Excel) or **Print** (pdf).

**Example:** It is 20 October. You choose This month and Last year. Jimani places 1 up to and including 20 October next to the same weekdays of last year and shows the difference in percentages.

**Related questions:**

- How do I compare my revenue with last year?
- Am I making more revenue than last month?
- Where do I see whether my business is growing?
- How do I compare the number of reservations with last week?

**Keywords:** compare revenue, compare last year, revenue growth, progress, compare reservations, compare busy times

**Related:** [How does the Progress report work?](../naslag/progressierapportage.md), [How do I view and export my revenue over a period?](omzet-per-periode-bekijken-en-exporteren.md)

---

# Where do I find my invoices from Jimani and how do I pay an open invoice?

**Answer:** Your invoices from Jimani are under Settings > Money and figures > Invoicing and costs: your subscription, your integrations, your AI credit and your orders in the Jimani webshop. For an open invoice there is the button **Pay**; it opens a payment page right away.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Money and figures. Under Administration and costs you find **Invoicing and costs**. Only the owner sees this line.
- **Step 2.** Under **Your invoices** you see all invoices, newest on top, with **Number**, **Date**, **Description**, **Amount** and **Status** (Paid, Open or Cancelled). Choose **Open** to see only the outstanding ones. Click a column heading to sort.
- **Step 3.** Choose **Pdf** to download an invoice.
- **Step 4.** If an invoice is open, choose **Pay**. If there is no payment link yet, Jimani creates one at that moment. The payment page opens in a new tab.
- **Monthly payment.** If you pay monthly via automatic direct debit, the **Monthly payment** block at the top shows the status, the next debit and the amount including VAT. If a debit failed, it says "Failed" and you pay the open invoice with Pay; after that everything works again immediately.
- **AI credit.** The invoices for your top-ups are also in the Jimani AI credit screen.
- **Account not active.** If your account is on hold, after logging in you only see the list of your invoices (**Invoice**), with the due date, the status and a download button for each invoice.

**Example:** The direct debit of 1 November failed. In Invoicing and costs, Monthly payment says Failed and the November invoice says Open. You choose Pay, pay with iDEAL and everything works again.

**Related questions:**

- Where do I find my invoices from Jimani?
- How do I pay an outstanding invoice?
- How do I download an invoice as a pdf?
- Who can see the invoices from Jimani?

**Keywords:** invoice jimani, download invoices, pay open invoice, subscription invoice, invoicing and costs, payment link invoice

**Related:** [How does Invoicing and costs work?](../naslag/facturatie-en-kosten.md), [What happens if a payment to Jimani fails?](mislukte-incasso.md)

---

# My free period is ending: what do I need to do?

**Answer:** Nothing, if you want to keep the integrations: without a response, payment starts automatically on the date in the email. If you do not want to keep an integration, choose **No** for that integration in the Your free period screen; it then stops on the last free day, at no cost.

**Explanation:**

- **The announcement.** 30 days before the free period of a paid integration ends, you receive an email and a notification. It states for each integration what it costs **Per month** and from when, and the **Total per month, excl. VAT**. Integrations that end shortly after each other are listed together in one email.
- **Step 1.** In the email choose **Manage integrations** (or open the notification). The **Your free period** screen opens.
- **Step 2.** For each integration choose Yes or No under **Keep ...**. Your choice is saved immediately. No: "Stops on ..., at no cost."
- **Step 3.** If you want to confirm, choose **Agree**, in the screen or in the email. Agreeing is not necessary: without a response, payment starts automatically as announced.
- **Paying.** The amount is included in your monthly payment via automatic direct debit. If you do not have an authorisation yet, choose **Set up direct debit**. "Without an authorisation we do not debit anything. Your integrations keep working, but you will receive a reminder."
- **Reminders.** 7 days before the end you receive a reminder if you have not yet agreed and have not turned anything off. If you still have no authorisation after the start date, you receive a reminder 7 days later to set up direct debit.
- **After the start date.** The integration is then running and you can no longer choose No here. You cancel it in Settings > Add-ons; the integration stays on until the end of the month.
- **Never without an announcement.** Jimani never charges for an integration after a free period without this announcement. If the announcement came later, payment only starts 30 days after the announcement.

![The Your free period screen with the explanation that agreeing is not necessary and the button Previous](/kennisbank/beelden/gratis-periode-loopt-af-1.webp)

**Example:** Your time tracking is free up to and including 31 December. On 1 December you receive the email. You choose No: time tracking stops on 31 December and you pay nothing. If you do nothing, from 1 January you pay €15 per month excl. VAT.

**Related questions:**

- My trial period is almost over, what do I need to do?
- How do I stop a feature before payment begins?
- Do I have to agree to continue after the free period?
- What does the email about my free period mean?

**Keywords:** free period ending, cancel integration, free year over, agree integrations, paying after free period, set up direct debit

**Related:** [How does the Your free period screen work?](../naslag/je-gratis-periode.md), [Can I try a paid feature first, and how do I cancel it?](betaalde-functie-proberen-en-opzeggen.md)

---

# I received a payment request from Jimani: how does that work?

**Answer:** After a conversation with Jimani, our employee prepares your order and you receive an email with a link to your online order. There you check the order, complete your company details and choose **Pay**. After paying you receive the invoice by email and we set up your account.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open the link from the email. You do not need to log in; the link only gives access to your order. At the top is **Your order** with the items, **Subtotal**, **Shipping costs**, **VAT** and **Total**. You cannot change the items yourself.
- **Step 2.** Under **Company registration and VAT** you can optionally enter your **Chamber of Commerce number** and click **Look up**: we then fill in your company details and address for you. If you had already entered something else, Jimani asks whether the KvK details may replace it: **Copy from KvK** or **Keep my details**. This whole block is optional.
- **Step 3.** Under **Your company** enter the **Company name**, **Main user first name**, **Main user last name**, **Email** and **Phone**. "The main user becomes the owner of your Jimani account."
- **Step 4.** Enter the **Billing address**. Under **Shipping address** you choose **Same as billing address**, or you enter the address where we send the hardware.
- **Step 5.** Choose **Pay**. You pay via Mollie. This first payment also gives Jimani the authorisation for later monthly payments.
- **VAT reverse charge.** If you have a VAT number from a country other than the Netherlands, we apply the VAT reverse charge. VAT and shipping costs are calculated immediately based on the country and VAT number you enter.
- **After paying.** You see "Paid" and "Thank you for your payment. The invoice has been sent by email and is ready below." with the button **Download invoice**. For a new business it also says "Your account is being set up, you will get an email shortly." After that your details are fixed.

**Example:** In an advice session you order a POS screen and a receipt printer. You receive the email, complete your details, choose Same as billing address and pay. You download the invoice and a little later receive the email that your account is ready.

**Related questions:**

- I received an email from Jimani with a payment link, is it real?
- How do I pay my order with Jimani after a conversation?
- Do I have to log in to open the payment request?
- When do I get the invoice and my account?
- Can I change the items in my order myself?

**Keywords:** payment request jimani, pay order, payment link jimani, complete order, invoice jimani order, look up kvk

**Related:** [How does the online order of a payment request work?](../naslag/betaalverzoek-online-bestelling.md), [How do I order a POS, printer or card terminal from Jimani?](../../kassa/faq/apparatuur-bestellen-bij-jimani.md)

---

# How do I order a POS, printer or card terminal from Jimani?

**Answer:** In the Jimani webshop **POS and hardware**: POS screens, printers, card terminals and other hardware, also as a set. You open it via Settings > Add-ons > **Buy hardware in the Jimani webshop**, or via the tile **View our hardware** under Registers and hardware. You choose **Add**, then **Checkout**, and pay via Mollie.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open the webshop. "Everything you need to work with Jimani. Prices are excluding VAT; what you pay depends on the delivery address and is shown at checkout." You also find it by typing "Jimani webshop" in **Search for a setting…**.
- **Step 2.** If you are unsure what you need, choose **Start advice**: you answer a few questions and get tailored advice. Some devices have **Demo**: try the device with your own products.
- **Step 3.** Click an item for the **Description** and, if there is one, the **Manual**. You see whether it is **In stock** ("Order before 16:00, delivered tomorrow") or **On order**.
- **Step 4.** Choose **Add** or, in the item, the **Quantity** and **Add to cart**. The cart shows the subtotal, the VAT and the total.
- **Step 5.** Choose **Checkout**, enter your details and the delivery address and choose **Place order**. You pay via Mollie. VAT and shipping costs follow the delivery address; from a certain amount shipping is free.
- **After the order.** Under Settings > Till and products > **Registers and hardware** there is a tile per ordered device with **Waiting for payment** or **Ordered**. Once it has been delivered, you connect it there. Jimani sets a card terminal up on your own Mollie account; for that Mollie must be connected.
- **Your invoice** is then under Settings > Money and figures > Invoicing and costs.
- **Ordering via Jimani.** If you order in a conversation with Jimani, you receive a payment request by email and complete your details online.

![The Jimani webshop POS and hardware with the items, the button Start advice and the cart](/kennisbank/beelden/apparatuur-bestellen-bij-jimani-1.webp)

**Example:** You open a second location. You choose Start advice, get a POS screen, receipt printer and card terminal suggested, put them in the cart and choose Checkout. After paying, the three devices appear as Ordered under Registers and hardware.

**Related questions:**

- Where can I buy a POS, printer or card terminal?
- Does Jimani also sell hardware as a set?
- How do I order a POS screen or receipt printer?
- How do I pay for hardware that I order from Jimani?

**Keywords:** order pos, hardware jimani, buy receipt printer, order card terminal, buy pos screen, jimani webshop, buy hardware

**Related:** [How does checkout in the Jimani webshop work?](../naslag/afrekenen-jimani-webshop.md), [What do card payments cost with Jimani?](wat-kost-pinnen.md), [I received a payment request from Jimani: how does that work?](../../prijzen/faq/betaalverzoek-van-jimani.md)

---

# Can I pass transaction costs on to my guests?

**Answer:** Yes, for online payment for a reservation or ticket. Turn on the add-on Transaction costs, create transaction costs with a name and a price, and under a reservation type choose "Do you want to charge transaction costs?" Yes. The costs then appear on the guest's bill.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on the add-on Transaction costs under Settings > Add-ons. Transaction costs only work with a connected Mollie account.
- **Step 2.** Create the transaction costs in your module. In Restaurant you choose **Transaction costs** with the plus button (What do you want to add); in the hotel the Transaction costs card is among the products.
- **Step 3.** For each language enter the **Name** (at most 50 characters) and the **Description**. Choose **Next**.
- **Step 4.** Enter the **Price** and choose the **VAT group**. Choose **Save**.
- **Step 5.** Open the reservation type. Under Payment set "Do you want to receive a payment for this reservation?" to Yes. Below it is "Do you want to charge transaction costs?": choose Yes and under **Transaction costs** choose which costs this reservation gets.
- **Turning off.** Open the transaction costs and set **Active** to No: they can then no longer be chosen. Or choose **Delete**.
- **Without Mollie** you cannot enter a price; the price field is then off with a warning.

**Example:** You create "Online payment service fee" of €0.50 and choose it for the reservation type Dinner. A guest who books and pays for a dinner online sees €0.50 transaction costs on their bill.

**Related questions:**

- Can I pass the cost of online payment on to the guest?
- How do I charge service or administration fees on a reservation?
- How do I turn on transaction costs for tickets?
- Who pays the iDEAL costs for online reservations?

**Keywords:** transaction costs, service fee online payment, pass on costs to guest, transaction costs reservation, payment fees guest

**Related:** [What can you set under Transaction costs?](../naslag/transactiekosten.md), [How do I connect Mollie to Jimani?](mollie-koppelen-aan-jimani.md), [Can I pass on transaction costs to the buyer of a ticket?](../../ticketing/faq/transactiekosten-doorrekenen.md), [How do extra products and transaction costs work for an activity?](../../activities/faq/extra-product-en-transactiekosten.md)

---

# What does the red line "Refund needed" or "Underpaid" on a booking mean?

**Answer:** That red line means something is wrong with the payment for that booking: a payment was made for a cancelled booking, too little or a different amount was paid, or a refund to the card failed. Resolve it (have the difference paid or refund it) and then choose **Handled**.

**Explanation:**

- **Where you see it.** At the top of the detail screen of a webshop order, reservation, activity, appointment or ticket order, and as a red label in the list. You also receive an email about it.
- **Refund needed.** "... received via payment ..., but the booking had already been cancelled. Refund the amount."
- **Underpaid.** "... received via payment ..., but ... was outstanding. Have the difference paid or refund it."
- **Amount differs.** "... received via payment ..., but the booking is set at .... Check it and have the difference paid or refund it."
- **Card refund failed.** A return at the POS did not go back to the customer's card: refund in cash.
- **Refund not recorded.** The money went back to the card, but the return is not in the POS: check the receipt.
- **Step 1.** Look up the payment with the payment number from the line, for example in Everything about payments (Settings > Money and figures > Payments (Mollie)).
- **Step 2.** Refund (in Everything about payments, button Refund) or have the guest pay the difference.
- **Step 3.** Choose **Handled** in the red line. The line turns green, showing who handled it and when. If that fails, you see "Couldn't complete. Please try again."

**Example:** A guest cancels their reservation, but then still pays the €25 deposit. The reservation says "Refund needed". You refund the €25 in Everything about payments and choose Handled.

**Related questions:**

- What does Refund needed mean on a booking?
- What does Underpaid mean on a reservation?
- Why is there a red label on an order?
- How do I get rid of the red message on a payment?
- A guest paid for a cancelled booking, what should I do?

**Keywords:** refund needed, underpaid, amount differs, red payment message, payment cancelled reservation, handled

**Related:** [Where do I see my Mollie balance, payouts and payments in Jimani?](mollie-saldo-en-betalingen-bekijken.md), [How does Everything about payments work?](../naslag/alles-over-betalingen.md)

---

# What can you set in the Mollie window?

**Answer:** In the Mollie window you connect your own Mollie account, see how far Mollie is with checking your details, and arrange card payments: the card payment subscription, Tap to Pay and fetching your card terminals. The heading says: "Connect the system with Mollie, so that you can use products and deposits."

**Where to find it:** Settings > Money and figures > Payments (Mollie). If Mollie is already connected, that line opens Everything about payments; type "Mollie" in **Search for a setting…** then (`/Settings/CompanyInfo?stap=4`)

**Explanation:** As long as you are not connected, there is only the block **Connect with Mollie**: "After that you receive payments and can set up card payments, Tap to Pay and your card terminals." After connecting you see at the top a bar with the status (test phase or live), a short list of what already works, what is still needed at Mollie, and the block **Card payments**. At the top right is the sign **Connected**. Only the owner can connect Mollie; the steps are in [How do I connect Mollie to Jimani?](../faq/mollie-koppelen-aan-jimani.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Connect with Mollie | Sends you to Mollie. "You log in at Mollie with your own account, or create an account there. After that you automatically come back here." | Once, to connect your Mollie account. | Owner only. Without a connection there is nothing else in the window. |
| Approve permissions | Opens Mollie to approve the current permissions. "Jimani arranges your payments, refunds, payouts, card terminals and payment methods, without you having to log in at Mollie. To do that, approve the permissions once at Mollie; after that you automatically come back here." | When the block "One more step: approve permissions at Mollie" is shown. | Required: without this step card payments, Tap to Pay and View my Mollie do not work. Anyone who connects now approves them right away. |
| Receive payments | A checkmark if Mollie may receive payments for you, otherwise a dash. | To see whether guests can really pay yet. | - |
| Payouts to your bank account | A checkmark if Mollie may pay out money to your account. | To see whether money can come in yet. | - |
| To your company details | Opens your company details, with the fields that Mollie is still missing. | When it says you first need to complete your company details. | Without those details Mollie cannot create your payment profile. |
| What's still needed / Finish at Mollie | The steps Mollie still asks of you, for example "Confirm your bank account" or "Confirm the owners of your company", with a button to that step at Mollie. | As long as Mollie still needs your details. | If it says **Due by** with a date, finish it before that date. |
| Continue to Mollie | Goes to your pre-filled connection link at Mollie. | In the test phase, if you have not signed up at Mollie yet. | - |
| Mollie profile | The profile on which the payments arrive: "The payments of your online store, widget and POS arrive on this profile." | Only if you have more than one profile at Mollie. | With one profile Jimani chooses it itself and you do not see this choice. |
| Card payments: with or without a subscription | Shows whether you take card payments with or without a card payment subscription, and until when it runs. With a subscription it shows €20 per month per card terminal and how many card terminals you have now. Buttons: **Take out a subscription**, **Don't renew** or **Continue anyway**. | If you take more card payments and want the lower rate, or want to stop. | See [How do I take out or cancel a card payment subscription?](../../kassa/faq/pinabonnement-afsluiten-of-opzeggen.md). The rates are in [What do card payments cost with Jimani?](../../kassa/faq/wat-kost-pinnen.md). |
| Tap to Pay / Request pairing code | Creates a pairing code with QR for the Mollie Tap app: "Take card payments with your phone or tablet, no device needed." | If you want to use a phone or tablet as a card terminal. | Scan the QR in the Mollie Tap app. Jimani checks every ten seconds for ten minutes whether the device is there and then reports it automatically. |
| Fetch devices | "Fetches your card terminals and connected devices from Mollie and adds them to your external devices." | If a card terminal or Tap device is not in Jimani yet. | You see how many devices were added, or that nothing new was ready. |
| View my Mollie | Opens Everything about payments in a new tab. | To see balance, payments and payouts. | Only with the role permission Everything about payments (the owner always). |
| Disconnect Mollie | Removes the connection after the question "Are you sure? After disconnecting, guests can no longer pay you, until you connect again." | Only if you want to connect a different Mollie account. | Guests can no longer pay afterwards. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Your store is in the test phase. | You can try everything out with test payments; guests do not really pay yet. | Connect Mollie as soon as you want to start selling for real. |
| Mollie is reviewing your details. | Mollie is busy with the check. | Nothing; Jimani automatically makes your store live. |
| Mollie still needs details from you. | There are open steps at Mollie. | Finish the steps under What's still needed. |
| Your payments are on. | Guests pay directly into your own Mollie account. Below it is **Live since** with the date. | Nothing. |
| We couldn't fetch your payment profile from Mollie right now. Try again in a few minutes. If that still doesn't work, disconnect Mollie and connect again. | Mollie did not return your profile. | Wait a moment and open again; otherwise disconnect and connect again. |
| Only the owner can connect Mollie. | You are not logged in as the owner. | Have the owner connect. |
| Mollie does not provide a pairing code via Jimani for your account. | Mollie does not create a Tap code via Jimani for your account. | Create the code in your Mollie dashboard (Point of sale, Add terminal, Activate Tap) and scan it with the Mollie Tap app. The device then appears automatically. |

**Related questions:**

- What can I do in the Mollie window?
- How do I arrange my card payment subscription?
- How do I see how far Mollie is with checking my account?
- Where do I turn on Tap to Pay?

**Keywords:** mollie settings, mollie window, disconnect mollie, connect tap to pay, fetch card terminal, mollie profile, mollie test phase

**Related:** [How do I connect Mollie to Jimani?](../faq/mollie-koppelen-aan-jimani.md), [How does Everything about payments work?](alles-over-betalingen.md), [What do card payments cost with Jimani?](../../kassa/faq/wat-kost-pinnen.md)

---

# How does Everything about payments work?

**Answer:** Everything about payments shows "Your balance, payouts, payments and refunds at Mollie in one place." You read everything from your own Mollie account here and you can do two things: refund a payment and turn a payment method on or off.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Money and figures > Payments (Mollie), or the button View my Mollie in the Mollie window (`/Molliebeheer`)

**Explanation:** The line only appears if your Mollie account is connected and you have the role permission **Everything about payments** (the owner always has it; for other roles it is off by default). Everything you see comes directly from Mollie. After a refund or a changed payment method the screen refreshes, so that it never shows anything different from Mollie. You manage your bank account and your company details at Mollie itself; that changes where your money goes.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Balance | Three tiles: **Currency**, **Available** and **Pending**. "Available is what Mollie sends to your account with the next payout. Pending has been paid but not yet released." | To see how much money is ready. | If Mollie returns nothing, it says "Mollie isn't returning a balance here yet." |
| Payouts | List with **Reference**, **Date**, **Amount** and **Status** of every payout to your bank. | To find a deposit in your bank again. | The status is shown in Dutch, for example the Dutch word for Paid out. |
| Payments | List with **Date**, **Description**, **Method**, **Amount**, **Refunded** and **Status**. | To look up a payment from a guest. | - |
| Refund | For a paid payment from which something can still be refunded. You enter the amount (at most what can still be refunded). | For a cancellation or complaint. | You can also refund part of it. Check that the booking itself is also correct. |
| Refunds | The payments that have been (partly) refunded: **Payment date**, **Description**, **Method**, **Paid**, **Refunded**. | To see what has already been refunded. | You refund on the Payments tab. |
| Payment methods | For each method (iDEAL, card and others) whether it is on, with **Turn on** or **Turn off**. | To turn a method on or off for your guests. | Some methods have to be approved by Mollie first. |
| Which Mollie card payment plan suits you best? | Below the payment methods: a calculator with **Pay as you go** ("No monthly fee, 1.5% per transaction, at most 1 card terminal") and **PRO** ("€20 per card terminal per month, €0.06 + 0.2% per transaction"), calculated with your card revenue of the last months and your number of card terminals. **Cheapest** is shown on the plan that costs you the least. | If you are unsure about a card payment subscription. | "With an average payment under €4.62, Pay as you go is always cheaper." You choose your plan yourself at Mollie: **To Mollie**. |
| Mollie invoices | The invoices Mollie sends you: **Number**, **Date**, **Amount**, **Status** and **View** (pdf). | For your administration. | These are the invoices from Mollie, not those from Jimani. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Your Mollie account isn't connected yet. | There is no connection with your own Mollie account. | First connect Mollie in the Mollie window. |
| How much do you want to refund? At most {0} euros. | The question after Refund, with the highest amount already filled in. | Leave the amount or enter a lower amount. |
| Refund via Jimani | The description the refund gets at Mollie. | - |
| Enter an amount. | No amount or an invalid amount was entered. | Enter an amount above zero. |
| There's nothing to refund. | The payment was not found or nothing was chosen. | Refresh the screen and try again. |
| The refund is ready at Mollie. | Success; Mollie carries out the refund. | Nothing. |
| Mollie did not make the refund. Check whether the amount can still be refunded. | Mollie refused, for example because it has already been refunded or your balance is too low. | Check the amount and your balance. |
| The payment method is turned on. | The method has been turned on on your payment profile. | - |
| The payment method is turned off. | The method has been turned off. | - |
| No payment method has been chosen. | No method was sent along. | Refresh the screen and try again. |
| Your Mollie account or your payment profile isn't ready yet. | There is no payment profile at Mollie yet. | Finish the steps in the Mollie window. |
| You have no permission for Everything about payments. | Your role is missing the role permission Everything about payments. | Ask the owner for the permission in Users and permissions. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see my Mollie balance, payouts and payments together?
- Why don't I see the line Everything about payments?
- Who may view Everything about payments?
- Can I refund a payment here?

**Keywords:** everything about payments, my mollie, mollie balance, mollie payouts, refund, payment methods mollie, invoices mollie

**Related:** [Where do I see my Mollie balance, payouts and payments in Jimani?](../faq/mollie-saldo-en-betalingen-bekijken.md), [What can you set in the Mollie window?](mollie-venster.md)

---

# How does the Accounting screen work?

**Answer:** In Accounting you set up the link with your accounting package (Exact Online, Twinfield, SnelStart or Odoo), choose which general ledger account belongs to which amount, and see for each day close whether it has arrived in the package. There are three tabs: Sent, Administration and Cash differences.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Money and figures > Accounting link (the Accounting screen), under Administration and costs. Only with the add-on Accounting link (`/Settings/Boekhouding`). If it is off, the screen says that Count the cash is not available without the Accounting link and points to Settings > Add-ons

**Explanation:** Every night at 06:00 everything that is outstanding automatically goes to the package. "Every day close goes to the accounting package once. Here you see for which day that worked and for which it did not." At the top right is **Need help?**, which opens a help request. The role permission is called **Accounting**. A step-by-step guide is in [Can I connect Jimani to my accounting package?](../faq/boekhoudkoppeling-en-export.md).

![The Accounting screen, Cash differences tab, with the Yes/No button The cash is counted](/kennisbank/beelden/boekhouding-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Sent | The overview of all day closes with **Document number**, **Period**, **Gross**, **Status**, **Package**, **Sent on** (with the number of attempts) and **Reason**. Above the list four figures: Not sent yet, Sent today, Total outstanding and Last send. | To see whether every day is in your accounting. | The document number is the sequence number of the day close receipt. |
| Send everything outstanding now | Does the night round now, for your business. | After a disruption, or if you do not want to wait until tomorrow. | The same protection against double booking as at night. |
| Journal entry | Shows the entry as it goes to the package, with **General ledger**, **Description**, **VAT code**, **Debit** and **Credit**. | To check whether the entry is right before the package rejects it. | - |
| Send now | Sends this one day. | For a day that has not been sent yet. | A day that has already gone out does not get this button. |
| Try again | Tries a failed send again. | If the status shows an error and you have fixed the cause. | - |
| Package | The accounting package. "Only the packages we can connect with today are in the list." | When setting up. | Choice of Odoo, Exact Online, SnelStart and Twinfield. |
| Server address | "The web address where you log in to the package yourself." | When setting up. | For example the address of your Odoo. |
| Administration | The administration in the package. "For Odoo that is the name of the database." | When setting up. | - |
| Key | The key with which Jimani may access your package. If it says "Set; leave empty to keep it as is", there is already one. | When setting up or when the key changes. | "The key is stored encrypted and cannot be read back afterwards." |
| Journal | "The journal in which the day close lands; first choose a package." | When setting up. | After Test connection you see the journals of your package. |
| The link is switched on | On: the day closes go to the package. "If this is off, everything is filled in but nothing goes out." | To stop temporarily without losing everything. | - |
| Test connection | Fetches the journals, VAT codes and general ledger from your package and fills the drop-down lists of the chart of accounts. | After Save link. | The test uses the saved details: save first. |
| Save link | Stores package, address, administration, key, journal and on or off. | After filling in. | The key field is emptied after saving. |
| Chart of accounts | "Which general ledger account belongs to which rate, which payment method and which type." In four blocks: **Revenue accounts**, **VAT payable**, **Cash and bank accounts** and **Other**, with a VAT code where needed. | Once when setting up, and when you use a new rate or a new payment method. | An account that is no longer in the package stays selected with "(no longer in the package)". |
| Save scheme | Stores the chart of accounts. | After choosing the accounts. | "Don't forget to save: a scheme that has not been saved does not go to the package." |
| The cash is counted | On: after closing a counter appears and the difference goes to the accounting. "A business without a cash drawer does not need to count. If this is off, there is also no cash line in the journal entry." | Turn off if you have no cash. | Is on the Cash differences tab, under Count the cash at the day close. |
| Cash differences | Per day **Receipt**, **Period**, **Expected**, **Counted**, **Difference**, **Counted by** and **Note**, with the difference over all days together and how many days have not been counted. Below that, **Per staff member**, the shortage and surplus. | To see shortages or surpluses. | A day without a count is deliberately listed too, as Not counted. |
| Count / Count again | Opens the cash count of that day. | If a day has not been counted or counted wrongly. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| The chart of accounts has not been filled in yet. Until then nothing can go to the accounting package. | No accounts have been chosen yet. | Fill in the chart of accounts and choose Save scheme. |
| Under Other, choose an account for {0}. Without that account a day on which it occurs does not go to the accounting package. | Your business uses something (for example tourist tax) for which no account has been chosen yet. | Choose that account under Other. |
| No day has been closed yet, so there is nothing to send. | There is no day close yet. | First close a day. |
| The package couldn't be reached. | The test got no connection. | Check the address, the administration and the key. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I know whether my day close has arrived in my accounting package?
- How do I set up general ledger accounts for the link?
- Where do I find cash differences?
- Where do I set up the accounting link?

**Keywords:** set up accounting, chart of accounts, general ledger account pos, journal entry, cash differences, exact online, twinfield, snelstart, odoo

**Related:** [Can I connect Jimani to my accounting package?](../faq/boekhoudkoppeling-en-export.md), [How does the day closing and counting the cash work?](../faq/dagafsluiting-en-kas-tellen.md)

---

# How does Financial reporting work?

**Answer:** Financial reporting shows the revenue and the reservations of your reservation module (restaurant, activities, ticket sales, salon or hotel) over a period you choose. "Search by date, reservation type or availability and see all the information quickly and clearly." You can export the report to Excel or print it as a pdf.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Money and figures > Reports, tab Financial reporting (`/Settings/FinancialReport`)

**Explanation:** Choose the period and optionally a filter and click **Search**. By default the period is set from the first day of last month up to and including today. If your business has more modules, you choose the module in the bar at the top. In the POS itself (module POS) this entry opens the Financial overview of the POS. Above the list are the key figures: **Total reservations** (for ticket sales **Total number of tickets**), **Guests**, **Total revenue** with **In advance**, **Register** and **Open**, **Avg. guests per reservation**, **Avg. spend per guest**, **Avg. length of stay** and the **Payment methods**. Below that are the reservations themselves, twenty per page. The role permission for this screen is called **Financial reporting**. In addition, the role permission **View revenue and reports** determines who may see revenue and reports; by default the Owner and the Manager have it.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| From date | The start of the period, with minus and plus to shift one day. | Always. | Minus and plus reload the report immediately. |
| Date to | The end of the period. | Always. | A date in the future is not possible; From date may not be after Date to. |
| Reservation type | Filters by one reservation type. For activities this field is called **Activity**, for ticket sales **Event Type**. | To view one type, for example only lunch. | With **Make a selection** you see everything. |
| Availability | Filters by an availability (booking group). | To view one availability. | Not for activities. |
| Payment method | Filters by how it was paid: Cash, Card, Tap to Pay, Other, On account, Gift voucher or Online. | To see, for example, only the online payments. | Online is everything paid via Mollie (iDEAL, card, PayPal and others). The filter looks at the reservation and at receipts with that payment method. |
| Search | Loads the report with the chosen filters. | After choosing the filters. | - |
| Export | Downloads the report as Excel, with a tab per section and the filters from above. | For your accountant or your own administration. | Not in the POS view. |
| Print | Creates a pdf with the same filters. | To print or store. | Not in the POS view. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I see the revenue of my reservations over a period?
- How do I export Financial reporting to Excel?
- Where do I find the key figures of my reservations?
- How do I filter my revenue by reservation type?

**Keywords:** financial reporting, revenue per period, revenue reservations, export report, excel export revenue, payment methods overview

**Related:** [How do I view and export my revenue over a period?](../faq/omzet-per-periode-bekijken-en-exporteren.md), [How does the Progress report work?](progressierapportage.md)

---

# How does the Progress report work?

**Answer:** The Progress report shows how your business is developing: "See how your business is developing: reservations, guests and revenue, compared with an earlier period on the same weekdays." You choose a period, what you want to compare with and how you want to see it, per day, week or month.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Money and figures > Reports, tab Progress report (`/Settings/ProgressReport`)

**Explanation:** There is one Progress report for all modules; if your business has more, you choose the module in the bar at the top. After **Search** you see tiles with the figures and the difference with the comparison period, a chart **History** (Reservations, Guests or Revenue; for the POS Receipts), **By reservation type**, **Busy times by weekday and hour**, **Booking lead time** and **Regular guests**. For the POS only the sections about receipts are shown. The role permissions are called **Progress report** and, for ticket sales, **Ticket sales progress report**.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Period | Quick choice: **Today**, **This week**, **This month**, **This year** or **Custom period**. | Always. | Default This month. A week starts on Monday. |
| From / Up to and including | The start and end of the period, with minus and plus. | For Custom period, or to shift. | - |
| Compare with | **Previous period**, **Last week**, **Last month** or **Last year**. Below the field you see the dates being compared against. | To see whether things are going better or worse. | Last week and last year fall on the same weekday (last year = 52 weeks back). Last month is the previous calendar month. Previous period is the same length, rounded to whole weeks. |
| Reservation type | Choose one or more types; empty is **All**. For ticket sales and activities this field is named differently. | To follow one type. | Not for the POS. |
| Booking group | Filters by a booking group. | If you work with groups. | Only if you have groups. |
| Source | **All**, **Widget**, **Employee** or **Register**: where the booking came from. | To see how much comes in online. | - |
| Part of day | **All day**, **Morning** (until 12:00), **Afternoon** (12:00 to 17:00), **Evening** (from 17:00) or **Custom time slot**. | To view, for example, only the evening. | - |
| Custom time slot | Your own start and end time. | With Part of day Custom time slot. | - |
| Include no-shows | Yes or No, default No. | If you do want to count no-shows. | Not for the POS. |
| Include cancelled | Yes or No, default No. | If you also want to see cancelled bookings. | Not for the POS. |
| View | **Per day**, **Per week** or **Per month**: the layout of the chart. | For a long period, per week or month is clearer. | Default Per day. |
| Search | Loads the report. | After choosing. | - |
| Export | Excel, a tab per section, with the filters from above. | For your own analysis. | Not in the POS view. |
| Print | Pdf with the same filters. | To store or share. | Not in the POS view. |
| Revenue | In the History chart: the revenue over time. | To follow the revenue. | - |

**Related questions:**

- How do I see how my business is developing?
- On which days and hours is it busiest for me?
- How do I compare my figures per day, week or month?
- What does the Progress report show?

**Keywords:** progress report, compare revenue, compare last year, business growth, busy times per hour, booking lead time

**Related:** [How do I compare my revenue and reservations with last month or last year?](../faq/omzet-vergelijken-met-vorige-periode.md), [How does Financial reporting work?](financiele-rapportage.md)

---

# What is in the Own consumption overview?

**Answer:** The Own consumption overview shows per year everything you have booked as own consumption: per type, per month and per receipt, with the cost price, the VAT on the cost price and the sales value for info. You can export it to Excel or print it as a pdf.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Money and figures > Reports, in the POS Financial overview the button **Own consumption** (`/Settings/EigenverbruikFinancialReport`)

**Explanation:** You book own consumption at the POS (see [How do I book own consumption, staff consumption or shrinkage?](../faq/eigen-verbruik.md)). This overview reads the journal: "No revenue: the receipt is at zero in the journal and the VAT on the selling price is not paid. Cost price = purchase price x quantity; unknown is not counted." With the arrow at the top left you go back to the Financial overview. The overview requires the same permission as the Financial overview.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Year | Chooses the year of the overview. | Always; default this year. | - |
| Export | Excel with a tab per section, for the chosen year. | For your accountant. | Not in the POS view. |
| Print | Pdf of the chosen year. | To store. | Not in the POS view. |
| Per type | Per **Type of consumption** the number of **Receipts**, the **Quantity** of products, **Cost price excl. VAT**, **VAT on cost price** and **Sales value (for info)**, with a total. | For the annual figures. | Below it is a short explanation per type (own use, staff and on the house, shrinkage). |
| Per month | The same columns per **Month** and type. | To see when there was a lot of own consumption. | - |
| Receipts | Each receipt with **Date**, **Receipt**, **Type of consumption**, **Reason or name**, **Product**, **Quantity** and **Cost price excl. VAT**. | To check one booking. | A cost price without a purchase price is shown as Unknown. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| The Own consumption integration is turned off. What was booked earlier is shown below. | The free feature Own consumption is turned off; earlier bookings remain visible. | Turn on Own consumption if you want to book again. |
| Please note: the cost price is unknown for some of the lines. Enter the purchase price of those products. | There are products without a purchase price. | Enter the purchase price for those products. |
| Partly without cost price: only the known cost price has been added up. | The amount with an asterisk is incomplete. | Enter the missing purchase prices. |
| No own use this year. | Nothing was booked this year. | Choose another year. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I see how much own consumption I have booked this year?
- Can I export the Own consumption overview to Excel?
- Where do I find the cost price and VAT on own consumption?

**Keywords:** own consumption overview, staff consumption overview, shrinkage overview, cost price own consumption, on the house report

**Related:** [How do I book own consumption, staff consumption or shrinkage?](../faq/eigen-verbruik.md), [How do I view and export my revenue over a period?](../../algemeen/faq/omzet-per-periode-bekijken-en-exporteren.md)

---

# What is in the Foreign VAT report (OSS)?

**Answer:** The Foreign VAT report (OSS) shows per quarter your webshop sales to other EU countries, per country and VAT rate, for your OSS return. You export it as a CSV file.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Money and figures > Reports, in the POS Financial overview the button **Foreign VAT report (OSS)** (`/Settings/OssFinancialReport`)

**Explanation:** "Webshop orders that were shipped to another EU country, with the VAT of that country. Paid, not cancelled and not withdrawn. A refund in a later quarter is corrected in the return of that quarter." Above the table you see how much you have shipped to other EU countries this year, next to the threshold of €10,000; if you go above it, that line turns into a warning. How OSS works and how to turn it on is in [How does OSS VAT work in my Jimani webshop?](../faq/oss-btw.md). With the arrow at the top left you go back to the Financial overview.

![The Foreign VAT report (OSS) with the choice of Year and Quarter, the button Export and the table per country and rate](/kennisbank/beelden/btw-rapport-buitenland-oss-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Year | Chooses the year. | For your return. | The report reloads immediately. |
| Quarter | Chooses the quarter (Q1 up to and including Q4). | For your quarterly return. | The report reloads immediately. |
| Export | Downloads the quarter as a CSV file. | To copy the figures into the return. | The file name contains the year and quarter. |
| Country / Rate | The buyer's country and the VAT rate of that country. | - | One line per country and rate. |
| Revenue excl. VAT / VAT / Revenue incl. VAT | The amounts per country and rate. | For the return. | - |
| Orders | The number of orders per line. | - | - |
| Total | The sum of all lines. | - | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| OSS is off: your webshop charges Dutch VAT. Turn on OSS in Settings > Webshop if you exceed the threshold of 10,000 euros per year. | OSS is not on; you charge Dutch VAT. | Turn OSS on under Settings > Guests and bookings > Delivery and pickup > Webshop settings (or type "Webshop settings" in Search for a setting…); the message still mentions the old location Settings > Webshop, if you exceed the threshold. |
| No OSS sales this quarter. | There are no OSS sales in this quarter. | Choose another quarter. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I retrieve my OSS report per quarter?
- Where do I see how much I have sold to other EU countries?
- What is the threshold of 10,000 euros for OSS?
- Can I export the OSS report as CSV?

**Keywords:** oss report, foreign vat, oss return, eu vat quarter, vat per country webshop

**Related:** [How does OSS VAT work in my Jimani webshop?](../faq/oss-btw.md), [How does the Webshop settings window work?](webshop-instellingen.md), [What is in the Own consumption overview?](../../kassa/naslag/eigen-verbruik-overzicht.md)

---

# How does Invoicing and costs work?

**Answer:** Invoicing and costs shows "All your invoices from Jimani: your subscription, your integrations and your orders in the webshop." You see the status of each invoice, download the pdf and pay an open invoice directly with the button Pay.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Money and figures > Invoicing and costs, under Administration and costs (`/Settings/CompanyInfo?stap=2`). Owner only.

**Explanation:** The window has two blocks. **Monthly payment** only appears if you pay Jimani monthly via automatic direct debit. **Your invoices** shows all invoices from Jimani to your business, including those of zero euros, newest on top. You do not find invoices from Mollie itself here but in Everything about payments. If your account is not active, after logging in Jimani only opens a list of your invoices (**Invoice**); see the table below.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Monthly payment | The status of your monthly direct debit: **Active** with "Next debit on ...", the amount including VAT and the payment method, and the lines that make up the amount. | To see what will be debited next time. | If a debit fails it says **Failed**, with whether your paid modules are on hold or your POS has stopped. |
| All / Open | Filter: all invoices or only the outstanding ones, with the number behind it. | To quickly see what you still have to pay. | - |
| Number, Date, Description, Amount, Status | The columns of the list. Click a column heading to sort. | - | Status is Paid, Open or Cancelled. |
| Pay | Opens the payment page of an open invoice in a new tab. | For an open invoice. | If there is no payment link yet, Jimani creates one now. |
| Pdf | Downloads the invoice as a pdf. | For your administration. | - |
| Invoice (account not active) | A list with **Date from**, **Due date**, **Invoice number**, **Price**, **VAT**, **Total**, **Status** (Paid or Unpaid), **Payment date** and a download button per invoice. | If your account is on hold and you want to see what is outstanding. | You then only see this list; after paying everything is turned on again. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| There are no invoices yet. | Jimani has not invoiced you anything yet. | Nothing. |
| No data found. | The Invoice list (account not active) is empty. | Contact Jimani. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see what I pay Jimani?
- What does the status Open, Paid or Cancelled mean on an invoice?
- Where is the monthly automatic direct debit?
- Where do I find the invoices from Mollie?

**Keywords:** invoicing and costs, invoices jimani, download invoice, open invoice, monthly payment, direct debit jimani

**Related:** [Where do I find my invoices from Jimani and how do I pay an open invoice?](../faq/facturen-van-jimani-bekijken-en-betalen.md), [What happens if a payment to Jimani fails?](../faq/mislukte-incasso.md)

---

# How does the Jimani AI credit screen work?

**Answer:** In Jimani AI credit you see your balance, top up, choose what happens when the credit runs out, and see your usage and your invoices. "All AI in Jimani is paid from this credit: the assistant, Write with AI, website texts, AI images and translating. Your credit does not expire."

**Where to find it:** Settings > Money and figures > Jimani AI credit, under Administration and costs
(`/Aitegoed`)

**Explanation:** All amounts on the screen exclude VAT. What AI costs and how much welcome credit you get is explained in [What does using AI in Jimani cost?](../faq/ai-tegoed.md). The user permission is called **Jimani AI credit**. At the bottom, **Previous** goes back to Settings.

![The Jimani AI credit screen with the balance, the amount buttons under Top up and the Yes/No button Automatic top-up](/kennisbank/beelden/jimani-ai-tegoed-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Your credit | Your balance, with "You can use AI.", "Your credit is running low." or "Your credit has run out. The AI features are paused until you top up." | To see how much you have left. | - |
| Amount | Buttons for €10, €20, €50 and €100, or **Other** for a **Custom amount**. | When topping up. | At least €10 and at most €1,000, excluding VAT. Below it you see what you pay including 21% VAT. |
| Top up | Starts the payment via Mollie. "Choose an amount. You get an invoice right away." | When your credit has (almost) run out. | Your credit grows by the amount excluding VAT. |
| Pay by direct debit | Tops up and debits the amount via your direct debit mandate. | If you already have a mandate and do not want to pay via Mollie. | Only visible with a mandate. |
| Automatic top-up | Yes or No. Yes: Jimani tops up by itself when the credit drops below your threshold. No: the AI features stop when your credit runs out. | If AI must always keep working. | Only possible with a direct debit mandate; without a mandate, Yes is switched off. Your choice is saved immediately. |
| Set up direct debit | Gives a mandate with a one-off payment of €0.01 via iDEAL or card. | If you want to top up automatically but do not have a mandate yet. | "Only possible with a direct debit mandate. You do not have one yet." |
| Amount to add | The amount of each automatic top-up. | With Automatic top-up Yes. | At least €10, excluding VAT. |
| Top up when the balance drops below | The threshold for automatic top-up. | With Automatic top-up Yes. | Each time you get an email and an invoice. |
| Usage | The last 30 days per feature, and per **Day**, **Feature**, **Times** and **Amount**. | To see where your credit goes. | - |
| Top-ups and invoices | Each top-up with **Date**, **Balance**, **Paid incl. VAT**, **Status** (Paid, Waiting for payment, Failed; automatic if that is the case) and the **Invoice** as a pdf. | For your administration. | Also available under Invoicing and costs. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Your Jimani AI credit has run out. Top up to use AI again. | You clicked an AI button, but your credit has run out. | Top up, or set Automatic top-up to Yes. |
| Choose an amount of at least {0} and at most {1}. | The custom amount is too low or too high. | Choose an amount between €10 and €1,000. |
| Saved | Your choice for automatic top-up has been saved. | - |
| Saving failed. Please try again. | Saving did not work. | Try again. |
| Setting up direct debit is not possible right now. Please try again later. | The mandate could not be started. | Try again later. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I top up my AI credit?
- Does my AI credit expire?
- What happens when my AI credit runs out?
- What does Jimani use my AI credit for?
- Where do I see my AI usage and invoices?

**Keywords:** ai credit top up, automatic top-up, credit used up, ai usage, jim credit, direct debit mandate

**Related:** [What does using AI in Jimani cost?](../faq/ai-tegoed.md), [How does Invoicing and costs work?](facturatie-en-kosten.md)

---

# How does the Your free period screen work?

**Answer:** Your free period shows "What your integrations cost after the free period. You do not need to agree: if you do not respond, payment starts automatically as described below." For each integration you choose whether to keep it, and here you arrange the direct debit.

**Where to find it:** Via the buttons **Agree**, **Manage integrations** or **Set up direct debit** in the email about your expiring free period, or via the notification in Jimani (`/Gratisperiode`)

**Explanation:** The screen opens as a page (from the email) or as a window (from the notification); the content is the same. An integration that is already running stays in this screen for 30 days after its start date. An explanation of the deadlines is in [My free period is ending: what do I need to do?](../faq/gratis-periode-loopt-af.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Your integrations after the free period | The price and dates per integration: "... per month from .... Free up to and including ....". For an integration per device the quantity, for example "2 × €5.00 per month". | To see what is added after the free period. | An integration that is already running: "... per month, running since ....". |
| Keep {0} | Yes or No per integration. No: it stops on the last free day, at no cost ("Stops on ..., at no cost."). Yes: the cancellation is removed again. | For every integration you do not want to keep. | Saved immediately. After the start date you can no longer choose here. Anything that only works together with that integration stops with it. |
| Total per month | The amount per month of everything you keep. | - | "Amounts exclude VAT." |
| Direct debit | Shows whether you have a mandate. "Will be debited via your direct debit: automatically every month, with an invoice." Without a mandate, **Set up direct debit** appears here. | If you do not have a mandate yet. | You give the mandate with a one-off payment of €0.01 via iDEAL or card. |
| Agree | Records your agreement to everything you keep. | If you want to confirm. | Not required. Afterwards it says "Agreement given on ...". |
| Previous / Close | Back to Settings, or close the window. | - | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| No free period is ending right now. | Nothing has been announced. | Nothing. |
| Thanks, your agreement has been saved. | Your agreement has been saved. | Nothing. |
| Saved | Your choice Yes or No has been saved. | - |
| Saving failed. Please try again. | Saving did not work. | Try again. |

**Related questions:**

- What do my integrations cost after the free period?
- How do I stop an integration from continuing?
- How do I arrange the direct debit for Jimani?
- Why is an integration still shown in the Your free period screen?

**Keywords:** your free period, keep integrations, agree free period, stop integration, set up direct debit jimani

**Related:** [My free period is ending: what do I need to do?](../faq/gratis-periode-loopt-af.md), [How does Invoicing and costs work?](facturatie-en-kosten.md)

---

# How does the online order of a payment request work?

**Answer:** The online order is the page behind the link in a payment request from Jimani. "Check the order, complete your company details and pay. You will then receive the invoice by email." You do not have to log in for it.

**Where to find it:** Via the button in the email with the payment request (`/bestelling/{nummer}?sleutel=...`)

**Explanation:** Only the order number and the key from the link together open this order. The items are fixed; you complete the details. Required are the company name, your first and last name, email, phone, the billing address (street, number, postal code, city, country) and the shipping address (or Same as billing address). The Chamber of Commerce (KvK) number and the VAT number are not required. After paying, everything is locked in and you can download the invoice. A step-by-step guide is in [I received a payment request from Jimani: how does that work?](../faq/betaalverzoek-van-jimani.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Your order | The items with **Subtotal**, **Shipping costs**, **VAT** (or **VAT reverse charged**) and **Total**. | To check the order. | VAT and shipping costs depend on the country and the VAT number you enter. |
| Chamber of Commerce number / Look up | Looks up your company at the KvK (Chamber of Commerce) and fills in the details and the address. | To save time. | A Chamber of Commerce number has eight digits. At most five times per hour per order. |
| Copy from KvK / Keep my details | Chooses whether the KvK details replace what you already entered. | If you had already entered something different. | - |
| VAT number | Your VAT number, for example NL123456789B01. | If you have a VAT number. | "If you have a VAT number from a country other than the Netherlands, we charge the VAT reverse charged." |
| Company name | The name of your company. | Always. | Required. |
| Main user first name / Main user last name | The name of the main user. "The main user becomes the owner of your Jimani account." | Always. | Required. |
| Email / Phone | Your contact details. | Always. | Required; the invoice is sent to this address. |
| Billing address: Street, Number, Postal code, City, Country | "Your company's address; this goes on the invoice." | Always. | Required. |
| Shipping address | "Where we'll send the equipment." | If the equipment has to go somewhere else. | - |
| Same as billing address | Also uses the billing address as the shipping address. | If everything goes to the same address. | Off: fill in the shipping address. |
| Pay | Saves your details and opens the Mollie payment page. | When everything is correct. | This first payment also gives the mandate for later monthly payments to Jimani. |
| Download invoice | Downloads the invoice as a pdf, with the invoice number. | After paying. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Fill in the highlighted fields. | A required field is missing. | Fill in the highlighted fields and choose Pay again. |
| A Chamber of Commerce number has eight digits. | The KvK number is not valid. | Enter eight digits. |
| Not found. | The KvK did not find this number. | Check the number or enter the details yourself. |
| Looking up is not possible right now. Enter the details yourself. | The KvK cannot be reached at the moment. | Enter the details yourself. |
| You have searched many times already. Enter the details yourself. | You searched more than five times in an hour. | Enter the details yourself. |
| Payment can't be started right now. Your details have been saved; try again in a few minutes or email info@jimani.nl. | The Mollie payment screen did not open. Jimani is notified of this automatically. | Try again in a few minutes. |
| This order has been cancelled | "This order can no longer be paid." | Email info@jimani.nl if you still want it. |
| This link isn't valid | The link is incomplete or not valid. "Check that you used the whole link from the email, or email info@jimani.nl with your order number." | Use the whole link from the email. |

**Related questions:**

- What do I need to fill in on the page of my online order?
- Are the KvK number and VAT number required for the order?
- Can someone else open my order with the link?
- What happens after I have paid?

**Keywords:** payment request, online order jimani, pay order, kvk look up, vat reverse charged, main user

**Related:** [I received a payment request from Jimani: how does that work?](../faq/betaalverzoek-van-jimani.md), [How does checkout in the Jimani webshop work?](../../kassa/naslag/afrekenen-jimani-webshop.md)

---

# How does checkout in the Jimani webshop work?

**Answer:** After **Checkout** in the cart of the Jimani webshop (Tills and equipment) you fill in your details and the delivery address and choose **Place order**. You pay via Mollie and then see "Thank you for your order" with your order number. You do not need to log in.

**Where to find it:** In the Jimani webshop (`/Winkel`): Cart > Checkout (`/Afrekenen`)

**Explanation:** "Fill in where it should go. The VAT and the shipping costs follow the delivery address." Prices exclude VAT. Jimani sells to businesses; that is why checkout asks for your Chamber of Commerce (KvK) number and VAT number. On the right is **Your order** with **Subtotal**, **Shipping costs**, **VAT** (or **VAT reverse charged**) and **Total**. How to open the webshop and what is for sale is explained in [How do I order a POS, printer or card terminal from Jimani?](../faq/apparatuur-bestellen-bij-jimani.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Your details: Customer, Company name, Email, Phone | "We use these details for your order and communication." | Always. | - |
| Delivery address: Street, Number, Postal code, City, Country | "Your order will be delivered to this address." | Always. | The country determines the VAT and the shipping costs. |
| Chamber of Commerce number | "The number under which you are registered with the Chamber of Commerce." | Always, unless you do not have a KvK number. | Otherwise choose **I do not have a Chamber of Commerce number**. |
| VAT number | Your VAT number, for example NL123456789B01. | If you have a VAT number. | "If you have a VAT number from a country other than the Netherlands, we charge the VAT reverse charged." |
| Jimani customer number | "Do you already have a Jimani account? Then enter your customer number. Not required, but handy." | If you are already a customer. | - |
| Back to cart | Back to adjust the cart. | - | - |
| Place order | Creates the order and opens the Mollie payment page. | When everything is correct. | Shipping is free above an amount per country; you see it in Your order. |
| Thank you for your order | The page after paying, with your order number and **What you ordered**: the items, **Shipping costs**, **VAT**, **Total** and **Payment** (Received or Not yet received). | After paying. | You also get a confirmation by email. |
| Try paying again | Opens the payment page again. | If the payment could not be started. | Nothing has been debited in that case. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Your cart is empty. | There is nothing in your cart. | Go back to Tills and equipment and choose something. |
| Your payment has been received. We are getting your order ready. | The payment was successful. | Nothing. |
| We have your order. As soon as your payment is received you will get a confirmation by email. | The order is there, the payment is not yet confirmed. | Wait a moment for the email. |
| This order has already been paid | You opened the payment link of an order that is paid. | Nothing. |
| Payment can't be started right now | "Your order has been received and is set to 'not yet paid'. Nothing has been debited." Jimani will send you a payment link by email as soon as possible. | Try again in a few minutes with Try paying again. |
| This order has been cancelled | This order can no longer be paid. | Email info@jimani.nl if you still want it. |
| This payment link isn't valid | The link is incomplete or not valid. | Use the whole link from the email, or email info@jimani.nl with your order number. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I check out my order in the Jimani webshop?
- Do I have to log in to order hardware from Jimani?
- How do I see that my order was successful?
- Which payment method do I use in the Jimani webshop?

**Keywords:** checkout jimani webshop, pay for hardware order, place order, vat reverse charged, shipping costs ordering pos

**Related:** [How do I order a POS, printer or card terminal from Jimani?](../faq/apparatuur-bestellen-bij-jimani.md), [I received a payment request from Jimani: how does that work?](../../prijzen/faq/betaalverzoek-van-jimani.md)

---

# What can you set under Transaction costs?

**Answer:** Transaction costs are "An amount that is added on top of the order, for example for a reservation or a payment method." You give them a name, a description, a price and a VAT group, and then choose them for a reservation type.

**Where to find it:** In your module when adding: in Restaurant the plus button > Transaction costs, in the hotel the card Transaction costs under the products. Only with the add-on Transaction costs
(`/TransactionCosts/Create`)

**Explanation:** The window has two steps. First the name and description per language, then the price and the VAT group. With **Previous** and **Next** you page through; **Save** saves. When editing there are also **Active** and **Delete** ("Delete transaction cost"). How to use them with a reservation is explained in [Can I pass transaction costs on to my guests?](../faq/transactiekosten-doorberekenen.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name | The name of the transaction costs, as the guest sees it. | Always, per language. | Required, at most 50 characters. |
| Description | A short explanation of the costs. | If you want to explain what the costs are for. | Per language. |
| Price | The amount that is added to the guest's bill for the reservation. | Always. | Only possible with a linked Mollie account; otherwise the field is switched off. |
| VAT group | The VAT group (with the rate) of the costs. | Always. | Required: "The VAT group is required." |
| Active | Yes or No. "Turn this on or off. If it is off, it cannot be chosen." | To stop using costs temporarily without deleting them. | Only when editing. |
| Delete | Deletes the transaction costs after a confirmation. | When you no longer need them. | Only when editing. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| NOTE: No payment option has been set up, so when you create products no price can be entered. Go to Settings > Menu and settings > Mollie. | No Mollie account has been linked yet, so you cannot enter a price. | Connect Mollie first: Settings > Money and figures > Payments (Mollie). |
| The VAT group is required. | You have not chosen a VAT group. | Choose a VAT group. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I create transaction costs?
- Which fields does a transaction cost line have?
- Can I turn transaction costs off temporarily or delete them?
- How do I give transaction costs a VAT group?

**Keywords:** set up transaction costs, create transaction costs, service fee, vat group transaction costs, online payment fee

**Related:** [Can I pass transaction costs on to my guests?](../faq/transactiekosten-doorberekenen.md), [What can you set in the Mollie window?](mollie-venster.md)

---

# What is on a guest's customer card?

**Answer:** The customer card shows everything a guest did with you, across all your modules: their contact details, the number of visits, reservations and orders, the revenue, the number of no-shows, the most purchased items and a timeline of every visit. You open it under Search with the button with the people icon next to the guest.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Search (or Settings > Guests and bookings > Search guests and reservations) and choose the tab Guests.
- **Step 2.** Search by name, address, email or phone and choose a period. The quick choices are Today, Yesterday, Last 7 days, Last 30 days, This month and Last month.
- **Step 3.** Click the button with the people icon next to the guest. The customer card opens.
- **Block Customer.** The email address, the phone and the address, and six tiles: Visits, Reservations, Orders, Revenue, No-shows and Last visit. If the guest is a walk-in, it says Walk-in: doesn't count as a regular customer.
- **Block Items.** The items the guest bought most, with the quantity and the amount.
- **Block Timeline.** Every visit and every order, newest first, with the date, the time, the module, the amount, what was booked, the number of people, the payment method and the status. Cancelled reservations and no-shows are shown in red. If there is nothing yet, you see Nothing yet.
- **Over all time.** The customer card looks at all visits ever, not only at the period you chose in the list.
- **One customer is one email address.** If a guest has booked several times under the same email address, everything is on one customer card. Walk-ins (and guests with the business's own email address) are kept separate and get one card per guest.
- **In a reservation.** If you open a reservation, in Reservation information you also see the number of visits, the previous time with the table and the other information about the guest.
- **Hiding.** Do you not see all the details? An owner can hide guest fields per role; see [How do I hide guest details from employees?](gastgegevens-verbergen-per-rol.md).
- **Costs.** The customer card is part of Search and costs nothing extra. Customer CRM, which turns on customers on account, is a separate add-on of €20 per month (excl. VAT).

**Example:** A guest calls to book. You search for their name, open the customer card and see that they have been five times, did not show up once and usually come with six people. You note that in the internal memo of the new reservation.

**Related questions:**

- How do I see how often a guest has been to my business?
- Where do I see how much a customer has spent?
- Can I see how often a guest was a no-show?
- What do I see on a customer's card?

**Keywords:** customer card, customer history, guest history, guest visits, guest no-shows, view customer details, customer crm

**Related:** [How does the Guests and reservations screen work?](../naslag/gasten-en-reserveringen.md), [How do I export a guest's data?](gastgegevens-exporteren.md)

---

# How do I search for a guest or a reservation?

**Answer:** Go to Search. Type a name, address, email or phone number, choose a period and a module, and choose the tab Guests or Reservations. With the button with the people icon you open a guest's customer card.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Search in the menu, or Settings > Guests and bookings > Search guests and reservations.
- **Step 2.** For the module choose All modules, one of your modules or Tills and webshop. This way you search across reservations, appointments, tickets and orders at the same time.
- **Step 3.** Choose the period with From and Up to and including, or with a quick choice (Today, Yesterday, Last 7 days, Last 30 days, This month, Last month). Without dates you see the last 30 days.
- **Step 4.** Under By name, address, email or phone type what you know and choose Search. Turn on Exclude walk-ins to leave out guests without details.
- **Tab Guests.** One line per customer, with Total visits, First arrival, Last visit, Avg. group size, Revenue and No-shows. One email address is one customer.
- **Tab Reservations.** One line per reservation or order, with among other things Arrival date, Time, Module, Reservation type, Status, Quantity, Name, Amount and Payment method.
- **Sorting, paging and columns.** Click a column heading to sort. With Previous page and Next page you page through the 25 lines per page. With Columns you choose which columns you see; your browser remembers that choice.
- **To Excel.** With Export you put all rows of the list in an Excel file, not only what is on the screen. For that you need the Export permission.
- **Hidden fields.** If your role does not have the permission to see everything, you only search in what you see: a hidden phone number cannot be found by searching.

**Example:** A guest calls to say they were here last month with six people and want to come again. You search for their last name, choose Last 30 days or a longer period, and open their customer card.

**Related questions:**

- How do I find a guest by phone number?
- Where do I look up an old reservation?
- How do I open a guest's customer card?
- Can I search by email address or name in all reservations?

**Keywords:** search guest, search reservation, search customer, search by phone number, export customer list, search guests and reservations

**Related:** [What is on a guest's customer card?](klantkaart-en-geschiedenis.md), [How does the Guests and reservations screen work?](../naslag/gasten-en-reserveringen.md)

---

# How do I export a guest's data (access request)?

**Answer:** Open the guest's customer card under Search and choose Export data. You get a file with everything you keep on this guest, which you can give to the guest. This is only allowed if you see all guest details and have the Export permission.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Search, find the guest and open their customer card.
- **Step 2.** Choose Export data. The button is only there if you have the Export permission.
- **Step 3.** Jimani downloads a file `gastgegevens-<datum>.json`. It contains the profile (salutation, name, email, phone, address, postal code, city, country, extra fields, additional information, company name, VAT number and KvK number), the notes, all visits with date, time, module, amount and payment method, the purchased items and the filled-in fields of webshop orders.
- **Who may do it.** Only someone who sees all guest fields. If your role has fields hidden, you get the message Only someone who sees all guest details can export them. A masked export would be incomplete.
- **Recorded.** Jimani records that an export was made, by whom and for which guest, without the data itself.
- **Default guest of the POS.** The general guest of the POS (POS orders without a customer) is not a person; there is nothing to export for it.
- **A guest at two businesses.** You only get the data that belongs to your business.
- **No permission.** If you may not see all guest details, it says Only someone who sees all guest details can export them. If the address does not belong to a guest of your business, you see This address does not belong to a guest of this business.

**Example:** A guest emails that they want to know what you keep on them. You find them, open the customer card, choose Export data and send the file back.

**Related questions:**

- A guest asks which data I have on them, how do I handle that?
- How do I download all data of one customer?
- Who may export guest data?
- How do I handle a GDPR access request?

**Keywords:** gdpr access request, export a guest's data, right of access, privacy guest data, guest wants to see their data

**Related:** [How do I delete a guest's data?](gastgegevens-verwijderen.md), [How long does Jimani keep guest data?](bewaartermijn-gastgegevens.md)

---

# How do I delete a guest's data (right to be forgotten)?

**Answer:** Open the guest's customer card under Search and choose Delete data. Jimani then anonymises the personal details: name, email, phone, address and remarks. Amounts, receipts and invoices remain, because you are legally required to keep them. Only the owner may do this.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Search, find the guest and open their customer card.
- **Step 2.** Choose Delete data. The button is only there if you are the owner.
- **Step 3.** Jimani asks Delete this guest's data? and says: Name, email, phone, address and remarks will be irrevocably deleted. Amounts, receipts and invoices remain (statutory tax retention obligation). Choose Yes, delete.
- **Afterwards.** You see This guest's data has been deleted. If it fails, it says Couldn't delete. Try again. From then on the guest is called Deleted guest. The guest can then no longer be restored.
- **What disappears.** Name, email, phone, address, postal code, city, salutation, extra fields, the note on the guest, and the name and remark on their reservations, orders and repairs, and the filled-in fields of webshop orders.
- **What remains.** All amounts, lines, payments, receipts, invoices and the journal (7 years), the country and the language, and the company details of a business customer (those are on the invoice).
- **Several customers with the same email address.** All guests with that email address at your business are deleted together.
- **Guest at two businesses.** If the guest also booked at another business, your business gets an empty guest ("Deleted guest") on their reservations and the data at the other business remains.
- **Default guest of the POS.** That is not a person and cannot be deleted; you get the message This guest was not found, or it is the default guest of the POS.
- **Not the owner.** Then you see the message Only the owner can delete guest data.
- **Recorded.** Every deletion goes into a log, without the data itself.

**Example:** A guest emails asking you to delete their data. As the owner you open their customer card, choose Delete data and confirm. Their revenue remains in your figures, but no longer under their name.

**Related questions:**

- A guest wants me to erase their data, how do I do that?
- Do receipts and invoices remain if I delete a guest?
- Who may delete guest data?
- How does the right to be forgotten work in Jimani?

**Keywords:** gdpr delete guest, right to be forgotten, delete customer data, anonymise guest, privacy deletion request

**Related:** [How do I export a guest's data (access request)?](gastgegevens-exporteren.md), [How long does Jimani keep guest data?](bewaartermijn-gastgegevens.md)

---

# How long does Jimani keep guest data, and can I change that?

**Answer:** By default 24 months after the last visit. After that Jimani automatically anonymises the guest's personal details. As the owner you choose a different period between 6 and 120 months under Guest data retention period in Search.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Search. At the bottom is Guest data retention period, with the explanation: after this period without a visit, a guest's name, email, phone and address are deleted automatically, and amounts, receipts and invoices are kept for 7 years.
- **Step 2.** Choose a period: 6, 12, 18, 24 (default), 36, 48, 60, 84 or 120 months. Your choice is saved immediately.
- **Who.** Only the owner can change the period. Anyone else sees the choice greyed out and, when trying, the message Only the owner can change the retention period. A period outside 6 up to and including 120 months is refused with Choose a period of 6 up to and including 120 months.
- **When.** Every night at 04:15 Jimani anonymises the guests who have had no reservation, order, repair or invoice with you for longer than the period. Per night this covers at most 50 groups of 200 guests; a large backlog therefore clears in a few nights.
- **What happens.** The same as with Delete data: the name becomes Deleted guest, contact details and remarks are removed, amounts and invoices remain.
- **Guest at several businesses.** The guest is only anonymised when they no longer fall within the period at any business, using the longest period of their businesses.
- **What counts as a visit.** The arrival of a reservation, an appointment, a ticket or a hotel stay, an order, a repair or an invoice.
- **Error messages.** If you choose a period outside the list, it says Choose a period of 6 up to and including 120 months. If you are not the owner, it says Only the owner can change the retention period.

**Example:** You leave the period at 24 months. A guest who last came in October 2024 is anonymised after October 2026 in the next nightly run. Their revenue remains in your reports.

**Related questions:**

- How long does Jimani store my guests' data?
- Can I set guest data to be erased sooner?
- When is guests' personal data anonymised automatically?
- What is the retention period for customer data under the GDPR?

**Keywords:** guest data retention period, gdpr retention, data 24 months, automatically delete guests, how long does jimani keep customer data

**Related:** [How do I delete a guest's data?](gastgegevens-verwijderen.md), [How do I export a guest's data?](gastgegevens-exporteren.md)

---

# How do I hide guest details from employees?

**Answer:** Under Settings > Guests and bookings turn Guest details: who sees what to Yes. Then under User permissions you choose per role which guest fields that role may see, such as email or phone. What a role may not see is shown as hidden in lists, the customer card, details, search and exports. It is free.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Guests and bookings. Under Guests turn the choice Guest details: who sees what to Yes. By default nothing changes: everyone sees everything.
- **Step 2.** Go to Settings > Your business > Users and permissions > User permissions (`/settings/roles`). Under Role choose the role, for example Manager or User.
- **Step 3.** At the top of the list there is now the block Guest details. Each guest field has a choice Yes or No: First name, Last name, Email, Phone, Address, Postal code, City, Country, Salutation and the extra fields of your business. No means: this role sees this hidden.
- **Valid immediately.** A change is saved immediately, and the role sees it on the next page.
- **Search and exports.** The server masks the data before anything is searched, shown or exported. Searching for a hidden phone number therefore finds nothing and it is not in an export either. Anyone who does not see fields cannot export data either: the message is Only someone who sees all guest details can export them.
- **Who always sees everything.** The owner, Jimani administration, a dealer and anyone looking along always see everything. Only the owner can change permissions.
- **The guest themselves.** Emails and receipts to the guest themselves remain complete.
- **No cost.** Anonymising guest details is free; it is a privacy setting and not an extra feature.

**Example:** You want your service staff to see the guest's name but not their phone number. For the role User, set the field Phone to No.

**Related questions:**

- How do I make sure my staff cannot see guests' phone numbers?
- Can I decide per employee which guest details are visible?
- How do I hide guests' email addresses in lists and exports?
- Does it cost extra to shield guest details?

**Keywords:** hide guest details, employee may not see phone number, employee privacy, permissions guest details, anonymise per role, gdpr employees

**Related:** [How do I export a guest's data?](gastgegevens-exporteren.md), [What can you set under Guest information?](../naslag/gastinformatie.md)

---

# How do I ask for a deposit with a reservation?

**Answer:** Create a product with the price of the deposit and link it to the reservation type under Restaurant > Reservation types. There set Add products and deposits to Yes, Do you want to receive a payment for this reservation? to Yes and Is this a deposit? to Yes. The guest then pays online via Mollie when reserving.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on the add-ons: Settings > Add-ons > Reservations: Products and deposits (and Online reservations, if guests book via the widget). Products and deposits only works with a Mollie connection. These add-ons cost nothing extra.
- **Step 2.** Create the product: Restaurant > Products > Add > Products. Give it the name and the price of the deposit, for example €10 per reservation. You can also create it with the plus button in the reservation type window.
- **Step 3.** Go to Restaurant > Reservation types and open the type. Set Add products and deposits to Yes.
- **Step 4.** Set Do you want to receive a payment for this reservation? to Yes and under Choose the product for this reservation choose the product. If it is not listed, create it first under Products.
- **Step 5.** Set Is this a deposit? to Yes. According to the explanation on the screen, the product is then fully credited when the guest arrives. On No it remains a fixed amount.
- **Step 6.** Do you want to pass on the payment costs? Set Do you want to charge transaction costs? to Yes and under Transaction costs choose the product with the costs. The costs go on the guest's bill.
- **Step 7.** Choose Save.
- **For the guest.** In the widget the guest sees the payment when reserving. If someone has not paid, you can (with the SMS add-on) send a reminder via the moment Deposit open; see the article about automatic text messages in Communication.
- **Guest does not come?** Then the amount is under Outstanding prepayments. There you refund it or keep it; see [What do I do with the deposit of a guest who does not come?](aanbetaling-bij-no-show.md).
- **A quote.** For large groups you can also make a quote: see [How do I make a quote for a group?](groepsofferte-maken.md).

**Example:** For your high tea you ask €10 per reservation. You create the product High tea deposit of €10, link it to the reservation type High tea and set Is this a deposit? to Yes. Whoever books pays €10 online first.

**Related questions:**

- How do I make guests pay in advance when they reserve a table?
- How do I ask for a deposit on a reservation so that people do not stay away?
- Can the guest pay a deposit online when reserving?
- Where do I set that a reservation costs a deposit?

**Keywords:** reservation deposit, reservation deposit fee, prepay restaurant, prevent no-show, ask for deposit, pay online when reserving

**Related:** [What can you set under Reservation types?](../naslag/reserveersoorten.md), [What happens when a guest does not show up (no-show)?](no-show-automatisch-en-handmatig.md)

---

# What happens when a guest does not show up (no-show)?

**Answer:** If a reservation is still Open after the arrival time, you see the button Set to No-show in Reservation information. You can also let Jimani do this automatically with Automatically set to No-show under Reservation settings. A no-show frees up the table and appears in the overview Unpaid and no-show.

**Explanation:**

- **Manually.** Open the reservation via Reservations. If the arrival time has passed and the reservation is still Open, Set to No-show and Set to No-show in 30 minutes appear at the top. The second one sets the reservation to No-show by itself 30 minutes after the arrival time.
- **Automatically.** Go to Reservations, choose the cogwheel Reservation settings, under Reservations set Automatically set to No-show to Yes and under Waiting time until No-show choose 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes or 1 hour. If a reservation is still Open after the arrival time plus this time, Jimani sets it to No-show itself. Jimani checks every minute.
- **At the end of the day.** Around 23:59 Jimani sets reservations that end today and are still Open to No-show, even if you have not set anything.
- **What happens with a no-show.** The reservation gets the status No-show. Open POS receipts of the reservation lapse, a paid receipt remains. If you have created a template for the moment No-show under SMS, the guest gets a text message; also with the automatic no-show.
- **Overview.** Under Settings > Guests and bookings > Guest payments, tab Unpaid and no-show, you see all no-shows in a period (Filter: No-show only) with the total number of no-shows, the number of guests and the total loss.
- **On the guest.** The customer card shows the number of No-shows; in the list Guests the column is called No-shows.
- **Deposit.** If the guest paid in advance, under Outstanding prepayments you choose whether to refund or keep the amount; see [What do I do with the deposit of a guest who does not come?](aanbetaling-bij-no-show.md).
- **Preventing.** Ask for a deposit; see [How do I ask for a deposit with a reservation?](aanbetaling-bij-reservering.md).

**Example:** You set Automatically set to No-show to Yes and Waiting time until No-show to 30 minutes. A 19:00 reservation is still Open at 19:30 and then goes to No-show by itself; the table is free again.

**Related questions:**

- How do I set a reservation to no-show if the guest does not come?
- Can Jimani set no-show automatically?
- Does the table become free again if a guest does not come?
- Where do I see which guests did not come or did not pay?

**Keywords:** no-show, not showing up, automatic no-show, guest did not come, set no-show, prevent no-show

**Related:** [What can you set under Reservation settings?](../naslag/instellingen-reserveringen.md), [What can you see and set under Guest payments?](../naslag/betalingen-van-gasten.md)

---

# What do I do with the deposit of a guest who does not come?

**Answer:** Go to Outstanding prepayments. That is where money paid online is listed whose visit date has passed and which has not yet been settled. For each line choose Refund (the money goes back to the guest) or Keep (it goes, without VAT, to the account Prepayments (lapsed)).

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Settings > Guests and bookings > Guest payments > Outstanding prepayments. The dashboard shows how many prepayments are waiting to be handled.
- **Step 2.** Under Visit date in the last choose 30 days, 90 days or 365 days. By default you look back 90 days.
- **Step 3.** On a line choose Refund. Jimani asks Refund to the guest via the online payment? The whole open amount goes back to the guest via Mollie.
- **Or step 3.** Choose Keep. Jimani asks Keep? The amount goes, without VAT, to Prepayments (lapsed). That is the choice if your terms allow you to keep the deposit.
- **Refunding part.** That is not possible here. Refund the desired part via Everything about payments and then keep the remainder or leave it.
- **On handling.** Afterwards you see Handled. If there is no online payment to refund, Jimani says There is no online payment to refund. If nothing is outstanding anymore, Nothing is outstanding anymore.
- **Permission.** You need the permission Outstanding prepayments; the owner always has it.
- **At the POS.** If a guest paid more in advance than the receipt, the block Reservations at the till determines what the POS does with the rest of the deposit: Give back or Do not give back.

**Example:** A guest paid a €10 deposit and did not come. Two days later the reservation is under Outstanding prepayments. According to your terms you may keep it: choose Keep.

**Related questions:**

- A guest did not show up and has paid a deposit, may I keep that money?
- How do I return the deposit to a guest who did not come?
- Where do I see which deposits are still outstanding?
- Can I refund only part of the deposit?

**Keywords:** no-show deposit, refund deposit, keep deposit, outstanding prepayments, lapsed deposit, guest did not come deposit

**Related:** [What happens when a guest does not show up (no-show)?](no-show-automatisch-en-handmatig.md), [How do I ask for a deposit with a reservation?](aanbetaling-bij-reservering.md)

---

# How do I refund a cancelled reservation, or reject the refund?

**Answer:** Go to Refunds overview. It lists the cancelled reservations that were paid online. Choose Refund to return the amount, or part of it, via Mollie, or Reject with a reason. In both cases the guest gets an email.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Refunds overview in the menu. It is only there if the add-on Products and deposits is on. Without a linked Mollie account, the top says that refunding is not possible yet and the buttons are greyed out; connect Mollie under Settings > Money and figures > Payments (Mollie).
- **Step 2.** Under Status choose which lines you see: All, the open refunds, Partially refunded, Refunded or Rejected. By default you see the open lines. Refine with Search (name, email or reservation number), Module, Reservation type, Cancelled from, Cancelled up to and including, Reservation date from, Reservation date up to and including and Amount min - max.
- **Step 3.** Read the line: the guest, when they cancelled, how much time before the reservation (Time before cancellation), how much they Paid online, the reason for the cancellation and the status. With Details you also see the email address and the payments.
- **Step 4a: Refund.** The window shows how much is open and fills in that amount. Enter a lower amount for a partial refund. The money goes back via Mollie to the original online payment(s) and is in the guest's account within a few days. The guest gets an email that they will get the amount, or part of it, back. After a partial refund the line is set to Partially refunded and you can refund the rest later.
- **Step 4b: Reject.** Under Reason (the guest will see this) enter a reason. It does not work without a reason. The guest gets an email with the reason and the line is set to Rejected. A rejected line can no longer be refunded afterwards.
- **Which payments.** Only payments that were really made online (via the widget or a payment link, including a deposit or a part) appear in the list. Card payments at the terminal, pay later or a payment that was not completed never appear in it.
- **How long.** Mollie refunds up to 120 days after the payment. The list looks back half a year.
- **If Mollie refuses.** For example with too little balance. You get a clear message and nothing is recorded. You can top up at Mollie; then try again.
- **The emails.** For a reservation from Restaurant you can adjust the texts of the emails about an approved, partially approved or rejected refund under Customer contact. Other modules send a short fixed email from your business, in the guest's language.

![The Refunds overview with the filters at the top and per cancellation the buttons Refund and Reject](/kennisbank/beelden/reservering-terugbetalen-1.webp)

**Example:** A guest cancelled two days ahead and had paid a €40 deposit. According to your terms they get €20 back. Choose Refund, change the amount to €20 and confirm.

**Related questions:**

- How do I give a guest their money back after a cancellation?
- Can I refund part of the amount?
- How do I reject a refund request?
- Where are cancelled reservations that were paid online?

**Keywords:** reservation refund, refund cancellation, partial refund, reject refund, mollie refund reservation, guest money back

**Related:** [How do Cancellations and the Refunds overview work?](../naslag/annuleringen-en-terugbetaaloverzicht.md), [What do I do with the deposit of a guest who does not come?](aanbetaling-bij-no-show.md)

---

# How do requests work, reservations that I have to confirm myself first?

**Answer:** For a reservation type set Request to Yes. Bookings of that type are then not final yet: they appear in the menu Requests and the guest gets an email Receive request. You confirm them yourself in Reservation information by setting the status to Confirmed; only then does the guest get the confirmation email.

**Explanation:**

- **Turning on.** Turn on the add-on Requests: Settings > Add-ons > Reservations. Then under Restaurant > Reservation types, in the type's window, set Request to Yes. If Requests is set to No in the menu settings, the choice stays greyed out.
- **Groups automatically.** In your widget settings there is Automatic request from how many guests (the question: From how many guests should the reservation be converted to a request?). A group from that number can then choose a time for which no table is free yet; you assess it yourself as a request.
- **The overview.** Open Requests in the menu. You see all reservations that were submitted as a request, with among other things the arrival date, the reservation name, the reservation type, the Availability, the tables, the number of people, the payment, the extra fields and the memo. The menu shows a counter with the number of outstanding requests. With the Excel icon you export the list.
- **Confirming.** Click the request for Reservation information. Under status choose Confirmed. A request can also become a Quotation (only with the add-on Quotations). Going back to Request is no longer possible after Confirmed.
- **What the guest gets.** With the request the email Receive request. If you set the status to Confirmed, they get the confirmation emails. You adjust those emails under Customer contact.
- **In the timeline.** Requests appear in the timeline with the status colour Request.
- **Adjusting before you confirm.** You can still change the table, time or number of people, or call the guest for more information, and then confirm the request.

**Example:** A party of twenty people books a high tea. The type High tea has Request set to Yes. In Requests you see the booking, you call the guest, adjust the time and set the status to Confirmed.

**Related questions:**

- How do I make sure I can approve reservations myself first?
- Where do I find reservations that are still waiting for confirmation?
- When does the guest get the confirmation email for a request?
- Can I put an option on a reservation instead of confirming right away?

**Keywords:** reservation request, requests overview, option reservation, confirm group reservation, confirm request, approve reservation

**Related:** [How do I handle a large group reservation?](groepsreservering-verwerken.md), [How do I make a quote for a group?](groepsofferte-maken.md)

---

# How do I handle a large group reservation?

**Answer:** Create a separate reservation type for groups with its own minimum and maximum number of guests, set Request to Yes and a Minimum time until the reservation on it, and link combination tables. Large groups then come in as a request and you assess them before the guest gets their confirmation. If you want a price agreement, make a quote.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1: a type of its own.** Go to Restaurant > Reservation types and create for example Group dinner with Minimum number of guests 10 and Maximum number of guests 40. Under Reservation duration choose a longer duration.
- **Step 2: assess first.** Set Request to Yes. The booking then goes to Requests; see [How do requests work?](aanvraag-bevestigen.md). Under Minimum time until the reservation set for example 3 days, so that your kitchen and purchasing have time.
- **Step 3: tables.** Under Restaurant > Combination tables create a combination of single tables, for example Table 5 and 6. In the widget Jimani only offers a combination when no single table is free anymore. For a large party you can also keep a Location of its own free.
- **Step 4: questions for the group.** Under Restaurant > Fields create the questions you need, for example for dietary wishes or a menu choice. Set Show when booking manually to Yes if you fill them in together with the guest. Under Guest information you turn on Visible in group for the details you want to know about every group member.
- **Step 5: deposit.** Ask for a deposit to limit no-shows; see [How do I ask for a deposit with a reservation?](aanbetaling-bij-reservering.md).
- **Via the widget.** In the widget settings you can choose from how many guests a reservation automatically becomes a request. Above that number times remain selectable, even if there is no free table yet.
- **Manually.** If you take the group over the phone, you add it with Create reservation. Above the maximum of the type the window gives a warning, except for a quotation.

**Example:** You create the type Group dinner for 10 to 40 people with Request on Yes and 3 days minimum time. A company books for 24 people. The booking is in Requests, you call about the menu choice and set the status to Confirmed.

**Related questions:**

- How do I handle reservations from large groups?
- Can I prevent groups from simply booking a table online?
- How do I make sure large groups get a separate rule with a minimum number of guests?
- How do I have groups combine tables?

**Keywords:** group reservation, large group, option reservation, book group restaurant, group booking, group dinner

**Related:** [How do requests work?](aanvraag-bevestigen.md), [How do I make a quote for a group?](groepsofferte-maken.md)

---

# How do I make a quote for a group?

**Answer:** With Create reservation, create a reservation with the status Quotation. Add products and custom lines, under Pay later choose Send email with Invoice and edit the email if needed. The guest gets the quote by email with a pdf. In the menu Quotation you then see all your open quotes.

**Explanation:**

- **Turning on.** Turn on the add-on Quotations (Settings > Add-ons > Reservations). The choice Quotation and the menu Quotation then appear. This costs nothing extra.
- **Step 1.** In the menu choose Reservations > Create reservation. Choose the type, the date, the time, the number of guests, the tables and fill in the guest details.
- **Step 2.** Set the status to Quotation. The block Extra information is now called Quotation questionnaire; questions set to Show only in quotation mode on a field now appear. Turn on Add to quote for the memos the guest must read.
- **Step 3.** Under Products choose the quantities. With Extra Product you add a line of your own with a name (at most 24 characters), the VAT rate, the price including VAT and the quantity, for example a room hire or a fixed price for a package.
- **Step 4.** Choose Pay. In the choice window the choice Pay later is now called Quotation; choose that and then Send email with Invoice. You see the window Email template: under Email subject, Email text, bcc and Attachment adjust what you want and choose Save.
- **What the guest gets.** The email Quotation from Customer contact, with a pdf of the reservation as an attachment. You adjust the text of that email under Settings > Communication > Email (Customer contact).
- **The overview.** The menu Quotation lists the quotes that were sent and have not had a deposit paid yet, or have not been confirmed manually yet. You can edit, confirm, cancel and send a quote. The menu has a counter and an Excel export.
- **Confirming.** Open the quote and set the status to Confirmed. After that the status can no longer go back to Quotation.
- **Editing.** As long as no deposit has been received on the quote, you can still change the date, time and number of guests.

**Example:** A company wants a dinner for 30 people with a fixed menu. You create a reservation with status Quotation, put the package in and add the room hire as an Extra product. The guest gets the quote by email and confirms by phone; you set the status to Confirmed.

**Related questions:**

- How do I send a price quote to a company coming to eat with a group?
- Can I send a quote by email with a pdf?
- Where do I see my outstanding quotes?
- How do I make a quote for a company dinner?

**Keywords:** group quote, restaurant quote, send quote, quote for a company dinner, price quote

**Related:** [How do I handle a large group reservation?](groepsreservering-verwerken.md), [How do requests work?](aanvraag-bevestigen.md)

---

# How do guests get a confirmation and a reminder of their reservation?

**Answer:** After reserving, the guest automatically gets the email Reservation confirmation, with a pdf of the reservation. After that Jimani can send up to four reminder emails (Pre-arrival notice 1 up to and including 4) and, with the SMS add-on, text messages too. You set the texts and the times under Customer contact.

**Explanation:**

- **Where.** Settings > Communication > Email, tab Customer contact: here you create and manage the email templates and indicate when the emails are sent.
- **Confirmation.** Sent as soon as a guest reserves online. If you create a reservation yourself, Jimani asks What action should be taken? after Save and you choose Send email or Don't send email. The email goes to the guest's email address, in their language, for their reservation type.
- **No template?** If there is no email template for the reservation type and language, Jimani says No email template: the reservation is saved, but the guest gets no email. Then first create a template under Customer contact.
- **Attachment.** The pdf of the reservation is included by default. Per email you can also add a pdf of your own (Attachment), or turn off the pdf in the document settings.
- **Reminders.** Pre-arrival notice 1 you choose in hours before arrival (Hours before arrival). Pre-arrival notice 2, 3 and 4 you choose in days (Days before arrival) and at what time they go out (default 12:00). A reminder for a moment that has already passed is no longer scheduled.
- **Tags.** In a template you put tags such as {ChangeWidget} (the guest can change the reservation), {CancelWidget} (cancel), {ical} (a link to add the appointment to their calendar), {QR_code}, {Products_Table} and {Survey}. The tag of a field of your own (see Fields) also works.
- **Request and quotation.** A request gets the email Receive request, a quotation the email Quotation; the confirmation only follows after Confirmed.
- **SMS.** You create SMS messages under Settings > Communication > SMS, per moment: confirmation, change, cancellation, days or hours before arrival, after the visit, survey, deposit open and no-show. No text messages are on by default. See the article about automatic text messages in Communication.
- **From your own address.** With the add-on Own sender (€10 per month, excl. VAT) you email from your own email address. Without it, your address is the reply address in the email.
- **Seeing whether the email arrived.** Open the reservation and choose Email History: you see per email the status (for example delivered), how often it was opened and clicked, and the subject. The tab is only there if emails have been sent.
- **Sending again.** Has the guest lost the email? Open the reservation and at the bottom choose More > Send email: you choose the template and send it again, see [How do I edit the email before it goes to the guest?](mail-aanpassen-voor-verzenden.md). If the guest has no email address, Jimani says This guest has no email address.

**Example:** You set Pre-arrival notice 1 to 3 hours and Pre-arrival notice 2 to 1 day at 12:00. A guest who books for Saturday 19:00 gets a reminder on Friday at 12:00 and on Saturday at 16:00, and the confirmation right away.

**Related questions:**

- Does the guest automatically get a confirmation by email after reserving?
- Can I send guests a reminder of their reservation?
- How do I send a text message as a reminder to a guest?
- Where do I edit the text of the confirmation email?

**Keywords:** reservation confirmation email, reservation reminder, reminder email guest, sms reminder, email own address, email template reservation

**Related:** [How do I edit the email before it goes to the guest?](mail-aanpassen-voor-verzenden.md), [How do I send a message to a guest about their reservation?](bericht-aan-gast.md)

---

# How do I edit the email before it goes to the guest, or send it again?

**Answer:** Open the reservation and at the bottom choose More > Send email. You choose the template, set Edit email text to Yes if you want to change the text and choose Send. The change only applies to this email to this guest; the template itself does not change.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Reservations and click the reservation for Reservation information.
- **Step 2.** At the bottom choose More and then Send email. The window Send email says which address the email goes to (To: the guest's address).
- **Step 3.** Under Email choose the template, for example Reservation confirmation. You only see templates that exist for this reservation; if they are missing, it says No email templates for this booking.
- **Step 4.** Do you want to change the text? Set Edit email text to Yes. You see the Email subject and the Email text, filled in with the details of the reservation. Edit them. Below it says: Only for this email to this guest; the template itself stays unchanged.
- **Step 5.** Choose Send. The confirmation goes out with the pdf of the reservation. The email is then in Email History, with the status and the number of times opened.
- **Without an email address.** If the guest has no email address, you get This guest has no email address.
- **With a new request or quotation.** With Create reservation with the status Request or Quotation, under Pay later you choose Send email with Invoice. You then see the window Email template with Edit: edit Email subject and Email text, optionally fill in bcc and add an Attachment (pdf), and choose Save.
- **Always edit.** Do you want to change the text for all guests? Do that under Settings > Communication > Email, tab Customer contact.
- **A message instead of an email.** If you only want to ask or tell something, use the messages in the reservation; see [How do I send a message to a guest about their reservation?](bericht-aan-gast.md).

**Example:** A guest emails that they have not received the confirmation. You open their reservation, choose More > Send email, Reservation confirmation and Send. For a group you add a personal sentence at the top of the text via Edit email text.

**Related questions:**

- How do I send a confirmation to a guest again?
- Can I edit the text of an email for one guest?
- The guest has not received the confirmation email, what now?
- Does the email template change if I edit the text for one email?

**Keywords:** resend email, resend confirmation, edit email text, email template reservation, edit guest email, confirmation not received

**Related:** [How do guests get a confirmation and a reminder of their reservation?](bevestiging-en-herinnering-gasten.md), [What can you set under Add reservation and Update reservation?](../naslag/reservering-toevoegen-en-bijwerken.md)

---

# How do I send a message to a guest about their reservation, and where do I see their questions?

**Answer:** Open the reservation and choose the tab Guest messages. Type your message under Enter your message and choose Submit. The guest reads it in their own reservation environment and can reply. New questions from guests are in the overview Questions from the guests.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Reservations and click the reservation for Reservation information.
- **Step 2.** Choose the tab Guest messages. It is only there if there are already messages. Each message shows Message from, the name of the sender, the date and the time.
- **Step 3.** Choose the icon to send a message, type your text under Enter your message and choose Submit. An empty message is not possible: then you see Message is required. After sending, Message has been sent follows.
- **Questions from the guests.** If a guest asks a question, the choice Questions from the guests in the help menu turns orange. The overview (`/guestmessage`) shows per message the date, the name, the time before arrival, the message and whether it has been Answered (Yes or No). With Open and answer you go to the tab Guest messages of that reservation.
- **Not the same as an email.** A message is a short question-and-answer in the reservation. If you want to email the guest a confirmation or quote, use More > Send email; see [How do I edit the email before it goes to the guest?](mail-aanpassen-voor-verzenden.md).

**Example:** A guest asks whether there is a high chair. You open Questions from the guests, click Open and answer and send: Yes, we will set one up.

**Related questions:**

- How do I send a short message to a guest about their reservation?
- Where do I see the questions guests ask about their reservation?
- Can a guest reply to my message?
- Where do I find the chat section of a reservation?

**Keywords:** message guest, answer guest question, guest messages, chat with guest, questions from the guests

**Related:** [How do guests get a confirmation and a reminder of their reservation?](bevestiging-en-herinnering-gasten.md)

---

# How do I add a reservation myself, for example when a guest calls?

**Answer:** Go to Reservations and choose Create reservation. Choose the reservation type, the date, the number of guests, the time and the table, fill in the guest details and choose Save. Jimani then asks whether the guest gets a confirmation by email. Booking manually is also possible outside the online times.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** In the menu choose Reservations and then Create reservation. If the timeline (Overview) is open, a panel opens next to the timeline; in the list views the window Add reservation opens. In the timeline you can also click an empty box at a table: the green box with a plus is as long as the reservation type lasts, and the table, date, time and number of people are then already filled in.
- **Step 2.** Choose the Reservation types. If you only have one type, Jimani chooses it itself. Then choose the Availability, if there is one.
- **Step 3.** Choose the Date (above the field are the opening times) and fill in the number of guests per guest group, for example adults and children.
- **Step 4.** Under From choose the time. For Until Jimani calculates the end time from the reservation duration of the type; adjust it if the guest stays shorter or longer.
- **Step 5.** Under Table choose with the pencil the table, a combination table or a location. Jimani shows the free tables; Show all tables also shows the occupied ones.
- **Step 6.** Find the guest with Search, or fill in their details. Choose the Guest's language and check the Reservation name. If you do not want to record any details, set Passer-by (no guest details) to Yes; see Reservation settings to turn this choice on or off.
- **Step 7.** If needed set Check in now to Yes if the guest is already there, or Locking table change if they must stay at their table. Note agreements in the Internal memo.
- **Step 8.** Choose Save. Jimani asks What action should be taken? Choose Send email for a confirmation, or Don't send email. An email template must exist for the type and the language.
- **Paying.** If you want to collect a deposit or the whole amount, choose Pay: Cash, Card, Tap to Pay, Pay later, Pay other, Coupon or Pay on account.
- **A request or quotation.** Choose Request or Quotation as the status if the reservation still has to be confirmed; see [How do requests work?](aanvraag-bevestigen.md) and [How do I make a quote for a group?](groepsofferte-maken.md).
- **Checks.** A table that is already occupied is not among the free tables. Jimani takes the maximum number of guests of the type into account and warns if you go above it (except for a quotation).
- **Existing email address.** If the email address belongs to an existing guest, Jimani warns with This email address belongs to and the guest's name (or an existing guest if the name is missing). If you save with this name or this phone number, you change that for that guest and their earlier reservations. Choose Yes, update the same customer or No, save other guest as walk-in.

**Example:** A guest calls for Friday 19:00 with four people. You choose Dinner, Friday, 4 guests, 19:00, a table for four, search their name, choose Save and Send email.

**Related questions:**

- How do I note a reservation when a guest calls?
- Can I enter a reservation myself outside the online times?
- Does the guest get a confirmation if I enter the reservation myself?
- How do I book a walk-in who comes in now?

**Keywords:** create reservation, phone reservation, book manually, add reservation, walk-in, check in now, guest calls

**Related:** [What can you set under Add reservation and Update reservation?](../naslag/reservering-toevoegen-en-bijwerken.md), [How do I move or swap reservations in the timeline?](tijdlijn-verslepen-en-wisselen.md)

---

# How do I move, extend or swap reservations in the timeline?

**Answer:** Drag a block in the timeline to another table or time. Drag the left edge or right edge to adjust the start time or end time. If you want two reservations to swap tables, drop one block on the other, or choose Swap with… on the reservation. Jimani always shows first what changes.

**Explanation:**

- **Changing the start time or end time.** Grab the edge of a block (on a touch screen the handles are wider). The tooltip says Drag to change the start time or Drag to change the end time. The left edge changes the start time and leaves the end time; the right edge the other way round. The edge snaps to the grid of the Time interval between reservations. Green means: this is possible. Red: this is not possible.
- **When is it not possible?** Across another reservation (There is already another reservation at that time.), outside opening hours (Outside opening hours is not possible.) or in the past (A time in the past is not possible.). The block then jumps back with a short message. The server decides. If changing fails for another reason, it says Unable to update the reservation. For Activities Jimani first asks Yes, change? if the price changes or someone is cancelled.
- **Shorter than the reservation duration.** Only if the reservation type has Manual times may differ, and never shorter than the Minimum booking time. Guests in the widget always book the full duration.
- **To another table or time.** Drag the middle of the block to the new box. The middle of the block remains the normal moving; the edges are for the time. A reservation that has left, is a no-show or is cancelled can no longer be dragged.
- **Swapping with another reservation.** Drop reservation A on reservation B in another row, in the middle of the block. Or in the info window, or with a right click or long press on the block, choose Swap with… and then tap B (Choose the reservation to swap with). If you choose a reservation on the same lane or table, Jimani says Choose a reservation on another lane or table.
- **Preview first.** The window Swap reservations shows who goes where and who moves along ((moves along)). Choose Swap or Cancel. If it is not possible, it says Cannot swap with the reason, for example that swapping is only possible with the same number of tables. If it fails, Jimani says The swap did not succeed. The timeline then reloads.
- **New reservation in the timeline.** Move the mouse to an empty box: a green box with a plus appears. Click it for the panel in which table, date, time and number of people are already filled in; see [How do I add a reservation myself?](reservering-handmatig-toevoegen.md). The box does not appear on a block, at a time that has already passed or is closed, or where the type does not fit in its entirety.
- **Appearance.** How the timeline looks (View, text size, grid lines, filters on location and reservation type, order of the tables) you set with the cogwheel Reservation settings.

**Example:** A guest calls to say they are staying longer. You grab the right edge of their block and drag the end time half an hour to the right. If the table is free, it stays green and the new end time is in; if there is a reservation, it turns red and the block jumps back.

**Related questions:**

- How do I move a reservation to another table?
- How do I make a reservation longer or shorter?
- How do I swap two reservations between tables?
- Can I drag reservations in the timeline?

**Keywords:** drag reservation, adjust timeline, extend reservation, swap table, swap reservations, change start time, move reservation

**Related:** [How does the reservation overview work in Jimani?](../naslag/reserveringsoverzicht.md), [What can you set under Reservation types?](../naslag/reserveersoorten.md)

---

# How do I block a day, a time or a location for reservations?

**Answer:** Under Restaurant create a Time limitation for a day or time and a Location restriction for a space. A Time limitation with Day restriction on Yes closes the whole day for the chosen reservation types; a Location restriction removes the tables of a location from the offer on those days. Setting a day to Closed under Opening times is not enough for this.

**Explanation:**

- **Turning on.** These restrictions belong to the add-on Reservation blocks (Settings > Add-ons > Reservations). That costs nothing extra. If it is on, you see under Restaurant the tabs Location restriction, Crowd reduction and Time limitation.
- **A whole day closed.** Go to Restaurant > Time limitation and choose the plus button. Give the restriction a name (only for you), set Day restriction to Yes, choose the reservation types and tick the days in the calendar. Choose Save.
- **Part of the day.** Set Day restriction to No and fill in Time from and Time to, for example 12:00 to 14:00 for a staff lunch. If the period runs past midnight, for example 20:31 to 01:30, it also applies to the part after midnight on the next day.
- **A location closed.** Go to Restaurant > Location restriction and choose the plus button. Give a name, choose the location(s), and tick the days. On those days the tables of those locations are no longer offered. If the closure is permanent, rather adjust the Opening times.
- **On and off.** In the list you turn a restriction on or off with the switch in the column Active. A restriction that is not active does nothing and is kept.
- **What the guest sees.** Blocked times no longer appear in the reservation widget. Staff can keep reserving in the dashboard, except what you mean with the block.
- **Closed is not enough.** If you set a day to Closed under Opening times, Jimani sets no limit on the times a guest can choose for that day. For a real closing day, create a Time limitation with Day restriction on Yes.
- **Limiting crowds.** If you do not want to close but limit the number of guests per time, use the Crowd reduction; see [How do I limit the number of reservations or guests per time?](drukte-beperken.md).

**Example:** On 24 December you are full with a private party. You create a Time limitation Christmas party, set Day restriction to Yes, choose all reservation types and tick 24 December. That day can no longer be booked in the widget.

**Related questions:**

- How do I close a day to online reservations, for example for a private party?
- How do I make sure the terrace can no longer be reserved?
- Why can guests still reserve while I have set the day to closed?
- How do I block a certain time for reservations?

**Keywords:** close day, block reservations, private party, time limitation, location restriction, close terrace, holiday closure

**Related:** [What can you set under Location restriction, Crowd reduction and Time limitation?](../naslag/locatiebeperking-druktebeperking-tijdsbeperking.md), [How do the Opening times at Restaurant work?](../naslag/openingstijden-restaurant.md)

---

# How do I limit the number of reservations or guests per time?

**Answer:** Under Restaurant > Crowd reduction create a restriction. You choose the reservation types, whether Jimani counts Number of reservations or Number of guests, and the maximum per arrival time. If a time is full, it shows in the widget as fully booked.

**Explanation:**

- **Turning on.** The Crowd reduction belongs to the add-on Reservation blocks (Settings > Add-ons > Reservations; free).
- **Step 1.** Go to Restaurant > Crowd reduction and choose the plus button. Give the restriction a name (only for you).
- **Step 2.** Under Limiting reservations choose what counts: Number of guests (default) or Number of reservations.
- **Step 3.** Choose the reservation types for which the limit applies. The restriction only counts reservations of those types.
- **Step 4.** Under Per time slot fill in the maximum for each time. In the column header you fill in one value that then applies to all times; then adjust individual times. A time with 0 has no limit.
- **Step 5.** Choose Save. The restriction applies every day; it has no dates. You turn it on or off with the switch Active in the list.
- **How Jimani counts.** Jimani counts per arrival time: all reservations of the chosen types that start at exactly that time. If that number (or the total number of guests) is equal to or higher than the maximum, that time can no longer be chosen in the widget (Time slot is fully booked).
- **The times.** The table shows every quarter of an hour. Only the times that are also in the widget count; those are the times of the Time interval between reservations. If that is set to 30 minutes, Jimani only uses the whole and half hours.
- **The overview.** In the list you see per restriction the name, the reservation types (or All Booking Types), the Maximum number of reservations, the Maximum quantity of guests and Active.

**Example:** The kitchen can handle 20 covers per quarter of an hour. You create a Crowd reduction Kitchen, choose Number of guests and fill in 20 for every time. As soon as there are twenty guests at 19:00, 19:00 can no longer be chosen in the widget; 19:15 remains available.

**Related questions:**

- How do I make sure not too many guests come at the same time?
- Can I set a maximum number of guests per quarter of an hour?
- How do I prevent the kitchen from being overloaded by reservations?
- Why does a time show as fully booked in the widget?

**Keywords:** crowd reduction, maximum number of guests per quarter of an hour, do not overload kitchen, fully booked time slot, spread crowds

**Related:** [How do I block a day, a time or a location for reservations?](dag-of-tijd-blokkeren.md), [What can you set under Location restriction, Crowd reduction and Time limitation?](../naslag/locatiebeperking-druktebeperking-tijdsbeperking.md)

---

# How do I set up locations, tables and combination tables?

**Answer:** Go to Restaurant. First create your spaces under Locations, such as terrace and conservatory, then your tables under Tables with number and seats, and if needed under Combination tables tables that together form one large table. The order matters: a table belongs to a location and a combination consists of tables.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1: a location.** Choose Restaurant > Locations and then Add > Location. Fill in the Name (only visible internally) and the Maximum quantity of guests, and set Outdoor location to Yes for a terrace. Choose Save.
- **Step 2: tables.** Choose Add > Tables. Choose the Location, leave Can be reserved via widget on Yes if guests may book the tables online, and fill in the Number of tables (1 to 50). Then fill in per table the number and the number of seats. For a single table use the window Table with Table number, Location and Seats.
- **Step 3: an image.** Under the table choose a Map image; it appears on the floor plan.
- **Step 4: combinations.** Choose Add > Combination tables (only with the add-on Combine tables). Give the combination a name, choose at least two tables and check the number of Seats. Set Bookable online to Yes if guests may book the combination in the widget.
- **Step 5: main guest tables.** If you have a table for regular guests, in the list Tables set Main guest to Yes: that table can only be reserved manually.
- **Step 6: linking to the reservation type.** Under Restaurant > Reservation types you choose per type which tables are used. A new type already has all tables on.
- **Changing and turning off.** In the list Tables you adjust seats, image and location directly. Choose the pencil to change numbers and Main guest or to delete tables. A location that still has tables cannot be turned off.
- **Importing.** Locations, tables and combination tables can also be managed in Excel with the buttons for exporting and importing on the tab.

**Example:** You have a restaurant with a dining room and a terrace. You create two locations (Dining room and Terrace, with Outdoor location on Yes for Terrace), twenty tables in the dining room with Add > Tables and six on the terrace. For a large group you create the combination Table 5 and 6.

**Related questions:**

- How do I add tables to Jimani?
- How do I create a terrace or conservatory?
- How do I set that two tables together form one large table?
- In what order must I create locations and tables?

**Keywords:** add tables, create location, terrace, combination table, seats, table number, floor plan tables

**Related:** [What can you set under Locations and Tables?](../naslag/locaties-en-tafels.md), [What can you set under Combination tables?](../naslag/combinatietafels.md)

---

# Why do I see no times in the reservation widget, or why can't a time be chosen?

**Answer:** A time only appears if everything is right: the reservation type is active and visible, there is an active Availability that applies on that day and time, the business is open, there is no Time limitation, Location restriction or full Crowd reduction, the minimum time until the reservation has been met and there is a free table that can be reserved online. Check these points.

**Explanation:**

- **The reservation type.** Restaurant > Reservation types: is the type on Active and Show in widget on Yes? Does it belong to an Availability (not None (not bookable online))?
- **The Availability.** Restaurant > Availability: is it on Active and Show in widget on Yes, is the day ticked in the calendar, and does the time fall within a time slot (Available from to Available until)? If you have more than one guest group on, the guest must choose guests for all active guest groups.
- **The opening times.** Restaurant > Opening times: the time must fall within Open from and Open until. If a day is set to Closed or has no times, there is no limit for that day.
- **Minimum time until the reservation.** At the reservation type: under a day counts from now, from a day in whole days. This way a time for tonight may already no longer be selectable.
- **Blocks.** A Time limitation (day or time) and a Location restriction remove times or tables from the offer. A Crowd reduction closes a time when the maximum has been reached; the message is Time slot is fully booked.
- **Tables.** There must be an active table free that fits the number of guests and the tables of the reservation type, with Can be reserved via widget on Yes. Main guest tables are never offered online, not even as part of a combination table. If no single table is free, Jimani offers a combination table with Bookable online on Yes. Without a free table, Table is not available appears, or the time is missing.
- **Groups.** If the widget setting Automatic request from how many guests is on, a time for a group from that number remains selectable, even without a free table; the booking comes in as a request.
- **Past.** A time that has already passed is not shown.
- **The grid.** The times follow the Time interval between reservations (under Reservation settings).
- **Double bookings.** Jimani does not offer a table if it is already occupied at that time (the reservation duration counts), so a table cannot be booked twice online.

**Example:** A guest sees no times for your dinner on Saturday. You check: the Availability Dinner has Saturday 16:30 to 21:30, but Saturday is not ticked in the calendar. You tick it; the times appear.

**Related questions:**

- Why can't guests on my website choose a time to reserve?
- My reservation widget shows no times, what do I check?
- Why is a time greyed out or not selectable in the widget?
- Online reservations do not work, why is that?

**Keywords:** no times widget, time not available, widget shows nothing, online reservations not working, time slot fully booked, table not available

**Related:** [What can you set under Availability?](../naslag/beschikbaarheid.md), [How do I block a day, a time or a location for reservations?](dag-of-tijd-blokkeren.md)

---

# What happens if I book a table that is already occupied, and can I combine tables?

**Answer:** A guest in the widget cannot book an occupied table. An employee gets a warning, for example Table 5 is already occupied at this time. Are you sure you still want to book it?, and may deliberately continue. Jimani records that and by whom it was done. For larger groups choose a combination table.

**Explanation:**

- **Guest in the widget.** The widget only shows times for which a free table exists. No reservations without a table are created and an occupied table is not offered.
- **Employee in the dashboard, the POS or the handheld.** If you choose a table that is already occupied at that time, the warning appears with the name of the table(s). If you deliberately confirm that you still want to book, the reservation goes through. For a combination table the warning reads The chosen table combination is not completely free at this time. Are you sure you still want to book it?.
- **Recorded.** The reservation's history says Deliberately booked on an occupied table, with the tables and from which screen.
- **Choosing tables.** In the window Available tables you choose between Tables, Combination table and Locations. By default you see the free tables; with a drop-down you filter on location. Show all tables and Show all combination tables also show the occupied ones. If there are none, it says No tables available, No table combination available or No location available.
- **Multiple tables for a group.** You can choose one or more tables (Choose one or more tables to book the reservation) or a combination table that you created under Restaurant > Combination tables. See [How do I set up locations, tables and combination tables?](locaties-tafels-instellen.md).
- **Table change.** Locking table change keeps a reservation at its table; see [How do I move or swap reservations in the timeline?](tijdlijn-verslepen-en-wisselen.md) to move tables.

**Example:** A regular guest calls for table 5, but it is already booked at 19:00. You choose table 5 anyway, get the warning and deliberately confirm that you still want to book it because the earlier guest leaves at 20:00. Table 5 is on both reservations.

**Related questions:**

- Can I accidentally book a table twice?
- What happens if I reserve an occupied table anyway?
- How do I book a large group on multiple tables at once?
- Can guests book a table online that is already occupied?

**Keywords:** double booking, table occupied, table already reserved, double booked, combi tables, combine tables

**Related:** [Why do I see no times in the reservation widget?](geen-tijden-in-de-widget.md), [What can you set under Combination tables?](../naslag/combinatietafels.md)

---

# How do I let guests reserve a table online?

**Answer:** Turn on the add-on Online reservations, set up Restaurant with locations, tables, opening times, a reservation type and an Availability, and place the reservation widget on your website. Reserving online costs nothing extra.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1: add-on.** Go to Settings > Add-ons > Reservations and turn on Restaurant and Online reservations. Only then does Show in widget appear in the screens.
- **Step 2: locations and tables.** Restaurant > Locations and Tables. For every table leave Can be reserved via widget on Yes; see [How do I set up locations, tables and combination tables?](locaties-tafels-instellen.md).
- **Step 3: opening times.** Restaurant > Opening times: fill in per day Open from and Open until, for the coming months. Guests only get times within the opening times.
- **Step 4: a reservation type.** Restaurant > Reservation types > Add > Reservation type: a name, the minimum and maximum number of guests, the Reservation duration, and Show in widget on Yes. Choose the Availability and the Fields you want to ask the guest.
- **Step 5: an Availability.** Restaurant > Availability > Add: a time slot (for example 16:30 to 21:30), the days in the calendar, Show in widget on Yes and the reservation type. Without an Availability the guest gets no times.
- **Step 6: the grid.** Under Reservation settings choose the Time interval between reservations, for example 15 minutes, and if needed a Minimum time until the reservation on the type.
- **Step 7: the widget.** Under Settings > Guests and bookings > Widgets create your reservation widget and place the code or the link on your website.
- **Checking.** Open the widget yourself and reserve a test time. If you see no times, go through [Why do I see no times in the reservation widget?](geen-tijden-in-de-widget.md).
- **What the guest gets.** A confirmation email with pdf; see [How do guests get a confirmation and a reminder of their reservation?](bevestiging-en-herinnering-gasten.md).
- **Deposit.** If you want to ask for payment when reserving, see [How do I ask for a deposit with a reservation?](aanbetaling-bij-reservering.md).

**Example:** Your restaurant is open Tuesday to Sunday from 12:00 to 22:00. You create the types Lunch and Dinner, the Availabilities Lunch (12:00 to 14:30) and Dinner (17:30 to 21:00) for those days, and place the widget on your site. Guests can now book a table online.

**Related questions:**

- How can guests book a table via my website?
- What do I need to set up before online reservations work?
- Does online reserving cost extra?
- How do I place the reserve button on my site?

**Keywords:** turn on online reservations, reservation widget, book table online, reserve on website, set up restaurant, reservation widget

**Related:** [What can you set under Reservation types?](../naslag/reserveersoorten.md), [What can you set under Availability?](../naslag/beschikbaarheid.md)

---

# How do I set opening times, different days and closing days?

**Answer:** Go to Restaurant > Opening times. Choose the year and the month and fill in per day Open from and Open until; set the switch to Open or Closed. Changes save themselves. To really close a day for online reserving, also create a Time limitation with Day restriction on Yes.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Restaurant > Opening times. At the top choose the year (this year, next year or the year after) and the month.
- **Step 2.** For each day fill in Open from and Open until and set the switch to Open. Set the switch to Closed for a day you are closed. Next to the switch you see Saving..., Saved or an error with Try again.
- **A different day.** Simply adjust the times of that day, for example 17:00 to 22:00 on Christmas Eve. Every day has its own opening times; no fixed weekly layout is needed.
- **For two years at once.** Make an export, edit the file in Excel and choose Import.
- **After midnight.** If you close after midnight, fill in the closing time of the next morning, for example Open from 11:00 and Open until 02:00. The hours after midnight belong to the day you opened. Equal times are not possible; if you are open all day, fill in 00:00 to 23:59.
- **What the opening times do.** In the reservation widget the guest only gets times within Open from and Open until. On a timeline you cannot move or extend outside the opening times (Outside opening hours is not possible.).
- **A closing day.** A day set to Closed sets no limit on the times a guest can choose for that day. If you really want to block the day, create a Time limitation with Day restriction on Yes; see [How do I block a day, a time or a location for reservations?](dag-of-tijd-blokkeren.md).
- **Part of the day closed.** For a staff lunch or cleaning use a Time limitation with Time from and Time to.
- **A location temporarily closed.** Use a Location restriction. If the closure is permanent, adjust the opening times.

**Example:** You are normally open from 12:00 to 22:00, but on New Year's Eve from 17:00 to 02:00. You change 31 December to Open from 17:00 and Open until 02:00. Guests get times from 17:00 to 02:00 that evening.

**Related questions:**

- How do I set my opening times for reservations?
- How do I set a public holiday such as Christmas to closed?
- Can I fill in different opening times per day?
- How do I set that I am open after midnight?

**Keywords:** set opening times, different opening times, closing day, restaurant closed, christmas opening times, open until after midnight

**Related:** [How do the Opening times at Restaurant work?](../naslag/openingstijden-restaurant.md), [How do I let guests reserve a table online?](online-reserveren-aanzetten.md)

---

# How do I ask guests about dietary wishes or other questions of my own when they reserve?

**Answer:** Under Restaurant > Fields create a field of your own, for example Dietary wishes, and link it to one or more reservation types. The guest sees the question in the last step of reserving, Guest details and information. You can show the answer right away in the reservation overview.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Restaurant > Fields and choose Add > Fields.
- **Step 2.** Choose for which reservation types the field is asked.
- **Step 3.** Choose the Type: for example Text box, Large text box, Drop-down, Radio button, Selection box multiple choices, Date, Period, Number field, Phone, Label, Link or Terms and conditions. For a choice field you fill in the choices under Options, one per line (XXX after a line preselects that option).
- **Step 4.** Give the field a Name and a Description. The description appears as light grey text in the field.
- **Step 5.** In the settings you choose Required, Show field name, Show in widget and Show when booking manually. Set List view to Yes to see the answer in the memo of the reservation overview, for example an allergy.
- **Step 6.** Choose Save. Afterwards you can drag the order of the fields in the reservation type's window.
- **A field that only sometimes appears.** Set Do you want to make this field dynamic? to Yes, under Which field is the main field? choose an earlier question with choices and under Show this field when the following is selected the answer for which this field appears (for example the question Which allergy? only if someone chooses Yes at Allergy?). This works with the add-on Dynamic reservation fields.
- **Only for quotations.** Set Show only in quotation mode to Yes for questions that only belong with a quotation (add-on Quotations).
- **The answer in an email.** Each field has a Label (tag), by default {naam}. Put the tag in an email template; Jimani replaces it with the guest's answer.
- **Manually.** Set Show when booking manually to Yes to also fill in questions yourself, for example for a wedding: you fill in all questions together with the guest.
- **For all guests.** Details that belong to every reservation (name, email, phone) you manage under Settings > Guests and bookings > Guest information; see [What can you set under Guest information?](../naslag/gastinformatie.md).

**Example:** You create the field Dietary wishes (Large text box, not required, Show in widget Yes, List view Yes) and link it to Dinner. In the overview an allergy appears in the memo of each reservation.

**Related questions:**

- How do I ask guests about allergies or dietary wishes when they reserve?
- Can I add a question of my own to the reservation form?
- How do I show the guest's answer directly in the reservation overview?
- Where does the extra question for the guest appear when booking?

**Keywords:** dietary wishes reservation, guest allergies, own fields reservations, question to guest, dynamic field, customise reservation form

**Related:** [What can you set under Fields?](../naslag/velden.md), [What can you set under Reservation types?](../naslag/reserveersoorten.md)

---

# How do I sell extra products or packages with a reservation?

**Answer:** There are two ways. You link an extra product (such as a drinks package) to the type under Restaurant > Reservation types. You create a combination (for example bowling and then dinner) under Settings > Guests and bookings > Packages; the guest can add it while reserving.

**Explanation:**

- **Creating an extra product.** Open Restaurant > Products and choose Add > Products. Create the product with price and VAT group. Set Show in widget to Yes if the guest may choose it themselves, and List view to Yes if you want to see the order in the memo of the overview.
- **Linking.** Open Restaurant > Reservation types, choose the type and set Add products and deposits to Yes. Under Extra products choose the products that go with it; you can choose more than one and with the plus button you create one.
- **What the guest sees.** While reserving in the widget they can choose the products. When booking manually they are in the block Products.
- **Creating a combination.** Open Settings > Guests and bookings > Packages and choose Adding combinations. Choose the Main Module and Reservation type 1, then Main Module 2 and the Reservation types 2 that can go with it. Per part set the start time, the discount and the number of guests, and the Gap between part 1 and 2. See [What can you set under Packages (Combinations)?](../naslag/arrangementen-combinaties.md).
- **Discount.** With a combination you give a discount as an amount or percentage. The discount on part 1 appears on the receipt, online and at the POS.
- **More parts.** You can add a drink after dinner. Each part gets a free spot at that moment; if one does not fit, the combination is not offered.
- **Costs.** Products and deposits and Packages are free add-ons.

**Example:** With your high tea you offer the drinks package Champagne for €12.50 per person. You link it as an Extra product to the type High tea. Guests choose it in the widget and it appears in the reservation's memo.

**Related questions:**

- How do I sell a drinks package with a reservation?
- Can I let guests book something extra while reserving?
- How do I offer a combination, such as first bowling and then dinner?
- How do I increase the revenue per reservation with extra products?

**Keywords:** extra products reservation, upsell, add-on sales, package, drinks package, combination reservation

**Related:** [What can you set under Products of a reservation?](../naslag/producten-bij-reserveringen.md), [What can you set under Packages (Combinations)?](../naslag/arrangementen-combinaties.md)

---

# Can I manage multiple branches in Jimani, and what does that cost?

**Answer:** Yes. Each branch is a business of its own in Jimani, with its own settings, tables, products, reservations and figures. If your account is linked to more than one business, you switch with the name of your business at the top of the menu. Settings and reports are per branch.

**Explanation:**

- **Switching.** Click the name of your business in the menu. If you have more than one business, a list of your businesses opens; choose the business and you land on that business's dashboard. If you only have one, nothing opens.
- **Who may switch.** Only to businesses your account is linked to. You cannot open another business by changing a number in the address.
- **Separate.** What you set in one branch does not apply in the other: opening times, locations, tables, reservation types, products, permissions and reports are per business.
- **Own subscription and features.** Each business has its own subscription and turns add-ons on or off itself. The prices of the paid features therefore apply per business; the overview is in the article Which features cost money? under Pricing.
- **Reserving per branch.** Each branch has its own reservation widget and reservation list.
- **A guest at two businesses.** If the same guest has booked at two businesses, each business only sees their visits at its own business. If you delete their data at one business, that business gets an empty guest and the data at the other business remains.
- **Costs.** The price list of the features has no separate price for an extra branch. Ask Jimani what an extra branch costs in your situation.

**Example:** You have a restaurant in Utrecht and one in Leiden. You log in and click the name at the top of the menu. In the list you choose Leiden. You now see the reservations and tables of Leiden; the data of Utrecht stays there.

**Related questions:**

- Can I manage two restaurants in one account?
- How do I switch between my businesses?
- Are settings and figures separate per branch?
- How do I add an extra branch?

**Keywords:** multiple branches, manage multiple locations, second restaurant, switch shop, chain, branch

**Related:** [How do I set up locations, tables and combination tables?](locaties-tafels-instellen.md)

---

# What can you set under Reservation types?

**Answer:** A reservation type is what a guest reserves for, such as dinner, drinks or high tea. Under Restaurant > Reservation types you determine per type the number of guests, the duration, the tables, the questions to the guest and whether a payment goes with it.

**Where to find it:** Menu Restaurant > tab Reservation types (`/Horeca`). New type: button Add > Reservation type. Existing type: click the line.

**Explanation:** The window has blocks for the type itself (name, description, Availability, image), Colour, numbers and duration, Settings, Payment, Tables and Fields. A new type by default has a minimum of 1 guest, a maximum of 20 guests and a reservation duration of 1 hour, and all tables are already selected. For an existing type Active and the button Delete are also there. In the overview you can search and filter on Availability and Product. A type that is not active gets the label Inactive; a type that comes from your website gets the label From your website. What you turn on under Payment and Products only works if the corresponding add-on is on (Settings > Add-ons > Reservations).

![The Restaurant screen with the tabs Opening times, Availability, Reservation types, Products, Fields, Locations and Tables and the button Add](/kennisbank/beelden/reserveersoorten-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name | The name the guest sees when reserving. At most 50 characters; the counter below the field shows how many are left. With more languages on you fill in the name per language. | Always. | - |
| Maximum number of characters | The counter at a name field: the number of characters that still fit. | To check while typing. | The description has its own limit of 530 characters. |
| Description | A short text about the type. At most 530 characters. | If the guest needs to know what they are booking, for example what comes with high tea. | - |
| Availability | Links the type to an Availability: the time slot in which guests can book this type. The drop-down also shows the times of the Availability. Choose None (not bookable online) if the type does not need to be in the widget. | For every type that guests must be able to book online. | A type belongs to one Availability. If a type was already linked to more Availabilities, those remain until you choose a different one. |
| Image | An image for the type, at most 5 MB. For an existing type you can remove it with the button Delete next to the image. | If you want to show types in the widget with a picture. | One image for all languages. |
| Colour | The colour in which the type appears in the reservation overview and the timeline. | To tell types apart at a glance. | Only visible internally; the guest does not see the colour. |
| Minimum number of guests | The smallest number of guests per reservation. Default 1. | For a package that is only possible from, say, 4 people. | - |
| Maximum number of guests | The largest number of guests per reservation. Default 20. Above this number the window Add reservation gives a warning, except for a quotation. | For groups above that you work with a quotation. | - |
| Reservation duration | The fixed duration of a reservation, selectable in steps of 15 minutes. Jimani calculates the end time itself; after that the table is free again for a new reservation. Default 1 hour. | Lunch one hour, dinner three hours. | - |
| Manual times may differ | With Yes an employee in the dashboard may plan a reservation shorter than the reservation duration, down to the Minimum booking time. Default No. | If you sometimes want to place a shorter reservation in the timeline or on the floor plan. | Guests in the widget always book the full reservation duration. |
| Minimum booking time | The shortest duration you may book manually: 15, 30 or 45 minutes. Default 30 minutes. You only see this field if Manual times may differ is on Yes. | Together with Manual times may differ. | - |
| Show end time | With Yes the guest also sees until what time the reservation lasts, for example on the confirmation. Default No. | If you use a fixed time per reservation and want to let people know. | - |
| Minimum time until the reservation | How long in advance a guest must reserve online, in steps of 15 minutes, 1 to 6 days or 1 to 4 weeks. Under a day counts from now; from a day in whole days. Default no minimum. | For a high tea, barbecue or group reservation for which the kitchen has to buy ingredients. | Staff can always reserve in the dashboard and at the POS. |
| Request | With Yes a reservation of this type is not final yet: it comes in as a request and the guest gets separate emails. If you set the request to confirmed, the guest only then gets the confirmation email. | For group reservations or if you want to look at them first. | You only see this choice with the add-on Requests. If Requests is set to No in the menu settings, the choice is greyed out and stays No. See the article about requests. |
| Show in widget | With Yes the type is in the reservation widget. Default Yes for a new type. | Set to No for types you only book manually yourself. | You only see this choice with the add-on Online reservations. |
| Active | An active type can be used right away when booking manually. Only for an existing type. | Turn off to hide a type temporarily without deleting it. | - |
| Add products and deposits | With Yes you can link a payment, transaction costs and extra products to the type. Default No. | If the guest must pay when reserving or can order something extra. | Only with the add-on Products and deposits. |
| Do you want to receive a payment for this reservation? | With Yes the guest pays when reserving, for example a deposit or a fixed amount per person. Then you choose the product. | To limit no-shows or to have a group pay in advance. | Online payment by the guest goes via Mollie. |
| Choose the product for this reservation | The product determines what the guest pays. The price is next to the name. With the plus button you create a new product right away. Choose No product to ask for nothing. | After Yes at the payment question. | If the product is not listed, create it first under Products (tab Products). |
| Is this a deposit? | With Yes the product counts as a deposit: the amount is fully settled when the guest arrives. With No it is a fixed amount that stays. | Choose Yes if the guest pays the rest at the table later. | See the article about deposits. |
| Do you want to charge transaction costs? | With Yes the guest also pays transaction costs with the payment. You then choose the product with the costs. | If you want to pass on the payment costs. | Only with the add-on Transaction costs, and only visible if you ask for a payment. |
| Transaction costs | The transaction costs product that belongs to this type, with the price next to it. The costs go on the guest's bill. Choose No transaction cost to not charge them. | After Yes at the question about transaction costs. | Create the product via Add > Transaction costs. |
| Extra products | Products the guest can order in addition with this type, such as a drinks package. You can choose more than one; with the plus button you create one. | For add-on sales with a reservation. | Only after Add products and deposits on Yes. See the article about extra products. |
| Tables | Choose the tables this type is placed at. A tick at a location selects all tables of that location; combination tables of the chosen tables come along automatically. For a new type all tables are already on. | To allow, for example, high tea only in the conservatory. | A table that is not chosen is not offered for this type. |
| Main guests | A group of tables for main guests. Those tables can only be reserved manually, never online. | For tables you keep free for regular guests or management. | You only see this if at least one table is marked as Main guest. |
| Create a new table | Opens the window Table so you can add a table without closing this window. | If the table does not exist yet. | - |
| Fields | The questions the guest gets when reserving. You drag the fields into the desired order and with the plus button you create a new field. | For dietary wishes, occasion or other questions. | A field for quotations gets the addition (Quotation) in the list. See the reference article about fields. |
| Reservation types | The explanation above the overview: here you create all reservation options and link products and extra fields. | If you want an overview of what guests can book. | Types that are turned off remain, with the label Inactive. |

**Related questions:**

- What is a reservation type?
- How do I set the duration of a reservation?
- How do I determine at which tables a type of reservation may be booked?
- How do I hide a reservation type in the widget?

**Keywords:** reservation type, type of reservation, dinner lunch high tea, reservation duration, minimum number of guests, reservation deposit, request, show in widget

**Related:** [What can you set under Availability?](beschikbaarheid.md), [What can you set under Fields?](velden.md), [How do I ask for a deposit with a reservation?](../faq/aanbetaling-bij-reservering.md)

---

# What can you set under Availability?

**Answer:** An Availability is a fixed time slot on certain days in which guests can book a reservation type, for example Dinner from 16:30 to 21:30. You set it under Restaurant > Availability.

**Where to find it:** Menu Restaurant > tab Availability (`/Horeca`). New: button Add > Availability. Existing: click the line.

**Explanation:** An Availability determines when a reservation type can be booked online. The guest only sees times that fall within a time slot of an active and visible Availability, on a date you have ticked, and within the opening times of that day. Booking manually by staff is always possible. An Availability can have up to five time slots, for example lunch and dinner. Under Time slot 1 you add a time slot with Add time slot (following on from the previous one); from Time slot 2 you remove a time slot with the bin. The times in the widget follow the Time interval between reservations from Reservation settings. You can also use an Availability as an extra choice: for example under the type Dinner put the Availabilities A la carte, Buffet and Barbecue, and the guest chooses one of these while reserving.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name | The name of the Availability, at most 20 characters. The name is not visible in the widget or when booking manually; it is only for you. | Choose a clear name, such as Lunch or Dinner. | With more languages on you fill in the name per language. |
| Maximum number of characters | The counter below the name field: how many characters still fit (at most 20). | While typing. | - |
| Description | An internal note on the Availability. Not visible in the widget or when booking manually. | For your own notes. | - |
| Colour | The colour in the reservation overview. | To tell Availabilities apart. | Only visible internally. |
| Show in widget | With Yes the Availability, with the corresponding reservation types, is in the widget. Default Yes for a new Availability. | Set to No for an Availability you only use yourself. | You only see this choice with the add-on Online reservations. An Availability that is not visible yields no online times. |
| Active | An active Availability can be used right away when booking manually. Only for an existing Availability. | Turn off to stop it temporarily without deleting it. | A deleted Availability can be activated again: Jimani then asks whether you want to restore it. |
| Guest groups (widget fields) | Per guest group (for example adults, children, toddlers) you choose Yes or No. You can set up to five guest groups. Guest group 1 is on Yes by default. If you have more than one group active and turn this on, the Availability is only shown when guests have been selected for all active groups. | If you ask for numbers per type of guest, for example for a children's party. | You must turn on at least one group, otherwise the message Select a field follows. You give the names of the groups under Menu and settings (Manage the menu settings, block Guest groups). |
| Guest group | The name of a guest group as you gave it in the menu settings. The block Guest groups is under Menu and settings and allows up to five guest groups. | Set once; afterwards you choose per Availability which groups take part. | Guest group 1 cannot be turned off. |
| Reservation type | The reservation types that fall within this Availability. You can choose more than one and with Select all you choose them all. With the plus button you create a new type right away. | After creating your types. | A reservation type belongs to one Availability. |
| Date | The calendar in which you tick on which days the Availability applies. You choose single days, weeks or months by clicking and page to other years with the arrows. | Always; without a day the Availability applies nowhere. | If you save without a date, the message Select a date follows. |
| Time slot | A block with Available from and Available until. You can use at most five time slots. Time slot 1 has the button Add time slot, Time slot 2 up to and including 5 have the button Remove time slot. | For a day with two moments, such as lunch and dinner. | Time slots may not overlap. |
| Available from | The start time of the time slot. A guest can choose a time from this time. | For example 16:30 for dinner. | Both Available from and Available until must be filled in. |
| Available until | The end time of the time slot: the last time a guest can still choose to start. | For example 21:30 for dinner. | Must be later than Available from. The reservation duration comes on top of that. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Select a field | No guest group (widget field) has been set to Yes. | Set at least Guest group 1 to Yes. |
| Select a date | No date has been chosen in the calendar. | Tick the days on which the Availability applies. |
| Time slot {0} and time slot {1} overlap. Choose times that do not overlap. | Two time slots overlap. | Adjust the times. |
| For time slot {0} fill in both Available from and Available until. | A time slot is only half filled in. | Fill in both times or remove the time slot. |
| For time slot {0}, Available until must be later than Available from. | The end time is before or equal to the start time. | Set the end time later. |
| There is no free hour left on this day for an extra time slot. | No extra time slot fits following on from the last time slot. | Adjust the existing time slots. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I set the times at which guests can reserve for dinner or lunch?
- What is an availability at Restaurant?
- How do I make only certain days bookable for a reservation type?
- Where do I set the times that appear in the widget?

**Keywords:** availability, time slot, dinner lunch times, online reservation times, guest group, adults children, times in the widget

**Related:** [What can you set under Reservation types?](reserveersoorten.md), [Why do I see no times in the reservation widget?](../faq/geen-tijden-in-de-widget.md)

---

# What can you set under Products of a reservation?

**Answer:** Products with a reservation are what the guest pays or orders in addition: a deposit, an extra product or transaction costs. You manage them under Restaurant > Products, or you create them from the Reservation type window.

**Where to find it:** Menu Restaurant > tab Products (`/Horeca`). New: button Add > Products, or Add > Transaction costs. The tab Products is only there if the add-on Products and deposits is on (Settings > Add-ons > Reservations).

**Explanation:** The tab Products shows the POS products in the category Hospitality. What you change there also changes at the POS, and the other way round; you create a product in the POS product window. Below that are the transaction costs with their own window. In that window Product you choose the product type: a product with a price per person, an extra product with one price, or transaction costs. You can search by name and filter on reservation type. A product that is not active gets an inactive marker in the overview. Online payment by the guest goes via Mollie.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Product | The window Product has the blocks Product (type), Name and description, Image and Price and visibility. Each block has a short explanation at the top. | When adding or changing. | Choose the type before you fill in the rest: the type determines which fields you see. |
| Name | The name of the product. It is visible when booking manually and in the widget. At most 50 characters. | Always. | With more languages on you fill in the name per language. |
| Maximum number of characters | The counter at the name: the number of characters that still fit. | While typing. | - |
| Description | The text below the name. For transaction costs this field is also called Description. | If the guest needs to know what the product is. | - |
| Image | An image in the ratio 4:3, at most 5 MB. Not for transaction costs. | For extra products in the widget. | - |
| Price | The price including VAT. For a product with prices per person there is a price field per guest group whose name you have set. An extra product has one price. For transaction costs it is the price per reservation and it must be higher than zero. | Always. | Always enter the price including VAT. |
| VAT group | The VAT group of the product. The drop-down shows the name of the group with the VAT percentage. The group is required. On the screen it says: "Choose the VAT group" "Select the VAT group" | Always; choose the group that fits the product. | You manage the VAT rates under Settings > Till and products > VAT groups. |
| VAT | The VAT percentage that belongs to the chosen VAT group. The amount in the price field includes this percentage. | To check. | - |
| List view | With Yes the products ordered with the reservation appear in the memo field of the reservation overview. | If you want to quickly see whether a guest ordered a certain product. | Only for an extra product. |
| Show in widget | With Yes the product is in the reservation widget and the guest can choose it while reserving. With No the guest does not see it. | Set to No for products you only add to a reservation yourself. | Only for an extra product, and only with the add-on Online reservations. |
| Active | A product that is not active can no longer be chosen, but it remains. Only for an existing product. | To stop a product temporarily. | A deleted product can be activated again. |

**Related questions:**

- What is a product with a reservation?
- How do I set transaction costs for a reservation?
- Can I set a price per person for a reservation?
- Where do I manage products for deposits?

**Keywords:** product reservation, extra product, transaction costs, deposit product, price per person, vat reservation, add-on sales

**Related:** [What can you set under Reservation types?](reserveersoorten.md), [How do I ask for a deposit with a reservation?](../faq/aanbetaling-bij-reservering.md)

---

# What can you set under Fields?

**Answer:** Fields are the questions of your own that a guest gets when reserving, such as dietary wishes or the occasion. You create them under Restaurant > Fields and link them to one or more reservation types.

**Where to find it:** Menu Restaurant > tab Fields (`/Horeca`). New: button Add > Fields. Existing field: click the line.

**Explanation:** For a field you first choose for which reservation types it is asked (tiles), then the kind of field, the name and the description, and then the settings. The questions appear in the last step of reserving, Guest details and information. You can add as many fields as you like. You choose the kind of field for a new field; for an existing field it is fixed. Kinds: Text box, Large text box, Period, Date, Checkbox, Selection box multiple choices, Radio button, Number field, Phone, Drop-down, Label, Link and Terms and conditions. For a Drop-down, Radio button and Selection box multiple choices you fill in the choices under Options, one option per line; if you put XXX after a line, that option is preselected. For Link you fill in the link to the website (starting with https://www) and a Link title; for Terms and conditions the link and the text the guest accepts.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Type | The kind of field: what kind of answer you ask for, a text, a choice, a date or a time. For an existing field you can no longer change the kind. | When creating a field. | Choose carefully: converting is not possible, create a new field instead. |
| Name | The name of the field, at most 50 characters. This is the text the guest sees if Show field name is on Yes. | Always. | With more languages on you fill in the name per language. |
| Maximum number of characters | The counter at the name: the number of characters that still fit. | While typing. | - |
| Options | The choices of a Drop-down, Radio button or Selection box multiple choices. Each line is one option. For Link the link title is here and for Terms and conditions the link to the terms. | Only for the kinds with choices or a link; for other kinds the box is gone. | If XXX follows a line, that option is preselected. |
| Label | The tag of the field, by default {name in lowercase}. In an email template Jimani replaces the tag with the guest's answer. | If you want to see the answer back in an email. | A tag is required. |
| Required | With Yes the guest must fill in the field to complete the reservation. Default No. | For details you really need, such as a phone number for a group. | - |
| Show field name | With Yes the name of the field is above the input field. With No the guest sees the field without a name. | Set to No if the description is already clear enough. | - |
| List view | With Yes the answer is in the memo of the reservation overview. | If you want to see an answer, such as an allergy, right in the list. | If you set Show when booking manually to No, List view goes off. |
| Show when booking manually | With Yes the field is also in the windows for booking manually. Handy for questionnaires with a group reservation, for example for a wedding: you fill in all questions together with the guest. | For fields you also want to fill in yourself. | - |
| Show in widget | With Yes the guest sees the field while reserving via the widget. | Set to No for fields only you fill in. | You only see this choice with the add-on Online reservations. |
| Show only in quotation mode | With Yes the field is only shown for quotations. For normal reservations the field is hidden. | For questions that only belong with group quotations. | Only with the add-on Quotations. In the Reservation type window such a field has (Quotation) after the name. |
| Do you want to make this field dynamic? | With Yes this field is only shown if the guest made a certain choice in another field. This way the question only comes once an earlier question has an answer. | For example, only show the question about which diet when the guest says Yes to the question whether there are allergies. | Only with the add-on Dynamic reservation fields. |
| Which field is the main field? | The field whose answer determines whether this field is shown. | After Yes at dynamic. | Choose a field with choices. |
| Show this field when the following is selected | The value of the main field for which this field appears. You choose from the options of the main field. | After choosing the main field. | - |
| Active | A field that is not active is not asked, but remains with its answers. Only for an existing field. | To stop a field temporarily. | - |

**Related questions:**

- How do I add a question of my own to the reservation form?
- Can I ask the guest a drop-down question?
- How do I make a question required when reserving?
- Can I make the guest's answer appear in the email?

**Keywords:** own fields reservations, extra reservation question, dietary wishes, drop-down, required field, dynamic field, tag in email

**Related:** [What can you set under Reservation types?](reserveersoorten.md)

---

# What can you set under Locations and Tables?

**Answer:** A location is a part of the business where tables are, such as the terrace or the conservatory. Under Restaurant > Locations and Restaurant > Tables you record which locations and tables you have and how many guests fit.

**Where to find it:** Menu Restaurant > tabs Locations and Tables (`/Horeca`). New: button Add > Location, Add > Tables, or in the Reservation type window the button Create a new table.

**Explanation:** First create your locations and then your tables. A table belongs to one location. In the Tables overview you see at the top the number of Active tables and Active chairs. In the list you can adjust a few things right away: a click on the number of seats opens an input with minus and plus, a click on the image lets you choose another one with the arrows and a click on the location goes to the next location. If you want to change or delete several tables at once, choose the pencil (Edit). You can then adjust the table number, the seats and Main guest and tick tables to delete with Deleting tables. Save saves everything; Cancel puts everything back as it was. The button Edit at a table opens the window Table with all details. You create more tables at once with Add > Tables: you choose the location, the number of tables (1 to 50) and then fill in per table the number and the number of seats. A location with tables cannot be turned off; first turn off the tables or move them.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Location | At a table: the location where the table is. Under Locations this is the name of the location itself, at most 50 characters and only visible internally. | For every table. | A table belongs to one location. |
| Maximum number of characters | The counter at the location name: how many characters still fit. | While typing. | - |
| Maximum quantity of guests | How many guests fit in this location, from 1 to 1000. | For every location. | In the list this column is called Maximum quantity of people. |
| Outdoor location | Marks the location as an outdoor location, for example a terrace. Default No. The marking also shows as a tick in the list of locations. | For terrace or garden. | - |
| Active | A location or table can only be reserved if it is active. For a location that also applies to the corresponding tables. Only for an existing location or table; when creating several tables at once Active is on by default. | Turn off to not use a location or table temporarily. | A location with linked tables cannot be turned off. See the message below. |
| Table number | The number of the table. The field only accepts digits (at most 10 digits) and has a minus and plus button. The number appears on the POS and on the floor plan. | For every table. | The example in the field mentions a name; you can only enter a number. |
| Seats | The number of seats of the table, from 1 to 1000. Default 1 for a new table. On the screen it says: "What is the number of seats for this table?" | For every table. | Jimani uses the number to choose a suitable table for a reservation. |
| Number of seats | The same as Seats, but then per table when creating several tables at once. In the list the column is also called Number of seats. | With Add > Tables. | At least 1 per table; otherwise a message follows. |
| Number of tables | How many tables you create at once in the same location, from 1 to 50. | When you set up a new space. | - |
| Can be reserved via widget | With Yes the table can be reserved via the reservation widget; with No it is not visible online. Default Yes for new tables. In the Tables list the same choice is a column. | Set to No for tables you only assign yourself. | Only visible with the add-on Online reservations. |
| Main guest | A column in the Tables list with Yes or No. A main guest table is a separate table for a guest you want to set apart, such as a regular guest. Guests cannot reserve it online, not even as part of a combination table; via the dashboard and the POS it is possible. On the floor plan the table gets a little crown and at the POS the table is behind the button Show main guests. | For tables you keep free for regular guests or management. | In the Reservation type window these tables are together under Main guests. The info button (i) at the column gives this explanation. |
| Map image | The image the table gets on the floor plan. You page through the available images with the arrows. | For a recognisable floor plan. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| This location cannot be turned off because tables are linked to it. | You set a location to not active while tables are still linked to it. | First turn off the tables or link them to another location and try again. |

**Related questions:**

- What is a location in Restaurant?
- How do I add many tables in one go?
- How many seats can I set per table?
- What is a main guest at a table?

**Keywords:** add tables, location terrace, seats, table number, main guest table, multiple tables at once, floor plan table

**Related:** [What can you set under Combination tables?](combinatietafels.md), [How do I set up locations, tables and combination tables?](../faq/locaties-tafels-instellen.md)

---

# What can you set under Combination tables?

**Answer:** A combination table is two or more tables that can be reserved together as one large table, for example Table 5 and 6 for a group. You create them under Restaurant > Combination tables.

**Where to find it:** Menu Restaurant > tab Combination tables (`/Horeca`). New: button Add > Combination tables. The tab is only there if the add-on Combine tables is on (Settings > Add-ons > Restaurant and kitchen).

**Explanation:** You give the combination a name, choose which tables belong to it (at least two) and check the total number of seats. The tables you choose can still be used separately. In the Reservation type window combination tables automatically come along with the tables you choose there. In the widget Jimani only offers a combination when no single table is free anymore. Tables marked as Main guest cannot be offered online in a combination.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name | The name or number of the combination, such as Table 5 and 6. At most 50 characters. | Always. | - |
| Maximum number of characters | The counter below the name: how many characters still fit. | While typing. | - |
| Seats | The number of seats of the combination together. At least 2. The list shows this as Number of seats. | After you have chosen the tables. | Jimani fills in the total of the chosen tables automatically. You can adjust it, for example if two tables together have fewer places. |
| Tables | The tiles with the tables that together form the combination. Tables are grouped per location, main guest tables separately. | Choose at least two tables. | Without two tables the message Select at least two tables. follows. |
| Bookable online | With Yes guests can book the combination online. Default Yes for a new combination. On the screen it says: "Guests can book this combination online" | Set to No for combinations you only assign yourself. | Only visible with the add-on Online reservations. A combination with a table that cannot be reserved online is not offered online. |
| Active | The combination table can only be reserved if it is active. Default Yes. | Turn off to stop it temporarily. | - |

**Related questions:**

- How do I combine two tables for a large group?
- What is a combination table?
- Where do I create a table combination?
- Can a group reserve several tables at once?

**Keywords:** combination table, combine tables, large group table, table 5 and 6, table combination

**Related:** [What can you set under Locations and Tables?](locaties-en-tafels.md), [How do I set up locations, tables and combination tables?](../faq/locaties-tafels-instellen.md)

---

# What can you set under Location restriction, Crowd reduction and Time limitation?

**Answer:** With these three restrictions you hold back reservations: a Location restriction closes a location on certain days, a Crowd reduction limits how many reservations or guests may come per arrival time and a Time limitation blocks a period or a whole day for chosen reservation types.

**Where to find it:** Menu Restaurant > tabs Location restriction, Crowd reduction and Time limitation (`/Horeca`). New: the plus button on the tab itself. The tabs are only there if the add-on Reservation blocks is on. In the reservation overview the button Time limitation has a shortcut.

**Explanation:** All three determine which times and tables a guest can choose in the reservation widget. Location restriction: choose the location(s) and the dates; on those days the tables of those locations can no longer be booked. If the closure is structural, adjust the opening times instead. Crowd reduction: you choose for which reservation types the limit applies, whether Jimani counts Number of reservations or Number of guests, and per arrival time the maximum. If a time is set to 0, there is no limit for that time. The limit applies every day. Time limitation: choose the dates, the reservation types and the time from and to; the times in that period can then no longer be chosen. If the period runs past midnight, for example 20:31 to 01:30, it also applies to the part after midnight on the next day. If you set Day restriction to Yes, the whole day is blocked and the times lapse. You turn a restriction on or off in the list with the column Active.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name | The name of the restriction, at most 50 characters. The name is only visible internally. | Choose a name that says why, such as Private party or Staff lunch. | - |
| Maximum number of characters | The counter below the name: how many characters still fit. | While typing. | - |
| Location | With a Location restriction you choose the location(s) that close. On the chosen days the tables of those locations are no longer offered for a reservation. | If, for example, the terrace or the conservatory is closed for a day. | Only for the Location restriction. |
| Reservation types | The reservation types for which the restriction applies. For Crowd reduction and Time limitation you choose them with tiles (more than one is allowed). The list says All Booking Types if you have chosen all types. | Always for Crowd reduction and Time limitation. | A Location restriction applies to all reservation types; the choice is hidden there. |
| All Booking Types | In the overview of the Crowd reduction and the Time limitation this appears in the column Reservation types if the restriction applies to all types. | To check in the list. | - |
| Limiting reservations | Determines what the Crowd reduction counts: Number of reservations or Number of guests. Default Number of guests. | Choose Number of guests if the kitchen has to watch covers, Number of reservations if it is about tables. | Afterwards you fill in the maximum per arrival time. |
| Number of reservations | A choice under Limiting reservations: Jimani counts the number of reservations that start at that arrival time. | With limited table capacity. | - |
| Number of guests | A choice under Limiting reservations: Jimani counts the total number of guests that start at that arrival time, across all guest groups. | With limited kitchen capacity. | - |
| Day restriction | With Yes the Time limitation applies to the whole day on the chosen dates. With No you choose a time from and a time to. | For a day off or a private party. | Time from and Time to disappear if you choose Yes. |
| Time from | The start time of the block. The time itself and everything after it up to Time to is blocked. | With Day restriction on No. | Both times equal (except 00:00 and 00:00) is not accepted. If the time runs past midnight, the screen shows +1 day. |
| Time to | The end time of the block. The time itself is still blocked. | With Day restriction on No. | - |
| Date | The calendar with which you choose on which days the restriction applies: single days, weeks or months by clicking. With the arrows you go to other years. In the list it says More than one date has been selected if more than one day has been chosen. On the screen it says: "Select all" | For Location restriction and Time limitation. | The Crowd reduction has no dates: the limit applies every day. |
| Active | Whether the restriction counts. You turn it on or off with the switch in the column Active of the overview. | Turn off to keep a restriction for later. | In the window itself Active is hidden. |
| Manage the time blocks | The subtitle in the header of the Time limitation window when you open an existing block. | To recognise the window. | - |
| Per time slot | Only for the Crowd reduction: a table with Time and Maximum quantity of guests (or reservations) per arrival time. In the column header you fill in a value, which then applies to all times; then you adjust individual times. The table shows every quarter of an hour; only the times that are also in the widget count. | After choosing the reservation types. | 0 means no limit at that time. |

**Related questions:**

- What is the difference between a time limitation, location restriction and crowd reduction?
- How do I keep a day or location free of reservations?
- How do I limit the number of guests per arrival time?
- How do I block reservations for a private party?

**Keywords:** location restriction, crowd reduction, time limitation, block private party, close day reserving, maximum guests per quarter of an hour, reservation block

**Related:** [What can you set under Reservation types?](reserveersoorten.md), [How do I block a day or time for reservations?](../faq/dag-of-tijd-blokkeren.md)

---

# How do the Opening times at Restaurant work?

**Answer:** Under Restaurant > Opening times you fill in per day when you are open. A change is saved immediately. The online times for guests fall within the opening times of that day.

**Where to find it:** Menu Restaurant > tab Opening times (`/Horeca`).

**Explanation:** You see the days of the month you choose, with per day Open from, Open until and the switch Open or Closed. At the top choose the year (this year, next year and the year after) and the month. Open from and Open until only apply if the day is set to Open. If you close after midnight, for example open from 11:00 to 02:00, fill in 02:00 as the closing time; the hours after midnight then belong to the day you opened. Equal times are not possible; if you are open all day, fill in 00:00 to 23:59. To quickly fill in the opening times for the next two years, make an export, edit the file in Excel and then choose Import. Next to the switch it shows per day how saving went: Saving..., Saved or an error with Try again. If a day is set to Closed, or no times are filled in, Jimani sets no limit on the times a guest can choose for that day. If you want to close a day for online reserving, create a Time limitation with Day restriction on Yes.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Open | The switch is on Open: the day counts as open and Open from and Open until are used. | For every day you are open. | Every change saves itself. |
| Closed | The switch is on Closed: the business is closed that day and the times Open from and Open until do not count. | For a closing day, for example a fixed day of rest. | A Closed day does not stop guests online: Jimani then sets no limit. Use a Time limitation with Day restriction to stop online reserving. |
| Open from | The opening time of that day. | For every open day. | The widget offers no times before the opening time. |
| Open until | The closing time of that day. If it is before Open from, the business closes after midnight, on the next day. | For every open day. | Equal times are refused. |
| Import | Reads in an Excel file with opening times. First make an export, edit it and then choose Import. | To fill in for two years at once. | Importing overwrites the days in the file. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I fill in opening times per day?
- Can I import opening times for a whole year?
- How do I set that I am open until 02:00?
- How do online times relate to the opening times?

**Keywords:** restaurant opening times, closed day, open until 02:00, import opening times, two years ahead, online reservation times

**Related:** [What can you set under Availability?](beschikbaarheid.md), [How do I block a day or time for reservations?](../faq/dag-of-tijd-blokkeren.md)

---

# How does the reservation overview work in Jimani?

**Answer:** Under Reservations you see all reservations of the business in six views: Overview (the timeline), List view, Weekly list, Last 100 reservations, Upcoming reservations and Reservation totals. With the Reservation settings cog you decide how the timeline looks and how booking works.

**Where to find it:** Menu Reservations (`/Reservations`). The Reservation settings cog is at the top right.

**Explanation:** At the top you pick the day with the arrows or the date picker. The buttons at the top right are Create reservation, SMS times (only with the SMS add-on) and Time limit. The scanner icon opens the window where you enter a spare key. Below the date you choose the view. In the lists you can filter the reservations with Search by:, Select location and Select Reservation Type; the status filter is available to the owner or anyone with the Filters permission. Print and Export to Excel require the Printing and Exports permission. Click a name to open the Reservation information window, where you change the status, take payment, add an attachment or write a memo. A reservation that is still Open after the arrival time gets the buttons Set to No-show and Set to No-show in 30 minutes. The timeline shows the reservations as blocks per table; below the timeline is the Status colours legend: Confirmed, Request, Arrived, Left, No-show and Cancelled: not shown.

![The reservation overview with the timeline and at the top the views Overview, List view, Weekly list, Last 100 reservations, Upcoming reservations and Reservation totals](/kennisbank/beelden/reserveringsoverzicht-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Hide "Guest arrived" | In a list: leaves out the reservations whose guest has already arrived. | When you only want to see who is still to come. | - |
| Hide "Guest left" | In a list: leaves out the reservations whose guest has already left. | To keep the list short. | - |
| Reservation for the month: | Under Upcoming reservations: pick the month of this year for which you want to see reservations. Months that have already passed cannot be chosen; the current month is selected by default. | To look ahead. | - |
| Paid | In the Payment column of the lists: the reservation has been paid. | To check deposits. | In the timeline a marker shows whether a reservation has been paid. |
| Unpaid | In the Payment column of the lists: an amount is still outstanding. | To see which guests still have to pay. | A reservation without an amount shows no payment status here. |
| View | In Reservation settings: how much of the reservation is visible in a block of the timeline. You choose from Normal, Compact or Extra compact. | Choose Compact or Extra compact for a busy business with many tables. | After Save it applies to all screens and users of the business. |
| Normal | Choice under View (and under Table name text size): the default size, with as much information as possible in a block. | With few tables. | - |
| Compact | Choice under View: a block with fewer lines. | With many reservations at the same time. | - |
| Extra compact | Choice under View: the smallest block. | When you want to see many tables at a glance. | - |
| Show number of seats | Shows the number of seats after the table name, for example 12 (4). For Activities and Salon this is called Show count per location/lane. | To see the capacity right away when placing guests. | - |
| Show count per location/lane | The same choice for activity and salon timelines: shows the number of people after the name, for example Pool table 1 (4). | For activities or salon. | - |
| Table name text size | Makes the table names to the left of the timeline larger: choose Normal or Large. On the screen it says: “Large” | When used from a distance or on a small screen. | - |
| Location text size | The same choice for activity and salon timelines, for the names to the left of the timeline. | For activities or salon. | - |
| Horizontal gridlines | The lines between the rows: Normal (light grey) or Dark grey. On the screen it says: “Dark grey” “Normal (light grey)” | When you want to tell the rows apart more easily. | - |
| Vertical gridlines | The lines between the times: Normal (light grey) or Dark grey. | To read the times more easily. | - |
| Show half-hour times | Shows the half-hour times and lines in the timeline. Yes or No. | Turn it off for a calmer view. | - |
| Location | Timeline filter: show only the tables of this location or locations. Default All locations. This browser remembers your choice. | When you work per area, for example only the terrace. | Clear filters resets everything. |
| Reservation type | Timeline filter: the blocks of other types turn light grey, so a table never looks free by mistake. Default All reservation types. | When you want to overview one type, such as dinner. | This browser remembers your choice. |
| Sort tables | The order in which the tables appear to the left of the timeline: Tables by number, Tables by location or Tables by number of guests. Save stores this for the whole business. | Choose what reads best for your team. | Unlike Location and Reservation type, this choice applies to everyone. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Are you sure that guests have arrived? | A confirmation when marking guests as arrived. | Choose OK if the guest is really there. |

**Related questions:**

- Which views does the reservation overview have?
- How do I see today's reservations?
- Where do I see upcoming reservations?
- How do I adjust the timeline?

**Keywords:** reservations overview, reservation timeline, weekly list, list view, today's reservations, sort tables, set up timeline

**Related:** [How do I add a reservation myself, for example when a guest calls?](../faq/reservering-handmatig-toevoegen.md), [How do I move, extend or swap reservations in the timeline?](../faq/tijdlijn-verslepen-en-wisselen.md), [What can you set under Reservation settings?](instellingen-reserveringen.md)

---

# What can you set under Reservation settings?

**Answer:** The Reservation settings window (the cog under Reservations) brings together how the reservation overview looks and how booking works: the time interval, check-in, automatically setting no-show and what can be chosen under Add reservation. Everything applies to the whole business.

**Where to find it:** Menu Reservations > Reservation settings cog at the top right (`/Reservations`). You save changes with Save.

**Explanation:** The window starts with the blocks for the timeline (filter and order, appearance); see the article about the reservation overview. Below that are two blocks of settings: Reservations and Add reservation. A setting that depends on another (Waiting time until No-show, Turn on walk-in automatically, Turn on Check in now automatically) only counts when the setting above it is set to Yes.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Screen when opening Reservations | Which view Reservations opens: Overview, List view or Week view. | Choose the view your team uses most. | - |
| Time interval between reservations | How many minutes apart a reservation can start. With 15 minutes, bookings can be made every quarter of an hour, in the dashboard and online. The times in the widget and the grid of the timeline follow this step. | Choose a smaller step if you want guests to be able to start at any moment. | The Crowd reduction counts per arrival time that fits in this grid. |
| Time before arrival | How long before the arrival time you can already check a guest in. Earlier than that, the status cannot yet change to Arrived. | When guests often arrive early. | - |
| Automatically set to No-show | Yes or No. If a reservation is still Open after the arrival time, Jimani sets it to No-show by itself, after the time you choose under Waiting time until No-show. | To free up tables without having to click yourself. | The guest gets an SMS if you have created the SMS for No-show. Open receipts of the reservation expire. See the article about no-shows. |
| Waiting time until No-show | How long after the arrival time a reservation without a guest is automatically set to No-show: 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes or 1 hour. | Only when Automatically set to No-show is set to Yes. | If the choice is empty, Jimani uses 30 minutes. |
| Change reservation button when cancelling | Also shows a button to change the reservation on the screen where a guest cancels their reservation. | When you would rather let guests reschedule than cancel. | - |
| Show walk-in | Shows the Passer-by (no guest details) checkbox under Add reservation: a reservation without name, email or phone, for example for a guest who walks in right away. | For walk-in guests. | - |
| Turn on walk-in automatically | The Passer-by checkbox is already ticked for a new reservation. | When most reservations are walk-ins. | Only counts when Show walk-in is set to Yes. |
| Show Check in now | Shows the Check in now checkbox under Add reservation: after saving, the guest is immediately set to Arrived. | For guests who are already there. | - |
| Turn on Check in now automatically | The Check in now checkbox is already ticked for a new reservation. | When you mostly record walk-in guests. | Only counts when Show Check in now is set to Yes. |
| Show lock table swap | Shows the Locking table change checkbox under Add reservation: the table of that reservation is not swapped automatically. | For guests who have to stay at a fixed table. | Only for Restaurant. |
| Sort tables | The order of the tables to the left of the timeline. This is the same choice as in the timeline block. | See the article about the reservation overview. | Save stores this for the whole business. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I set the time interval of reservations?
- How do I turn on automatic no-show?
- What determines how the reservation overview looks?
- Can I lock table swaps?

**Keywords:** reservation settings, reservation time interval, automatic no-show, walk-in, check in now, lock table swap, open reservations

**Related:** [How does the reservation overview work in Jimani?](reserveringsoverzicht.md), [What happens when a guest does not show up (no-show)?](../faq/no-show-automatisch-en-handmatig.md)

---

# What can you set under Add reservation and Update reservation?

**Answer:** In the Add reservation window you create a reservation yourself: type, date, time, table, guest and any products. In Update reservation you change it later, with tabs for attachments, history, emails, guest messages and an internal memo.

**Where to find it:** Menu Reservations > Create reservation (`/Reservations`); you open an existing reservation by clicking its name (Reservation information window > Edit).

**Explanation:** You first choose the Reservation type; then come Availability, Date and the number of guests per guest group. With From and To you choose the time (the Available times list shows what is free) and Jimani calculates the end time from the reservation duration. With the pencil next to Table you choose tables, a combination table or a location. Look up an existing guest with Search, or fill in the guest details. Below that are the extra questions of the type, the Products block, Reservation combinations, Extra information and at the bottom the invoice with Your invoice: Total excluding VAT, VAT, Total amount, Total paid and Outstanding amount. With the status you choose Confirmed, Request or Quotation. Save stores it; Pay opens the selection window for Cash, Card, Tap to Pay, Pay later, Pay other, Coupon or Pay on account. After Save, Jimani asks What action should be taken? with Send email or Don't send email. An email template must exist for the type and language, otherwise you get the message No email template and the reservation is saved without an email. Three switches determine the behaviour: Passer-by (no guest details) creates a reservation without guest details, Check in now sets the guest to Arrived right away and Locking table change keeps the table fixed. Whether those switches are visible and ticked in advance is set under Reservation settings. For a new request or quotation you choose Send email with Invoice under Pay later: you then first see the Email template window with Edit, where you can adjust the subject and text of the email before it is sent.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Reservation types | The type of reservation: dinner, drinks, high tea. It determines the duration, the maximum number of guests, the tables and the extra questions. If there is only one type, Jimani chooses it itself. | Always first. | Above the maximum of the type the window warns you, except for a quotation. |
| Availability | The Availability within which the reservation falls. The dropdown becomes active after you have chosen a type. | For types that can be used in more than one Availability. | Can only be changed when creating; in Update reservation it is fixed. |
| Date | The day of the reservation. To the right and left are arrows for the next and previous day. | Always. | Above the field are the opening hours of that day. |
| From | The arrival time. The times you can choose follow the Time interval between reservations and the free tables. | Always. | A staff member may also book manually outside the online times. |
| To | The departure time. Jimani fills it in as From plus the reservation duration of the type. After a change Jimani looks for the free tables again. | Adjust it if the guest stays shorter or longer. | Shorter than the reservation duration is only possible if the type has Manual times may differ. |
| Table | The tables of the reservation. With the pencil you open the Available tables window: choose Tables, Combination table or Locations. | When Jimani does not choose a table itself or you want a different one. | See the Available tables window below. |
| Language | The language of the guest. Confirmations and reminders are sent in this language. | For a guest who speaks a different language. | Without a template in this language you get the message No email template. |
| Reservation name | The name under which the reservation is listed. For a walk-in this says Passer-by. | When the reservation must be under a different name than the guest. | - |
| Guest wants to receive the newsletter | Records that the guest gives permission for the newsletter. The email address then gets permission for this business. | When the guest says so over the phone. | Only visible with the Newsletters add-on. |
| Internal memo | A note for your team. The guest does not see it, unless you tick Add to quote. For an existing reservation you save it on the Internal memo tab. | For allergies, preferences or agreements. | For a quotation the block is called Quotation questionnaire. |
| Add to quote | Includes the memo or the answer to this question in the quotation the guest receives. | For a group quotation. | Only visible with the Quotations add-on. |
| Description | For an attachment: a short description, maximum 500 characters. | When uploading a document. | - |
| Add file | Adds a document to the reservation: PDF, Word, Excel, PowerPoint, text, CSV or image (jpg, jpeg, gif). The attachment appears on the Attachment(s) tab. | For a menu, contract or sketch. | You also fill in a Subject (maximum 75 characters). |
| Subject | The title of the attachment. | When uploading a document. | Required. |
| Email subject | The subject of the email. In the Email template window it is prepared for you; you adjust it before the email is sent. In Email History you see the subject of every email sent. | When you want to change the default text. | A tag between curly brackets is replaced by the details of the reservation when sending. |
| Email text | The text of the email, prepared with the details of the reservation. You may adjust it freely. | For a quotation or request that you want to explain personally. | - |
| bcc | One or more email addresses (separated by a semicolon) that receive a blind copy. | When someone on your team wants to read along. | - |
| Attachment | An extra PDF attachment with the email. With the delete button you remove it again. | For a menu or terms. | PDF only. |
| Enter the spare key | On the scanner screen you type the reservation's key (the code from the confirmation) and choose Save; Jimani looks up the reservation. | When the guest shows their code or the QR code cannot be scanned. | The key is in the confirmation the guest receives. |
| Message from | On the Guest messages tab every message appears with the sender's name and the time. You reply with Submit; the guest reads the message in their own reservation environment and can reply there. | When a guest asks something about their reservation. | New messages from guests also appear in the Questions from the guests overview. |
| List of devices | In the Payment method: Pin window you choose the card terminal on which the amount appears. | When paying by card. | - |
| Total amount | The amount the card terminal asks for. | To check before Pay. | - |
| Show all tables | In Available tables: also shows the tables that are occupied at this time. | When you deliberately want to choose an occupied table. | - |
| Show all combination tables | In Available tables: also shows the combination tables that are not free. | For a large group. | - |
| No tables available | Appears in the window when no single table fits this time and number of guests. | - | Try another time, a combination table or Show all tables. |
| No table combination available | Appears in the window when no combination table fits. | - | Try single tables. |
| No location available | Appears in the window under Locations when no location has room left. | - | Only for types that may fill in the total number of locations. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I change a reservation afterwards?
- Can I attach a file to a reservation?
- Where do I see the history of a reservation?
- How do I add an internal note to a reservation?

**Keywords:** create reservation, edit reservation, phone reservation, walk-in, check in now, reservation attachment, internal memo, reservation email template

**Related:** [How do I add a reservation myself, for example when a guest calls?](../faq/reservering-handmatig-toevoegen.md), [How does the reservation overview work in Jimani?](reserveringsoverzicht.md)

---

# What can you set under Packages (Combinations)?

**Answer:** A combination links two or more reservations that a guest books in one go, for example bowling and then dinner. You create them under Settings > Guests and bookings > Packages. While booking one of the linked reservations, the guest can also choose the combination.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Packages (`/Combinations/CombinationContainer`, the page is called Combinations). New: Adding combinations. The tile only appears if the Packages add-on is on (Settings > Add-ons > Book).

**Explanation:** The Adding combinations window has several steps. First you choose under Main Module the module of the first reservation (Restaurant, Activities, Salon, Ticket or Stay), the Reservation type 1 with which the combination starts and the Duration. Then you choose under Main Module 2 the module of the reservation the guest can add, and under Reservation type 2 one or more reservations (with Select all you choose them all). For each chosen type you set from and up to how many guests the combination is shown, the start time, the discount and whether the guest chooses the time. In the last steps you arrange the Gap between part 1 and 2 and the Discount on part 1, optionally add more parts and choose Show in widget and Active. You can filter the overview on Reservation type 1 and Reservation type 2. With Show only deleted items you see deleted combinations. If a part does not fit (full, or after closing time), the combination is not offered.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Main Module | The module of the first reservation in the combination. | As the first step. | Stay only appears if you have the hotel. |
| Main Module 2 | The module of the reservation the guest can add. | After the first one. | - |
| Reservation type | For Reservation type 1, the reservation with which the combination starts. For Reservation type 2 you choose the reservations a guest can add; you can choose more than one. | After choosing the module. | A combination that already exists is indicated with Already exists. |
| Duration | The default duration of the reservation. If there are several options, you can change them here. | When the duration in the combination differs from normal. | If there is only one duration, the field cannot be changed. |
| Visible from guests quantity | The minimum size of the reservation for the combination to be visible. Turn the choice on and enter a number. | When a combination only makes sense for a group. | - |
| Visible to guests quantity | The maximum size of the reservation at which the combination is still shown. | When the combination is for small groups. | - |
| Start time | The time this combination starts. For a ticket this is the start time of the part. | When the second part starts at a fixed time. | - |
| Discount | A discount on the part when it is booked in the combination, as an amount (with the currency symbol) or as a percentage (%). For part 1 the discount also appears on the receipt, online and at the till. | To make the combination attractive. | - |
| The guest chooses the time | Turn this on if the guest may choose a time themselves when booking. With No the time follows from the settings of the combination. | When the second part is flexible. | - |
| Gap between part 1 and 2 | In minutes. After, part 2 starts that much later; before, it ends that much earlier. 0 means directly after one another. | When the guest needs some time between the parts. | - |
| After | For an extra part: it starts after the part that ends last. | For example a drink after dinner. | - |
| Before | For an extra part: it ends before the part that starts first. | For example a welcome drink before the meal. | - |
| Show in widget | With Yes the combination appears in the booking widget. With No you only use the combination for manual booking. | Set to No for a combination you only offer yourself. | - |
| Active | An active combination can be used; an inactive one cannot. Default Yes. | Turn off to stop a combination temporarily. | You can delete it in the Update combinations window. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Only this part or the whole combination? | The question that appears when you cancel a reservation that belongs to a combination. | Read the list of parts and choose below what you want. |
| This reservation is part of a combination with: | Below are the other parts of the combination, with their times. | Check whether you also want to cancel them. |
| Do you want to cancel the whole combination? | Yes cancels all parts of the combination, No only the part you opened. With Previous or the cross you cancel nothing. | Choose Yes, No or stop. |

**Related questions:**

- What is a combination or package for reservations?
- How do I let guests book two activities in one go?
- Where do I create a combination of reservations?
- Can I give a discount on a combination?

**Keywords:** package, combination booking, bowling and dinner, add-on booking, gap between parts, combination discount, multiple parts

**Related:** [How do I sell extra products or packages with a reservation?](../faq/extra-producten-en-arrangementen.md)

---

# How does the Guests and reservations screen work?

**Answer:** Under Search you see all your guests and reservations across all modules on one screen. You search by name, address, email or phone, choose a period and open a customer card for each guest with everything they did with you.

**Where to find it:** Menu Search (`/searchforreservations`), or Settings > Guests and bookings > Search guests and reservations.

**Explanation:** The screen opens with the last 30 days. Choose a module (All modules, one of your own modules or Till and webshop) and the Guests or Reservations tab. On the Guests tab an email address counts as one customer; passers-by and guests with the business's email address are listed separately under the heading Passers-by (and guests with the business's email address). Click a column header to sort, page with Previous page and Next page (25 rows per page) and use Columns to choose which columns you see; your browser remembers that choice. With Export you put all rows in Excel; that requires the Export permission. At the bottom is the Guest data retention period.

![The Guests and reservations screen with the Guests and Reservations tabs, the period selection and the search bar](/kennisbank/beelden/gasten-en-reserveringen-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| From | The start date of the period. The quick choices are Today, Yesterday, Last 7 days, Last 30 days, This month and Last month. | To view a period other than the last 30 days. | Without dates the screen shows the last 30 days up to and including today. |
| Up to and including | The end date of the period, which itself is included. | Together with From. | If From is after Up to and including, Jimani swaps them. |
| Exclude passers-by | Leaves out guests who were created as a walk-in, or who have the business's email address. That leaves only guests you can contact. | When making a list to email. | Passers-by do not count as regular customers. |
| Total visits | On the Guests tab: the number of visits by the guest in the chosen period, without cancellations and no-shows. An order that belongs to a reservation does not count as a separate visit. | To find regular guests. | - |
| First arrival | The date of the first visit within the chosen period. | To recognise new guests. | - |
| Last visit | The date of the last visit within the chosen period. | To find guests who have not been in for a long time. | Choose a long period to see old visits as well. |
| Avg. group size | The average number of people per visit in the chosen period. | To see whether a guest often comes with a large group. | - |
| Revenue | What the guest spent with you in the chosen period, without cancellations and no-shows. | To see your best guests. | - |
| No-shows | How often the guest failed to keep a reservation in the chosen period. | To talk to guests with many no-shows or ask for a deposit. | See the article about no-shows. |
| Arrival date | On the Reservations tab: the day of the reservation or order. You also see Time, Module, Reservation type, Status, Quantity, Name, Email, Phone, Address, Postal code, City, Amount and Payment method. | To go through all reservations of a period. | Address and Postal code are off by default; turn them on under Columns. |
| Customer card | The button with the people icon next to a guest opens the customer card: the Customer block with contact details and the tiles Visits, Reservations, Orders, Revenue, No-shows and Last visit; the Items block with the most purchased items; and the Timeline block with all visits and orders across all modules. | When you want to see a guest's history. | See the article about the customer card. |
| Export data | On the customer card: downloads all data of this guest as a file, for an access request. Only if you see all guest data and have the Export permission. | When a guest asks what you keep about them. | See the article about exporting guest data. |
| Delete data | On the customer card: anonymises the guest's personal data. Only the owner may do this. | When a guest asks to be forgotten. | See the article about deleting guest data. |
| Guest data retention period | After this period without a visit, a guest's name, email, phone and address are deleted automatically. You choose 6, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 60, 84 or 120 months; 24 months is the default. Only the owner can change it. | When you want to keep data shorter or longer than the default. | Amounts, receipts and invoices are kept for 7 years. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Search failed. Please try again. | The list could not be retrieved. | Try again; if it keeps failing, check your connection. |
| Nothing yet. | The customer card shows no visit or order yet. | - |
| No customer card can be made for this guest. | No customer was found for this row. | Search for the guest again. |
| Walk-in: doesn't count as a regular customer. | The customer card belongs to a walk-in. | - |
| Couldn't save. Please try again. | The retention period could not be saved. | Try again; only the owner can change it. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see all my guests in one overview?
- How do I look up a customer by email address or phone?
- How do I exclude passers-by from the list?
- Can I export the guest list?

**Keywords:** search guest, search reservation, customer list, search by email, customer card, exclude walk-ins, export guests

**Related:** [What is on a guest's customer card?](../faq/klantkaart-en-geschiedenis.md), [How do I export a guest's data (access request)?](../faq/gastgegevens-exporteren.md)

---

# How do Cancellations and the Refunds overview work?

**Answer:** Under Cancellations you see all cancelled reservations and mark them as read. The Refunds overview lists the cancelled reservations that were paid online; there you refund the amount in full or in part via Mollie, or reject the refund with a reason.

**Where to find it:** Menu Cancellations (`/cancellations`) and menu Refunds overview (`/Refunds`). The Refunds overview only appears if the Products and down payments add-on is on.

**Explanation:** A cancellation comes in when the guest cancels themselves or when you cancel a reservation. You always get a notification, so you can take action if needed. Click Read when you have looked at the cancellation; the notification then disappears. The Cancellations overview has the filters All, Unread (default) and Today, the Mark all as read button and Export to Excel. Open a cancellation to view the reservation: the Reservation window shows everything as it was, with the tabs Overview, Attachment(s), History and Email History, but you can no longer change anything. The Refunds overview only contains a cancelled reservation that was really paid online (via the widget or a payment link, including a part payment or a deposit), never a payment by card terminal, pay later or a payment that was not completed. Choose Refund to return the amount to the original payment(s); the amount is already filled in and a lower amount is a partial refund. Choose Reject to not refund, with a reason. The guest gets an email in both cases. Refunding is possible up to 120 days after the payment (Mollie); the list looks back half a year.

![The Refunds overview with the filters and the Refund and Reject buttons](/kennisbank/beelden/annuleringen-en-terugbetaaloverzicht-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Status | The status of the cancelled reservation. In the Reservation window it is fixed and cannot be changed. | To check. | - |
| Guest status | Shows Cancelled: the guest did not come because the reservation was cancelled. | To check. | - |
| Reservation types | The type of the cancelled reservation. | To check. | - |
| Availability | The Availability of the reservation. | To check. | - |
| Time | The date and time of the cancelled reservation. | To check. | - |
| From | The arrival time. | To check. | - |
| To | The departure time. | To check. | - |
| Created | By whom or with what the reservation was created, for example the widget or a staff member. | To see who created the reservation. | In the Refunds overview the column is called Created. |
| Reservation name | The name under which the reservation was listed. | To check. | - |
| Reservation language | The language of the guest. Emails about the cancellation are sent in this language. | To check. | Cannot be changed. |
| Payment status | Whether the reservation has been paid. The window also shows Payment completed: Yes or No. | To see whether there is anything to refund. | You refund in the Refunds overview. |
| Description | The description of an attachment to the reservation. | When you want to look at attachments again. | - |
| Subject | The title of an attachment to the reservation. | When you want to look at attachments again. | - |
| Add file | Adds a document to the cancelled reservation. | For example to keep a credit note or email. | Same file types as for a regular reservation. |
| Internal memo | The note for your team on the reservation. Cannot be changed for a cancelled reservation. | For viewing. | - |
| Add to quote | Shows whether the memo belonged to the quotation. Cannot be changed. | For a cancelled quotation. | Only visible with the Quotations add-on. |
| Module | Filter in the Refunds overview: choose All modules or one module. The choice only appears if you have more than one module. | With several modules that take online payments. | - |
| Reservation type | Filter in the Refunds overview: choose All types or one reservation type. | For example to see only dinner. | - |
| Cancelled from | Filter: show only cancellations from this date. | To choose a period. | - |
| Cancelled up to and including | Filter: show cancellations up to and including this date. | Together with Cancelled from. | - |
| Reservation date from | Filter: show reservations with a date from this day. | When you search by the date of the reservation. | - |
| Reservation date up to and including | Filter: show reservations with a date up to and including this day. | Together with Reservation date from. | - |
| Amount min - max | Filter on the amount paid online: fill in Min, Max or both. | To handle large amounts first. | - |
| Refund | Opens a window where you return the amount to the guest. The full outstanding amount is already filled in; enter a lower amount for a partial refund. The money goes back to the original online payment(s) and is in the guest's account within a few days. | When the guest is entitled to a refund under your terms. | Requires a connected Mollie account. |
| Reject | Rejects the refund. You must fill in a reason; the guest reads it in the email. | When the guest cancelled too late under your terms. | A rejected refund can no longer be refunded afterwards. |
| Details | Shows the reservation number, the module, the email address, the online payments, what has already been refunded and, for a rejection, the reason. | Before you make a refund. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Reject refund | The title of the window where you fill in a reason. | Fill in the reason and choose Reject. |
| Reason (the guest will see this) | The field for the reason. The text goes to the guest. | Write something you want the guest to read. |
| Please enter a reason; the guest will see this. | You chose Reject without a reason. | Fill in a reason. |
| Only {0} is outstanding. | You entered an amount higher than what can still be refunded. | Enter an amount up to the stated amount. |
| Enter an amount greater than zero. | The amount was zero or empty. | Enter an amount above zero. |
| This amount no longer fits the payments of this reservation. | The amount does not fit what can still be refunded per payment. | Enter a lower amount. |
| Your Mollie account is not connected. Connect Mollie under Settings > Company Information > Mollie. | Refunding is only possible with a connected Mollie account. | Connect Mollie and try again. |
| This reservation is no longer in the refunds overview. | The reservation has since been handled or deleted, or falls outside the period. | Refresh the overview. |
| This refund has already been rejected. | You are trying to refund something that has already been rejected. | Nothing; a rejection is final. |
| This reservation has already been handled. | You are trying to reject something that has already been refunded or rejected. | Refresh the overview. |
| Rejected. The guest will receive an email with the reason. | The rejection has been recorded and the email is sent. | - |
| That did not work. Please try again in a moment. | The refund or rejection did not go through. | Try again in a few minutes. |
| There is | The Refund window starts with There is X outstanding. Enter a lower amount for a partial refund. | Check the amount. |
| Online payments: | In Details: the online payments at Mollie that belong to the reservation. | - |
| Already refunded: | In Details: what has already been returned. | - |
| Reason for rejection: | In Details: the reason you gave when rejecting. | - |
| Reservation Time: {0} Arrival Time: {1} | In the Reservation window of a cancelled reservation: the reservation time and the arrival time. | - |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see all cancelled reservations?
- How do I refund a cancelled reservation via Mollie?
- Can I refuse a refund and give a reason?
- How do I mark cancellations as read?

**Keywords:** cancellation, refund reservation, reject refund, partial refund, mollie refund, guest cancels, cancelled reservation

**Related:** [How do I refund a cancelled reservation, or reject the refund?](../faq/reservering-terugbetalen.md)

---

# What can you set under Guest information?

**Answer:** Under Guest information you decide which details you ask a guest for when booking, which are required and where they are visible: in the widget, in manual booking, for a group and for walk-ins.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Guest information (`/settings/GuestDetails`). Click a row for the details of that field.

**Explanation:** The Guest information page shows the guest fields such as first name, last name, email, phone, address, postal code, city, country and Salutation, plus your own extra fields. For each field you see four switches with Yes or No: Required, Show in manual booking, Visible for walk-ins and Show in widget. A change takes effect immediately. Open a field for more: the name, the Type, the Options of a choice field, the Description, the Reservation types for which the field applies, the Label (the tag, cannot be changed) and the switches Visible in reservation, Visible in group, Show in widget and Required. For the default fields you cannot change the Type and you cannot delete them; for last name, phone and email the switches in the detail window are fixed. You can delete a field of your own. In the widget the guest gets the choice Family., Mr. or Mrs. for Salutation. For the guest, Jimani also uses the details on the page where a guest requests their invoice: that link is on the receipt and in the till app, and only asks for the fields for which Show in widget is set to Yes. If you want to hide guest details from employees, see the article about hiding guest details per role.

![The Guest information page with the choices Required, Show in manual booking, Visible for walk-ins and Show in widget for each field](/kennisbank/beelden/gastinformatie-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Required | With Yes this field must be filled in during booking. | For details you really need, such as a phone number. | In the detail window of last name, phone and email you cannot change the switches. |
| Show in manual booking | With Yes the field appears in the Add reservation window for you or your team. | For details you ask over the phone. | - |
| Visible for walk-ins | With Yes the field also appears for a walk-in (a reservation without customer details). | When you still want to note something for walk-in guests. | - |
| Show in widget | With Yes the guest sees the field while booking via the widget. The same choice determines which fields the guest fills in on the page for their invoice. | For everything the guest may fill in themselves. | - |
| Visible in reservation | With Yes the field appears in the reservation itself, so also in the Update reservation window. | For details you want to see with every reservation. | - |
| Visible in group | With Yes the field also appears for the extra guests of a group reservation. | When you want to know, for example, an allergy of every group member. | For last name, phone and email this switch is fixed. |
| Type | The kind of field: text box, large text box, time, date, checkbox, radio button, number, phone, dropdown list, label, link, email, email confirmation or terms and conditions. For a default field it is fixed. | For a field of your own. | Choose carefully; you cannot convert a default field. |
| Options | The choices of a dropdown list or radio button, one per line. | Only for fields with choices. | - |
| Description | An explanation that appears in the field itself as light grey text. | To say what you want to know. | - |
| Reservation types | The reservation types for which the field applies. With Select all you choose them all. | When a question does not fit every type. | - |
| Label | The tag of the field, for example {email}. You can use it in email templates. It cannot be changed. | When writing an email text. | - |
| Salutation | The guest's form of address: Family., Mr. or Mrs. The choice appears in the widget and in the Add reservation window, for activities and for tickets. | For a neat salutation in emails. | You make Salutation required with the Required switch. |
| First name | On the Guest information page that the guest fills in for their invoice. | When the guest wants an invoice in their name. | Only if Show in widget is set to Yes. |
| Last name | Same. | Same. | - |
| Address | Same, for the address on the invoice. | For a business invoice. | - |
| City | Same. | Same. | - |
| Postal code | Same. | Same. | - |
| Country | Same. The country is needed for VAT. | Same. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| No guest data received | The page for the invoice received no data. | Fill in the details and try again. |
| The guest details have been saved. | Your change of guest details in a reservation has been stored. | - |
| Saving failed. Please try again. | The guest details could not be stored. | Try again. |

**Related questions:**

- Which details do I ask of a guest when booking?
- How do I make a field required when booking?
- Can I let the guest request an invoice?
- Which fields does a walk-in not have to fill in?

**Keywords:** guest details, guest information, required fields booking, walk-in fields, salutation, extra guest field, guest invoice request

**Related:** [How do I hide guest details from employees?](../faq/gastgegevens-verbergen-per-rol.md), [What is on a guest's customer card?](../faq/klantkaart-en-geschiedenis.md)

---

# What can you see and set under Guest payments?

**Answer:** Under Guest payments you see which reservations were not kept or stayed unpaid (Unpaid and no-show) and which prepaid money is still outstanding after the visit day (Outstanding prepayments). There you refund or keep it. The Reservations at the till block determines what the till does with a deposit that is too high.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Guest payments, with the tabs Unpaid and no-show (`/Settings/UnpaidAndNoShow`) and Outstanding prepayments (`/Vooruitbetalingen`). For a business without reservations the entry is under Money and figures. The permissions are called Unpaid and No Show and Outstanding prepayments.

**Explanation:** Unpaid and no-show: choose Date as of and Date to (by default the past month) and the Filter. You then see at the top Total 'No-show', Total guests, Unpaid reservations and Total loss and below that the reservations with name, email, phone, reservation type, date, time, quantity, total amount and status. Click a row for the reservation. A reservation counts as unpaid if you chose Customer did not pay when paying. The Total loss is the sum of those unpaid amounts. Outstanding prepayments: this is money a guest paid online for a reservation, whose visit day has passed and which has not yet been settled. For each row you choose Refund (the whole open amount goes back to the guest via the online payment) or Keep (the amount goes without VAT to the Prepayments (expired) account). A partial refund is not possible here; refund via Everything about payments and then keep the remainder or leave it. By default you look back 90 days and choose 30, 90 or 365 days. The dashboard reports how many prepayments are waiting to be handled.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Date as of | The start date of the period in which you search. By default one month back. | When looking for missed income. | - |
| Date to | The end date of the period. By default today. | Together with Date as of. | - |
| Filter | Choose No-show only (default) or Unpaid Only. Then you choose Search. | To find guests who did not come, or did not pay. | A no-show and an unpaid reservation are two different lists. |
| Visit date in the last | How far the Outstanding prepayments overview looks back: 30 days, 90 days or 365 days. | Choose a longer period to find old outstanding amounts. | The dashboard counts the last 90 days. |
| Refund | Refunds the whole open amount to the guest via the online payment, with the refund of the module. Jimani first asks Refund to the guest via the online payment? | When the guest did not show up but is entitled to money back under your terms. | Requires a connected Mollie account. A partial refund is not possible here. |
| Keep | Keeps the open amount. It goes without VAT to the Prepayments (expired) account. Jimani first asks Keep? The amount goes without VAT to Prepayments (expired). | When the guest did not come and you may keep the amount. | - |
| Reservations at the till | A block in the till settings (only if you have reservations): what the till does when a guest prepaid more than the receipt. | Set it once. | You find the block in the till settings and it requires the Settings permission. |
| Give back | If the credit of the reservation is larger than the receipt, the till gives back the difference. | When you want to give back the remainder of the deposit. | - |
| Do not give back | The difference lapses. A lapsed remainder goes without VAT to the Prepayments (expired) account. | When the deposit does not have to be refunded. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| That did not work. Please try again in a moment. | The refund or rejection did not go through. | Try again in a few minutes. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see reservations that were not paid or where the guest did not come?
- Where do I find prepayments that have not been settled yet?
- What does the till do with a deposit that is too high?
- How do I keep a deposit?

**Keywords:** no-show overview, unpaid reservation, customer did not pay, outstanding prepayment, refund deposit, keep deposit, expired deposit

**Related:** [What happens when a guest does not show up (no-show)?](../faq/no-show-automatisch-en-handmatig.md), [How do I ask for a deposit with a reservation?](../faq/aanbetaling-bij-reservering.md)

---

# What can you do in the Reservation information window?

**Answer:** The Reservation information window opens when you click a reservation in the reservation overview. You see the guest, the table, what is to be paid, and you set the reservation to Arrived, Left or No-show, send an email or cancel.

**Where to find it:** Menu Reservations (`/Reservations`) > click a name. It can also be opened from Requests, Quotations, Cancellations and Search.

**Explanation:** At the top is the title with the table(s) on the right. If the arrival time has passed and the reservation is still Open, you also see the buttons Set to No-show and Set to No-show in 30 minutes. Below that you see tabs: Overview, Attachment(s), History, Email History (only if emails have been sent), Guest messages (only if there are messages), Reservation list and Internal memo. On Overview you see the guest with email, phone, address, language, the number of visits, the previous time with the table and the other information, plus what was ordered and the payment status (Paid, Unpaid or Unknown). At the bottom is a fixed bar.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Status | For a request or quotation, a dropdown with Confirmed appears next to the guest's name. A request can also become a Quotation. A confirmed reservation cannot go back to Request or Quotation. | To confirm a request or quotation. | The choice only appears if the Requests or Quotations add-on is on. |
| Customer details | The button next to the guest shows their contact details and history. With Change the guest details you edit the guest's details. | When a phone number or address has changed. | Walk-ins have no customer details. |
| SMS times | The button next to the guest sends free times by SMS with a link to book directly. | When you want to offer a guest a new time. | Only with the SMS add-on and when the guest is known. |
| Arrived | The large button at the bottom right for a confirmed reservation that is still open or whose table is ready. Sets the status to Arrived. | When the guest is there. | If there are still open receipts on an earlier reservation of this guest, Jimani first asks Settle up first or Check in anyway?. Checking in earlier than Time before arrival is not possible. |
| Left | The large button at the bottom right as soon as the guest has arrived. Sets the status to Left. | When the guest has gone. | Around 23:59 Jimani automatically sets a guest who has arrived and paid in full to Left. A guest who has not paid stays on Arrived. |
| Confirm | The large button at the bottom right for a request. Confirms the reservation; the guest then receives the confirmation email. | After assessing a request. | - |
| Open reservation | Opens the Update reservation window with all details. For a reservation without a next status this is the large button at the bottom right; otherwise it is under More. | To change the date, time, table or details. | - |
| Cancel | Red button at the bottom left. Cancels the reservation. If it belongs to a combination, Jimani asks whether you cancel only this part or the whole combination. | When the guest cancels or you have to cancel. | No longer possible if the guest has already arrived or left, or the table has already been set. |
| More | A menu with the other actions: Take order, Pay, No-show, Send email, Print (PDF) or Print receipt, and Open reservation. | On a phone all actions are behind this. | - |
| Take order | Opens the till on this reservation to ring up an order. | After the guest has arrived. | Only with a connected till and on the day of the reservation. |
| Pay | Shows the outstanding amount. If there is an open receipt, the till opens with the payment window. Otherwise you choose Cash, Pay later or Other. | When the guest settles up. | The button only appears if an amount is still outstanding. |
| No-show | Sets the reservation to No-show. The name follows the status name of your business. | When the guest did not come. | Only for a confirmed reservation that has not yet arrived. |
| Send email | Opens the Send email window to send an email from your templates, with an adjusted text if you wish. | To send a confirmation again. | Only if the guest has an email address. |
| Print (PDF) | Without a connected receipt printer: opens the PDF of the reservation to print. With a receipt printer the button is called Print receipt and the reservation receipt goes to the printer. | For a paper copy. | - |

**Related questions:**

- How do I set a guest to arrived or left?
- How do I cancel a reservation?
- Can I take an order from a reservation?
- How do I print a receipt for a reservation?

**Keywords:** reservation information, guest arrived, guest left, cancel reservation, take order reservation, pay reservation, print receipt reservation

**Related:** [How does the reservation overview work in Jimani?](reserveringsoverzicht.md), [What happens when a guest does not show up (no-show)?](../faq/no-show-automatisch-en-handmatig.md)

---

# How do I block arrival or departure on certain days?

**Answer:** There are two ways. For single days or a period, create a restriction under Hotel management > Time limit with the dates and choose whether check-in, check-out or both are blocked. For fixed weekdays on one rate plan, use No arrival on and No departure on in the plan.

**Explanation:**

- **Time limit, step 1.** Go to Hotel management > Time limit and click the plus. Give a Name (only for yourself, for example Public holidays or Maintenance) and choose Yes or No for Check-in is not possible on this day and Check-out is not possible on this day.
- **Step 2.** Choose which types or rooms the restriction applies to. Set Blocked by the room type to Yes to choose types, or to No to choose individual rooms or cottages.
- **Step 3.** Choose the dates: single days, weeks or months by clicking them. Click Save.
- **Only arrival or only departure.** If only one of the two is set to Yes, a guest cannot arrive (or depart) on that day in the widget. At the front desk, in Create reservation, it is allowed.
- **Both Yes.** Then the room is closed on those nights: nobody can book it, not even at the front desk. Handy for maintenance. If you have linked a room via iCal, Jimani also creates such a block by itself for nights that are occupied on another site.
- **Per weekday in a plan.** Open the rate plan and choose the weekdays under No arrival on or No departure on (Mon to Sun). That only applies to that plan and only online.
- **Switching off temporarily.** Set Active to No to turn off a restriction without deleting it.

**Example:** You close room 7 from 10 to 14 March for painting work: Time limit Maintenance, Check-in and check-out both Yes, individual rooms, room 7, the dates from 10 to 14 March.

**Related questions:**

- How do I make sure guests cannot arrive on Saturday?
- How do I block check-in on public holidays?
- Can I disallow check-out on certain days?
- How do I set no arrival on certain weekdays for one rate?

**Keywords:** block room, no arrival on Sunday, close room maintenance, blocked days hotel, cta ctd, public holidays

**Related:** [What can you set up under Time limitation in Hotel management?](../naslag/hotel-tijdsbeperking.md), [What is a rate plan and how do I create a flexible or non-refundable rate?](tariefplannen.md)

---

# What does cancelling a hotel reservation cost?

**Answer:** That depends on the rate plan the guest booked with. With a flexible plan, cancelling is free up to the number of days before arrival that you set; after that the guest pays the percentage you set under Cancellation fee after that. With a non-refundable plan there is no free period.

**Explanation:**

- **Setting it up.** Open Hotel management > Rate plans and click a plan. Under Cancel you find Refundable, Free cancellation until (days before arrival) and Cancellation fee after that.
- **Free period.** Up to that many days before arrival, cancelling is free. 0 means: free up to and including the day of arrival itself. The number of days ranges from 0 to 365.
- **After that.** The guest pays the percentage you entered, on the amount of the stay: the nights, the breakfast and the surcharges. The tourist tax does not count, because it is only due for a stay. 100 is the whole amount.
- **Non-refundable.** Set Refundable to No: there is then no free period and cancelling always costs the percentage (by default the whole amount).
- **Recorded when booking.** The rule of the plan is stored on the reservation when booking. If you change the plan later, existing reservations do not change.
- **Cancelling itself.** Open the reservation in Hotel and click Cancel. Jimani shows the cost at that moment (Cancellation fee according to the rate plan) or Cancelling is free now, and asks for the Reason for cancellation. Confirm with Yes, cancel. Cancelling is only possible as long as the guest has not checked in.
- **Money.** Cancelling sets the reservation to Cancelled and stores the reason and who cancelled it. Jimani shows the cancellation fee, but does not settle it itself and does not refund anything either. What the guest already paid and what they owe in fees, you arrange yourself.
- **No-show.** After the day of arrival the percentage always applies, even if the plan had a free period.

**Example:** Flexible plan with 2 days free and 100% after that, a stay of 3 nights at €100. If the guest cancels 3 days before arrival, it costs nothing. If they cancel 1 day before arrival, it costs €300.

**Related questions:**

- What does a guest pay when they cancel their room booking?
- How do I set free cancellation up to a number of days before arrival?
- How does a non-refundable rate work when cancelling?
- What percentage can I charge if someone cancels too late?

**Keywords:** cancel hotel reservation, hotel cancellation fee, free cancellation, non-refundable, hotel no-show

**Related:** [What is a rate plan and how do I create a flexible or non-refundable rate?](tariefplannen.md), [How do hotel reservations, the room planner and the Create reservation side panel work?](../naslag/hotel-reserveringen.md)

---

# Can I connect a channel manager such as Channex?

**Answer:** Not yet. A connection with Channex, a channel manager that keeps prices and availability in sync automatically, is not available in Jimani. What you can do is connect Booking.com, Airbnb and other sites with iCal calendars. If you want more, ask us about the Channex connection.

**Explanation:**

- **What exists now.** iCal calendars per room or cottage only exchange occupied and free and are updated every 15 minutes. See [How do I connect Booking.com or Airbnb to my rooms?](ical-booking-airbnb.md).
- **What iCal cannot do.** Prices, minimum stay and availability are not passed on, and if someone books the same night on another site within those 15 minutes, that can cause a double booking. Jimani does report it, but cannot prevent it.
- **Channex.** In the iCal calendars window there is the tip: Do you rent out through more sites and want to keep prices and availability in sync right away without double bookings? Ask us about the Channex (channel manager) connection. A tile or setting for Channex does not exist yet.
- **Until then.** Keep your number of sites small, leave the iCal calendars on and check the Double booking message on your rooms.
- **Questions.** If you want to know when the Channex connection will come, contact Jimani.

**Example:** You rent out through your own widget, Booking.com and Airbnb. With iCal your nights are closed everywhere after at most 15 minutes. You keep setting prices yourself on each site.

**Related questions:**

- Can I connect a channel manager to Jimani?
- Is there a connection with Channex?
- How do I keep prices and availability in sync with Booking.com?
- Which connections with booking sites are there now?

**Keywords:** channex, channel manager, booking.com integration, airbnb integration, channel management, sync prices

**Related:** [How do I connect Booking.com or Airbnb to my rooms?](ical-booking-airbnb.md), [How do I turn on the hotel module and what do I get?](hotelmodule-aanzetten.md)

---

# How do I charge for an extra adult or child?

**Answer:** On the type you set for how many people the price per night applies (Price applies to). For every person above that you enter an amount per night in the Seasons & prices table under Extra adult or Extra child. Jimani adds that automatically when booking.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Hotel management > Types, click the type and under Capacity set the number at Price applies to, for example 2. Also set Adults, Children and Maximum number of guests; nobody can book more people than the maximum.
- **Step 2.** Go to Hotel management > Rate plans. On the right in the Seasons & prices table, fill in under Extra adult and Extra child what an extra person costs per night.
- **How Jimani calculates.** Extra adults are the adults above the number at Price applies to. A child first gets a free place if there is still room under that number; only above that does the child pay the Extra child amount.
- **One person.** No discount for a solo traveller is set in the Hotel management screen; the price per night stays the same.
- **What the guest sees.** When choosing Adults and Children in the widget, the price adjusts.
- **Breakfast and tourist tax.** Those count per person. A breakfast in a plan costs per person per night, and tourist tax depends on adults and children.

**Example:** The price applies to 2 people: €100 per night. Extra adult is €25, Extra child €10. Two adults and a child in a room for 2 pay €110 per night. One adult with one child pays €100: the child fits within the two.

**Related questions:**

- How do I charge a surcharge for an extra guest in the room?
- How do I set a separate price for children?
- For how many people does the price per night apply?
- Is the surcharge for extra people added automatically?

**Keywords:** extra person, extra child, extra guest surcharge, price per person hotel, room occupancy, children room

**Related:** [How do I set the price per night and the seasonal prices?](prijs-per-nacht-en-seizoenen.md), [How do the Types tab and the Type window work in Hotel management?](../naslag/hotel-types.md)

---

# How do I sell extras such as parking or a breakfast basket with a stay?

**Answer:** Under Hotel management > Products create an Extra product with name, price and VAT. In the hotel widget the guest chooses at the Extras step how many they want; the amount is added to the stay. It really works: the widget fetches your own products, the price comes from the server.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Hotel management > Products, click the plus and choose Extra product.
- **Step 2.** Fill in Name and Description (per language if you have more languages) and add an image if needed. The guest reads the description when booking.
- **Step 3.** Fill in the Price and the VAT. This is the price the guest pays in the widget.
- **Step 4.** Under Maximum quantity to sell fill in how many a guest can choose at most; 0 means no limit (in the widget at most 99). Set Cannot exceed the number of guests to Yes if it is per person, such as a breakfast basket. Click Save.
- **What the guest sees.** After choosing type and rate, the widget shows Complete your stay with your Extra products, with plus and minus and the price. What they choose is added to the total and the bill.
- **At the front desk.** The Extra products are not in the Create reservation side panel; they are for online booking.
- **Switching off.** Set Active to No to stop offering a product, or delete it.

**Example:** Parking for €8 with Maximum quantity to sell set to 1. A guest chooses Parking in the widget and pays €8 extra.

**Related questions:**

- How do I sell parking with a stay?
- Can a guest add a breakfast basket in the hotel widget?
- Where do I create extras for guests?
- How does a guest choose extras when booking?

**Keywords:** extra products hotel, sell parking, room upsell, breakfast basket, upsell hotel booking, extra with booking

**Related:** [What can you set up under Products: Breakfast, Early check-in, Late check-out and Extra product?](../naslag/hotel-producten.md), [How does a guest book a room or cottage online?](online-boeken-door-gast.md)

---

# How do I turn on the hotel module and what do I get?

**Answer:** Under Settings > Add-ons turn on the Hotel module card. After that Hotel, Hotel management and Cleaning appear in your menu and you get the hotel tiles under Settings. The Hotel module has no monthly fee.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Add-ons, find the Hotel module card and turn it on. Online check-in and iCal are separate cards under the same add-ons; turn them on if you want to use them.
- **Step 2.** Look at the menu: it now has Hotel (the reservations and the room planner), Hotel management (types, rooms, prices) and Cleaning.
- **Step 3.** In Hotel management start with a category, then a type, then the rooms and then the prices. The steps are in [How do I create types and rooms or cottages?](types-en-kamers-aanmaken.md).
- **Step 4.** Look under Settings: the tiles Advanced, Online check-in, Codes & keys and iCal calendars under Guests and bookings, Online payment and Guest register & tourist tax under Money and figures, and Cleaning under Your business.
- **What you get.** A room planner with drag and drop, a side panel to book yourself, rate plans with seasonal prices, a hotel widget in which guests book and pay themselves, online check-in with guest register, tourist tax, cleaning, access codes and iCal.
- **Cost.** The Hotel module is free (see [What does Jimani cost?](../../prijzen/faq/wat-kost-jimani.md)).
- **Who it is for.** A hotel, B&B or holiday park. Under Settings > Guests and bookings > Advanced you choose whether you are a Hotel or a Holiday park; a park sees Cottage instead of Room everywhere.

**Example:** A B&B with four rooms turns on the Hotel module, creates the category Rooms, two types (Double room and Family room), adds rooms 1 to 4 and fills in the prices. After that the team can make reservations in Hotel.

**Related questions:**

- How do I turn on the hotel module?
- What does the hotel module cost?
- What do I get when I turn on the hotel module?
- Where do I find Hotel management and Cleaning in the menu?

**Keywords:** turn on hotel module, hotel software, b&b booking system, holiday park software, rent rooms online, hotel module price

**Related:** [How does Hotel management work in Jimani?](../naslag/hotel-beheer.md), [How does a guest book a room or cottage online?](online-boeken-door-gast.md)

---

# How do I connect Booking.com or Airbnb to my rooms?

**Answer:** With iCal calendars. Turn on the iCal add-on under Settings > Add-ons and choose Settings on that card to open iCal calendars (or search "iCal" in Search for a setting…). For each room or cottage you paste the Export-adres at Booking.com or Airbnb (import calendar) and paste their calendar address under Add import address. Occupied nights then go both ways, every 15 minutes.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Under Settings > Add-ons turn on the iCal card. Without that add-on the window says The iCal integration is off.
- **Step 2. Your calendar to the other site.** Open iCal calendars. Each room or cottage has its own Export-adres. Click Copy and paste the address at Booking.com or Airbnb when importing a calendar. Do not share this address: anyone who has it can see when you are occupied. It only contains occupied or free, no names.
- **Step 3. Their calendar to Jimani.** At Booking.com or Airbnb, get the export address of the calendar of that room. Paste it at the room under Add import address and click the plus. Jimani adds the source (Booking.com, Airbnb, VRBO or the name of the site).
- **What happens next.** Jimani fetches each address every 15 minutes. Nights that are occupied there are closed at your end: nobody can book that room on those nights. Next to the address you see Picked up with the time and the number of blocked periods. With Fetch now you fetch it right away.
- **Occupied nights to the outside.** Your Jimani reservations and closed nights appear in the export address, from 30 days back to two years ahead.
- **Double booking.** iCal only exchanges occupied and free and is slow. If someone books the same night on another site within those 15 minutes, you have a double booking. Jimani reports it at the address as Double booking on the date, but cannot prevent it. Jimani keeps the nights closed; you resolve it.
- **Does fetching fail?** Then it says Fetch failed with the reason and the old blocks stay in place. An address must start with https:// (or http://) and must not point to your own network.
- **Keeping prices or availability in sync.** iCal cannot do that. See [Can I connect a channel manager such as Channex?](channex.md).

**Example:** You connect room 3 with Booking.com. A guest books 10 to 12 October via Booking.com. Within 15 minutes room 3 is closed in Jimani for those nights and nobody can book it any more.

**Related questions:**

- How do I synchronise my rooms with Booking.com or Airbnb?
- How do I prevent double bookings between different sites?
- What is an iCal connection and how do I set it up?
- Where do I paste the calendar link from Booking.com?

**Keywords:** ical hotel, connect booking.com, connect airbnb, synchronise calendar, prevent double booking, connect channels

**Related:** [What can you set under Codes & keys and iCal calendars?](../naslag/hotel-codes-en-ical.md), [Can I connect a channel manager such as Channex?](channex.md)

---

# How do I check a guest in and out?

**Answer:** Go to Hotel > List view. Under Arrivals today click Check in, under In house and Departures today click Check out. If an amount is still open at check-out, the till opens with the check-out bill; after settling up the guest is on Checked out.

**Explanation:**

- **Checking in.** In the List view, next to a guest under Arrivals today click Check in, or open the reservation and click Check in at the bottom right. The status becomes Checked in. That works for Confirmed, Option and No-show.
- **Room not ready.** If the room is not ready yet (Dirty, In progress, or Clean while you want to inspect first), Jimani asks Check in anyway? with for example Room 12 is not ready yet (Dirty). Choose Yes, check in to continue.
- **Checking out with nothing open.** Click Check out. If everything was paid in advance, the guest is immediately on Checked out.
- **Checking out with an amount open.** The till opens with the guest's check-out bill: the nights, extras, everything charged to the room, the tourist tax, minus what has already been paid. Settle up with the usual payment buttons. After that the guest is on Checked out.
- **After check-out.** The room gets the status Dirty and appears on the Cleaning page.
- **Checked in online.** A guest who checked in and paid online is checked in automatically on the day of arrival if the room is ready. If the room is not ready yet, the guest shows Waiting for cleaning and check-in happens automatically as soon as the room is ready.
- **Did not show.** If the day of arrival has passed, set No-show to Yes in the reservation. For a guest who is still undecided, use Option.
- **Cancelling.** You cannot cancel a guest who has already checked in.

**Example:** A guest has paid the deposit and leaves today. You click Check out: the till opens with the remaining amount. After settling up he is on Checked out and his room goes to Dirty.

**Related questions:**

- How do I check a guest in on arrival?
- How do I check a guest out and settle the bill?
- Where do I see who arrives or leaves today?
- What happens if an amount is still outstanding at check-out?

**Keywords:** check in guest, check out guest, check-out bill, room dirty after departure, settle up hotel, no-show

**Related:** [How do hotel reservations, the room planner and the Create reservation side panel work?](../naslag/hotel-reserveringen.md), [How does cleaning of rooms and cottages work?](schoonmaak.md)

---

# Where do I set the check-in and check-out times?

**Answer:** Under Hotel management > Opening hours you can set a check-in time, check-out time, early check-in time and late check-out time per day. Please note: a new reservation currently gets the fixed times 15:00 check-in and 10:00 check-out, also in the hotel widget.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Hotel management > Opening hours. At the top choose the year (this year and the next two) and the month.
- **Step 2.** For each day set the Check-out time, Late check-out time, Early check-in time and Check-in time with the time picker. With Check-out possible and Check-in possible you decide with Yes or No whether that is possible on that day.
- **Step 3.** You do not need to save anything: Changes are saved automatically. The late check-out time cannot be before the check-out time and the early check-in time cannot be after the check-in time.
- **Many days at once.** Download the days with the Excel icon, adjust the times and read the file back in with Select Excel file. The file must contain all days of this year and the two years after.
- **What a reservation uses now.** A reservation from the hotel widget or from Create reservation gets the fixed times 15:00 and 10:00.
- **Times for guests.** What you tell your guests about check-in and check-out times, you put in the Description of the type.

**Example:** You set Early check-in time to 12:00 on Saturday. The Opening hours tab then shows 12:00 for that day.

**Related questions:**

- Where do I set the check-in time and check-out time?
- Can I set early check-in or late check-out per day?
- Why does a new reservation always say 15:00 check-in?
- Can I adjust the check-out time?

**Keywords:** check-in time, check-out time, opening hours hotel, early check-in time, late check-out time, set check-in time

**Related:** [How do the Opening hours of the hotel work?](../naslag/hotel-openingstijden.md), [How do I offer breakfast, early check-in or late check-out?](ontbijt-en-extras.md)

---

# Can I use cottage instead of room for my holiday park?

**Answer:** Yes. Go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Advanced and choose Holiday park under Type of business. Jimani then calls your units Cottage in Hotel management, the room planner, the widget and the till. You can still change the word separately under Word for a unit.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Settings > Guests and bookings > Advanced.
- **Step 2.** Under Type of business choose Hotel or Holiday park. A hotel rents out rooms, a holiday park cottages, lodges or chalets.
- **Step 3.** If needed set Word for a unit to Room or Cottage. If you choose Holiday park, the word switches to Cottage automatically.
- **What changes.** The Rooms tab is called Cottages, the Add room button becomes Add cottage, and in the widget the guest reads Book your cottage instead of Book your room.
- **Saving.** Every choice is saved immediately. Close the window with Done.

**Example:** A holiday park with 30 chalets chooses Holiday park. The tab is then called Cottages and the guest books a cottage.

**Related questions:**

- Can I change the word room to cottage for my holiday park?
- How do I set that I am a holiday park?
- Where do I change the word for a unit?
- Is cottage shown everywhere, also in the widget and till?

**Keywords:** cottage instead of room, set up holiday park, rent out chalets, lodge, change word room, holiday cottage software

**Related:** [What can you set under Advanced, Online payment, Online check-in and Cleaning of the hotel?](../naslag/hotel-instellingen.md), [How do I create types and rooms or cottages?](types-en-kamers-aanmaken.md)

---

# How do I move or extend a reservation in the room planner?

**Answer:** Go to Hotel > Overview and drag the reservation's bar to another room to move it, or drag the edge of the bar to extend or shorten it. It is saved immediately. If it does not fit, you get a message and the bar jumps back.

**Explanation:**

- **Moving.** Drag the bar to another room. That is also allowed to a room of a different type; the price is then recalculated with the rate plan of the reservation.
- **Extending or shortening.** Drag the left or right edge of the bar. The price is recalculated for the new nights.
- **Check.** Jimani checks at the moment you let go whether the room is free on those nights. Occupied or closed is not possible; minimum stay, no arrival and no departure do not apply at the front desk.
- **Already checked in.** You can extend, shorten and move a guest who has already checked in, but the arrival date can no longer shift. You can no longer move a cancelled or checked-out reservation.
- **View.** Choose 7, 14 or 30 days, go back or forward a day with the minus and plus, and use Full screen for more room. A bar shows the guest's name in the colour of their status.
- **Reservation without a room.** If there is a reservation without a room (old, or booked via a type), it is at the top of the overview; click it for the window.

**Example:** A guest wants to stay one night longer. You drag the right edge of their bar one day to the right. If the room is free that night, the new departure date is there immediately and the price is adjusted.

**Related questions:**

- How do I move a guest to another room?
- How do I extend a stay in the room planner?
- Can I shorten a reservation by dragging?
- What happens if the new room is not free?

**Keywords:** move reservation, swap room, extend stay, room planner drag, move guest, shorten stay

**Related:** [How do hotel reservations, the room planner and the Create reservation side panel work?](../naslag/hotel-reserveringen.md), [How do I check a guest in and out?](in-en-uitchecken-gast.md)

---

# How do I add many rooms or cottages in one go?

**Answer:** Go to Hotel management > Rooms (or Cottages) and click the double plus, Add multiple. Choose the type, fill in the first number at From number and the last at Up to and including number, and click Add. You can create at most 200 numbers at a time.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** First create the type. The double plus only appears on the tab once there is a type.
- **Step 2.** Click the double plus and choose the Type. All new rooms get that type.
- **Step 3.** Fill in From number and Up to and including number, for example 101 and 120, or A1 and A12. The prefix and suffix (the letters) must be the same on both. Leading zeros are kept: H-01 up to and including H-10 gives H-01, H-02 and so on.
- **Step 4.** Optionally fill in Area and Floor; that applies to all new rooms.
- **Step 5.** Below the form it shows which numbers will be added. Click Add.
- **Existing numbers.** A number that already exists is skipped, the rest is created. If all numbers are already in use, you get This number already exists.
- **Many rooms with Excel.** The tab also has the buttons Import and Export to read rooms in from an Excel file.

**Example:** A hotel with 20 identical rooms chooses the type Double room, fills in 101 and 120 and clicks Add: all 20 are there in one go.

**Related questions:**

- How do I add 50 rooms at once?
- Can I create a series of room numbers in one go?
- How many rooms can I add at most in one go?
- How do I create many cottages at once?

**Keywords:** add multiple rooms, rooms in bulk, series of room numbers, create 20 rooms, add cottages at once

**Related:** [How do the Rooms and Cottages tabs and the Add multiple window work?](../naslag/hotel-eenheden.md), [How do I create types and rooms or cottages?](types-en-kamers-aanmaken.md)

---

# How do I get the guest register and the tourist tax for the municipality?

**Answer:** Go to Settings > Money and figures > Guest register & tourist tax and click the Guest register or Tourist tax button. Choose the period and download the Excel file. You can also download them with the Excel icon at the top of Hotel.

**Explanation:**

- **Guest register.** Per stay in the period the main guest and the accompanying guests, with nationality, date of birth and ID from online check-in. Cancelled reservations and guests who did not come (no-show) do not count.
- **Tourist tax.** The tourist tax per month over the nights in the period. The amount of a reservation is divided over the months in proportion to the nights, so that the months together are exactly the amount of the reservation.
- **How to download them.** Open the Guest register & tourist tax tile and at the bottom click Guest register or Tourist tax. The export window opens with the period; choose the dates and download. Or click the Excel icon in Hotel and choose the kind of export: reservations, guest register or tourist tax.
- **A good guest register.** Let your guests check in online: then they fill in the guest register themselves. At the front desk you fill it in via Stay > Guest register > Edit. See [How do I let guests check in online?](online-inchecken.md).
- **Exporting reservations.** The same button in Hotel also exports the reservations themselves, with a filter on the status.

**Example:** On the first of the month you fetch last month's guest register for the municipality and the tourist tax per month for your return.

**Related questions:**

- Where do I download the guest register for the municipality?
- How do I get an overview of the tourist tax paid?
- How do I export the guest register to Excel?
- Where do I find the tourist tax per period?

**Keywords:** guest register, guest register municipality, tourist tax return, excel guests, foreigner registration, hotel export

**Related:** [How do I set up tourist tax for my hotel or holiday park?](toeristenbelasting.md), [What is in the Stay tab and what does the guest fill in under Online check-in?](../naslag/hotel-verblijf-en-online-inchecken.md)

---

# Can a guest pay only on arrival instead of online?

**Answer:** Yes. Go to Settings > Money and figures > Online payment and choose None: the booking is then confirmed immediately and the guest settles up at the till. You can also choose Full (the whole amount online) or Deposit (a percentage now, the rest at departure).

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Settings > Money and figures > Online payment.
- **Step 2.** Choose Full, Deposit or None. The choice is saved immediately.
- **Step 3.** If you choose Deposit, fill in at Deposit % the part the guest pays when booking (1 to 100). If you leave it empty, Jimani uses 30%.
- **How it works.** Online, the guest pays via Mollie in the hotel widget. If they do not pay within 15 minutes, the booking lapses and the room becomes free again. With Deposit they pay the rest on arrival or departure at the till.
- **Without Mollie.** If no Mollie is connected, the widget cannot take online payment. The booking is then confirmed immediately and the guest pays on arrival, even if you chose Full.
- **At the front desk.** In Create reservation, Payment only records what the guest paid: Pay now, Deposit or On arrival. You settle up at the till.
- **Type temporarily not online.** Do you want to temporarily not offer one type online? Set Show in widget to No on the type. At the front desk you can still book the type.

**Example:** You choose Deposit with 30%. A stay of €400 gives an online payment of €120; you settle the remaining €280 at departure.

**Related questions:**

- Can a guest pay on arrival instead of online?
- How do I let guests pay only a deposit?
- Can I set that the full amount is paid online?
- Is the booking confirmed immediately if the guest does not pay online?

**Keywords:** pay on arrival hotel, hotel deposit, prepay room online, mollie hotel, hide room type temporarily

**Related:** [What can you set under Advanced, Online payment, Online check-in and Cleaning of the hotel?](../naslag/hotel-instellingen.md), [How does a guest book a room or cottage online?](online-boeken-door-gast.md)

---

# How does a guest book a room or cottage online?

**Answer:** In the hotel widget on your website the guest goes through five to seven steps: Dates, Room (or Cottage), Rate, Spot, Extras, Details and Pay or Confirm. Spot and Extras only appear if you have set them up. All prices and availability come live from Jimani; the guest cannot book anything that is not free.

**Explanation:**

- **Dates.** Under When are you coming? the guest chooses an arrival day and a departure day in the calendar and under How many people? the number of Adults and Children. If they choose a day that is not possible, for example because of a Time limit or No arrival on, the widget says You cannot arrive on this day or You cannot depart on this day.
- **Room or Cottage.** They see your types with photos, facilities, Max. people and how many are still free (for example 1 room left). Only types with Show in widget set to Yes appear.
- **Rate.** For each type they see your rate plans that are Bookable online, with the price, the cancellation rule and whether breakfast is included. See [What is a rate plan?](tariefplannen.md).
- **Spot.** Only if you turned on the floor plan: they choose a room themselves, for the surcharge, or let Jimani choose. See [Can a guest choose their own room or cottage on a floor plan?](plattegrond-zelf-kiezen.md).
- **Extras.** Complete your stay with your Extra products, only if you have any. See [How do I sell extras such as parking?](extra-producten.md).
- **Details.** First name, Last name, Email address, Phone number and a Comment or request (optional). They agree to the terms and the cancellation policy of this rate.
- **Pay or Confirm.** What the guest pays you set under Settings > Money and figures > Online payment: the whole amount, a deposit or nothing. See [Can a guest pay only on arrival?](online-betalen.md). If they pay, Jimani holds the room for 15 minutes until the payment is in; after that the booking lapses.
- **Afterwards.** The widget shows Your booking is confirmed with the Booking number, and a confirmation is emailed to the guest. If Online check-in is on, the email contains the link to check in online. The tourist tax is in the total or separate, as you have set it.
- **Double booking is not possible.** The final check happens at the moment of booking. If the room has just been taken, the widget says so and the guest chooses again. If the price has just changed, it shows the new total.

**Example:** A guest chooses Friday to Sunday for 2 adults, chooses the Double room with the Flexible plan, adds Parking, fills in their details and pays the 30% deposit. They receive a confirmation.

**Related questions:**

- How does a guest book a room via my website?
- Which steps does a guest go through in the hotel widget?
- Can a guest book a room that is not free?
- Do prices and availability come live from Jimani?

**Keywords:** book room online, hotel widget, booking widget hotel, guest books room, reserve hotel website, book holiday cottage online

**Related:** [How do I turn on the hotel module and what do I get?](hotelmodule-aanzetten.md), [How do I let guests check in online?](online-inchecken.md)

---

# How do I let guests check in online?

**Answer:** Under Settings > Add-ons turn on the Online check-in card. After that every guest receives in their confirmation email a link to the Online check-in page, where they fill in the guest register, take a photo of their ID and, if needed, pay the outstanding amount. You can also email the link yourself.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on the Online check-in add-on. Then open Settings > Guests and bookings > Online check-in.
- **Step 2.** Choose whether you Ask for a photo of ID, whether the guest has to pay the outstanding amount (Collect outstanding balance), and after how many days the photos are deleted under Keep ID photos (days after departure, default 30). Everything is saved immediately.
- **What the guest does.** They open the link, and under Details for everyone fill in First name, Last name, Nationality and Date of birth, for the main guest and adults also the ID and Document number, and for the main guest City and Country. Then come ID (the photo) and Pay or Finish. The page saves every step, so they can continue later.
- **Guest register.** The guest register (name, nationality, date of birth, ID) is always required for online check-in. You can export it for the municipality.
- **Paying.** If the guest pays online, that goes via Mollie. Without Mollie they pay on arrival.
- **Sending the link yourself.** Open the reservation in Hotel, go to the Stay tab and copy the Online check-in link, or click Email link if there is an email address.
- **Seeing whether the guest is done.** On the Stay tab it says Checked in online on with the date, or Not checked in online yet. You see the guest register, the ID photos and can set ID checked to Yes.
- **Afterwards.** On the day of arrival a guest who checked in online and paid everything is checked in automatically as soon as the room is ready. Their access code can be emailed at the same moment, see [How do I send guests an access code for the room?](toegangscodes.md).
- **When it is no longer possible.** If the stay has been cancelled or has ended, the guest sees This booking has been cancelled or This stay has ended.
- **ID photos.** Only you see them. They are deleted automatically after the retention period.

**Example:** A guest receives the link with their confirmation, fills in the register 3 days before arrival and takes a photo of their passport. On arrival they only have to pick up the key.

**Related questions:**

- Can guests check in online beforehand?
- How do I let guests upload their ID before arrival?
- How does the guest get the link for online check-in?
- Can a guest also pay the outstanding amount during online check-in?

**Keywords:** online check-in hotel, guest register online, id photo guest, check-in link, digital check-in, legal guest registration

**Related:** [What is in the Stay tab and what does the guest fill in under Online check-in?](../naslag/hotel-verblijf-en-online-inchecken.md), [How do I get the guest register and the tourist tax for the municipality?](nachtregister-gemeente.md)

---

# How do I offer breakfast, early check-in or late check-out?

**Answer:** You create breakfast under Hotel management > Products and include it in a rate plan, such as With breakfast; the price applies per person per night. You create Early check-in and Late check-out in the same place with a price. In the current booking flow (widget and Create reservation) a guest can only choose breakfast via a rate plan and Extra products; if you want to sell late check-out online, create an Extra product with that name.

**Explanation:**

- **Creating breakfast.** Go to Hotel management > Products, click the plus and choose Breakfast. Fill in Name, Description, Standard price, Online booking price and VAT and click Save. The price is per person per night.
- **Breakfast in a plan.** Go to Hotel management > Rate plans, open the plan (for example With breakfast) and choose your breakfast under Breakfast. The plan then adds breakfast times people times nights to the stay. The guest sees Breakfast included. The default plan With breakfast is off if there was no breakfast when it was created: then set it to Active.
- **Online price.** If the guest books online themselves (widget or website) and you fill in more than 0 at Online booking price, that price applies. Empty or 0: the standard price applies online too. In the dashboard and the till the standard price always applies.
- **Early check-in and Late check-out.** Under Products > plus choose Early check-in or Late check-out and fill in Name, Description, Standard price, Online booking price and VAT. The times at which that is possible you set under Opening hours (Early check-in time and Late check-out time).
- **Selling online.** In the hotel widget the guest chooses from your Extra products at the Extras step. So for a paid late check-out, create an Extra product with a clear Name and Description, see [How do I sell extras such as parking with a stay?](extra-producten.md).
- **Switching off or removing.** Set Active to No so a product can no longer be chosen, or delete it.

**Example:** You create Breakfast at €12 per person per night. A guest books the With breakfast plan for 2 people and 3 nights: the breakfast adds €72.

**Related questions:**

- How do I offer breakfast with a stay?
- How do I charge for early check-in or late check-out?
- Can a guest choose breakfast via a rate?
- Does the breakfast price apply per person per night?

**Keywords:** breakfast hotel, breakfast per person, late check-out, early check-in, late checkout, extra with room

**Related:** [What can you set up under Products: Breakfast, Early check-in, Late check-out and Extra product?](../naslag/hotel-producten.md), [What is a rate plan and how do I create a flexible or non-refundable rate?](tariefplannen.md)

---

# Can a guest choose their own room or cottage on a floor plan?

**Answer:** Yes. Under Hotel management > Floor plan upload an image of your hotel or park, drag your rooms or cottages to their place and set Guest chooses their own spot to Yes. In the widget the guest then gets the Spot step and chooses themselves; if they do not want to, Jimani picks a free unit for them. A self-chosen spot can cost a surcharge.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Hotel management > Floor plan. Under Background choose an image (jpg, png or webp up to 5 MB).
- **Step 2.** Drag the numbers from the Rooms (or Cottages) list to their place on the image. The cross removes a number again. Dragging works with mouse and finger.
- **Step 3.** Under Choose a spot yourself set Guest chooses their own spot to Yes. Fill in the amount at Surcharge and choose Per stay or Per night at Surcharge applies.
- **What the guest sees.** After Rate the widget shows Choose your own room (or Choose your own cottage) with the floor plan. Units that are free appear as a choice; occupied ones cannot be chosen. If there is a surcharge, it says: Choosing yourself costs {bedrag} extra. If you do not want to choose, we will choose for you. They can also choose Skip, choose for me.
- **Which units.** The guest can only choose units of the chosen type that you have placed on the floor plan. The step only appears once at least one number is on the floor plan.
- **Surcharge.** In the total the surcharge appears as a separate line: Surcharge for own room choice (or Surcharge for own cottage choice).

**Example:** A holiday park puts 20 cottages on the map and charges €10 per stay for a choice of their own. Whoever wants to be by the water chooses cottage 7 and pays €10 extra.

**Related questions:**

- Can a guest choose their own cottage on a map of the park?
- How do I upload a floor plan of my hotel?
- Can I charge a surcharge for a self-chosen spot?
- What happens if the guest does not want to choose a spot?

**Keywords:** choose room yourself, hotel floor plan, choose cottage on map, choose spot holiday park, surcharge own choice

**Related:** [What can you set up under Floor plan in Hotel management?](../naslag/hotel-plattegrond.md), [How does a guest book a room or cottage online?](online-boeken-door-gast.md)

---

# How do I set the price per night and the seasonal prices?

**Answer:** Go to Hotel management > Rate plans and in the Seasons & prices table fill in the Base price for each type. For a high season create a Season with a period and fill in the seasonal price for each type, and optionally a higher price for Friday and Saturday (Fri/Sat). Every amount is saved immediately.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** First create your types. Without a type the table is empty.
- **Step 2. Base price.** Under Base price (outside a season) fill in the price per night. It applies to all nights that fall in no season.
- **Step 3. Season.** Above the table click Add season. Give a Name (for example High season), a First night and a Last night (both count) and optionally a Priority. Click Save.
- **Step 4. Seasonal price.** In the table the season now appears as a column with its period. Fill in the price per night for each type. If you leave a cell empty, the base price applies for that type in that season.
- **Step 5. Weekend.** Under the seasonal price at Fri/Sat fill in a higher price for the Friday and Saturday night. First fill in the price per night, otherwise you get Enter the price per night first.
- **Step 6. Extra people.** At the end fill in under Extra adult and Extra child what an extra person costs per night. For how many people the price applies, you set on the type, at Price applies to.
- **Overlap.** If two seasons overlap, the season with the highest Priority applies; with equal priority the shortest season. A season may last two years at most.
- **What the guest sees.** Jimani calculates each night separately: season or base price, then the rate plan, then the surcharge for extra people. The sum is the accommodation amount.
- **Other rates.** A rate plan such as Non-refundable deducts a percentage or amount from this price, see [What is a rate plan and how do I create a flexible or non-refundable rate?](tariefplannen.md).

**Example:** Base price €100. High season from 1 July up to and including 31 August: €140, Fri/Sat €170. A guest who stays two nights from Friday 3 July pays €170 plus €170 for the Friday and Saturday night: €340 (two people, the price applies to two).

**Related questions:**

- How do I set a higher price for the high season?
- Can I set a separate price for Friday and Saturday?
- Where do I fill in the base price per night?
- How do I create a season?

**Keywords:** price per night, seasonal price hotel, high season low season, weekend price hotel, set room rate, rates by date

**Related:** [What can you set up under Rate plans, Season and Seasons & prices?](../naslag/hotel-tariefplannen-en-prijzen.md), [How do I charge for an extra adult or child?](extra-personen-en-kinderen.md)

---

# How do I create a hotel reservation myself?

**Answer:** Go to Hotel and click Create reservation at the top right (or click an empty cell in the room planner). Choose the dates and number of people, choose a type and rate plan, fill in the guest's name and click Save. At the front desk minimum stay and no arrival do not apply; a room that is occupied or closed cannot be booked.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Hotel and click Create reservation. A side panel opens. If you clicked an empty cell in the Overview, room and date are already filled in.
- **Step 2.** Choose Arrival and Departure (the departure date must be after the arrival) and the number of Adults and Children.
- **Step 3.** Under Type and rate you see for each type how many are free and for each rate plan what the whole stay costs. Choose a type and a plan.
- **Step 4.** Under Room (or Cottage) choose a number yourself, or leave Automatic (first available).
- **Step 5.** Set Provisional (not yet confirmed) to Yes if the guest is still undecided: an option holds the spot, but the reservation is not yet confirmed.
- **Step 6.** Under Guest fill in First name, Last name, Email and Phone. The last name is required. If the guest has an email address, you can send an email later.
- **Step 7.** Under Payment choose Pay now, Deposit (fill in the Deposit amount) or On arrival. This only records what the guest paid; you settle up at the till.
- **Step 8.** Check the Total and click Save. Cancel closes the panel without saving.
- **Overbooking is not possible.** If the room has just been taken by someone else, you get the message and nothing is saved.

![The room planner with the Create reservation button at the top right](/kennisbank/beelden/reservering-aanmaken-1.webp)

**Example:** A guest calls for 2 nights with 2 adults. You choose the Double room, the Flexible plan, Room Automatic and Payment On arrival, fill in the name and click Save.

**Related questions:**

- How do I book a room myself for a guest who calls?
- How do I create a reservation in the room planner?
- Can I book an occupied room?
- Do minimum stay and no arrival also apply at the front desk?

**Keywords:** create reservation hotel, book room front desk, phone booking, manual booking hotel, option reservation, record deposit

**Related:** [How do hotel reservations, the room planner and the Create reservation side panel work?](../naslag/hotel-reserveringen.md), [How do I check a guest in and out?](in-en-uitchecken-gast.md)

---

# How does cleaning of rooms and cottages work?

**Answer:** Every room or cottage has a cleaning status: Clean, Dirty, In progress, Inspected or Out of order. After check-out it is Dirty. Your cleaners set it to In progress with Start and to Clean (or Inspected) with Done on the Cleaning page. You see the status in the room planner, under Rooms in Hotel management and on the Cleaning page.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1. Setting up.** Open Settings > Your business > Cleaning. Set Review first to Yes if a manager has to inspect every room, and Daily cleaning to Yes if rooms where a guest is staying must go to Dirty every morning.
- **Step 2. Cleaners.** Give your cleaners their own login with the Cleaning role under Settings > Your business > Users and permissions. They only see the Cleaning page, on their phone.
- **Step 3. Working.** The cleaner opens Cleaning, sees To clean today and taps Start and then Done. With Note or photo they report, for example, a broken lamp.
- **Inspecting.** With Review first set to Yes the room is on Clean after Done. You or a manager then tap Inspected; only then is the room ready for the next guest. Without inspection it is on Inspected immediately after Done.
- **Setting by hand.** On the Rooms tab in Hotel management you choose a status yourself under Cleaning, and on the Cleaning page you use Set status.
- **Out of order.** Set a room to Out of order if it is temporarily not used for a guest.
- **What Jimani does itself.** After check-out Jimani sets the room to Dirty. With Daily cleaning also every morning from 05:00 to Dirty for occupied rooms. If a room is not ready yet when a guest checks in, Jimani warns you. A guest who checked in online is checked in automatically as soon as the room is ready.
- **Order.** On the list, rooms with a departing and an arriving guest are at the top.

![The Cleaning page with the list of rooms to be cleaned today](/kennisbank/beelden/schoonmaak-1.webp)

**Example:** The cleaner taps Start on room 12 and Done after the work. With Review first the room is now on Clean. You tap Inspected and the room is ready for the next guest.

**Related questions:**

- How do my cleaners know which rooms are dirty?
- Which cleaning statuses does a room have?
- What happens to the room status after check-out?
- How does a cleaner set a room to clean?

**Keywords:** cleaning rooms, housekeeping, room dirty clean, cleaner login, room status, inspected

**Related:** [How does the Cleaning page work?](../naslag/hotel-schoonmaak.md), [How do I check a guest in and out?](in-en-uitchecken-gast.md)

---

# What is a rate plan and how do I create a flexible or non-refundable rate?

**Answer:** A rate plan is a way to offer the same room at a different price and conditions, for example Flexible and Non-refundable. You create it under Hotel management > Rate plans. A plan is the base price or deviates from it by a percentage or amount, and has its own cancellation rule, breakfast and minimum stay.

**Explanation:**

- **Default plans.** A business without plans gets four plans the first time it opens the tab: Flexible (the base plan, free cancellation up to 2 days), Non-refundable (10% below Flexible, cancelling costs the whole amount), With breakfast and Minimum stay (weekend) (5% below Flexible, minimum 2 nights at the weekend). With breakfast is off if no breakfast existed at that time.
- **Step 1.** Click the plus at Rate plans (Add rate plan) or click an existing plan.
- **Step 2. Price.** Give the plan a Name, as the guest sees it. At Derived from choose the plan the price comes from; Nothing: this is the base price means the price comes from Seasons & prices. At Deviation in choose Percentage or Amount and fill in a number at Deviation, for example -10 for 10% cheaper. Under Breakfast choose a breakfast if needed.
- **Step 3. Cancelling.** Set Refundable to Yes or No, fill in the number of days at Free cancellation until (days before arrival) and at Cancellation fee after that the percentage the guest then pays. See [What does cancelling a hotel reservation cost?](annuleringskosten.md).
- **Step 4. Stay.** Fill in Minimum number of nights and Maximum number of nights (0 = no limit). With Weekends only the minimum only applies to a stay with a Friday or Saturday night. With No arrival on and No departure on you choose weekdays on which that plan is not possible.
- **Step 5. Types.** Set For all types to No and under Only for choose the types the plan applies to, or leave it on Yes. Set Bookable online to Yes to show the plan in the widget and choose whether the plan is Active. Click Save.
- **At the front desk.** Guests you book yourself can get any active plan. The rules Minimum number of nights, No arrival on and No departure on only apply to online booking.
- **Removing a plan.** With Send to Trash in the Actions menu you remove a plan. Plans that were derived from it then hang on the plan above.

**Example:** You edit Non-refundable and set the deviation to -15 instead of -10. A room that costs €100 at Flexible now costs €85 per night, and cancelling costs the whole amount.

**Related questions:**

- How do I offer a flexible and a non-refundable rate?
- What is a rate plan?
- How do I create a rate with breakfast?
- Can I set a minimum stay per rate?

**Keywords:** rate plan hotel, flexible rate, non-refundable, discount plan, minimum stay, weekend rate, rate plan

**Related:** [What can you set up under Rate plans, Season and Seasons & prices?](../naslag/hotel-tariefplannen-en-prijzen.md), [How do I set the price per night and the seasonal prices?](prijs-per-nacht-en-seizoenen.md)

---

# How do I send guests an access code for the room?

**Answer:** Go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Codes & keys. Under When to send choose when the code is emailed to the guest, and fill in the fixed code per room or cottage, or let Jimani create a new code for each stay. Jimani is not connected to a lock: you set the code in the lock yourself.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open the Codes & keys tile.
- **Step 2.** Under When to send choose: A number of hours before arrival, After online check-in and payment, or Manual only. With the first, fill in under Hours before check-in time how many hours before the check-in time the email is sent (default 24).
- **Step 3.** Under Code type choose Fixed per room (or Fixed per cottage) or New per stay. With New per stay Jimani creates a code when sending, with the number of digits you choose under Number of digits (4 to 8), never all the same digits or a sequence like 1234.
- **Step 4.** With Fixed per room fill in under Codes per room the code for each room, and optionally Key box or locker. With the magic wand you create a code. This is saved immediately.
- **Step 5.** Under Extra text in the email type what else the guest needs to know, for example where the key box hangs.
- **Sending manually.** Open the reservation in Hotel, Stay tab, and click Email code under Access. Under Access code you can also change the code or have a new code created with Create. Next to it it shows whether the code has already been sent: Sent on {datum} or Not sent yet.
- **Conditions.** The guest must have an email address. With After online check-in and payment the code is only sent once the guest has checked in online and nothing is outstanding.
- **Every five minutes.** Jimani checks every five minutes who should receive a code and sends only one per stay.

**Example:** You choose A number of hours before arrival with 24 hours and Fixed per room. A guest arriving at 15:00 receives the code for their room by email the day before at 15:00, with your text about the key box.

**Related questions:**

- How do I send guests the code for the room lock?
- Can I have a new code created automatically for each stay?
- Is Jimani connected to my key safe or lock?
- When is the access code emailed to the guest?

**Keywords:** room access code, email door code, key box, code per stay, keybox code, hotel lock code

**Related:** [What can you set under Codes & keys and iCal calendars?](../naslag/hotel-codes-en-ical.md), [How do I let guests check in online?](online-inchecken.md)

---

# How do I set up tourist tax for my hotel or holiday park?

**Answer:** Go to Settings > Money and figures > Guest register & tourist tax. Set Charge tourist tax to Yes, under Calculation choose an amount Per person per night or a Percentage, fill in the Amount and choose whether the tax is Included in the price. Jimani then includes it with every booking.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open the Guest register & tourist tax tile and set Charge tourist tax to Yes. If your municipality does not charge tourist tax, leave it on No.
- **Step 2.** Under Calculation choose Per person (a fixed amount per person per night) or Percentage (a percentage of the price of the overnight stay).
- **Step 3.** Under Amount fill in the amount or the percentage.
- **Step 4.** Under Included in the price choose Yes if the tax is already in your prices. Jimani then does not add it to the total again. With No it comes on top separately.
- **Step 5.** Set Children free to Yes if children pay nothing. Under Up to the age of fill in the limit: children younger than this age are free, 0 means all minors.
- **How it is calculated.** Per person per night: the amount times the number of paying people times the number of nights. Percentage: a percentage of the amount for the overnight stays, without breakfast and surcharges.
- **Visible.** In the widget the tourist tax is shown with the total. In a reservation you see it on the Stay tab, with whether it is included or separate, and on the check-out bill at the till.
- **Guest register.** If guests check in online and fill in their date of birth, Jimani calculates the tourist tax per person from the guest register. See [How do I get the guest register and the tourist tax for the municipality?](nachtregister-gemeente.md).

**Example:** A municipality charges €1.50 per person per night, children up to 12 free. You choose Per person, fill in 1.50, set Children free to Yes and Up to the age of to 12. Two adults and a child of 8 for 3 nights pay 2 × 3 × €1.50 = €9.

**Related questions:**

- How do I pass tourist tax on to guests?
- Can I set tourist tax as a percentage?
- Can I have the tourist tax included in the price?
- Where do I turn on tourist tax?

**Keywords:** set up tourist tax, tourist tax per person per night, children free tourist tax, included, municipality

**Related:** [What can you set up under Guest register & tourist tax?](../naslag/hotel-toeristenbelasting.md), [How do I get the guest register and the tourist tax for the municipality?](nachtregister-gemeente.md)

---

# How do I create types and rooms or cottages?

**Answer:** Go to Hotel management and first create a category (for example Rooms), then a type (the kind of room with photos, capacity and facilities) and then the actual rooms with their number. The type determines what the guest sees and what the room costs, the room is the unit they book.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1. Category.** Go to Hotel management > Categories, click the plus and give the category a name, for example Rooms, Suites or Holiday cottages. Without a category you cannot save a type.
- **Step 2. Type.** Go to Hotel management > Types and click the plus. Fill in Name, Description, Category and Beds, add photos with Add photo and choose the capacity: Adults, Children, Maximum number of guests and Price applies to. Under Facilities set to Yes what comes with it, such as Wi-Fi or Air conditioning. Click Save.
- **Step 3. Rooms.** Go to Hotel management > Rooms (for a park Cottages) and click the plus. Choose the Type and fill in the Number, for example 101. Area, Floor and Name are optional. For many rooms at once use Add multiple, see [How do I add many rooms or cottages in one go?](meerdere-kamers-toevoegen.md).
- **Step 4. Prices.** Under Hotel management > Rate plans fill in the Base price per type in the Seasons & prices table. See [How do I set the price per night and the seasonal prices?](prijs-per-nacht-en-seizoenen.md).
- **Difference.** A type is a kind (Double room), a room is an actual unit with a number (room 101). Prices, photos and capacity are on the type, the number and the cleaning status on the room.
- **Temporarily not renting out.** Set Active to No on the room, or Show in widget to No on the type to only not offer the type online. At the front desk you can still book the type.

**Example:** You have 12 rooms of two kinds. You create the category Rooms, the types Double room and Family room, and add the numbers 1 to 8 to the first and 9 to 12 to the second type.

**Related questions:**

- How do I set up my hotel with rooms?
- What is the difference between a type and a room?
- In what order do I create categories, types and rooms?
- Where do I put photos and facilities of a room?

**Keywords:** create room type, add room, room type, add cottage, room category, set up rooms

**Related:** [How do the Types tab and the Type window work in Hotel management?](../naslag/hotel-types.md), [How do the Rooms and Cottages tabs and the Add multiple window work?](../naslag/hotel-eenheden.md), [What can you set under Categories and Label in Hotel management?](../naslag/hotel-categorieen-en-labels.md)

---

# How does Hotel management work in Jimani?

**Answer:** Hotel management is the screen where you set up everything for your rooms or cottages: opening hours, categories, types, rooms, rate plans with prices, products, fields, labels, the floor plan and time limits. You find it in the left menu under Hotel management.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Hotel management (`/Hotel`). The menu shows Hotel (the reservations), Hotel management and Cleaning as soon as the Hotel module is on under Add-ons.

**Explanation:** At the top are the Show only deleted items switch and a plus with the text What would you like to add? Below that are the tabs. Each tab loads its own list. The word for a unit follows your choice under Settings > Guests and bookings > Advanced: the tab is then called Rooms or Cottages. For a new hotel start with a category and a type, then add the rooms and fill in the prices on the Rate plans tab.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Show only deleted items | Switch above the tabs. Shows on the tab what you have sent to the trash. | When you want to check what you removed. | It applies to the tab that is open. |
| What would you like to add? | The plus at the top. Opens a window with tiles: Categories, Types, Rooms (or Cottages), Rate plans, Season, Products, Fields, Label and Time limit. | When you create something new and do not know which tab you need. | A tile opens the window of that item, or the tab with its own plus. |
| Opening hours | Tab with the check-in time and check-out time per day. | See [How do the Opening hours of the hotel work?](hotel-openingstijden.md). | First tab, open by default. |
| Categories | Groups for your types, such as Rooms or Suites. | Before you create your first type. | See [Categories and labels](hotel-categorieen-en-labels.md). |
| Types | A tile per kind of room or cottage with photo and capacity. | For every kind of room you rent out. | See [Types](hotel-types.md). |
| Rooms | The actual rooms with their number. For a holiday park the tab is called Cottages. | After the type exists. | See [Rooms and cottages](hotel-eenheden.md). |
| Rate plans | Your rate plans and below them the Seasons & prices table. | To set prices, cancellation rules and minimum stay. | See [Rate plans, seasons and prices](hotel-tariefplannen-en-prijzen.md). |
| Products | What the guest can add: breakfast, early check-in, late check-out and extra product. | For upselling. | See [Products and extras](hotel-producten.md). |
| Fields | Questions the guest answers when booking. | For extra questions. | See [Fields](hotel-velden.md). |
| Label | Features with an icon. | See [Categories and labels](hotel-categorieen-en-labels.md). | Separate from the facilities in the Type window. |
| Floor plan | The floor plan of your hotel or park on which guests choose a spot themselves. | When guests may choose their own room or cottage. | See [Floor plan](hotel-plattegrond.md). |
| Time limit | Days on which guests cannot arrive or depart. | For public holidays or maintenance. | See [Blocking arrival or departure](../faq/aankomst-vertrek-blokkeren.md). |
| Import and Export | Two icons next to the plus on the Types, Rooms and Rate plans tabs. | To read in or download data with Excel. | The window checks the data before it saves. |
| Actions | The three dots on a tile. Gives Deactivate or Activate and Send to Trash. | To switch something off temporarily or remove it. | A deactivated type or plan stays with the label Inactive. A rate plan that is not bookable online gets the label Not online. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Saved | Your change has been stored. | Nothing. |
| Saving failed. | The change was not stored. | Check whether all required fields are filled in and try again. |
| Delete? | Question before something goes to the trash. | Confirm with Yes or choose No. |
| Only jpg, png or webp up to 5 MB. | The photo has a different file type or is too large. | Choose another photo. |
| Not found. | The item no longer exists. | Refresh the page. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I set up my hotel?
- Which parts does Hotel management have?
- Where do I find rate plans, products and the floor plan?
- Where do I set up rooms and types?

**Keywords:** hotel management, set up hotel, set up rooms, hotel menu, hotel tabs, holiday park management

**Related:** [How do I turn on the hotel module and what do I get?](../faq/hotelmodule-aanzetten.md), [How do I create types and rooms or cottages?](../faq/types-en-kamers-aanmaken.md)

---

# What can you set under Categories and Label in Hotel management?

**Answer:** A category groups your types, such as Rooms or Holiday cottages, and is required for every type. A label is a feature with an icon, such as Sea view. You manage them on the Categories and Label tabs of Hotel management.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Hotel management > Categories and Menu > Hotel management > Label (`/Hotel`).

**Explanation:** The Categories tab shows Group your types, for example Rooms and Holiday cottages, with for each category the name and whether it is Active. The Label tab shows Features with an icon that you show on a type, for example Sea view, with for each label the icon and the name. With the plus at the top you create one; click a row to edit it. A category must exist before you can save a type.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Add category | Opens the window to create a category. | Before you create your first type. | For example Rooms, Suites or Holiday cottages. |
| Name (category) | You see the name again on the types and in the widget. | Always. | At most 50 characters. |
| Active (category) | No: you can no longer choose this category on a type. | For a category you no longer use. | This field only appears in an existing category. |
| Add label | Opens the window to create a label, in two steps (name, then icon). | For a feature you want to show. | With more than one language you fill in the name per language. |
| Name (label) | The name the guest sees at the label. | Always. | Short and clear, at most 50 characters. |
| Icon | The icon that goes with the label. | Always. | You choose from the icons in the window. |
| Active (label) | No: the label is no longer shown. | To hide a label temporarily. | Only in an existing label. |
| Delete | Removes the category or label after the question Are you sure? | When you no longer need it. | You then see the message Deleted. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Deleted. | The category or label has been deleted. | Nothing. |
| Are you sure? | Confirmation question before deleting. | Choose Yes or No. |

**Related questions:**

- What is a category for types?
- What are labels such as sea view?
- Is a category required for a type?
- How do I add a feature with an icon to a room?

**Keywords:** hotel category, room category, room label, feature with icon, sea view label, group types

**Related:** [How do the Types tab and the Type window work in Hotel management?](hotel-types.md), [How does Hotel management work in Jimani?](hotel-beheer.md)

---

# What can you set under Codes & keys and iCal calendars?

**Answer:** Under Codes & keys you decide when a guest receives their access code by email and which code and key belong to which room. Under iCal calendars you connect each room with Booking.com, Airbnb or another site, so that occupied nights go both ways. Codes & keys is under Settings > Guests and bookings; you open iCal calendars with Settings on the iCal card under Settings > Add-ons.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Codes & keys. iCal calendars requires the iCal add-on: under Settings > Add-ons choose the Settings button on the iCal card, or search "iCal" in Search for a setting….

**Explanation:** Every choice is saved immediately; with Done you close the window. The access code is emailed to the guest. There is (as yet) no connection with a lock: you set the code in the lock yourself. In iCal calendars each room or cottage has the address to export and the addresses of other sites to import. iCal only exchanges occupied and free and is updated every 15 minutes. If someone books the same night on another site in that time, you have a double booking. Jimani reports it here, but cannot prevent it.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| When to send | A number of hours before arrival, immediately after the guest has checked in and paid online, or only when you press Email code. | To send the code at the right moment. | By default a number of hours before arrival. |
| Hours before check-in time | Counted from the check-in time on the day of arrival. | Only with A number of hours before arrival. | Default 24, a number from 0 to 168. |
| Fixed per room | The code you fill in per room below. For a park it is called Fixed per cottage. | When the door always has the same code. | Default choice. |
| New per stay | Jimani creates a new code when sending. | For a lock you set per guest. | The code is never all the same digits or a sequence like 1234. |
| Number of digits | For a new code per stay or the Create button. | With New per stay. | A number from 4 to 8. |
| Extra text in the email | Comes below the code in the email, for example where the key box hangs. | For an arrival instruction. | At most 1000 characters. |
| Codes per room | The fixed code and the key box or locker per room or cottage. Saved immediately. | With Fixed per room. | A code is 1 to 20 characters: letters, digits, # and *. |
| Create new code | The magic wand next to a code: creates a new code for this room. | When you do not make up your own code. | You see the code immediately in the field. |
| Export-adres | Per room the address with a secret key. Paste this address at Booking.com or Airbnb (import calendar). | To pass on your occupied nights. | Do not share it: anyone who has it can see when you are occupied. It only shows occupied or free, no names. |
| Copy | Copies the export address. | When pasting on another site. | - |
| Add import address | The export address of your calendar at Booking.com, Airbnb or another site. Occupied nights are closed here. | To take over occupied nights from elsewhere. | A web address, for example https://... You paste it in the field and press the plus. |
| Fetch now | Fetches the calendar of this address immediately. | When you do not want to wait for the 15 minutes. | Appears next to every pasted address. |
| Delete | Removes the address. | When you no longer connect. | - |
| Picked up {0} | Shows when the calendar was last fetched, followed by the number of blocked periods, Fetch failed or Double booking on {0}. | To see whether it works. | If fetching fails, the old blocks stay in place. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Enter a valid iCal address (https://...). | The address is empty, not a web address or points to your own network. | Paste the full address from the other site. |
| A code has 1 to 20 letters or digits. | The code is too long or contains forbidden characters. | Choose a shorter code. |
| There is no access code yet. Enter one or have one created. | The room has no code. | Enter a code or choose Create. |
| This guest has no email address. | The code cannot be emailed. | Enter an email address. |
| The email couldn't be sent. | Sending failed. | Try again later. |
| Double booking on {0} | Another site has occupied a night on which you already have a reservation. | Resolve the double booking yourself, Jimani keeps the nights closed. |
| The iCal integration is off. Turn it on under Settings > Integrations to use the export addresses and fetch calendars. | The iCal add-on is off. | Turn on iCal under Settings > Add-ons (the message still uses the old name Integrations). |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I set access codes and keys?
- Where do I connect Booking.com with iCal?
- Do occupied nights go both ways with an iCal connection?
- Which code belongs to which room?

**Keywords:** room access code, door code, key box, ical, connect booking.com, connect airbnb, connect calendar, double booking

**Related:** [How do I send guests an access code for the room?](../faq/toegangscodes.md), [How do I connect Booking.com or Airbnb to my rooms?](../faq/ical-booking-airbnb.md), [Can I connect a channel manager such as Channex?](../faq/channex.md)

---

# How do the Rooms and Cottages tabs and the Add multiple window work?

**Answer:** A room or cottage is the actual unit a guest books, with its own number and a type. You manage them on the Rooms tab of Hotel management, or Cottages if you choose cottages under Advanced. With Add multiple you create a whole series of numbers in one go.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Hotel management > Rooms (or Cottages) (`/Hotel`).

**Explanation:** Your actual rooms or cottages with their number. Set a unit to No if it is temporarily not rented out. Without a type you cannot create a room: first create a type; then you add the rooms or cottages of that type. The plus adds one unit, the double plus opens Add multiple. The table shows Number, Type, Area / floor, Active and Cleaning. The Active column and the choice under Cleaning are saved immediately, without opening a window.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Add room | Opens the window for one new room. For cottages the button is called Add cottage. | For a single unit. | The button only appears once there is a type. |
| Add multiple | Opens a window to create a series of numbers in one go, for example 101 up to and including 120 or A1 up to and including A12. | With many identical rooms. | See the fields below. |
| Number | The number of the room, as you see it on the receipt, in the room planner and in the confirmation to the guest. | Always. | At most 20 characters, for example 101 or A12. Each number occurs once. |
| Name | A name of your own, for example Dune view. | When your rooms have a name. | Empty means the number is used. |
| Type | The type determines the price, the photos and what the guest sees. | Always. | You choose from the types you have created. |
| Area | For example Wing B or Duinpan. | To group rooms. | At most 100 characters. |
| Floor | For example 1 or Ground floor. | To record the floor. | At most 50 characters. |
| Area / floor | Column in the list with both details, separated by a slash. | For a quick overview. | If there is nothing, you see a dash. |
| Cleaning | Clean, Dirty, In progress, Inspected or Out of order. You also see this in the room planner and on the Cleaning page. | To set the status by hand. | See [How does cleaning of rooms and cottages work?](../faq/schoonmaak.md). |
| Active | Yes or No. No: this unit is not rented out. | When a room is temporarily unavailable. | In the window this field only appears for an existing room. |
| From number | The first number of the series, for example 101 or A1. | Only with Add multiple. | Required. |
| Up to and including number | The last number, with the same letters in front, for example 120 or A12. | Only with Add multiple. | Prefix and suffix must be the same as From number. The leading zeros of the first number are kept (H-01 up to and including H-10). |
| Add | Creates the series. A number that already exists is skipped. | After filling in the window. | Below the form it shows which numbers will be added ({0} will be added: {1}). |
| Delete | In the window of an existing room. Removes the room and also its place on the floor plan. | When the room no longer exists. | You first get the question Delete? |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Enter a number (max. 20 characters). | The number is empty or too long. | Enter a shorter number. |
| This number already exists. | This number already has a room. | Choose another number. |
| Choose a type. | No valid type was chosen. | Choose a type from the list. |
| The numbers do not match. Use for example 101 up to and including 120, or A1 up to and including A12. | From and To do not fit together. | Check that both numbers have the same letters. |
| Max. 200 at a time. | The series is longer than 200. | Create the series in parts. |
| {0} added | That many new rooms have been created. | Nothing. |

**Related questions:**

- What is the difference between the Rooms and Cottages tab?
- How do I create a series of rooms?
- What is a unit in the hotel?
- How do I give a room a number and type?

**Keywords:** add room, add cottage, room number, multiple rooms at once, switch off room temporarily, room floor, holiday park area

**Related:** [How do I add many rooms or cottages in one go?](../faq/meerdere-kamers-toevoegen.md), [How do the Types tab and the Type window work in Hotel management?](hotel-types.md)

---

# What can you set under Advanced, Online payment, Online check-in and Cleaning of the hotel?

**Answer:** Under Settings you find four tiles for your hotel: Advanced (hotel or holiday park, room or cottage), Online payment (what the guest pays when booking online), Online check-in (what the guest fills in before arrival) and Cleaning. Every choice is saved immediately.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Advanced, Settings > Guests and bookings > Online check-in, Settings > Money and figures > Online payment and Settings > Your business > Cleaning. The tiles appear if the Hotel module is on.

**Explanation:** Each tile opens a window with the explanation at the top. You do not have to press anything: a Yes or No, a choice or a number saves itself. With Done you close the window. Online check-in first needs the Online check-in add-on; if it is off, the window says you can turn it on under Settings > Add-ons.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Hotel | Choose whether you are a hotel or a holiday park. A hotel rents out rooms. | At the start. | First half of the Type of business choice, next to Holiday park. |
| Holiday park | The other choice under Type of business. A holiday park rents out cottages, lodges or chalets. | For a park. | Also sets the word for a unit to Cottage. |
| Word for a unit | This is what a unit is called in Hotel management, the room planner, the widget and the till. You choose Room or Cottage. | When you want a different word than the default. | You can still change the word after choosing Hotel or Holiday park. |
| Room | The word Room everywhere in Jimani. | For a hotel or B&B. | - |
| Cottage | The word Cottage everywhere in Jimani. | For a park. | - |
| Online payment | Choose what the guest pays when booking online: Full, Deposit or None. | To decide whether the guest pays right away. | Via Mollie in the hotel widget. Anyone who does not pay within 15 minutes loses the booking. |
| Full | The whole amount. | Default. | - |
| Deposit | A part now, the rest at departure. | When you want an advance. | You fill in the percentage with it. |
| Deposit % | The part of the total the guest pays when booking (1 to 100). | Only with Deposit. | Default 30. An invalid value gets a red border and is not saved. |
| None | Confirmed immediately, settle up at the till. | When you do not want online payment. | If Mollie is not connected, the widget works this way too. |
| Ask for a photo of ID | Yes or No. The guest takes a photo of their passport or ID card with their phone. | When you want to keep the ID. | Only you can see it. Default Yes. |
| Collect outstanding balance | Yes or No. The guest pays the outstanding amount with the tourist tax via Mollie. | To arrange everything in advance. | Without Mollie they pay on arrival. Default Yes. |
| Keep ID photos (days after departure) | That many days after departure ID photos are deleted automatically (default 30). | Always. | A number from 0 to 365. |
| Review first | Yes: after Done the room is on Clean and a manager sets it to Inspected. Only then is it ready for the next guest. | When you want to inspect cleaning. | - |
| Daily cleaning | Yes: every morning rooms and cottages where a guest is staying go to Dirty. | For a hotel with daily service. | This happens from 05:00. |
| Cleaners | Give your cleaners their own login with the Cleaning role (Settings > Your business > Users and permissions). They then only see the Cleaning page. | For your staff. | - |
| Open Cleaning page | Opens the Cleaning page in a new tab. | To see what your staff see. | - |
| Done | Closes the window. | After your choices. | - |

**Related questions:**

- Which hotel settings are under Settings?
- Where do I set what the guest pays online?
- Where do I set hotel or holiday park?
- Do the hotel settings save automatically?

**Keywords:** hotel or holiday park, room or cottage, hotel deposit, hotel online payment, keep id photo, set up cleaning

**Related:** [Can a guest pay only on arrival instead of online?](../faq/online-betalen.md), [How do I let guests check in online?](../faq/online-inchecken.md), [How does cleaning of rooms and cottages work?](../faq/schoonmaak.md)

---

# What can you set under a Room rate in Hotel management?

**Answer:** A Room rate is a table with prices per day, which you can download and read in with Excel. A price in that table takes precedence over the base price of the type, but not over a seasonal price. You create it on the Products tab.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Hotel management > Products > plus > Room rate (`/Hotel`).

**Explanation:** A room rate determines what a room costs in a certain period. Outside that period the normal price applies. You give the Room rate a name and a VAT rate, choose a year and a month and fill in the prices per day. For most businesses it is easier to use Seasons & prices, see [Rate plans, seasons and prices](hotel-tariefplannen-en-prijzen.md). The price per night is determined in this order: first the seasonal price, then the Standard rate of this table (if you fill it in), and otherwise the Base price of the type.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name | The name of the Room rate. | Always. | Required. With your first type Jimani automatically creates a Room rate named Accommodation. |
| VAT | The VAT rate of the Room rate. | Always. | Required. You choose from your VAT rates. |
| Description | A short explanation in the window. | To read what the Room rate does. | - |
| Select Excel file | The field to choose a filled-in Excel file. | To read in many days at once. | Next to the field is the button to import. |
| Choose a file | The text in the field until you choose a file. | When importing. | Without a file you get the message No file provided. |
| Date | The day of the row. | To find the right day. | You first choose the year and the month. |
| Minimum number of nights | The shortest stay that may start on this day. | For a minimum per arrival day. | Only a number above 1 counts. |
| Maximum number of nights | The longest stay that may start on this day. | For a maximum per arrival day. | 0 means no maximum. |
| Price for one day | Price for a stay of one day. | Only if you need it. | The default plans do not read this column. |
| Standard rate | The price per night of that day. The Flexible plan reads this price. | For a deviating price on a single day. | Only a price above 0 counts. A seasonal price takes precedence. |
| Special rate | A second price for that day. | Only if you need it. | The default plans do not read this column. |
| Non-refundable | The price per night for the Non-refundable plan. | When that plan must have its own price for a day. | Only a price above 0 counts. Without a price the plan charges 10% below Flexible. |
| Widget price | A price for the widget. | Only if you need it. | The default plans do not read this column. |
| Save | Stores the Room rate. | After filling in. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| No file provided | You chose Import without choosing an Excel file. | Choose a file first. |
| Name is required | The name is empty. | Enter a name. |
| VAT is mandatory | No VAT rate was chosen. | Choose a VAT rate. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I set prices per day with Excel?
- Does a day price take precedence over the base price?
- Does a room rate take precedence over a seasonal price?
- Where do I create a room rate table?

**Keywords:** room rate, price per day hotel, excel prices room, standard rate, special rate, non-refundable price

**Related:** [How do I set the price per night and the seasonal prices?](../faq/prijs-per-nacht-en-seizoenen.md), [Products and extras](hotel-producten.md)

---

# How do the Opening hours of the hotel work?

**Answer:** On the Opening hours tab of Hotel management you can set a check-in time, check-out time, early check-in time and late check-out time per day, and set whether check-in or check-out is possible that day. Every change is stored immediately. You can also download and read in the times with Excel. Please note: a new reservation currently gets the fixed times 15:00 check-in and 10:00 check-out.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Hotel management > Opening hours (`/Hotel`). This is the first tab and is open by default.

**Explanation:** Per day you set what time guests check in and check out. For early check-in and late check-out this is the time a guest gets with that extra. With Yes or No you decide whether check-in or check-out is possible that day. First choose the year and the month. At the top you choose one of the three years (this year and the next two), then a month. You then see a row per day. Changes are saved automatically, you do not have to press anything. If saving fails, the row says Not saved and you can Try again. In the table the days for which you have not set anything yet are on No for check-in and check-out.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Date | The day of the row, for example Sat 4 October. | To find the right day. | - |
| Check-out time | The normal time at which guests leave. | Per day. | In the Excel the column is called Check-out time. |
| Late check-out time | The time until which a guest may stay who adds late check-out. | Per day. | Not before the check-out time. In the Excel the column is called Late check-out time. |
| Check-out possible | Yes or No. Determines whether check-out is possible that day. | To close a day for departure. | In the Excel Check-out possible. |
| Early check-in time | The time at which a guest may check in who adds early check-in. | Per day. | Not after the check-in time. In the Excel the column is called Early check-in time. |
| Check-in time | The normal time at which guests check in. | Per day. | In the Excel the column is called Check-in time. |
| Check-in possible | Yes or No. Determines whether check-in is possible that day. | To close a day for arrival. | In the Excel Check-in possible. |
| Select Excel file | The field to choose a filled-in Excel file. | To read in all times at once. | Next to the field is the button to import. |
| Choose a file | The text in the field for the file, until you choose a file. | When importing. | Afterwards the name of your file appears. |
| Hotel opening hours | The name of the worksheet in the Excel. | When downloading. | The file is called HotelOpeningHours.xlsx. The first column is called Opening date. |
| Excel icon | The icon at the top right next to the file field. Downloads all days of this year and the two years after. | To adjust the times in Excel. | The columns are Opening date, Check-out time, Late check-out time, Check-out possible, Early check-in time, Check-in time and Check-in possible. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Not saved: late check-out cannot be before the check-out time. | The late check-out time is earlier than the check-out time. | Choose a later time. |
| Not saved: early check-in cannot be after the check-in time. | The early check-in time is later than the check-in time. | Choose an earlier time. |
| Not saved: enter a valid time (hh:mm). | A time field is empty or invalid. | Enter a time, for example 10:00. |
| Saving failed. Please try again. | The change was not stored. | Try once more. |
| The number of rows does not match the number of dates in this year, next year and the year after. | The Excel file is missing days or has too many. | Download the file again and only adjust the times, leave the rows in place. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I set check-in time and check-out time per day?
- Can I turn off check-in on certain days?
- Can I download and read in times with Excel?
- What are early check-in and late check-out under opening hours?

**Keywords:** check-in time, check-out time, opening hours hotel, late check-out time, early check-in time, excel opening hours

**Related:** [Where do I set the check-in and check-out times?](../faq/in-en-uitchecktijden.md), [How does Hotel management work in Jimani?](hotel-beheer.md)

---

# What can you set up under Floor plan in Hotel management?

**Answer:** On the Floor plan tab you place your rooms or cottages on an image of your hotel or park, and you decide whether a guest may choose a spot there themselves, for a surcharge. Everything on this tab is saved immediately.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Hotel management > Floor plan (`/Hotel`).

**Explanation:** Place your rooms on the floor plan of your hotel. Guests can then choose a room themselves in the widget. For a holiday park it says: Place your cottages on the floor plan of your park. Guests can then choose a spot themselves in the widget. First upload an image as the background. Then drag the numbers from the list to their spot. In the widget the guest sees the step Choose your own room (or Choose your own cottage); if they prefer not to choose, Jimani picks an available unit for them.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Background | An image of your hotel or park (jpg, png or webp up to 5 MB). | As the first step. | The spots are stored as percentages on the image, so they stay in place. |
| Choose file | Selects the image. | Under Background. | Only jpg, png or webp up to 5 MB. |
| Remove background | Removes the image. | To choose a new one. | - |
| Rooms (or Cottages) | The list of numbers that are not yet on the floor plan. Drag a number to its spot on the floor plan. | For every room the guest may choose. | The cross removes a number again. Dragging works with a mouse and with a finger. |
| Remove from floor plan | The cross next to a number. | If a room should not be selectable. | The room itself remains. |
| Guest chooses their own spot | Yes or No. A guest who chooses their own spot pays the surcharge. Yes turns on the floor plan step in the widget. | To let guests choose for a fee. | No: the widget does not show the floor plan. At least one number must also be on the floor plan. |
| Surcharge | The amount for a self-chosen spot. | If the choice costs extra. | An amount from 0 to 99999. |
| Surcharge applies | Per stay or Per night. | To determine how often the surcharge counts. | Per night: the amount times the number of nights. |
| Per stay | The amount counts once for the whole stay. | For a fixed surcharge. | Default choice. |
| Per night | The amount counts for every night of the stay. | For a surcharge that grows with the length of stay. | - |

**Related questions:**

- How do I place rooms on a floor plan?
- Can the guest choose their own spot?
- Can I charge a surcharge for a self-chosen spot?
- Where do I find the Floor plan tab?

**Keywords:** hotel floor plan, choose own room, choose spot holiday park, surcharge for own choice, room on map, cottages on floor plan

**Related:** [Can a guest choose their own room or cottage on a floor plan?](../faq/plattegrond-zelf-kiezen.md), [How does Hotel management work in Jimani?](hotel-beheer.md)

---

# What can you set up under Products: Breakfast, Early check-in, Late check-out and Extra product?

**Answer:** On the Products tab of Hotel management you create everything a guest can book with their stay: a Breakfast, Early check-in, Late check-out and Extra product. For each product you set the name, description, price and VAT.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Hotel management > Products > plus (`/Hotel`). A tile opens the product for editing.

**Explanation:** What the guest can book with their stay: breakfast, early check-in, late check-out and extras. With the plus you choose what you want to add: Room rate, Extra product, Transaction costs, Breakfast, Early check-in or Late check-out. Breakfast, early check-in and late check-out are extras with a stay. An extra product is, for example, parking; transaction costs are a fixed amount per reservation. The Room rate is explained separately in [Room rate](hotel-kamerprijs.md). Breakfast, Early check-in and Late check-out have the same fields. You include Breakfast in a rate plan (field Breakfast). The guest sees an Extra product in the widget at the Extras step.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Add product | Opens the window with the six choices. | For every new product. | The cross closes the window. |
| Name | The name your guest sees when booking and on the bill. | Always. | At most 50 characters. If you have more languages, you enter the name per language. For Extra product it says: Enter a name. The name is visible for all kinds of reservations. |
| Description | What comes with it, for example what the breakfast includes or until what time it is possible. The guest reads this when booking. | To tell the guest what they get. | For Extra product: Give more information about the product if needed. Please note, this information is visible during booking. |
| Standard price | The price you charge per room or cottage. For Breakfast it is the price per person per night. | Always. | In the dashboard and the till this price always applies. |
| Online booking price | What guests pay when they book online themselves (widget or website). | If a different price should apply online. | Empty or 0: then the standard price also applies online. The field is under Breakfast, Early check-in and Late check-out. |
| VAT | The VAT rate with which this appears on the bill. | Always. | Required. You choose from your VAT rates. |
| Active | Yes or No. No: you can no longer choose this for a reservation. | To turn a product off. | This field is not shown in a new product. |
| Delete | Removes the product after the question Are you sure? | If you no longer use it. | Afterwards you see the message Deleted. |
| Price | The price of an Extra product. | Always for an Extra product. | This is the price the guest sees in the widget. |
| Maximum quantity to sell | How many of this product a guest can choose at most. | To limit the quantity. | 0 means no limit, in the widget at most 99. |
| Must not exceed the number of guests | Yes or No. Yes: a guest cannot choose more than the number of people in their stay. | For example for a breakfast basket per person. | A new Extra product is set to Yes. |
| Show as a list | Yes or No, a display choice for the Extra product. | Leave it as it is. | A new Extra product is set to Yes. In the hotel widget this field currently has no visible effect. |
| Sold with early check-in | Yes or No, a marker on the Extra product. | Leave it as it is. | A new Extra product is set to Yes. The current hotel widget does not read this field. |
| Sold with late check-out | Yes or No, a marker on the Extra product. | Leave it as it is. | A new Extra product is set to Yes. The current hotel widget does not read this field. |
| Image | A photo for the Extra product, up to 5 MB. | To show the product. | You can remove the photo again. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| Deleted. | The product has been deleted. | Nothing. |
| Are you sure? | Confirmation question before deleting. | Choose Yes or No. |
| VAT is mandatory | No VAT rate has been selected. | Select a VAT rate. |

**Related questions:**

- Which products can I create in Hotel management?
- How do I create a breakfast product?
- How do I set the VAT for early check-in?
- What is an extra product with a stay?

**Keywords:** add breakfast hotel, early check-in extra, late check-out extra, extra product hotel, sell parking, upselling rooms

**Related:** [How do I offer breakfast, early check-in or late check-out?](../faq/ontbijt-en-extras.md), [How do I sell extras such as parking with a stay?](../faq/extra-producten.md), [How does Hotel management work in Jimani?](hotel-beheer.md)

---

# How do hotel reservations, the room planner and the Create reservation side panel work?

**Answer:** Under Hotel in the menu you see all reservations in the room planner (Overview), in lists per day, week or month and as totals. There you create a reservation yourself with Create reservation, and with a click on a reservation you open the Reservation information window.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Hotel (`/HotelReservationViews`). Jimani remembers the tab you used last.

**Explanation:** At the top are the date with a minus and a plus, the view of 7, 14 or 30 days (default 14), the buttons Refresh and Full screen, the Excel icon to export reservations, the guest register or the tourist tax, and Create reservation. The tabs are Overview, List view, Weekly list, Last 100 reservations, Upcoming reservations and Totals.

- **Overview.** Per room you see who is staying and which nights are free. Click a reservation for the details. A reservation is a bar from arrival to departure with the guest's name. Drag a bar to another room to move it, or drag the edge to extend or shorten it; it is saved immediately. For a holiday park it says: Per cottage you see who is staying and which nights are free. Click a reservation for the details. Click an empty cell for Create reservation with room and date already filled in.
- **List view.** Who arrives today, who is in the house and who departs today, in three blocks with the button Check in or Check out on each line.
- **Weekly list.** The reservations of the week of the selected date.
- **Last 100 reservations.** The last 100 reservations created.
- **Upcoming reservations.** Reservations that have yet to start, for the month you choose. You choose the month under Reservation for the month:.
- **Totals.** Per type the number of reservations, nights and people, the occupancy and the revenue of the arrivals. For the day and the week of the selected date.

![The room planner with the rooms on the left and the reservations as bars, and at the top the tabs Overview, List view, Weekly list, Last 100 reservations, Upcoming reservations and Totals](/kennisbank/beelden/hotel-reserveringen-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Create reservation | Opens the side panel on the right to make a reservation yourself. | For a booking at the front desk or by phone. | The plus button at the top. |
| Arrival | The first night of the stay. | Always. | With minus and plus you can shift the date by one day. |
| Departure | The day the guest leaves. | Always. | Must be after the arrival. |
| Adults and Children | The number of people. | Always. | Default 2 adults and 0 children, at most 20. |
| Type and rate | Per type you see how many are available and per rate plan what the whole stay costs. | To choose type and plan. | As long as you have not chosen anything, it says Choose a type and rate. At the front desk, minimum stay, no arrival and closed do not apply; occupied and closed do. |
| Room or Cottage | Choose a number yourself, or leave Automatic (first available). | If the guest wants a specific room. | Only available units are in the list. |
| As an option (not yet confirmed) | Yes or No. An option holds the spot, but the reservation is not yet confirmed. | If the guest is still undecided. | Default No. |
| First name | The first name of the person booking. | For the confirmation and the lists. | Next to the last name. |
| Last name | The last name of the person booking. | Always. | The last name is required. If first name and last name are both empty, Jimani reports Enter the guest's name. |
| Email and Phone | Contact details of the guest. | For the confirmation. | Without an email address you cannot send an email later. |
| Comment | A free-text note with the reservation. | For requests. | At most 1000 characters. |
| Payment | Pay now, Deposit or On arrival. Pay now: everything has been paid. Deposit: part has been paid. On arrival: the guest pays later. | To record what the guest paid. | It only records: the Mollie payment link and settling the bill go through the till. By default On arrival is on. |
| Pay now | Records that the full amount has been paid. | If the guest has already paid. | - |
| Deposit | Records that part has been paid. | If the guest gave an advance. | You then enter the Deposit amount. |
| On arrival | The guest pays later. | Default. | - |
| Deposit amount | The amount that has already been paid. | Only with Deposit. | - |
| Total | The total of the chosen stay. | To check. | - |
| Save | Creates the reservation. | After filling in. | Cancel closes the side panel. |
| Internal memo | A note only for you and your colleagues. The guest does not see this. | For agreements within the team. | Is in the Overview tab of the window. |
| Edit details | Changes the guest's first name, last name, email, phone and comment. | If a detail is wrong. | You save with Save. |
| Send email | Sends the confirmation again. | If the guest has lost it. | Only with an email address. |
| Option and No-show | Yes or No, in the window. Option: the spot is held, but the reservation is not yet confirmed. No-show: the guest did not come. | For a waiting reservation. | No-show is only available on or after the arrival day. Both are saved immediately. |
| Check in | Sets the guest to Checked in. | When the guest arrives. | If the room is not ready yet, Jimani asks Check in anyway? |
| Check out | Sets the guest to Checked out. | When the guest leaves. | If an amount is still outstanding, the till opens with the check-out bill. |
| Cancel | Cancels the reservation after a question with the cancellation fee according to the rate plan. | If the guest does not come. | Only possible with Confirmed, Option or No show. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| Cancellation fee according to the rate plan: {0} | Cancelling now costs an amount. | Choose Yes, cancel or No. |
| Cancelling is free right now. | There are no costs. | Choose Yes, cancel or No. |
| Room {0} is not ready yet ({1}). | The room is Dirty, In progress or not yet inspected. | Choose Yes, check in to continue anyway. |
| Enter the guest's name. | First name and last name are both empty. | Enter at least the last name. |
| No unit of this type is available in that period. | Everything is occupied. | Choose other dates or another type. |
| Settle in the till first. | An amount is still outstanding. | Complete the check-out bill in the till. |
| You cannot cancel a checked-in or checked-out reservation. | Cancelling is only possible before check-in. | Nothing, or check the guest out. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I see all hotel reservations?
- What is the room planner?
- Where do I see reservations per day, week or month?
- How do I open the details of a hotel reservation?

**Keywords:** room planner, hotel reservations, create reservation hotel, check in guest, check out, option reservation, no-show hotel, move reservation

**Related:** [How do I create a hotel reservation myself?](../faq/reservering-aanmaken.md), [How do I move or extend a reservation in the room planner?](../faq/kamerplanner-verplaatsen.md), [How do I check a guest in and out?](../faq/in-en-uitchecken-gast.md)

---

# How does the Cleaning page work?

**Answer:** On the Cleaning page your cleaners see which rooms or cottages they have to do today. For each unit they tap Start when they begin and Done when they are finished, and they can add a comment or photo. As the manager you can also see the page and set the status yourself.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Cleaning (`/Schoonmaak`) for you. An employee with the Cleaning role sees only this page, without a menu, with the business, their name and Log out at the top. The page is made for the phone.

**Explanation:** These are the rooms and cottages that need to be cleaned. Tap Start when you begin and Done when you are finished. The heading is To clean today with the date. The list has groups: at the top what is Dirty or In progress (departures that get a new guest today first), then To inspect if the business wants to inspect first, and at the bottom Done. Per unit you see the status and the labels Departing today, Arriving today or Guest staying. A unit goes to Dirty as soon as the guest checks out. If Review first is on, the unit becomes Clean after Done and a manager sets it to Inspected. Without inspection it is set to Inspected right after Done.

![The Cleaning page with To clean today and per room the buttons Start and Done](/kennisbank/beelden/hotel-schoonmaak-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Start | Sets the unit to In progress. | At the start of cleaning. | Shown for units that are Dirty. |
| Done | Sets the unit to Clean or Inspected, depending on Review first. | When you are finished. | Shown for units that are In progress. |
| Inspected | Sets a Clean unit to Inspected. | For the manager after inspecting. | Only for you, not for the Cleaning role, and only with Review first on. |
| Note or photo | Opens a box to type a comment and take a photo. | For a broken lamp or a problem. | The comment can be 1000 characters, for example lamp broken, towels out. |
| Photo | Takes a photo with the phone camera or selects one. | To show a problem. | Afterwards the number of photos is shown with the unit. |
| Save | Saves the comment or photo with the unit. | After typing. | - |
| Set status | Choose Dirty, In progress, Clean, Inspected or Out of order. | To set the status by hand. | Only for you, not for the Cleaning role. You can also do this on the Rooms tab of Hotel management. |
| Log out | Logs the cleaner out. | After work. | Only in the bare view for the Cleaning role. |

**Related questions:**

- What do my cleaners see on the Cleaning page?
- Can a cleaner add a photo or comment?
- How do I set a room status myself as a manager?
- What do Start and Done do on the cleaning page?

**Keywords:** cleaning page, housekeeping, room clean, cleaner role, dirty in progress done, cleaning photo

**Related:** [How does cleaning of rooms and cottages work?](../faq/schoonmaak.md), [What can you set under Advanced, Online payment, Online check-in and Cleaning of the hotel?](hotel-instellingen.md)

---

# What can you set up under Rate plans, Season and Seasons & prices?

**Answer:** On the Rate plans tab you set the price per night, per type and per season, and you create rate plans with their own cancellation rule, breakfast and minimum stay. A plan is the base price or deviates from it by a percentage or an amount.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Hotel management > Rate plans (`/Hotel`). At the top are your plans, below them the Seasons & prices table.

**Explanation:** Your rate plans: how the price is derived, what cancelling costs, and whether breakfast is included. Click a plan to edit it. A new business gets four plans the first time it opens this tab: Flexible (the base plan), Non-refundable (10% below Flexible), With breakfast and Minimum stay (weekend) (5% below Flexible, at least 2 nights at the weekend). With breakfast is off as long as no breakfast existed when the plan was created. Below that is the table with the price per night per type and per season. Outside a season the base price applies. An amount is saved immediately. First create a type, then you can enter prices here.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Add rate plan | Opens the Add rate plan window. | For an extra rate, for example Weekend rate. | A new plan is derived from the base plan, with free cancellation up to 2 days. |
| Name (plan) | This is how the guest sees the plan, for example Flexible or Non-refundable. | Always. | At most 100 characters. |
| Derived from | The plan the price comes from. Nothing: this is the base price means the price comes from Seasons & prices. | For a plan that is a discount or surcharge on another plan. | A plan cannot be derived from itself, not even through a circle of plans. |
| Deviation in | A percentage or an amount per night. You choose Percentage or Amount. | To determine how the deviation works. | With Percentage you see a %-sign, with Amount a euro sign. |
| Percentage | The deviation is a percentage of the nightly price of the plan above it. | For example for a 10% discount. | A percentage must be above -100 and may not exceed 1000. |
| Amount | The deviation is a fixed amount per night. | For example 15 euros extra per night. | The amount may be at most 9999. |
| Deviation | The value of the deviation. Negative is cheaper, for example -10. | Always with a derived plan. | The price never goes below 0. |
| Breakfast | Without breakfast, or one of your breakfasts. With breakfast adds the breakfast per person per night. | For a plan with breakfast. | The list shows the price per person per night of each breakfast. |
| Refundable | Yes or No. No: cancelling always costs the full amount. | For a non-refundable rate. | With No there is no free period any more. |
| Free cancellation until (days before arrival) | Up to this many days before arrival cancelling is free. 0 = until the arrival day. | For a flexible rate. | You can enter 0 to 365. |
| Cancellation fee after that | The percentage of the stay amount that the guest pays if they cancel after that. 100 is the full amount. | Always. | A number from 0 to 100. The tourist tax does not count towards the amount. |
| Minimum number of nights | The shortest stay with this plan. 0 = no minimum. | For example for a weekend rate. | The maximum may not be below it. |
| Weekends only | Yes: the minimum only applies if the stay includes a Friday or Saturday night. | For a minimum that only counts at the weekend. | Is just below the minimum. |
| Maximum number of nights | The longest stay with this plan. 0 = no maximum. | To exclude long stays. | You can enter 0 to 365. |
| No arrival on | Weekday buttons Mon to Sun: on these days a guest cannot arrive with this plan. | For example no arrival on Sunday. | Applies online, not at the front desk. |
| No departure on | Weekday buttons: on these days a guest cannot depart with this plan. | For example no departure on Saturday. | Applies online, not at the front desk. |
| For all types | Yes: the plan applies to every type. No: under Only for choose the types the plan applies to. | To restrict a plan. | Without chosen types the plan applies to all types. |
| Bookable online | Yes: guests see this plan in the widget. | Set to No for a plan that only exists at the front desk. | The plan then gets the label Not online. |
| Active | No: the plan cannot be booked. | To turn a plan off temporarily. | The plan remains with the label Inactive. |
| Add season | Opens the Add season window. | For a period with its own prices, for example High season. | You enter the prices afterwards in the table. |
| Name (season) | For example High season, Christmas or Low season. | Always. | At most 100 characters. |
| First night and Last night | The period of the season. The first and the last night both count. | Always. | A season may last at most two years. |
| Priority | If two seasons overlap, the season with the highest priority applies. | When seasons overlap. | A number from 0 to 99. With equal priority the shortest season wins. |
| Base price | In the table: the price per night outside a season. | Always enter per type. | A Room rate per day takes precedence over the base price, see [Room rate](hotel-kamerprijs.md). |
| Price per season | In the table under the name and the period of the season: the price per night for that type. | For every season and type. | Leaving it empty means the base price applies. |
| Fri/Sat | Next to the season price: the price for the Friday and Saturday night. | For a more expensive weekend. | First enter the price per night. |
| Extra adult | The price per night for an adult above the number for which the price applies. | If you charge for extra people. | You set the number for which the price applies at the type, under Price applies to. |
| Extra child | The price per night for a child above that number. | If you charge for extra children. | A child first fits in a free place within that number. |
| Edit season | Click the name of the season in the table header. | To change the name, period or priority. | You can also delete the season. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| Choose a valid adjustment. | The kind or the value of the deviation is not valid. | Enter a number under Deviation. |
| A plan cannot be derived from itself. | The plan would depend on itself again through other plans. | Choose another plan under Derived from. |
| The percentage must be between 0 and 100. | The cancellation percentage or the days are not valid. | Enter 0 to 100. |
| The minimum and maximum number of nights are not valid. | The maximum is below the minimum, or a number is outside 1 to 365. | Adjust the numbers. |
| The last night is before the first, or the season is longer than two years. | The period of the season is not valid. | Adjust the dates. |
| This amount is invalid. | The amount is negative or above 99999. | Enter a valid amount. |
| Enter the price per night first. | You entered Fri/Sat without a price per night. | First enter the price per night. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I set the price per night per season?
- How do I make a rate deviate by a percentage from the base price?
- What do I set for a rate plan?
- Where do I see the Seasons and prices table?

**Keywords:** rate plan, season price, price per night, weekend price, high season, non-refundable, cancellation rule, minimum number of nights

**Related:** [How do I set the price per night and the seasonal prices?](../faq/prijs-per-nacht-en-seizoenen.md), [What is a rate plan?](../faq/tariefplannen.md), [What does cancelling a hotel reservation cost?](../faq/annuleringskosten.md)

---

# What can you set up under Time limitation in Hotel management?

**Answer:** With a Time limitation you block check-in, check-out or both on fixed days, for certain types or individual rooms. This way you can, for example, close a room for maintenance or let nobody arrive on public holidays.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Hotel management > Time limitation (`/Hotel`).

**Explanation:** Days on which guests cannot arrive or depart. The list shows per restriction the Name, the Date (with more than one date it says More than one date has been selected), whether Block check-in and Block check-out are set to Yes and whether the restriction is Active. With the plus you create a restriction in three steps: first the name and what is blocked, then for which types or rooms, then the dates. In the last step choose individual days, weeks or months by clicking them. If Block check-in and Block check-out are both set to Yes, the room is closed on those nights and nobody can book it, not even at the front desk. If only one of the two is Yes, the restriction applies to online booking and not to Create reservation at the front desk.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Add time restriction | Opens the Add time restriction window. | For a new restriction. | The window has three steps with Previous and Next. |
| Name | Only visible to you, for example Holidays or Maintenance. | Always. | At most 50 characters. |
| No check-in is possible on this day. | Yes: guests cannot arrive on these days. In the list the column is called Block check-in. | For days without arrival. | A new restriction is set to Yes. |
| No check-out is possible on this day. | Yes: guests cannot depart on these days. In the list the column is called Block check-out. | For days without departure. | - |
| Blocked by the room type | Yes: you choose types. No: you choose individual rooms or cottages. | To determine whom you block. | In the next step you choose for which types or rooms. |
| For which types or rooms | The restriction only applies to what you choose here. | Always. | If you choose no types, the restriction affects nothing. |
| Date | Indicate on which dates the time restriction is active. Choose individual days, weeks or months by clicking them. | Always. | You navigate to other years with the arrows. |
| Active | No: the restriction is off and no longer applies. | To turn a restriction off temporarily. | This field is in an existing restriction. |
| Delete | Removes the restriction after the question Are you sure? | When you no longer need it. | Afterwards you see the message Deleted. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| More than one date has been selected. | Shown in the list for a restriction with multiple dates. | Open the restriction to see all dates. |
| You cannot arrive on this day. | The guest chooses an arrival day in the widget that is blocked. | Choose another day. |
| You cannot depart on this day. | The guest chooses a departure day in the widget that is blocked. | Choose another day. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I close a room for maintenance?
- How do I block arrival for certain types or individual rooms?
- How do I let nobody arrive on public holidays?
- Where do I find the time limitation in Hotel management?

**Keywords:** block room, room maintenance, no arrival, no departure, holidays hotel, time limitation

**Related:** [How do I block arrival or departure on certain days?](../faq/aankomst-vertrek-blokkeren.md), [How does Hotel management work in Jimani?](hotel-beheer.md)

---

# What can you set up under Guest register & tourist tax?

**Answer:** Under Settings > Money and figures > Guest register & tourist tax you set how Jimani calculates tourist tax: per person per night or as a percentage, with or without children, separately on the bill or included in the price. There you also download the guest register and the tourist tax for the municipality.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Money and figures > Guest register & tourist tax.

**Explanation:** The amount your guests pay to the municipality per stay. Jimani includes the tourist tax in every booking and shows it when booking and on the check-out bill. Your guests fill in the guest register themselves during online check-in. Every choice is saved immediately. If you choose No under Charge tourist tax, Jimani charges nothing.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Charge tourist tax | Yes or No. No if your municipality doesn't charge a tourist tax. | Always first. | With No nothing is calculated. |
| Calculation | A fixed amount per person per night, or a percentage of the price of the overnight stay. You choose Per person or Percentage. | To mirror the rule of your municipality. | The Amount field adapts. |
| Per person | The amount times the number of people times the number of nights. | For a fixed amount per person per night. | Children only count if you set Children free to No. |
| Percentage | A percentage of the amount for the overnight stays (without breakfast and surcharges). | For municipalities that charge a percentage. | At most 100. |
| Amount | The amount per person per night, or the percentage. | Always if you charge. | An amount up to 9999 with Per person. |
| Included in the price | Yes: the tourist tax is already in your prices. No: it is added separately. | Depends on how you state your prices. | With Yes, Jimani deducts the tax from the accommodation price and nothing is added on top. |
| Children free | Yes or No. Children don't pay tourist tax. | If your municipality exempts children. | Default Yes. |
| Up to the age of | Children younger than this age are free. 0 = all children. | If the limit in your municipality is different from 18. | A number from 0 to 25. With 0 all minors are free. |
| Guest register | Button to download the guest register as Excel for a period. | For the municipality. | With nationality, date of birth and ID from online check-in. |
| Tourist tax | Button to download the tourist tax per month. | For your tax return. | Choose the period in the window that opens. |

**Related questions:**

- How does Jimani calculate tourist tax?
- Can I exclude children from the tourist tax?
- Can the tourist tax be shown separately on the bill?
- Where do I download the guest register for the municipality?

**Keywords:** tourist tax, guest register, children free tourist tax, tourist tax included, municipality tax hotel

**Related:** [How do I set up tourist tax?](../faq/toeristenbelasting.md), [How do I get the guest register and the tourist tax for the municipality?](../faq/nachtregister-gemeente.md)

---

# How do the Types tab and the Type window work in Hotel management?

**Answer:** A type is a kind of room or cottage, for example Double room or Lodge for 4 people. You record its name, photos, capacity and facilities once, and all real rooms of that type share that information. You create types on the Types tab of Hotel management.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Hotel management > Types (`/Hotel`). You create a new type with the plus on that tab or via What would you like to add? > Types.

**Explanation:** On the tab there is a tile per type with the photo, the name and the number of people. View your kinds of rooms or cottages here. Add a type with the plus, or click a type to edit it. Don't have a category yet? Create it first, otherwise you cannot save the type. You can find the steps in [How do I create types and rooms or cottages?](../faq/types-en-kamers-aanmaken.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Add Type | The plus on the tab opens the empty Add Type window. | For every new kind of room or cottage. | The window is then called Type, followed by the name of the type. |
| Name | The name your guests see when booking. | Always. | At most 100 characters, for example Double room, Family room or Lodge for 4 people. |
| Description | What the guest needs to know: size, view, what is in the room. | For a good booking page. | At most 1000 characters. |
| Category | The group this type belongs to, for example Rooms or Suites. | Always, a type needs a category. | You create categories on the Categories tab. |
| Beds | Free text about the beds, for example 1 double bed and 1 sofa bed. | To show the guest how they will sleep. | At most 400 characters. |
| Photos | The photos of the type. The first photo is the main photo. Remove a photo with the cross. | To show the type in the widget. | You can keep at most 12 photos. |
| Add photo | Adds one or more photos after the existing ones. | When you have photos. | Only jpg, png or webp up to 5 MB. |
| Adults | The maximum number of adults. | Always. | At least 1. |
| Children | The maximum number of children. | Always. | May be 0. |
| Maximum number of guests | Adults and children combined. | Always. | May not be more than adults and children combined. A booking with more people is refused. |
| Price applies to | The price per night applies to this number of people; above that the price for an extra person is added. | To make the price per night apply to, for example, 2 people. | May not be higher than the maximum. You set the extra prices under Seasons & prices. |
| Facilities | Per facility a Yes or No: Wi-Fi, Private bathroom, Air conditioning, Television, Kitchen or kitchenette, Balcony or terrace, Parking, Pets welcome, Wheelchair accessible and Coffee and tea. | To show the guest what is included. | The guest sees them in the widget. The list is fixed. |
| Show in widget | Yes: guests can book this type online. | Set to No to temporarily not offer a type online. | At the front desk you can still book the type. |
| Active | No: the type can no longer be booked, not even at the front desk. | For a type you no longer rent out. | This field is only in an existing type. |
| Save | Saves the type. | After every change. | In a new type Cancel is on the left, in an existing type Delete. |
| Deactivate or Activate | In the Actions menu (the three dots) on the tile. | To turn a type off temporarily. | A deactivated type gets the label Inactive. |
| Send to Trash | In the Actions menu, or the Delete button in the window. | To remove a type. | You first get the question Delete? |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| Enter a name (max. 100 characters). | The name is empty or too long. | Enter a shorter name. |
| Choose a category. | No category has been chosen. | Create a category and choose it. |
| The number of people is not valid: the maximum may not be more than adults and children combined, and the price applies to at most the maximum. | The capacity is contradictory. | Adjust Adults, Children, Maximum number of guests or Price applies to. |
| Only jpg, png or webp up to 5 MB. | The photo has a different file type or is too large. | Choose another photo. |

**Related questions:**

- What is a type for rooms, such as a double room?
- How do I record photos and facilities once for all rooms of the same kind?
- How do I set the capacity of a room?
- Where do I create a type?

**Keywords:** room type, create room type, kind of room, room photos, room capacity, room facilities, room temporarily not bookable

**Related:** [How does Hotel management work in Jimani?](hotel-beheer.md), [Categories and labels](hotel-categorieen-en-labels.md), [Rooms and cottages](hotel-eenheden.md)

---

# What can you set up under Fields in Hotel management?

**Answer:** On the Fields tab you create extra questions that a guest can answer when booking, for example an arrival time or an allergy. For each field you choose the kind, the name, whether it is required and where it is shown.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Hotel management > Fields (`/Hotel`).

**Explanation:** Questions the guest answers when booking. In the list you see per field the name, the label, the type and, with Yes or No, whether it is Required, is in the List view, is shown under Manual reservation, is shown in the widget and is Active. With the plus you create a new field; click a line to edit it. You link a field to the types it applies to. The kind of field is fixed and can no longer be changed. If you want a different kind of field, create a new field. After setting it up, check whether the field appears in your hotel widget: the default questions in the widget are first name, last name, email address, phone number and a comment.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Type | The kind of field determines how the guest answers: with text, with a choice or with a time. You choose from Text box, Large text box, Time slot, Date, Checkbox, Selection box multiple choices, Radio button, Number field, Phone, Combo list, Label, Link and Terms and conditions. | When creating a field. | After saving you can no longer change the kind. |
| Name | The name the guest sees with this field. | Always. | At most 50 characters. If you have more languages, you enter the name per language. |
| Description | An explanation for the field. For a text field it appears as light grey text in the field; for a link the web address. | To explain what you are asking. | - |
| Options | The choices the guest gets. Put each choice on its own line. | For a combo list, radio button or selection with multiple choices. | - |
| Show field name | Yes: the guest sees the name of the field when booking. | If the name should appear as a heading above the field. | - |
| Required | Yes: the guest must fill in the field to be able to book. | For a question you need. | - |
| Show when booking manually | Yes: the field is shown when you create a reservation yourself, for example at the front desk. | If you also want to ask the question at the front desk. | The Create reservation side panel does not show extra fields. |
| List view | Yes: the answer appears with the comments in the reservation overview. | If you want to see the answer quickly. | - |
| Show in widget | Yes: the guest sees the field when booking online in the widget. | For questions to the guest. | See the note in the explanation. |
| Label | A short name to find the field in your list. The guest does not see this. | Always. | For example Arrival time. |
| Active | Yes or No. No: the field is no longer in the form. | To turn a field off temporarily. | This field is only in an existing field. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| Deleted. | The field has been deleted. | Nothing. |
| Are you sure? | Confirmation question before deleting. | Choose Yes or No. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I ask for a guest's arrival time when booking?
- Can I ask about an allergy when booking a room?
- How do I make a field required?
- Where do I show an extra question to the guest?

**Keywords:** extra field hotel, question when booking, ask arrival time, ask allergy, fields hotel widget

**Related:** [How does Hotel management work in Jimani?](hotel-beheer.md), [How does a guest book a room or cottage online?](../faq/online-boeken-door-gast.md)

---

# What is in the Stay tab and what does the guest fill in under Online check-in?

**Answer:** In the Stay tab of Reservation information you manage a guest's guest register, ID and access code. The guest fills in the same details themselves on the Online check-in page, which they open via a link in their confirmation email.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Hotel > click a reservation > Stay tab. The guest page Online check-in is opened by the guest with the link from their email (without logging in).

**Explanation:** The Online check-in page has three steps: Details, ID (only if you ask for it) and Pay (or Finish if nothing is outstanding). Every step is saved immediately, so anyone who closes the page later continues where they were. If the stay is cancelled, past or Online check-in is not turned on, the guest sees a message instead of the steps. A link that is not valid shows This link isn't valid. The guest register is required by law: everyone who stays overnight is in it. Anyone who is an adult or the main guest must fill in an ID with a number; for the main guest also place of residence and country. Children don't need to.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| First name | First name of the guest. | For every guest in the guest register. | Required. |
| Last name | Last name of the guest. | For every guest. | Required. |
| Nationality | The nationality from a list of countries. | For every guest. | Required. The list starts with NL, BE and DE. |
| Date of birth | The date of birth. | For every guest. | Required. Jimani uses this to determine whether someone is a child for the tourist tax. |
| ID document | The kind of document: Passport, ID card or Driving licence. | For the main guest and adults. | On the guest page the step is also called ID; there the guest takes a photo. |
| Document number | The number of the document. | Together with the ID document. | At most 50 characters. |
| Place of residence | The place of residence of the main guest. | For the main guest. | Required together with Country. |
| Country | The country of residence of the main guest. | For the main guest. | Choose from the list. |
| Select... | The first choice in every list, as long as nothing has been chosen. | Not needed. | - |
| Edit | Opens the guest register for changes. | If the guest did not fill in the details themselves. | In the window: Add guest, Cancel and Save. |
| Online check-in (status) | Shows Not checked in online yet or Checked in online on {0}, and the Expected arrival. | To see whether the guest is ready. | Only with the Online check-in add-on turned on. |
| Online check-in link | The link for the guest, with Copy and Email link. | If the guest did not receive the link. | Email link is only shown for a reservation with an email address. |
| ID photo | The photos of the ID, with Delete per photo. | To check the ID. | Only you see the photo; it is deleted automatically after the stay. |
| ID checked | Yes or No. Saved immediately, with who and when. | When you have seen the ID. | - |
| Access code | The code the guest needs, with the button Create for a new code. | For the door or the lock. | At most 20 characters. See [How do I send guests an access code?](../faq/toegangscodes.md). |
| Key or locker | Where the key is, for example locker 4 at the entrance. | For the arrival instructions. | At most 100 characters. |
| Email code | Emails the code to the guest. | If the code is not sent automatically. | Only for a reservation with an email address. Next to it is Not sent yet or Sent on {0}. |
| Tourist tax | At booking and Per guest register. | To see what the guest pays. | The second amount appears as soon as the guest register is filled in. |
| Add additional guest | On the guest page: adds a guest. | For everyone who stays overnight. | At most the number of people that fit in the room. |
| What time do you expect to arrive? | The guest chooses a time, or Not sure yet. | To prepare yourself. | You see this as Expected arrival. |
| Pay | On the guest page: pays the outstanding amount with Mollie. | If that was turned on under Online check-in. | Otherwise it says Complete check-in and the guest pays on arrival. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| Enter the first and last name. | A name is missing. | Enter both. |
| Select the nationality. | The nationality is missing. | Choose a country. |
| Enter a valid date of birth. | The date is not valid. | Enter the date again. |
| Choose the ID document and enter the number. | The ID is missing. | Choose the kind and enter the number. |
| Enter the town/city and country of residence. | The main guest is missing place of residence or country. | Enter both. |
| Add a photo of your ID. | The business asks for a photo. | Take a photo. |
| We can't use this photo. Choose a JPG, PNG or WebP up to 6 MB. | The photo is too large or of a different type. | Choose another photo. |
| That many guests don't fit. Contact us if there are more of you. | More guests have been entered than fit. | Contact the accommodation. |
| This link is not (or no longer) valid. | The link is unknown or outdated. | Ask for a new link. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see a guest's ID?
- Where do I manage a guest's guest register?
- What does the guest fill in at online check-in?
- Where do I see the access code of a reservation?

**Keywords:** guest register, online check-in, guest ID, access code, online check-in link, additional guests

**Related:** [How do I let guests check in online?](../faq/online-inchecken.md), [How do I send guests an access code for the room?](../faq/toegangscodes.md)

---

# Does the till still work if the internet goes down?

**Answer:** Yes. The till keeps working with the data stored on the device. You settle with
Cash, Pay other or Pin (external); the receipt gets a number from this till, the customer receipt and the
kitchen ticket come out of the printer and the drawer opens. As soon as the internet is back, the till
sends the receipts by itself. Card payments on the Mollie payment terminal, Tap to Pay, a gift card or credit and saving tables
only work again with internet.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1. You see the bar.** If the connection drops, the bottom of the screen says "No connection. The till
  keeps working with the latest data on this device." The till checks every ten seconds whether the server
  is there and only switches to offline after three missed checks (about half a minute). A
  short hiccup therefore does not put the till offline straight away.
- **Step 2. Settling.** Tap Cash or Pay other as usual. With Pay other you arrange the
  payment yourself, for example on a separate card terminal. After settling you see "No connection. The receipt
  is ready and will be sent as soon as the internet is back."
- **Step 3. The Pin button.** If a Mollie payment terminal is connected to the till, the till cannot control it without
  internet. The till first checks once more whether the server is there after all. If it is not, the Pin button
  books as Pay other and you see "Booked as Pay other. Enter the amount yourself on the
  payment terminal." If no payment terminal is connected to the till, the Pin button books as it always does as Pin
  (external).
- **Step 4. Receipts.** In the Jimani app the customer receipt, the kitchen ticket and opening the drawer
  go directly through the app, even without internet. A receipt gets a number from its own series of this
  till, so two tills that settle at the same time without internet never give the same receipt number.
- **Step 5. Printing a receipt again.** Tap Order overview (without kitchen work the button is called Search
  order) in the bar at the top. Without internet a window Search order opens with today's receipts of this till. Search by receipt number,
  amount or time and tap Print again. A receipt that still has to go to the server has "(still
  to be sent)" next to it. You can also scan a receipt in the Scan the receipt box.
- **Step 6. The drawer without a sale.** Tapping twice on the logo at the top left opens the drawer, even without
  internet (in the Jimani app).
- **Step 7. Settings.** Without internet the cogwheel opens a small window with Connected
  printers, Print test receipt and Open cash drawer. Changing products and prices, users, language,
  payment settings and the day closing is only possible again with internet.
- **Step 8. The internet is back.** The bar disappears and you see the window "You're back
  online": the till forwards the receipts and checks whether there are changes. If it takes long, you
  can tap Use the till now. Every receipt has its own identifier: if the same receipt arrives twice,
  the server books it only once.

| Possible without internet | Only possible again with internet |
|---|---|
| Cash, Pay other and Pin (external) | Card payments on the Mollie payment terminal and Tap to Pay |
| Customer receipt, kitchen ticket and drawer (in the Jimani app) | Gift card, credit and paying with tokens |
| Searching and reprinting today's receipts of this till | Opening tables, Save to a table, transferring items |
| Opening the drawer via the logo | Looking up a bill, return and credit note |
| Viewing printers and printing a test receipt | Booking money in or out of the cash (Cash) |

- **What you see at a button that doesn't work:** "This is not possible without internet. Paying in cash is."
  At Cash you see "Without internet no money can be booked in or out of the cash."
- **The receipt numbers have run out.** The till tops up its series of receipt numbers as long as there is internet. If they
  have run out anyway, you see "The receipt numbers of this device have run out. Look for a connection before you continue
  settling." The receipt then stays on the screen and has not been settled.
- **Receipts that remain.** If the internet is back but there are still receipts, you see a
  red bar at the bottom "Receipts are still waiting to be sent." with the number. The till tries again every
  thirty seconds. If it fails after three attempts, it says "The server is not accepting a receipt. The
  receipt is not lost: it is on this till and will be retried. If this message stays, call
  Jimani." Such a receipt only counts towards revenue once it is at the server.
- **Logging in and out.** Without internet the till does not log anyone out by itself, and the payment terminal cannot check a
  PIN: you see "No internet. Logging in works again as soon as there is a connection."
- **Online once first.** The till only stores the products and prices on the device once it has
  been online. A new till therefore only works without internet after it has had a connection once. If you tap
  a product group, the till first asks the server and after four seconds without
  an answer takes the copy on the device.
- **A power cut** is not covered by this: without power the device itself does not work.

**Example:** During a wifi outage you settle with a guest in Cash. The receipt comes out of the
printer, the drawer opens and the receipt waits on the till. After ten minutes the internet is back: you see
"You're back online" and the receipt is then simply included in today's revenue.

**Related questions:**

- What happens if my wifi or internet goes down while settling?
- Can I take card payments offline?
- Can I print receipts and open the cash drawer without internet?
- What happens to receipts I made offline?
- Can I use a gift card offline?

**Keywords:** till offline, internet down till, till without internet, wifi outage till, card payment without internet, print receipt offline, internet outage

**Related:** [What happens if a card payment fails or is cancelled?](pinbetaling-mislukt.md), [How do I settle with my own separate card terminal?](pin-extern-eigen-pinautomaat.md), [Which receipts and payment methods does the Jimani POS support?](../naslag/bonnen-en-betaalwijzen.md)

---

# How do I settle with my own separate card terminal?

**Answer:** Just tap Pin. If no Mollie payment terminal and no Tap to Pay is connected to the till, the Pin button
books the receipt as Pin (external): paid with a separate card terminal outside Jimani. You enter the
amount yourself on your own card terminal; the receipt is immediately marked as paid and counts as
card payment in the reports.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Ring up the order and tap Pin (or tap Payment and then Pin in the Select
  payment method window).
- **Step 2.** Enter the same amount on your own card terminal and let the customer pay.
- **Step 3.** The till asks nothing more: there is no waiting window and no payment terminal reporting anything back.
  The receipt is completed and, if the till does that, printed.
- **In the figures.** Pin (external) counts as card payment on the Z report, the X report, the cash count and in
  the cash journal. Previously the Pin button without a payment terminal booked as Pay other; as a result
  the card revenue was under Other.
- **For everyone.** There is no setting: every till without a Mollie payment terminal or Tap does this.
  A till with a Mollie payment terminal or Tap simply sends the amount to that device.
- **Without internet.** Pin (external) also works if the till has no internet. If a
  Mollie payment terminal is connected to the till and the internet is down, the Pin button books as Pay other (see
  the article about the till without internet).
- **Paying part by card.** If you settle part of the receipt by card on a till without a payment terminal, that part
  is also booked as Pin (external).
- **Turning Pin off.** If you don't want the Pin button on a till at all, set Pin to No under Payment methods
  on this till (Settings > Till and products > Registers and hardware, open the till, page
  Till settings).
- **Pay other** continues to exist alongside it: with it you book a receipt that was paid outside Jimani.
  That revenue does not count as card payment in the reports.

**Example:** A snack bar has its own card terminal from the bank and no Mollie payment terminal. A customer
pays € 12.50: the employee taps Pin, enters € 12.50 on the card terminal, and in the day closing
the € 12.50 appears under card payments.

**Related questions:**

- Can I use the till with my own card terminal from the bank?
- What is Pin (external) on the till?
- How do I book a card payment if I enter the amount myself on a separate card terminal?
- Does a payment on my own card terminal count in the reports?

**Keywords:** separate card terminal, own card terminal till, pin external, card payment without mollie, card payment outside jimani, card revenue day closing

**Related:** [What do card payments cost with Jimani?](wat-kost-pinnen.md), [Does the till still work if the internet goes down?](kassa-zonder-internet.md), [Which receipts and payment methods does the Jimani POS support?](../naslag/bonnen-en-betaalwijzen.md)

---

# What happens if a card payment fails or is cancelled?

**Answer:** Then nothing has been booked and the receipt is open again, with a message. A receipt on a table
stays on the table with the same lines; a loose receipt without a table goes back so you can
settle it again without double revenue. Then settle again with Pin or with another payment method.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1. The amount goes to the payment terminal.** After Pin you see "Payment sent to the
  payment terminal" and "Waiting for payment on the payment terminal." The till waits until the payment terminal
  reports back.
- **Step 2. Cancelling.** You cancel on the payment terminal itself: "Cancel? Press the red stop button
  on the payment terminal." From the till a card payment on a Mollie payment terminal cannot be
  cancelled.
- **Step 3. Cancelled, failed or expired.** If Mollie reports that, you see "The card payment was
  cancelled. The receipt is still open; settle again." (or failed, or expired). If the Pin button is on
  the screen, you immediately choose Retry card payment or Close; otherwise you settle again however you like.
- **Step 4. No answer after three minutes.** Then the till stops waiting: "The payment terminal still gives no answer
  after three minutes. Check on the payment terminal whether the payment succeeded before you settle again." So first check
  on the payment terminal whether the amount went through.
- **The amount did not arrive on the payment terminal.** If Mollie returned no payment number, nothing is on
  the payment terminal and you see "The payment terminal did not receive the amount: Mollie returned no payment number. Nothing
  has been charged; try again or choose another payment method." The receipt goes back and the
  stock is added back.
- **No payment terminal connected.** Then you see "No payment terminal is connected to this till. Nothing has been
  charged; choose another payment method." Connect the payment terminal under Connected payment terminal of
  the till (Settings > Till and products > Registers and hardware).
- **Tap to Pay.** If a payment with Tap to Pay fails, you see "Tap to Pay did not succeed, choose
  a payment method again." With Cancel under the customer screen Jimani cancels the payment at Mollie:
  "Payment cancelled. The receipt is still open." If Mollie does not allow that, you see "Mollie does not allow this
  payment to be cancelled; it expires by itself. The receipt is still open."
- **Done.** After the payment the till completes the receipt and prints it (if the till prints a receipt).
  If a customer receipt does not come out of the printer, the till keeps trying for another half hour by itself. After that it appears
  under Other at Unprinted receipts, with the number behind it.
- **The till froze while ringing up.** If the till screen restarted before you had saved
  or settled, the till restores the order: "There was still an order that had not been saved. It has been restored." Lines that were already in a saved order are not added again. That works for the same employee, up to twelve hours later.

**Example:** A guest presses stop on the payment terminal. The till reports "The card payment was cancelled.
The receipt is still open; settle again." The receipt is still on table 4; the guest then pays in cash.

**Related questions:**

- What if the card payment doesn't work, is the receipt paid anyway?
- Is the revenue booked twice if I have to pay by card again?
- What happens to the table if the card payment is cancelled?
- The customer cancelled the card payment, what now?

**Keywords:** card payment failed, card payment cancelled, payment terminal no amount, payment cancelled till, receipt still open, card receipt not printed

**Related:** [Does the till still work if the internet goes down?](kassa-zonder-internet.md), [How does Tap to Pay work on a handheld or tablet?](tap-to-pay.md), [How does the payment window of the till work?](../naslag/betaalvenster.md)

---

# How does Tap to Pay work on a handheld or tablet?

**Answer:** With Tap to Pay the customer taps a card or phone against your handheld or Android tablet,
via the Mollie Tap app. You turn on the Tap to Pay integration (€5 per month, excl. VAT, for an
unlimited number of devices), connect the Tap with the Connect Tap to Pay button under Registers and hardware,
and turn on Tap to Pay on the device. It does not work on a fixed till screen.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1. Mollie.** Your business must be connected to Mollie. Without Mollie you see when connecting
  "This store is not connected to Mollie yet. Connect Mollie first; then the Tap can be added."
- **Step 2. The integration.** Turn on Tap to Pay under Settings > Add-ons.
- **Step 3. Connecting the Tap.** Go to Settings > Till and products > Registers and hardware and tap
  Connect Tap to Pay. You get a QR code and a code with "Valid until". Scan the QR code with the Mollie
  Tap app on the device, or type the code in there. The Tap then appears automatically under POS &
  Hardware.
- **Step 4. The device.** Open the device under Registers and hardware. For a handheld or phone you set
  Tap to Pay active to Yes ("If this is set to yes, you settle by tapping a card or phone against this device.").
  If there are several Taps, you choose the Tap of this device under Tap to Pay terminal. For a tablet
  as a till you choose the Tap of this tablet under Tap to Pay (or Off).
- **Step 5. Settling.** If only a Tap is connected to the device, the Pin button is called Tap to Pay. If
  both a payment terminal and a Tap are connected, the till first asks at Pin "How does the customer want to pay by card?" with Tap
  to Pay or Payment terminal.
- **Step 6. The customer screen.** You see the logo of the business, the amount and the Tap to Pay sign. With Rotate
  you turn the screen upside down, so that the customer can read it when you turn the device around. If the integration
  Keep track of tips is on, the customer first chooses No tip, 5%, 10% or 15%, Round to a round amount or Other
  amount. Then the Mollie Tap app opens with the amount; after the payment you automatically return to Jimani.
- **Cancel.** With Cancel under the customer screen Jimani cancels the payment and the receipt is open again.
- **No amount in Mollie Tap?** Then the device is connected to a different Tap. The till says so too:
  choose at the device the Tap that Mollie Tap shows under Settings, cancel the payment and settle again.
- **Not possible.** Tap to Pay does not work on our own till screen (it has no suitable NFC chip),
  not without internet, and not for part of the receipt: "Tap to Pay is not possible for part of the receipt.
  Choose another payment method for this part."
- **Turning it off per till.** Under Payment methods on this till there is a separate Tap to Pay row as soon as Tap to Pay is
  on for the device.
- **Cost per payment.** In addition you pay the Mollie rate per transaction, as with card payments.

![The POS & Hardware screen with the buttons Connect a POS and Connect Tap to Pay at the top right.](/kennisbank/beelden/tap-to-pay-1.webp)

**Example:** A terrace employee settles €23.40 with the handheld. She taps Tap to Pay, turns the
device around, the guest chooses a 10% tip and taps their phone against the handheld. Mollie Tap reports paid and the
handheld is back on the till.

**Related questions:**

- Can I accept card payments with my phone without a card terminal?
- How do I let customers pay contactless on my tablet?
- What does Tap to Pay cost?
- Does Tap to Pay work on a fixed till screen?

**Keywords:** tap to pay, mollie tap, card payment with phone, contactless handheld, tap and pay, tablet card payment

**Related:** [What do card payments cost with Jimani?](wat-kost-pinnen.md), [What happens if a card payment fails or is cancelled?](pinbetaling-mislukt.md), [How do I order and settle with a handheld or phone?](handheld-bestellen.md)

---

# How do I take back an item or credit a paid receipt at the till?

**Answer:** Look up the receipt with Look up a bill (under Other) or scan it in the Scan the receipt box,
tap Credit and tap the lines that are coming back. They appear on the receipt with a minus quantity. Then settle:
you give the money back with Cash, Pay other, Refund to card or as a Gift voucher. Crediting
is only possible with the Refund integration (free).

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1. Looking up the receipt.** Tap Other > Look up a bill. The last receipt of this till
  then appears in the receipt box, with receipt number, date, amount and Paid or Outstanding. With the arrows you page further
  back. If you have the receipt on paper, scan the barcode in the Scan the receipt box at the top.
- **Step 2. Crediting.** For a paid receipt the buttons under the receipt box are Receipt details (the
  i sign), Print receipt, Credit and, for an open receipt, Delete and Pay. Tap Credit: the receipt
  opens and the trash is on.
- **Step 3. Choosing the lines.** Tap every line that is coming back. If there are more of them, the till asks
  how many. The line is added with a minus quantity, never more than was on the receipt.
- **Step 4. The reason.** If the Reason box is under the receipt, choose Ordered incorrectly, Incorrect order,
  Complaint about the article, Something is missing or Other; for Other you fill in Other reason. Without a reason you see
  "Select a reason for refund". If there was a discount or tip on the receipt, those amounts are shown
  too and you can adjust them.
- **Taking back miscellaneous items.** You don't take back a miscellaneous item with the trash: "You take back a Miscellaneous line
  with Miscellaneous and a minus amount."
- **Step 5. Giving back.** Tap Pay (or Cash or Pin). In the window you choose how the money goes back:
  Cash, Pay other, Refund to card (only for a receipt paid via Mollie) or Gift voucher
  (only with the Gift voucher integration). On account and the payment terminal cannot be used for money back; if you tap
  the Pin button, the till books it as Pay other. A return that comes to zero books itself.
  Reservations: a reservation paid online is refunded under Refunds overview, not at the
  till.
- **Step 6. The credit note.** The till prints a credit note, just like with a normal sale.
- **Exchanging.** If you ring up new products next to the return lines, the till settles the difference.
- **An open receipt or a table.** On a receipt that has not been paid yet, you remove lines with the trash;
  that is not a credit. In Look up a bill the button is then called Delete.
- **Permissions.** If Returns and refunds is set to No under Permissions on this till, the till asks for the PIN
  of someone who is allowed. Refund to card additionally requires the permission Refund via Mollie.
- **Without the integration.** Then the trash is grey on a paid receipt and you see "You need the Refunds
  integration for this option." Turn on Refund under Settings > Your business >
  Add-ons.
- **Without internet** return and credit note are not possible; that works again as soon as there is a connection.

**Example:** A customer brings back a lamp of €39.95 bought by mistake. You look up the receipt with
Look up a bill, tap Credit and the lamp, choose the reason Ordered incorrectly and give the money back
in cash. The drawer opens and the credit note comes out of the printer.

**Related questions:**

- How do I take back an item?
- How do I give a customer their money back?
- How do I make a credit note?
- Can I reverse a paid receipt?

**Keywords:** return till, credit receipt, money back till, credit note, take back product, refund at the till, exchange

**Related:** [How do I refund a return to the customer's bank card?](terug-naar-de-pas.md), [How does the till screen work in Jimani?](../naslag/kassascherm.md), [What can you set per till under Payment methods, Permissions, Auto-lock and Table name required?](../naslag/kassa-instellingen-per-kassa.md)

---

# How do I refund a return to the customer's bank card?

**Answer:** Choose Refund to card when giving back. The money then goes back via Mollie to the card
or account the customer paid with. That is possible for a receipt paid via Mollie (card payment, Tap to Pay or
online), up to 120 days after the payment and up to the amount that can still be refunded. You need the permission Refund
via Mollie.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Look up the receipt with Other > Look up a bill or scan it at Scan the receipt, tap
  Credit and tap the lines that are coming back (see the article about returns and crediting).
- **Step 2.** Tap Pay. In the window, under money back, is the button Refund to card, with below it
  "Via Mollie back to the customer's card or account" and the maximum.
- **Step 3.** Tap Refund to card. The till asks "€ ... goes via Mollie back to the customer's
  card. Continue?" Choose Refund. The server calculates the amount itself, per line with supplements and
  discount, plus proportionally the tip and the receipt discount.
- **Step 4.** Only when Mollie says yes does the till book the return and the credit note comes out of the printer. The
  return is then recorded as card payment in the books, on the till where you do it.
- **Can less be refunded than you want?** Then it says "Another € ... can be refunded to the card. Pay back the rest
  in cash." The button is then grey; give the money back with Cash.
- **Tapping twice does no harm.** Every attempt has its own key. If the till gets no answer, you
  see "The till got no answer. Tap Refund to card again: it will not be refunded
  twice."
- **Who is allowed.** The permission Refund via Mollie is under Settings > Your business > Users and
  permissions, tab User permissions. By default it is on for Owner and Manager; the owner is always
  allowed. In addition the Refund integration must be on, and Pin must be on under Payment methods on
  this till.
- **The status on the receipt.** On the receipt you see how it stands: Being processed by Mollie, Refunded to the
  card, Card refund cancelled, or "Card refund failed, pay back in cash".
  If a refund still fails later at Mollie, Jimani rebooks that part in the journal from card payment
  to cash; give the money back in cash then.

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| This receipt was not paid via Mollie, so it cannot be refunded to the card. | The receipt was paid in cash, with Pay other or with Pin (external). | Give the money back with Cash or Pay other. |
| This payment is older than 120 days. Mollie can no longer refund it. | Mollie refunds up to 120 days back. | Pay back in cash. |
| There is too little balance on your Mollie account to refund this now. | Mollie does not have the money for it right now. | Pay back in cash, or first add funds to Mollie. |
| Mollie did not make the refund. Pay back in cash. | Mollie refused. Nothing has been booked. | Pay back in cash. |
| You don't have permission to refund via Mollie. Ask the owner (Settings > Roles). | Your role does not have the permission Refund via Mollie. | Ask the owner to turn on the permission under Users and permissions > User permissions. |
| Refunds are turned off for this store. | The Refund integration is off. | Turn it on under Settings > Add-ons. |
| Your Mollie account is not connected. Pay back in cash. | There is no Mollie connection. | Pay back in cash; connect Mollie under Settings > Money and figures > Payments (Mollie). |

**Example:** A customer paid €60 by card last week and brings back an item of €25. You credit the
item, choose Refund to card and confirm €25. Mollie puts the €25 back on their card and the credit note
comes out of the printer.

**Related questions:**

- How do I put money back on the customer's card?
- How long after the payment can I still refund?
- Which permissions do I need to refund via Mollie?
- Can I refund a cash receipt to the card?

**Keywords:** refund to card, return card payment, money back on bank card, mollie refund till, refund card, refund

**Related:** [How do I take back an item or credit a paid receipt at the till?](retour-en-crediteren.md), [What do card payments cost with Jimani?](wat-kost-pinnen.md)

---

# How do I add a tip for cash or card payments?

**Answer:** Turn on the Keep track of tips integration (free). Then the payment window for Cash,
Pay other and Pin shows the Tips block with 5%, 10%, 15% and Manual. With card payments the amount and the tip go in
one go to the payment terminal. The tip is booked separately: no revenue and no VAT.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on Keep track of tips under Settings > Add-ons.
- **Step 2.** Settle with Cash or Pay other. In the payment window you choose under Tips 5%, 10% or 15%
  (the amount is shown under each percentage) or Manual for your own amount. Under the block it says "Tip
  is added to the total amount" and Total incl. tip.
- **Step 3.** With Pin you get the same window with Tips on, with only the tip block. Amount plus tip
  go together to the payment terminal.
- **Tip on the payment terminal itself.** If the customer gives a tip on the payment terminal, the payment comes in higher
  than the receipt asked for. Jimani also books that difference as a tip, not as revenue.
- **Tap to Pay.** There the customer chooses the tip on the customer screen: No tip, 5%, 10%, 15%, Round to
  a round amount or Other amount.
- **A table that has already been booked.** If the table is already in the cash journal (after Save or on account), the
  tip goes on a separate tip receipt: without items, only the tip, paid with the same payment method.
- **Not for money back.** With a return there is no tip block. If there was a tip on the receipt you credit,
  you see it at the return and can adjust it.
- **Paying out tips to staff.** If you take tips from the drawer, book that with Other > Cash >
  Withdrawal and the reason Tip paid out.
- **Not in every free till.** In the free till for shops and for treatments the tip block
  is not there.

**Example:** A bill of €42 is paid by card with a 10% tip. In the window you choose 10% (€4.20); the
payment terminal asks for €46.20. The revenue shows €42, the €4.20 is recorded as a tip.

**Related questions:**

- Can a guest give a tip when paying by card?
- How do I turn on tips on the till?
- Does the tip count as revenue and VAT?
- Can I let people choose fixed tip percentages such as 5 or 10 percent?

**Keywords:** tip till, tip card payment, add tip, tip cash, book tip, tip not revenue

**Related:** [How do I book money in or out of the cash drawer?](kas-storten-en-opnemen.md), [How does the payment window of the till work?](../naslag/betaalvenster.md), [How does Tap to Pay work on a handheld or tablet?](tap-to-pay.md)

---

# Can a guest split the bill?

**Answer:** Yes, in two ways. If someone wants to pay part, you enter a lower amount at Cash:
that becomes a partial payment and you settle the rest afterwards, also with another payment method. If a guest
only wants to pay their own lines of a table, you move those with Other > Split the bill to
another table and settle that table separately.

**Explanation:**

- **Partial payment.** Settle with Cash and enter less at Cash (the amount received) than the Outstanding
  amount. After Pay Now you see "Partial payment registered. Pay the remaining amount to complete this
  order." The outstanding amount is shown under the receipt at Outstanding amount, next to Total paid. Settle the
  rest with Cash, Pin or another payment method. Only when everything is paid is the receipt done.
- **During a partial payment** you can no longer change anything on the receipt: no adding products, no
  removing anything. If you want to leave the page, the till asks "The payment of the order is still open.
  Are you sure you want to leave this page?" If you leave anyway, you settle the rest later from the
  order overview.
- **Paying part by card.** If part has already been paid, the outstanding part with Pin simply goes to the
  payment terminal. Tap to Pay is not possible for part of the receipt.
- **Split the bill (per guest).** Open the table. Choose Other > Split the bill. Next to the saved
  lines of the table there are then checkmarks and Quantity to transfer. Tick the guest's lines, choose the quantity
  and tap Transfer the selected items. In Choose Parking Table ("Choose the table the order should be booked
  to.") choose the table they are going to, for example a new table with the guest's name. You see
  "Lines moved". Then simply settle that table.
- **When is Split the bill possible?** Only with an opened table with saved lines: the button is
  under Other and is grey until the lines of the table have loaded. You need tables (Parking tables
  integration).
- **Equal parts** (the bill divided by four) are not calculated by the till; enter the amount per person yourself
  as a partial payment.

**Example:** Table 7 has €84 outstanding. Two guests each pay €30 in cash: enter €30 twice
as a partial payment. The last guest pays the remaining €24 by card, and then the receipt is completed.

**Related questions:**

- How do I split the bill at the table?
- Can guests pay separately?
- How do I let a guest pay only part of the bill?
- How do I move lines to another table to split?

**Keywords:** split bill, split payment, pay separately, partial payment, half cash half card, guests settle separately

**Related:** [How do I work with tables on the till?](tafels-op-de-kassa.md), [How does the payment window of the till work?](../naslag/betaalvenster.md)

---

# How do I choose supplements or options for a product at the till?

**Answer:** If a product has supplements, related products or is a set, tapping the tile opens the product
window. There you tap the choices per group, set the quantity right and tap Add to cart.
Since 15-10-2026 the choices are spread over multiple lines, so you no longer have to scroll
sideways.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Tap the product. If it has no choices, it goes straight onto the receipt. If it does have
  choices, the product window opens with the name, the photo with the price and the groups with choices.
- **Step 2.** In each group tap the choice; a checkmark appears and the price of the supplement is shown
  below it. In a group where only one choice is allowed, a new tap replaces the previous one. A sold-out choice
  is grey and cannot be tapped.
- **Step 3.** For a product set you choose one product per Layer. If the product has sizes or kinds, you
  choose those under Product variants.
- **Step 4.** At the bottom set the quantity with minus and plus; next to it is the Total. Tap Add to
  cart.
- **Mandatory choice.** If a group is required and you have not chosen anything, you see "Required
  supplements" with "Type 1 supplement is required" (or 2 or 3). Choose one and tap Add
  to cart again. If no size has been chosen while that is required, the size boxes light up.
- **Related products.** Under the choices is Related products. Tap one to order it at the same time;
  the required groups also apply to that product.
- **Allergies.** If there are allergens for the product, you see them under Allergies.
- **More lines at once.** Press the tile for half a second: in the window "Quantity ..." you enter the
  quantity and choose OK. If the product has choices, the product window then opens with that quantity already
  filled in.
- **On the receipt** the supplements are shown under the product, with their price. On the handheld fewer
  choices fit next to each other than on the till; long names continue on a second line.
- **Creating supplements** is done at the product itself, not at the till. The Supplements integration is
  free.

**Example:** A guest orders a burger. You tap Burger, choose Mayonnaise in the group Sauce and Cheese and Bacon in the
group Extra, set the quantity to 2 and tap Add to cart. The receipt shows
2 Burger with the supplements below.

**Related questions:**

- How do I add options to a product at the till?
- Why does a window open when I tap a product?
- How do I set the quantity right in the product window?
- Do I still have to scroll sideways to see all choices?

**Keywords:** supplements till, extra options product, choose sauce, product window, mandatory choice, toppings, product set

**Related:** [How does the till screen work in Jimani?](../naslag/kassascherm.md)

---

# How do I send dishes to the kitchen per course from the till?

**Answer:** With the Courses integration (€10 per month, excl. VAT;
free until 1 January 2027 if you already use it) every item on the receipt gets its
course, such as starter or main course. The receipt is organised per course. With Other > Next course you call
the next waiting course of the table to the kitchen. You move an item to another course by tapping
it and choosing Change course.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1. Setting up.** Turn on Courses under Settings > Add-ons. Create the courses and
  link them to your products under Settings > Till and products > Courses. The first course of a
  product is its default course.
- **Step 2. Ringing up.** Tap the products as usual. Every item gets its default course. On the receipt
  there is a heading per course in the colour of the course, with the number of items, for example "Starter · 5
  items". Whatever has no course is at the top under Direct and goes straight to the kitchen.
- **Step 3. Changing the course.** Tap an item on the receipt (not in trash mode). In the
  Change course window you choose under Quantity how many of this item go to the other course (with One less
  and One more) and under Course the course. Direct means: immediately, without calling. You see "Course changed".
- **Step 4. Saving.** Save the order on the table. Then the following go to the kitchen: the first course of the
  table, every course that sends directly (for example drinks) and everything without a course. The following courses
  wait. An order without a table (at the counter, takeaway) never waits: everything goes straight through there.
- **Step 5. Next course.** When the table is ready for the next course, choose Other > Next course.
  Under the button it says which course that is. You see, for example, "Main course goes to the kitchen". If nothing
  is waiting any more, you see "No course is waiting".
- **Saved lines.** At the saved lines of the table the status is shown per course: Direct, Waiting,
  Called with the time, or In the kitchen. A saved item can only be moved to another course as long as
  it is still waiting; otherwise you see "This item is already in the kitchen." If you put a waiting item in a course that
  has already been called, it goes straight to the kitchen ("... goes to the kitchen now").
- **Where.** Next course is only under Other if a table is open. Courses also work on the
  handheld.
- **Without the integration** there are no courses on the receipt and the till stays as it was.

**Example:** Table 3 orders two soups and two steaks. The soups are under Starter, the steaks
under Main course. After Save the soups go to the kitchen. When the soup is finished, you choose Other > Next
course and see "Main course goes to the kitchen".

**Related questions:**

- How do I call the main course to the kitchen?
- Can I send starter and main course to the kitchen separately?
- How do I move a dish to another course?
- What does the courses feature cost?

**Keywords:** courses till, next course, starter main course, call course, courses kitchen, change course

**Related:** [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md), [How do I work with tables on the till?](tafels-op-de-kassa.md)

---

# How do I use buzzers at the till?

**Answer:** Turn on the Buzzers integration and set Buzzer at this till to Yes on the till screen. Then with every order
you choose under Other > Add buzzer the number of the buzzer the guest takes along. That
number appears at the top of the receipt and is shown with the order. Buzzers cost €10 per month per till screen
with the buzzer on (excl. VAT).

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on Buzzers under Settings > Add-ons.
- **Step 2.** Go to Settings > Till and products > Registers and hardware, open the till and on the
  Till settings page set Buzzer at this till to Yes. It says there: "If this is set to yes, you enter a buzzer number
  for every order on this screen and that number appears at the top of the receipt."
- **Step 3.** Ring up the order and choose Other > Add buzzer. In the Buzzer number window there is already
  a suggestion: the previous number on this till plus one. Adjust it with minus and plus or type it in, and choose
  OK.
- **Step 4.** Settle. The buzzer number goes along with the order: at the top of the receipt and in the Buzzer column
  in the order overview.
- **Both must be on.** If only the integration is on, or only Buzzer at this till, Add buzzer
  is not under Other. A till that is not connected (for example the till in a normal browser
  without a connection) never has a buzzer.
- **Paying per screen.** You pay per till screen on which Buzzer at this till is set to Yes. A counter
  with buzzers and a terrace till without therefore costs €10 once.
- **Not with a return.** With a receipt with return lines, Other (and so Add buzzer) is grey.
- **The buzzer itself.** Jimani does not make the buzzer go off. Jimani only puts the number on the receipt and with the
  order; you make the buzzer go off with your own buzzer system.

**Example:** A takeaway business gives a buzzer with every order. The employee chooses Add buzzer,
the till suggests 14 (the previous one was 13), and the receipt shows 14 at the top.

**Related questions:**

- Can I give guests a buzzer for when their order is ready?
- How do I link a buzzer number to an order?
- What does the buzzer feature cost?
- Where do I turn on buzzers on the till?

**Keywords:** buzzer till, restaurant pager, buzzer number, takeaway buzzer, buzzer on the receipt, waiting pager

**Related:** [What does an extra POS, handheld, kitchen screen or buzzer cost?](../../prijzen/faq/extra-kassa-handheld-keukenscherm.md), [How does the till screen work in Jimani?](../naslag/kassascherm.md), [What can you set on a POS screen, handheld, tablet or phone?](../naslag/apparaat-kassascherm-instellen.md), [Is the order number on the receipt and can I put it large at the top?](bestelnummer-op-de-bon.md)

---

# How do I work with tables on the till?

**Answer:** Tap Tables next to the payment buttons, choose a table or create one with New table. Save the
order with Save; the lines stay on the table until you settle. A table belongs to one device
at a time. With Table name required set to Yes every new table must get a real name, and an outstanding
credit never expires without the till asking.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1. Choosing a table.** Tap Tables. The Tables window ("Park the order by placing it on a
  table") shows all tables; a table with an open bill stands out. Search with Search table name. With the
  Restaurant integration you also filter by status (All tables, Free, Reserved, Late, Occupied / open bill)
  and by location, and there is a Legend with what the colours mean.
- **Step 2. New table.** Tap New table. At the top choose Main guest Yes or No (default No), type the
  Table name (letters and numbers, up to 20 characters, for example "Family Jansen" or "12") and with
  Restaurant choose the Location. Tap the checkmark. If the name already exists, you see "This table already exists."
- **Step 3. Ringing up and saving.** The name of the table is next to the order number; you can also change it
  there. Ring up products and tap Save. The lines go to the table (and to the kitchen) and the till
  is empty again for the next order. If you open the table later, the saved lines are above.
- **Step 4. Settling.** Open the table and tap Pay (or Cash or Pin). If a guest wants to pay separately,
  use Split the bill under Other.
- **Leave the table.** With the cross at the top right of the receipt you leave the table without settling.
- **One device at a time.** If a colleague has the table open on another device, you see "This table is in
  use" and "The table is currently opened by" with their name: "Only when the table is no longer open there can you
  open it." If there is nothing new on your table, the till releases the table after a minute
  so a colleague can get to it. If someone takes it over while you are typing, you see "The table has been
  taken over".
- **Reminder.** If there is something on your table that has not been saved or settled, then after a while
  of doing nothing "Your table is still open" appears at the top right with "Save the order or settle it."
  You set that time per till or handheld under Open table reminder after (1, 5, 10, 15 or 60 minutes, or off;
  default 5).
- **Table name required.** If Table name required is set to Yes for this till, the till asks for a
  new table and when opening a free table "Name for this table" ("On this till every
  new table gets a name, for example the name of the guest."). Choose Open table or Back. The name must have
  at least 3 characters, not be only digits and not be the default name such as Table 6.
- **Credit does not expire silently.** If you have put a credit on a table (a minus line) and you leave the table
  (cross, another table, New table or a customer on account), the till first asks "Credit is still
  open": "A credit is still open (...). If you leave the table, this credit expires." Choose Back to
  stay on the table, or Discard credit.
- **Main guests.** A table with Main guest set to Yes is not among the normal tables but with the
  main guests. At the bottom of the window you show them with Show main guests.
- **Lines to another table.** With Other > Split the bill you transfer selected lines to
  another table, for example when guests move or want to pay separately.
- **Without internet** you cannot open a table and cannot save anything on a table.
- **No Tables button?** Then the Parking tables integration is off. If Tables and reservations is set to No
  under Permissions on this till, the till asks for a PIN.

**Example:** A group walks in without a reservation. The employee taps Tables > New table,
types "Family de Vries", rings up drinks and taps Save. Later a colleague opens
the same table on the handheld and adds the food; at the end the till settles the whole table.

**Related questions:**

- How do I save an order for a table?
- How do I create a new table on the till?
- Can two people order at the same table at the same time?
- How do I enforce that a table gets a name?

**Keywords:** tables till, open table, new table, park table, table name, save order on table, table occupied

**Related:** [Can a guest split the bill?](rekening-splitsen.md), [How does the Tables window on the till work?](../naslag/tafels-venster.md), [What can you set per till under Payment methods, Permissions, Auto-lock and Table name required?](../naslag/kassa-instellingen-per-kassa.md)

---

# How do I order and settle with a handheld or phone?

**Answer:** A handheld or phone with the Jimani app is a till in your hand: the same products, tables
and payment buttons, on a narrow screen. What you ring up on the handheld is immediately on the table and goes to
the same kitchen. A handheld costs €5 per month per device (excl. VAT); a phone with the handheld app
also counts as a handheld.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1. Connecting.** Connect the device under Settings > Till and products > Registers and hardware with
  Connect a POS: you get a pairing code that you type in the app. The device then appears under
  POS & Hardware.
- **Step 2. Ringing up.** Tap the name of the category at the top: the list of categories slides across the
  screen. Choose a category and tap the products.
- **Step 3. The receipt.** At the bottom is a bar with the number of items, View order (or Nothing rung up
  yet) and the total. Tap it: the receipt slides up with the same buttons as on the till. With the
  cross (Close receipt) it closes again; if you are on a table, you leave that too.
- **Step 4. Tables.** Tap Tables, choose the table and tap Save. The lines are then on the table, also for
  the till. A table belongs to one device at a time: if the till has it open, you see who.
- **Step 5. Settling.** Settle with Cash, Pin or Pay other, just like on the till. With Tap to Pay the customer
  pays by card on the handheld itself. For cash the device needs a cash drawer or wallet;
  you choose it under Change cash drawer or wallet.
- **The Settings window.** Tap the logo at the top left. There you find Logged in as, Change receipt printer,
  Change cash drawer or wallet, Change user, Sign in or Sign out, Log out, Check for
  updates and at the bottom the version of the app. What you change here also changes under POS & Hardware.
- **Log in for every order.** At the device you set whether the employee signs in with their PIN for every order
  (Yes) or once at the start of the shift (No, then there is a log out button on the
  screen).
- **What is different from the till.** Customer details and Repair are not on the handheld, and Look up a
  bill is under Other.
- **Reservations.** At the top there is also Book (today's reservations), with Restaurant Floorplan,
  and Reservation to create one.

**Example:** A restaurant with one till and two handhelds pays 2 × €5 = €10 per
month for the handhelds; the first till is free. The waiter takes the order at the table, taps Save, and the
till and the kitchen see it immediately.

**Related questions:**

- Can I take orders at the table with my phone?
- What does a handheld cost per month?
- Does an order from the handheld go straight to the kitchen?
- Is a handheld the same as the till?

**Keywords:** handheld ordering, order at the table, phone as till, mobile till, handheld hospitality, waiter handheld

**Related:** [How do I sign in or out on the till and the handheld?](aanmelden-en-afmelden.md), [How does Tap to Pay work on a handheld or tablet?](tap-to-pay.md), [What does an extra POS, handheld, kitchen screen or buzzer cost?](../../prijzen/faq/extra-kassa-handheld-keukenscherm.md)

---

# How do I sign in or out on the till and the handheld?

**Answer:** With the Log in on the till integration every employee signs in with their own PIN
on the PIN pad. On the handheld, Sign in/Sign out and Log out are in the menu at the top and in the
Settings window; on the till you switch with Switch staff member. Whoever is signed in is signed out automatically after
twelve hours, or fifteen minutes before the day closing time if that comes earlier.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1. Turning it on.** Turn on Log in on the till under Settings > Add-ons and give your
  employees a PIN under Settings > Your business > Users and permissions. The PIN pad only appears when there is
  at least one employee with a PIN.
- **Step 2. Signing in.** Enter your PIN on the PIN pad and tap the checkmark. Empty input gives "Enter your
  PIN first.", a wrong code "Unknown PIN." After too many wrong attempts you have to wait a moment.
- **Step 3. Signing out on the handheld.** Tap the Sign out icon in the menu at the top (the name of whoever is
  signed in is next to it) or open the Settings window via the logo. The PIN pad appears over the screen; nothing
  is lost. As long as nobody is signed in, the button is called Sign in and the PIN pad has a cross to
  go back.
- **Step 4. Switching on the till.** Tap the cogwheel (Settings) and choose Switch staff member. The PIN pad
  appears, with a cross to go back.
- **Logging out.** Logging out on the handheld first asks "Log out and unlink this handheld? Afterwards you need
  a pairing code to log in again." On the till the button is called Log out (unlink register). After
  logging out the device has to be linked again; signing out is therefore usually what you want.
- **Automatically signed out.** The till and the handheld check every minute, and immediately when you pick the device up
  again. The moment is the earlier of two: twelve hours after signing in, or fifteen minutes before the
  day closing time of your business (Settings > Money and figures > Day closing, default 06:00). Whoever signs in
  just before that moment is not immediately dropped again: then the next moment counts.
- **Your order stays.** Signing out only puts the PIN pad over the screen. If you sign in again, the
  till restores the order you had not saved. If a colleague signs in, your
  order is kept (twelve hours) until you come back.
- **Auto-lock.** Separately from that, a till can go to the PIN pad after a number of minutes of doing nothing,
  so the next employee signs in. You set that per till under Auto-lock (1 to 240
  minutes). It is only possible with at least two users with a PIN; then it is on by default after 5
  minutes.
- **Forgot your PIN?** On the PIN pad tap "Forgot your PIN? Log in with your password", log in with your
  email address and password and then change your PIN under Users.
- **Without internet** the PIN pad cannot check your PIN ("No internet. Logging in works again as soon as there is a
  connection.") and the till does not sign anyone out automatically.

**Example:** An employee signs in at 17:00 on the handheld; the day closing is set to 03:00. At
02:45 the PIN pad appears by itself, even if they are still busy. What they had not yet saved is ready again
as soon as they enter their PIN.

**Related questions:**

- How do I log out on my handheld when my shift is over?
- How do I switch employees on the till?
- Is my staff signed out automatically on the till?
- Where do I enter my PIN to start working?
- What is the difference between signing out and logging out?

**Keywords:** sign in till, sign out handheld, pin code till, switch staff member, signed out automatically, log out handheld, lock till

**Related:** [How do I order and settle with a handheld or phone?](handheld-bestellen.md), [How does the PIN pad and linking a till work?](../naslag/pinpad-en-koppelen.md)

---

# Can I use multiple tills, for example one for the bar and one for the terrace?

**Answer:** Yes. You connect each till, handheld or phone separately under Registers and hardware, and per till
you set which products are on it, which printers, drawer and card terminal belong to it and which
payment methods are allowed. This way you can make, for example, a bar till and a terrace till. A till beyond the first
costs €15 per month (excl. VAT); the till in the dashboard does not count.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1. Connecting.** Connect each till under Settings > Till and products > Registers and hardware with
  Connect a POS. Give it a clear name under Display name, such as Bar till.
- **Step 2. Products per till.** Open the till. If Always show all products on the POS? is set to Yes,
  it sells everything, including products you add later. With No you choose per category which products
  are on this till.
- **Step 3. Devices per till.** Choose per till the Connected receipt printer, Connected kitchen printer(s),
  the Connected kitchen screen, the Connected cash drawer and the Connected payment terminal. Without a cash drawer, cash payment is not possible on
  that till; without a receipt printer no receipt ever comes out.
- **Step 4. Payment methods and permissions per till.** On the Till settings page you set Payment methods on this
  till (for example only card on the terrace) and Permissions on this till.
- **Tables per area.** With the Restaurant integration tables belong to a location (for example Terrace or
  Hall). In the Tables window you filter per location. There is no separate "zone" setting; you work with
  the tills, their products and the locations of the tables.
- **Together on one table.** Tills and handhelds work on the same tables. A table belongs to one device
  at a time; the other device sees who has it open.
- **The till in the dashboard.** Every store has one web till in the dashboard; that does not count as a till.
  If another computer opens it, you see "This till is open on another computer." with the button Continue
  here. A second till screen on a computer is an extra till.
- **A computer that is not attached to a till.** If you pay in cash or by card there, Jimani asks In
  which till? or Which card terminal? ("This PC is not attached to a till. Choose the till this revenue should be
  included in."). With Remember choice (on by default) it does not ask again until you log in
  again.
- **Costs.** The first till is free, every till beyond that €15 per month. A handheld or phone costs
  €5 per month per device.

**Example:** A café with a bar till, a terrace till and two handhelds pays €15 for the second till
and 2 × €5 for the handhelds: €25 per month excl. VAT. On the terrace till there are only drinks and ice cream, and
the payment method Cash is off there.

**Related questions:**

- Can I have a separate till for bar and terrace?
- What does an extra till cost?
- Can I set different products and printers per till?
- How many tills can I connect?

**Keywords:** multiple tills, extra till, bar till terrace, points of sale, till per area, second till cost

**Related:** [What does an extra POS, handheld, kitchen screen or buzzer cost?](../../prijzen/faq/extra-kassa-handheld-keukenscherm.md), [What can you set per till under Payment methods, Permissions, Auto-lock and Table name required?](../naslag/kassa-instellingen-per-kassa.md)

---

# Can I use a self-order kiosk?

**Answer:** Jimani has the Kiosk device: a stand or tablet on which guests order themselves via your
webshop widget. You add it under Registers and hardware and choose at the device which widget
is on it. In the settings of the webshop you determine whether food, takeaway and delivery are possible on the kiosk.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Add the kiosk under Settings > Till and products > Registers and hardware. You can add
  more kiosks; each is a separate device.
- **Step 2.** Open the kiosk and choose under Widgets the widget you show on this stand ("The widget you show
  on this stand."). For a kiosk you can also add an image for the screen saver and a
  background.
- **Step 3.** In the settings of the webshop widget you set what is possible on the kiosk: Show food
  option on the kiosk, Takeaway active for an order via the kiosk, Deliver actively for an order via
  the kiosk, and Show items that are out of stock in the Kiosk.
- **The orders.** An order from the kiosk is in your orders; in the details of the
  order it says under Ordered via: Kiosk.
- **Printing.** A kiosk can serve as a printer for receipts; with a test receipt you see "The receipt was sent to the
  printer."

**Example:** A lunchroom puts a tablet as a kiosk at the entrance with the webshop widget Lunch. Takeaway
is on, delivery off. Guests order themselves and the order is in the list with Ordered via Kiosk.

**Related questions:**

- Can guests order themselves at a stand?
- How do I set up a tablet as a self-service kiosk?
- Can I let people order delivery and takeaway via the kiosk?
- Which widget do I run on the stand?

**Keywords:** kiosk, self-order kiosk, order kiosk, order yourself, kiosk tablet, ordering stand

**Related:** [Can I use multiple tills, for example one for the bar and one for the terrace?](meerdere-kassas-en-verkooppunten.md)

---

# How do I look up an earlier receipt and print it again?

**Answer:** Choose Other > Look up a bill. The last receipt of this till is then in the receipt box; with
the arrows you page further back. Tap Print receipt to print it again. A paper receipt you scan
in the Scan the receipt box at the top. A bill for the guest before they pay you print with the
little printer icon next to the payment buttons.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Tap Other > Look up a bill. If there is nothing else under Other, Look up a bill
  is a separate button next to Miscellaneous.
- **Step 2.** Under the receipt you see the order number, the date and time, the amount, Paid or Outstanding, the
  table and which receipt it is (for example 1 / 25). Page with the arrows to the left (older) and right
  (newer).
- **Step 3.** Choose what you want to do. Receipt details (the i sign) shows payment method, order number,
  date, order method, user and table. Print receipt sends the receipt to the printer again ("The receipt was
  sent to the printer."). Credit (for a paid receipt) or Delete (for an open receipt) opens the
  receipt with the trash on. Pay is only shown for a receipt that is still outstanding.
- **Step 4.** Done? Tap the red cross at the top right (Close the lookup) and you are back on an empty
  till.
- **Scan the receipt.** Scan the barcode of a receipt in the Scan the receipt box; the receipt opens immediately. In the
  Jimani app on a device with a camera you can also do that with the camera.
- **Bill for the guest.** The little printer icon next to the payment buttons prints the receipt that is currently on the screen,
  without payment method, order time, order method and user, because nothing has been paid yet. If nothing is
  open, you see "Nothing is open yet to print."
- **Unprinted receipts.** If a customer receipt did not come out of the printer, the till tries again by itself for half an hour.
  After that it is under Other at Unprinted receipts.
- **No printer.** If no receipt printer is connected to the till, or No printer is set to Yes, there is no
  printer icon. If printing fails, you see for example "Connect the printer to the system" or "The selected
  printer was not found."
- **Without internet** you only search through Order overview (or Search order) the receipts of today of this
  till and print them again.

**Example:** A guest asks an hour later for a receipt for their employer. You choose Other > Look up a bill,
page back three receipts until you see their amount, and tap Print receipt.

**Related questions:**

- How do I print a receipt again?
- A customer wants a copy of their receipt, how do I look it up?
- How do I find an old receipt?
- How do I print the bill before the guest has paid?
- Can I scan a paper receipt?

**Keywords:** reprint receipt, lost receipt, find old receipt, look up a bill, copy of receipt, scan receipt

**Related:** [How do I take back an item or credit a paid receipt at the till?](retour-en-crediteren.md), [What is on the receipt?](wat-staat-er-op-de-kassabon.md)

---

# What can you set per till under Payment methods, Permissions, Auto-lock and Table name required?

**Answer:** The Till settings page of a till or handheld has four blocks that apply per device
and save immediately: Payment methods on this till, Permissions on this till, Auto-lock and
Table name required. This way you can make, for example, a terrace till with only card payments, or a till where giving
discounts asks for a PIN.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Till and products > Registers and hardware, open the till or handheld,
Till settings page (`/settings/externaldevices`)

**Explanation:** Every Yes/No is saved immediately; you see Saved. If it fails, you see Not saved and
the choice jumps back. The till itself picks up the change as soon as it can.

- **Payment methods on this till.** Nothing set means: everything on, as always. If you turn a few
  off, the remaining payment methods appear as buttons on the screen, without a choice window. If only
  Pin is on, there is a single Card payments button that starts the payment immediately.
- **Permissions on this till.** The till always wins: what is set to No here is off for everyone signed in on this
  till, even if their role allows it. Only the PIN of someone whose role allows it releases it once.
  A till you connect now only gets Till and checkout and Tables and
  reservations set to Yes; the rest is No. A till that was already connected is Yes everywhere.
- **Releasing with a PIN.** Tables, reports and settings are not shown when set to No; under
  Settings (the cogwheel) on the till it then says Unlock with PIN. Returns, discounts, the drawer and the
  day closing only ask for the PIN when you use them. After the PIN you see "Released by" with the name.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Payment methods on this till | Per payment method Yes or No: Pin, Tap to Pay, Cash, Pay other, On account and Gift voucher. "Only the payment methods set to Yes appear when settling. Saved immediately." | A till with only card payments, or without Pay other. | Pin, Cash or Pay other must stay on. |
| Pin | Settling on the connected card terminal or with Tap to Pay. | Almost always Yes. | Without a payment terminal Pin books as Pin (external). |
| Tap to Pay | Settling by tapping a card or phone against this device (Mollie Tap). | Only visible if Tap to Pay is on for this device. | If Pin and Tap to Pay are both Yes, you choose when settling. |
| Cash | Pay in cash; the cash drawer opens. | A till with a drawer. | "There is no cash drawer connected to this till, so paying in cash is not possible here." The row is then grey. |
| Pay other | Paid outside Jimani, for example on a separate payment terminal. | If you want to allow that. | - |
| On account | On the account of a customer from the customer file. | With the Customer CRM integration. | Only visible if the store has this payment method. |
| Gift voucher | Money back to the customer as a gift voucher. | With the Gift voucher integration. | Only with money back. |
| Permissions on this till | "What is allowed on this till without a PIN. With No it is off for everyone on this till; only the PIN of someone whose role allows it releases it once. Saved immediately." | A till where everyone has access. | "You can set permissions per till as soon as you have added an employee with a different role. Until then everything is on for this till." |
| Till and checkout | Entering orders and settling. | - | Always on. |
| Tables and reservations | Tables, the floor plan and reservations. With No not shown; can be opened once with a PIN. | A counter till without tables. | - |
| Returns and refunds | Taking back products and giving money back. With No the till asks for a PIN. | If only a supervisor may refund. | - |
| Give discounts | Giving a discount yourself on a line or when settling. Offers always apply. | If discounts are only allowed with permission. | A release for discounts applies for four hours, because a table is settled later. |
| Open cash drawer without a sale | Opening the drawer with the logo or the Open till button. | Against opening the drawer without a receipt. | - |
| Day closing | Closing the day on this till. | If only the manager closes. | - |
| Reports and revenue | Viewing financial overviews and revenue. With No not shown. | A till where employees may not see revenue. | - |
| Edit settings and products | Changing settings, products, labels and the product order. With No not shown. | Against accidental changes. | - |
| Auto-lock | "After a number of minutes of doing nothing this till goes to the PIN pad, so the next employee signs in. Saved immediately." | A till used by multiple employees. | "Auto-lock is possible as soon as there are at least two users with a PIN. With one user there is nothing to switch." Then No is fixed. With two or more the default is Yes. |
| After how many minutes | "Minutes of doing nothing before the till locks (1 to 240)." | Only with Auto-lock set to Yes. | Default 5. |
| Table name required | "If this is set to yes, a new table on this till must get a name: at least 3 characters, not only digits and not the default name such as Table 6. Saved immediately." | For parties or businesses that put tables in the guest's name. | Default No. Only applies to a till connected as a device. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| {0} is off on this till. Choose another payment method or turn it on under Settings > External devices. | This payment method is set to No under Payment methods on this till. | Choose another payment method, or turn it on at the till. |
| {0} is off on this till. Someone who is allowed enters their PIN. | This item is set to No under Permissions on this till. | Have someone whose role allows it enter their PIN. |
| {0} is off on this till. Turn it on under Settings > External devices, or sign in with your own PIN. | This item cannot be released with a PIN. | Turn the item on at the till. |
| {0} is not allowed to do this. Ask someone who is, or turn on the permission under User permissions. | The PIN entered belongs to someone whose role does not allow this. | Another PIN, or turn the permission on under Users and permissions. |
| Unknown PIN. | No employee with this PIN. | Enter the PIN again. |
| This only works on a linked till. | Releasing with a PIN only works on a connected device. | Connect the device, or use a till. |
| You are not allowed to book money in or out of the cash. Someone who is allowed enters their PIN. | Your role does not have the permission Deposit/withdraw cash. | Have someone with the permission enter their PIN. |
| You are not allowed to book money in or out of the cash. Ask the owner to turn on Deposit/withdraw cash under User permissions. | Same, where nobody can enter the PIN. | Ask the owner to turn on the permission. |
| First turn on another payment method: Pin, Cash or Pay other must stay on. | You tried to turn off the last payment method for settling. | First turn another one on. |
| This cannot be released with a PIN without internet. | The PIN is checked on the server. | Wait until there is internet again. |
| What do you want to open? Then someone who is allowed enters their PIN. | After Unlock with PIN you first choose the item. | Choose the item and have the PIN entered. |
| Not saved: the database has not been updated yet. | The setting could not be saved. | Try again later or contact Jimani. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I make a till where only card payments are possible?
- How do I make giving discounts ask for a PIN?
- How do I limit what employees may do on one till?
- How do I set which payment methods are on a till?

**Keywords:** payment methods per till, card only till, permissions per till, pin discount, lock till, table name required, till settings

**Related:** [How do I sign in or out on the till and the handheld?](../faq/aanmelden-en-afmelden.md), [How do I work with tables on the till?](../faq/tafels-op-de-kassa.md), [How do I settle with my own separate card terminal?](../faq/pin-extern-eigen-pinautomaat.md)

---

# How do the PIN pad, the Settings cogwheel and connecting a till work?

**Answer:** A till is a connected device: the Jimani app with a pairing code, or a computer that you
attach to your business with Link this computer or via `/Pos/Koppelen`. Employees sign in on it with
their PIN on the PIN pad. The cogwheel at the top right opens Settings of this till: language, USB devices,
switching employees, logging out, the tiles with settings, Day closing and Product order.

**Where to find it:** Till > cogwheel at the top right (`/Pos/PosSettings`); connecting with a code at
`/Pos/Koppelen`; you create pairing codes under Settings > Till and products > Registers and hardware
(`/settings/externaldevices`)

**Explanation:**

- **A computer as a till.** If you open the till in the dashboard, the computer connects itself as a
  web till. If that fails, in the place of the payment buttons it says "This computer is not (or no longer) linked to a
  till. Link it to settle." with the button Link this computer. There is one web till per
  store: if another computer has taken it over, you see "This till is open on another computer."
  with Continue here.
- **Connecting with a code.** At `/Pos/Koppelen` ("Connect this computer as a till") you enter the Pairing code
  that you request under Registers and hardware with Connect a POS. "The code is valid for a quarter of an hour and works
  once." Give the till a name under Name of this till (for example Bar laptop) and tap Connect.
- **The PIN pad.** Enter your PIN and tap the checkmark. With "Forgot your PIN? Log in with your password"
  you log in with your email address and password; with Back to PIN you go back.

![The Connect this computer as a till screen with the fields Pairing code and Name of this till and the Connect button.](/kennisbank/beelden/pinpad-en-koppelen-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Pairing code | The code from the dashboard that connects this computer to your business. | On a computer without the Jimani app. | Without a code: "Please enter the pairing code." |
| Name of this till | The name under which the till appears under POS & Hardware. | When connecting. | - |
| Connect | Connects this computer and opens the till. | After filling in. | With Back to login you go back. |
| Link this computer | Links this computer to the till again. | If the message about an unlinked computer is shown. | - |
| Continue here | Takes the web till back to this computer. | If another computer had opened it. | The other computer then loses it. |
| Language | Choose the language of this till. | Per device. | Applies to this user on this till. |
| Connected USB devices | Shows the printers that are attached to the till with a cable. | For a printer that doesn't print. | Only in the Jimani app. |
| Unlock with PIN | Opens an item that is set to No under Permissions on this till (tables, reports, settings). | When a supervisor needs to do something briefly. | Only visible if something is hidden. |
| Switch staff member | Puts the PIN pad over the screen, with a cross to go back. | At a change of shift. | Only if signing in with a PIN is on. |
| Log out (unlink register) | Logs out and takes the app back to the pairing screen. The till asks first. | If the device has to go away or to another business. | A new pairing code is needed afterwards. |
| Day closing | Opens the day closing in the till. | At the end of the day. | If Day closing is set to No under Permissions on this till, the till asks for a PIN. |
| Product order | Puts the till in sort mode: drag categories and products. | To put the tiles in the right order. | Not visible if Edit settings and products is set to No. |
| New | A ribbon on a tile that has just been added. | - | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| Enter your PIN first. | You tapped the checkmark without a PIN. | Enter your PIN. |
| Unknown PIN | No employee with this PIN. | Enter it again, or use Forgot your PIN? Log in with your password. |
| wrong PIN too many times | Too many wrong attempts in a row. | Wait a moment and try again. |
| No internet. Logging in works again as soon as there is a connection. | The PIN cannot be checked without internet. | Wait for a connection. |
| Incorrect email address or password. | When logging in with your password. | Check both. |
| Wrong password too many times. Try again in a quarter of an hour. | Too many wrong passwords. | Wait a quarter of an hour. |
| On this computer you can only sign yourself in again. Use the normal login screen. | You tried to log in with a colleague's password. | Log in via the normal login screen. |
| This account is temporarily blocked after too many wrong attempts. Try again later. | The account is locked for a while. | Try again later. |
| In which till? / Which card terminal? | This computer is not attached to a till: "This PC is not attached to a till. Choose the card terminal this revenue should be included in." (or the till). | Choose the device in the list (Choose a device) and tap Continue. With Remember choice it does not ask again until you log in again. |
| No cash drawer has been set up yet. Add one under External devices | There is no drawer to book the revenue on. | Add a cash drawer under Registers and hardware. |
| No card terminal has been set up yet. Add one under External devices | There is no card terminal to book on. | Add a card terminal under Registers and hardware. |
| The point of sale was not found. | There is no till screen for this module. | Tap Try again, or connect a till first. |
| No point of sale was found for this table. | The table does not belong to any till screen. | Tap Try again. |
| Something went wrong | An unexpected error in the till. | Tap Try again. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I connect a computer as a till?
- How do I set the language of the till?
- What do I find under the cogwheel at the top right of the till?
- Where do I create a pairing code?
- How do I change the order of products on the till?

**Keywords:** connect till, pairing code, pin pad, forgot pin, switch staff member, log out till, web till, till settings

**Related:** [How do I sign in or out on the till and the handheld?](../faq/aanmelden-en-afmelden.md), [Can I use multiple tills, for example one for the bar and one for the terrace?](../faq/meerdere-kassas-en-verkooppunten.md)

---

# How does the payment window of the till work?

**Answer:** The payment buttons are under the receipt. Depending on the till that is a single Pay Now button with a
choice window, or Cash and Pin straight away (or only the payment methods that are on). With Cash the
Cash payment window opens with quick amounts, the amount received, what you have to give back and possibly the
tip. Pin, Pin (external) and Pay other have no window and book the outstanding amount immediately.

**Where to find it:** Till > under the receipt (`/WebshopOrder/NewOrder?layout=pos`); you set how the buttons are
arranged under Settings > Till and products > Registers and hardware, open the till, Till settings page

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Ring up the order. The payment button shows the amount.
- **Step 2.** Tap Pay Now and choose in Select payment method ("Choose how you want to pay for the
  order") how the customer pays. Or tap Cash or Pin straight away if they are on the screen.
- **Step 3.** With Cash: tap a quick amount or type what the customer gives. You see To give back. Choose
  Print receipt or No receipt and tap Pay Now with the amount on it. The drawer opens.
- **Step 4.** With Pin the amount goes to the payment terminal and the till waits for the payment.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Tables | Opens the Tables window to put the order on a table. | For table service. | Only with the Parking tables integration. |
| Appointments | Opens the window with today's appointments. | In a salon without tables. | Only with the Salon integration. |
| Charge to room | Puts the order on the room bill of a hotel guest. | In a hotel. | Only with the Hotel module integration. |
| Save | Saves the order on the chosen table, without settling. | If the guest pays later. | Only with a table open; not without internet. |
| Print receipt (the printer icon) | Prints a bill for the guest: the receipt without payment method, order time, order method and user. | If the guest wants to see the bill first. | Not visible without a receipt printer or with No printer set to Yes. |
| Pay Now | Opens Select payment method. | On a till without fixed Cash and Pin buttons. | The total is on the button. |
| Cash | Opens Cash payment, or settles immediately. | For cash. | With Show cash screen with quick amounts set to No: settled immediately for the exact amount, drawer open and receipt out, without an intermediate screen. |
| Pin / Tap to Pay / Card payments | Sends the amount to the payment terminal or the Tap. | For card payments. | Without a payment terminal it books as Pin (external). If only Pin is on, the button is called Card payments and there is no choice window. |
| Pay other | Settles for the full outstanding amount, paid outside Jimani. | As a button on the screen if only a few payment methods are on. | There is no window: the receipt is immediately fully paid. |
| Pay on account | Puts the order on the account of a customer from the customer file. | For regular customers who pay by invoice. | Only with the Customer CRM integration; choose the customer first. |
| Settle | Settles with tokens; the number of tokens is on the button. | For an order with tokens. | Only with Pay with tokens. |
| Cash payment | In Select payment method: "Paying with cash". | - | Not visible without a cash drawer. |
| Pay differently | The group with Pin, Pay other, Refund to card, Gift voucher and Pay on account. | - | With money back, card and on account are off. |
| Pin | "Paying with a pin terminal". | - | - |
| Pay other | "Paying with other". | - | - |
| Refund to card | "Via Mollie back to the customer's card or account", with the maximum. | Only for money back on a receipt paid via Mollie. | With the permission Refund via Mollie. |
| Gift voucher | "Paying with a gift voucher". | Only with money back. | Only with the Gift voucher integration. |
| Own consumption | Books the receipt as own consumption: "No revenue: the receipt closes at zero. Stock goes down as with a sale." Choose the type under Type of consumption, optionally fill in Reason or name (optional) and tap Book. | Staff consumption, private, free for a guest, broken. | Only with the Own consumption integration and the permission Record own consumption. On a till with the buttons straight on the screen it is under Other. |
| Outstanding amount | What still has to be paid. | - | With a partial payment, what has already been paid is shown below it. |
| Quick amounts | Buttons with round amounts and the notes that cover the bill in one go. | For cash. | Not for card payments. |
| Cash | The amount the customer gives. | Type it or tap a quick amount. | Less than Outstanding amount is a partial payment. |
| To give back | The change. | - | - |
| Tips | 5%, 10%, 15% or Manual; "Tip is added to the total amount". | If the customer gives a tip. | Only with the Keep track of tips integration; not with money back. |
| Total incl. tip | The total with the tip added. | - | Only with a tip. |
| Print receipt / No receipt | Whether a receipt comes out after settling. | Per payment. | Only if Always print a receipt is set to No for the till. The till remembers the last choice on this device. The kitchen ticket always goes. |
| Pay Now (in the window) | Completes the payment, with the amount on the button. | After filling in. | - |
| Previous | Back to the choice of payment method. | - | - |
| Email receipt | After a paid receipt on a till without a receipt printer: "Paid. No printer: email the receipt?" Tap Email receipt, fill in the Customer's email address and tap Send. | If the customer wants a receipt. | Visible for half a minute; doing nothing is fine too. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| Cart is empty | There is nothing on the receipt. | Ring something up first. |
| There is nothing to settle. | There is no amount and no line to settle. | Check the receipt. |
| Partial payment registered. Pay the remaining amount to complete this order. | You settled part. | Settle the rest. |
| The payment of the order is still open. Are you sure you want to leave this page? | You want to leave during a partial payment. | Stay and settle the rest, or settle later from the orders. |
| The till cannot reach the server. Nothing went wrong with the order; the request never arrived. Check the connection and try again. | The request did not reach the server. | Check the connection; cash and Pay other then go into the queue. |
| The server did not answer in time. Press the same button again: what was already saved will not be booked twice. | Saving on a table took too long. | Tap the same button again. |
| Something has changed on this table in the meantime. The table is being reloaded; nothing has been booked. | A colleague changed the table while you were settling. | Check the table and settle again. |
| Order could NOT be created | The server did not accept the order. | Try again; if it persists, contact Jimani. |
| The receipt has been emailed. | Email receipt succeeded. | - |
| The receipt was not emailed. Try again later. | Email receipt failed. | Try again later. |
| This receipt doesn't exist at this store. | The receipt number does not belong to your business. | Look up the receipt again. |

**Related questions:**

- What do the payment buttons under the receipt do?
- How do I give change when paying in cash?
- What is the difference between Pay Now and Cash and Pin?
- Why does Pin have no separate window?

**Keywords:** payment window till, settle till, pay in cash, change, quick amounts, pay now, receipt or no receipt, email receipt

**Related:** [How do I add a tip for cash or card payments?](../faq/fooi-bij-afrekenen.md), [Can a guest split the bill?](../faq/rekening-splitsen.md), [What happens if a card payment fails or is cancelled?](../faq/pinbetaling-mislukt.md), [How do I book own consumption, staff consumption or shrinkage?](../faq/eigen-verbruik.md)

---

# How does the till screen work in Jimani?

**Answer:** The till screen has the categories and the search box on the left, the product tiles in the middle and
on the right the receipt with the buttons below it: Comments (or Notes), Miscellaneous, Other and the trash, and
below that the payment buttons. At the top are the logo (double tap opens the drawer), the menu, Scan the receipt
and the cogwheel for the settings of this till.

**Where to find it:** Menu Till (`/WebshopOrder/NewOrder`); on a connected till in the till layout
(`/WebshopOrder/NewOrder?layout=pos`)

**Explanation:**

- **Ringing up.** Tap a category and a product. A dot with the quantity appears on the tile, the
  newest line is at the top of the receipt and the device vibrates briefly (adjustable per device). Press a tile for half
  a second for the "Quantity ..." window ("Enter the quantity and choose OK: everything goes on one
  line on the receipt.", with Clear and OK). If a product has choices, the product window opens.
- **Searching and scanning.** Type in Search products or EAN code or scan a barcode (Scan an EAN or
  item number). With Clear filter you empty the box.
- **The receipt.** At the top is Order with the order number and, with a table open, the table name (which you can
  change there, up to 20 characters) and a cross to leave the table. At the bottom are the totals with
  Total paid and Outstanding amount; with a table also the Unpaid previous Orders total.
- **Saving or settling.** See the payment window. On a till with the Restaurant integration the tables are
  in their status colour, with the name of the reservation.
- **On the handheld** the categories are behind the category name and the receipt is in a drawer at the bottom; Customer details
  and Repair are not there.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Logo at the top left | Double tap opens the cash drawer ("Double tap to open the cash drawer"). On the handheld it opens the Settings window. | Change without a sale. | If Open cash drawer without a sale is set to No at the till, it asks for a PIN. Also works without internet in the app. |
| Scan the receipt | Scan the barcode of a receipt: the receipt opens immediately. | For a return or a question about a receipt. | In the app on a device with a camera also with the camera. |
| Cogwheel | Opens Settings of this till. | Language, switching, logging out, day closing. | - |
| Search products or EAN code | Searches the products by name or barcode. | With many products. | - |
| Comments | Opens Add a comment: "Add a comment to an order or a product." Choose the line under Select a product, type under Comment ("What is the comment? This is printed on the receipt too.", up to 250 characters) and tap Add. | A wish of the guest for the kitchen. | Grey until there is a line on the receipt. |
| Notes | Replaces Comments with the Product notes integration: "Choose a line, tap the answers or type a comment. It goes on the receipt." | Fixed questions per product (for example how it is cooked). | "There are no notes for this item." if there is nothing at the product. |
| Miscellaneous | Opens Miscellaneous: "Put a loose item with an amount on the receipt, for an order or for a product." Choose Order or Product, fill in Name of the miscellaneous item, Quantity and Price (optional), possibly a Comment, and tap Add. | Something that is not a product, such as a deposit or an extra. | With a price you also choose the VAT group (Select a VAT group). A minus amount is a refund and is only possible with the Refund integration. |
| Other | A menu with the extra buttons below. | - | If only Look up a bill is left, it is a separate button. Grey for a receipt with return lines. |
| Split the bill | Transfers selected lines of the table to another table. | Guests who pay separately or move. | Only with a table open. |
| Next course | Calls the next waiting course of the table. | With the Courses integration. | Only with a table open. |
| Apply Discount | A discount on the whole receipt. | For a promotion or a regular customer. | With the discounts of your business; Give discounts set to No at the till asks for a PIN. |
| Add buzzer | Choose the buzzer number for this order (Buzzer number window). | A counter with buzzers. | Only with the Buzzers integration and Buzzer at this till set to Yes. |
| Customer details | Link a customer to the order: "Link a customer to this order. Settling without a customer is possible too." Search under Find a customer (Name, phone or email) or create a New customer. | If the order has to be in a name. | Only with the Customer details integration, not on the handheld. With Unlink you remove the customer again. |
| Own consumption | Opens the own consumption choice immediately. | Staff consumption, private, free, broken. | Here only on a till with the payment buttons straight on the screen; otherwise in the payment window. |
| Look up a bill | Brings back the last receipt of this till; with the arrows you page further. | Reprint a receipt, credit, settle an open receipt. | - |
| Print Receipt | Yes or No in one tap: does a receipt come out for Cash and Pin without a window? | Only with Print receipt for direct payment under Choose at the till. | The device remembers the choice. |
| Unprinted receipts | Customer receipts that did not come out of the printer and no longer print automatically after half an hour. | To print them after all. | Only visible if there is such a receipt, with the number. |
| Open till | Opens the drawer without a sale, just like double tapping the logo. | - | Only if Open cash drawer under Other? is set to Yes and there is a drawer. |
| Cash | Money in or out of the drawer without a sale: Opening balance today, Deposit or Withdrawal, Amount, Reason and Print slip; tap Save. | Depositing at the bank, adding change. | Only on a connected till with a drawer; not without internet. |
| Repair (category) | Take in a repair or settle it on pickup. | A shop that takes in repairs. | Only with the Repairs integration, not on the handheld. |
| Trash | Turns on the trash: tap a line to remove it; if there are more of them, the till asks how many. | Something rung up wrongly. | On a paid receipt a line becomes a credit (minus line). |
| Change course | Tap an item: choose under Quantity how many go to the other course and under Course the course. | A soup as a main course. | Only with the Courses integration. |
| Main guests | In the window to transfer lines (Choose Parking Table): shows the tables of the main guests. | Transfer lines to a main guest. | - |

**Taking in or picking up a repair:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Take in repair | "Defect, price, deposit and customer": a new repair on the receipt. | When the customer brings something. | "The deposit goes on the receipt now; you settle the rest on pickup." |
| Description of the defect | "What is broken? This is on the receipt and in the email to the customer." | Always. | Required. |
| Price | "The total amount for the repair." | Always. | - |
| Deposit | "An amount or a percentage of the price. Empty = no deposit." Choose Amount or Percentage. | If the customer pays in advance. | At most the price, or 0 to 100%. |
| Expected ready on | "When the customer can pick it up. If that is today, also choose the time." | Always. | For today: Ready at ("What time it'll be ready today."). |
| Customer | Name and Phone are required; with an Email the customer gets an email at every step. | Always. | You can also search for an existing customer. |
| Repair pickup | "Settle the rest": search by number, name or phone (R-12, name or phone) and tap the repair. | When the customer picks it up. | "This repair is already on the receipt." if you choose it twice. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| No items on the receipt yet. | Notes or Comments without a line on the receipt. | Ring up a product first. |
| The notes could not be loaded. | The notes of the product did not come in. | Try again. |
| That did not work. Please try again. | Find a customer or saving did not work. | Try again. |
| No customer found. Create a new customer. | Nobody found under Find a customer. | Tap New customer. |
| You need the Refunds integration for this option. | Credit or a minus amount without the Refund integration. | Turn on Refund under Add-ons. |
| You take back a Miscellaneous line with Miscellaneous and a minus amount. | The trash on a paid miscellaneous item. | Use Miscellaneous with a minus amount. |
| Maximum stock reached. | You are ringing up more than is in stock. | Check the stock. |
| Choose a reason. For Other, write why. | At Cash > Withdrawal without a reason, or Other without an explanation. | Choose a reason or fill it in. |
| Not recorded. Try again. | The deposit or withdrawal at Cash could not be saved. | Try again; nothing has been booked. |
| No items selected. | You are transferring lines to another table without choosing any. | Tick the lines first. |
| Could not create the refund | A return could not be booked. | Try again; nothing has been given back. |
| Could not add items to order | With an exchange the new lines could not be added to the receipt. | Try again. |

**Related questions:**

- What is everything on the till screen?
- How do I open the cash drawer by hand?
- Where is the Comments button on the till?
- What do Miscellaneous and Other do on the till?

**Keywords:** till screen, till explanation, other menu till, miscellaneous till, comment on the receipt, trash till, ring up product

**Related:** [How does the payment window of the till work?](betaalvenster.md), [How do I choose supplements or options for a product at the till?](../faq/supplementen-kiezen.md), [How do I book money in or out of the cash drawer?](../faq/kas-storten-en-opnemen.md)

---

# How does the Tables window on the till work?

**Answer:** The Tables window opens with the Tables button next to the payment buttons. In it you choose a table,
create a New table, search and filter tables, and with the Restaurant integration you check in guests there
(Reservations) or make a reservation (Book). Only one device at a time is on a table; the
till reports who has it open.

**Where to find it:** Till > Tables (`/WebshopOrder/NewOrder`)

**Explanation:**

- **Choosing tables.** Tap a table: it gets a checkmark and opens on the till. A table with an open
  bill stands out. With the Restaurant integration the tables are in the colour of their status (the colours from
  Table settings), with the name of the reservation; a bell on the table is a QR call, which you handle
  with a tap ("Table ... handled").
- **Reservations.** At the bottom, with Restaurant, is the Reservations button: the Today's reservations window
  ("Check in the guests and open the receipt on their table."). Choose Expected or Arrived, tap a
  reservation, set the Number of guests right and tap Check in. The receipt opens on the table of the reservation.
  If the reservation has no table, you first choose a table (Choose table). If you tap a table where a
  reservation is expected, the till asks whether you check in or want to Use anyway the table.
- **Book.** With Book you make a reservation from the till for the restaurant, activities,
  the salon, tickets or the hotel, with the same steps as there. A combination discount goes as a comment on
  the line, for example "Combination discount 10%".

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Search table name | Searches by the name or number of the table. | With many tables. | Together with the filter: "No tables found. Adjust the search or the filter." |
| Filter by table status | All tables, Free, Reserved, Late, Occupied / open bill, or By status. | To quickly find a free table. | Only with Restaurant. |
| Location | All locations or one location. | A business with a terrace and a hall. | Only with more than one location. |
| Legend | What each colour means, plus Selected table, Open bill and flashing. | If in doubt about a colour. | Only with Restaurant. |
| New table | Adds a table: Main guest Yes or No, Table name (up to 20 characters) and with Restaurant the Location. Confirm with the checkmark, stop with the cross. | A guest without a table. | With Table name required: at least 3 characters, not only digits. |
| Show main guests | Shows the tables of the main guests. | For regular guests. | Only if there are main guest tables. |
| Add to regular guests | Shows the customers on account (On account) instead of tables; choose a customer and tap Customer order. | A customer who orders on account. | Only with the Customer CRM integration. |
| Reservations | Opens Today's reservations to check in guests. | When guests arrive. | Only with Restaurant. |
| Book | Makes a reservation from the till. | A guest who wants to come later. | Only with Restaurant, Activities, Salon or Hotel in the till. |
| Check in | Sets the reservation to arrived and opens the receipt on its table. | On arrival. | - |
| Use anyway | Use the table without the expected reservation. | A walk-in on a reserved table. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What does it mean | What do you do |
|---|---|---|
| This table is in use | Another device has the table open. | Wait until the table is closed there. |
| The table is currently opened by | With the name of whoever has it open: "Only when the table is no longer open there can you open it." | Ask the colleague to close the table. |
| The table has been taken over | Another device took over the table while you were working. | Open the table again. |
| Your table is still open | There is something on your table that has not been saved or settled: "Save the order or settle it." | Tap Save or settle. |
| Credit is still open | You are leaving a table with a credit on it. | Choose Back or Discard credit. |
| Name for this table | Table name required is on for this till. | Type a name and tap Open table. |
| This table already exists. | There is already a table with that name. | Choose another name. |
| Choose a location | With Restaurant a new table belongs to a location. | Choose the location. |
| Give the table a name. / A table name needs at least 3 characters. / Only digits is not a name. Use letters too, for example Family Jansen. / Choose a name of your own, not the default name such as Table 6. | The name does not meet Table name required. | Adjust the name. |
| Table already occupied | With a reservation: "This table is already occupied at this time. Are you sure you want to book here anyway?" | Choose another table, or Book anyway; the till then records who did that. |
| Lines moved | The chosen lines are now on the other table. | - |

**Related questions:**

- How do I search for a table on the till?
- How do I check in guests from the table selection?
- Why does the till report that a table is already open?
- How do I make a reservation from the tables?

**Keywords:** tables window, search table till, new table, check in till, today's reservations, table occupied, main guests

**Related:** [How do I work with tables on the till?](../faq/tafels-op-de-kassa.md), [Can a guest split the bill?](../faq/rekening-splitsen.md), [How does the floor plan (Floorplan) work in Jimani?](../../horeca/naslag/floorplan.md)

---

# Which receipts and payment methods does the Jimani POS support?

**Answer:** The POS settles with Cash, Card, Card payment (external), Tap to Pay, Pay other, On account and
(for refunds) Gift voucher. After payment a till receipt (customer receipt) can be printed and the kitchen ticket
goes to the kitchen; there are also the card receipt, the credit receipt, ticket receipts, the slip for Cash and the X and
Z reports of the day closing.

**Where to find it:** POS > the payment buttons (`/WebshopOrder/NewOrder`); which payment methods
are on a POS: Settings > Till and products > Tills and equipment, open the POS, Payment methods on this till

**Explanation:** The payment method determines where the revenue appears in the reports. Card and Card payment (external) both count
as card payments; Pay other does not. Without internet you can settle with Cash, Pay other and Card payment (external).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Cash | Settle with cash; the drawer opens. | For cash payments. | Only on a POS with a cash drawer. |
| Card | The amount goes to the POS's Mollie card terminal; the receipt is only paid once Mollie reports it. | Card payments with a Jimani card terminal. | Without internet the button books as Pay other. |
| Card payment (external) | Paid on your own, separate card terminal outside Jimani; paid immediately. | A POS without a Mollie card terminal. | The Card button does this automatically if no card terminal or Tap is connected to the POS. |
| Tap to Pay | The customer taps their card or phone on the handheld or tablet (Mollie Tap). | Card payments at the table. | With the Tap to Pay integration; not on the fixed POS screen. |
| Pay other | Paid outside Jimani; the receipt is immediately marked as paid. | When it is neither card nor cash. | Does not count as a card payment in the reports. |
| On account | The order goes on the account of a customer from the customer file. | Regular customers who pay later. | With the Customer CRM integration; choose the customer first. |
| Gift voucher | Refund to the customer as a gift voucher. | Only for refunds. | With the Gift voucher integration. |
| Till receipt (customer receipt) | The receipt for the customer after payment. | After every payment, unless No receipt. | Not when paying with tokens, not after a partial payment (the rest is still to come) and not for On account. |
| Kitchen ticket | The order for the kitchen, to the connected kitchen printer(s). | For every order with kitchen products. | Always goes out, even if you choose No receipt; with Courses per course. |
| Card receipt | The receipt after a card payment. | After Card. | Only goes out once Mollie reports the payment as paid. |
| Credit receipt | The receipt for a return or credit. | After giving back. | Also after Refund to card. |
| Ticket receipt | A separate receipt with a QR code per ticket and per lane, next to the bill. | For tickets or activities with QR tickets. | You can reprint it from the order (Reprint tickets). |
| Slip for cash deposit or withdrawal | A slip for a deposit or withdrawal at Cash. | As proof with the drawer. | Choose Print slip Yes; default No. |
| X report (interim status) | The status of the day without closing it. | Halfway through the day. | - |
| Z report (day closing) | The closing of the day. | At the end of the day. | See the article about the day closing. |
| Purchase order | The order to a supplier (Purchasing), with or without Prices on the purchase order. | When purchasing. | Not a receipt from the POS. |
| Invoice | The invoices from Jimani to your business, under Settings > Money and figures > Invoicing and costs. | For your bookkeeping. | Not a receipt from the POS. |

**Related questions:**

- Which payment methods does the POS have?
- Which kinds of receipts can the POS print?
- What is a card receipt or credit receipt?
- What is the difference between an X report and a Z report?
- Can I let customers pay on account?

**Keywords:** POS payment methods, receipt types, till receipt, kitchen ticket, card receipt, credit receipt, x report, z report

**Related:** [What is on the receipt?](../faq/wat-staat-er-op-de-kassabon.md), [How does the day closing and counting the cash work?](../faq/dagafsluiting-en-kas-tellen.md), [How do I settle with my own separate card terminal?](../faq/pin-extern-eigen-pinautomaat.md)

---

# What is on the handheld: menu, Settings and reservations?

**Answer:** At the top of the handheld is a menu with Book, Floorplan (with Restaurant), POS,
Reservation, Check in/Check out and Log out. The logo opens the Settings window. From Book you
see today's reservations and create or change one; POS opens the POS screen. For a
reservation from a module that still uses the old screen, you settle on the handheld in the old
order screen.

**Where to find it:** On the handheld: the menu at the top (`/Handheld/ReservationsList`, `/Handheld/Floorplan`,
`/WebshopOrder/NewOrder`); in a salon, Today's appointments (`/KassaAfspraken/Handheld`)

**Explanation:**

- **Book.** The list of reservations: per reservation the Tables, the Total number of guests and the
  Order. If there is nothing, you see "No reservation found". Tap a reservation for its
  details (Reservation date and time, Arrived, Left, Duration, Reservation name, Paid or Unpaid).
- **Reservation.** Creates a new reservation: choose Reservation types, Availability, the date, From and To
  and a time from Available times. For the tables, tap Available tables to choose. Enter the guest
  (Guest search) or tick Passer-by (no guest details), choose the Language and fill in Reservation name. With Check in
  now the guest is immediately marked as Arrived. Save with Save, or settle straight away with Pay.
- **Activities.** Under Activities you choose the activity (Activities), Date, Departure date, Duration, From and
  To. Paying by card goes through the window "Payment method: Pin" with the Total amount and the List of
  devices: choose the card terminal and tap Pay.
- **Today's appointments (salon).** "Tap an appointment to open the receipt"; search with Search appointments.
- **Settings.** See the article about the handheld; it also covers Change receipt printer and Change cash drawer or
  wallet.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Available tables | The window for choosing tables for the reservation. | For a new reservation. | - |
| Tables / Combination table | Choose a single table or a combination of tables. | For large groups, a combination. | "No table combination available" if there is no suitable one. |
| Show all tables | Also shows the tables that do not fit the number of guests. | If you still want a different table. | For an occupied table the POS asks whether you still want to book. |
| Show all combination tables | Same for combinations. | - | - |
| Locations and Location filter | Choose which location you search for tables in. | In a business with more rooms. | "No location available" if there is none. |
| Pre-selected tables | The tables that Jimani already suggests. | - | - |
| Select all | Selects all displayed tables. | For a group that gets the whole room. | Confirm with Save. |
| Add product | Adds a product to the reservation (for example a package). | Under Products. | - |
| Deposit | The amount the guest pays in advance for a product. | For products with a deposit. | With Payment within instalments and the Total deposit. |
| Internal memo | A note on the reservation that the guest does not see. | For activities. | - |
| Main guests | In Table list ("Choose the table the order should be booked on."): the tables of main guests. | In the old order screen. | - |
| Products | The product list of the old order screen. | For a reservation on the old screen. | - |
| List of devices | The card terminals the amount can be sent to. | When paying by card for an activity. | - |
| Total amount | The amount that goes to the card terminal. | - | - |

**The old payment window on the handheld:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Cash payment | The window for cash. | For cash on the old screen. | - |
| Change amount | Adjust the amount the customer hands over. | For a different amount. | - |
| Order overview | The lines of the order. | - | - |
| Total excluding VAT, Total amount, Total paid, Outstanding amount | The amounts of the order. | - | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Loading... | The list of reservations is being fetched. | Wait a moment. |
| Something went wrong. Please try again. | The list did not come through. | Try again. |
| Outside availability | This time falls outside the availability of the reservation type; the time is shown lighter. | Choose a time within the availability. |
| You cannot select a time in the past | The chosen time has already passed. | Choose a later time. |
| No tables available | No table fits at that time. | Choose a different time or Show all tables. |
| Which receipt printer belongs to this device? | Under Change receipt printer; if that text is missing it says "Choose a receipt printer". | Choose the printer. |
| Which cash drawer or wallet belongs to this device? | Under Change cash drawer or wallet; otherwise "Choose a cash drawer or wallet". | Choose the drawer or wallet. |

**Related questions:**

- What is in the menu at the top of the handheld?
- How do I view today's reservations on the handheld?
- How do I open the settings on the handheld?
- Where do I find the floorplan on the handheld?

**Keywords:** handheld menu, reservation on handheld, choose table handheld, handheld settings, appointments handheld, activity handheld

**Related:** [How do I order and settle with a handheld or phone?](../faq/handheld-bestellen.md), [How do I sign in or out on the till and the handheld?](../faq/aanmelden-en-afmelden.md), [How does the floor plan (Floorplan) work in Jimani?](../../horeca/naslag/floorplan.md)

---

# What do you see on the Orders screen?

**Answer:** On Orders you see what was ordered on a given day. With the Restaurant integration, the
rounds of the tables and the separate POS sales are under Tables & POS, with filters for date, table, status and
employee; with the online webshop, the webshop orders are under Pickup/delivery. Tapping a line
shows the order.

**Where to find it:** Menu Order (`/webshoporder`); in the POS, Order in the bar at the top
(`/webshoporder?layout=pos`)

**Explanation:**

- **Tables & POS.** Choose the Date with minus and plus. Filter by Table (All tables), Status (All statuses,
  Open, Paid, Transferred) and Employee (All employees); with the eraser (Clear filter) you start
  over. Per round you see the Time, the Table (or No table, or Passer-by), the Name, the Employee, the
  Products, the Amount, the Status and the state in the Kitchen (In progress, Done or No kitchen). If there are no
  rounds, you see "No rounds match the filters" (or "No rounds on this day").
- **Pickup/delivery.** Filter by From and To, Order number, Product, Price from and Price to, Ordering method
  (Delivery or Pickup) and the status (Order pending, Done, Delivered, Picked up, Cancelled).
- **Without Restaurant** there is a single list with the orders of that day.

![The Orders screen with the filters Date, Table, Status and Employee.](/kennisbank/beelden/bestellingen-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Date | The day of the list, with minus and plus one day back or forward. | Always. | - |
| Table, Status, Employee | Filters on the list. | To find a round. | - |
| Transferred | Rounds that were transferred to another table ("Transferred to table ..."). | To see where lines went. | - |
| View completed orders | Also shows orders that are already done. | For pickup and delivery. | Not in the free POS. |
| Show cancelled orders | Also shows cancelled and empty receipts. | When looking up a receipt. | Off by default: these receipts mainly arise from transferring. |
| Clear filter | Resets all filters. | - | - |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see all of today's orders?
- How do I filter orders by table or employee?
- Where do I find webshop orders for pickup or delivery?
- How do I look up an order from an earlier day?

**Keywords:** orders overview, rounds per table, today's orders, cancelled receipts, transferred rounds, POS sales

**Related:** [How do I look up an earlier receipt and print it again?](../faq/bon-terugzoeken-en-opnieuw-printen.md), [How do I work with tables on the till?](../faq/tafels-op-de-kassa.md)

---

# How do you book waste and where do you see the Waste overview?

**Answer:** With the free Waste and Waste overview integrations you book products that have to go (expired,
damaged, spoiled or a preparation error) on the Book as waste screen, with a reason. They are deducted from
stock without revenue. In the Waste overview you see per period what was thrown away, with the value
at selling price and at cost price. Own consumption (staff, private, free) you book at the POS.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Till and products, under Own use and waste (`/WebshopOrder/WasteOrder`);
the overview under Settings > Money and figures > Reports, tab Waste overview
(`/WebshopOrder/WasteOverview`)

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Book as waste. On the left choose the category and tap the products that have to go, just like
  on the POS; for a product with choices the product window opens.
- **Step 2.** On the right, under Reason, choose a reason (Expired, Damaged, Spoiled, Preparation error or Other) and
  tap Save. You see "Waste entry saved".
- **Step 3.** Look in the Waste overview. Choose Select Type (the reason), From and To (Date from and Date
  to) and tap Search. Per entry you see Date, User, Product qty, Waste value (sales), Waste value
  (cost) and Reason; with the i icon you see the products.
- **Own consumption** (staff consumption, private, free for a guest, broken) you book at the POS with
  Own consumption in the payment window or under Other. The messages below apply there.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Book as waste | The screen for booking waste. | For waste or shrinkage. | Only with the Waste integration. |
| Reason | Expired, Damaged, Spoiled, Preparation error or Other. | For every waste entry. | Required: "Waste reason required". |
| Select Type | Filters the overview by reason. | In the Waste overview. | - |
| From / To | The period of the overview. | In the Waste overview. | - |
| Waste value (sales) | What the waste was worth at the selling price. | - | - |
| Waste value (cost) | What the waste cost at the cost price. | - | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Waste cart cannot be empty. | You are saving a waste entry without products. | Choose the products first. |
| Waste reason is required. | No reason has been chosen. | Choose a reason. |
| Own consumption is off. Turn on the integration under Settings > Integrations. | The Own consumption integration is off. | Turn it on under Settings > Add-ons, category Stock and purchasing (the message still uses the old name Integrations). |
| You are not allowed to book own consumption. Ask the owner for the Record own consumption permission. | Your role does not have the permission. | Ask the owner to turn the permission on. |
| First choose the type of own use. | No Type of consumption has been chosen. | Choose the type. |
| There is nothing on the receipt. | Own consumption without products. | Ring something up first. |
| Own consumption is only possible with products, not with Miscellaneous. | There is a miscellaneous item on the receipt. | Remove the miscellaneous item. |
| A return can't be booked as own use. | There are return lines on the receipt. | Settle the return separately. |
| A repair can't be booked as own use. | There is a repair on the receipt. | Simply settle the repair as usual. |
| Own consumption is only possible on a new receipt, not on a table with earlier rounds. | The table already has saved rounds. | Book the own consumption on a new receipt. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I write off thrown-away or spoiled products?
- How do I register own consumption or products given away for free?
- Where do I see how much I have thrown away?
- Can I book staff consumption without revenue?

**Keywords:** book waste, shrinkage POS, throw away product, waste overview, expired products, own consumption message

**Related:** [How do I book own consumption, staff consumption or shrinkage?](../faq/eigen-verbruik.md), [How does the payment window of the till work?](betaalvenster.md)

---

# How does the floor plan (Floorplan) work in Jimani?

**Answer:** On Floorplan you see your tables per location, in the colour of their status at the chosen time.
Tap a free table to make a reservation on it; tap another table for the reservation or the
receipt of that table, with Guest arrived, Order and Settle. With Edit you arrange the room:
moving tables, a floor, objects, zones, text and, per device, the start screen.

**Where to find it:** Menu Floorplan (`/Floorplan`); in the POS, Floorplan in the bar at the top
(`/Pos/Floorplan`); on the handheld, Floorplan in the menu (`/Handheld/Floorplan`)

**Explanation:**

- **At the top.** The Locations as tabs (the device remembers the last one chosen), the date (Today), the
  time slider with Now to go back to the current quarter hour, Edit and Save. You zoom with
  Zoom in, Zoom out and Fit to screen. The Legend shows what each colour means.
- **The sidebar.** With Toggle sidebar you collapse or expand it. Upcoming lists the reservations
  that are still to come, Arrived lists who is already there.
- **Making a reservation.** Tap a free table. Choose Reservation types and Availability, set From and
  To, and enter the guest (or tick Passer-by (no guest details)). Under Choose table you see the free tables
  for that time; Tables selected: shows what you chose. Fill in Reservation name and Language, and optionally Fields
  and Products. Under Totals you find Total amount, Total paid and Outstanding amount. Tap Save, or
  Pay to settle straight away. Afterwards you see "Reservation added successfully."
- **From jumps along.** If you choose a time at which the table is already taken, From jumps to the first free
  moment and a line under the tables says why, for example "Table 1 is reserved from 18:00 to 20:00."
- **A table that is not free.** Tap it: for a reservation you see name, time and number of people with Guest
  arrived (check in), Edit and, if late, also No-show; for an occupied table the receipt per round or course,
  the open amount, the time at the table and since the last order, with Order and Settle. If the
  guest asks for service via the QR code, it says "The guests are asking for service." with Handled.
- **Checking in with an open bill.** If the previous guest at the table still has a bill open, the
  POS first asks "Table 5: Jansen still has €42.50 open." (with the actual table, name and amount). Choose Settle up
  first (the POS with that bill), Check in anyway (the previous guest is set to left, their bill
  stays open on their own POS table) or Cancel.
- **Table settings.** "Choose per table status the colour and whether the table flashes." Per Status you see the
  Meaning and you choose the Color and Flash.

![The floor plan with the tables in their status colour, the locations as tabs and on the right the sidebar with Upcoming and Arrived.](/kennisbank/beelden/floorplan-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Edit | Puts the floor plan in Edit mode: moving tables and arranging the location. | When setting up your business. | You create the tables themselves under Restaurant management; "No tables in this room yet" if there are none yet. |
| Background | "Choose a floor or colour. It appears as a surface under the tables; move and enlarge it with the corners." Choose from Floors, Solid colour or Custom image. | To make the room recognisable. | - |
| Add Object | "Choose one or more objects. Then you move, rotate and enlarge them on the floor plan." With Search for an object. | A bar, plants, an entrance. | - |
| Limits | "Draw a zone or line with a name, such as Terrace or Conservatory." Choose Zone, Line or Room boundary. | To mark parts of the business. | Save with Save boundaries. |
| Name (under Limits) | "Appears in the zone or above the line, for example Terrace." | - | A maximum number of characters. |
| Colour (under Limits) | "The colour of the edge and the name." | - | - |
| Width | "In metres, from left to right." | For Room boundary. | The boundary does not get smaller than what is inside it. |
| Length | "In metres, from top to bottom." | For Room boundary. | You can also drag the handles. |
| Add text | "A text on the floor plan, for example Bar or Entrance. Double-click the text later to edit it." | To name places. | - |
| Explanation | "What appears on the floor plan." The text itself. | For Add text. | - |
| Size | Small, Medium, Large or Extra large. "Later also with plus and minus in the bar." | For a text. | In the bar: Decrease size and Increase size. |
| Colour (for text) | "The colour of the letters." Choose for example Black, White, Orange, Blue, Green, Red, Purple or Grey. | For a text. | In the POS and on the handheld only Black and White are available. |
| Table shape | The shape of the chosen table. | After choosing a table. | "Select a table first" if none is chosen. |
| Start screen | "Choose the device. Move the green area and make it larger or smaller: this is how the floor plan opens on that device. Save stores it." Choose Computer (from 1200 points wide), Tablet (768 to 1200) or Phone (narrower than 768). | So that each device opens on the right part. | - |
| Auto-arrange | Places the tables neatly in a grid. | After creating many tables. | - |
| Mirror, Bring to front, Send to back, Delete | Flip or move the chosen object in the layer, or remove it. | When setting up. | - |
| Guest search | Searches for a guest for the reservation. | For a known guest. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Reservation added successfully. | The reservation is on the table. | - |
| No tables available | There is no free table at that time. | Choose a different time or a different location. |
| {0}: {1} still has {2} open. | The previous guest at the table has an open bill. | Settle up first, Check in anyway or Cancel. |
| Guest is too early ({0}). Check in anyway? | You are checking in a guest well before their time. | Choose Guest arrived or Cancel. |
| Couldn't check in. | The server did not accept the check-in. | Try again. |
| Couldn't load the table. | The table's data did not come through. | Try again. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see my floor plan with tables?
- What do the colours of the tables mean?
- Can I drag tables around on the floor plan?
- How do I check in a guest on the floor plan?

**Keywords:** floorplan, restaurant floor plan, table layout, drag tables, table status colour, reservation on table, check in floorplan

**Related:** [How do I work with tables on the till?](../../kassa/faq/tafels-op-de-kassa.md), [How do I work with reservations in the POS?](reserveringen-in-de-kassa.md)

---

# How do I work with reservations in the POS?

**Answer:** In the POS layout, Reservations is in the bar at the top. There you see the reservations per
day, per week or the last 100, with filters, and you set the status of a guest (for example Arrived).
With Reservation (or the plus) you create a new one; tapping a reservation opens the details, the
history and the attachments. Booking on an occupied table is allowed, but only after a warning.

**Where to find it:** POS > Reservations in the bar at the top (`/Pos/Reservation`); a new
reservation with Reservation in the bar (`/Pos/AddReservation`)

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1. The list.** Choose Overview or List view and within it the day, the Weekly list or the Last 100
  reservations. Filter with Search by:, Select location and Select Reservation Type, and hide guests with
  Hide "Guest left" and Hide "Guest arrived". At the bottom are the Day totals or Week totals
  (Reservation totals).
- **Step 2. The lines.** Per reservation: Reservation status, Reservation number, Time, Departure time, Name,
  Reservation type, Tables, Total, Payment (Paid or Unpaid), Created, Memo and the Order. With
  Table change you move the reservation to a different table (Change table).
- **Step 3. Status.** Choose a new Guest status. The POS asks "Confirm the status change for this
  reservation." For Arrived: "Are you sure guests have arrived?" If a payment is still open,
  it is not possible: "Status cannot be changed; a payment is still open".
- **Step 4. A new reservation.** Choose Reservation types, Availability, the Time from Available times,
  From and To, and the Table. Enter the guest (Guest search), or tick Passer-by (no guest details). Fill in
  Reservation name and Language. After Save choose whether the guest gets an email: Send email, Don't send email
  or Edit the email before sending. With Pay you settle straight away.
- **Reservation information.** Tap a reservation: Overview, Attachment(s), History, Email History,
  Guest messages and Guest data & information. There you also set the reservation to no-show (Set to No-show
  or Set to No-show in 30 minutes) and add a Reservation document.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Hide "Guest arrived" | Hides guests who are already there from the list. | To see who is still to come. | Also for activities and tickets. |
| Hide "Guest left" | Hides guests who have left. | During service. | - |
| Paid / Unpaid | The payment status of the reservation in the list. | - | - |
| Table | The table of the reservation. | For a new or changed reservation. | If the table is occupied at that time, Table already occupied follows. |
| Check in now | Sets the guest to arrived immediately, with the current time. | A walk-in you do want as a reservation. | Only if this field is turned on for your business. |
| Locking table change | The reservation stays on its table: when switching in the timeline it does not move along. | A fixed table for a regular guest. | Only for the restaurant. |
| Passer-by (no guest details) | A reservation without name and contact details. | Quickly seating someone at a table. | - |
| Reservation name | The name the reservation is under (also on the receipt). | Always. | - |
| Language | The language of the emails to the guest. | For a foreign guest. | - |
| Internal memo | A note the guest does not see. | Allergies, requests for the staff. | With Add to quote it also goes on the quote. |
| Add to quote | Includes the internal memo in the quote. | For a group with a quote. | Only shown for a certain status of the reservation; Check in now is then not shown. |
| Products / Reservation combinations | Products and packages with the reservation. | For a package. | - |
| Subject, Description, Add file | A Reservation document with the reservation, with Upload. | A contract or a floor plan for a party. | - |
| No tables available | There is no suitable table at that time. | - | Choose a different time, or show all tables. |
| Show reserved tables / Show available tables | Switch between occupied and free tables when choosing. | When looking for a spot. | - |
| Pay | Opens the payment window of the reservation (also on the Floorplan): on the left the Order overview, on the right Cash payment with Payment Amount and Change amount, and the totals Total excluding VAT, Total amount, Total paid and Outstanding amount. | A deposit or the whole reservation in advance. | The amount of the products with the reservation. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Table already occupied | "This table is already occupied at this time. Are you sure you still want to book here?" | Choose a different table, or Book anyway: it is then recorded who did that and which table it concerned. |
| Guest status | The title of the window in which you change a guest's status. | Choose the new status and confirm. |
| Status cannot be changed; a payment is still open | A payment is still in progress. | Wait or complete the payment. |
| The reservation has been set to 'No-show'. | The guest did not show up. | - |
| The reservation will be set to 'No-show' in 30 minutes. | You chose Set to No-show in 30 minutes. | - |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see reservations in the POS?
- How do I add a reservation from the POS?
- How do I mark a guest as arrived in the POS?
- Can I see in the POS which tables are reserved?

**Keywords:** reservations POS, add reservation POS, guest arrived, no-show POS, table occupied reservation, daily overview reservations

**Related:** [How does the floor plan (Floorplan) work in Jimani?](floorplan.md), [How does the Tables window on the till work?](../../kassa/naslag/tafels-venster.md)

---

# How do I work with activity reservations in the POS?

**Answer:** If your business uses the Activities module on the POS, the bar contains Reservations and
Reservation. Under Reservations you see the reservations per day, per week or the last 100, with filters on
status, type and activity. With Reservation you create a new one; tapping a reservation shows the
details, the history and the tickets, and can set it to no-show.

**Where to find it:** POS > Reservations (`/Pos/ActivitiesReservation`); new with Reservation
(`/Pos/AddActivitiesReservations`)

**Explanation:**

- **The list.** Choose the day, List view, Weekly list or Last 100 reservations. Filter with Select
  status, Search by:, Select Type and Activities, and hide with Hide "Guest left" and Hide
  "Guest arrived". At the bottom are the Totals (Day totals or Week totals). Per line you see Reservation status,
  Date, Arrival time, Departure time, Name, Quantity, Activity, Duration, Locations, Payment (Paid or Unpaid),
  Created, Memo and Total amount.
- **A new reservation.** Under Activities choose the activity ("Select an Activity Type"), the
  Date (and for multiple days the Departure date), From and To or the Duration, and the Locations (lanes). Choose a time from
  Available times. Enter the guest (Find guests) or tick Passer-by (no guest details), and fill in
  Reservation name and Language. With Check in now the guest is immediately marked as arrived.
- **Finishing.** Under Your invoice you find Total amount, Total paid and Outstanding amount. Tap Save or
  Pay and choose whether the guest gets an email (Send email or No email).
- **Reservation information.** Overview, Attachment(s), History, Email History, Tickets (with QR Code
  and Reservation key) and Guest data & information. With Set to No-show or Set to No-show in 30 minutes
  you set it to no-show; the POS asks "Are you sure you want to set this reservation to 'No-show'?"

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Activities | The activity (type) being booked. | Always. | - |
| Date and Departure date | The day of the activity, and for multiple days the last day. | Always. | - |
| From, To and Duration | The time of the activity. | Always. | - |
| Locations | The lane or spot. | For activities with lanes. | - |
| Language | The language of the emails to the guest. | - | - |
| Reservation name | The name on the reservation. | Always. | - |
| Passer-by (no guest details) | Without name and contact details. | A single visitor. | - |
| Check in now | Immediately set to arrived. | A guest who is starting now. | - |
| Internal memo | A note the guest does not see. | Requests or agreements. | - |
| Add to quote | Includes the internal memo in the quote. | For a quote. | Not always shown. |
| Hide "Guest arrived" / Hide "Guest left" | Hides those guests from the list. | During service. | - |
| Paid / Unpaid | The payment status in the list. | - | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Reservation successfully set to 'No-show' | The guest did not show up. | - |
| Reservation will be set to 'No-show' in 30 minutes | You chose Set to No-show in 30 minutes. | - |
| The status of the reservation has not been updated. Please try again. | The status could not be saved. | Try again. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I see activity reservations in the POS?
- Can I book an activity from the POS?
- How do I settle an activity in the POS?
- How do I mark a guest as arrived in the POS?

**Keywords:** activities POS, book activity POS, bowling reservation, book lane, no-show activity, activity reservations

**Related:** [How do I work with reservations in the POS?](../../horeca/naslag/reserveringen-in-de-kassa.md), [What is on the handheld: menu, Settings and reservations?](../../kassa/naslag/handheld.md)

---

# How do I work with ticket reservations in the POS?

**Answer:** If your business uses the Ticket sales module on the POS, the bar contains Reservations and
POS. Under Reservations you see the ticket orders per day, per week or the last 100, with filters on
status and ticket type. With a new reservation you sell tickets for an event or for a day and
time, for a guest or as a passer-by.

**Where to find it:** POS > Reservations (`/Pos/TicketingReservation`); new via
`/Pos/AddTicketingReservations`

**Explanation:**

- **The list.** Choose the day, List view, Weekly list or Last 100 reservations. Filter with Select
  status, Search by:, Select Type and Ticket types, and hide guests who are already inside with Hide
  "Guest arrived". At the bottom are the Totals (Day totals or Week totals) with the Total visitors. Per line you see
  Date, Name, Ticket group, Duration, Quantity, Ticket type, Payment (Paid or Unpaid), Created, Memo and
  Total amount.
- **A new reservation.** Under Event tickets choose the event, or the Arrival date and time for a
  timed ticket. Choose the Time from Available times and per Ticket types the Quantity (the Available tickets
  are shown next to it). Enter the guest (Find guests) or tick Passer-by (no guest details), and fill in Reservation name
  and Language. With Check in now the visitors are immediately marked as arrived.
- **Finishing.** Under Your invoice you find the amounts. Tap Pay and choose whether the guest gets an email
  (Send email or No email).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Event tickets | The event you sell tickets for. | For event tickets. | - |
| Arrival date and time | The day and time of a timed ticket. | For standard tickets. | - |
| Time | The time slot from Available times. | Always. | - |
| Ticket types | The types of tickets, with the quantity per type. | Always. | - |
| Quantity | How many tickets of that type. | Always. | Never more than available. |
| Language | The language of the emails and tickets. | - | - |
| Reservation name | The name on the order. | Always. | - |
| Passer-by (no guest details) | Without name and contact details. | Sales at the door. | - |
| Check in now | The visitors immediately set to arrived. | Sales at the door. | - |
| Internal memo | A note the guest does not see. | - | - |
| Add to quote | Includes the internal memo in the quote. | For a quote. | Not always shown. |
| Hide "Guest arrived" | Hides visitors who are already inside from the list. | At the door. | - |
| Paid / Unpaid | The payment status in the list. | - | - |

**Related questions:**

- How do I see ticket reservations in the POS?
- Can I open a ticket reservation in the POS?
- How do I put a ticket order on account in the POS?
- Where do I find reservations on the POS?

**Keywords:** tickets POS, ticket sales at the door, sell ticket POS, event tickets POS, check in visitors, ticket reservations

**Related:** [How do I work with reservations in the POS?](../../horeca/naslag/reserveringen-in-de-kassa.md)

---

# Which devices does Jimani work on?

**Answer:** Jimani works on a Jimani POS screen, on a tablet as a POS, on a phone or handheld for ordering at the table, in the browser of a computer or laptop (the web POS) and as a program on a Windows computer (POS for Windows). An iPad or iPhone is not listed as a device type in Jimani.

**Explanation:** You pair each device with a pairing code, and it then appears under Settings > Till and products > Tills and equipment, on the Connected devices tab.

| Device | What it is for | How to get it running |
|---|---|---|
| Jimani POS screen (for example the X80-EU, or the X80D-EU with a second screen for the customer) | The fixed POS | POS app on the device, pair with a pairing code |
| Tablet | The POS on an ordinary tablet, without a built-in printer | POS app, pair with a pairing code |
| Phone | Ordering at the table on a phone (handheld) | POS app, pair with a pairing code |
| Handheld (for example the Sunmi L3) | Ordering and settling at the table | POS app, pair with a pairing code |
| Computer or laptop (web POS) | The POS in the browser | POS button in the dashboard, or Add External Device > Web POS |
| Windows computer | The POS as a program | Turn on the POS for Windows add-on and download the installation file |
| Kitchen screen | Orders in the kitchen | Pair with a pairing code; the Kitchen screen add-on must be on |
| Self-order kiosk | Guests order themselves | Pair with a pairing code in the app |

You also connect: receipt printers, cash drawers, buzzers and card terminals (PAX A35 or PAX A920-PRO via Mollie, and the Mollie Tap for Tap to Pay).

- **What it costs.** The first POS is free and the web POS in the dashboard does not count as a POS. An extra POS costs €15 per month, a handheld or phone €5, a kitchen screen €5 and a POS screen with buzzer €10 (all amounts excl. VAT). See [What does an extra POS, handheld, kitchen screen or buzzer cost?](../../prijzen/faq/extra-kassa-handheld-keukenscherm.md).
- **iPad and iPhone.** These are not in the list of device types. We do not promise that the web POS works well in the browser of such a device.
- **Receipt from a tablet or phone.** If the device has no printer of its own, you print on a printer in your network. See [How do I print a receipt if my tablet or phone has no printer?](bon-printen-zonder-printer.md).

**Example:** A café has a Jimani POS screen at the bar, two phones as handhelds on the floor and the web POS on the owner's laptop. The phones cost 2 × €5 = €10 per month. The first POS and the web POS cost nothing extra.

**Related questions:**

- Does Jimani work on an iPad?
- Can I use the POS on my laptop?
- Which devices can I use as a POS?
- Does it work on an iPhone?

**Keywords:** which devices, POS on tablet, POS on phone, POS on windows, web POS, ipad POS, handheld

**Related:** [How do I install POS for Windows?](kassa-voor-windows-installeren.md), [Can I install this myself and pair my devices myself?](zelf-installeren-en-apparaten-koppelen.md), [How does the Connected devices screen work in Jimani?](../naslag/aangesloten-apparaten.md)

---

# How do I install POS for Windows?

**Answer:** In the dashboard, under Settings > Add-ons, turn on the POS for Windows add-on and then open the settings of that tile. Then you download the installation file. Install it on your Windows computer and pair the POS with a pairing code.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Add-ons and find the POS for Windows tile. Click Turn on.
- **Step 2.** Click the Open settings icon on the tile. As long as the add-on is off, this takes you back to Add-ons. Once it is on, the download of the file Jimani-Kassa-installeren.exe starts.
- **Step 3.** Install the program on the Windows computer or Windows POS.
- **Step 4.** In the dashboard go to Settings > Till and products > Tills and equipment and click Connect a POS. Type the 6-character code into the program. The code works for a quarter of an hour and only once.
- **Printer.** The program works with a receipt printer via USB or via the network.

The POS for Windows add-on itself costs nothing per month. If the computer counts as a POS (a POS screen), the usual rule does apply: the first POS is free, an extra POS costs €15 per month excl. VAT.

**Example:** A shop with a Windows POS at the counter turns on POS for Windows, downloads the file, installs it and pairs it with the code from Connect a POS.

**Related questions:**

- Can I install the POS on my Windows PC?
- Where do I download the installation file for the POS on Windows?
- How do I pair my PC with Jimani using a pairing code?

**Keywords:** pos for windows, install windows pos, download pos program, pc pos, pos installation file

**Related:** [Which devices does Jimani work on?](op-welke-apparaten-werkt-jimani.md), [Can I install this myself and pair my devices myself?](zelf-installeren-en-apparaten-koppelen.md)

---

# Can I install this myself and pair my devices myself?

**Answer:** Yes. You pair a POS, handheld, tablet, phone or kitchen screen yourself with a pairing code from the dashboard, and you add a receipt printer, cash drawer or buzzer yourself under Add External Device. You do not need an engineer to pair in Jimani.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Till and products > Tills and equipment and click Connect a POS. You see a 6-character pairing code (without 0, O, 1, I and L, so you do not mistype anything).
- **Step 2.** Type the code into the POS app on the device. The code is valid for a quarter of an hour and works once. If two people create a code at the same time, they get the same code as long as it is still valid for at least five minutes.
- **Step 3.** The window waits for the device (Waiting for the point of sale...). Once it is paired, it reports The point of sale is paired and the device appears in the Connected devices list.
- **SMS.** If SMS is on and your own mobile number is confirmed, you can send the code to your phone with the button Send by text to my phone. If the SMS cannot be sent, the code goes by email.
- **Recognition.** Jimani recognises a known device by its model name and immediately creates it with the right type. If Jimani is not sure, the app asks what the device is.
- **Pairing the same device again** returns the same device, with its own settings.
- **Computer or laptop.** No code is needed: when adding, choose Web POS (This computer as a till), or open the POS in the dashboard. There is one web POS per business.
- **Kitchen screen.** Pairing a new kitchen screen only works if the Restaurant, Courses and Kitchen screen add-ons are on. Otherwise Jimani refuses it and the code stays unused.
- **Card terminals.** Once Mollie is connected, Jimani fetches your card terminals and Taps itself when you open Connected devices. You add a Tap with Connect Tap to Pay.
- **Printer, cash drawer, buzzer.** Click the green plus. Choose the type (Printers, Cash register or Buzzers), then the device. A printer needs an IP address, or a USB cable to the POS.

Physically setting up and connecting cables and network is outside Jimani.

![The Connected devices screen with the buttons Connect a POS and Connect Tap to Pay and the green plus](/kennisbank/beelden/zelf-installeren-en-apparaten-koppelen-1.webp)

**Example:** You buy a tablet for the bar. You click Connect a POS, get code K7M2PQ, type it into the app and after a few seconds the tablet is in your list. Then, on the tablet, you choose which receipt printer belongs to it.

**Related questions:**

- Do I need an engineer to install my POS?
- How do I pair a new POS screen or handheld myself?
- How do I add a printer or cash drawer myself?
- Where do I find the pairing code for my device?

**Keywords:** install yourself, pair POS, pairing code, pair device, without engineer, connect new POS, pair tablet

**Related:** [Which devices does Jimani work on?](op-welke-apparaten-werkt-jimani.md), [How do I connect a receipt printer and use multiple printers?](bonprinter-koppelen-en-meerdere-printers.md), [How does the Connected devices screen work in Jimani?](../naslag/aangesloten-apparaten.md)

---

# How do I connect a receipt printer and use multiple printers?

**Answer:** Under Connected devices, click the green plus, choose Printers and under What is this printer for? choose Till receipts or Kitchen tickets. You can connect several printers: one POS printer for the customer receipt and one or more kitchen printers for the kitchen and bar.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Till and products > Tills and equipment and click the green plus (Add External Device). Choose Printers (Receipt and kitchen printers) and then the model.
- **Step 2.** Choose Till receipts or Kitchen tickets. A printer is one or the other: a till receipt is a different receipt from a kitchen ticket.
- **Step 3.** Give the printer a Display name.
- **Step 4, till receipts.** Is this printer connected to the POS with a USB cable? Choose Yes for a cable, No for a network printer and then enter the IP address. If needed, choose the cash drawer (Which cash drawer?).
- **Step 4, kitchen tickets.** Only the IP address: a kitchen printer with a USB cable to the POS is not possible. Then you choose which products come out (Products for this kitchen).
- **Step 5, till receipts.** Optionally an image, the Header text on the receipt and the Footer text on the receipt.
- **Connecting to the POS.** Open the POS screen under Connected devices. Under Connected receipt printer you choose the printer for the customer receipt. Under Connected kitchen printer(s) you choose one or more kitchen printers; with the plus you add one.
- **Products per kitchen printer.** Which products go to which kitchen printer, you set on the kitchen printer itself. Of an order, only those products appear on that kitchen ticket. This way a drink goes to the bar and a dish to the kitchen.
- **More than one POS.** Each POS has its own choice of POS printer and kitchen printers.

**Example:** A restaurant has an Epson receipt printer at the POS (Till receipts) and two kitchen printers: Kitchen (dishes) and Bar (drinks). The POS screen gets both under Connected kitchen printer(s), and an order splits automatically.

**Related questions:**

- How do I connect a receipt printer to the POS?
- Can I use multiple printers, for example in the kitchen and at the bar?
- How do I get orders printed in the kitchen?
- How do I choose whether a printer prints till receipts or kitchen tickets?

**Keywords:** connect receipt printer, multiple printers, kitchen printer, bar printer, POS receipt printer, ip address printer, usb printer

**Related:** [How do I set up the kitchen ticket?](keukenbon-instellen.md), [Which cash drawer opens and how do I connect it?](kassalade-koppelen-en-openen.md), [How do I print a receipt if my tablet or phone has no printer?](bon-printen-zonder-printer.md), [How does the Connected devices screen work in Jimani?](../naslag/aangesloten-apparaten.md)

---

# How do I print a receipt if my tablet or phone has no printer?

**Answer:** Set No printer to Yes on the device if it never needs to print a receipt. If you do want a receipt, the POS chooses the printer in your network at checkout: you get the question On which printer? and Jimani remembers your choice.

**Explanation:**

- **No printer.** Open the device under Settings > Till and products > Tills and equipment. Set No printer to Yes: this device then does not try to print a receipt and you get no message that the printer was not found. It is available for POS screens and handhelds and saves immediately.
- **A receipt from another printer.** If the device has no printer of its own, the POS first looks for the printer you remembered earlier. If there is none, you get On which printer? with the text This device has no printer of its own. Choose the printer for the receipt.
- **Remember choice.** Below the list is the switch Remember choice, on by default. Then the POS no longer asks. If there is only one printer, the POS chooses it itself.
- **What goes on the receipt.** It is the same customer receipt; you only choose the printer.
- **Always a receipt or choose.** With Always print a receipt you decide whether a receipt goes out without asking. If this is set to no, you choose Print receipt or No receipt at checkout.

**Example:** A tablet sits behind the bar without a printer. The receipt printer is at the main POS. The bartender settles, chooses the receipt printer of the main POS once with Remember choice on, and the next receipts come out there automatically.

**Related questions:**

- How do I print a receipt from my tablet without a printer?
- My phone has no printer, can I still print a receipt?
- Why does the POS ask which printer I want to print on?
- How do I stop a device from printing receipts?

**Keywords:** tablet without printer, print receipt tablet, phone receipt, no printer, choose printer, receipt to other printer

**Related:** [How do I connect a receipt printer and use multiple printers?](bonprinter-koppelen-en-meerdere-printers.md), [Is the order number on the receipt and can I put it large at the top?](bestelnummer-op-de-bon.md), [What is on the receipt?](wat-staat-er-op-de-kassabon.md)

---

# Is the order number on the receipt and can I put it large at the top?

**Answer:** Yes. The receipt number and the date and time are always on the receipt; you cannot turn them off. If you also want the number large at the top right, turn on Receipt number at the top of the receipt on the printer. A buzzer number on the receipt is a separate setting.

**Explanation:**

- **Always on the receipt.** On the printer there is the line Receipt number and date/time are always on the receipt (cash register law). The order number and the order time are fixed; you cannot turn them off.
- **Large at the top right.** Open the receipt printer under Settings > Till and products > Tills and equipment. Under What goes on the receipt? you find Receipt number at the top of the receipt (Large, top right). By default this is No.
- **What you can turn off.** Payment method on the receipt (Cash, card or otherwise), Order method on the receipt (Till, online or handheld) and User on the receipt (Who rang up the order). All three are on by default.
- **Also on a receipt from a tablet.** If a tablet or phone prints on another printer, the order number appears on the customer receipt that comes out there. See [How do I print a receipt if my tablet or phone has no printer?](bon-printen-zonder-printer.md).
- **Buzzer number.** If you also want the number of a buzzer at the top of the receipt, see [How do I use buzzers at the till?](buzzers-op-de-kassa.md).

**Example:** A takeaway business turns on Receipt number at the top of the receipt. On every receipt the number is now large at the top right, so the guest can read it from a distance when collecting.

**Related questions:**

- How do I get the receipt number large at the top of the receipt?
- Can I remove the receipt number from the receipt?
- Are the date and time on the till receipt?
- How do I put a buzzer number on the receipt?

**Keywords:** order number on receipt, receipt number at top, large receipt number, what is on the receipt, pickup number, number on receipt

**Related:** [What is on the receipt?](wat-staat-er-op-de-kassabon.md), [How do I use buzzers at the till?](buzzers-op-de-kassa.md), [What can you set on a receipt printer or kitchen printer?](../naslag/apparaat-printer-instellen.md)

---

# Which cash drawer opens and how do I connect it?

**Answer:** Add the cash drawer via the green plus > Cash register. Then connect it to the receipt printer (Which cash drawer?) or to the POS screen (Connected cash drawer). When a customer pays cash, that drawer opens. A drawer is connected to one device at a time.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Till and products > Tills and equipment, click the green plus and choose Cash register (Cash drawer and wallet). Choose the cash drawer and give it a name.
- **Step 2, via the printer.** Open the receipt printer. Under Which cash drawer? you choose the cash drawer that is attached to this printer and opens when you pay cash.
- **Step 2, via the POS screen.** Open the POS screen. Under Connected cash drawer you choose the drawer, or None. If you choose None, you cannot pay cash on this POS, only by card. This choice only appears if a cash drawer has been created.
- **One drawer, one device.** If you choose a drawer that is already connected to another device, that other device releases it. In the list, the drawer is therefore followed by currently at and the name of the device it is currently connected to.
- **Open cash drawer under Other?** On Yes, there is an Open till button under Other on the POS. Tapping the logo at the top left twice also opens the drawer, even if this is set to No. By default this is No.
- **When booking money.** A deposit or withdrawal at Cash also opens the drawer; see [How do I book money in or out of the cash drawer?](kas-storten-en-opnemen.md).

**Example:** You have two POS devices and one cash drawer. You first connect the drawer to POS 1. If you then choose it on POS 2, the list shows currently at POS 1 after the name, and POS 1 then has no drawer anymore.

**Related questions:**

- My cash drawer does not open, how do I connect it?
- How do I connect a cash drawer?
- Which device is the cash drawer connected to?
- Does the drawer also open for card payments?

**Keywords:** connect cash drawer, cash drawer does not open, open cash drawer, pay cash drawer, no cash drawer, drawer on printer

**Related:** [How do I connect a receipt printer and use multiple printers?](bonprinter-koppelen-en-meerdere-printers.md), [How does the Connected devices screen work in Jimani?](../naslag/aangesloten-apparaten.md)

---

# How do I set up the kitchen ticket?

**Answer:** Open the kitchen printer (What is this printer for? is set to Kitchen tickets) under Connected devices. There you choose which products come out, which language the ticket is in, what is on the ticket and in which order the items appear.

**Explanation:**

- **Products for this kitchen.** Choose which products come out here. Of an order, only those products appear on this kitchen ticket.
- **Kitchen ticket language.** Default is Language of the business. If you choose another language, product names and options are translated; guest comments never are.
- **Content of the kitchen ticket.** This choice only appears if the Courses add-on is on. You choose from four forms:
  - This course, own: only the course that is going to the kitchen now, with only the items of this printer. This is the default.
  - This course, all: only the current course, with all items of that course, including those of other printers.
  - Full ticket, own: the whole order with the items of this printer. The current course is at the top, what is still waiting below it, what has already been served at the bottom with a tick.
  - Full ticket, all: the whole order with all items, arranged in the same way.
- **Order on the kitchen ticket.** Entry order (default): the items in the order in which the waiter rang them up. Or Register order: as they appear on the POS, first the order of the categories, within them that of the products.
- **Connecting.** The printer only works for a POS once you choose it on the POS screen under Connected kitchen printer(s).

**Example:** The bar prints only drinks and chooses This course, own with Entry order. The kitchen chooses Full ticket, all, so the cook sees which courses are still to come.

**Related questions:**

- How do I decide which products appear on the kitchen ticket?
- Can I have the kitchen ticket printed in another language?
- How do I change the order of dishes on the kitchen ticket?
- How do I change what is on the kitchen slip?

**Keywords:** kitchen ticket, set up kitchen printer, kitchen ticket language, kitchen ticket order, courses kitchen ticket, bar printer

**Related:** [How do I connect a receipt printer and use multiple printers?](bonprinter-koppelen-en-meerdere-printers.md), [How does the kitchen screen work?](keukenscherm-gebruiken.md)

---

# How does the kitchen screen work?

**Answer:** The kitchen screen shows the orders for the kitchen as cards. The cook taps a product to move it from New to In progress and then to Done, and completes the order once everything is done. You pair the screen with a pairing code; a kitchen screen costs €5 per month per screen (excl. VAT).

**Explanation:**

- **Pairing.** Click Connect a POS and type the code on the screen. If Jimani does not recognise the device, the app asks what it is: choose Kitchen screen. A new kitchen screen only works if the Restaurant, Courses and Kitchen screen add-ons are on. Courses costs €10 per month (free until 1 January 2027 if you already use it).
- **Which orders.** You connect the kitchen screen to a POS under Connected kitchen screen (The kitchen screen on which the orders of this till appear). On the kitchen screen under Connected devices, you choose under Products for this kitchen which products come out.
- **Card.** Each order is a card with the items and options, the table or location, the number of guests, the waiter, the time of the order and the type of order (Eat here, Pickup or Delivery). The screen refreshes itself every 10 seconds.
- **Tapping products.** Tap a line or the tick: New becomes In progress, In progress becomes Done. If you tap Done, it goes back to In progress.
- **Everything at once.** If a card has more than one item, small buttons above the items let you set all items at once to in progress, done or back.
- **Hold.** With the Hold button at the top (which then reads Hold: on) you turn on hold mode. Then tap an item to put it on hold; you see the message Item ON HOLD. If you tap it again, the hold disappears (Hold removed). If you tap an item on hold while hold mode is off, you get Turn on Hold mode to change the held items. Below the card are the states New, In progress, Done and Hold; they show which state the order is in.
- **Completing.** Open the Done tab. If all items of an order are done, the button under the card is green and reads Completed. As long as something is not done yet it says Partially Ready and you cannot complete. A completed order is on the Finished tab.
- **Tabs.** At the top are All, New, In progress, Done, Hold and Finished, each with a count. An order with items in two states appears in both tabs.
- **Courses.** With the Courses add-on the whole ticket is on the screen, per course. What has not been called yet is dimmed. As long as a course is waiting to be called, you cannot complete the order.
- **Light or dark.** With the Light or dark button at the top you switch the colours. The screen remembers your choice on that device; the default is dark.
- **Cancelled.** A cancelled order disappears from the kitchen screen.

**Example:** An order for table 4 comes in with two dishes. The cook taps both: In progress. When the first is done he taps it again: Done. When the second is done as well, he opens the Done tab and chooses Completed; the card goes to Finished.

**Related questions:**

- How does the cook use the kitchen screen?
- What do New, In progress and Done mean on the kitchen screen?
- How do I pair a screen in the kitchen?
- What does a kitchen screen cost?

**Keywords:** kitchen screen, kds, kitchen display, orders kitchen screen, kitchen screen in progress done, courses kitchen screen

**Related:** [Kitchen screen or kitchen printer: which suits me?](keukenscherm-of-keukenprinter.md), [How do I follow the status of an order and how does the kitchen screen work?](../../webshop/faq/bestelstatus-en-keukenscherm.md), [How do I set up the kitchen ticket?](keukenbon-instellen.md), [What does an extra POS, handheld, kitchen screen or buzzer cost?](../../prijzen/faq/extra-kassa-handheld-keukenscherm.md), [How does the kitchen screen's screen work?](../naslag/keukenscherm-scherm.md)

---

# Kitchen screen or kitchen printer: which suits me?

**Answer:** You can use either, and even side by side. A kitchen printer prints a ticket per order and is available without an extra add-on. A kitchen screen lets the cook keep track of orders on the screen (New, In progress, Done) and requires the Restaurant, Courses and Kitchen screen add-ons, at €5 per screen per month.

**Explanation:**

| | Kitchen printer | Kitchen screen |
|---|---|---|
| What you see | A ticket with the products for that kitchen | A card per order on a screen |
| Tracking | Not on the ticket itself | The cook taps New, In progress and Done and completes |
| Pairing | Add External Device > Printers > Kitchen tickets | Pairing code, like a POS |
| Where you choose it | On the POS screen under Connected kitchen printer(s) (more than one is allowed) | On the POS screen under Connected kitchen screen (one) |
| Products | Products for this kitchen, per printer | Products for this kitchen, per screen |
| Options | Language, Content (with Courses) and Order of the kitchen ticket | Light or dark, tabs and hold mode on the screen |
| Costs | No add-on needed | €5 per screen per month, plus Courses €10 per month (excl. VAT; free until 1 January 2027 if you already use it) |

- **Both at the same time.** A POS screen can have one kitchen screen and several kitchen printers. This way a dish goes to the kitchen screen and a drink to the receipt printer at the bar.
- **Which products.** You choose on each device which products come out. Of an order, only those products appear on that device.
- **Courses.** If you want starters, mains and desserts called separately, you need Courses. Then the kitchen screen shows the whole ticket per course, and a kitchen ticket can show the current course or the whole ticket.

**Example:** A restaurant with one kitchen chooses a kitchen screen for the cook and a receipt printer in the bar for the drinks. The cook taps dishes when they are done; the bar simply tears off the ticket.

**Related questions:**

- Should I get a kitchen screen or a kitchen printer?
- Can I use a printer and a screen in the kitchen at the same time?
- Which add-ons do I need for the kitchen screen?
- What is the difference between a kitchen ticket and a kitchen screen?

**Keywords:** kitchen screen or printer, kitchen printer, kds, kitchen ticket or screen, kitchen screen costs, bar printer

**Related:** [How does the kitchen screen work?](keukenscherm-gebruiken.md), [How do I set up the kitchen ticket?](keukenbon-instellen.md), [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md)

---

# Can I show different products on each POS?

**Answer:** Yes. Open the POS screen under Connected devices and set Always show all products on the POS? to No. Then you choose per category which products this screen sells. On Yes the screen automatically sells every product of your business.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Till and products > Tills and equipment and click the POS screen.
- **Step 2.** Set Always show all products on the POS? to No. If this is on yes, this screen automatically sells every product of the business, including a product you add or remove later. If it is on no, you choose per category which products are sold here.
- **Step 3.** Click Next. You get a page per category. Choose the products, or use Select all for a whole category or Add all products for everything. Click Save.
- **New product.** If the choice is on No, a product you create later does not automatically appear on this screen. You add it here.
- **Only for a POS screen.** The question appears for POS screens whose point of sale has categories.
- **Which module.** If your business sells more than one kind (for example POS and webshop), you choose under Point of sale which module this screen sells.
- **Images.** With Images with the items set to No you only see the name and the price. That is calmer and faster.
- **Stock.** The questions Hide stock on the till and Show items that are out of stock only appear if the stock module is on.

**Example:** The bar only sells drinks and the kitchen only dishes. On the bar POS you set Always show all products on the POS? to No and choose only the categories Beer, Wine and Soft drinks.

**Related questions:**

- How do I show different products on one POS than on another?
- Can I give the bar POS only drinks?
- Where do I choose which products a POS sells?

**Keywords:** products per POS, different products on POS, assortment per POS, bar and kitchen POS, choose products POS screen

**Related:** [What can you set on a POS screen, handheld, tablet or phone?](../naslag/apparaat-kassascherm-instellen.md), [How do I connect a receipt printer and use multiple printers?](bonprinter-koppelen-en-meerdere-printers.md)

---

# Why is my device green or red under Connected devices?

**Answer:** The dot at the top right of the tile of a POS, handheld, phone or kiosk is green if the device has had contact with Jimani in the last three minutes, and red if not. The tile also shows which app version the device is running and when you last saw it.

**Explanation:**

- **Green or red.** Green if the device has an open connection with Jimani, or reported in during the last three minutes (the app reports in every minute), or if the POS screen was still open in that time. Otherwise red. Printers, cash drawers and kitchen screens do not have this dot.
- **App version and last seen.** At the bottom left of the tile it says for example 1.0.87 · 4 min ago. If you hover over it, you see App version and the time at which the device last reported in. The text turns orange if the device has not reported in for ten minutes.
- **POS app not connected – restart the app.** This orange message appears if the POS screen is still open but the POS app has not reported in for two minutes. No receipts will come out then. Restart the app on the device.
- **Printer not found — N receipts waiting.** This message appears if the POS cannot find its USB receipt printer. The receipts keep waiting and come out automatically as soon as the printer is back. The message stays for a quarter of an hour and does not appear with No printer.
- **Belongs to old account.** This card terminal belongs to your previous Mollie account.
- **Brand and model.** Under the name is the brand and model as the device reports it, when pairing and at every start.
- **Receipt printing status.** Open a POS or printer and expand Receipt printing status at the bottom. You see per receipt when it was Sent, after how long it was Printed, how many Attempts there were and What went wrong. A receipt can be Sent, Printed or Failed.

**Example:** At the bar a tablet is red with the orange message POS app not connected – restart the app. You close the app, open it again, and after a minute the dot is green.

**Related questions:**

- What does the red dot at my POS mean?
- How do I see whether my POS or handheld is online?
- Where do I see which app version my POS is running?
- My device is red, what now?

**Keywords:** device offline, POS red dot, POS not connected, app version POS, printer not found, receipts waiting

**Related:** [How does the Connected devices screen work in Jimani?](../naslag/aangesloten-apparaten.md), [How do I print a receipt if my tablet or phone has no printer?](bon-printen-zonder-printer.md)

---

# How do I set up the customer display?

**Answer:** If your POS has a second screen for the customer (such as the X80D-EU), open the POS screen under Connected devices and go to the Customer display step. There you choose the logo, the line under the logo, the welcome text, the font, the text size and the background. You see a preview right away.

**Explanation:**

- **Where.** Settings > Till and products > Tills and equipment, click the POS screen. The Customer display preview step only appears for a POS with a second screen.
- **Logo.** With Show logo you choose Yes or No. Logo size is Small, Medium (default) or Large. Leaving Own logo for this screen empty means: your business's logo.
- **Line under the logo.** By default your business's email address. Enter something yourself, for example a phone number or website, at most 100 characters. Leaving it empty gives your business's email address.
- **Welcome text.** Leaving it empty gives the default text in the language of the POS. A text of your own can be at most 60 characters.
- **Font.** Inter (default), Poppins, Georgia or Arial.
- **Text size.** Small, Normal (default) or Large.
- **Background.** The colour when nothing is being ordered: Light (default), Dark or Blue. Blue uses the colour from your house style.
- **Save.** At the bottom is Save.

**Example:** A bakery sets Line under the logo to its phone number, leaves the welcome text Welcome to the bakery! as it is and chooses the Blue background.

**Related questions:**

- How do I put my logo on the customer display?
- Can I put a welcome text on the second screen for the customer?
- How do I set up the customer display?
- Can I change the font and background of the customer display?

**Keywords:** customer display, second screen POS, welcome text customer display, logo customer display, x80d, dual POS screen

**Related:** [Which devices does Jimani work on?](op-welke-apparaten-werkt-jimani.md), [What can you set on a POS screen, handheld, tablet or phone?](../naslag/apparaat-kassascherm-instellen.md)

---

# How do I have the day closing made and emailed automatically?

**Answer:** Go to Settings > Money and figures > Day closing and click the cog at the top right (End-of-day settings). Set Automatic day closing to Yes and choose the End-of-day closing time. Set Email the end-of-day closing automatically to Yes and enter the email addresses. By default Jimani closes every night at 06:00.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Day closing and click the cog. The window is called End-of-day settings.
- **Step 2.** Set Automatic day closing to Yes. Then the night round closes the day every day at the chosen time, on your business's clock. This is on Yes by default.
- **Step 3.** Under End-of-day closing time enter a time as hh:mm, for example 04:00. Choose a time after closing, so the day is really over. By default that is 06:00.
- **Step 4.** Set Email the end-of-day closing automatically to Yes. After every day closing the financial overview (pdf, with the Excel attached) goes to your addresses. This applies to the automatic and to a manual day closing.
- **Step 5.** Under Email addresses enter one or more addresses. Separate multiple addresses with a comma. Click Save.
- **Mailing again.** If you count the cash after closing (see [How does the day closing and counting the cash work?](dagafsluiting-en-kas-tellen.md)), the email goes out once more as soon as all drawers have been counted, now with the cash difference and the amount skimmed off.
- **Fixed change.** Under the same settings are Fixed change in the drawer and Change per drawer. These save immediately when you change them.
- **Error messages.** Enter a time as hh:mm. means the time is not valid. Enter at least one email address. appears if emailing is on without an address. This is not a valid email address: ... names the address that is wrong.

![The Day closing screen with the list of closings and at the top right the cog for the settings and the plus for a new closing](/kennisbank/beelden/dagafsluiting-automatisch-en-mailen-1.webp)

**Example:** A restaurant closes its doors at 02:00. The owner sets the End-of-day closing time to 04:00 and enters his own address and that of the bookkeeper. Every morning the overview is in both mailboxes.

**Related questions:**

- Can the day closing be made automatically?
- How do I get the daily report in my mailbox every day?
- How do I change the time of the day closing?
- What time is the default day closing?
- How do I set the cash closing to automatic?

**Keywords:** automatic day closing, email day closing, day closing time, z report email, day closing bookkeeper, day closing 06:00

**Related:** [How does the day closing and counting the cash work?](dagafsluiting-en-kas-tellen.md), [How do I make a day closing myself and how do I download, email or print it?](dagafsluiting-maken-downloaden-mailen.md), [How does Day closing work in Jimani?](../naslag/dagafsluiting.md)

---

# How do I make a day closing myself and how do I download, email or print it?

**Answer:** Go to Settings > Money and figures > Day closing, click the plus and choose Save. Jimani closes from where the previous closing ended until now. In the list you can then download the Excel or Pdf, email it or print it.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Day closing and click the plus at the top right. The window is called Day closing.
- **Step 2.** Leave Day close of the full day on. Then you only see Date from. If you turn it off, Date to, Time from and Time to are added (in steps of 15 minutes).
- **Step 3.** If needed, choose a Point of sale (Select all), a Type (Full, Financial or Reservation) and a user under Users (All users). Click Save.
- **What Jimani determines itself.** A closing always starts exactly where the previous one ended, without a gap and without overlap, and ends at the latest now. What you choose for the date can therefore not change that. If there is nothing new to close, nothing happens. Double-clicking does not create a second closing.
- **Count the cash.** If The cash is counted is on, the Count the cash screen opens right after saving.
- **The list.** Per closing you see Date, Date to, Point of sale, Type, Users, Revenue and Total VAT, with the Total at the bottom.
- **Excel and Pdf.** Click the Excel or pdf icon in the line. The pdf is called Download PDF.
- **Email.** Click the envelope icon. Enter an email address and click the send icon. You get The email has been sent, or The email could not be sent. Under Download there is also Download PDF.
- **Print.** The printer icon in the line prints the closing on the receipt printer or on the POS where you work. It only appears if there is a receipt printer or a POS that can print it.
- **On the POS itself.** If you work in the POS view, you only see Print; Excel, Pdf and Email are on the computer.
- **Print list.** The printer icon above the list prints the list as it appears on the screen as an overview. See [How do I print a list or overview?](../../algemeen/faq/lijst-afdrukken.md).

**Example:** At 23:30 you want to close the day. You click the plus, leave Day close of the full day on and choose Save. The closing runs from the previous closing to 23:30. You click the pdf icon and send it to your bookkeeper.

**Related questions:**

- How do I close the POS manually at the end of the day?
- How do I download my day closing as Excel or pdf?
- How do I print the day's revenue?
- Can I email a day closing to my bookkeeper?

**Keywords:** make day closing, download z report, day closing pdf, day closing excel, email day closing, print day closing

**Related:** [How does the day closing and counting the cash work?](dagafsluiting-en-kas-tellen.md), [How do I have the day closing made and emailed automatically?](dagafsluiting-automatisch-en-mailen.md), [How does Day closing work in Jimani?](../naslag/dagafsluiting.md)

---

# How do I download the POS audit file and check the cash register journal?

**Answer:** As the owner, go to Settings > Money and figures > Day closing. With the button POS audit file (Dutch Tax Authority) you choose a period and download the file. With the button Cash register journal you check whether the chain of receipts is still intact.

**Explanation:**

- **Who.** You only see both buttons as the owner of your business. An employee or manager does not see them.
- **POS audit file (Dutch Tax Authority).** This is the file you give to the Belastingdienst during an inspection: all receipts, credits, practice receipts and closings of the POS over a period. The button is not in the POS view but on the computer.
- **Step 1.** Click POS audit file (Dutch Tax Authority). Under From choose the first day and under Up to and including the last day. With the minus and plus sign you can go a day back or forward. By default the previous calendar year is filled in, because that is what the Belastingdienst usually asks for.
- **Step 2.** Click the download button. The file goes to your downloads.
- **Period.** Calendar days on your business's clock; the end date is included. At most one year per file.
- **VAT number.** If your business's VAT number is missing, you see the message The business's VAT number is missing. Enter it in the company details; the Belastingdienst expects it in the audit file.
- **Cash register journal.** Click Cash register journal. Every closed receipt, settlement and POS event is tied to the previous one with a hash. If something changes afterwards, or a receipt disappears, the chain breaks at that place. You see the Chain status: Chain intact, or Break at receipt or Break at link with the location. Jimani checks the chain every night. With Check now you do it immediately, from the beginning.
- **Chain details.** You see, among other things, Links in the chain, Last checked, Start hash, Last hash, Not in the chain yet and Modified receipt lines.
- **Numbering per register.** Each POS numbers its receipts without interruption, next to the receipt number. You see the numbering per POS, and Gaps if numbers are missing. With no problems it says No gaps.
- **Not checked yet.** This is how the status looks before the first check. If it says The hash chain is not yet turned on for this environment, the chain has not been enabled there yet.

**Example:** The Belastingdienst asks for the POS data over 2026. In POS audit file (Dutch Tax Authority) you set From 01-01-2026 and Up to and including 31-12-2026 and click download. First you check with Cash register journal whether it says Chain intact.

**Related questions:**

- How do I download the audit file for the Belastingdienst?
- How do I check that my POS data is correct and has not been changed?
- What should I do if the Belastingdienst asks for my POS data?
- What is a cash register journal?

**Keywords:** POS audit file, xaa, cash register journal, hash chain, belastingdienst POS inspection, chain intact, receipt gaps

**Related:** [Does the Jimani POS meet the requirements of the Belastingdienst (Dutch Tax Authority)?](eisen-belastingdienst.md), [How does the day closing and counting the cash work?](dagafsluiting-en-kas-tellen.md), [How does Day closing work in Jimani?](../naslag/dagafsluiting.md)

---

# Can I let customers buy tokens or drink vouchers?

**Answer:** Yes, with the Pay with tokens add-on (free). Turn it on under Settings > Add-ons. Then you set up your token under Settings > Money and figures > Pay with tokens: a name, the price per token and how many tokens an item costs. A business has one token.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on Pay with tokens under Add-ons. Then Tokens appears under Money and figures.
- **Step 2.** Open Tokens. As soon as the add-on is on, Jimani creates one token itself with the name Token. Click the tile of your token. The window is called Edit token and has 3 steps, or 4 if not everything costs the same.
- **Step 3, What it is.** Enter the Name and optionally EAN or SKU.
- **Step 4, Questions.** Answer three questions with Yes or No: Do you also sell half tokens? (the quantity then goes in steps of a half), Does a customer get a discount when buying more at once? (then you can add a price tier to the price) and Does everything cost the same number of tokens? If Yes, you enter How many tokens does an item cost?; that applies to everything you sell. If No, a step is added for the price per product.
- **Step 5, Price.** Enter the Price per token and choose a product group under Which VAT rate does a token fall under?. Under Popular quantities you set up to five quantities; they also appear on the POS. Under Price tier you add lines: from a certain number of pieces, a token costs less.
- **Step 6, Price per product.** Only with No on Does everything cost the same number of tokens?. Enter per product how many tokens it costs. If you leave a product empty, you cannot buy it with tokens. With Fetch list and Import list you work with an Excel file.
- **Save.** On the last step you choose Save.
- **Currency settings.** If Import and export is on, above the tile there are Currency settings with Choose a file to import an Excel and a button to export.

**Example:** A playground sells the token Play token for €1.00, with the popular quantities 5, 10 and 25. Every attraction item costs 2 tokens (Does everything cost the same number of tokens? is set to Yes).

**Related questions:**

- Can I sell drink tokens at an event?
- How do I let customers pay with tokens?
- Can I have more than one kind of token?
- What does paying with tokens cost?

**Keywords:** tokens, drink tokens, consumption tokens, drink vouchers, pay with tokens, play tokens, punch card

**Related:** [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md), [How do Tokens work in Jimani?](../naslag/munten.md)

---

# How do I print a list or overview?

**Answer:** Click the printer icon (Print) above the list. Jimani turns the list as it currently appears on your screen into a pdf and opens it in a new tab. There you print it or save it.

**Explanation:**

- **Where.** The icon is above the lists of, among others, Reservations (day, week, last and upcoming), appointments, activities, tickets, the hotel planner, Search Order and Day closing.
- **What is on it.** Exactly what is in the active view, with the same filters: only the visible columns and lines, and for a drop-down list the chosen value. So first adjust the filters, the date or the columns the way you want them on paper.
- **Please wait.** A tab opens immediately with Please wait... and then the pdf.
- **Period.** For a day or week, the chosen day or week (Monday to Sunday) is on the list. On the Last tab it says last 100 and for Upcoming it says upcoming.
- **If it does not work.** Then you see The print list could not be created. Please try again. Try again.
- **Not the same as a receipt.** This is an overview on paper or pdf; a till receipt or day closing on the receipt printer is printed by the POS itself.

**Example:** You set the Reservations list to today, hide a column you do not need and click the printer icon. In a new tab there is a pdf with only today's reservations, without that column, with your business's logo on it.

**Related questions:**

- How do I print an overview of my reservations?
- How do I print today's list?
- Can I save a list as a pdf?
- Why is there more or less in my printout than on my screen?

**Keywords:** print list, print reservations, print overview, printable list, pdf of list, print daily overview

**Related:** [How do I make a day closing myself and how do I download, email or print it?](../../kassa/faq/dagafsluiting-maken-downloaden-mailen.md)

---

# How does the Connected devices screen work in Jimani?

**Answer:** Under Connected devices are all your POS screens, handhelds, tablets, phones, kitchen screens, kiosks, receipt printers, cash drawers, buzzers and card terminals, as tiles. Here you pair new devices and open a device to set it up.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Till and products > Tills and equipment (`/Settings/externaldevices`).

**Explanation:** The page heading is Connected devices with the text Connect your POS screens, receipt printers, cash drawers and card terminals and manage them here. Each device is a tile with a picture and the name. Click a tile to set up that device (see [What can you set on a POS screen, handheld, tablet or phone?](apparaat-kassascherm-instellen.md), [What can you set on a receipt printer or kitchen printer?](apparaat-printer-instellen.md) and [What can you set on a kitchen screen?](apparaat-keukenscherm-instellen.md)). Without devices it says No data found.

![The Connected devices screen with the buttons Connect a POS and Connect Tap to Pay, the green plus and the tiles of the devices](/kennisbank/beelden/aangesloten-apparaten-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Connect a POS | Creates a 6-character pairing code. The Pairing code window says Type this code on the point of sale. The code is valid for 15 minutes and works once. As soon as the device is paired, it reports The point of sale is paired. | For a new POS screen, handheld, tablet, phone or kitchen screen. | The window waits (Waiting for the point of sale...) and reloads the page itself. |
| Send by text to my phone | Sends the pairing code to your own mobile number. | If you need the code on the phone. | Only if the SMS service is on and your number is confirmed. If the SMS fails, the code goes by email. |
| Connect Tap to Pay | Requests a pairing code for the Mollie Tap app. The window says Scan this code with the Mollie Tap app on the customer's phone, or type the code below on the device. After that the Tap appears under Connected devices. You see until when the code is Valid until. | To use a phone or tablet as a card terminal. | Without a Mollie connection you get This shop is not yet connected to Mollie. Connect Mollie first; after that the Tap can be added. |
| Green plus (Add External Device) | Opens the Add External Device window. See below. | For a printer, cash drawer, buzzer or the web POS. | A POS screen, handheld, tablet or phone you add with Connect a POS, a card terminal with Connect Tap to Pay. |
| View our hardware | Opens the Jimani webshop (`/Winkel`). | To order equipment. | See [How do I order a POS, printer or card terminal from Jimani?](../faq/apparatuur-bestellen-bij-jimani.md). |
| Advice for your business | Opens the advice conversation (`/Advies`). | If you do not know what you need. | Only appears if you have the permission for the advice. |
| Green or red dot | Green: the device reported in during the last 3 minutes. Red: not. | To see whether a POS, handheld, phone or kiosk is connected. | See [Why is my device green or red under Connected devices?](../faq/apparaat-status-groen-rood.md). |
| Tap icon at the top left | Tap to Pay is on on this device. | To see which devices can take card payments by tapping. | - |
| Belongs to old account | The card terminal belongs to your previous Mollie account. | After switching Mollie account. | - |
| Ordered or Waiting for payment | A grey tile for an order from the Jimani webshop that has not been delivered yet. Once it is delivered, it says Connect a POS or Connect Tap to Pay. | To follow your order. | If you click a delivered tile, it does the same as the pairing button next to it. |

**Add External Device window:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Printers | Receipt printers and kitchen printers. | For a printer in your network or at the POS. | Then choose the model. |
| Cash register | Cash drawer and wallet. | To add a cash drawer. | A cash drawer does not need an address; the Save button is then already on the second step. |
| Buzzers | A signal when the order is ready. | For a buzzer. | Also needs no address. Jimani puts the buzzer number on the receipt; you make the buzzer itself go off with your own buzzer system. See [How do I use buzzers at the till?](../faq/buzzers-op-de-kassa.md). |
| Web POS | This computer as a till. Pairs the browser you are working in. | To use the POS on a computer or laptop. | There is one web POS per business. If you have a second one, it counts as an extra POS. |
| What is this printer for? | Till receipts or Kitchen tickets. A kitchen ticket is a different kind of receipt from a till receipt. That determines what else you fill in. | Always for a printer. | A printer is one or the other. |
| Till receipts | The printer for the customer receipt. | At the POS. | Asks Is this printer connected to the POS with a USB cable?, the IP address and optionally the cash drawer. |
| Kitchen tickets | The printer for the kitchen or the bar. | For kitchen and bar. | Only asks for the IP address and then the products. |
| IP address | The address of the printer in your network, in four boxes (for example 192.168.1.50). | For a network printer. | Not needed for a USB printer, cash drawer or buzzer. |
| Header text on the receipt | What is at the top of the receipt: Indicate which information should be visible at the top of the receipt. Often this is the business details such as business name, address and for example phone number. | For a POS receipt printer. | At most 3 lines of 48 characters. |
| Footer text on the receipt | What is at the bottom of the receipt: Which details are visible at the bottom of the receipt. This can be, for example, a phone number or email address, or IBAN, VAT or Chamber of Commerce number. | For a POS receipt printer. | At most 3 lines of 48 characters. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| POS app not connected – restart the app | The POS screen is open but the POS app has not reported in for 2 minutes. No receipts come out. | Restart the app on the device. |
| Printer not found — {0} receipts waiting | The POS cannot find its USB receipt printer. The receipts wait and come out automatically. | Check the cable and whether the printer is on. |
| The pairing code could not be created. Please try again. | Creating the code failed. | Click Connect a POS again. |
| Requesting the pairing code failed. Please try again in a moment. | Mollie did not provide the Tap code. | Try again later. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see all my POS devices, printers and card terminals?
- How do I add a new device?
- Where do I set up a connected device?

**Keywords:** connected devices, connect POS, add external device, connect tap to pay, add printer, add cash drawer, pairing code

**Related:** [Can I install this myself and pair my devices myself?](../faq/zelf-installeren-en-apparaten-koppelen.md), [Which devices does Jimani work on?](../faq/op-welke-apparaten-werkt-jimani.md), [How do I connect a receipt printer and use multiple printers?](../faq/bonprinter-koppelen-en-meerdere-printers.md)

---

# What can you set on a POS screen, handheld, tablet or phone?

**Answer:** Open the device under Connected devices. You set the name, which printer, drawer, kitchen screen and card terminal belong to it, how settling works and what the POS shows and plays. For a POS screen the window has two pages: the first for the devices connected to it, the second for the Till settings.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Till and products > Tills and equipment, click the device (`/Settings/externaldevices`).

**Explanation:** The fields depend on the type. A POS screen or tablet has almost all of them; a handheld or phone has fewer (no cash drawer choice under Other and no question about all products); a field that does not apply is missing. At the top is Edit with the name of the device. At the bottom are Delete, Previous and Next or Save.

![The Edit window of a POS screen with the choice of receipt printer, kitchen printer, cash drawer and card terminal](/kennisbank/beelden/apparaat-kassascherm-instellen-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Display name | The name of this device as you see it in Jimani and on the POS. | Always; give each device a recognisable name. | - |
| No printer | If this is on yes, this device does not try to print a receipt and you get no message that the printer was not found. For a tablet or phone without a receipt printer. | For a tablet or phone without a receipt printer. | Saves immediately. See [How do I print a receipt if my tablet or phone has no printer?](../faq/bon-printen-zonder-printer.md). |
| Connected receipt printer | The till receipt comes out here. No receipt printer: then no receipt ever goes out. | To choose where the customer receipt comes out. | You choose from the printers with Till receipts or None. |
| Connected kitchen printer(s) | Which products appear on it you set on the kitchen printer itself. With + you add another. | For kitchen and bar. | Only if there are kitchen printers. You can choose more than one. |
| Connected kitchen screen | The kitchen screen on which the orders of this till appear. | If you use a kitchen screen. | Only if there is a kitchen screen. You choose one. |
| Connected cash drawer | No cash drawer: then you cannot pay cash on this POS, only by card. | To choose the drawer that opens for cash. | Only if a cash drawer has been created. In the list, a drawer that is connected to another device is followed by (currently at ...). |
| Connected payment terminal | The card terminal (for example a PAX A35 or A920-PRO) you use to settle with Card on this device, or None. | If you use a card terminal. | A Tap is not among them; you choose that under Tap to Pay. |
| Tap to Pay | Settling by tapping a card or phone against this tablet, with the Mollie Tap app. Choose the Tap of this tablet, or Off. | On a tablet or phone with the Mollie Tap. | Only with the Tap to Pay add-on (€5 per month). |
| Tap to Pay active | If this is on yes, you settle by tapping a card or phone against this device. | On a handheld or phone. | Only with the Tap to Pay add-on. If there are more Taps, you also choose which one belongs to this device. |
| Always show all products on the POS? | If this is on yes, this screen automatically sells every product of the business, including a product you add or remove later. If it is on no, you choose per category which products are sold here. | To choose a separate assortment per POS. | See [Can I show different products on each POS?](../faq/producten-per-kassa-kiezen.md). |
| Point of sale | Which module this screen sells. | If your business sells more than one module. | The choice only appears if there is more than one module. |
| Log in for every order | If this is on yes, you log in for every order and are logged out again right afterwards. If it is on no, you log in once at the start of the shift and there is a log-out button on the screen. | If several employees share a POS. | Only appears if logging in on the POS is on. |
| Immediately show two buttons: Cash and Card | If this is on yes, Cash and Card are on the screen right away and you no longer have to choose the payment method in a window. | For quick settling. | Default No. |
| Show cash screen with quick amounts | Yes: with Cash you first choose the amount received and you see the change. No: with Cash it settles immediately, the cash drawer opens and the receipt comes out, without an intermediate screen. | To choose whether the POS asks for the amount received with Cash. | Default Yes. |
| Print receipt for direct payment | Choose at the till: in the Other menu you set Print receipt with a tap on Yes or No. The POS remembers the last choice. | To decide whether a receipt goes out for direct payment. | You choose from Always, Never or Choose at the till. |
| Images with the items | If this is on no, you only see the name and the price. That is calmer and faster. | For a calmer, faster POS. | Default Yes. |
| Sound when ringing up and paying | If this is on yes, you hear a short tick when ringing up and a tone for a successful or failed payment. Handy behind the bar, awkward in a quiet room. | For a POS behind the bar. | Default No. |
| Vibrate when ringing up | If this is on yes, the device vibrates briefly for every item you ring up. Works on phones and handhelds; a POS without a vibration motor notices nothing. | For handhelds and phones. | Default Yes. |
| Buzzer at this till | If this is on yes, you enter a buzzer number for every order on this screen and that number appears at the top of the receipt. Handy at a counter where the guest waits; on a terrace where you bring it yourself you do not need it. | At a counter where the guest collects their order. | Only with the Buzzers add-on. See [How do I use buzzers at the till?](../faq/buzzers-op-de-kassa.md). |
| Always print a receipt | After settling, a receipt goes out without asking. If this is on no, you choose at settling: Print receipt or No receipt. | To always print receipts automatically. | Default No. |
| Hide stock on the till | Only relevant if you use the stock module. | To not show the stock quantities on the POS. | Only appears with the stock module on. |
| Show items that are out of stock | Only relevant if you use the stock module. | To show sold-out items anyway. | Only appears with the stock module on. |
| Open cash drawer under Other? | If this is on yes, there is an Open till button under Other on the POS. Tapping the logo at the top left twice also opens the drawer, even if this is on no. | To be able to open the drawer with a button. | Only for a POS screen. Default No. |
| Open table reminder after | If something on an open table has not been saved or settled, after this time without doing anything the message "Your table is still open" appears at the top right. | To remember that a table is still open. | You choose from 1 minute, 5 minutes (default), 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 1 hour or Off. |
| Link products to printers kitchen screens | A table in which you choose per product which printer or kitchen screen it goes to (Choose a printer per product). | For a handheld or phone with a point of sale. | For a POS screen this table is not there: there you set on the kitchen printer or the kitchen screen itself which products appear on it. |
| Delete | Removes the device from your list. | If you no longer use the device. | If you pair the same device again later, you get the same device back with its settings. |
| Previous, Next, Save | To the previous or next page of the window; Save stores everything. | After changing. | No printer, Use as and Tap to Pay save immediately. |
| Receipt printing status | A list at the bottom with per receipt Sent at, Printed, Status, Attempts and What went wrong. | If a receipt does not come out. | Only if there are receipts. Status is Sent, Printed or Failed. |
| Use as | Only for a Tap as a handheld: Cash register (a handheld POS with its own assortment) or Card terminal only (the Tap is the card terminal of another POS; then there are no products and POS fields). | To use a Tap as the card terminal of another POS. | Saves immediately. |

**Related questions:**

- What can I set on my POS or handheld?
- How do I connect a printer and drawer to a POS screen?
- Where do I see the POS settings?

**Keywords:** set up POS screen, edit device, set up handheld, set up tablet POS, POS settings, sound POS, print receipt direct payment

**Related:** [How does the Connected devices screen work in Jimani?](aangesloten-apparaten.md), [What can you set on a receipt printer or kitchen printer?](apparaat-printer-instellen.md), [Why is my device green or red under Connected devices?](../faq/apparaat-status-groen-rood.md)

---

# What can you set on a receipt printer or kitchen printer?

**Answer:** Open the printer under Connected devices. You choose whether it is for Till receipts or Kitchen tickets, how it is connected (USB or IP address), which cash drawer belongs to it and what is on the receipt. A kitchen printer additionally has products, a language, a content and an order. You also adjust the text of the receipt in the Receipt Settings window.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Till and products > Tills and equipment, click the printer (`/Settings/externaldevices`). Receipt Settings also opens from the orange warning on the dashboard if there is no logo, header or footer.

**Explanation:** The window is called Edit with the name of the printer. A printer is a POS printer or a kitchen printer, never both. For a POS printer there are pages for image, text and what is allowed on the receipt; for a kitchen printer you choose the products.

![The Edit window of a receipt printer with the question What is this printer for, the IP address and the cash drawer](/kennisbank/beelden/apparaat-printer-instellen-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| What is this printer for? | A kitchen ticket is a different kind of receipt from a till receipt. That determines what else you fill in. | Always for a printer. | You choose Till receipts or Kitchen tickets. |
| Till receipts | The printer for the customer receipt. | At the POS. | Choose it on the POS screen as Connected receipt printer. |
| Kitchen tickets | The printer for kitchen or bar. | For orders that are prepared. | Choose it on the POS screen as Connected kitchen printer(s). |
| Display name | The name of this device as you see it in Jimani and on the POS. | Always. | - |
| Is this printer connected to the POS with a USB cable? | Choose yes if the printer is attached to the POS with a cable, and no if it works via the network. | For a POS receipt printer. | A kitchen printer with a USB cable to the POS is not possible; that question is not there. |
| IP address | The address of this printer in your network, so the POS can find it. | For a network printer. | Four boxes with numbers from 0 up to and including 255. Not for USB, cash drawer or buzzer. |
| Which cash drawer? | The cash drawer that is attached to this printer and opens when you pay cash. | If the drawer is connected to the receipt printer. | A drawer is connected to one device at a time. |
| Products for this kitchen | Choose which products come out here. Of an order, only those products appear on this kitchen ticket or this kitchen screen. | For every kitchen printer. | Is in a separate block with categories to filter on. |
| Kitchen ticket language | The language in which the kitchen reads the ticket. Product names and options are translated, guest comments never. | If the kitchen reads another language. | Default Language of the business. |
| Content of the kitchen ticket | Choose from This course, own; This course, all; Full ticket, own and Full ticket, all. | If you use Courses. | Only with the Courses add-on. Default This course, own. See [How do I set up the kitchen ticket?](../faq/keukenbon-instellen.md). |
| Order on the kitchen ticket | Entry order or Register order. | To print the items in a fixed order. | Default Entry order. |
| Image | Add an image. It keeps the 4:3 ratio. Without an image of your own, the business logo appears on the receipt. | For a logo of your own at the top of the receipt. | A landscape logo in black and white looks best. |
| Header text on the receipt | Indicate which information should be visible at the top of the receipt. Often this is the business details such as business name, address and for example phone number. Example: For example your business name and address. | For your business details. | At most 3 lines of 48 characters; below the field is a counter. |
| Footer text on the receipt | Which details are visible at the bottom of the receipt. This can be, for example, a phone number or email address, or IBAN, VAT or Chamber of Commerce number. Example: For example your phone number or a thank-you. | For a thank-you or your IBAN. | At most 3 lines of 48 characters. |
| What goes on the receipt? | Turn off what you do not want on the receipt. | To make the receipt shorter. | Below are the four switches. |
| Payment method on the receipt | Cash, card or otherwise. | On by default. | - |
| Receipt number at the top of the receipt | Large, top right. | For a clearly legible receipt number. | Off by default. |
| Order method on the receipt | Till, online or handheld. | On by default. | - |
| User on the receipt | Who rang up the order. | On by default. | - |
| Receipt number and date/time are always on the receipt (cash register law). | You cannot turn off the receipt number, date and time. | - | See [What is on the receipt?](../faq/wat-staat-er-op-de-kassabon.md). |
| This is how the receipt will look | A sample receipt next to the form that changes along as you type. | To see the result. | The printer icon next to it prints a sample receipt on the printer. |
| Delete | Removes the printer from your list. | If you no longer use it. | You are asked for confirmation first. |

**Receipt Settings window:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Receipt Settings | Manage what is on the receipt | To set the logo and texts of the receipt. | Also opens from the warning on the dashboard if the logo, header or footer is missing. |
| Logo on the receipt | The logo at the top of the receipt. A landscape logo in black and white looks best on the receipt. | To upload your logo (at most 5 MB). | With the cross you remove it. |
| Header text on the receipt | What is at the top of the receipt. | For your business details. | - |
| Footer text on the receipt | What is at the bottom of the receipt. | For a phone number, IBAN, VAT or Chamber of Commerce number. | - |
| Print a sample receipt | Print a sample receipt Choose a printer under Make a selection and click the printer icon. | To see what the receipt will look like. | Only if there is a printer. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Printer is not connected | The sample receipt could not reach the printer. | Check that the printer is on and in the network. |
| The selected device is not connected to the server. | The POS the printer is connected to is not connected. | Start the POS app and try again. |
| The request was sent to the kiosk to print the receipt | The sample receipt is on its way. | Wait a moment. |
| The POS cannot reach the printer. Check that it is on and that the cable is plugged in, and try again. | The receipt did not reach the printer. | Check power, cable and network. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I connect a printer with USB or an IP address?
- How do I change the text at the bottom of the receipt?
- Why do I get an orange warning about logo, header or footer?
- How do I connect a cash drawer to a printer?

**Keywords:** set up receipt printer, set up kitchen printer, header and footer receipt, logo on receipt, sample receipt, receipt settings, ip address printer

**Related:** [How do I connect a receipt printer and use multiple printers?](../faq/bonprinter-koppelen-en-meerdere-printers.md), [How do I set up the kitchen ticket?](../faq/keukenbon-instellen.md), [How does the Connected devices screen work in Jimani?](aangesloten-apparaten.md)

---

# What can you set on a kitchen screen?

**Answer:** Open the kitchen screen under Connected devices. You give it a name, choose which products appear on it and save display preferences: dark or light, what appears on the cards, the colour of a supplement and after how long you show the preparation time.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Till and products > Tills and equipment, click the kitchen screen (`/Settings/externaldevices`).

**Explanation:** You pair a kitchen screen with a pairing code, like a POS, and it needs no IP address. For a new kitchen screen the Restaurant, Courses and Kitchen screen add-ons must be on. You use the kitchen screen itself on the device; see [How does the kitchen screen work?](../faq/keukenscherm-gebruiken.md). The preferences below are stored with the device; the kitchen screen does not read them yet at the moment. You switch Light or dark with the Light or dark button on the screen itself.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Display Name | The name of this device as you see it in Jimani and on the POS. | Always. | The name also appears at the top of the kitchen screen. |
| Dark mode | Dark colours on the kitchen screen. Yes or No. | For a dark kitchen. | Not in use at the moment. |
| Show the name of the waiter | Puts the name of the waiter on the screen. Yes or No. | To see who rang up the order. | Not in use at the moment. |
| Show the number of items | Shows the number of lines of an order. Yes or No. | For a quick overview. | This label appears twice in the window; the second choice belongs to the guest's name. Not in use at the moment. |
| Fixed height | All cards the same height. Yes or No. | For a calm display. | Not in use at the moment. |
| How many orders side by side before the next row begins | The number of cards side by side: Select, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8. | For the size of your screen. | The screen itself shows 6 columns on a TV, 4 on a landscape tablet and 2 on a portrait tablet. Not in use at the moment. |
| Supplement colour | The colour in which a supplement appears: Black, White, Red or Dark blue. | To make supplements stand out. | Not in use at the moment. |
| Show the time from new to being prepared | After how long you show that: 0 sec, 10 sec, 20 sec, 30 sec, 1 min or 5 min. | To follow the waiting time. | Not in use at the moment. |
| Show the time from being prepared to ready | Same for the time between In progress and Done. | To follow the preparation time. | Not in use at the moment. |
| Products for this kitchen | Choose which products come out here. Of an order, only those products appear on this kitchen ticket or this kitchen screen. | Always. | An order with nothing for this screen does not appear on it. |
| Delete | Removes the kitchen screen from your list. | If you no longer use the screen. | Pairing the same device again is allowed without the add-ons being on. |
| Save | Stores the settings. | After changing. | - |

**Related questions:**

- Can I make the kitchen screen dark or light?
- How do I choose which products appear on the kitchen screen?
- How do I set the preparation time on the kitchen screen?

**Keywords:** set up kitchen screen, kds settings, dark mode kitchen screen, products kitchen screen, supplement colour, columns kitchen screen

**Related:** [How does the kitchen screen work?](../faq/keukenscherm-gebruiken.md), [Kitchen screen or kitchen printer: which suits me?](../faq/keukenscherm-of-keukenprinter.md), [How does the Connected devices screen work in Jimani?](aangesloten-apparaten.md)

---

# What can you set on a self-order kiosk, card terminal or Tap?

**Answer:** You set up a self-order kiosk with a name, the widget it shows, a screen saver, a background and the text on its receipt. A Mollie card terminal and a Tap have no IP address: they appear in the list by themselves as soon as Mollie is connected, and you only open them to change the name or view the card payment plan.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Till and products > Tills and equipment, click the device (`/Settings/externaldevices`).

**Explanation:** Every device opens in the same Edit window. You recognise a Mollie card terminal by a Mollie terminal id; such a device talks to Mollie over the internet and therefore gets no IP address. For a card terminal, and for a device that can take card payments by tapping, the window shows the block with the card payment plan (which Mollie plan fits best). The prices are in [What do card payments cost with Jimani?](../faq/wat-kost-pinnen.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Display name | The name of this device as you see it in Jimani and on the POS. | Always. | - |
| Widgets | The widget you show on this kiosk. Choose from your widgets; Make a choice stands for nothing. | For a self-order kiosk. | Only for the kiosk type. |
| Screen saver Image | An image the kiosk shows when it is not in use. Ratio 9:16, at most 5 MB. | To make the kiosk attractive. | With the cross (Delete) you remove it. |
| Background Image | A background for the kiosk (Add a background image). At most 5 MB. | For your own house style. | With the cross you remove it. |
| Image, Header text on the receipt, Footer text on the receipt | The image and texts on the receipt the kiosk prints, just like with a receipt printer. | If the kiosk prints a receipt. | See [What can you set on a receipt printer or kitchen printer?](apparaat-printer-instellen.md). |
| IP address | The address in the network. | Only for a printer. | For a Mollie card terminal, a cash drawer, a POS, handheld, kiosk, kitchen screen or buzzer this field is not there. |
| Tap to Pay | If the device can tap, you choose a Tap or set Off. | On a tablet or phone. | See [What can you set on a POS screen, handheld, tablet or phone?](apparaat-kassascherm-instellen.md). |
| Delete | Removes the device from your list. | If you no longer use it. | - |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I find the IP address of my card terminal?
- How do I change the name of a card terminal or Tap?
- How do I set up a screen saver on the self-order kiosk?
- Why does my Mollie card terminal appear in the list by itself?

**Keywords:** set up kiosk, self-order kiosk, kiosk widget, screen saver kiosk, set up card terminal, set up tap

**Related:** [How does the Connected devices screen work in Jimani?](aangesloten-apparaten.md), [Which devices does Jimani work on?](../faq/op-welke-apparaten-werkt-jimani.md)

---

# How does Day closing work in Jimani?

**Answer:** Under Day closing you see all closings of your POS, make a closing yourself, set up the automatic closing and the email, and as the owner fetch the POS audit file and the cash register journal. A closing always starts where the previous one ended.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Money and figures > Day closing (`/Settings/DayClose`).

**Explanation:** The list shows per closing Date, Date to, Point of sale, Type, Users, Revenue and Total VAT, with the Total at the bottom. At the top right are the buttons for the cash register journal, the audit file, the settings, printing the list and making a new closing. On the POS itself (POS view) you only see Print.

![The Day closing screen with the list of closings and at the top right the buttons for the cog and the new closing](/kennisbank/beelden/dagafsluiting-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Plus at the top right | Opens the Day closing window to close yourself. | If you want to close the day yourself. | See below. |
| Cog (End-of-day settings) | Opens the window with the automatic closing, the email and the fixed change. | To choose the closing time and the email. | See [How do I have the day closing made and emailed automatically?](../faq/dagafsluiting-automatisch-en-mailen.md). |
| Printer icon (Print) | Prints the list as it appears on the screen. | For an overview on paper or pdf. | Not in the POS view. See [How do I print a list or overview?](../../algemeen/faq/lijst-afdrukken.md). |
| Cash register journal | Shows the hash chain of the cash register journal. | To check whether anything has changed. | Owner only. |
| POS audit file (Dutch Tax Authority) | Download of the file for the Belastingdienst. | During an inspection. | Owner only and not in the POS view. |
| Excel, PDF, Email, Print (columns) | Per line the closing as Excel, as pdf, by email or on the receipt printer. | To share or keep a closing. | Excel, PDF and Email only on the computer; Print only if there is a receipt printer or POS. |
| No data found | The list is empty. | - | Nothing has been closed yet. |

**Day closing window (new closing):**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Day close of the full day | On: you close the whole day and only see Date from. Off: Date to, Time from and Time to are added. | Usually leave on. | A closing always starts where the previous one ended and ends at the latest now. |
| Date from | The day on which the closing starts. | For the first closing of a business. | After that Jimani determines the start itself. With minus and plus you go a day back or forward. |
| Date to | The last day. | Only if the full day is off. | Cannot be in the future. |
| Time from | The start time. | Only if the full day is off. | In steps of 15 minutes. |
| Time to | The end time. | Only if the full day is off. | In steps of 15 minutes. |
| Point of sale | For which point of sale the closing is: Select all or a POS. | If you have more POS devices. | The closing receipt itself counts over the whole business. |
| Type | Full, Financial or Reservation. | To record the kind of closing. | Appears in the list under Type. |
| Users | All users or an employee. | To record who closed or for whom. | Appears in the list under Users. |
| Save | Makes the closing. | After choosing. | If cash counting is on, Count the cash opens immediately. |

**End-of-day settings window:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Automatic day closing | Closes the day automatically every night. The night round closes the day every day at this time, on the shop's clock. | Leave on by default. | Default Yes. |
| End-of-day closing time | When the day is closed. Choose a time after closing. | To choose the time. | Default 06:00. As hh:mm; with minus and plus one minute back or forward. |
| Fixed change in the drawer | Every day each cash drawer starts with this amount. After counting at the day closing, Jimani says what you take out; the rest stays for tomorrow. | If you leave the same change in the drawer every day. | Yes or No, saves immediately. |
| Change per drawer | For example 150. This stays in the drawer after skimming off. | With Fixed change on Yes. | With Yes an amount is required. |
| Email the end-of-day closing automatically | After every day closing the financial overview (pdf, with the Excel attached) goes to the addresses. | For the bookkeeper or the owner. | For the automatic and for a manual closing. |
| Email addresses | Separate multiple addresses with a comma. | With emailing on Yes. | At least one valid address. |

**Email window:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Email | The address you send the closing to (Enter the email address here). | To forward a closing. | The subject is Day closing with the shop and the period. |
| Download | Download PDF: the pdf of the closing. | To keep it. | - |

**POS audit file window (Dutch Tax Authority):**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| From | The first day in the file. | During an inspection. | Default 1 January of the previous year. With minus and plus a day back or forward. |
| Up to and including | The last day in the file. | During an inspection. | Default 31 December of the previous year. The end date is included. At most one year. |
| Download | Fetches the file. | After choosing the period. | Without a VAT number you get a warning. |

**Cash register journal window:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Chain status | Chain intact, or Break at receipt or Break at link. | To check whether anything has changed. | Checked every night. |
| Check now | Checks immediately, from the beginning. | Before a visit from the Belastingdienst. | The result then appears in the window. |
| Numbering per register | The sequence number of the receipts per POS, with Gaps or No gaps. | To see whether a receipt is missing. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Enter a time as hh:mm. | The End-of-day closing time is not valid. | Enter for example 04:00. |
| Enter at least one email address. | Emailing is on without an address. | Enter an address or turn emailing off. |
| This is not a valid email address: {0} | An address has an error. | Correct the address. |
| Enter a valid amount. | The change is not an amount or is too large. | Enter an amount up to 100,000. |
| Enter the change that stays in the drawer. | Fixed change is on without an amount. | Enter an amount. |
| The email has been sent. | The closing has been emailed. | - |
| The email could not be sent. | Emailing failed. | Try again. |
| Choose a valid period. | The dates in the audit file are not valid. | Choose dates. |
| The end date is before the start date. | The period runs backwards. | Swap the dates. |
| Export failed | The audit file could not be created. | Try again. |
| The hash chain is not yet turned on for this environment. | The cash register journal has no chain yet. | Wait for the rollout. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I find all day closings of my POS?
- Where do I fetch the POS audit file as the owner?
- From which moment does a new day closing start?
- Where do I set up the automatic day closing?

**Keywords:** day closing, z report, set up day closing, audit file, cash register journal, fixed change, email day closing

**Related:** [How does the day closing and counting the cash work?](../faq/dagafsluiting-en-kas-tellen.md), [How do I make a day closing myself and how do I download, email or print it?](../faq/dagafsluiting-maken-downloaden-mailen.md), [How do I download the POS audit file and check the cash register journal?](../faq/kassa-auditfile-en-kassajournaal.md), [How does Count the cash work in Jimani?](kas-tellen.md)

---

# How does Count the cash work in Jimani?

**Answer:** Under Count the cash, after the day closing you enter how many notes and coins are in each cash drawer. Jimani shows next to it what the POS expects and books the difference as a cash difference. A difference always requires an explanation.

**Where to find it:** The screen opens automatically after a manual day closing if the cash is counted (`/Settings/Kastelling`). Later you find it via Settings > Money and figures > Accounting link > Cash differences (only with the Accounting link add-on). If it is off, a screen opens instead that says Count the cash is not available without the Accounting link, with a button Go to Add-ons (Settings > Add-ons).

**Explanation:** The heading says which day closing you are counting: Day closing with the sequence number and the period. If there is no day closing yet, it says There is no day closing yet to count with. There is a block per cash drawer. With Back you go to Day closing. Whether the cash is counted, you turn on or off under Settings > Money and figures > Accounting link > Cash differences (The cash is counted); see [How does the day closing and counting the cash work?](../faq/dagafsluiting-en-kas-tellen.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Count the drawer | A block per cash drawer, with the name of the drawer behind it if you have more than one. | For every drawer. | Per note and coin enter how many are in the drawer. What you do not have, leave at zero. |
| Note and Coin (rows) | The quantity per value. With minus and plus you adjust the quantity by one. | When counting. | The amount per row and the total are calculated while you tap. |
| What the difference is | The POS expects the cash part of this day closing. The difference is a separate entry in the bookkeeping. | To see how the difference arises. | - |
| Starting balance, Cash received, Deposits, Withdrawals | The components of what is expected. | To check the expected amount. | Only visible if there is a starting balance, deposit or withdrawal. |
| Expected | Starting balance + cash received + deposits − withdrawals. Without those components: The cash part of this day close. | To compare with what you count. | - |
| Counted | What you just counted. | After counting. | - |
| Difference | More counted is a surplus, less is a shortage. | To see the cash difference. | A surplus and a shortage each have their own colour. |
| To skim off | Take an amount out of the drawer and leave the fixed change. If there is no more than the change, it says Leave everything in the drawer. If it is already on Already skimmed off, you see that amount. | Only if Fixed change is on. | Jimani books the skimming as a withdrawal Deposit to bank in the journal. |
| Comment | Required for a difference. For example why money was taken out of the drawer. | For every difference. | Without an explanation the count is not saved. Example in the field: What's causing the difference? |
| Save count | Saves the count of this drawer. | After counting. | Counted before? Then it says Previously counted on with date and who; counting again replaces that count. |
| All drawers combined | The total difference. This amount goes as one line to the general ledger account Cash difference. | Only with more than one drawer. | A drawer that has not been counted yet does not count. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| The count has been saved. | The count is final. If cash was skimmed off, it says Skimmed off: ... after it, as a withdrawal Deposit to bank in the journal. | - |
| The count wasn't saved. | Something went wrong. | Try again. |
| There is a difference of ... Write in Comment what is causing it; without an explanation the count is not saved. | You counted a deviation without giving a reason. | Fill in Comment. |
| This shop does not count the cash. Turn on cash counting in the bookkeeping settings. | Count the cash is off. | Turn on The cash is counted. |
| This day closing does not exist for this shop. | The closing does not belong to your business. | Open Day closing and start again. |
| This cash drawer is not on this day closing. | The drawer is not part of this closing. | Open Count the cash again. |
| Count the cash is not available without the Accounting link | Count the cash belongs to the Accounting link (paid add-on) and it is off. | Turn on the Accounting link via Go to Add-ons (Settings > Add-ons). The screen shows the price for your business if there is one. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I count the cash drawer after the day closing?
- What is a cash difference and where do I book it?
- Do I have to explain a difference in the cash?
- Where do I find earlier cash counts?

**Keywords:** count cash, cash difference, count drawer, skim off, change, save count

**Related:** [How does the day closing and counting the cash work?](../faq/dagafsluiting-en-kas-tellen.md), [How do I book money in or out of the cash drawer?](../faq/kas-storten-en-opnemen.md), [How does Day closing work in Jimani?](dagafsluiting.md)

---

# How do Tokens work in Jimani?

**Answer:** Under Tokens you set up your business's one token: what it is called, what it costs, how many tokens an item costs and which quantities and discounts customers can choose. The screen only appears if the Pay with tokens add-on is on.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Money and figures > Pay with tokens (`/Settings/Munten`).

**Explanation:** As soon as the add-on is on, Jimani creates one token itself with the name Token. You see it as a tile with a picture, the name, the price and the popular quantities. There is no plus button, because a business has exactly one token. Click the tile to set it up. The window is called Edit token and runs in 3 steps (4 if not everything costs the same). See also [Can I let customers buy tokens or drink vouchers?](../faq/munten-instellen.md).

![The Tokens screen with the tile of the token and the buttons for the currency settings](/kennisbank/beelden/munten-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name | The name of the token, as customers see it. | Always. | Empty becomes Token. |
| EAN or SKU | The code of the token as an item. | If you want to scan the token. | At most 100 characters. |
| Do you also sell half tokens? | Yes or No. The quantity then goes in steps of a half. | For single pieces. | - |
| Does a customer get a discount when buying more at once? | Yes or No. Then you can add a price tier to the price. | For larger packages. | - |
| Does everything cost the same number of tokens? | Yes or No. If this is on no, a step is added for the price per product. | Determines whether every item costs the same number of tokens. | Default Yes. |
| How many tokens does an item cost? | The number of tokens per item. This applies to everything you sell. | With Does everything cost the same number of tokens? on Yes. | Zero does not exist; then it becomes 1. |
| Price per token | What a customer pays for one token. | Always. | In your business's currency. |
| Which VAT rate does a token fall under? | A product group, and with it the VAT rate. | Always. | Choose from your product groups. |
| Popular quantities | Up to five quantities that also appear on the POS. | For quick choices such as 5, 10 or 25. | An empty box is not a quantity. |
| Price tier | From this quantity a token costs less: lines with From a number of pieces, a price per token. | If the discount is on. | Add or remove lines with the plus and the bin. |
| Price per product | How many tokens a product costs, per category. If you leave a product empty, you cannot buy it with tokens. | If not everything costs the same. | Fetch list gives an Excel, Import list reads it back. |
| Currency settings | Above the tile: Choose a file to import an Excel with token settings, and a button to export. | To change the settings in bulk. | Only if import and export is on. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I set the price of a token?
- How do I let customers buy tokens in bundles with a discount?
- Why do I not see the Tokens screen?

**Keywords:** tokens, drink tokens, consumption tokens, price per token, price tier tokens, half tokens

**Related:** [Can I let customers buy tokens or drink vouchers?](../faq/munten-instellen.md), [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md)

---

# How does the kitchen screen's screen work?

**Answer:** The kitchen screen is a screen of its own on a paired device. At the top are the tabs and the buttons Hold and Light or dark, below that is a card per order. If the device is not paired, you see This screen isn't linked yet.

**Where to find it:** On the kitchen screen itself (`/Kitchen/Kitchen`). You pair it under Settings > Till and products > Tills and equipment.

**Explanation:** The screen refreshes itself every 10 seconds. A step-by-step explanation is in [How does the kitchen screen work?](../faq/keukenscherm-gebruiken.md). If someone opens the address without a paired device, or the device belongs to another business, it says This screen isn't linked yet with the text The kitchen screen only works on a paired device. Pair this screen under Settings > Connected devices as a kitchen screen and then open it again. The button Go to Connected devices takes you to the list.

![The page This screen isn't linked yet with the button Go to Connected devices](/kennisbank/beelden/keukenscherm-scherm-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name of the device | Appears at the top left of the bar. | - | From Display Name on the device. |
| All, New, In progress, Done, Hold, Finished | Tabs with the number of orders next to them. | To filter by state. | An order with items in two states appears in both tabs. |
| Hold (Hold: on) | Turns on hold mode; after that a tap on an item puts it on hold. | To let an item wait a little longer. | If you tap it again, the hold disappears. |
| Light or dark | Switches the colours of the screen. | To taste. | The screen remembers the choice on this device; default dark. |
| Card per order | Name of the order, table or location, guests, waiter, the type (Eat here, Pickup, Delivery), the time and the items with options. | To see what has to be made. | With Courses the whole ticket appears per course on the card. |
| Tapping an item line | New becomes In progress, In progress becomes Done, Done becomes In progress. | While preparing. | In hold mode you put items on hold. |
| Buttons in progress, done and back | Set all items of the card at once. | For a card with more than one item. | - |
| Bottom bar New, In progress, Done, Hold | Shows the state of the order; Hold turns on hold mode for that card. | To see the state. | - |
| Completed | Completes the order. As long as not everything is done it says Partially Ready. | On the Done tab. | If a course is still waiting, you cannot complete. |
| Go to Connected devices | Takes you to the list of devices. | If the screen is not paired. | Only on the page This screen isn't linked yet. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Set to ... | The item is now in the stated state. | - |
| All items: ... | All items of the card have been set at once. | - |
| Item ON HOLD | The item has been put on hold. | - |
| Hold removed | The item's hold is gone. | - |
| Turn on Hold mode to change the held items. | You tapped an item on hold while hold mode is off. | Turn on Hold. |
| Order completed and served | The order has been completed. | - |
| Failed to complete order | Completing did not work. | Try again. |
| The status cannot be changed while a payment is open. | The order is still waiting for a payment. | Settle first. |
| No orders here | There is nothing for this tab. | - |
| No ready orders | Nothing is done yet. | - |

**Related questions:**

- Why does my kitchen screen say This screen isn't linked yet?
- What does the Hold button do on the kitchen screen?
- How do I switch the kitchen screen between light and dark?

**Keywords:** kitchen screen, kds screen, kitchen orders, hold mode, completed, not linked yet

**Related:** [How does the kitchen screen work?](../faq/keukenscherm-gebruiken.md), [What can you set on a kitchen screen?](apparaat-keukenscherm-instellen.md)

---

# How does the Jimani webshop for POS and equipment work?

**Answer:** The Jimani webshop is the shop in your dashboard where you order POS screens, printers, cash drawers, kitchen screens, card terminals and other equipment. You choose items, put them in the cart and check out. Prices are excluding VAT.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Add-ons, under the category Devices and POS the link Buy equipment in the Jimani webshop (`/Winkel`). You also get there via the tile View our hardware under Connected devices, or with "Jimani webshop" under Search for a setting….

**Explanation:** The page is called Tills and equipment with the text Everything you need to work with Jimani. Prices are excluding VAT; what you pay depends on the delivery address and you see it at checkout. Step by step it is in [How do I order a POS, printer or card terminal from Jimani?](../faq/apparatuur-bestellen-bij-jimani.md).

![The Jimani webshop Tills and equipment with item tiles and on the right the cart](/kennisbank/beelden/jimani-webshop-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Item tile | Photo, name, short description and price with Price excluding VAT. | To choose. | The short description is the first sentence of the description. |
| New | The item was added in the last 30 days. | To see new equipment. | Does not appear if everything is equally old. |
| Demo | Try this device with your own products. | To try a device. | Only for devices with a demo. |
| More about this product (i) | Opens a window with description, manual and specifications. | For details. | - |
| In stock or On order | Whether the item is available or has to be ordered. | To estimate the delivery time. | - |
| Add | Puts one item in the cart (cart icon). | Quick ordering. | - |
| Quantity | The quantity, with minus and plus. | In the item window. | At least 1. |
| Add to cart | Puts the chosen quantity in the cart. | After choosing. | - |
| Cart | On the right, with Subtotal, VAT and Total. | To check. | The VAT follows the business's country. If the cart is empty, it says Your cart is empty. |
| Checkout | Goes to checkout. | When the cart is ready. | Disabled as long as the cart is empty. |
| Start advice | Opens the advice conversation (`/Advies`). | If you do not know what you need. | Only visible with the permission for the advice. It is under Advice for your business. |
| Existing customer, New customer | Only for Jimani employees under Order as admin. | - | Not for customers. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| There's nothing in the cart. | You tried to order with an empty cart (when ordering on Jimani's website). | Put items in the cart first. |
| There is nothing left in the cart that can be ordered. | The items in the cart can no longer be ordered. | Choose other items. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I order cash drawers and kitchen screens?
- Are the prices in the Jimani webshop including VAT?
- Where do I find the Jimani webshop in my dashboard?
- How do I find Jimani's hardware shop?

**Keywords:** jimani webshop, order hardware, buy POS, cart, equipment, advice

**Related:** [How do I order a POS, printer or card terminal from Jimani?](../faq/apparatuur-bestellen-bij-jimani.md), [How does the Connected devices screen work in Jimani?](aangesloten-apparaten.md)

---

# How does Set up QR codes work in Jimani?

**Answer:** Under QR codes you set up, per table, a QR code with which a guest can call the waiter. You choose the tables, create the address of the QR code, choose a point of sale (printer) and save. The guest then sees a simple Service page.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Till and products > QR codes, click Set up (`/QRCode/QRCodeSetup`). The QR codes add-on must be on (€10 per month, only with the online webshop).

**Explanation:** The Set up QR codes window says: With a QR code on the table a guest can call the waiter or order themselves. Ordering yourself via the QR code is not finished yet; the QR code currently only calls the waiter. The window has two choices: QR codes (Order QR codes for your tables in our webshop. You can link each QR code to a table later. Button Buy table QR codes, which does not open anything yet: print the cards yourself with Create QR code) and Set up QR codes (Set up the QR codes for your tables, turn on the services you want and link each table to the right point of sale. Button Set up). Step by step it is in [Can a guest order and pay at the table with a QR code?](../faq/qr-code-op-tafel.md).

![The Set up QR codes screen with a line per table and the columns Call the waiter, Connection key, Scanner address and Point of sale](/kennisbank/beelden/qr-codes-tafels-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Table number | The number of the table. | - | Comes from your hospitality tables. |
| Number of seats | The seats at the table. | - | Read-only. |
| Locations | The zone or room of the table. | - | Read-only; you can sort the columns. |
| Call the waiter | Tick: guests may call the waiter at this table. | Per table. | - |
| Connection key | An extra code per table in the address of the QR code. With Create a new connection key (rotating arrows) you create one. | If you want to give a table its own key. | The field is read-only. |
| Scanner address | The address in the QR code. With Create QR code you see the QR code. With Create connection keys for all tables you create the addresses of all tables at once. | For printing the QR codes. | The field is read-only. |
| Create QR code | Shows the card of the table with Scan to call the waiter and Scan this QR code to call the waiter or order something. Below it: Table, Open your phone's camera and scan the QR code and Powered by. | To see or download the code. | You download the card as an image (QR-Table with the table number). |
| Point of sale | Choose a point of sale (printer) where the signal Call waiter to table comes out. With the copy button you set the first chosen point of sale on all tables. | To have a receipt printed on a call. | Without a printer at the table there is only a notification. |
| Save | Stores the settings for all tables. | After changing. | You see The data has been saved. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| There are no active hospitality tables. First create tables in the hospitality settings. | There are no tables to set up. | Create tables in Restaurant. |
| The data has not been saved! | Saving failed. | Try again. |
| Invalid QR code. | The guest opened an address that is not valid. | Create a new QR code. |

**What the guest sees (Service page):**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| WAITER SERVICE | The status at the top of the page. | - |
| Sending your request | One moment, we are letting the waiter know. | Wait. |
| Someone is on the way | We will be at table {0} as soon as possible. | Wait. |
| Your request has already reached us | There was already a request. | Wait. |
| Just a moment | Your request has just been handled. In a minute you can ask for service again. | Wait a minute. |
| Too many requests are coming in | Try again in a few minutes. | Wait. |
| That didn't work | Your request could not be passed on. Try again or raise your hand. | Try again or call an employee. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I set up QR codes on the tables?
- What does the guest see when they scan the QR code?
- Which printer do I choose for a QR code?
- Why can I not set up QR codes?

**Keywords:** qr codes tables, call the waiter, call waiter, print qr code, connection key, scan to call the waiter

**Related:** [Can a guest order and pay at the table with a QR code?](../faq/qr-code-op-tafel.md), [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md)

---

# How does the scan screen work in Jimani?

**Answer:** Use the scan screen to check a ticket or reservation at the door. You scan the code with a handheld scanner or the camera, or type it in, and you immediately see green (Valid) or red (Refused) with the reason. The screen fills the whole device, without a menu.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Scan (`/Scan`). The button only appears if the Scanner add-on is on and your module allows scanning.

**Explanation:** The screen is called Scan, with the link Back to dashboard. A handheld scanner works like a keyboard: it types the code into the field and presses Enter. The camera passes on a code as soon as it has read it. The same code within 3 seconds is not counted again, because a camera often reads several times in a row. In the Jimani app, the Camera button uses the app's scanner, which also reads barcodes.

![The scan screen with the field Scan or type a code and the buttons Check and Camera](/kennisbank/beelden/scannen-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Scan or type a code | The field for the code. | With a handheld scanner or keyboard. | The field is ready for typing straight away. |
| Check | Checks the code you typed. | After typing. | Enter does the same. |
| Camera | Turns the camera on or off. | If you do not have a handheld scanner. | If it does not work, you see The camera couldn't start. |
| Event | Choose an event to filter on. All events is the default. | When you check tickets for a single event. | Only shown if your business has events. |
| Result (large screen) | Green with a tick for Valid, red with a cross for Refused. Below that the reason, the name, the ticket type, the event, the seat and X of Y. | At every scan. | Also a remark such as Still to pay at the POS. |
| Recent scans | The last 10 scans with time and result. | To look back. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Welcome, Welcome back | The code is valid; on a second scan of a card with multiple scans you see Welcome back. | Let the guest in. |
| Still to pay at the POS | The guest has not paid yet. | Have them pay first. |
| Unknown code | The code is not in Jimani. | Check the code. |
| This ticket is for another business | The ticket does not belong to your business. | Refuse the ticket. |
| This ticket is for another event | You are filtering on a different event. | Choose the right event or All events. |
| Cancelled | The ticket or reservation has been cancelled. | Refuse. |
| Not paid | The ticket has not been paid. | Have them pay. |
| Too early: valid from ... | The ticket is not valid yet. | Ask the guest to come back later. |
| Expired: was valid until ... | The ticket has expired. | Refuse. |
| Already scanned at ... | The code has already been used. | Refuse or check. |
| Maximum number of scans reached (...) | The card has used up its scans. | Refuse. |
| Something went wrong, please scan again | The check failed. | Scan again. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I check tickets at the door?
- Can I scan tickets with my phone's camera?
- Why is there no Scan in my menu?
- What does Refused mean when scanning?

**Keywords:** scan tickets, scanner, scan qr code, check entrance, handheld scanner, camera scanning

---

# How does the Point of sale and products screen work?

**Answer:** Point of sale and products is the screen where you manage your products, categories and everything around them. You open it via Point of sale and products in the left-hand menu. Which tabs appear at the top depends on the features you have turned on.

**Where to find it:** Point of sale and products in the left-hand menu (`/Webshop`)

**Explanation:** The tabs are at the top, with the list of the selected tab below them. You create something new with the blue plus button at the top right (Add): it opens the window What would you like to add with tiles for Categories, Products, Product set, Supplements, Product variants and Labels and tags, as far as those features are turned on. Clicking a line in a list opens it so you can change it. The three dots behind a product (Actions) give Deactivate or Activate, Create a Copy and Send to Trash.

![The Point of sale and products screen with the tabs Categories, Products, Supplements and others, and the blue plus button at the top right](/kennisbank/beelden/kassa-en-producten-scherm-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Opening hours | Tab with the opening hours per day. See [Tables and opening hours](tafels-en-openingstijden-scherm.md). | When you accept online orders. | Only shown with the Online webshop feature. |
| Categories | Tab with all your categories: "View all categories here. Add new ones with the Add button. Enter the name and description, add an image, and link all products to a category." | To organise your menu. | See [Categories](categorieen-scherm.md). |
| Subcategories | Tab for the middle layer below a category. | For a large menu. | Only with the Subcategories feature. See [Subcategories](subcategorieen-scherm.md). |
| Products | Tab with all your products. The screen says: "View all products here. Add new ones with the Add button. Quickly find your products with the filter, and see all details at a glance thanks to the overview." | Every day, to find and edit products. | See the buttons of the list below. |
| Supplements | Tab with the extra choices for a product: "Supplements are extra options you can offer with the product. Think of small, medium or large, or extra tomato, lettuce or mayonnaise. You can add 3 supplement layers in total and you can add a price to them." | For sauces, toppings or sizes. | Only with the Supplements feature. See [Supplements](supplementen-scherm.md). |
| Product variants | Tab with the variant groups: "Here you manage product variant groups, such as sizes. Give each group a clear name so it is easy to find when configuring products." | For sizes or colours. | Only with the Product variants feature. See [Product variants](productvarianten-scherm.md). |
| Notes | Tab with fixed questions with fixed answers for the POS. | For example for the condition of a device. | Only with the Product notes feature. See [Notes](notities-scherm.md). |
| Labels and tags | Tab with the labels and tags: "View all labels and tags here. Add new labels and tags with the Add button, or change the visibility via the overview. You can add one label and three tags per product, to show important product information to the customer quickly." | To give products a striking badge. | Only shown with the Online webshop feature. See [Labels and tags](labels-en-tags-scherm.md). |
| Tables | Tab with tables to park an order on: "Here you can create tables to park the order for later. This can be useful when you take an order by phone or when you want an order to be paid later." | For orders you settle later. | Only with the Parking tables feature. |
| Stocks | Tab with the stock per product. | To track stock. | Only with the Stock feature. See [Stocks](voorraden-scherm.md). |
| Suppliers | Tab with the suppliers of your products. | To link products to a supplier. | Only with the Suppliers feature. See [Suppliers](leveranciers-scherm.md). |
| Warehouse locations | Tab with the places where your stock is kept. | When you track stock per shelf. | Only with the Warehouse locations feature. See [Warehouse locations](magazijnlocaties-scherm.md). |
| Discounts | Tab with the discounts you give. | To set a discount on products. | Only with the Discounts feature. See [Discounts](kortingen-scherm.md). |
| Products (search field) | Searches the list while you type. | To find a product quickly. | |
| Filter | Shows only the products of the chosen category. The first choice is All categories. | For a long list. | |
| Select Excel file | The block for reading in an Excel file with products. | To create or change many products at once. | Only shown if Import and export is on. See [Importing and exporting products](../faq/producten-importeren-en-exporteren.md). |
| Choose a file | Opens the file picker for the Excel file. | Before you click the import icon. | This is also found at Categories, Supplements, Product variants, Labels and tags, Tables, Discounts and Opening hours. |
| Export products | Downloads all your products as an Excel file. | As the basis for an import. | |
| Edit | The pencil switches the list to edit mode: you change name, VAT group and price directly in the list, with tick boxes to select products. The icon then becomes a save icon. | For quick changes to many products. | Do not forget to save with the same icon. |
| Mass product change | The gear, visible as soon as you have ticked products. See [Changing multiple products at once](meerdere-producten-aanpassen-scherm.md). | For the same change on many products. | |
| Product set | A blue label behind the name of a product that is a set. | To tell sets apart from ordinary products. | |
| Image | Column with the photo of the product. | | A product has a photo. |
| Display name | Column with the name as the guest sees it. | | |
| VAT group | Column with the VAT group and the rate in brackets. | | |
| Category | Column with the category. If there is more than one, the first is shown followed by three dots. | | |
| EAN Code | Column with the barcode. | | |
| Price | Column with the price. | | |
| Back | Pages the list to the previous page. | | |
| Next | Pages the list to the next page. | | |
| No data found. | What you see when a list is empty or nothing matches your search. | | |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I manage my products?
- Why are tabs missing in Point of sale and products?
- Which tabs belong to Point of sale and products?

**Keywords:** point of sale and products, manage products, product tabs, add product, product list, manage menu

**Related:** [How do I create or change a product?](../faq/product-toevoegen-en-wijzigen.md), [What can you set for a product?](product-venster-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for a product (Add and edit product)?

**Answer:** The Product window is a step-by-step window with Previous, Next and Save. The first page holds the basics: name, description, EAN Code, price, VAT group and photo. The later pages (options, extra information, labels, variants, supplements, allergens) only appear if you turn them on on the page Parts of this product.

**Where to find it:** Point of sale and products > blue plus button > Products (new), or click a product in the Products tab (edit)

**Explanation:** If several languages are turned on, you enter name and description per language; the language is shown at the top right of the page. The window has this order: Basic details, Price and barcode, Image, Categories, (for a product in the POS category Hospitality the page Reservation), Parts of this product, and after that only the pages you have turned on. If a step has nothing to fill in, the window skips it. For an existing product, Delete is also at the bottom left. You do not manage a product's stock here but on the Stocks tab ([Stocks](voorraden-scherm.md)).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Basic details | First block: "Enter the most important information about the product. The name and description are visible when reserving." | Always. | |
| Name | "Enter a name for the product. The name is visible when reserving." At most 50 characters (the counter label is called Maximum number of characters). | Always. | With multiple languages, one name per language. |
| Description | "Give the product a description. The description is visible when reserving." At most 530 characters. | For a short explanation of the product. | The same text appears when you create a category. |
| Contents | "For example: bag of 2.5 kg or 4 pieces of 100 grams. Can appear on the product tile of the webshop." At most 200 characters, per language. | For a package size. | Only shown for the online webshop. |
| Brand | "The brand of the product. Can appear on the product tile of the webshop." At most 100 characters, first language only. | For branded products. | Only shown for the online webshop. |
| Article number | "The supplier's article number (not the EAN code). Can appear on the product tile of the webshop." At most 50 characters. | When you work with your supplier's article numbers. | Only shown for the online webshop. |
| Price and barcode | Second block: "Set the price, select the VAT group and add an EAN code." | Always. | |
| EAN Code | "Add the EAN code so that a scanner can be connected to the laptop or the POS system to scan the item." At most 20 characters. | When you work with a scanner. | In an import, an existing product is recognised by its EAN code. |
| Price | "Enter the product price. This is per person, and including VAT." | Always. | If no payment method (Mollie) has been set up yet, you cannot enter a price and the window shows a NOTE referring to the Mollie settings. |
| Related product price | "When you add this product as a related product to another product, you can optionally offer a discount. This way you can, for example, offer the soft drink at a lower price when someone buys a hamburger." | When you want to offer the product as a suggestion with another product. | Only shown with the Related products feature. |
| VAT group | You choose the group the product falls under; the rate follows the group. The screen says: "Select the VAT percentage that applies to the product." Above the drop-down it says: "Select a VAT group" (for an existing product: "Select the VAT group"). | Always. | Create missing groups first, see [VAT group](btw-groep-venster.md). |
| Supplier | "The supplier you buy this product from." | When you buy from a regular supplier. | Only shown with the Suppliers feature. |
| Order quantity | "How many pieces you order at a time (e.g. a box of 12)." You change the number with the minus and the plus; empty means no order quantity. | For the order suggestion in Purchasing. | Only shown with the Purchasing feature. |
| Courses | "Which courses this product belongs to. The first (with the star) is the default course: the item gets it when it is rung up at the POS." | To put a product in a course of your menu. | Only with the Courses feature. See [Courses](gangen-scherm.md). |
| Minimum stock | "Enter the minimum stock for the product. If the stock drops below the minimum quantity, it is marked so you can buy more." You change the number with the minus and the plus. | When you want Purchasing to report a shortage. | Only shown if stock is turned on for this product. |
| Image | Block for the product photo: "Add a product image. This helps you recognise the product easily." The photo is in the box; with the cross (Delete) you remove it. | To recognise the product at the POS and in the online store. | A product has a photo. |
| Categories | "Select the category this product can be placed in. There can be several." You choose from the tiles of your categories. | Always, so the product appears at the POS where you expect it. | You create a new category on the Categories tab. |
| Reservation | Page with: "How guests choose this product when making a reservation. Only for products in the Hospitality category." With Available online, a price (empty is the normal price) and the reservation types. | For products that guests choose when making a reservation. | Only for a product in the POS category Hospitality. |
| Parts of this product | Page with Yes/No questions: "Turn on what you want to fill in for this product. What is off is skipped when filling in." | On every product, to choose the next pages. | |
| Do you want to add options to this product? | "With yes you then set what the guest can choose: supplements, variants, a set or related products. With no, the product goes into the shopping cart with one tap." | When the guest has to choose something. | No is the default. Yes means there are options. |
| Show additional information | "It can be useful to show additional information for a product. If you want to fill this in, click yes." | For ingredients or origin. | Only with the Online webshop feature. |
| Is this a gift card? | "A gift card is not revenue but a liability: there is no VAT on it and the amount only counts once the card is redeemed." | When you sell gift cards with this product. | Only with the Gift cards feature. See [Gift cards](cadeaukaarten-scherm.md). |
| Add product supplements | "If you want to add product options / supplements to the product, click yes" | For sauces, toppings or sizes. | Only with the Supplements feature. |
| Show product variants? | "If enabled, customers can choose a variant (for example size). The base price and EAN are managed per variant option." | For a product in several sizes or colours. | Only with the Product variants feature. |
| View related products | "Does this product have "related products", or do you want to put together a menu? Then click yes." | For a suggestion or a menu. | Only with the Related products feature. |
| Show labels and tags | "If you want to add a label or tags to the product, click yes." | For a badge next to the photo. | Only with the Online webshop feature. |
| Show allergies options | "Here you can indicate per product whether the product, for example, contains traces of nuts, or whether a product is "vegan" or "Halal"." | For a hospitality product or foodstuff. | Only with the Allergens (NVWA) feature, and not for a free POS for retail or treatments. See [Allergens](../faq/allergenen-bij-een-product.md). |
| Extra information | Page with three custom fields: "Three custom fields. They appear with the product at the POS and in the online store." | When you have set Show additional information to Yes. | |
| Additional information 1 | "Enter additional product information here, such as ingredients. The information can be seen on the widget. Three additional information fields can be filled in." With a Title and a Description. | For ingredients or origin. | There are three fields, per language. |
| Additional information 2 | The second field, with its own Title and Description. | Same. | |
| Additional information 3 | The third field, with its own Title and Description. | Same. | |
| Labels and tags | Page: "This is how you group products and find them again." | When you have set Show labels and tags to Yes. | |
| Label | "Give the product a label. The label appears at the top left of the product image. Only one label can be added." | For a badge such as New or Vegetarian. | You can create a new label right here: Create a new label. |
| Tag 1 | "Give the product a tag. The tag appears at the bottom left of the product image. Up to three tags can be added." | For a characteristic. | You create new tags with Creating Tags. |
| Tag 2 | The second tag, with the same explanation. | | |
| Tag 3 | The third tag, with the same explanation. | | |
| Select product variant? | Drop-down with your variant groups. If you pick one, a table appears with Size/name, EAN Code, Price and Active per option. | For a product in several sizes. | See [Product variants](productvarianten-scherm.md). |
| Options | Heading of the page with variant choices in the window you use to create a new product: "Choices the guest can make for this item." | | |
| Number of tokens | Page Tokens: "How many tokens this item costs. If you leave it empty, it cannot be chosen at the POS." | When you work with tokens. | Only with the Pay with tokens feature. |
| Supplements | Per product, three rows of supplement choices. You can optionally give each row its own title. When creating a product you see Option 1, Option 2 and Option 3, with the plus to create supplements right away. | For example sauce, topping and size in three rows. | See [Supplements](supplementen-scherm.md). |
| Choice rules | Per supplement row: "Decide whether the guest has to choose something here, and whether they may tick more than one." | For every row of supplements. | |
| Mandatory choice | "Indicate whether a mandatory choice has to be made from one of the linked supplements when ordering this product. This only applies to that row of supplements." | When the guest has to choose from the row. | |
| Multiple choices possible | "Indicate whether several supplements can be chosen when ordering this product. This only applies to that row of supplements." For related products: "Indicate whether the customer can choose several related products when ordering the product. The related products themselves can be linked per product." | When the guest may tick more than one choice. | |
| Related products selection | "Indicate whether the customer can also choose a related product when ordering the product. The related products themselves can be linked per product." | For Related products. | |
| How the guest chooses | Block below the related products: "May the guest choose one when ordering, and may they ring up more than one?" | For Related products. | |
| How many layers? | "The number of products in the set." You choose between 2 and 5. | Only for a product set. | You create a set with Product set, see [Product set](productset-venster-scherm.md). |
| Allergens | Page: "What is in this product. The guest sees this when ordering." | When you have set Show allergies options to Yes. | |
| Sold out | "Indicate whether the product is sold out. The product is then no longer shown to the customer." | To block a product temporarily. | For a quick change, use Stocks. |
| Active stock | "Indicate whether the product has an active stock. With an active stock, the product is automatically set to sold out when the stock runs out. It can then no longer be ordered." | To track stock. | You arrange this per product under Stocks. |
| Active | Column in the variants table: a tick per variant. If it is off, that variant cannot be chosen. | To take a size away temporarily. | You turn off the whole product with Deactivate in the Actions menu of the product list. |
| Previous | Back to the previous page. | | |
| Next | To the next page. | | |
| Save | Saves the product. | On the last page. | |
| Delete | Deletes the product (for an existing product). | | |

**Related questions:**

- Why do I not see a page for variants or supplements on my product?
- How do I get more options when creating a product?
- Which fields are on the first page of a product?

**Keywords:** add product, edit product, product window, parts of this product, EAN code, product VAT group, product supplements

**Related:** [How do I create or change a product?](../faq/product-toevoegen-en-wijzigen.md), [How does the Point of sale and products screen work?](kassa-en-producten-scherm.md)

---

# How do I change multiple products at once (Mass product change)?

**Answer:** On the Products tab you use the pencil (Edit) to switch the list to edit mode, tick the products, and use the gear to choose which property you want to change for all of them. You can change five things at once: Active stock and Minimum stock, Sold out, Supplier, VAT group and the question whether you want to add options.

**Where to find it:** Point of sale and products > Products > pencil > tick products > gear (Mass product change)

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open the Products tab and click the pencil (Edit). Tick boxes appear for the products.
- **Step 2.** Tick the products. As soon as at least one is ticked, the gear appears.
- **Step 3.** Click the gear and choose one of the five lines. The window Mass product change opens with just that one field.
- **Step 4.** Enter the value and click Save. The list then refreshes.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Mass product change | Title of the window and text next to the gear. | For the same change on several products. | The window opens with one field at a time. |
| Active stock | "Indicate whether the product has an active stock. With an active stock, the product is automatically set to sold out when the stock runs out. It can then no longer be ordered." You choose Yes or No. | To turn stock tracking on or off for many products at once. | You can also set it per product on the Stocks tab. |
| Minimum stock | "Enter the minimum stock for the product. If the stock drops below the minimum quantity, it is marked so you can buy more." You enter a quantity. | To set a lower limit for many products at once. | The field is only open if Active stock is set to Yes. |
| Sold out | "Indicate whether the product is sold out. The product is then no longer shown to the customer." You choose Yes or No. | To block or release a group of products at once. | |
| Supplier | You choose a supplier from the list. All ticked products are linked to that supplier. | To set up your purchasing. | |
| VAT group | "Select a VAT group" You choose the group at Select a VAT group. | When you change VAT groups or a group was wrong. | Create missing groups first, see [VAT group](btw-groep-venster.md). |
| Do you want to add options to this product? | "With yes you then set what the guest can choose: supplements, variants, a set or related products. With no, the product goes into the shopping cart with one tap." | To turn options on or off for many products at once. | Yes means there are options. |
| Yes | Answer to a Yes/No question. | | |
| No | Answer to a Yes/No question. | | |
| Save | Applies the change to all ticked products. | | |

**Related questions:**

- How do I change the VAT of many products at once?
- How do I set multiple products to sold out at once?
- How do I change the supplier of multiple products in one go?
- What can I change in bulk for products?

**Keywords:** change multiple products at once, bulk edit, mass update products, change VAT group all products, supplier for many products, set sold out

**Related:** [How does the Point of sale and products screen work?](kassa-en-producten-scherm.md), [How do I track the stock of my products?](../faq/voorraad-bijhouden.md)

---

# What can you set for a category (Add and edit categories)?

**Answer:** A category is a group of products on your menu, such as Drinks or Main courses. You manage them on the Categories tab of Point of sale and products. A category has a name, a description, an image and the products that belong to it.

**Where to find it:** Point of sale and products > Categories (`/Webshop`), new via the blue plus button > Categories

**Explanation:** The Categories window has two pages. On the first you enter name, description and image, on the second you choose the products that belong to the category. A product can be in more than one category. At the POS you recognise a category by its image. If you edit an existing category, Delete is also at the bottom left.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Categories | Title of the window and of the tab. Above the window the screen says: "Edit a category. Enter the name and a short description so you can hang products under it." | Always. | |
| Basic details | First block: "Enter the most important information about the category. The name is visible at the POS and when reserving." | Always. | |
| Name | "Enter a name for the category. The name is visible when reserving." At most 50 characters; the counter is called Maximum number of characters. | Always. | With multiple languages, one name per language. |
| Description | "Give the category a description. The description is visible when reserving." At most 530 characters. | For a short explanation. | |
| Image | Block for the photo: "Add an image. This helps you recognise the category easily." Above the window it also says: "Choose an image so the category can be recognised at the POS." | To recognise the category at the POS. | With the cross you remove the photo. |
| Products | Second page: "Indicate which products belong to this category." You choose from tiles, with a search field and a category filter. | To hang products under the category. | |
| Product | On the window you use to create a new category it says: "Add a new product right away with the plus button." | When the product does not exist yet. | |
| Selected products | Block with what you have already chosen: "This will soon hang under the category. With the cross you take a product off again." | | |
| Select Excel file | In the list: the block for reading in an Excel file with categories. | To create many categories at once. | Only with Import and export. |
| Choose a file | Opens the file picker. | | |
| Export categories | Downloads your categories as an Excel file. | As the basis for an import. | |
| List of categories | Columns Image and Name, with the Actions menu behind each line. The screen says: "View all categories here. Add new ones with the Add button. Enter the name and description, add an image, and link all products to a category." | | |
| Previous | Closes the window or goes back a page. | | |
| Next | To the page with the products. | | |
| Save | Saves the category. | | |
| Delete | Sets the category to deleted and inactive. The products themselves remain. | When you no longer use a category. | |

**Related questions:**

- What can I set for a category?
- Where do I manage the layout of my menu?
- How do I change the name or image of a category?

**Keywords:** add category, POS categories, product group menu, category image, organise products

**Related:** [How do I create categories and organise my products?](../faq/categorieen-maken.md), [What can you set for subcategories?](subcategorieen-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for subcategories?

**Answer:** A subcategory is a middle layer below your categories, such as Phone › Samsung. You create it once and tick the main categories it belongs under. The Subcategories feature costs €5 per month (excluding VAT).

**Where to find it:** Point of sale and products > Subcategories (`/Subcategorieen`), new with the Create button

**Explanation:** At the POS, after a main category you first see the subcategories as tiles, then the products. In the window you choose, per main category, which products fall in the subcategory. Those products also simply stay in the main category. Every combination of main category and subcategory (such as Phone › Samsung) gets its own number.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Subcategories | Title of the tab and the window. The screen says: "A middle layer below your categories, such as Phone › Samsung. Create a subcategory once and tick the main categories it belongs under. At the POS, after a main category you first see the subcategories." | For a menu with many products per category. | Costs €5 per month. |
| Create | The button at the top right of the tab that opens the window. | To create a subcategory. | |
| Subcategory | First block of the window: "For example Samsung, under Phone and under Cases." Above the window it says: "One subcategory, under one or more main categories." | | |
| Name | The name of the subcategory, at most 100 characters. The counter is called Maximum number of characters. | Always. | The characters › and > are not allowed in the name: they already sit between main category and subcategory. |
| Main categories | "Tick where this subcategory belongs. Every combination gets its own number." | Always; choose at least one. | If you do not have a category yet, it says: Create a category first. |
| Products | For each ticked main category a block with the products appears (Choose products). Above the block is the number of the combination. | To hang the products under the subcategory. | |
| 1 product | How many products a combination has, in the overview. | | |
| Save | Saves the subcategory. | | |
| Delete | First asks Delete subcategory? and says: The products stay in the main category. | | |
| Cancel | Closes the question without deleting. | | |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Give the subcategory a name. | The name field is empty. | Enter a name. |
| Tick at least one main category. | No main category has been chosen. | Tick a category. |
| The characters › and > do not belong in the name; they already sit between main category and subcategory. | You typed one of those characters in the name. | Remove the character. |
| A subcategory with this name already exists. Tick the main category there. | A subcategory with this name already exists. | Open the existing subcategory and tick the extra main category there. |
| This subcategory no longer exists. | The subcategory has been removed in the meantime. | Refresh the screen. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I link a subcategory to multiple main categories?
- Where do I create a subcategory?
- What does the subcategories feature cost per month?

**Keywords:** subcategory, subcategories, middle layer category, phone samsung, category under category

**Related:** [What are subcategories and how do I create them?](../faq/subcategorieen.md), [What can you set for a category?](categorieen-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for supplements?

**Answer:** A supplement is an extra choice the guest gets with a product, such as a size or an extra topping, with its own price or free. You manage them on the Supplements tab of Point of sale and products and then attach them to a product. The Supplements feature is free.

**Where to find it:** Point of sale and products > Supplements (`/Webshop`), new via the blue plus button > Supplements

**Explanation:** The window has one page with two blocks: Basic details and Price and VAT. You attach supplements to a product on the Supplements page of the product window: up to three rows per product, each with its own Choice rules. See [How do I add options or supplements to a product?](../faq/supplementen-bij-een-product.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Supplements | Title of the tab and the window. The screen says: "Supplements are extra options you can offer with the product. Think of small, medium or large, or extra tomato, lettuce or mayonnaise. You can add 3 supplement layers in total and you can add a price to them." | Always. | |
| Basic details | First block: "The name appears at the POS and on the receipt. Keep it short." Above the window it says: "Create a supplement: a choice the guest gets with a dish." | Always. | |
| Name | "Enter a name for the supplement. The name is visible when ordering." | Always. | With multiple languages, one name per language. |
| Price and VAT | Second block: "What the supplement costs on top of the dish, and which VAT group it falls under." Above the window it says: "Enter the name and the price and select the VAT group." | Always. | |
| Price | "Enter the extra cost of this supplement. The supplement can also be free." | Always. | |
| VAT group | "Select a VAT group" You choose from your groups at Select a VAT group. | Always. | See [VAT group](btw-groep-venster.md). |
| Sold out | "Indicate whether the supplement is sold out. The supplement is then no longer shown to the customer." You choose Yes or No. | When a supplement is temporarily out. | |
| Yes | The supplement is sold out. | | |
| No | The supplement can be chosen. | | |
| Select Excel file | In the list: the block for reading in supplements with an Excel file. | For many supplements at once. | Only with Import and export. |
| Choose a file | Opens the file picker, also at Links per product. | | |
| Links per product | A separate import and export: which supplement belongs to which product. | To set the links of many products at once. | An empty cell leaves the existing links of that kind unchanged. |
| Additional costs | Column in the list with the price of the supplement. | | |
| Name (list) | Column in the list. | | |
| Save | Saves the supplement. | | |
| Previous | Closes the window. | | |
| Delete | Deletes the supplement (asks: Remove supplement). | | |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I create supplements such as extra topping or size?
- Can a supplement be free or have its own price?
- How do I attach a supplement to a product?

**Keywords:** supplements, extra topping, extra choice with product, choose size, sauce with dish, supplement price

**Related:** [How do I add options or supplements to a product?](../faq/supplementen-bij-een-product.md), [What can you set for a product?](product-venster-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for product variants?

**Answer:** A product variant group is a short list of options of the same product, such as the sizes S, M and L. You create the group once on the Product variants tab and then choose it on a product. The Product variants feature is free.

**Where to find it:** Point of sale and products > Product variants (`/Webshop`), new via the blue plus button > Product variants

**Explanation:** In the window you give the group a name, choose how many options it contains and give each option a name. Then you say whether all options have the same price and whether they have their own EAN code. On the product you choose the group, and you get a table in which you enter the EAN Code and the Price per option and can switch an option off under Active.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Product variants | Title of the tab and the window. The screen says: "Here you manage product variant groups, such as sizes. Give each group a clear name so it is easy to find when configuring products." | For products with several sizes or flavours. | |
| Variants | Block of the window: "Sizes, flavours or other choices of the same product." | | |
| Name | The name of the group, at most 15 characters. The counter is called Maximum number of characters. | For example Size. | Keep the name short. |
| Number of options | How many options the group has. You change it with the minus and the plus; at most 50 can fit. | Always. | |
| Name 1 | Each option gets its own name, at most 50 characters (Name 1, Name 2 and so on). | For example S, M and L. | |
| All options have same price? | "If all options cost the same, the price of the product applies. Choose no if, for example, a large size is more expensive; you then enter a price per option." You choose Yes or No. | Always. | With No you enter the price per option on the product. |
| All products have an Ean code? | "If every option has its own barcode, choose yes. You enter that code per option on the product." You choose Yes or No. | When you work with a scanner. | |
| Select product variant? | On the product: the drop-down with your groups. | | |
| Size/name | First column of the table on the product. | | |
| EAN Code | Column in the table on the product, per option. | | |
| Price | Column in the table on the product, per option. | | |
| Active | Column in the table on the product: a tick per option. | To switch a size off temporarily. | |
| Options | In the list, the number of options per group. | | |
| Select Excel file | In the list: the block for reading in variant groups with an Excel file. | For many groups at once. | Only with Import and export. |
| Choose a file | Opens the file picker. | | |
| Export | Downloads the variant groups as an Excel file. | As the basis for an import. | |
| Save | Saves the group. | | |
| Delete | Deletes the group. | | |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I create a variant group such as sizes S, M and L?
- Can I use a variant group on several products?
- How do I manage my variants?

**Keywords:** product variants, sizes, colours, variant group, variant price, variant ean

**Related:** [How do I create product variants, such as sizes or colours?](../faq/productvarianten.md), [What can you set for a product?](product-venster-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for a product set?

**Answer:** A product set is a fixed menu for a fixed price, for example a Kids' menu. The guest chooses one product per layer and always pays the set price. The Product set feature is free. You create a set via the blue plus button > Product set.

**Where to find it:** Point of sale and products > blue plus button > Product set (`/Webshop`); you open an existing set in the Products tab, where it has a blue label Product set

**Explanation:** The window has steps: Basic details and Image, Layers and price, Categories, and then one page per layer on which you choose which products the guest can choose in that layer. The set price is divided over the layers, so every item keeps its own VAT rate in the end-of-day report. What the guest has chosen appears on the receipt.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Product set | Title of the window and the blue label in the list. The screen says: "A fixed menu for a fixed price. The guest chooses one product per layer; what they choose does not change the price." | For menus and packages. | |
| Basic details | First block: "The name and the barcode of the set itself. This is what appears on the receipt and at the POS." | Always. | |
| Name | "As the guest sees it, for example Kids' menu." At most 50 characters; the counter is called Maximum number of characters. | Always. | |
| EAN Code | "The barcode of the set. May stay empty." | When you want to scan the set. | |
| Image | Block: "The photo on the tile of the set, at the POS and in the online store." | To recognise the set at the POS. | |
| Layers and price | Second block: "How many products the set consists of, and what the whole costs." | Always. | |
| Number of layers | "A layer is a choice the guest makes. A bread roll, a portion of fries and a drink are three layers." You change it with the minus and the plus, between 2 and 5. | Always. | You then choose products per layer. |
| Total set price | "What the guest pays for the whole set, whatever they choose." | Always. | |
| VAT | "A set does not ask for a VAT group. A bread roll and a beer fall under different rates, and a group for the whole would always book one of the two wrongly. The set price is divided over the layers, so every item keeps its own rate in the end-of-day report." | | So you do not choose a VAT group for a set. |
| Categories | Page on which you choose which categories the set is in. Without a category this appears: Choose at least one category, otherwise the set is nowhere at the POS. | Always. | |
| Products per layer | Per layer a page with the products the guest chooses from. Without a product this appears: Pick at least one product for this layer. | For every layer. | You can only choose active products, and no other set: a set within a set is not possible. |
| Previous | Back to the previous page, or on the first page close the window. | | |
| Next | To the next page. | | |
| Save | Saves the set on the last page. | | |
| Delete | Deletes the set. | | |

**Related questions:**

- How do I create a kids' menu for a fixed price?
- How do I recognise a product set in the product list?
- Where do I find an existing product set?

**Keywords:** product set, fixed price menu, kids menu, combination products, set layers, sell package

**Related:** [How do I sell a menu or package for a fixed price (product set)?](../faq/productset-menu-vaste-prijs.md), [What can you set for a product?](product-venster-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for labels and tags?

**Answer:** A label or tag is a small badge next to a product's photo, such as New or Vegetarian. A label sits at the top left of the photo, a tag at the bottom left. You can choose one label and three tags per product. You manage them on the Labels and tags tab.

**Where to find it:** Point of sale and products > Labels and tags (`/Webshop`), new via the blue plus button > Labels and tags

**Explanation:** The Labels and tags tab only appears if you have turned on the Online webshop feature, because the badges appear on the tiles in the widget. In the window you first choose whether it is a label or a tag, enter the name and colours and say where it is visible. Then you choose it on the product on the Labels and tags page.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Labels and tags | Title of the tab. The screen says: "View all labels and tags here. Add new labels and tags with the Add button, or change the visibility via the overview. You can add one label and three tags per product, to show important product information to the customer quickly." | | |
| Label | First choice of the window: "A badge on an item, for example vegetarian or new. The guest sees it on the tile in the online store." Above the window it says: "Create labels and TAGS. These are shown on the image." | Always. | With Type you choose whether it becomes a label or a tag. |
| Type | Whether it is a Label or a Tag. | Always. | |
| Name and description | Block: "The name the guest sees, and the text below it." | | |
| Explanation | "Enter a name for the label or tag." | Always. | Per language. |
| Label colours | Block: "The background and text colour of this label." | | |
| Background color | "Set a background colour for the label or tag." | For a striking badge. | |
| Text color | "Set a text colour for the label or tag." | Make sure there is enough contrast. | |
| Visible in Kiosk? | "Indicate whether the label or tag is visible on the kiosk. The label appears at the top left, and the tag appears at the bottom left of the product image." You choose Yes or No. | When you use a kiosk. | |
| Show in widget | "Indicate whether the label or tag is visible in the widget. The label appears at the top left, and the tag appears at the bottom left of the product image." You choose Yes or No. | To show the badge in the online store. | |
| Active | Whether the label or tag can be chosen on a product. You choose Yes or No. | To switch a badge off temporarily. | |
| Visible in webshop | Column in the list: whether the badge appears in the online store. | | |
| Visible in Kiosk | Column in the list: whether the badge appears on the kiosk. | | |
| Select Excel file | In the list: the block for reading in labels and tags with an Excel file. | For many badges at once. | Only with Import and export. |
| Choose a file | Opens the file picker, also at Per product. | | |
| Export Labels and Tags | Downloads all labels and tags as an Excel file. | As the basis for an import. | |
| Per product | A separate import and export: which label and which tags belong to which product. | To fill in many products at once. | |
| Label (on a product) | On the Labels and tags page of the product window: "Give the product a label. The label appears at the top left of the product image. Only one label can be added." | | At most one label per product. |
| Tag 1 | "Give the product a tag. The tag appears at the bottom left of the product image. Up to three tags can be added." | | At most three tags per product. |
| Save | Saves the label or tag. | | |

**Related questions:**

- What is the difference between a label and a tag on a product?
- How do I put Vegetarian or New on a product?
- Where do I manage my labels?

**Keywords:** labels, tags, product label, product tag, new label, vegetarian label, label colour

**Related:** [How do I give a product a label or tag?](../faq/labels-en-tags.md), [What can you set for a product?](product-venster-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for notes (product notes)?

**Answer:** A note is a fixed question with fixed answers that you attach to products, such as Condition of the device with the answers New, Used and Faulty. At the POS you tap the answer instead of typing. The Product notes feature is free.

**Where to find it:** Point of sale and products > Notes (`/Productnotities`), new with the Create button

**Explanation:** Each question is a card showing the number of products it is attached to. In the window you type the question, put the answers under each other and choose the products. At the POS, those products show the button Notes instead of Comments: you tap the answer, optionally type a comment, and it appears on the receipt and the kitchen ticket like a comment.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Notes | Title of the tab and the window. The screen says: "Fixed questions with fixed answers. At the POS you tap them per item with the Notes button; they appear on the receipt like a comment." | When you keep asking the same question. | |
| Create | The button at the top right that opens the window. | For a new question. | |
| Question and answers | First block: "For example: Condition of the device, with the answers New, Used and Faulty." Above the window it says: "A fixed question with fixed answers, for the POS." | | |
| Question | The question itself, at most 100 characters. The counter is called Maximum number of characters. | Always. | |
| Answers | "One answer per line; each answer becomes a button at the POS." | Always. | At least two answers. |
| Products | Second block: "For these products the question is ready under Notes at the POS." You choose the products in a drop-down (Choose products). | Always. | |
| Add all products of a category | Drop-down Select a category that attaches all products of that category to the question in one go. | When the question applies to a whole category. | |
| 1 product | In the overview: a question shows how many products are attached to it. | | |
| Save | Saves the question. | | |
| Delete | Asks Delete question? and shows the question. | | |
| Cancel | Closes the question without deleting. | | |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Enter the question. | The question field is empty. | Type the question. |
| The question is too long (at most 100 characters). | The question has more than 100 characters. | Make it shorter. |
| Give at least two answers, one per line. | You gave fewer than two answers. | Put at least two answers under each other. |
| This question no longer exists. | The question has been deleted in the meantime. | Refresh the screen. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I create a fixed question with answers for the POS?
- How do I let someone choose the condition of a device on a product?
- How do I link a note to products?

**Keywords:** product notes, POS notes, fixed question, condition of the device, replace comment, answer button POS

**Related:** [How do I make the POS ask fixed questions with fixed answers (notes)?](../faq/productnotities.md), [What can you set for a product?](product-venster-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for price per unit?

**Answer:** With Price per unit you choose the unit per product, such as metre, kilo or litre. The price of the product is then the price per unit and the customer orders a quantity with decimals. Every change is saved immediately. The feature is free.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Point of sale and products > Price per unit (`/PrijsPerEenheid`)

**Explanation:** The page is a list of all your products with the columns Product, Category, Unit and Price per unit. On a product you choose a unit in the drop-down; the price then follows ("/ m", "/ kg" and so on). The units are piece, metre, centimetre, gram, ounce, kilo and litre. At the POS such a product asks for a quantity (2.5 is allowed, up to three decimals), and the receipt shows the quantity times the price per unit. The stock is reduced by the actual quantity.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Price per unit | Title of the page and the column. The screen says: "Choose the unit per product. The price is then the price per unit; every change is saved immediately." | For fabric by the metre, cheese by the kilo or drink by the litre. | The price is at most 99,999.99. |
| Search | Search field above the list. | To find a product. | |
| Category | Filter on category (All categories) and column in the list. | For a long list. | |
| Unit | Filter on unit (All units) and column with the drop-down: piece, metre, centimetre, gram, ounce, kilo or litre. | To sell a product by unit. | Piece is simply per piece. |
| Inactive | Appears under the name of a product that is switched off. | | |
| No products found. | What you see when nothing matches your filter. | | |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Unknown product. | The product no longer exists. | Refresh the screen. |
| Unknown unit. | Jimani does not know the chosen unit. | Choose a unit from the list. |
| Enter a price between 0 and 99,999.99. | The price is outside the range. | Type a price within this range. |
| Saving failed. | The change was not saved. | Try again. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I set the unit per product?
- Can the customer order a quantity with decimals, such as 1.5 kilos?
- Do I have to save price per unit or does it happen automatically?

**Keywords:** price per unit, sell by the metre, price per kilo, per litre, quantity decimals, fabric by the metre

**Related:** [How do I sell by the metre, kilo or litre?](../faq/prijs-per-eenheid.md), [What can you set for a product?](product-venster-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for stocks?

**Answer:** On the Stocks tab you see per product how much is in stock and what it is worth. You turn stock on or off per product, adjust quantities and prices and import or export the stock. The Stock feature is free.

**Where to find it:** Point of sale and products > Stocks (`/Settings/Stocks`)

**Explanation:** At the top are a search field and the filters. Below that four blocks with totals: the stock value, the average margin, the sales value and the number of items. Below that the list. The pencil (Edit) makes the quantities, minimum stock, supplier and prices editable; afterwards you save with Save. The switches Stocks and Sold out save immediately. A sale lowers the quantity, and when a delivery arrives you book it in. You manage stock here and not in the product window.

![The Stocks tab with the totals, the filters and the list of products and their stock](/kennisbank/beelden/voorraden-scherm-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Stocks | Title of the tab. The screen says: "Manage stocks, adjust prices and gain insight into margins." | | |
| Products | Search field: searches on product name and EAN Code while you type. | To find a product. | |
| Filter | Drop-down with Show all and Below minimum stock. | To see what you need to reorder. | Below minimum stock shows the products whose stock is equal to or lower than the minimum. |
| Location | Filter on warehouse location, with All locations. | When you track stock per place. | Only with the Warehouse locations feature. |
| Categories | Filter on category, with All categories. | For a long list. | |
| Show "Inventory Inactive" | Tick box that only shows the products that do not have a stock line yet. | To see which products you are not tracking yet. | |
| Total stock value | Units x purchase price (excl. VAT), over the products currently in the list. | For your bookkeeping. | The filters count. |
| Average margin | On price excl. VAT, weighted by stock. | | |
| Total sales value | Units x selling price (incl. VAT). | | |
| Units in stock | The number of items, with below it the number of products with stock. | | |
| Product name | Column with the name of the product. | | |
| Available stock | Column with the quantity. In edit mode you type the new quantity; Jimani books the difference. | For a stock count or a delivery. | |
| Stock location | Column with the quantity per location, which you click to set quantities per location (Quantities per location). | | Only with Warehouse locations. |
| Minimum stock | Column with the lower limit. | | Only with the Purchasing feature. |
| Supplier | Column with the supplier of the product. | | Only with the Suppliers feature. |
| Price | Selling price, incl. VAT. | | |
| Price excluding VAT | The selling price without VAT. | | |
| Purchase price | What you buy the product for. | For your margin. | |
| Stocks (switch) | Whether the stock of this product is tracked. At the top of the column, a switch turns it on or off for all products in the list (Track stock on or off for all products in the list). | To choose which products you track. | Jimani first asks whether you want to turn on Track stock for all products in the list. On: the product is automatically set to sold out when the stock runs out. |
| Sold out | Switch that sets the product to sold out immediately. A sold out product is no longer shown to the customer. | When something is temporarily out. | |
| Margin | The difference between price and purchase price. | | |
| Export stock | Downloads the stock. You first choose: Stock (quantities and purchase price) or Stock settings (minimum and supplier). | As the basis for an import. | Only with Import and export. |
| Which file do you want to import? | The question when importing, with the same two choices. | | |
| Save | Saves the changes from edit mode. | | Nothing is sent to the server until you click Save. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I see the value of my stock?
- Can I import and export the stock?
- How do I adjust stock quantities per product?

**Keywords:** stock, stocks, track stock, minimum stock, sold out, stock value, margin

**Related:** [How do I track the stock of my products?](../faq/voorraad-bijhouden.md), [What can you set for purchasing?](inkoop-scherm.md), [What can you set for warehouse locations?](magazijnlocaties-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for suppliers?

**Answer:** Under Suppliers you record who you buy from, with the details that end up on a purchase order. You then link products to a supplier for a clear purchasing overview per supplier. The Suppliers feature is free and only works together with Stock.

**Where to find it:** Point of sale and products > Suppliers (`/Supplier`)

**Explanation:** Each supplier is a card with their photo and name. The window Add Supplier has three pages: the supplier's details, the address with country and language, and a photo. You then link the supplier per product, under Supplier in the product window or for many products at once via Mass product change.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Supplier | Title of the tab and of the first block. The screen says: "Manage supplier information and link products to the supplier for a clear purchasing overview per supplier." | | |
| Add Supplier | The window for a new supplier. The screen says: "Create a new supplier and link the products to the supplier." | For every supplier. | |
| Supplier (block) | First block of the window: "Who you buy from, with the details that end up on a purchase order." | | |
| Supplier (name) | The name of the company. | Always. | |
| VAT number | The supplier's VAT number. | | |
| Chamber of Commerce number | The supplier's registration number. | | |
| First name | The contact person's first name. | | |
| Last name | The contact person's last name. | | |
| Phone | The phone number. | | |
| Email | The email address. In Purchasing the order goes here. | When you want to email orders. | Without an email address an order stays a draft. |
| Invoicing e-mail | The address for invoices. | | |
| Prices on the purchase order | "Put your purchase prices, the amount per line and the total on the purchase order for this supplier. When sending, you can still adjust it per order." You choose Yes or No. | When you want to show the supplier the prices. | Only shown with the Purchasing feature. Yes is the default. |
| Website | The supplier's website. | | |
| Address | Street and house number. | | |
| Addition | A second address line. | | |
| Postal code | The postal code. | | |
| City | The city. | | |
| Province | The province. | | |
| Country | Drop-down with countries. | | |
| Language | Drop-down with languages. | | |
| Add a photo | Photo or logo of the supplier. | | With the cross (Delete) you remove the photo. |
| Previous | Back to the previous page. | | |
| Next | To the next page. | | |
| Save | Saves the supplier. | | |
| Delete supplier | Deletes the supplier, after asking whether you are sure. | | |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I record my suppliers?
- What can I set for a supplier?
- Where do the supplier's details appear on a purchase order?

**Keywords:** supplier, suppliers, wholesaler, purchasing supplier, add supplier, product supplier

**Related:** [How do I record my suppliers and link products to a supplier?](../faq/leveranciers-beheren.md), [What can you set for purchasing?](inkoop-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for purchasing?

**Answer:** Under Purchasing you order from your suppliers via Jimani and book the delivery into stock. The screen has two tabs: Order suggestion and Purchase orders. The Purchasing feature costs €10 per month (excluding VAT), including Warehouse locations, and only works together with Stock.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Point of sale and products > Stock and purchasing (`/Inkoop`)

**Explanation:** The order suggestion shows your products with stock; if Only below minimum is on (the default), only what is at or below the minimum. For such a line Jimani suggests a quantity if the product has a supplier and an order quantity. The suggestion tops up to above the minimum, in whole order quantities, and takes into account what you have already ordered and still has to arrive. You adjust the quantities and click Create orders: Jimani creates a draft per supplier. You send a draft, or you download the PDF and set it to Ordered yourself. When the delivery arrives, you book the Receipt into stock, with the purchase price. The status of an order is Draft, Ordered, Partly delivered or Delivered.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Purchasing | Title of the screen. The screen says: "Order from your suppliers what drops below the minimum, and book the delivery into stock." | | |
| In draft | Counter at the top right with the number of orders that have not been sent yet. Clicking it shows the drafts. | So you forget nothing. | |
| Order suggestion | First tab with products you need to order. | When you want to know what is missing. | |
| Purchase orders | Second tab with all orders and their status. | To open or follow orders. | |
| Products | Search field: Search by name or EAN. | | |
| Supplier | Filter on supplier (All suppliers, or no supplier) and column. | | |
| Categories | Filter on category, with All categories. | | |
| Only below minimum | Tick box that only shows products at or below their minimum. It is on by default. | Turn it off to see everything. | |
| Stock | Column with what is in stock now. | | |
| Minimum | Column with the minimum stock. | | |
| Order quantity | Column with the quantity per order (for example a box of 12). | | Without an order quantity a line cannot be ordered. |
| This week | Column: how much was sold this week. | | |
| This month | Column: how much was sold this month. | | |
| This year | Column: how much was sold this year. | | |
| Avg. per week | Column: average sold per week over the last 12 weeks. | | |
| Order | The quantity you order, with a minus and a plus in steps of the order quantity. | To adjust the suggestion. | At most 100,000. |
| below minimum | Red message on a line. | | |
| already ordered: [quantity], waiting for delivery | Grey message: an order is already open. | | |
| no supplier | Orange message: first link a supplier to the product. | | |
| no order quantity | Orange message: enter an Order quantity on the product. | | |
| Create orders | Creates a draft per supplier from the lines with a quantity. | When the suggestion is right. | |
| A draft order per supplier | Heading after creating: Send each order to your supplier, or download the PDF and set it to Ordered yourself. | | |
| Back to the order suggestion | Goes back to the suggestion. | | |
| Open | Filter on orders that have not been fully delivered yet. | | |
| All | Filter that shows all orders. | | |
| Number | Column with the order number (INK-1, INK-2 and so on). | | |
| Date | Column with the date. | | |
| Lines | Column with the number of lines. | | |
| Total | Column with the total amount. | | |
| Status | Column with Draft, Ordered, Partly delivered or Delivered. | | |
| Open | Opens the order. | | |
| Purchase order | The window with Lines (Product, Ordered, Received), Sent and Receipts. | | |
| Ordered | How much you ordered. | | |
| Received | How much has arrived so far. | | |
| Delete draft | Throws a draft away. | | Only for a draft. |
| PDF | Downloads the order as a PDF. | | |
| Save | Saves the quantities of a draft. | | |
| Send | Opens the send window. | | |
| Book receipt | Puts what has arrived into stock, with the purchase price. You enter what has arrived under Received now. | When the delivery arrives. | This requires the right Purchasing book receipt. |
| Send to the supplier | The send window: The order as a PDF, with your logo, the order number, the lines and the requested delivery date. | | |
| To | The supplier's email address (under Suppliers). | | |
| CC | Receives a copy of the email. Empty = no copy. | | |
| Requested delivery date | Empty = as soon as possible. | | |
| Explanation | Appears in the email and on the PDF. At most 1000 characters. | | |
| Prices on the purchase order | Purchase prices and total on the PDF and in the email of this order. Set as you chose at the supplier. You choose Yes or No. | | |
| Download PDF | Downloads the PDF. | When you send the email yourself. | |
| Set to ordered | Sets the order to Ordered without an email. | After sending it yourself. | |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Enter a quantity to order for at least one product. | No quantity is filled in under Order. | Enter a quantity. |
| There is nothing to order: the chosen products have no supplier or no order quantity. | The lines cannot be ordered. | Link a supplier and enter an Order quantity. |
| This supplier has no email address. Enter it under Suppliers; the order stays a draft. | Emailing is not possible without an address. | Enter the address, or download the PDF. |
| You can email your supplier if you turn on Send from your own address. | Sending by email requires the Own sender feature. | Turn it on, or download the PDF and set the order to Ordered yourself. |
| No products with stock. Turn on stock on a product to see it here. | There are no products with tracked stock. | Turn on stock under Stocks. |
| No purchase orders yet. Create them from the order suggestion. | There are no orders yet. | Create one from the suggestion. |

**Related questions:**

- What is the difference between Order suggestion and Purchase orders?
- Where do I order from my suppliers?
- Where do I find the purchasing screen?

**Keywords:** purchasing, order suggestion, purchase order, order from supplier, book receipt, order quantity, minimum stock

**Related:** [How do I order from my supplier and book the delivery in?](../faq/inkoop-bestellen-bij-leverancier.md), [What can you set for suppliers?](leveranciers-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for warehouse locations?

**Answer:** With warehouse locations you track stock per place, for example Shop and Shelf 1A, with its own quantity per location for each product. The stock of a product is the sum of all locations. Warehouse locations costs nothing itself, but only works together with Purchasing (€10 per month, €10 in total).

**Where to find it:** Point of sale and products > Warehouse locations (`/Magazijnlocaties`)

**Explanation:** On the tab you create locations with a name and optionally a barcode that hangs on the shelf. Clicking a location shows what is stored there. You also choose, per POS, which location the POS sells from. A sale is deducted from the POS's fixed location. Online store and sales without a fixed location are deducted from the default location. If a location runs out, the sale simply goes ahead and the location goes below zero. On the Stocks tab you then get the column Stock location with a filter on it.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Warehouse locations | Title of the tab. The screen says: "Click a location to see what is stored there. The stock of a product is the sum of all locations." | | |
| Add location | Opens a window with the name (for example Shop or Shelf 1A, at most 100 characters) and a Barcode that may stay empty. | For every place. | |
| Name | Column with the name of the location. | | |
| Barcode | Column with the barcode of the shelf. | | |
| Products | Column: how many products are stored there. | | |
| Total | Column: the total quantity at the location. | | |
| Tills | Column: which POS devices have this as their fixed location. | | |
| default | Label on the location for Online store and sales without a fixed location. | | There is one default location. |
| Change | Changes the name or barcode. | | |
| Make default | Makes this location the default location. | | |
| Delete | The bin icon behind the location; Jimani first asks Delete location? | When you no longer use a place. | You cannot delete a location that has stock. If you delete the default location, the next location becomes the default. |
| Product | Column in the detail of a location. | | |
| EAN | Column with the barcode. | | |
| Total all locations | Column with the total stock of the product. | | |
| Quantity here | Column with the quantity at this location, which you can adjust. | For a stock count. | |
| Nothing here yet. | What you see for an empty location. | | |
| Add product... | Drop-down to put a product at the location. | | |
| Quantity | The quantity you type in before you click Add. | | |
| Add | Puts the chosen product at the location. | | |
| Which location does the till sell from? | Block with one line per POS: "A sale is deducted from the POS's location. If it runs out, the sale simply goes ahead and the location goes below zero." | When you have several POS devices. | |
| POS | Column with the name of the POS. | | |
| Location | Column with the chosen location. | | |
| Default location | Choice where the POS sells from the default location. | | |
| Quantities per location | On the Stocks tab: click in the column Stock location to set quantities per location. | | You must have locations first. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Give the location a name. | The name is empty. | Enter a name. |
| The name is too long (at most 100 characters). | The name has more than 100 characters. | Make it shorter. |
| Location added | The new location has been saved. | |
| Location deleted | The location is gone. | |
| There is still stock at this location. First set the quantities to 0 or move them to another location. | You cannot delete a location that has stock. | Set the quantities to 0 or move them. |
| This location no longer exists. | The location is already gone. | Refresh the screen. |
| This location or product no longer exists. | The quantity belongs to something that is already gone. | Refresh the screen. |
| This till or location no longer exists. | The POS or location is already gone. | Refresh the screen. |
| There are no warehouse locations yet. Create them on the Warehouse locations tab. | You opened Quantities per location without locations. | Create a location first. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I manage my warehouse locations?
- How do I create a shelf as a location?
- What is the total of stock across several locations?

**Keywords:** warehouse locations, stock per location, shelf, stock location, default location, POS location

**Related:** [How do I track stock per place or shelf (warehouse locations)?](../faq/magazijnlocaties.md), [What can you set for stocks?](voorraden-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for label printing?

**Answer:** On the Label printing screen you choose items, say how many labels you want of each and print them. Each label shows the product name, the variant, the price and the barcode. You print on a Brother QL-800 or on a Dymo LabelWriter. Label printing is free.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Point of sale and products > Label printing (`/Etiketten/Index`)

**Explanation:** In the list, choose the items with the tick box and enter under Number of labels how many labels you want. Above the list, set how the label looks and click Print labels. An item with sizes gives one line per size, with its own barcode and price. Without a valid barcode there is nothing to print; on such a line you see Create barcode. The Brother QL-800 connects to a POS with a USB cable and prints from the POS screen; a Dymo connects to the computer you open the screen on and prints via the browser's print window.

![The Label printing screen with the printer choice, the label layout and the list of items with Number of labels](/kennisbank/beelden/etiketten-scherm-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Label printing | Title of the screen. The screen says: "The product name, variant, price and barcode are printed on each label. Select the items you want and indicate how many labels you want to print." | | |
| Search by item or barcode | Search field above the list. | To find an item. | |
| Category | Filter on category, with All categories. | | |
| Barcode status | Filter with All, Only with a barcode and Only without a barcode. | To find items without a barcode. | |
| Stock | Filter with All and Only in stock. | | |
| Printer | Choice between Brother QL-800 and Dymo LabelWriter. | Once, for the printer you have. | |
| Brother QL-800 | The label printer that connects to a POS with USB. With this choice you see the button Connect printer; the status is Connected or Not connected yet. | | Only this printer is supported from the POS. If Editor Lite is on, it shows up as a USB stick; turn that mode off (hold the button down until the light goes out). |
| Size | For the Dymo: the type of label. You can also choose Custom size, with a length of 15 to 150 and a width of 10 to 62 mm. | When you use a Dymo. | |
| Name and price | Whether the name and the price are Stacked or On the same line. | For a narrow label. | If it does not fit, the POS makes the whole thing smaller. |
| Price format | How the price appears: with euro sign, without, or for example 4.95 each. | | Only if the price has its own line. |
| Always the same height | Yes: every label the same length, neat on a rack. No: a label is as long as its content and less of the roll is used. | | |
| Name position | Left, Centre or Right. | | |
| Price position | Left, Centre or Right. | | |
| Print barcode too | Yes or No: put the barcode on the label, if the item has one. | | |
| Digits underneath | Yes or No: the digits of the barcode under the bars. | | |
| Height of name, price and barcode, and the margin | Four sizes in mm, for the name, the price, the barcode and the margin. | To make the label match your roll. | |
| Label | Horizontal or Vertical: the direction of the label. | | |
| Save settings | Remembers your layout for next time. | | |
| Example label | Shows what the label looks like. | | |
| Item | Column with the name, sortable. | | |
| Variant | Column with the size or variant. | | |
| Number of labels | How many labels you want of this item. | | |
| Create barcode | Creates a barcode for this line. | When an item does not have one. | |
| Create all barcodes | Creates barcodes for all lines that lack one. | When many items do not have one yet. | |
| Quantities = stock | Sets the number of labels of each item equal to the stock. | After a delivery. | |
| Clear selection | Removes all ticks. | | |
| Export | Downloads the list as a spreadsheet. | | Not shown on a POS. |
| Import | Reads the quantities from a spreadsheet. | | Not shown on a POS. |
| Print labels | Prints the chosen labels. | When everything is right. | If the Brother has not been found yet, Jimani first looks for the printer. With a Dymo, a preview opens with the button Print; when printing, set the margins to zero and the scaling to one hundred percent, otherwise the scanner cannot read the code. |
| Which printer and which labels | The information button with an explanation. It says: the Brother QL-800 works with five continuous DK rolls of paper with permanent adhesive, 30.48 metres long. | | You decide how long a label is; the printer then cuts it off. |
| Try again | In the window Looking for the Brother QL-800: try again. First check that the printer is on, the USB cable is in the POS, Editor Lite is off and there is a roll in it. | | |

**Rolls for the Brother QL-800:**

| Roll | Width | Used for |
|---|---|---|
| DK-22214 | 12 mm | Small price tag |
| DK-22210 | 29 mm | Small price label |
| DK-22225 | 38 mm | Standard product label (the default) |
| DK-22223 | 50 mm | Roomy product label |
| DK-22205 | 62 mm | Large product label |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I print product labels?
- What information is on a label?
- Can I print several labels of one item at once?

**Keywords:** print labels, price label, print barcode, Brother QL-800, Dymo, label printer, create barcode

**Related:** [How do I print labels with a price and barcode?](../faq/etiketten-printen.md), [What can you set for a product?](product-venster-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for discounts?

**Answer:** On the Discounts tab you create a discount with a name, a discount percentage, a duration and the products it applies to. You choose whether the discount is deducted at the POS straight away or stays as a button on the receipt. The Discounts feature is free.

**Where to find it:** Point of sale and products > Discounts (`/Webshop`), new via the blue plus button

**Explanation:** The Discounts window has two pages. On the first you fill in the discount (name, percentage, duration, apply straight away), on the second you choose the products, per category, with Select all if everything should take part. The name can be 15 characters long and the percentage is between 0.01 and 100. A discount without dates always applies. At the POS only the discounts that apply today are shown; the end date counts for the whole day.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Discounts | Title of the tab and the window. The screen says: "View all discounts here. Add new ones with the Add button. Enter the name and the discount percentage and link products to the discount". Above the window it says: "Create the new discount". | | |
| The discount | First block: "How much comes off, how long the discount applies, and whether it is at the POS straight away." | | |
| Name | "Name of the discount" At most 15 characters; the counter is called Maximum number of characters. | Always. | |
| Discount percentage | "The percentage that is deducted from the selected products." | Always. | |
| Valid from | "Leave empty if the discount may apply immediately." You choose the date with a calendar, or with the minus and the plus. | For a promotion that starts later. | |
| Valid until (inclusive) | "Leave empty if the discount keeps applying." | For a promotion with an end date. | The end date counts for the whole day. |
| Apply discount on the till straight away | "With yes the discount comes off as soon as you ring up the product. With no it stays a button on the receipt." You choose Yes or No. | Yes for a promotion for everyone, No for a discount your employee gives themselves. | With No, tapping it falls under the POS right Give discounts: if that is set to No, the POS asks for a PIN code. |
| Yes | The discount is deducted automatically. | | |
| No | The discount is a button on the receipt. | | |
| Select all | Turns on all products in the list. Afterwards it says Deselect all. | When the discount applies to everything. | |
| Select Excel file | In the list: the block for reading in discounts with an Excel file. | For many discounts at once. | Only with Import and export. |
| Choose a file | Opens the file picker. | | |
| Export | Downloads the discounts as an Excel file. | | |
| Name (list) | Column with the name of the discount. | | |
| Delete | Deletes the discount. You get the question Delete the discount and then Successfully removed! | | |
| Save | Saves the discount. | | |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I create discounts?
- What can I set for a discount?
- How do I limit a discount to certain products?

**Keywords:** set up discount, discount percentage, discount on products, POS promotion, discount duration, activate discount immediately

**Related:** [How do I set up a discount on products?](../faq/korting-instellen.md), [How do I see how much discount I have given?](../faq/kortingsoverzicht.md)

---

# What can you set for sales and discounts?

**Answer:** On the Sales and discounts screen you create a temporary promotion: a discount in euros or percent on chosen products, between a start moment and an end moment. A promotion that does not serve as a coupon is applied automatically at the POS. The screen belongs to the Gift voucher feature (€10 per month, excluding VAT).

**Where to find it:** Settings > Add-ons, button Settings on the Gift voucher card (`/Settings/SalesAndDiscounts`); if Gift cards is off, also via Settings > Money and figures > Gift cards and gift vouchers. New with the plus button (Add)

**Explanation:** The page shows your promotions as cards with their name and period. The window Sale & discounts first has a page with the details (name, coupon, period, amount, combining, priority) and then one page per category on which you choose the products. With Add all products you turn everything on. If a product has more than one promotion, the one that yields the highest amount wins at the POS, and with an equal amount the lowest priority. A price you type yourself wins over any discount, and a promotion is never applied to a return line.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Sales and discounts | Title of the page. | | |
| Sale & discounts | Title of the window. | | |
| The discount | First block: "How much comes off, how long the discount applies, and whether it is at the POS straight away." | | |
| Name | "Enter a name for this sale or discount. The name is only visible internally." At most 200 characters; the counter is called Maximum number of characters. | Always. | |
| Functions as a coupon? | "Choose whether customers have to enter a coupon code to use this discount." You choose Yes or No. | No for an ordinary promotion. | A discount that functions as a coupon is not applied automatically at the POS. |
| Coupon code | "Enter the coupon code customers have to use at checkout." At most 100 characters. | Only if Functions as a coupon? is set to Yes. | |
| Start date | The day the promotion starts, with a Start time. "Select the date and time at which this discount becomes active." | Always. | |
| Start time | The hour the promotion starts. | | |
| End date | The day the promotion ends, with an End time. "Select the date and time at which this discount expires." | Always. | |
| End time | The hour the promotion ends. | | |
| Discount | "Enter the discount amount as a fixed amount or percentage." You first choose the unit, the currency or %. | Always. | A percentage must be between 1 and 100; otherwise you get a message. |
| Can the discount be combined with other discounts? | "Choose whether this discount can be combined with other discounts." You choose Yes or No. | | |
| Discount priority | "Set the order in which this discount is applied when several discounts are available." A number from 1 to 100, with the minus and the plus. | | With an equal amount the lowest priority wins. |
| Add all products | Turns on all products at once. | When the promotion applies to the whole menu. | |
| Select all | Turns on all products of the category on the page. | | |
| Previous | Back to the previous page. | | |
| Next | To the next category. | | |
| Save | Saves the promotion. | | |

**Related questions:**

- How do I create a promotion in euros or percent?
- Why can't I find sales if I do not have a gift voucher?
- How do I set the start and end of a sale?

**Keywords:** sale, promotional price, temporary discount, coupon code, discount coupon, set up sale, gift voucher

**Related:** [How do I create a sale or temporary promotion?](../faq/uitverkoop-en-actie.md), [What can you set for discounts?](kortingen-scherm.md)

---

# What is on the discount overview?

**Answer:** The Discount overview shows all discounts you have given in a period you choose yourself: on which receipt, on which item, how much and by whom. That way you can always check where the money went. It is free with the Discounts feature.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Money and figures > Reports > tab Discount overview (`/Kortingsoverzicht/Index`)

**Explanation:** At the top, choose the period with From and Up to and click Search. Under Discounts given you see per discount the date, the receipt number, the item, the quantity, the amount, the percentage and who gave the discount. A discount on the whole receipt shows the text Whole receipt under Item. The total is at the bottom. With the info button on a line you open the receipt itself. The right Discount overview determines who may see this screen.

![The Discount overview with the fields From and To, the Search button and the list Discounts given](/kennisbank/beelden/kortingsoverzicht-scherm-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Discount overview | Title of the screen. The old address keeps working and shows the tab bar of Reports. | | |
| From | First day of the period. You choose the date with a calendar, or with the minus and the plus. | Always. | |
| To | Last day of the period. | Always. | |
| Search | Loads the discounts of the chosen period. | After choosing the period. | |
| Discounts given | Block with the lines: "Who gave a discount, on which receipt and for what amount." | | |
| Date | Column with the date and the hour. | | |
| Order number | Column with the receipt number. | | |
| Item | Column with the item, or Whole receipt. | | |
| Quantity | Column with the number of items. | | |
| Discount | Column with the amount. | | |
| By whom | Column with the employee who gave the discount. | To check who gives discounts. | |
| Open order | The info button behind a line opens the receipt. | To see what the discount was on. | |
| Total | The sum of the discounts in the list. | | |
| No discount was given in this period. | What you see when there is nothing to show. | | |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I check where my discounts went?
- How do I see how much discount was given per receipt?
- Is the discount overview free?

**Keywords:** discount overview, discount given, check discounts, who gave discount, discount report

**Related:** [How do I see how much discount I have given?](../faq/kortingsoverzicht.md), [What can you set for discounts?](kortingen-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for gift cards?

**Answer:** On the Gift cards screen you create gift cards with their own card number and balance, see what is outstanding and set how long a card is valid. The screen has three tabs: Overview, Create and Validity. The Gift cards feature costs €10 per month (excluding VAT).

**Where to find it:** Settings > Money and figures > Gift cards and gift vouchers (`/Settings/Cadeaukaarten`), or the button Settings on the Gift cards card under Settings > Add-ons

**Explanation:** A sold gift card is not revenue but a liability: the money has come in, but the card has not been redeemed yet. That is why the amount of the cards is shown in the Overview under Outstanding balance, which should equal the liability account in your bookkeeping. The card number has thirteen digits with a check digit. If you sell a card via a product, set Is this a gift card? to Yes on that product: there is no VAT on it and the amount does not count as revenue. An expired card is released as revenue.

![The Gift cards screen with the tabs Overview, Create and Validity and the totals](/kennisbank/beelden/cadeaukaarten-scherm-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Gift cards | Title of the screen. | | |
| Overview | First tab with the totals and the list of cards. | To see what is outstanding. | |
| Create | Tab to create a batch of cards. | For a new supply of cards. | |
| Validity | Tab to choose how long a new card is valid. | Once. | |
| Outstanding balance | The total of what customers still have to spend. Below it says: This should equal the liability account in the bookkeeping. | For your bookkeeping. | |
| Cards outstanding | The number of cards that are still valid, with below it the number of expired cards. | | |
| Expired this year | The amount that has expired this year. An expired card is released as revenue. | | |
| Card number | Column with the thirteen-digit number. | | |
| Starting balance | Column with the amount the card started with. | | |
| Balance | Column with the amount that is left. | | |
| Valid until | Column with the end date, and under Create the field you use to choose it. | | |
| Status | Column with Ready to issue, Outstanding, Empty, Expired or Blocked. | | |
| Description | Column with the description of the batch, and under Create the field you use to fill it in. | | |
| Create a batch of cards | Block under Create: Cards with a fixed amount, or with an amount that is filled in at the sale. | | |
| How many cards | The number of cards in the batch, between 1 and 500. At most five hundred at a time. | Always. | |
| Amount per card | The amount on each card. Zero means: the amount is filled in at the sale. | Always. | |
| Valid until (batch) | A date until which the cards are valid. If you leave this empty, the store's term applies: the number of months you chose under Validity. | For a promotion with its own end date. | The store's term is 24 months by default. |
| Description (batch) | What this batch is for, for example Christmas 2026. | To tell batches apart. | |
| Create cards | Creates the batch. The screen then shows how many cards were created in which batch. | | |
| How long a card is valid | Block under Validity: This applies to cards created after this. A card that has already been issued keeps the date printed on it. | | |
| Valid for, in months | The number of months, from 1 to 120. Twenty-four months is common practice in the Netherlands. | | |
| months | The word after the number at If you leave this empty, the store's term applies. | | |
| Save | Saves the term. Afterwards it says Saved. | | |
| Process expired cards now | Processes the cards that have expired now. Expired cards are processed automatically every morning; this button does it now. | | |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Create at least one and at most 500 cards at a time. | The number is outside 1 to 500. | Choose a number within this range. |
| A card cannot start with an amount below zero. | The amount is negative. | Type zero or a positive amount. |
| There are no gift cards yet. Create them on the Create tab. | The list is empty. | Create a batch under Create. |
| The Gift cards option is turned off. | The feature is off. | Turn on Gift cards under Add-ons. |
| That didn't work. | The batch could not be created. | Try again. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I create a gift card with a balance?
- Where do I see how many gift cards are still outstanding?
- How do I set the validity of gift cards?
- What does the gift card screen cost?

**Keywords:** gift card, gift cards, gift card balance, gift card validity, outstanding balance, card number

**Related:** [How do gift cards work in Jimani?](../faq/cadeaukaarten.md), [What can you set for a product?](product-venster-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for repairs?

**Answer:** On the Repairs screen you see all repairs of your business with their status, change that status and set up the emails to the customer. You accept and hand back repairs at the POS. The Repair feature costs €150 one-off and no monthly fee.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Point of sale and products > Repairs (`/Reparaties`)

**Explanation:** A repair has a number such as R-12 and goes through four statuses: Received, In repair, Ready for pickup and Picked up. On the screen, under Your repairs you see the repairs that are still open (Open) or all of them (All). Click Edit to set the status; the customer then gets an email if there is an email address. Under Emails to the customer you set, per status, whether an email is sent and with which text.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Repairs | Title of the screen. | | |
| Your repairs | Block with the list: You accept and hand back repairs at the POS. Here you set the status; the customer then gets an email if there is an email address. | | |
| Open | Filter that shows the repairs that have not been picked up yet, with the number behind it. | Daily. | |
| All | Filter that shows all repairs. | | |
| Number | Column with the repair number. | | |
| Customer | Column with the customer. | | |
| Faulty | Column with the description of the defect. | | |
| Price | Column with the total amount. | | |
| Deposit | Column with what the customer has already paid. | | |
| Expected ready | Column with the date by which the repair should be ready. | | |
| Status | Column with Received, In repair, Ready for pickup or Picked up. | | |
| Edit | Opens the window Repair with the details and the history. | To set the status. | |
| Expected ready on | The date on which the repair is ready. | When the planning changes. | |
| Email | The customer's email address. | If the customer did not give one when the repair was accepted. | The address must be valid. |
| Comment | Your own comment on the repair, at most 1000 characters. | | |
| Email the customer | Yes or No: send the customer an email for this status change. | | Only for a different status and with an email address. |
| History | List of what has happened to the repair. | | |
| Emails to the customer | Block with a line per status. One email to the customer per status, with your own text. If a status is set to No, the customer gets no email for that status. Without an email address no email is ever sent. | | |
| Send email | Yes or No per status; saves immediately. | | |
| Subject | The subject of the email. | | |
| Placeholders | Window with fields you put in the text: Customer name, Repair number, Description of the defect, Status, Expected ready, Price, Deposit, Still to pay and the name, address, phone and email address of the store. Click a placeholder to copy it. When sending, the real value takes its place. | | |
| Email template | The subject and the text per language of your store. | For your own text. | Without your own text in a language, the default text is used. Fill in subject and text in every language, or leave both empty. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| The Repair integration is switched off. | The feature is off. | Turn on Repair under Add-ons. |
| Enter the description of the defect. | The description is missing. | Describe what is broken. |
| Enter a valid price. | The price is missing or not valid. | Type the total amount. |
| The deposit is not valid: at most the price, or 0 to 100%. | The deposit is higher than the price, or the percentage is outside 0 to 100. | Adjust the deposit. |
| Enter the customer's name. | The name is missing. | Enter the name. |
| Enter a valid phone number for the customer. | The phone number is missing or not valid. | Choose the country code and type the number without the 0 in front. |
| The customer's email address is not valid. | The address is not a valid email address. | Correct the address or leave it empty. |
| The ready date is not valid. | The date Expected ready is not valid. | Choose today or later. |
| This repair has already been picked up. | You are handing back a repair that is already Picked up. | Nothing else needs to happen. |
| This repair was not found. | The repair does not exist. | Search by number, name or phone. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see the status of all repairs?
- How do I let the customer know by email that their repair is ready?
- Where do I set up the repair emails?

**Keywords:** repairs, accept repair, repair status, email customer repair, deposit repair, phone repair

**Related:** [How do I take in a repair on the POS?](../faq/reparaties-aannemen.md)

---

# What can you set for courses?

**Answer:** Under Courses you create the courses of your menu, such as Starter and Main course, in the order in which the kitchen makes them. Then on each product you set which course it belongs to. The Courses feature costs €10 per month (excluding VAT) and only works together with Restaurant. If you already use Courses, it is free until 1 January 2027.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Point of sale and products > Courses (`/Settings/WebshopCourses`)

**Explanation:** If your store has no courses yet, it gets the default courses Drinks (send immediately), Starter, Main course and Dessert. You drag a line to change the order and tap a name to change it. A product can be in more than one course; the first is the default course and the item gets it when it is rung up at the POS. Without courses, the starter leaves the kitchen at the same time as the main course.

![The Courses screen with the list of courses and the button Add course](/kennisbank/beelden/gangen-scherm-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Courses | Title of the page. The screen says: "The courses of your menu, in the order in which the kitchen makes them. Drag a line to change the order, tap a name to change it. A product can be in more than one course; the first is its default course." | | |
| Add course | The button at the top right that opens the window. The window is called Update Course when you open an existing course. | For every course of your menu. | |
| Course | Block of the window: "You see the name and the colour at the POS and in the kitchen." Above the window it says: "A course of your menu, such as starter or main course. The kitchen works in the order of the courses." | | |
| Name | "For example Starter. Every course has its own name." At most 100 characters. | Always. | |
| Colour | "This is how you recognise the course at the POS and in the kitchen." You choose a colour or a Custom colour. | To tell the courses apart. | |
| Send immediately | "Goes straight to the kitchen, without being called up (e.g. drinks)." You choose Yes or No. | Yes for drinks. | |
| Active | "A course that is off can no longer be chosen; products that already have it keep it." You choose Yes or No. | To take a course away temporarily. | |
| Courses (on a product) | On the first page of the product window: "Which courses this product belongs to. The first (with the star) is the default course: the item gets it when it is rung up at the POS." | For every product that goes to the kitchen. | |
| Default | Label on the first course of a product. | | |
| Make this the default course | Puts another course of the product first. | | |
| Delete | Removes a course from this product. | | |
| No other courses left | What you see when all courses are already on the product. | | |
| Save | Saves the course. | | |

**Related questions:**

- How do I create starter and main course as courses?
- In which order do I set the courses?
- Where do I manage the courses of my menu?

**Keywords:** courses, starter main course, default course, send immediately, kitchen courses, organise menu

**Related:** [How do I assign products to courses?](../faq/gangen-per-product.md), [What can you set for a product?](product-venster-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set on the Tables and Opening hours tabs?

**Answer:** On the Tables tab you create parking tables: tables on which you park an order until it is paid. On the Opening hours tab you enter, per day, the opening hours for your online orders. Both are under Point of sale and products and only appear if the related feature is on.

**Where to find it:** Point of sale and products > Tables and Point of sale and products > Opening hours (`/Webshop`)

**Explanation:** The Tables tab is there with the Parking tables feature. It is useful when you take an order by phone or want an order to be paid later. The Opening hours tab is there with the Online webshop feature. The times say when a guest can order online. You see the next two years per day and first choose the year and the month.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Tables | Title of the tab. The screen says: "Here you can create tables to park the order for later. This can be useful when you take an order by phone or when you want an order to be paid later." | | |
| Webshop parking table | Title of the window for a parking table. Above the window it says: Manage the Parking table. | | |
| The parking table | Block: "A table on which to park an order until it is paid." | | |
| Table name | The name of the table, at most 20 characters. The counter is called Maximum number of characters. Give the table a name. | Always. | You cannot create a table that already exists. |
| Location | "The location where the table is. It goes straight to that place on the floor plan." You choose from your locations (Choose a location). | Always. | |
| Add as main guest | "Mark this table as the main guest table when placing an order" You choose Yes or No. | For a table that is the main guest of a reservation. | |
| Table names | Column with the names in the list. | | |
| Active | Column in the list with a switch for the table. | To switch a table off temporarily. | |
| Select Excel file | In the list: the block for reading in tables with an Excel file. | For many tables at once. | Only with Import and export. |
| Choose a file | Opens the file picker, also at Opening hours. | | |
| Export | Downloads the tables as an Excel file. | | |
| Opening hours | Title of the tab. The screen says: "Enter the opening hours here per day. Note: the times 'open from' and 'open until' are only used when the business is marked as open. To quickly fill in the opening hours for the next two years, we recommend making an export. This way the data can be adjusted easily and efficiently in Excel. When the changes have been made, click 'Import'." | | |
| Date | Column with the day. | | |
| Open from | Column with the opening hour. | | Only counts if the day Open/Closed is set to open. |
| Open until | Column with the closing hour. | | |
| Open/Closed | Column with a switch: is the business open that day. | | |
| Delivery from | Column with the first hour of delivery. | If you deliver. | The delivery columns are only shown if delivery is on. |
| Delivery to | Column with the last hour of delivery. | | |
| Delivery | Column with a switch: is there delivery that day. | | |
| Save | Saves all changes of the chosen month. | | |

**Related questions:**

- What is a parking table?
- How do I set opening hours for online orders?
- Why do I not see the Tables and Opening hours tabs?

**Keywords:** parking table, park table, park order, webshop opening hours, opening hours online ordering, main guest table

**Related:** [How does the Point of sale and products screen work?](kassa-en-producten-scherm.md)

---

# What can you set for a VAT group?

**Answer:** A VAT group is a group that products fall under. The group determines which VAT rate applies. You create groups in Settings > Point of sale and products > VAT group, on the VAT group tab, and choose one for each product. VAT groups are free.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Point of sale and products > VAT group > tab VAT group (`/settings/vatsetup`)

**Explanation:** The VAT group page has three tabs: VAT for the percentages, Currency for your currency and VAT group for the groups. First create the VAT percentages and then, per group, a name with a percentage. Every product belongs to a group, and that group determines the rate at which it appears on the receipt. If a product belongs to a group without a rate, the receipt shows zero VAT and your VAT return will not be correct. A product set does not choose a VAT group, and for a gift card the VAT is zero.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| VAT | Tab with the VAT percentages. | First, before you create your groups. | |
| Currency | Tab to choose the right currency. | At the start. | |
| VAT group | Tab with the groups. It holds the import and export of groups and the plus button. | To create groups. | |
| Add VAT group | Opens the window for a new group. Its heading is Create a new VAT group. | For every group. | |
| Product group | Block of the window: A group that products fall under. The group determines which VAT rate applies. | | |
| Product group name | The name of the group, at most 100 characters, for example High rate. | Always. | The name is mandatory. |
| Select tax | Drop-down with your VAT percentages. | Always. | The VAT is mandatory. |
| Edit VAT group | The window for an existing group, with the heading Update existing VAT group. | To change a name or rate. | |
| Save | Saves the group. | | |
| Choose a file | Opens the file picker for the import of VAT groups. | | |
| No VAT groups were found. | What you see when there is no group yet. | | |

**Related questions:**

- How do I set VAT rates for my products?
- Where do I create a VAT group?
- What does a VAT group cost?

**Keywords:** vat group, product vat rate, create vat group, high low rate, vat percentage POS

**Related:** [How do I set the VAT rate?](../../algemeen/faq/btw-tarief-instellen.md), [What can you set for a product?](product-venster-scherm.md)

---

# How do I create or change a product?

**Answer:** Go to Point of sale and products, click the blue plus button and choose Products. On the first page enter the name, the price, the VAT group and optionally the EAN Code and a photo, choose the category and click Save. You change an existing product by clicking it in the Products tab.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Point of sale and products in the left-hand menu and click the blue plus button (Add) at the top right. In the window What would you like to add, choose Products.
- **Step 2.** Under Basic details enter the Name (at most 50 characters) and optionally a Description. With multiple languages you do this per language.
- **Step 3.** Under Price and barcode enter the Price, including VAT, and choose the VAT group. The EAN Code is needed if you work with a scanner.
- **Step 4.** Optionally add a photo under Image. A product has a photo.
- **Step 5.** Click Next and choose the Categories the product should be in. There can be more than one.
- **Step 6.** On the page Parts of this product you use Yes or No to turn on what else you want to fill in: options, extra information, supplements, variants, related products, labels and allergens. What you leave on No is skipped.
- **Step 7.** Click Next until the last page and choose Save.
- **Changing.** In the Products tab, click the product. For a quick change of name, VAT group or price, use the pencil (Edit) above the list and change it in the list itself; do not forget the save icon.
- **Switching off temporarily.** Click the three dots (Actions) behind the product and choose Deactivate. With Activate you put it back. Create a Copy or Send to Trash are in the same menu.
- **Stock.** You do not manage that in this window, but on the Stocks tab.

**Example:** You create Cappuccino for €3.20 in the VAT group Low rate and put it in the category Hot drinks. On the page Parts of this product you leave everything on No: the product goes into the shopping cart with one tap.

**Related questions:**

- How do I add a new item to the POS?
- How do I change the price of a product?
- Where do I enter the VAT and the barcode of a product?
- How do I add a photo to a product?

**Keywords:** add product, create product POS, edit product, change price, switch off product, add item, menu

**Related:** [What can you set for a product?](../naslag/product-venster-scherm.md), [How does the Point of sale and products screen work?](../naslag/kassa-en-producten-scherm.md), [How do I import or export my products with Excel?](producten-importeren-en-exporteren.md)

---

# How do I create categories and organise my products?

**Answer:** Go to Point of sale and products > Categories, click the blue plus button and choose Categories. Give the category a name, a description and an image and on the second page choose which products belong to it. A product can be in more than one category.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open the Categories tab in Point of sale and products, or choose the plus button and then Categories.
- **Step 2.** Enter the Name (at most 50 characters). The name appears at the POS and when reserving.
- **Step 3.** Add an Image, so you recognise the category at the POS.
- **Step 4.** Click Next and choose the Products that hang under the category. With the cross you take a product off again.
- **Step 5.** Click Save.
- **Afterwards.** For an existing category you can add or remove products on the same page, or on the product itself under Categories.
- **Many at once.** With Select Excel file and Export categories you read in categories or download them (if Import and export is on).
- **Middle layer.** If you want another layer below a category, such as Phone › Samsung, see [What are subcategories and how do I create them?](subcategorieen.md).

**Example:** You create the category Drinks with a photo of a glass, hang Cola, Coffee and Tea under it, and also put Coffee in the category Hot drinks.

**Related questions:**

- How do I divide my products into groups, such as drinks and food?
- Can a product be in two categories?
- How do I create a new section on the POS?
- How do I add a photo to a category?

**Keywords:** create category, POS categories, organise products, organise menu, product group, category image

**Related:** [What can you set for a category?](../naslag/categorieen-scherm.md), [How do I create or change a product?](product-toevoegen-en-wijzigen.md)

---

# What are subcategories and how do I create them?

**Answer:** A subcategory is a middle layer below a category, such as Phone › Samsung and Phone › iPhone. At the POS, after a main category you first see the subcategories as tiles. The Subcategories feature costs €5 per month (excluding VAT).

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on the Subcategories feature under Settings > Add-ons. The Subcategories tab then appears under Point of sale and products.
- **Step 2.** First create your main categories. If there is no category yet, the window says: Create a category first.
- **Step 3.** On the Subcategories tab click Create and give the subcategory a Name. Do not use the characters › and > in the name.
- **Step 4.** Under Main categories tick where the subcategory belongs. If Samsung has both Phone and Cases as main category, tick both: you create the subcategory once.
- **Step 5.** For each ticked main category choose the products that fall in the subcategory and click Save.
- **Number.** Every combination, such as Phone › Samsung, gets its own number. In an import file you can use the combination by name (Main › Sub).
- **Deleting.** Jimani asks Delete subcategory? and says that the products stay in the main category.

**Example:** A phone shop has the category Phone with the subcategories Samsung and iPhone. At the POS the employee taps Phone, sees the tiles Samsung and iPhone and then chooses the device.

**Related questions:**

- How do I create a category under a category?
- Can I use main groups and subgroups?
- What do subcategories cost?

**Keywords:** subcategory, subcategories, middle layer category, phone samsung, category under category, main category

**Related:** [What can you set for subcategories?](../naslag/subcategorieen-scherm.md), [How do I create categories and organise my products?](categorieen-maken.md)

---

# How do I import or export my products with Excel?

**Answer:** First make an export: on the Products tab click Export products. Edit the Excel file, choose it with Choose a file and click the import icon next to it. Jimani recognises existing products by the EAN code, and if that is empty by the name. Import and export is free.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Point of sale and products > Products. If you do not see the block Select Excel file, turn on the Import and export feature under Settings.
- **Step 2.** Click Export products. You get an Excel file with all your products.
- **Step 3.** Edit the file or add lines. At minimum the name, the price and the VAT group (idProductGroup) are needed; the rest may be missing.
- **Step 4.** Choose the file at Choose a file and click the import icon. Afterwards Jimani says how many lines succeeded and which did not.
- **Recognition.** If the EAN code of a line already belongs to a product, that product is updated. If the EAN code is empty, Jimani searches on the name. Otherwise a new product is created.
- **Empty cells.** An empty cell changes nothing: what was there stays. You clear things on the screen.
- **Photo.** A product has a photo. If the file contains a link to an image, it becomes the photo if the product does not have one yet; if fetching fails, the old photo stays.
- **Categories.** A line can name categories; an empty cell does not remove the product from its categories.
- **Unit.** With Price per unit, "piece" sets the product back to per piece. An unknown unit is refused.
- **Supplements and related products.** These are not in the product file but in a file of their own, under Links per product on the Supplements tab.
- **System products.** Products that Jimani manages itself (such as Transaction costs) are not updated by the import.
- **Other lists too.** Categories, supplements, product variants, labels and tags, tables, discounts and stock have the same buttons on their own tab.

**Example:** You export 120 products, raise all prices by 5% in Excel and import the file again. The products are recognised by their EAN code and get the new price; the rest stays as it was.

**Related questions:**

- How do I put my range into Jimani in one go with an Excel file?
- Can I export all my products to Excel?
- How do I change many prices at once?
- How does Jimani recognise existing products when importing?

**Keywords:** import products, export products, excel products, change prices excel, bulk products, import POS

**Related:** [How do I create or change a product?](product-toevoegen-en-wijzigen.md), [How does the Point of sale and products screen work?](../naslag/kassa-en-producten-scherm.md)

---

# How do I create product variants, such as sizes or colours?

**Answer:** On the Product variants tab, create a variant group with the options, for example Size with S, M and L. Then choose that group on the product, on the page Show product variants?, and enter the EAN Code and the Price per option. Product variants are free.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Make sure the Product variants feature is on. The Product variants tab then appears under Point of sale and products.
- **Step 2.** Click the blue plus button and choose Product variants (or use the tab itself). Give the group a Name of at most 15 characters, for example Size.
- **Step 3.** Under Number of options choose how many options the group has (up to 50) and give each option a name.
- **Step 4.** Under All options have same price? choose Yes if everything costs the same. Choose No if, for example, a large size is more expensive; you then enter a price per option.
- **Step 5.** Under All products have an Ean code? choose Yes if every option has its own barcode.
- **Step 6.** Open the product, set Show product variants? to Yes and under Select product variant? choose your group. You get a table with Size/name, EAN Code, Price and Active. Switch an option off under Active to take it away temporarily.
- **At the POS and in the online store.** The guest or employee chooses the variant. The base price and the EAN code are managed per variant option.
- **Many at once.** With Select Excel file and Export on the Product variants tab you read in groups or download them.

**Example:** A T-shirt gets the group Size with S, M, L and XL, with its own EAN code per size. When printing labels, each size gets its own line with its own code and price.

**Related questions:**

- How do I sell the same product in different sizes?
- How do I add colours or sizes to an item?
- Can I set a separate price and barcode per size?
- What do product variants cost?

**Keywords:** product variants, sizes, colours, create variants, variant price, variant ean, choose size

**Related:** [What can you set for product variants?](../naslag/productvarianten-scherm.md), [How do I print labels with a price and barcode?](etiketten-printen.md)

---

# How do I add options or supplements to a product?

**Answer:** First create the supplements on the Supplements tab and then in the product window set Add product supplements to Yes. You can attach up to three rows of supplements to a product, each with its own title and with the choices Mandatory choice and Multiple choices possible. Supplements are free.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Make sure the Supplements feature is on. The Supplements tab then appears under Point of sale and products.
- **Step 2.** Click the blue plus button and choose Supplements. Give the supplement a Name, a Price (it may also be free) and a VAT group, and click Save.
- **Step 3.** Open the product and go to the page Parts of this product. Set Do you want to add options to this product? to Yes and Add product supplements to Yes.
- **Step 4.** On the Supplements page choose the supplements for row 1. If you want a second or third row of choices, for example sauce and topping separately, choose those on the following pages. When creating a product they appear as Option 1, Option 2 and Option 3.
- **Step 5.** Optionally give each row its own title, for example Choose your sauce.
- **Step 6.** Under Choice rules set whether the guest has to choose from the row (Mandatory choice) and whether they may tick more than one (Multiple choices possible). That only applies to that row.
- **Step 7.** Click Save.
- **Sold out.** If you set a supplement to Sold out, it is no longer shown to the customer.
- **Many at once.** Under Links per product on the Supplements tab you import and export which supplement belongs to which product.
- **At the POS.** How the employee chooses the supplements is described in [How do I choose supplements or options for a product at the till?](supplementen-kiezen.md).

**Example:** For a portion of fries you attach the sauce in row 1 (Mayonnaise, Ketchup, Satay sauce; Multiple choices possible on No) and the toppings in row 2 (Onions, Cheese; Multiple choices possible on Yes). The guest sees two choices.

**Related questions:**

- How do I let the customer choose extra options for a product, such as sauce or topping?
- How do I make a mandatory choice for a dish?
- How many supplements can I attach to a product?
- What do supplements cost?

**Keywords:** supplements, extra topping, extras with product, choose sauce, options for product, mandatory choice

**Related:** [What can you set for supplements?](../naslag/supplementen-scherm.md), [How do I sell a menu or package for a fixed price (product set)?](productset-menu-vaste-prijs.md)

---

# How do I sell a menu or package for a fixed price (product set)?

**Answer:** Choose Point of sale and products, click the blue plus button and choose Product set. Give the set a name and a total set price, choose the number of layers (2 to 5) and for each layer choose the products the guest may choose from. The guest always pays the set price, whatever they choose. Product sets are free.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Make sure the Product set feature is on. The Product set tile then appears in the window What would you like to add.
- **Step 2.** Under Basic details enter the Name (for example Kids' menu) and optionally an EAN Code and an Image.
- **Step 3.** Under Layers and price choose the Number of layers. A layer is a choice the guest makes: a bread roll, a portion of fries and a drink are three layers. Enter the Total set price.
- **Step 4.** Choose the categories the set is in at the POS. Without a category the set is nowhere at the POS.
- **Step 5.** For each layer choose at least one product. You can only choose active products and no other set.
- **Step 6.** Click Save. In the product list the set has a blue label Product set.
- **VAT.** You do not choose a VAT group for a set: a bread roll and a beer fall under different rates. The set price is divided over the layers, so every item keeps its own rate in the end-of-day report.
- **On the receipt.** The receipt shows the name of the set and what the guest has chosen.
- **Changing.** Open the set in the Products tab. A product that is already in a set cannot become a set itself.

**Example:** The Kids' menu costs €8.50 and has three layers: a main course (Sausage, Chicken nuggets), a side (Fries, Rice) and a drink (Juice, Milk). Whatever the child chooses, the guest pays €8.50.

**Related questions:**

- How do I sell a menu for a fixed price?
- Can I make a combo deal where the guest chooses for themselves?
- How do I make a lunch menu with starter, main course and dessert?
- How many layers can a product set have?

**Keywords:** product set, sell menu, kids menu, combo deal, fixed price package, set layers, combo

**Related:** [What can you set for a product set?](../naslag/productset-venster-scherm.md), [How do I add options or supplements to a product?](supplementen-bij-een-product.md)

---

# How do I suggest other products with a product (related products)?

**Answer:** Open the product you want to suggest something with, set View related products to Yes and on the next page choose the products you offer with it. For those suggested products you can set a lower price of their own in the field Related product price. The Related products feature is free.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Make sure the Related products feature is on.
- **Step 2.** Open the product you want to suggest something with, for example the hamburger. On the page Parts of this product set Do you want to add options to this product? and View related products to Yes.
- **Step 3.** On the next page choose the products you suggest with it, for example soft drink. You see chosen products in the block Selected products; with the cross you remove one.
- **Step 4.** Under How the guest chooses, choose: Related products selection and Multiple choices possible. This is how you decide whether the guest may choose one or more.
- **Step 5.** If you want to offer the suggested product cheaper, open that product and fill in Related product price. That price applies when the product is chosen as a suggestion. The screen says: When you add this product as a related product to another product, you can optionally offer a discount.
- **Step 6.** Click Save.
- **Many at once.** Under Links per product on the Supplements tab you import and export which related products belong to which product.

**Example:** With the hamburger (€9.50) you suggest a soft drink. The soft drink normally costs €2.50, but as a suggestion with the hamburger the Related product price is €1.50.

**Related questions:**

- How do I have a drink suggested with a main course?
- Can I give a cheap price to an extra product that I offer?
- How do I set up upsell or suggestions on a product?
- What does the related products feature cost?

**Keywords:** related products, suggest product, upsell POS, soft drink with hamburger, put together menu, matching product

**Related:** [How do I add options or supplements to a product?](supplementen-bij-een-product.md), [What can you set for a product?](../naslag/product-venster-scherm.md)

---

# How do I sell by the metre, kilo or litre?

**Answer:** Turn on the Price per unit feature and under Settings > Point of sale and products > Price per unit choose the unit per product: piece, metre, centimetre, gram, ounce, kilo or litre. The price of the product is then the price per unit, and the POS asks for a quantity. Price per unit is free.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on Price per unit under Settings. The line Price per unit then appears under Point of sale and products.
- **Step 2.** Open Price per unit. You see all your products with Category, Unit and Price per unit. Search or filter on category or unit.
- **Step 3.** On the product choose the Unit, for example metre. "/ m" appears behind the price.
- **Step 4.** Type the price per unit, for example €12.00 for a metre of fabric. Every change is saved immediately. The price is between 0 and 99,999.99.
- **At the POS.** The product asks for a quantity, for example How many metres? You may tap in 2.5 (up to three decimals). The receipt shows 2.5 m × €12.00 and the amount of the line.
- **Stock.** The stock goes down by the actual quantity.
- **In the online store.** The guest orders a quantity with decimals.
- **Back to per piece.** On the product choose piece again.
- **Turning off.** If you turn the feature off, products with a unit behave as piece; the chosen unit is kept.
- **Importing.** In an import file, "piece" sets the product back to per piece; an unknown unit is refused.

**Example:** A fabric shop sells fabric for €12.00 per metre. A customer buys 2.5 metres: the amount is €30.00 and the stock goes down by 2.5 metres.

**Related questions:**

- How do I sell fabrics by the metre?
- Can I charge products by the kilo or by the gram?
- How do I make the POS ask for a quantity?
- Which units can I choose, such as litre or ounce?

**Keywords:** price per unit, sell by the metre, price per kilo, per litre, quantity decimals, fabric by the metre, scale

**Related:** [What can you set for price per unit?](../naslag/prijs-per-eenheid-scherm.md), [How do I track the stock of my products?](voorraad-bijhouden.md)

---

# How do I make the POS ask fixed questions with fixed answers (product notes)?

**Answer:** On the Notes tab, create a question with answers and choose the products the question belongs to. At the POS those products show the button Notes instead of Comments: the employee taps the answer instead of typing. The Product notes feature is free.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on the Product notes feature. The Notes tab then appears under Point of sale and products.
- **Step 2.** Click Create. Under Question type the question, for example Condition of the device (at most 100 characters).
- **Step 3.** Under Answers type one answer per line, for example New, Used and Faulty. Each answer becomes a button at the POS. You need at least two answers.
- **Step 4.** Under Products choose the products the question is ready on, or add a whole category with Add all products of a category.
- **Step 5.** Click Save.
- **At the POS.** The employee taps the answer and optionally types a comment. It appears on the receipt and the kitchen ticket like a comment.
- **Deleting.** Jimani asks Delete question? and shows the question.
- **Many at once.** You can also import notes.

**Example:** A phone shop creates the question Condition of the device with the answers New, Used and Faulty and attaches it to all products in the category Phone. When ringing up, the employee taps Used, and that appears on the receipt.

**Related questions:**

- How do I let employees choose from fixed answers, such as how well done a steak is?
- What is the difference between Notes and Comments at the POS?
- How do I set a fixed question on a product?
- What does the Product notes feature cost?

**Keywords:** product notes, POS notes, fixed question, condition of the device, replace comment, answer button

**Related:** [What can you set for notes?](../naslag/notities-scherm.md), [What are subcategories and how do I create them?](subcategorieen.md)

---

# How do I give a product a label or tag?

**Answer:** First create the label or tag on the Labels and tags tab and then choose it in the product window. A product can have one label (top left of the photo) and three tags (bottom left). Labels and tags only appear if the Online webshop feature is on.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Point of sale and products > Labels and tags, click the blue plus button and choose Labels and tags.
- **Step 2.** Under Type choose whether it is a Label or a Tag and fill in the Explanation, for example New or Vegetarian. That is the text the guest sees.
- **Step 3.** Choose the Background color and the Text color.
- **Step 4.** Under Visible in Kiosk? and Show in widget say Yes or No where the badge can be seen, and set Active to Yes. Click Save.
- **Step 5.** Open the product, on the page Parts of this product set Show labels and tags to Yes and choose the Label and Tag 1, Tag 2 and Tag 3.
- **Creating directly.** If the label or tag does not exist yet, you create it on that page with Create a new label or Creating Tags.
- **Many at once.** With Export Labels and Tags and Per product you read them in or download them.
- **Adjusting visibility.** In the overview you see per badge Visible in webshop and Visible in Kiosk.

**Example:** You create the label New (green with white text, visible in the widget) and give three products that label. On the tile of those products, New appears at the top left.

**Related questions:**

- How do I put a label such as New or Promotion on a product?
- How many tags can I attach to a product?
- Why do I not see labels on my products?
- Where do I create labels and tags?

**Keywords:** product label, product tag, new label, vegetarian label, badge on photo, label colour

**Related:** [What can you set for labels and tags?](../naslag/labels-en-tags-scherm.md), [What can you set for a product?](../naslag/product-venster-scherm.md)

---

# How do I track the stock of my products?

**Answer:** Turn on the Stock feature and open Point of sale and products > Stocks. There, turn on the Stocks switch for the products you want to track and enter the Available stock. With every sale the quantity goes down, and when it runs out the product is automatically set to sold out. Stock and Suppliers are free.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on Stock under Settings > Add-ons. The Stocks tab then appears under Point of sale and products.
- **Step 2.** Open Stocks. Above the list are the totals: Total stock value (units x purchase price excl. VAT), Average margin, Total sales value and Units in stock.
- **Step 3.** In the Stocks column turn the switch on for every product you track. With the switch at the top of the column you do it for all products in the list; Jimani first asks whether you want to turn on Track stock for the number of products in the list. It saves immediately.
- **Step 4.** Click the pencil (Edit), type the quantity under Available stock, optionally adjust the Purchase price, the Price and, with Purchasing, the Minimum stock, and click Save. Jimani books the difference.
- **Automatically sold out.** With Active stock the product is automatically set to sold out when the stock runs out. It can then no longer be ordered and is no longer shown to the customer.
- **Switching off temporarily.** Turn on the Sold out switch to block a product directly, or on the product choose Deactivate in the Actions menu.
- **Below the minimum.** Under Filter choose Below minimum stock to see what you need to reorder. The minimum stock appears in the Minimum stock column as soon as you have Purchasing.
- **Products without stock.** Tick Show "Inventory Inactive" to see products whose stock you are not tracking yet.
- **Many at once.** In the Products list, the gear sets Active stock and Minimum stock for several products at once. With Export stock you download the stock (quantities and purchase price) or the Stock settings (minimum and supplier); an import does the reverse.
- **Weight and length.** With Price per unit the stock goes down by the actual quantity, also with decimals.

**Example:** You track 24 bottles of wine with a minimum of 6. After every sale the quantity goes down. At 6 the bottle appears in the filter Below minimum stock; at 0 it is set to sold out.

**Related questions:**

- How do I keep track of how much I still have in stock?
- Does a product automatically go to sold out when it runs out?
- How do I enter the opening stock?
- What does stock management cost?

**Keywords:** track stock, POS stock, minimum stock, set sold out, stock value, switch off product temporarily, automatic stock

**Related:** [What can you set for stocks?](../naslag/voorraden-scherm.md), [How do I order from my supplier and book the delivery in?](inkoop-bestellen-bij-leverancier.md), [How do I change multiple products at once?](../naslag/meerdere-producten-aanpassen-scherm.md)

---

# How do I record my suppliers and link products to a supplier?

**Answer:** Turn on the Suppliers feature, open Point of sale and products > Suppliers and click the blue plus button. Enter the supplier's details and then link the Supplier per product, in the product window or for many products at once. Suppliers is free and only works together with Stock.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Make sure Stock and Suppliers are on. If you turn on Purchasing, Suppliers is turned on with it.
- **Step 2.** Open the Suppliers tab and click the plus button. The window Add Supplier has three pages.
- **Step 3.** On the first page enter the company name, the VAT number and the Chamber of Commerce number, the First name and Last name of your contact, Phone, Email and Invoicing e-mail.
- **Step 4.** On the second page enter the Website and the address: Address, Addition, Postal code, City, Province, Country and Language.
- **Step 5.** On the third page optionally add a photo and click Save.
- **Linking.** Open a product and under Supplier choose the supplier. For many products at once: tick them in the Products list, click the gear and choose Supplier. Or choose the supplier in the Supplier column on the Stocks tab.
- **With Purchasing.** A supplier then also has Prices on the purchase order (Yes or No), and the Email address is used to send the order.
- **Deleting.** Click the supplier and choose Delete.

**Example:** You record Jansen Wholesale with its email address and link the 40 products you buy there. In Purchasing, Jimani creates an order per supplier.

**Related questions:**

- How do I add a supplier?
- How do I link many products to one supplier at once?
- What does the suppliers feature cost?
- Where do I record the details of my wholesaler?

**Keywords:** add supplier, manage suppliers, wholesaler, product supplier, purchasing address, link supplier

**Related:** [What can you set for suppliers?](../naslag/leveranciers-scherm.md), [How do I order from my supplier and book the delivery in?](inkoop-bestellen-bij-leverancier.md)

---

# How do I order from my supplier and book the delivery in?

**Answer:** Open Settings > Point of sale and products > Stock and purchasing. The Order suggestion tab shows what you need to order; with Create orders you get a draft per supplier that you send. When the delivery arrives, you choose Book receipt and the quantity goes into stock. Purchasing costs €10 per month (excluding VAT), including Warehouse locations, and only works together with Stock.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on Purchasing under Add-ons. Stock must be on, and Suppliers is turned on with it.
- **Step 2.** On each product you order, link a Supplier, an Order quantity (for example a box of 12) and a Minimum stock, and turn on the product's stock.
- **Step 3.** Open Purchasing. The Order suggestion tops up to above the minimum, in whole order quantities, and takes into account what you have already ordered. A line without a supplier or without an order quantity cannot be ordered and gets an orange message.
- **Step 4.** Under Order adjust the quantities. Filter on Supplier, Categories or Only below minimum, and click Create orders.
- **Step 5.** A draft appears per supplier. Click Send to email the supplier. If you cannot email, choose Download PDF, send the PDF yourself and click Set to ordered. Emailing from your own address requires the Own sender feature.
- **Step 6.** Under Send you can fill in a CC, a Requested delivery date and an Explanation, and choose whether the Prices on the purchase order are shown.
- **Step 7.** When the delivery arrives, open the order under Purchase orders and click Book receipt. Under Received now enter what has arrived. It goes into stock at the purchase price. If only part has arrived, the status is Partly delivered; if everything has arrived, Delivered.
- **Who may book.** Booking a receipt requires the right Purchasing book receipt.

**Example:** Of Cola, 4 bottles are in stock with a minimum of 6 and an order quantity of 24. The suggestion is 24. You create the order, email it to the wholesaler and later book in the delivery of 24.

**Related questions:**

- How do I know what I need to reorder from my supplier?
- How do I book a delivery that has arrived into my stock?
- Can I send purchase orders from Jimani?
- What does the purchasing module cost?

**Keywords:** purchasing, order suggestion, order from supplier, book receipt, purchase order, order quantity, order minimum stock

**Related:** [What can you set for purchasing?](../naslag/inkoop-scherm.md), [How do I record my suppliers and link products to a supplier?](leveranciers-beheren.md), [How do I track stock per place or shelf (warehouse locations)?](magazijnlocaties.md)

---

# How do I track stock per place or shelf (warehouse locations)?

**Answer:** Turn on Warehouse locations, create your locations on the Warehouse locations tab (for example Shop and Shelf 1A) and set the quantity per location for each product. The stock of a product is the sum of all locations. Warehouse locations costs nothing itself but only works together with Purchasing, which costs €10 per month: €10 in total.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on Purchasing and Warehouse locations under Add-ons. Purchasing in turn requires Stock.
- **Step 2.** Open Point of sale and products > Warehouse locations and click Add location. Give the location a Name (at most 100 characters) and optionally a Barcode that hangs on the shelf.
- **Step 3.** Click a location to see what is stored there. Under Add product... choose a product, type the Quantity and click Add. You can adjust the Quantity here later.
- **Step 4.** One of the locations is the default location (with the label default). It applies to the online store and to sales without a fixed location. With Make default you choose another.
- **Step 5.** Under Which location does the till sell from? choose a location per POS. A sale is deducted from that location. If it runs out, the sale simply goes ahead and the location goes below zero.
- **On the Stocks tab.** You see the column Stock location and a filter Location. Click in the column to set quantities per location (Quantities per location).
- **Changing and deleting.** With Change you adjust name or barcode. You cannot delete a location that has stock: first set the quantities to 0 or move them.

**Example:** You have Shop (2 items) and Shelf 1A (38 items) of a product: the stock is 40. The POS in the shop sells from the location Shop.

**Related questions:**

- How do I track stock per shelf or per shop?
- Can I have a product in stock at several locations?
- What do warehouse locations cost?
- How do I add up the stock of several locations?

**Keywords:** warehouse locations, stock per location, shelf, stock location, default location, divide stock

**Related:** [What can you set for warehouse locations?](../naslag/magazijnlocaties-scherm.md), [How do I order from my supplier and book the delivery in?](inkoop-bestellen-bij-leverancier.md)

---

# How do I print labels with a price and barcode?

**Answer:** Open Settings > Point of sale and products > Label printing, tick the items, enter how many labels you want under Number of labels and click Print labels. Each label shows the product name, the variant, the price and the barcode. You print on a Brother QL-800 or a Dymo LabelWriter. Label printing is free.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Make sure the Label printing feature is on. Under Printer, choose the Brother QL-800 or the Dymo LabelWriter.
- **Step 2.** Brother: connect the printer to a POS with a USB cable and click Connect printer. Switch off the Editor Lite mode on the printer (hold the button until the light goes out), otherwise it shows up as a USB stick. It works with continuous DK rolls of 12, 29, 38, 50 or 62 mm.
- **Step 3.** Dymo: under Size, choose the label, or Custom size with a length of 15 to 150 and a width of 10 to 62 mm. The Dymo is attached to the computer you use to open the screen.
- **Step 4.** Set the layout: Name and price (Stacked or On the same line), Price format, Always the same height, where the name and the price go (Left, Centre or Right), Print barcode too, Digits underneath, and the height of the name, price and barcode and the white margin. The Example label shows the result. Click Save settings.
- **Step 5.** Search for items by name or barcode and filter by Category, Barcode status or Stock. An item without a barcode gets one with Create barcode; with Create all barcodes you do them all at once.
- **Step 6.** Enter the quantities under Number of labels, or click Quantities = stock to set the number for each item equal to its stock. Clear selection removes the ticks.
- **Step 7.** Click Print labels. With a Brother, it prints from the POS it is connected to. With a Dymo, a preview opens with the Print button; when printing, set the margins to zero and the scaling to one hundred percent, otherwise the scanner cannot read the code.
- **Many at once.** On a computer you can export the list (Export) and import the quantities from a spreadsheet (Import).
- **Sizes.** An item with sizes produces one line per size, each with its own code and price.

**Example:** After a delivery of 30 pairs of trousers, you click Quantities = stock for the new items, check the Example label and print 30 labels on the Brother with roll DK-22225 (38 mm).

**Related questions:**

- How do I print price stickers with a barcode?
- Which label printer can I use, Brother or Dymo?
- What does label printing cost?
- How do I create barcodes for my items?

**Keywords:** print labels, price label, print barcode, Brother QL-800, Dymo, label printer, create barcode

**Related:** [What can you set for label printing?](../naslag/etiketten-scherm.md), [How do I create product variants, such as sizes or colours?](productvarianten.md)

---

# How do I set up a discount on products?

**Answer:** Go to Point of sale and products > Discounts, click the blue plus button and enter a name, a discount percentage and optionally a period. On the second page, choose the products. Under Apply discount on the till straight away you choose whether the discount comes off immediately (Yes) or stays a button on the bill (No). Discounts are free.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Make sure the Discounts feature is on. The Discounts tab then appears under Point of sale and products.
- **Step 2.** Click the blue plus button. Enter the Name (at most 15 characters) and the Discount percentage (between 0.01 and 100).
- **Step 3.** Optionally enter Valid from and Valid until (inclusive). If you leave them empty, the discount always applies. The end date counts for the whole day.
- **Step 4.** Under Apply discount on the till straight away, choose Yes if the discount should come off as soon as you ring up the product, for example for a promotion. Choose No if the employee has to tap the discount themselves.
- **Step 5.** Click Next and choose the products, per category. With Select all you turn on all products.
- **Step 6.** Click Save.
- **On the POS.** Only the discounts that apply today appear on the POS. With No, the discount is a button on the bill. Who may tap it is decided by the POS permission Give discounts; if that is set to No, the POS asks for a PIN code.
- **Typing a price yourself.** A price you enter by hand takes precedence over a discount.
- **Temporary promotions with their own amount or a discount voucher.** See [How do I create a sale or temporary promotion?](uitverkoop-en-actie.md).
- **Checking.** You can see what has been given away in the discount overview, see [How do I see how much discount I have given?](kortingsoverzicht.md).

**Example:** You create the discount Summer with 20% from 1 July until 31 August for all ice creams, with Apply discount on the till straight away set to Yes. In that period every ice cream appears on the POS with 20% off.

**Related questions:**

- How do I give 10 percent discount on products?
- Can I set up a temporary promotion or happy hour?
- Should the discount come straight off the price on the POS or as a button?
- What do discounts cost?

**Keywords:** set up discount, discount percentage, discount on products, POS promotion, discount period, activate discount immediately

**Related:** [What can you set for discounts?](../naslag/kortingen-scherm.md), [How do I see how much discount I have given?](kortingsoverzicht.md)

---

# How do I create a sale or temporary promotion?

**Answer:** Turn on the Gift voucher feature (€10 per month, excluding VAT) and, on the Gift voucher card under Settings > Add-ons, click the Settings button. Sales and discounts then opens: create a promotion with an amount or percentage, a start and end moment and the products it applies to. A promotion that does not function as a discount voucher is applied automatically on the POS.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Click the plus button (Add). In the Sale & discounts window you enter a Name; it is only visible internally.
- **Step 2.** Leave Functions as a coupon? on No for a normal promotion. On Yes it is a discount voucher with a Coupon code, and then the discount is not applied automatically on the POS.
- **Step 3.** Choose Start date and Start time, and End date and End time.
- **Step 4.** Under Discount, choose an amount or a percentage. A percentage is between 1 and 100.
- **Step 5.** Under Can the discount be combined with other discounts? say Yes or No and optionally give a Discount priority from 1 to 100.
- **Step 6.** Click Next and tick the products on the pages per category. With Add all products you do everything at once. Click Save.
- **On the POS.** If a product has more than one promotion, the promotion that gives the highest amount wins; if that is equal, the lowest priority number. A price you type yourself takes precedence over any discount. No promotion is ever applied to a return line.
- **A discount the employee gives themselves.** Use Discounts for that, see [How do I set up a discount on products?](korting-instellen.md).
- **Omnibus.** Jimani does not show the lowest price of the past 30 days for a promotion, see [Does Jimani show the lowest price of the last 30 days for a promotion (Omnibus)?](omnibus-laagste-prijs.md).

**Example:** You create the promotion Winter sale: 30% off all jackets from Friday 08:00 to Sunday 18:00. In that period the jackets appear on the POS with 30% off, without the employee tapping anything.

**Related questions:**

- How do I set up a sale with temporary prices?
- Can I set up a promotion with a start and end date?
- Is a promotional price applied automatically on the POS?
- Where do I find Sales and discounts?

**Keywords:** sale, temporary promotion, promotional price, coupon code, discount voucher, discount period

**Related:** [What can you set for sales and discounts?](../naslag/uitverkoop-en-kortingen-scherm.md), [How do I set up a discount on products?](korting-instellen.md)

---

# How do I see how much discount I have given?

**Answer:** Open Settings > Money and figures > Reports and choose the Discount overview tab. Choose a period with From and Until and click Search: you see per discount the date, the receipt number, the item, the amount and who gave the discount, with the total at the bottom.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open the Discount overview tab (the screen is also called Discount overview). The old address still works too.
- **Step 2.** Choose From and Until, with the calendar or with the minus and the plus, and click Search.
- **Step 3.** Under Discounts given, look at the columns Date, Order number, Item, Quantity, Discount and By whom. A discount on the whole bill shows the text Whole receipt under Item.
- **Step 4.** Click the info button behind a line to open the bill (Open order) and see what the discount was on.
- **Total.** At the bottom is the sum of the discounts in the list.
- **Who may see this.** The Discount overview permission determines who may open the screen.
- **Empty.** If nothing has been given, it says: No discount was given in this period.

**Example:** In July you gave €140 in discounts. In the list you see that €100 of that was on the promotion Summer and €40 was given manually by an employee.

**Related questions:**

- How do I see how much discount my staff have given?
- Where do I find an overview of all discounts in a period?
- How do I check who gave a discount on a bill?

**Keywords:** discount overview, discount given, check discounts, who gave discount, discount report, POS discount report

**Related:** [What is on the discount overview?](../naslag/kortingsoverzicht-scherm.md), [How do I set up a discount on products?](korting-instellen.md)

---

# Does Jimani show the lowest price of the last 30 days for a promotion (Omnibus)?

**Answer:** No. Jimani does not automatically store or show the lowest price of the past 30 days next to a promotional price. A discount or promotion you set up subtracts the amount or percentage, but does not add a 30-day reference price.

**Explanation:**

- **What Jimani does.** Under Discounts and under Sales and discounts you set a percentage or amount, with a period. On the POS that is subtracted from the price. See [How do I set up a discount on products?](korting-instellen.md) and [How do I create a sale or temporary promotion?](uitverkoop-en-actie.md).
- **What Jimani does not do.** There is no field or report for the lowest price of the last 30 days, and a promotion does not check whether it complies with the Omnibus rule.
- **What you can do yourself.** Keep track yourself of the lowest price in the 30 days before the promotion, for example with the export of your products (Export products) that you save before you change a price, and put that price in the text or on the shelf yourself.

**Example:** You give 20% off a jacket of €100. Jimani shows the jacket on the POS for €80. Whether a price from the last 30 days must also be shown, you keep track of yourself.

**Related questions:**

- Do I have to show the lowest price of 30 days with a promotional price?
- Does Jimani comply with the Omnibus directive?
- Does the POS automatically add a reference price to a discount?

**Keywords:** omnibus, lowest price 30 days, promotional price, reference price, discount legal, price reduction

**Related:** [How do I set up a discount on products?](korting-instellen.md), [How do I create a sale or temporary promotion?](uitverkoop-en-actie.md)

---

# How do gift cards work in Jimani?

**Answer:** With the Gift cards feature (€10 per month, excluding VAT) you create cards with their own card number and balance, choose how long they are valid and always see what is still outstanding. A sold card does not count as revenue but as a liability, until the card is redeemed. That is different from the Gift voucher feature, which also costs €10 per month.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on Gift cards under Settings > Add-ons. Then open the screen under Settings > Money and figures > Gift cards and gift vouchers, or with the Settings button on the Gift cards card.
- **Step 2.** On the Validity tab, choose under Valid for, in months how long a new card is valid (from 1 to 120; twenty-four months is common practice in the Netherlands) and click Save. This applies to cards created after this.
- **Step 3.** On the Create tab, create a series of cards: enter How many cards (at most five hundred at a time) and the Amount per card. Zero means: the amount is entered at the sale. If you leave Valid until empty, the shop's term applies. Give the series a Description, for example Christmas 2026, and click Create cards.
- **Step 4.** Before selling, create a product and set Is this a gift card? to Yes on that product. There is then no VAT on it and the amount only counts when the card is redeemed. That question only appears on the product if Gift cards is on.
- **Overview.** On the Overview tab you see Outstanding balance (which should equal the liability account in your bookkeeping), Cards outstanding and Expired this year. Per card you see the Card number, the Starting balance, the Balance, Valid until, the Status and the Description, with the transactions below.
- **Expired.** Expired cards are processed automatically every morning. With Process expired cards now you do it immediately. An expired card is released as revenue.
- **Card number.** A card number has thirteen digits with a check digit, so that a wrongly typed digit is rejected.

**Example:** For the holidays you create 100 cards of €25 with the description Christmas 2026, valid 24 months. Every card you sell is a liability in your bookkeeping until the customer uses it.

**Related questions:**

- Can I sell gift cards with a balance?
- What is the difference between a gift card and a gift voucher?
- How do I see how much credit is still on issued gift cards?
- Does a sold gift card count as revenue?
- How long is a gift card valid?

**Keywords:** gift card, gift cards, gift voucher, gift card balance, store credit, giftcard, sell gift card

**Related:** [What can you set for gift cards?](../naslag/cadeaukaarten-scherm.md), [How do I create a sale or temporary promotion?](uitverkoop-en-actie.md)

---

# How do I record allergens and cross-contamination for a product?

**Answer:** Turn on the Allergens (NVWA) feature (€5 per month, excluding VAT; free until 1 January 2027 if you already use it). Then, in the product window, set Show allergies options to Yes and tick on the following pages what is in the product, what it may come into contact with and which dietary characteristics it has. The guest sees this when ordering.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on Allergens (NVWA) under Settings > Add-ons. Without this feature the question does not appear on the product and the allergy pages are skipped. The question also does not appear on a free POS for retail or treatments.
- **Step 2.** Open the product and go to the page Parts of this product. Set Show allergies options to Yes. The screen says: Here you can indicate per product whether the product, for example, may contain traces of nuts, or whether a product is "vegan" or "Halal".
- **Step 3.** On the Allergens page, tick under Allergies what is in the product. You choose from 44 options, such as Gluten (wheat, rye, barley, oats, spelt), Crustaceans, Eggs, Fish, Peanuts, Soy, Milk, Nuts (almonds, hazelnuts, walnuts and more), Celery, Mustard, Sesame seeds, Sulphites, Lupin and Molluscs.
- **Step 4.** On the Cross-contamination page, tick under Possible cross-contamination what the product may come into contact with in the kitchen. You choose from 14 lines, such as May contain traces of gluten, May contain traces of nuts and May contain traces of peanuts.
- **Step 5.** On the Dietary characteristics page, tick what applies, for example Vegetarian, Vegan, Gluten-free, Lactose-free, Halal, Kosher or Organic. There are 27 characteristics.
- **Step 6.** Click Save.
- **What the guest sees.** Under Allergens it says: What is in this product. The guest sees this when ordering.
- **Turning off.** If you set Show allergies options back to No, nothing about allergies appears for that product.

**Example:** For a nut cake you tick Nuts (almonds), Gluten (wheat), Eggs (hen's egg) and Milk under Allergies, May contain traces of peanuts under Cross-contamination and Vegetarian under Dietary characteristics.

**Related questions:**

- How do I add allergens to my dishes so guests can see them?
- Can I show cross-contamination and allergies on the menu?
- What does the allergens feature (NVWA) cost?
- Where do I tick that there is gluten or nuts in a product?

**Keywords:** allergens, product allergies, NVWA, cross-contamination, vegan halal, dietary characteristics, allergen menu

**Related:** [What can you set for a product?](../naslag/product-venster-scherm.md), [How do I create or change a product?](product-toevoegen-en-wijzigen.md)

---

# How do I take in a repair on the POS?

**Answer:** On the POS, choose the Repair category in the menu on the left and then Take in repair. Enter the description of the defect, the price, optionally a deposit and the customer's details; the deposit goes on the bill. When the item is collected, you choose Repair pickup and settle the rest. The Repairs feature costs €150 one-off and has no monthly fee.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on the Repair feature under Settings > Add-ons. The Repair category then appears on the POS, not on the handheld.
- **Step 2.** In the menu on the left, choose Repair and tap Take in repair (Defect, price, deposit and customer).
- **Step 3.** Under Defect and price, enter the Description of the defect (required, at most 1000 characters) and the Price (required). Under Deposit, enter an amount or a percentage of the price, or leave it empty for no deposit. Under Expected ready on, choose a date of today or later; if that is today, also choose Ready at.
- **Step 4.** Under Customer, enter the Name and the Phone (required: choose the country code and type the number without the 0) and optionally the E-mail. With Find a customer you pick an existing customer. With an email address, the customer receives an email at every step of the repair.
- **Step 5.** Tap On the receipt. The deposit now goes on the bill; you settle the rest at pickup. The repair gets a number such as R-12.
- **Step 6.** Under Settings > Till and products > Repairs, set the repair to In repair and later to Ready for pickup. The customer receives an email for each status if there is an email address and the status is set to Send email.
- **Step 7.** When the customer comes, choose Repair pickup on the POS and search by number, name or phone (R-12, name or phone). Tap the repair: the rest goes on the bill. After payment the repair is set to Picked up.
- **Own email text.** Under Emails to the customer you set the subject and the text per status, with placeholders such as Customer name and Still to pay. Without your own text, the default text is sent.
- **Errors.** If something is missing, you get for example Enter the description of the defect or The deposit is not correct: at most the price, or 0 to 100%.

**Example:** A customer brings in a phone with a broken screen. You take it in for €120 with a €40 deposit. The deposit is on the bill. The customer gets an email when the phone is Ready for pickup and pays the remaining €80 at pickup.

**Related questions:**

- Can I register repairs in the POS?
- How do I ask for a deposit for a repair?
- How do I hand over a repaired product and settle the bill?
- What does the repair feature cost?

**Keywords:** take in repair, POS repair, repair deposit, repair pickup, phone repair, repair status

**Related:** [What can you set for repairs?](../naslag/reparaties-scherm.md)

---

# How do I assign products to courses?

**Answer:** First create your courses under Settings > Point of sale and products > Courses and then, in the product window under Courses, choose which course a product is in. The first course of a product is the default course, which the item gets when it is rung up on the POS. The Courses feature costs €10 per month (excluding VAT) and only works together with Restaurant. If you already use Courses, it is free until 1 January 2027.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on Courses under Add-ons. Restaurant must be on.
- **Step 2.** Open Settings > Point of sale and products > Courses. If your shop does not have any courses yet, there are Drinks (send immediately), Starter, Main course and Dessert.
- **Step 3.** Click Add course for a new course: give a Name, choose a Colour and say Yes under Send immediately for what must go to the kitchen right away, such as drinks. Set Active to Yes.
- **Step 4.** Drag the lines into the order in which the kitchen makes them. Tap a name to change it.
- **Step 5.** Open a product. On the first page, under Courses, choose the courses the product is in. A product can be in more than one course. The first one, with the star, is the default course. With Make this the default course you put another one first.
- **Turning off.** A course that is off can no longer be chosen; products that already have it keep it.
- **On the POS and in the kitchen.** How the POS shows the bill per course and sends it on is described in [How do I send dishes to the kitchen per course from the till?](gangen-op-de-kassa.md).
- **Many at once.** In a product file you can set the courses of a product with the Courses column: the names with a | between them, such as Starter|Main course.

**Example:** The tomato soup is in the Starter course, the steak in Main course. The bar gets Drinks with Send immediately set to Yes, so that order goes out right away.

**Related questions:**

- How do I set a dish to be a starter?
- Where do I create courses?
- What is the default course of a product?
- Can I use courses without Restaurant?

**Keywords:** courses, starter main course dessert, default course, send immediately, kitchen courses, organise menu

**Related:** [What can you set for courses?](../naslag/gangen-scherm.md), [How do I send dishes to the kitchen per course from the till?](gangen-op-de-kassa.md)

---

# Can I temporarily turn off a product or mark it as sold out?

**Answer:** Yes. On the Products tab, click the three dots (Actions) behind the product and choose Deactivate; with Activate you put it back. If you only want to say that it has run out, turn on the Sold out switch on the Stocks tab: the product is then no longer shown to the customer.

**Explanation:**

- **Deactivate.** Choose Deactivate in the Actions menu of the product. The product is then no longer active. Activate puts it back.
- **Sold out.** On the Stocks tab, turn on the Sold out switch, or for several products at once: tick them in Products, click the cog and choose Sold out.
- **Automatic.** If a product has active stock, it is set to sold out automatically when the stock runs out, see [How do I track the stock of my products?](voorraad-bijhouden.md).
- **A size or variant.** In the table of variants on the product, turn off the Active column of that variant.
- **A supplement.** On the supplement, set Sold out to Yes.
- **Deleting.** If you want to get rid of a product entirely, choose Send to Trash in the same menu.

**Example:** The fresh cake has run out. You turn on the Sold out switch under Stocks. Tomorrow you turn it off again and the cake is back on the POS and in the webshop.

**Related questions:**

- How do I temporarily remove a product from the POS?
- How do I set a product to sold out?
- How do I put a deactivated product back?
- Does a sold-out product disappear from the webshop?

**Keywords:** temporarily turn off product, deactivate product, set sold out, hide product, stop selling

**Related:** [How do I track the stock of my products?](voorraad-bijhouden.md), [How do I create or change a product?](product-toevoegen-en-wijzigen.md)

---

# How do I find a product with an EAN code or barcode, and can I use the camera?

**Answer:** Give the product its barcode under EAN Code. On the POS you type a code or part of the name in the search field, or you scan it with a scanner. In the Jimani app on a phone, Sunmi or Mollie Tap handheld, you can use the device's camera under Scan with the camera.

**Explanation:**

- **Code on the product.** Open the product and enter the EAN Code under Price and barcode (at most 20 characters). With product variants, each option can get its own EAN Code. If an item has no code yet, you create one with Create barcode under Label printing.
- **Searching on the POS.** The search field on the order screen shows "Search products or EAN code". You search by the name or by the EAN code of a product.
- **A scanner.** A scanner that types like a keyboard works in the search field: the code appears there. If the cursor is not in a field, fast characters ending with Enter also count as a scan. If the cursor is in a field, the scanner simply types there.
- **Camera in the app.** In the Jimani app, the search field has the barcode button with the text "Scan an EAN or item number". If the app has a camera, that button opens the app's scanner (EAN-13, EAN-8, UPC, Code128, Code39, QR and more) and the code ends up in the search field. In an ordinary browser nothing changes, and an older app stays as it was.
- **Scanning a bill or ticket.** In the header there is a camera button for scanning a bill, and the Scan screen registers tickets.
- **Importing.** In a product file, an existing product is recognised by its EAN code.

**Example:** Your phone is the POS. You tap the barcode button, point the camera at the bottle and the bottle appears in the search field.

**Related questions:**

- How do I scan a barcode with my phone?
- Can I connect a scanner to the POS?
- How do I quickly find an item by name or code?

**Keywords:** search ean code, scan barcode, barcode scanner POS, scan with camera, find product by ean, scan with phone

**Related:** [How do I print labels with a price and barcode?](etiketten-printen.md), [What can you set for a product?](../naslag/product-venster-scherm.md)

---

# How do I sell products with a reservation?

**Answer:** Put the products you want to sell with a reservation in the POS category Reservation. In the reservation panel you then choose them at the Products step with the minus and the plus. They go on the reservation as a POS bill. A product in the POS category Hospitality can also be made selectable online when booking.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Put the products in the POS category Reservation. If there is nothing in it yet, the Products step says: Put products in the POS category Reservation to choose them here.
- **Step 2.** Open the reservation panel (new reservation or an existing one) and go to the Products step. The products appear as tiles with an image, name, price and a minus and a plus.
- **Step 3.** Tap the plus for the quantity you want. What is already on the bill you see under Already on the bill.
- **Step 4.** Save the reservation. What you chose goes on the reservation as a POS bill, with the price, VAT and table from the POS. With products only, there is a Pay button with the total.
- **Later more.** Choosing more later is a new round. What is already on the bill is never changed; you do that in the POS.
- **If it fails.** If the reservation exists but the products could not go on the POS bill, you get: The reservation exists, but the products could not be put on the POS bill.
- **Products guests choose online.** For a product in the POS category Hospitality, the product window has the Reservation page: choose Available online and the reservation types for which guests choose the product. See [What can you set for a product?](../naslag/product-venster-scherm.md).

**Example:** For a birthday reservation you choose 2 times Drinks platter. The platter is on the reservation as a POS bill; later the guest pays it.

**Related questions:**

- Can I sell products with a reservation?
- How do I let guests choose food or drinks when booking?
- Where do I put products that belong to a booking?

**Keywords:** products with reservation, drinks platter reservation, POS bill reservation, reservation category, extra order reservation

**Related:** [What can you set for a product?](../naslag/product-venster-scherm.md), [How do I track the stock of my products?](voorraad-bijhouden.md)

---

# What do the features for products, stock and discounts cost?

**Answer:** Most product features are free: product variants, product sets, supplements, discounts, label printing, stock, suppliers, price per unit, product notes and import and export. Paid are Subcategories (€5 per month), Allergens (NVWA) (€5), Purchasing with Warehouse locations (€10), Gift cards (€10), Gift voucher (€10) and Courses (€10), plus Repairs at €150 one-off. All amounts are excluding VAT. Allergens (NVWA) and Courses are free until 1 January 2027 for businesses that already use them; after that they cost the amount given.

**Explanation:**

| Feature | Price |
|---|---|
| Product variants | free |
| Product set | free |
| Supplements | free |
| Related products | free |
| Discounts (with the discount overview) | free |
| Label printing | free |
| Stock | free |
| Suppliers | free, only works with Stock |
| Price per unit | free |
| Product notes | free |
| Import and export | free |
| Subcategories | €5 per month |
| Allergens (NVWA) | €5 per month, free until 1 January 2027 if you already use it |
| Purchasing (with Warehouse locations) | €10 per month, only works with Stock |
| Gift cards | €10 per month |
| Gift voucher (with Sales and discounts) | €10 per month |
| Courses | €10 per month, only works with Restaurant; free until 1 January 2027 if you already use it |
| Repairs | €150 one-off |

- **Turning on.** You turn on a feature yourself under Settings > Add-ons. A free feature that has no screen of its own can also be turned on in the Settings list with Yes or No.
- **Same price.** The price is the same with the free POS and with a subscription.
- **More prices.** All prices in a row are in the article Which features cost money.

**Example:** A clothing shop uses product variants, stock, labels and discounts (free) and Purchasing (€10). That is €10 per month, excluding VAT.

**Related questions:**

- Which add-ons for products are free?
- What does an extra feature such as courses or gift cards cost?
- What is the monthly price for subcategories and allergens?
- Which amounts are excluding VAT?

**Keywords:** what does stock cost, subcategories price, purchasing price, gift cards cost, free product features, allergens price

**Related:** [How do I track the stock of my products?](voorraad-bijhouden.md), [How do I order from my supplier and book the delivery in?](inkoop-bestellen-bij-leverancier.md)

---

# What can I do with Jimani in my salon?

**Answer:** With Jimani you record your salon's appointments in one calendar per employee. Guests can choose a treatment, an employee and a time online, you make appointments yourself in the calendar, and you refund cancelled appointments. The appointments module has no monthly fee.

**Explanation:**

- **Setting up.** In Menu > Salon (or Salon management in the POS) you set up the Opening hours, Employees, Treatment, Products, Workstations, Treatment group and Fields. An employee has working hours, breaks and workstations; a treatment has a duration, price and VAT group.
- **Booking by guests.** In the online booking module (the widget), a guest chooses a treatment, an employee or No preference, a day and a time. See [Can customers choose an employee themselves?](klanten-kiezen-medewerker.md).
- **Booking by you.** In Menu > Reservations you choose Create reservation. See [How do I make an appointment for a customer myself?](afspraak-maken-voor-klant.md).
- **Working day to day.** In the calendar you see the day as a timeline per employee or as a list. You set a guest to Arrived and Left. In the POS with the Salon integration, Salon has an Appointments tab.
- **Cancelling and refunding.** Cancelled appointments are in Cancellations; amounts paid online you refund in the Refunds overview. See [How do I refund a cancelled appointment?](terugbetalen-na-annulering.md).
- **Afterwards.** You can have guests automatically receive an SMS or a survey. See [Does a customer get a survey after the appointment?](enquete-na-afspraak.md).
- **Costs.** The appointments module costs nothing per month. Only the paid features and the SMS credit are on the price list, see [What does Jimani cost?](../../prijzen/faq/wat-kost-jimani.md).

![Salon management with the tabs Opening hours, Employees, Treatment, Products, Workstations, Treatment group and Fields](/kennisbank/beelden/wat-kan-ik-met-jimani-in-mijn-salon-1.webp)

**Example:** A hair salon sets up three hairdressers, ten treatments and four workstations in Jimani. Customers book a haircut online with their own hairdresser; the owner sees everything in one calendar.

**Related questions:**

- Can I use Jimani for appointments in my hair salon?
- Can customers book an appointment online?
- What does the appointment system for my salon cost?
- Is there a calendar per employee?

**Keywords:** salon software, appointment system hairdresser, beauty salon calendar, book appointment online salon, salon POS, hair salon software

**Related:** [How do I set my salon's opening hours?](openingstijden-salon-instellen.md), [What can you set for an employee in the salon?](../naslag/salon-medewerkers.md), [How does the salon calendar work?](../naslag/salon-agenda.md)

---

# How do I set my salon's opening hours?

**Answer:** Go to Menu > Salon > Opening hours tab, choose the year and the month, and for each day set the switch to Open with an opening time and closing time. Every change is saved immediately. A day set to Closed cannot be booked online.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Menu > Salon (in the POS: Menu > Salon management) and open the Opening hours tab.
- **Step 2.** At the top, choose the year (this year and the two years after) and then the month.
- **Step 3.** For each day you are open, set the switch to Open and enter the time under open from and open until. A day you have not filled in yet is set to 10:00 to 21:00 and to Closed.
- **Step 4.** You do not need to save: for each day, Saved briefly appears. If it says Not saved, click Try again.
- **Quickly fill in a whole year.** Make an export (Excel icon), adjust the times in Excel, choose the file with Select Excel file and Choose a file and load it in with the import icon. The text on the screen recommends doing this for the next two years.
- **What it does.** Online, only a day on which the salon is Open can be chosen. The times Open from and Open until only apply to days that are set to Open.
- **Mind the working hours.** If a guest wants to book with a particular employee, that employee's working hours on that day must fall within the salon's opening hours. Otherwise Jimani does not offer that day for that employee.

![The Opening hours tab with year and month buttons and a switch Open or Closed per day](/kennisbank/beelden/openingstijden-salon-instellen-1.webp)

**Example:** You are open Tuesday to Saturday from 09:00 to 18:00. Set those days to Open with 09:00 and 18:00; leave Sunday and Monday on Closed.

**Related questions:**

- How do I set my salon's opening hours?
- How do I close my salon on a particular day?
- Can customers book online on a closed day?
- How do I change the opening hours per month?

**Keywords:** salon opening hours, salon closed day, set hairdresser opening hours, holiday salon closed, import opening hours

**Related:** [How does Salon management work in Jimani?](../naslag/salon-beheer-overzicht.md), [Why don't customers see any available times online?](geen-tijden-online.md)

---

# How do I add an employee and set when they work?

**Answer:** Go to Menu > Salon > Employees tab, click the button with the plus signs at the top right and choose Employee. You go through seven steps: Employee, Image, Treatments, Working hours, Breaks, Chairs and Colour and notifications. On the last step you click Save.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Under Employee, enter the First name, Last name, Phone and E-mail. All four are required. The guest only sees the first name.
- **Step 2.** Optionally add an Image (maximum 5 MB).
- **Step 3.** Under Treatments, choose everything this employee does. Without treatments the employee cannot be booked.
- **Step 4.** Under Working hours, choose the year and the month and turn on Active on every day the employee works. Adjust Working from and Work on if necessary; a new day is set to 10:00 to 21:00 and to Active off. Or load in an Excel file with Select Excel file, Choose a file and Upload.
- **Step 5.** Under Breaks, record the regular breaks, see [How do I record breaks for an employee?](pauzes-medewerker.md).
- **Step 6.** Under Chairs, choose the Workstations the employee works at. If one is missing, you create a workstation with the plus under Create a new table.
- **Step 7.** Under Colour and notifications, choose the Color for the calendar and check Show in widget and Active. Click Save.
- **Month by month.** The working hours of the month you are looking at are saved. Click Save before you go to another month; then open the employee again for the next month.
- **What it does.** Guests can only book online on days on which the employee has working hours with Active on, within the salon's opening hours.

![The Employees tab with the list of employees and the plus button at the top right](/kennisbank/beelden/medewerker-toevoegen-en-werktijden-1.webp)

**Example:** Anouk works Tuesday to Friday from 09:00 to 17:00. In the month you set those days to Active with 09:00 and 17:00, leave the other days off and click Save.

**Related questions:**

- How do I add a hairdresser or beautician?
- How do I set an employee's working hours?
- Which steps do I have to go through for a new employee?
- How do I link treatments to an employee?

**Keywords:** add employee salon, hairdresser working hours, salon work schedule, new stylist, employee calendar, import working hours

**Related:** [What can you set for an employee in the salon?](../naslag/salon-medewerkers.md), [How do I put someone's holiday or days off in the calendar?](vakantie-en-vrije-dagen-medewerker.md), [How do I create a treatment?](behandeling-aanmaken.md)

---

# How do I record breaks for an employee?

**Answer:** Open the employee and go to the Breaks step. Give the break a name, enter a start and end time, tick the weekdays and click Save. Then, on the last step, click Save for the employee. A guest cannot book online during a break.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Menu > Salon > Employees tab and click the employee (or create a new one).
- **Step 2.** Go to the Breaks step with Next.
- **Step 3.** Under Name of the break, enter a name for yourself, for example Lunch.
- **Step 4.** Under Break until, enter the Start time and End time. With minus and plus you go an hour back or forward.
- **Step 5.** Tick the days on which the break recurs every week (Monday to Sunday).
- **Step 6.** Click Save: the break now appears under Saved breaks. Then, on the last step, click Save for the employee; only then is the break stored.
- **Removing.** In the Saved breaks list, click the bin icon behind the break and save the employee.
- **Errors.** If the name is missing, you get Break name is missing. If the times are empty, Break time is missing. If you have not ticked a day, Selection box is not selected.

**Example:** A lunch break from 12:30 to 13:15 on Monday, Tuesday, Thursday and Friday: one break with those four days ticked.

**Related questions:**

- How do I set a lunch break for an employee?
- Can customers book online during a break?
- How do I set regular breaks on certain weekdays?
- Where do I find an employee's breaks?

**Keywords:** hairdresser break, lunch break salon employee, set breaks calendar, no appointments during break, regular break

**Related:** [How does the Breaks step work for an employee?](../naslag/salon-pauzes.md), [How do I add an employee and set when they work?](medewerker-toevoegen-en-werktijden.md)

---

# How do I put someone's holiday or days off in the calendar?

**Answer:** Open the employee, go to the Working hours step and turn off Active on the days that person is off. Then click Save. On those days guests cannot book online with that employee. Existing appointments stay.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Menu > Salon > Employees tab and click the employee.
- **Step 2.** Go to the Working hours step with Next and choose the year and the month of the holiday.
- **Step 3.** For each day off, untick Active.
- **Step 4.** Go to the last step and click Save. If the holiday falls in two months, first save the first month, open the employee again and do the second month.
- **Existing appointments.** Jimani does not move or cancel appointments that are already there. Look them up in the calendar and move or cancel them yourself, see [How do I change or reschedule an appointment?](afspraak-wijzigen-of-verzetten.md).
- **The whole salon closed.** Set the day in Opening hours to Closed.

**Example:** Sanne is on holiday from 14 to 25 July. In the working hours for July you turn off Active for all days from 14 to 25 July.

**Related questions:**

- How do I put an employee's holiday in the calendar?
- How do I make sure customers cannot book with someone who is off?
- Do existing appointments stay when an employee takes time off?
- How do I report a day off for an employee?

**Keywords:** employee holiday salon, hairdresser day off, leave calendar, mark employee sick, unavailable calendar

**Related:** [How do I add an employee and set when they work?](medewerker-toevoegen-en-werktijden.md), [What can you set for an employee in the salon?](../naslag/salon-medewerkers.md)

---

# How do I create a treatment?

**Answer:** Go to Menu > Salon > Treatment tab, click the button with the plus signs at the top right and choose Treatment. You give the treatment a name, colour, duration and price, choose the employees and click Save. Set Show in widget to Yes if guests may book it online.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Under Treatment, enter the Name (maximum 50 characters) and optionally a Description and Image. The guest sees the name and description.
- **Step 2.** Under Colour and duration, choose the Color and the Duration (default 1 hour, in steps of 5 minutes). Set Show in widget to Yes to let the treatment be booked online and choose whether Show end time should be on.
- **Step 3.** Under Employees, choose who does the treatment. Without an employee it cannot be booked online.
- **Step 4.** Under For whom, choose the Treatment group, for example women or men.
- **Step 5.** Under Price, enter the amount (per person, including VAT) and choose the VAT group. Optionally choose additional products that go with it.
- **Step 6.** Click Save.
- **What it does.** The duration determines how long the appointment is and therefore the end time; the times online are shown per quarter of an hour. The price and VAT go on the appointment and the invoice.

![The Treatment tab with the list of treatments and the columns Name, Employee, Treatment group, Price, Active and Show in widget](/kennisbank/beelden/behandeling-aanmaken-1.webp)

**Example:** Men's haircut: duration 30 minutes, price €28 including VAT, VAT group high, treatment group Men, linked to two hairdressers, Show in widget set to Yes.

**Related questions:**

- How do I add a new treatment, such as a haircut or a massage?
- How do I set the duration and price of a treatment?
- How do I make sure customers can book a treatment online?
- Which employees can I link to a treatment?

**Keywords:** add treatment salon, set treatment duration, set haircut price, book treatment online, create treatment

**Related:** [What can you set for a treatment in the salon?](../naslag/salon-behandelingen.md), [How do I sell extra products with a treatment?](extra-producten-bij-behandeling.md), [What are workstations and treatment groups and do I need them?](werkstations-en-behandelgroepen.md)

---

# What are workstations and treatment groups and do I need them?

**Answer:** A workstation is a workplace or chair; every appointment gets one so that two guests are not in the same place. A treatment group is a target group such as women, men or children. You need workstations; you only use treatment groups if you want to divide your treatments.

**Explanation:**

- **Creating workstations.** Go to Menu > Salon > Workstations tab, click the button with the plus signs at the top right and choose Workstations. Under Create workstations, choose how many you need (default 20) and whether they have Can be reserved via widget (default Yes). Click Save.
- **Linking to employees.** Open the employee and, at the Chairs step, choose the Workstations that person works at. Online, a guest only gets a chair that belongs to the chosen employee and is set to Yes under Can be reserved via widget.
- **Changing the name.** Change the name in the list and click Save; with Active you temporarily turn off a chair.
- **Creating treatment groups.** On the Treatment group tab, choose the plus and enter for example Women under Treatment group name. Then choose the group on the treatment in the For whom step.
- **Do you need them?** Without a workstation you cannot save an appointment in the dashboard (No chair selected!). If you have only one treatment group, the guest sees no choice when booking.

**Example:** A salon with four chairs creates four workstations and links two chairs to each hairdresser. Treatment groups Women and Men split the offering.

**Related questions:**

- What is a workstation in my salon?
- Do I need treatment groups?
- How do I prevent two customers from being in the same chair?
- What is the difference between a workstation and a treatment group?

**Keywords:** workstation salon, hairdresser chair, treatment group, target group women men children, create chairs

**Related:** [What can you set for workstations and treatment groups?](../naslag/salon-werkstations-en-behandelgroepen.md), [How do I create a treatment?](behandeling-aanmaken.md)

---

# How do I sell extra products with a treatment?

**Answer:** On the Products tab, create a product, for example a shampoo, and link it in the last step of the treatment. When the appointment is made, the guest or you can choose the product as well. The price includes VAT.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Menu > Salon > Products tab, click the button with the plus signs at the top right and choose Products.
- **Step 2.** In the first step, choose the type: an extra product (on the screen: Choose additional products) and click Next.
- **Step 3.** Enter the Name and Description. The guest sees both when booking.
- **Step 4.** Under Price, enter the amount including VAT and choose the VAT and the VAT group. Set Show in widget to Yes if guests can choose the product online. Click Save.
- **Step 5.** Open the treatment and, in the last step under Price, choose the products that go with it.
- **Searching.** On the Products tab you find a product with Search and filter with Product types.
- **Changing or removing.** Click a product to change it. The actions menu has Deactivate, Create a Copy and Send to Trash.

**Example:** A hair salon offers a care product of €14.50 with every haircut. The guest ticks it when booking and the amount goes on the appointment.

**Related questions:**

- How do I sell a shampoo with a treatment?
- Can a customer choose a product as well when booking?
- Where do I create an extra product for the salon?
- Is the product price including VAT?

**Keywords:** extra products salon, upselling hairdresser, sell shampoo with appointment, upsell treatment, product with treatment

**Related:** [What can you set for the salon's products?](../naslag/salon-producten.md), [How do I create a treatment?](behandeling-aanmaken.md)

---

# How do I ask a customer for extra details when booking?

**Answer:** On the Fields tab, create an extra field, for example a question about an allergy. You choose which treatments the field belongs to, the type of answer and whether it is required. The guest answers the question when booking; you see the answer under Extra information on the appointment.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Menu > Salon > Fields tab, click the button with the plus signs at the top right and choose Fields.
- **Step 2.** Under Extra field, choose the treatments for which you ask the question and click Next.
- **Step 3.** Under Field type, choose the Type, for example Text box, Combo list or Date. For Combo list, Radio button and Selection box multiple choices, enter the answers under Options, one per line.
- **Step 4.** Under Name and description, enter the Name (the question as the guest sees it) and optionally a Description.
- **Step 5.** Under Settings, choose whether the field is Required and whether it appears in the List View (the Memo column). Show in widget is set to Yes by default, and so is Show field name. Enter the Label (the tag) and click Save.
- **Follow-up question.** Set Do you want to make this field dynamic? to Yes to show a question only for a certain answer to another field.

**Example:** For colouring treatments you ask the required question Do you have an allergy to hair dye? as a Radio button with the options Yes and No.

**Related questions:**

- How do I ask customers about an allergy when booking?
- Can I add an extra question to the booking form?
- Where do I see the answer the customer filled in?
- Can I make a question required for certain treatments?

**Keywords:** extra question booking salon, intake form hairdresser, ask about allergy at appointment, required field reservation, custom fields salon

**Related:** [What can you set for the salon's extra fields?](../naslag/salon-velden.md)

---

# Can customers choose an employee themselves when booking?

**Answer:** Yes. In the online booking module, a guest first chooses the treatment and then an employee who does that treatment, or No preference. No preference is the default. You can also turn the choice off, in which case the guest always gets No preference.

**Explanation:**

- **Linking an employee.** An employee only appears for a treatment if you have ticked it under Treatments for the employee (or under Employee in the treatment).
- **Times.** The guest only sees times when the chosen employee works (Working hours with Active on), is free and is not on a break.
- **No preference.** Jimani then shows the times when at least one employee who does the treatment is free.
- **Turning the choice on or off.** Go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Widget, open your widget, choose the View tab and find the Salon block. Set Let guest choose practitioner to No: the guest then does not choose an employee and the appointment goes to whoever is free.
- **Also visible.** In the same block you can turn Show duration, Show price and Group by category on or off.

**Example:** A customer books a haircut with Anouk and only sees Anouk's free times. Another customer leaves No preference selected and sees every time when one of the hairdressers is free.

**Related questions:**

- Can a customer choose who they book an appointment with?
- How do I set it so customers cannot choose an employee?
- What does no preference mean when booking?
- Can I turn off the employee choice online?

**Keywords:** choose employee online booking, choose hairdresser, no preference salon, choose specialist, choose practitioner, online hairdresser appointment

**Related:** [Why don't customers see any available times online?](geen-tijden-online.md), [How do I add an employee and set when they work?](medewerker-toevoegen-en-werktijden.md)

---

# Why don't customers see any available times online?

**Answer:** Usually one of these things is not set up: the salon is set to Closed that day, the employee has no working hours with Active on, the treatment is not online or has no employee, or no workstation is free. Go through the list below.

**Explanation:**

- **Opening hours.** If the day is set to Closed, it cannot be chosen online. Check the Opening hours tab for that month.
- **Working hours.** If the employee has no working hours with Active on that day (new days are set to Active off), there are no times. See [How do I add an employee and set when they work?](medewerker-toevoegen-en-werktijden.md).
- **Within the opening hours.** If the guest chooses a particular employee, the working hours of that day must fall entirely within the salon's opening hours. If someone works until 21:00 and the salon closes at 18:00, that day is not offered for that employee.
- **Treatment.** The treatment must be active, have Show in widget set to Yes, have a duration and be linked to an employee.
- **Break or another appointment.** A time that touches a break or an existing appointment is not offered. The treatment must also fit within the working hours: a one-hour treatment does not fit in the last 30 minutes.
- **Workstation.** A workstation must be free that belongs to the employee and has Can be reserved via widget set to Yes. Without a chair the guest cannot continue booking.
- **Today.** For today, the first free time starts at the next quarter of an hour. There are no times in the past.
- **Booking ahead.** The guest can book the next three months, up to the end of the third month.
- **Holiday.** If the employee has a recorded holiday that day, the day cannot be chosen for that employee.

**Example:** A customer sees no times for Saturday. Saturday is set to Closed under Opening hours. If you set it to Open, the times appear as soon as the employee also has working hours with Active on.

**Related questions:**

- Why do customers not see free times to book online?
- My online calendar is empty, what is wrong?
- Why can nobody book an appointment with my employee?
- What do I check if online booking does not work?

**Keywords:** no times available online, cannot book appointment, salon widget no times, hairdresser online booking problem, times do not appear

**Related:** [How do I set my salon's opening hours?](openingstijden-salon-instellen.md), [How do I record breaks for an employee?](pauzes-medewerker.md), [Can customers choose an employee themselves when booking?](klanten-kiezen-medewerker.md)

---

# How do I make an appointment for a customer myself?

**Answer:** Go to Menu > Reservations and click Create reservation. Choose the treatment, the day and time, the employee and a workstation, fill in the guest and click Save. If the guest pays right away, use the banknote or the bank card under the form.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Menu > Reservations (in the POS: Menu > Salon) and click Create reservation at the top right.
- **Step 2.** Choose the Treatment group and then the Treatment.
- **Step 3.** Under Time, choose the day (highlighted days can be booked) and under From the start time, or click Available times and choose a free time. The end time (Until) follows from the duration.
- **Step 4.** Choose the Employees who are free at that moment and, under Workstations, choose a chair with the pencil.
- **Step 5.** Under Search, find the guest by email address or phone number, or fill in the guest details. If the customer is a walk-in, set Passer-by (no guest details) to Yes.
- **Step 6.** If needed, choose Products and fill in Extra information and an Internal memo.
- **Step 7.** Check Your invoice and click Save. The appointment gets the status Open. If the guest pays now, click the banknote button (cash) or the bank card symbol (other) and confirm with Pay.
- **Guest is already here.** Set Check in now to Yes: the day and time then become now and the appointment is set to Arrived. That choice only appears if it has been turned on for your salon.
- **Confirmation.** If the guest has an email address and a confirmation email has been set up for the salon (Settings > Communication > Email), the guest receives a confirmation with a PDF.

![The Add reservation screen with the fields Treatment group, Treatment, Time, Employees and Workstations](/kennisbank/beelden/afspraak-maken-voor-klant-1.webp)

**Example:** A customer phones for a colouring treatment on Friday at 14:00. You choose Treatment group Women, Treatment Colouring, Friday, 14:00, a free hairdresser and chair, find her by phone number and click Save.

**Related questions:**

- How do I schedule an appointment when a customer calls or walks in?
- Can the customer pay right away when I make the appointment?
- How do I choose the employee for a manual appointment?
- Where do I make a new appointment in the calendar?

**Keywords:** make appointment hairdresser, create reservation salon, schedule customer, book in appointment, manual appointment, walk-in appointment

**Related:** [How does the Add reservation screen work in the salon?](../naslag/salon-afspraak-maken.md), [How do I change or reschedule an appointment?](afspraak-wijzigen-of-verzetten.md), [How do I schedule a follow-up appointment?](vervolgafspraak-plannen.md)

---

# How do I see which appointments there are?

**Answer:** Go to Menu > Reservations. The Overview tab shows the day as a timeline per employee. The tabs List view, Weekly list, Last 100 reservations and Upcoming reservations show lists, and Totals counts per treatment.

**Explanation:**

- **Choosing a day.** At the top, choose the day with the date picker.
- **Overview.** Per employee, the appointments appear as blocks, with breaks in grey. With Select an employee you look at one person. Click a block to open the appointment.
- **List view.** The appointments of the chosen day in a list with, among other things, Reservation status, Treatment, Employees, Name, Workstations, Arrival time, Payment and Memo. You turn columns on or off with the column selector.
- **Weekly list.** The whole week; **Last 100 reservations.** The most recently made appointments; **Upcoming reservations.** Choose the month under Reservation for the month: and browse with Back and Next.
- **Totals.** Day totals and Week totals with the number of appointments per treatment.
- **Filtering and searching.** Choose a status or employee and type a name under Search by:. This requires the Filters permission.
- **Printing and exporting.** With Print you print the list and with the Excel icon you download it. This requires the Print and Export permissions (the owner always has them).

![The salon calendar with the tabs Overview, List view, Weekly list, Last 100 reservations, Upcoming reservations and Totals](/kennisbank/beelden/afspraken-bekijken-1.webp)

**Example:** You want tomorrow's schedule on paper: choose tomorrow, go to List view and click Print.

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see today's appointments?
- Can I view the calendar per employee?
- How do I see next week's appointments?
- Where do I see how many appointments there are per treatment?

**Keywords:** view appointments salon, calendar per day, weekly list appointments, print appointments, hairdresser schedule, export appointments

**Related:** [How does the salon calendar work?](../naslag/salon-agenda.md)

---

# How do I set a customer to Arrived or Left?

**Answer:** Click the appointment in the calendar. In the Reservation information window, the main button at the bottom right is Arrived as long as the guest is not there, and then Left. Both first ask for confirmation. You set a no-show with the Status drop-down in the full appointment screen.

**Explanation:**

- **Arrived.** Click the appointment and choose Arrived. After that you can no longer cancel the appointment in this window.
- **Left.** Later, click Left. The end time of the appointment (and of the workstation) then becomes the current time, so the chair is immediately free for the next guest.
- **Onwards.** After Left, the More menu has the button Schedule a new appointment for a follow-up appointment.
- **No-show.** Click the appointment, choose Open reservation and under Status choose the status No-show. If an SMS has been set up for no-shows, it is sent to the guest.
- **After Left.** If an SMS or a survey has been set up for after the visit, it is sent. See [Does a customer get a survey after the appointment?](enquete-na-afspraak.md).
- **Checking in directly.** If you make an appointment for a guest who is already there, set Check in now to Yes when making it.

**Example:** At 10:03 your customer walks in: open the appointment, click Arrived and confirm. Afterwards you click Left.

**Related questions:**

- How do I indicate that a customer has arrived?
- How do I set an appointment to left?
- How do I mark a customer as a no-show?
- Why does Jimani ask for confirmation for arrived?

**Keywords:** set customer arrived, guest left, register no show, appointment status, complete appointment, check in salon

**Related:** [How does the screen for viewing and changing a salon appointment work?](../naslag/salon-afspraak-wijzigen.md), [How do I schedule a follow-up appointment?](vervolgafspraak-plannen.md)

---

# How do I schedule a follow-up appointment?

**Answer:** Set the appointment to Left, open it and choose More > Schedule a new appointment. In the Make a new appointment window, you choose the Time slot (1 to 6 days or 1 to 12 weeks later) and the employee, and continue to the calendar to choose a free time. Once made, you find it again with Next appointment.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** In the calendar, click the appointment of the guest who is finished (status Left).
- **Step 2.** Choose More > Schedule a new appointment.
- **Step 3.** Under Time slot, choose how many days or weeks later the new appointment should be, and under Select an employee who does the treatment.
- **Step 4.** Click the button with the calendar and plus. Jimani opens the calendar to make the new appointment.
- **Finding it again.** The original appointment now has the button Next appointment, which goes to the new appointment.
- **Without Left.** The button Schedule a new appointment only appears on an appointment with the status Left. Otherwise you simply make a new appointment with Create reservation.

**Example:** After a colouring treatment the customer wants to come back in six weeks: choose 6 weeks under Time slot and the same hairdresser.

**Related questions:**

- How do I schedule a new appointment right after the visit?
- Can I schedule an appointment a few weeks ahead for the same customer?
- Where do I find a customer's next appointment?
- How do I make a repeat appointment?

**Keywords:** follow-up appointment salon, schedule next appointment, returning customer, repeat appointment, appointment in six weeks

**Related:** [How do I set a customer to Arrived or Left?](aangekomen-vertrokken-no-show.md), [How do I make an appointment for a customer myself?](afspraak-maken-voor-klant.md)

---

# How do I change or reschedule an appointment?

**Answer:** Click the appointment in the calendar, choose Open reservation and change the treatment, time, employee or workstation. Then click Save. Jimani checks whether the employee and the workstation are free at that time.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** In Menu > Reservations, click the appointment. The Reservation information window opens.
- **Step 2.** Click Open reservation. The full screen opens.
- **Step 3.** Change what is needed: Treatment group and Treatment, Time (the day), From (the time, choose a free time via Available times), Employees and Workstations. You can also change Language, Reservation name, Products and the Internal memo.
- **Step 4.** Click Save.
- **Is the time taken?** If the employee already has an appointment at that time, you get This employee already has an appointment at this time. If the workstation is taken, you get Chair not available!. Then choose another time or chair.
- **Attachment.** On the Attachment(s) tab you add a file with the plus: choose the Subject, a Description and the file.
- **No longer changeable.** For an appointment set to Left and for a cancelled appointment, Save is missing; you can no longer change those.

**Example:** The customer wants Thursday at 15:00 instead of 14:00: open the appointment, click From, choose 15:00 in Available times and click Save.

**Related questions:**

- How do I reschedule an appointment to another time?
- Can I change the employee of an appointment?
- How do I change the treatment of a booked appointment?
- Does Jimani check whether the employee is free when rescheduling?

**Keywords:** reschedule appointment, change appointment hairdresser, different time appointment, switch employee appointment, adjust appointment

**Related:** [How does the screen for viewing and changing a salon appointment work?](../naslag/salon-afspraak-wijzigen.md), [How do I cancel an appointment and what does the customer receive?](afspraak-annuleren.md)

---

# How do I cancel an appointment and what does the customer receive?

**Answer:** Click the appointment in the calendar and choose Cancel. Confirm the question Cancel your reservation? and give a reason. The appointment then appears under Cancellations. The guest receives a cancellation email if you have set one up. You refund afterwards in the Refunds overview.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** In Menu > Reservations, click the appointment and choose Cancel at the bottom left.
- **Step 2.** Answer Are you sure you want to cancel the reservation? with Yes and enter the reason under Reason for cancellation.
- **Combination.** If the appointment belongs to a combination, Jimani asks whether you want to cancel only this part or the whole combination.
- **What Jimani does.** The appointment gets the reason, your name and the moment. A bill that was already made for the appointment in the POS is returned with it.
- **Email and SMS.** If the guest has an email address and you have set up a cancellation email for the salon, the guest receives it once. If an SMS has been set up for cancelling, that is sent too.
- **No longer possible.** If the guest has already Arrived or Left, Cancel is off in Reservation information with the explanation Guest is already inside; can no longer be cancelled or Completed; can no longer be cancelled.
- **Finding it again.** All cancellations of the last six months are in Menu > Cancellations, see [How does the salon's Cancellations overview work?](../naslag/salon-annuleringen.md).

**Example:** The customer phones to say she is ill. Open the appointment, click Cancel, confirm and enter Ill. The guest receives her cancellation email.

**Related questions:**

- How do I cancel a customer's appointment?
- Does the customer get an email when I cancel the appointment?
- Where do I find cancelled appointments?
- Do I have to give a reason when cancelling?

**Keywords:** cancel appointment salon, customer cancels, call off appointment, cancellation email, reason for cancellation

**Related:** [How do I refund a cancelled appointment?](terugbetalen-na-annulering.md), [How does the salon's Cancellations overview work?](../naslag/salon-annuleringen.md)

---

# How do I refund a cancelled appointment?

**Answer:** First cancel the appointment. Then go to Menu > Refunds overview, find the appointment and click the red button. The full amount is already filled in; you can also enter a lower amount. Jimani refunds it via Mollie, provided your Balance is sufficient.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Cancel the appointment, see [How do I cancel an appointment and what does the customer receive?](afspraak-annuleren.md).
- **Step 2.** Open Menu > Refunds overview. At the top is the Balance you have with Mollie.
- **Step 3.** Find the appointment in the list (cancelled appointments of the last six months). For a paid appointment, the Status column has two buttons.
- **Step 4.** Click the red button (Refund), check or adjust the amount and confirm. The amount may not be higher than what the guest paid and not higher than your Balance.
- **Step 5.** The Status column then shows the state of the refund, for example pending.
- **Reversing.** If the refund is still pending, the orange button (Cancel refund) takes it back after the question Are you sure?.
- **No online payment.** If no online payment was found for the appointment (for example cash), Jimani only sets the status to paid; you return the money yourself.

**Example:** A guest paid a €20 deposit online and cancels. Open the Refunds overview, click the red button next to her appointment, leave €20.00 and confirm.

**Related questions:**

- How do I give a customer their money back after a cancelled appointment?
- Can I refund only part of the amount?
- Why does refunding not work?
- Where is the refunds overview?

**Keywords:** refund salon, refund deposit, cancellation refund, refund appointment, money back customer, mollie refund

**Related:** [How does the salon's Refunds overview work?](../naslag/salon-terugbetaaloverzicht.md), [How do I cancel an appointment and what does the customer receive?](afspraak-annuleren.md)

---

# How do I resend an appointment confirmation to the customer?

**Answer:** Click the appointment in the calendar, choose More > Send email and confirm the question. The confirmation is sent again to the guest's email address. That only works if the guest has an email address, the appointment has not been cancelled and a confirmation email has been set up for the salon.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** In Menu > Reservations, click the appointment.
- **Step 2.** Choose More > Send email. You see Resend the confirmation to the guest? with the address.
- **Step 3.** Confirm with Send email. On success you get The email has been sent.
- **Printing.** If the confirmation has already been made, Print (PDF) opens it as a PDF.
- **Does it not work?** A cancelled appointment no longer receives a confirmation. If the guest has no email address, it says This guest has no email address. If no email has been set up, it says There is no confirmation email set up for the salon; create one under Settings > Communication > Email. If sending fails, it says The email was not sent.

**Example:** The customer phones to say she has not received the confirmation. Open the appointment, choose Send email and confirm.

**Related questions:**

- The customer did not receive the confirmation email, how do I resend it?
- Why can't I resend the confirmation?
- How do I email the appointment confirmation once more?
- When does resending the confirmation not work?

**Keywords:** resend confirmation, appointment email not received, hairdresser confirmation email, pdf appointment confirmation

**Related:** [How does the screen for viewing and changing a salon appointment work?](../naslag/salon-afspraak-wijzigen.md)

---

# Does a customer get a survey after the appointment?

**Answer:** Yes, if you have turned on the Survey. Jimani then automatically schedules a survey email for the guest shortly after the appointment has ended. In Settings > Communication you set what is asked and how many hours after the visit the email is sent.

**Explanation:**

- **Turning on.** Go to Settings > Communication > Survey. Survey is a paid feature of €5 per month (excl. VAT), see [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md).
- **When.** Every minute Jimani looks at appointments that ended in the last ten minutes (the end time). If the appointment is not cancelled and a guest is linked to it, one survey email is scheduled. An email is never sent twice per appointment.
- **What time.** The email is sent at the moment you set for the Survey type (number of hours after the visit). If that is set to 0, it goes out after about five minutes.
- **Only with a survey.** There must be a survey for the salon and your business must be allowed to send surveys; otherwise nothing happens.
- **SMS.** If you set a guest to Left and an SMS has been set up for the survey moment, that is sent too. See [Can I automatically send guests a text message, for example a reminder?](../../communicatie/faq/automatische-sms.md).
- **The questions themselves.** How to write the survey and view the answers is in the Communication section.

**Example:** An appointment ends at 15:30. If the survey email is set to 2 hours after the visit, it goes to the guest around 17:30.

**Related questions:**

- Can I send customers a questionnaire after their visit?
- How do I set up a satisfaction survey?
- How many hours after the visit is the survey email sent?
- Where do I change the survey questions?

**Keywords:** survey after appointment, customer feedback salon, review questions after visit, hairdresser satisfaction, survey SMS

**Related:** [Can I automatically send guests a text message, for example a reminder?](../../communicatie/faq/automatische-sms.md), [How do I set a customer to Arrived or Left?](aangekomen-vertrokken-no-show.md)

---

# How do I delete or copy an employee, treatment or product, and get it back?

**Answer:** In the list, click Actions on the line. There you find Deactivate (or Activate), Create a Copy and Send to Trash. Send to Trash does not delete anything permanently: with Show only deleted items set to Yes you find it again and turn it back on with Activate.

**Explanation:**

- **Temporarily turning off.** Choose Deactivate, or untick Active in the list. The item remains but does not count.
- **Copying.** Choose Create a Copy and confirm the question Do you want to make a copy of this item?. You then see Copy created successfully.
- **Deleting.** Choose Send to Trash, or open the item and click Delete. Confirm the question; then it says Successfully removed!. The item is also set to inactive.
- **Restoring.** At the top right of Salon management, set Show only deleted items to Yes, find the item and choose Activate.
- **Which parts.** This works for employees, treatments and products; workstations, treatment groups and fields have their own Active tick and Delete in their window.

**Example:** A hairdresser leaves the salon: put her away via Actions > Send to Trash. If she returns, you set Show only deleted items to Yes and choose Activate.

**Related questions:**

- How do I delete an employee or treatment?
- Can I restore a deleted treatment?
- How do I copy a treatment?
- How do I temporarily turn off an employee?

**Keywords:** delete employee salon, copy treatment, restore from trash, deactivate item, recover deleted

**Related:** [How does Salon management work in Jimani?](../naslag/salon-beheer-overzicht.md)

---

# How does Salon management work in Jimani?

**Answer:** In Salon management you set up your salon: opening hours, employees, treatments, products, workstations, treatment groups and extra fields. Each part has its own tab with a list, and with the button at the top right you add a new item.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Salon (in a salon business) or Menu > Salon management (in the POS with the Salon integration on) (`/Salon`)

**Explanation:** At the top are seven tabs: Opening hours, Employees, Treatment, Products, Workstations, Treatment group and Fields. Click a line in a list to open and change that item. At the top right is a button with several plus signs: it opens the Salon window with six tiles (Employee, Treatment, Products, Workstations, Treatment group and Fields), so that you can create something new right away, even if you are on another tab. Each screen is described in its own article, see Related.

![Salon management with the seven tabs Opening hours, Employees, Treatment, Products, Workstations, Treatment group and Fields and at the top right the button with the plus signs](/kennisbank/beelden/salon-beheer-overzicht-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Show only deleted items | Yes/No switch at the top right. On Yes, every list shows only items that are in the trash. | When you have deleted something by accident and want to restore it. | You restore an item with Activate in the action menu of the line. |
| Opening hours | Tab with your salon's opening hours per day. | At the start and every new year. | Without opening hours, a guest cannot book online. |
| Employees | Tab with your employees: Image, Name, E-mail, Phone, Linked to, Active, Show in widget and Actions. | To add or change employees. | See the article about employees. |
| Treatment | Tab with your treatments: Image, Name, Employee, Treatment group, Price, Active, Show in widget and Actions. | To set up treatments with duration and price. | See the article about treatments. |
| Products | Tab with the extra products and transaction costs, with a search field (Search) and a drop-down Product types to filter. | For upselling with a treatment. | See the article about products. |
| Workstations | Tab with your workplaces (chairs). You can change the name, Can be reserved via widget and Active directly in the list and save with Save. | When you add workplaces or take a chair out of rotation temporarily. | See the article about workstations and treatment groups. |
| Treatment group | Tab with the groups a treatment is meant for, such as women, men or children. You change Name and Active directly in the list. | When you want to divide treatments by target group. | See the article about workstations and treatment groups. |
| Fields | Tab with extra questions that a guest answers when booking. | For example for an allergy or a preference. | See the article about fields. |
| Actions | Button per line with the action menu: Deactivate or Activate, Create a Copy and Send to Trash. | To temporarily turn off, duplicate or delete an item. | Send to Trash does not delete anything permanently; the item is then still under Show only deleted items. After Create a Copy there is a confirmation and the message Copy created successfully. |
| Here you can create all reservation options and link products and extra fields. Think of breakfast, lunch or dinner, but also children's parties, various party and celebration packages or other group reservations. | This is the help text above the list of employees. | It is there for information only. | The text was taken over from the restaurant screen; for a salon it is about employees. |
| The customer first chooses the desired treatment when booking, such as "Men's haircut", "Manicure" or "Relaxation massage". Then link the treatment to a time slot, duration, price and the relevant employees. | Help text above the list of treatments. It says that a guest first chooses the treatment and that you link duration, price and employees to it. | Read this if you are unsure how treatments work. | - |
| Indicate whether the field must be filled in during the reservation. | Help text above the list of products. | It is there for information only. | The text actually belongs to Fields; for Products it has no function. |
| Add workstations and link them to an Employee. | Help text above the list of workstations and also above the list of fields. | It is there for information only. | Above Fields the text was taken over and does not fit that list. |
| Add treatment group. If there is more than one choice, it will be visible during booking. | Help text above the list of treatment groups. If you have only one treatment group, the guest sees no choice. | Read this if the guest does not see the choice. | - |

**Opening hours per day:** On the Opening hours tab, at the top you choose the year (this year and the two years after) and the month. Per day there are an opening time, a closing time and a switch Open or Closed. A day you have not filled in yet is set to 10:00 to 21:00 and to Closed. The times save themselves, per day; there is no save button. The text on the screen reads: Enter the opening hours per day here. Please note: the times 'open from' and 'open until' are only used when the business is marked as open. To quickly fill in the opening hours for the next two years, we recommend making an export. This way the data can easily and efficiently be adjusted in Excel. When the changes have been made, click 'Import'. With Select Excel file and Choose a file you choose the Excel file and with the import icon you load it in; the Excel icon next to it makes the export.

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Failed to generate the Excel file. | The export of the opening hours to Excel failed. | Try again. If it fails again, try once more later. |
| Saved | A changed day has been stored. It appears briefly next to the day. | Nothing. |
| Not saved | A day has not been stored, for example because of an invalid time. A button Try again appears. | Correct the time and try again. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I set up my salon?
- Which parts does Salon management have?
- How do I quickly add something new in Salon management?
- Where do I find employees, products and workstations?

**Keywords:** salon management, set up salon, salon opening hours, salon tabs, restore deleted items, copy treatment

**Related:** [How do I set my salon's opening hours?](../faq/openingstijden-salon-instellen.md), [How do I add an employee and set when they work?](../faq/medewerker-toevoegen-en-werktijden.md), [How do I create a treatment?](../faq/behandeling-aanmaken.md)

---

# What can you set for an employee in the salon?

**Answer:** For an employee you record who they are, which treatments they do, when they work, which breaks there are and which workstations they work at. You do that in the Employees window with seven steps. You save on the last step.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Salon > Employees tab > click an employee, or at the top right the button with the plus signs and then the tile Employee (`/Salon`)

**Explanation:** The window is called Employees and has seven steps: Employee, Image, Treatments, Working hours, Breaks, Chairs and Colour and notifications. You go through them with Next and Previous. An existing employee opens with the title Employees and their first name, and also has the button Delete at the bottom left. The Breaks step is described in the article about breaks. The workstations and the treatments you choose here determine where and for which treatments someone can be booked online.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| First name | The employee's name, maximum 25 characters. Required. Help text: This is visible when booking. | Always. | A guest sees this name when booking. |
| Last name | Maximum 25 characters. Required. Help text: This is for internal use only. | Always. | Only for you, not for the guest. |
| Phone | The employee's phone number, maximum 50 characters. Required. Help text: This is for internal use only. | Always. | - |
| E-mail | The employee's email address, maximum 200 characters. Required. Help text: This is for internal use only. | Always. | - |
| Image | A photo of the employee (maximum 5 MB). You see a preview; with the bin icon you remove the photo again. | When you want a photo with the employee. | The photo also appears in the list of employees. |
| Treatments | Choose here all treatments this employee does. You can choose more than one. | Always; without treatments an employee cannot be booked. | If the treatment is not there yet, use the plus under Create the new Treatments. |
| Working hours | Table per month with the days on which the employee works. Columns: Working hours, Working date, Working from, Work on and Active. Turn Active on on the days the employee works. | For every employee, every year again. | A day with Active off cannot be booked. A new day is set by default to 10:00 to 21:00 and Active off. |
| Select Excel file | At the top of the working hours: choose an Excel file to load in working hours in bulk. | To fill in a whole year at once. | - |
| Choose a file | Opens the file selector for the Excel file. | After Select Excel file. | - |
| Upload | Loads in the chosen Excel file. | When you have chosen the file. | - |
| Workstations | Choose the workplaces the employee works at. Help text: Select a workspace. | Always. | An online appointment only gets a chair that belongs to the employee and has Can be reserved via widget. |
| Create a new table | A plus button that opens the Workstations window (with Create workstations), so that you add a workstation right away. | When there is no workstation yet. | The label says table, but you create a workstation here. The text below it (Select the transaction costs that belong to this activity) does not belong here. |
| Color | The employee's colour in the calendar. Choose from the list; the label Employee visibility color is next to the field. | To tell employees apart in the calendar. | - |
| Employee visibility color | Label by the colour field: the colour the employee has in the calendar. | - | - |
| E-mail when booking | Yes/No choice, default No. Help text: Do you want to receive a separate email when a reservation comes in under your name? | When the employee wants a message for new appointments. | The label Do you want to receive a separate email when a reservation comes in under your name? appears on the screen; the choice is stored with the employee. |
| Show in widget | Yes/No choice, default No. Help text: Showing in "manual booking" is a handy option, for example to be able to add internal remarks about the customer. | When you also want to show the employee yourself when booking manually. | The help text is about manual booking. |
| Active | Yes/No choice, default Yes. In the list of employees the same setting appears as a tick. | To turn someone off temporarily without deleting. | For an existing employee this is a Yes/No button. |
| Delete | Puts the employee in the trash, after a confirmation. The employee is also set to inactive. | When someone no longer works for you. | It is not permanent: via Show only deleted items on Salon management you find the employee again. |
| Next | To the next step. | - | - |
| Previous | Back to the previous step. | - | - |
| Save | Stores the employee with working hours and breaks. Appears on the last step. | When you are done. | Without Save, everything in the window is lost. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Delete this object | Title of the question before you delete an employee. The question itself is: Do you want to delete the data? | Choose Yes to delete. |
| Successfully removed! | The employee is in the trash. | Nothing. |

**Related questions:**

- Which settings does an employee have?
- How do I link an employee to a workstation?
- How do I set an employee's working hours and breaks?
- On which step do I save an employee?

**Keywords:** add employee salon, employee working hours, add hairdresser, link chair employee, delete employee, employee photo

**Related:** [How do I add an employee and set when they work?](../faq/medewerker-toevoegen-en-werktijden.md), [How do I record breaks for an employee?](../faq/pauzes-medewerker.md), [How do I put someone's holiday or days off in the calendar?](../faq/vakantie-en-vrije-dagen-medewerker.md)

---

# How does the Breaks step work for an employee?

**Answer:** Under Breaks you record an employee's regular breaks, for example a lunch break on certain weekdays. During such a break a guest cannot book an appointment online with that employee. A break applies every week on the chosen days.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Salon > Employees tab > choose an employee > Breaks step (`/Salon`)

**Explanation:** The Breaks step sits between Working hours and Chairs in the Employees window. You fill in a break and click Save; the break then appears in the Saved breaks list below the form. Only when you then save the employee yourself with Save on the last step is the break really stored. You remove a break with the bin icon behind the line in the list. The text on the screen reads: Enter the regular breaks here, if applicable. Select the break time and the corresponding days. Once the breaks have been entered, no reservations can be made within this break time.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name of the break | A name for yourself, maximum 50 characters. Help text: Internal name of the break. Required. | For example Lunch. | The guest does not see this name. |
| Break until | The label above the break's time span. You fill in Start time and End time, with minus and plus buttons to go an hour up or down. | Always, unless you choose All-day break. | Without a start and end time (and without All-day break), you get the message that the time is missing. |
| All-day break | Checkbox. With this box you do not need to fill in a start and end time to add the break. | Only when you need the box. | For a normal break, always fill in a start and end time. |
| Monday | Checkbox: the break applies on Monday. | Choose the days on which the break recurs. | You must choose at least one day. |
| Tuesday | The break applies on Tuesday. | Same. | - |
| Wednesday | The break applies on Wednesday. | Same. | - |
| Thursday | The break applies on Thursday. | Same. | - |
| Friday | The break applies on Friday. | Same. | - |
| Saturday | The break applies on Saturday. | Same. | - |
| Sunday | The break applies on Sunday. | Same. | - |
| Save | Puts the break in the Saved breaks list. | After filling in name, time and days. | The break is only final after Save for the employee. |
| Saved breaks | List with this employee's breaks: Name, Break from, Up to and the seven weekdays with Yes or No. | To see what is already there. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Break name is missing | You have not filled in a Name of the break. | Enter a name. |
| Break time is missing | Start or end time is empty and All-day break is not on. | Fill in both times. |
| Selection box is not selected | You have not ticked any day. | Tick at least one day. |

**Related questions:**

- What is the Breaks step for an employee?
- Does a break apply every week?
- Can a customer book online during an employee's break?
- How do I record a regular lunch break?

**Keywords:** employee break salon, set lunch break, hairdresser breaks, no appointments during break, regular break weekday

**Related:** [How do I record breaks for an employee?](../faq/pauzes-medewerker.md), [What can you set for an employee in the salon?](salon-medewerkers.md)

---

# What can you set for a treatment in the salon?

**Answer:** A treatment is what a guest books, such as a haircut or a massage. You give it a name, colour, duration, price and the employees who do it. You do that in the Treatment window with five steps.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Salon > Treatment tab > click a treatment, or at the top right the button with the plus signs and then the tile Treatment (`/Salon`)

**Explanation:** The steps are Treatment, Colour and duration, Employees, For whom and Price. You go through them with Next and Previous and save with Save on the last step. An existing treatment opens with its name in the title and also has Delete at the bottom left. The text at the top of the window reads: The customer first chooses the desired treatment when booking, such as "Men's haircut", "Manicure" or "Relaxation massage". Then link the treatment to a time slot, duration, price and the relevant employees.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name | The treatment's name, maximum 50 characters. Required. Help text: Give the treatment a name. Please note, this is visible when booking. | Always. | If you have several languages on, you enter the name per language. Below the field is Maximum number of characters with a counter. |
| Description | An explanation of the treatment. Help text: Give more information about the treatment if needed. Please note, this information is visible when booking. | For explanation the guest needs to know. | Can also be filled in per language. |
| Maximum number of characters | Counter below the name field. | - | The name may not be longer than 50 characters. |
| Color | The treatment's colour in the overview. Choose from the list. | To tell treatments apart in the calendar. | The help text below Color reads Until what date are you not available; that text is there by mistake. |
| Until what date are you not available | This is the help text below Color. | - | The text does not fit Color. |
| Duration | How long the treatment takes. Choose from the list in steps of 5 minutes; the default is 1 hour. Help text: Indicate how much time this appointment will take. | Always. | The duration determines the end time of the appointment and the length of the time slots online. |
| Minimum time until the reservation | Choose from the list: from 00:00 in steps of 5 minutes to 23:55, and 1 to 6 days. Help text: When may the guest book? A guest can usually place a reservation straight away. In some cases, however, it is necessary to know a few minutes, hours or even days in advance who is coming, so that the employee can prepare. | When you only want a treatment to be bookable with preparation time. | See Note at the bottom. |
| Show in widget | Yes/No, default No. Help text: When "visible in widget" is active, the treatment is also shown in the widget. | Set to Yes if guests may book the treatment online. | If this is No, the treatment can only be scheduled by you. |
| Show end time | Yes/No, default No. Help text: Give the customer information about the end time of the appointment, or not. | When the guest should see when the appointment ends. | - |
| Is this a deposit? | Yes/No, default No. Help text (Is-Downpayment-Product-Description): Indicate whether this product is a deposit or not. If it is, this product will be credited in full when the guest arrives. | Only if the treatment's price is a deposit. | - |
| Employee | Choose which employees do the treatment. Help button: Create a new employee for the treatment. | Always; a treatment without an employee cannot be booked online. | You set the same link in the employee's window as well. |
| Treatment group | Choose the target group, for example women, men or children. Help button: Create a treatment group. | When you divide treatments by target group. | If there is only one treatment group, the guest sees no choice. |
| Price | The treatment's price in euros, per person and including VAT. Help text: Enter the product price. This is per person, and including VAT. | Always. | The price includes VAT. |
| VAT group | The treatment's VAT group. Help text: Select the VAT group. The drop-down starts with Select a VAT group. | Always; required. | You see the group's name and the percentage. |
| Select the VAT group | The help text for the VAT group. | - | - |
| Product | Choose here the extra products you offer with this treatment (the block Choose additional products) and optionally transaction costs (the block Transaction costs, with the choice No transaction cost). With the plus you create a new product: Create a new Extra product. or Create a new transaction fee product. | For upselling, such as a care product. | The blocks only appear if you already have an active product of that type. |
| Active | Turns the treatment on or off. | - | This is not visible in the window; you set it in the list with the Active tick or via Actions > Deactivate. A new treatment is set to active. |
| Delete | Puts the treatment in the trash, after a confirmation. | When you no longer offer the treatment. | Not permanent: see Show only deleted items. |
| Next | To the next step. | - | - |
| Previous | Back to the previous step. | - | - |
| Save | Stores the treatment. Is on the last step. | When you are done. | Without Save, everything is lost. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| PLEASE NOTE: No payment method has been set up, so when you create products no price can be entered. Go to Settings > Menu and settings > Mollie. | Warning at Price: apparently no payment method has been set up, so the price stays at 0. | First link a payment method under Settings and Mollie. |
| Delete this object | Title of the question before you delete the treatment. The question itself is: Do you want to delete the data? | Choose Yes to delete. |

**Related questions:**

- Which settings does a treatment have?
- How many steps does creating a treatment have?
- How do I set the colour of a treatment?
- How do I link employees to a treatment?

**Keywords:** add treatment salon, set treatment duration, hairdresser treatment price, book treatment online, extra products treatment, delete treatment

**Related:** [How do I create a treatment?](../faq/behandeling-aanmaken.md), [What can you set for workstations and treatment groups?](salon-werkstations-en-behandelgroepen.md), [What can you set for the salon's products?](salon-producten.md)

---

# What can you set for workstations and treatment groups?

**Answer:** A workstation is a workplace or chair in your salon. A treatment group is the target group of a treatment, such as women, men or children. You manage both in Salon management on their own tab.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Salon > Workstations tab or Treatment group tab (`/Salon`). You also create a new workstation or a new treatment group with the plus signs at the top right.

**Explanation:** **Workstations.** Under Create workstations you use the minus and plus button to choose how many workstations you want to add at once (default 20). They get a number: the new ones continue numbering from the number you already had, even if some are off or deleted. Afterwards you can change the name. An appointment you make yourself in the dashboard always needs a workstation; without a workstation you cannot save it. **Treatment groups.** With a treatment group you divide treatments by target group. If you have only one group, the guest sees no choice when booking; if you have more, the guest first chooses the group.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Workstations | Tab and title of the window. The list shows your workstations with the name, the tick Can be reserved via widget and the tick Active. Help text: Add workstations and link them to an Employee. | To manage your workplaces. | You save changes in the list with Save at the bottom of the list. Dragging changes the order. |
| Create workstations | Choose how many workstations you want to add. Help text: Select the number of workstations you want to create. | When setting up your salon. | The number is 20 by default. |
| Can be reserved via widget | Yes/No. When creating, it is Yes by default. | Set to No for a workplace that guests may not get online. | Online, a guest only gets a chair that is set to Yes and linked to the chosen employee. |
| Workplace name | The name or number of the workstation, maximum 50 characters. The label above it is Name. | To give the chair a recognisable name. | - |
| Active | Turns the workstation on or off. | To temporarily not use a chair. | This is not visible in the window; use the Active tick in the list. |
| Delete | Puts the workstation in the trash. | When the chair is no longer there. | Not permanent, it is still under Show only deleted items. |
| Treatment group | Tab and title of the window. Help text above the list: Add treatment group. If there is more than one choice, it will be visible during booking. | When you divide treatments by target group. | - |
| Treatment group name | The group's name (maximum 50 characters), to be filled in per language. The label above it is Name. | For example Women, Men or Children. | The step is called Target group. Help text: Who a treatment is meant for, for example women, men or children. That also partly determines the price. |
| Active | For a treatment group a Yes/No choice, default Yes. | To temporarily not show a group. | In the list the same setting appears as a tick. |
| Save | Stores your changes. | After every change. | - |
| No chairs are available. | Message in the Available chairs window when making an appointment: there is no free workstation at that time. | Choose another time or another employee. | See the article about making an appointment. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I manage workstations and chairs?
- What are treatment groups such as women, men and children?
- Where do I create a treatment group?
- How do I add a workplace?

**Keywords:** workstation salon, add chair hairdresser, treatment group women men, target group treatment, create chairs, workplace

**Related:** [What are workstations and treatment groups and do I need them?](../faq/werkstations-en-behandelgroepen.md), [What can you set for an employee in the salon?](salon-medewerkers.md)

---

# What can you set for the salon's products?

**Answer:** Under Products you create extra products that you can sell with a treatment, such as a shampoo or care set, and transaction costs. You give them a name, price and VAT, and then link them to a treatment.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Salon > Products tab > click a product, or at the top right the button with the plus signs and then the tile Products (`/Salon`)

**Explanation:** The window is called Products. In the first step, Product, you choose the type: an extra product (on the screen: Choose additional products) or Transaction costs. The steps Name and description and Price and visibility follow. On the Products tab you search with the Search field and filter with the Product types drop-down. You then apply a product to a treatment in the Treatment window, in the last step.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Product | The first step: choosing the type. Help text: What can be sold with a treatment, such as a shampoo or a care set, with the price. | For every new product. | If you choose Transaction costs and then Next, the window for transaction costs (Transaction costs) opens instead of these steps. |
| Name | The product's name, maximum 50 characters. Required. Help text: Enter a name for the product. The name is visible when booking. | Always. | If you have several languages on, enter the name per language. |
| Maximum number of characters | Counter below the name field. | - | - |
| Description | Text for the product. Help text: Give the product a description. The description is visible when booking. | When the guest needs to know more. | Only for an extra product. |
| Transaction information about the product. | For the type Transaction costs there is a second description with the help text Transaction information about the product. | To explain what the costs are for. | - |
| Price | The product's price. Help text: Enter the price. The amount includes VAT. | Always for an extra product. | The price includes VAT. |
| Price per reservation for the product | For Transaction costs: a fixed amount per reservation. The field is called Transaction costs (including VAT). | When you charge a fixed amount per appointment. | - |
| Transaction costs (including VAT) | The label of the amount per reservation. | - | The amount includes VAT. |
| VAT | Drop-down with the VAT rates. Help text: Assign a VAT group to the product. The list starts with Select tax. | Always; required. | - |
| VAT group | The product's VAT group. Help text: Select the Product group. The list starts with Select a VAT group. | Always; required. | - |
| Select the Product group | The help text for VAT group. | - | - |
| Show in List View | Yes/No, default No. | Set to Yes if the product should also appear in the list view. | - |
| Show in widget | Yes/No, default No. Help text: Indicate whether the field is visible during booking via the widget. | Set to Yes if guests can choose the product online. | - |
| Indicate whether the field is visible during booking via the widget. | The help text for Show in widget. | - | - |
| Indicate whether the field must be filled in during the reservation. | Help text above the list of products. | - | The text actually belongs to Fields; for Products it has no function. |
| Active | Turns the product on or off. | To temporarily not show a product. | This is not visible in the window; you set it in the list or via Actions > Deactivate. A new product is set to active. |
| Delete | Puts the product in the trash, after a confirmation. | When you no longer sell the product. | Not permanent: see Show only deleted items. |
| Next | To the next step. | - | - |
| Previous | Back to the previous step. | - | - |
| Save | Stores the product. | On the last step. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| PLEASE NOTE: No payment method has been set up, so when you create products no price can be entered. Go to Settings > Menu and settings > Mollie. | Warning at Price: without a payment method the price would stay at 0. | First link a payment method under Settings and Mollie. |

**Related questions:**

- What can I set for the salon's products?
- How do I link a product to a treatment?
- How do I set up transaction costs?
- What price and VAT do I give a product?

**Keywords:** extra product salon, upselling hairdresser, add product treatment, sell shampoo, transaction costs salon, product VAT

**Related:** [How do I sell extra products with a treatment?](../faq/extra-producten-bij-behandeling.md), [What can you set for a treatment in the salon?](salon-behandelingen.md)

---

# What can you set for the salon's extra fields?

**Answer:** With extra fields you ask a guest your own question when booking, for example about an allergy or a preference. You choose which treatments the question belongs to, what kind of answer you want and whether it is required.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Salon > Fields tab > click a field, or at the top right the button with the plus signs and then the tile Fields (`/Salon`)

**Explanation:** The Fields window has four steps: Extra field (choosing the treatments), Field type, Name and description and Settings. You save with Save on the last step. In the list on the Fields tab you see per field the columns Name, Description, Label, Type, Required, List View, Show in widget and Active; you change the ticks there directly. A field only appears for the treatments you chose in the first step.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Type | The kind of answer. Help text: Which type of field do you want to add? Select from the list below. | Always. | See the list of types below. |
| Text box | A short line of text. | For a short question. | - |
| Large text box | A large text box. | For a longer remark. | - |
| Time slot | A time. | When you ask for a time. | - |
| Date | A date. | When you ask for a date. | - |
| Checkbox | One box that the guest ticks. | For a yes/no question. | - |
| Selection box multiple choices | Several boxes; the guest can choose more than one. | For a list of options. | Enter the options under Options. |
| Radio button | A list from which the guest chooses one. | When only one answer is possible. | Enter the options under Options. |
| Number field | A number. | When you ask for a number. | - |
| Phone | A phone number. | When you ask for a number. | - |
| Combo list | A drop-down list. | For many options. | Enter the options under Options. |
| Label | As a type: only a text on the form (the name with the description below it), without an answer. | For an explanation or heading. | Label is also the name of the tag field (see below). |
| Link | A link to a website with a title. The fields are then called Link to website and Link title. | To refer to a page. | - |
| Terms and conditions | A box with which the guest accepts your terms. You give the link and the text. | When you want terms to be accepted. | The fixed text reads: When you make a reservation, you must accept the Terms and conditions. |
| Do you want to make this field dynamic? | Yes/No, default No. Help text: When you make this field dynamic, you can show this field when a choice has been made in another field. This way this field only becomes visible if an answer was chosen in a previous question. | For a follow-up question that only belongs to a certain answer. | - |
| Which field is the main field? | Choose the field this field depends on. | Only if dynamic is set to Yes. | - |
| Show this field when the following is selected | Choose for which answer of the main field this field appears. Help text: For which value should this field be shown? Choose one of the values from the list. | Same. | - |
| Name | The field's name that the guest sees, maximum 50 characters. Required. Help text: Enter a name. | Always. | To be filled in per language. |
| Description | The explanation for the field. Help text: Enter an explanation for the field. It is shown in the field itself as light grey text. | For a short explanation. | For the type Text box this is a line of at most 80 characters. |
| Options | For Combo list, Radio button and Selection box multiple choices: the answers, one per line. Help text: View the options here. | Only for those types. | The example in the field is Option 1, Option 2 and Option 3, each on its own line. |
| Label | The field's tag, a short name for the field. Help text: Select field TAG. Example in the field: Tag name example. Required. | Always. | - |
| Required | Yes/No, default No. Help text: Indicate whether the field must be filled in during the reservation. | When the guest must answer the question. | - |
| List View | Yes/No, default No. Help text: When active, the answer is shown with the memos in the reservation overview. | When you want to see the answer in the overview. | - |
| Show field name | Yes/No, default Yes. Help text: Indicate whether the field's name is shown during booking. | Set to No if the name is redundant. | - |
| Show in widget | Yes/No, default Yes. Help text: Indicate whether the field is visible during booking via the widget. | Set to No if only you see the field. | - |
| Active | Turns the field on or off. | To temporarily not ask a question. | This is not visible in the window; you set it in the list with the Active tick. A new field is set to active. |
| Delete | Puts the field in the trash, after a confirmation. | When you no longer ask the question. | Not permanent. |
| Next | To the next step. | - | - |
| Previous | Back to the previous step. | - | - |
| Save | Stores the field. | On the last step. | - |

**Related questions:**

- How do I ask customers my own question when booking?
- Can I link a field to certain treatments?
- Which kinds of answers can I set?
- Can I make a field required?

**Keywords:** extra question booking salon, add field reservation, ask customer about allergy, required field appointment, salon intake, dynamic field

**Related:** [How do I ask a customer for extra details when booking?](../faq/extra-velden-bij-boeken.md)

---

# How does the salon calendar work?

**Answer:** In the salon calendar you see all appointments, per day in a timeline per employee or in lists per day, week, the last 100 and the future. At the top you choose the date and with Create reservation you make a new appointment.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Reservations (in a salon business) or Menu > Salon (in the POS with the Salon integration on) (`/SalonReservation`)

**Explanation:** At the top you choose the day with the date picker and on the right is the button Create reservation. Below are six tabs: Overview, List view, Weekly list, Last 100 reservations, Upcoming reservations and Totals. Click an appointment to open the reservation information or to change it. In the POS with the Salon integration on, you can switch between the reservation sections at the top.

![The salon calendar with the date at the top, the button Create reservation and the six tabs](/kennisbank/beelden/salon-agenda-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Create reservation | Opens the page to make an appointment. | When someone calls or walks in. | See the article about making an appointment. |
| Overview | The day's timeline with the appointments as blocks per employee, with a legend of the status colours. | For the day overview. | Employees' breaks and holidays are grey. |
| Select an employee | Drop-down in the timeline to show one employee. | To see only one employee's calendar. | - |
| List view | The appointments of the chosen day in a list, under the title Overview of reservations on:. | For a list instead of the timeline. | The columns are Reservation status, Reservation number, Treatment, Employees, Name, People, Workstations, Arrival date, Arrival time, Payment and Memo. |
| Overview of reservations on: | Title above the day's list. | - | - |
| Weekly list | The appointments of the whole week, under the title Weekly list with the start and end date (the word Until is between them). | To plan the week ahead. | The weekly list, Last 100 reservations and Upcoming reservations also have the column Departure time. |
| Last 100 reservations | The 100 most recently made appointments. The title is List of the last 100 reservations. | To see what has come in recently. | - |
| List of the last 100 reservations | Title above the list of the most recently made appointments. | - | - |
| Upcoming reservations | The appointments of a month in the future. Choose the month under Reservation for the month:. The list has Back and Next buttons for more pages. | To look ahead. | Past months cannot be chosen. |
| Reservation for the month: | The label next to the month choice on the Upcoming reservations tab. | - | - |
| Totals | Figures with two tabs: Day totals and Week totals. You see per treatment how many appointments there are (Reservations per treatment, with columns Treatments and Total). | For an overview of how busy it is. | - |
| Select | First choice in the status filter of every list, before you choose a status. | To filter on a status, for example No-show. | The filters only appear with the Filters permission. |
| Search by: | Search field above every list. | To find an appointment by name. | Belongs to the Filters permission. |
| Print | Prints the list as you see it. | For a paper day schedule. | Only with the Print permission (the owner always has it). |
| Excel | The Excel icon downloads the list. | For an export. | Only with the Export permission. |
| Make a new appointment | Window with which you schedule a follow-up appointment from an appointment. You choose a Time slot and an employee (Select an employee) and go to the calendar to choose a time. | When a guest wants a follow-up appointment. | See the article about a follow-up appointment. |

**Related questions:**

- How does the salon calendar work?
- Which views does the calendar have?
- How do I choose another day in the calendar?
- Where do I see the last 100 appointments?

**Keywords:** salon calendar, appointments per day, weekly list salon, print appointments, export appointments, upcoming appointments

**Related:** [How do I make an appointment for a customer myself?](../faq/afspraak-maken-voor-klant.md), [How do I see which appointments there are?](../faq/afspraken-bekijken.md), [How do I set a customer to Arrived or Left?](../faq/aangekomen-vertrokken-no-show.md)

---

# How does the Add reservation screen work in the salon?

**Answer:** On the Add reservation screen you make an appointment for a guest yourself: you choose treatment, day, time, employee and workstation, fill in the guest and save. You open it with Create reservation in the calendar.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Reservations (or Salon in the POS) > button Create reservation (`/SalonReservation/AddReservation`). The same form is also at `/SalonReservation/Add`, which the calendar uses for follow-up appointments.

**Explanation:** You fill in the form from top to bottom. Only when Treatment group, Treatment, the day and the time have been chosen does Jimani load the available employees, the products and the extra information. In the date picker, the days on which the salon is open and an employee works are highlighted (the next three months); you cannot choose days in the past. Jimani fills in the end time itself from the treatment's duration (at the latest 23:59). At the bottom is Your invoice with the lines, and below it Save and the two payment buttons.

![The Add reservation screen with the fields Treatment group, Treatment, Time, Employees and Workstations](/kennisbank/beelden/salon-afspraak-maken-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Treatment group | Choose the target group first. The list starts with Make your choice. | Always. | Otherwise you get the message Select a gender. |
| Treatment | Choose the treatment from the chosen group. If there is only one, it is chosen automatically. | Always. | Otherwise you get the message Select a treatment. |
| Time | The day of the appointment. Next to the label are the Opening hours of that day; if the salon is closed then, it says The salon may not be open on the selected arrival date. | Always. | Choose a highlighted day. |
| From | The start time. With the plus and minus buttons you go to the next or previous free time. | Always. | Free times are shown per quarter of an hour. |
| Until | The end time, calculated automatically from the treatment's duration. | - | - |
| Available times | Button next to Until that opens a window with all free times; click one. | When you want to see the free times. | The button is off as long as there is no free time. |
| Employees | The employees who are free for the treatment at that moment. The list starts with Make your choice. | Always. | If the employee already has an appointment at that time, the message This employee already has an appointment at this time follows. |
| Workstations | With the pencil you open the Available chairs window (Select a chair to make the reservation); choose one and click Save. | Always; an appointment needs a workstation. | If there is no free chair, it says No chairs are available. |
| Passer-by (no guest details) | Yes/No, default No. On Yes you do not need to fill in guest details. | For a guest who does not want to or cannot be recorded. | Then you do not need to fill in guest details. |
| Check in now | Yes/No, default No. On Yes the day and time become the current time and the guest is immediately set to Arrived. | For a guest who is already here. | The choice only appears if checking in with Check in now has been turned on for the salon in the settings. |
| Search | Look up an existing guest by email address or phone number and click the search icon. You get the Guest search window with the columns Last name, First name, Address, Postal code, Place of residence, Phone and E-mail. | For a returning customer. | If you find nobody, it says No data found. |
| Language | The guest's language, for the confirmation. | Always. | - |
| Reservation name | The name the appointment is under. | Especially for a passer-by. | - |
| Products | Collapsible block with the extra products for this treatment. Choose what the guest wants as well. | For upselling. | See the article about products. |
| Extra information | Collapsible block with the extra fields you set up for this treatment. | For the answers to your own questions. | See the article about fields. |
| Internal memo | A note for yourself with the appointment. | For a point of attention. | The guest does not see the memo. |
| Add to quote | Tick next to the Internal memo. | - | Only this name appears on the screen. |
| Guest data & information | Block with the guest's details, according to the fields you set up for guest details. | Always, except for a passer-by. | Required fields must be filled in (Fill in the guest's required details). |
| Guest Reservation | Table with the guest's earlier appointments and reservations: Module, Reservation type, Reservation date, Reservation time, Quantity, Revenue and Method. | To see the history. | - |
| Your invoice | The appointment's lines with Description, Price and Total, and the amounts Total excluding VAT, VAT and Total amount. | To check the amount. | All prices are entered including VAT; the VAT is shown separately. |
| Total amount | The amount including VAT. The payment window also shows Total VAT and Total amount again. | - | - |
| Total VAT | The VAT amount in the payment window. | - | - |
| Total paid | What has already been paid. | For a paid appointment. | - |
| Outstanding amount | What still has to be paid. | For a partly paid appointment. | - |
| Save | Saves the appointment without payment (the guest pays later). The appointment gets the status Open. | Usually. | Afterwards an empty form for today appears. |
| Confirm payment | Window that opens when you click one of the two payment buttons (the bank card symbol for another payment, the banknote for cash). You see the amounts and choose Pay or Cancel. | When the guest pays right away. | After Pay you go back to the calendar and the appointment shows as paid. |
| Pay | Confirms the payment and saves the appointment. | - | - |
| Cancel | Closes the payment window without saving. | - | - |
| Make a new appointment | Window in the calendar to schedule a follow-up appointment from an appointment. | For a returning customer. | See the article about a follow-up appointment. |
| Time slot | Choice in that window: after how many days or weeks the next appointment comes (1 to 6 days or 1 to 12 weeks). | - | - |
| Select an employee | Choice in that window: who the next appointment is with. | - | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Reservation added successfully | Jimani has saved the appointment. | Nothing; you immediately see a new form or the calendar. |
| Invalid reservation data | The data did not come in properly. | Fill in the form again. |
| No chair selected! | You have not chosen a workstation. | Choose a workstation under Workstations. |
| Chair not available! | The chosen workstation is taken at that time. | Choose another workstation or another time. |
| This employee already has an appointment at this time. | The employee does only one treatment at a time. | Choose another time or employee. |
| Select a gender. | Treatment group is missing. | Choose a Treatment group. |
| Select a treatment. | Treatment is missing. | Choose a Treatment. |
| Select the arrival and departure dates. | Day or time is missing. | Fill in Time, From and Until. |
| Select a professional. | No employee has been chosen. | Choose an employee. |
| Select a chair. | No workstation has been chosen. | Choose a workstation. |
| No chair selected. | You click Save in the chairs window without choosing. | Choose a chair first. |
| No chairs are available. | There is no free workstation. | Choose another time or employee. |
| Fill in the guest's required details. | A required guest field is empty. | Fill in the field. |

**Related questions:**

- Which details do I fill in for a new appointment?
- How do I open the screen to make an appointment?
- Do I have to choose a workstation for an appointment?
- Where do I enter the guest details?

**Keywords:** make appointment salon, add reservation hairdresser, book in appointment, schedule customer, walk-in appointment, check in now salon

**Related:** [How do I make an appointment for a customer myself?](../faq/afspraak-maken-voor-klant.md), [How do I schedule a follow-up appointment?](../faq/vervolgafspraak-plannen.md), [How do I change or reschedule an appointment?](../faq/afspraak-wijzigen-of-verzetten.md)

---

# How does the screen for viewing and changing a salon appointment work?

**Answer:** Click an appointment in the calendar. You first see the Reservation information window with the buttons to set the guest to Arrived or Left, to cancel or to send an email. With Open reservation you open the full screen to change the appointment.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Reservations (or Salon in the POS) > click an appointment (`/SalonReservation/UpdateReservation`). The same screen also exists at `/SalonReservation/Update`, which the Cancellations and Refunds overview lists, among others, open.

**Explanation:** **Reservation information window.** At the top are four tabs: Overview, Attachment, Reservation list and Internal memo. At the bottom left is Cancel, in the middle More (with the other buttons) and on the right the main button. The main button is Arrived if the appointment is still open, and Left if the guest is Arrived; after that Open reservation appears. Under Overview are the tabs Overview, Reservation (down) payments and Reservation process. **Full screen.** At the top is the Status of the appointment and who made it (Created by), below it the tabs Overview and Attachment(s). You change the fields and save with Save.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Arrived | Main button in Reservation information: sets the appointment to Arrived, after a confirmation. | When the guest walks in. | After that you can no longer cancel the appointment in this window. |
| Left | Main button when the guest is Arrived: sets the appointment to Left, after a confirmation. | When the treatment is finished. | The end time of the appointment (and of the workstation) then becomes the current time. |
| Open reservation | Main button when there is no next status: opens the full screen. | To change something. | - |
| Cancel | Cancels the appointment. Jimani first asks Cancel your reservation? and Are you sure you want to cancel the reservation?, and then for a reason (Reason for cancellation). | When the guest does not come or cancels. | The button is off with the explanation Guest is already inside; can no longer be cancelled, or Completed; can no longer be cancelled. |
| More | Opens the other buttons. | On a narrow screen. | - |
| Order | Opens the POS with the appointment's bill. | When the guest is ready for the POS. | Only if the guest is Arrived and the appointment day is today. |
| Schedule a new appointment | Opens the Make a new appointment window for a follow-up appointment. | When the guest is Left and comes back. | See the article about a follow-up appointment. |
| Next appointment | Goes to the follow-up appointment that has already been scheduled. | To view it. | - |
| Send email | Sends the confirmation to the guest again, after the question Resend the confirmation to the guest?. | When the guest has lost the confirmation. | Only if the guest has an email address. |
| Print receipt | Prints the appointment on the receipt printer. | For a paper receipt. | Only with a linked receipt printer. |
| Print (PDF) | Opens the confirmation as a PDF. | For a printout. | Only if the confirmation has already been made. |
| Status | Choose the appointment's status, at the top of the full screen. | To set someone to Arrived, Left or No-show. | Jimani first asks for confirmation. |
| Created by | Who made the appointment. Cannot be changed. | For information. | - |
| Treatment group | The appointment's target group. | To switch the treatment. | If you switch the group, you then choose a Treatment again. |
| Treatment | The treatment. | To switch. | The price and end time follow. |
| Time | The day. Next to the label is Opening hours. | To reschedule. | - |
| From | The start time. | To reschedule. | Via Available times you choose a free time. |
| Until | The end time. | - | - |
| Employees | The employee. | To switch. | If the employee is busy at the new time, This employee already has an appointment at this time follows. |
| Workstations | The workstation. | To switch. | Without a workstation you get No chair selected!. |
| Passer-by (no guest details) | Yes/No: the appointment without guest details. | For a passer-by. | - |
| Check in now | Sets the appointment straight to Arrived with the current time. | When the guest is here now. | Only visible if the setting for the salon is on. |
| Language | The guest's language. | To send the confirmation in the right language. | - |
| Reservation name | The name on the appointment. | To correct. | - |
| Internal memo | A note for yourself; also a tab in Reservation information with Save. | For a point of attention. | The guest does not see the memo. |
| Add to quote | Tick next to the Internal memo. | - | Only this name appears on the screen. |
| Total amount | The appointment's total including VAT. | For checking. | - |
| Total VAT | The VAT amount in the payment window. | - | - |
| Attachment(s) | Tab with documents for the appointment: Date, Subject, Description and Invoice number. With the plus you add one. | For a file with the appointment. | - |
| Add file | Choose the file you keep with the appointment, in the Add window (Reservation document, Upload). | For a photo or document. | - |
| Subject | The attachment's subject. | Always for an attachment. | - |
| Description | An explanation of the attachment. | Optional. | - |
| Save | Stores the changes. In the attachment window it stores the attachment. | After every change. | - |

**Related questions:**

- What can I do when I click an appointment in the calendar?
- How do I open the full screen of an appointment?
- Can I send an email from an appointment?
- How do I set the customer to arrived or left?

**Keywords:** change appointment salon, reschedule appointment, set guest arrived, view appointment, appointment attachment, resend confirmation

**Related:** [How do I change or reschedule an appointment?](../faq/afspraak-wijzigen-of-verzetten.md), [How do I set a customer to Arrived or Left?](../faq/aangekomen-vertrokken-no-show.md), [How do I cancel an appointment?](../faq/afspraak-annuleren.md)

---

# How does the salon's Cancellations overview work?

**Answer:** On Cancellations you see all salon appointments cancelled in the past six months, with who cancelled them and why. You mark them as read, so you know which ones you have already seen.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Cancellations (`/SalonCancellations`)

**Explanation:** The page is called Cancellation. By default the filter is set to Read: you only see cancellations you have not yet marked as read. Double-click a line to open the appointment.

![The Cancellation overview with the filter Read, the button Read all and the list of cancelled appointments](/kennisbank/beelden/salon-annuleringen-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| All | Filter that shows all cancellations. | To also see cancellations already read. | - |
| Read | Filter that only shows cancellations you have not yet read. This is the default. | Daily. | - |
| Today | Filter that only shows cancellations made today. | For the current state. | - |
| Read all | Marks all cancellations as read in one go. | When you have gone through the list. | - |
| Treatment | Column: the cancelled appointment's treatment. | - | - |
| Employees | Column: the employee the appointment was with. | - | - |
| Time | Column: the day and time of the appointment. | - | - |
| Cancellation date | Column: the day it was cancelled. | - | - |
| Created | Column: who made the cancellation. | - | - |
| Cancellation reason | Column: the reason that was given. | - | - |
| Status | Column with the appointment's status and the button to mark the cancellation as read. | To tick off a cancellation. | - |
| Excel | Icon at the top right that downloads the list as an Excel file. | For an export. | If the list is empty, the message follows that there is nothing to export. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| No data found. | There are no cancellations that match the filter. | Choose the filter All. |

**Related questions:**

- Who cancelled an appointment and why?
- How far back do I look at cancelled appointments?
- How do I mark a cancellation as read?
- Where do I see all cancelled appointments?

**Keywords:** cancelled appointments salon, view cancellations, mark as read, cancellation reason, called off

**Related:** [How do I cancel an appointment and what does the customer receive?](../faq/afspraak-annuleren.md), [How does the salon's Refunds overview work?](salon-terugbetaaloverzicht.md)

---

# How does the salon's Refunds overview work?

**Answer:** In the Refunds overview you see the cancelled appointments of the last six months and you refund amounts paid online, in full or in part. The balance at the top shows how much is available with your payment provider to refund.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Refunds overview (`/SalonRefunds`)

**Explanation:** At the top is Balance with an amount. Below it is a line per cancelled appointment. If the appointment was paid for, the last column, Status, has two buttons: the red one to refund and the orange one to cancel a refund in progress. With the information icon at the front of the line you open the reservation information. Double-click a line to open the appointment itself.

![The Refunds overview with the Balance at the top and the list of cancelled appointments](/kennisbank/beelden/salon-terugbetaaloverzicht-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Balance | The amount you have available with Mollie. | To see whether you have enough. | Without a link to Mollie it shows 0. The balance is remembered briefly, so it may lag behind for a moment. |
| Cancellation date | Column: the day of the cancellation. | - | - |
| Cancellation time | Column: the time of the cancellation. | - | - |
| Treatment | Column: the treatment. | - | - |
| Employees | Column: the employee. | - | - |
| Time | Column: the day of the appointment. | - | - |
| Total amount | Column: what the guest paid. | To see how much you can refund. | - |
| Created | Column: who made the cancellation. | - | - |
| Cancellation reason | Column: the reason that was given. | - | - |
| Status | Column with the buttons to refund or cancel a refund, or the state of the refund. | To handle it. | If the total amount is 0, there is nothing to refund and the box stays empty. |
| Refund | The red button with the bank card symbol. You enter which amount you refund; the full amount is already filled in. | After the cancellation of a paid appointment. | The amount may not be higher than what the guest paid, and not higher than the Balance. |
| Cancel refund | The orange button with the cross. Jimani asks Are you sure? with the text You are going to cancel the refund!. | Only as long as the refund has not yet been carried out (pending). | After that you can refund again. |
| Excel | Icon that downloads the list. | For an export. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Refund amount! | Title of the window in which you enter the amount. | Enter the amount and confirm. |
| Total refund amount: | The text above the entry field. | - |
| Max. refund amount is | You entered more than was paid. | Enter a lower amount. |
| Insufficient balance! | The amount is higher than your Balance. | Wait until there is balance or refund a lower amount. |
| Are you sure? | Question before a refund is cancelled. | Choose Yes or No. |
| No data found. | There are no cancelled appointments in the last six months. | - |

**Related questions:**

- How far back do I see cancelled appointments for refunding?
- What does the balance at the top of the refunds overview mean?
- Can I refund part of the amount?
- Where do I refund appointments paid online?

**Keywords:** refund salon, cancellation refund, deposit refund, mollie refund, mollie balance, partial refund

**Related:** [How do I refund a cancelled appointment?](../faq/terugbetalen-na-annulering.md), [How does the salon's Cancellations overview work?](salon-annuleringen.md)

---

# What can I do with Ticket sales in Jimani?

**Answer:** With Ticket sales you sell tickets for events (with their own date and time) and standard tickets such as a day pass, online through a widget on your website and at the door through the POS. Each ticket gets its own QR code that you scan at the entrance. You pay €0.49 excluding VAT per ticket sold and no monthly fee.

**Explanation:**

- **Two kinds of tickets.** An **event ticket** belongs to a performance or day with its own date and time. A **standard ticket** is a pass with a price per day, for example a day pass or a pass that is valid for several days. See [What is the difference between an event ticket and a standard ticket?](verschil-evenementticket-standaardticket.md).
- **Ticket types.** Within an event or standard ticket you offer ticket types, such as Adult, Child or VIP, each with its own price, VAT, quantity and scan rule.
- **Selling online.** The buyer chooses a day and tickets in the widget, pays via Mollie and receives the tickets with a QR code as a PDF by email. See [How do I sell online tickets for my event or day pass?](online-tickets-verkopen-stappen.md).
- **At the door.** In the POS your ticket types are in the Tickets category. Ringing one up creates a real ticket with a QR code from the same stock as your online sales. See [How do I sell tickets at the POS?](tickets-aan-de-kassa.md).
- **Scanning.** At the entrance you scan the QR code; the scan rule determines how many times a ticket is valid. See [How do I scan tickets at the entrance?](tickets-scannen-bij-de-ingang.md).
- **Overview.** Under Tickets (or Reservations) you see all tickets sold per day and week, with totals. See [How do I see how many tickets I have sold?](verkochte-tickets-bekijken.md).
- **Not in Ticket sales.** There is no seating plan with seats or zones. You arrange different prices or a VIP ticket with separate ticket types.

**Example:** A museum sells a standard ticket Day pass with a price per day and an event Evening opening with two dates. Both are in the same widget and use the same scanner at the entrance.

**Related questions:**

- Can I sell tickets for my event with Jimani?
- What does ticket sales cost per ticket?
- Can I sell tickets both online and at the door?
- Is there a monthly fee for ticket sales?

**Keywords:** ticket sales jimani, ticketing system, sell tickets, ticketing module, event tickets, sell day pass

**Related:** [What does ticket selling via Jimani cost?](../../prijzen/faq/wat-kost-kaartverkoop.md), [How do I sell online tickets for my event or day pass?](online-tickets-verkopen-stappen.md), [How does Ticket sales management work?](../naslag/kaartverkoop-beheer.md)

---

# How do I sell online tickets for my event or day pass?

**Answer:** Turn on Ticket sales and Online ticket sales under Settings > Add-ons, create a ticket type and an event (or standard ticket) in Ticketing management, then create a widget for your ticket sales under Widgets and paste the code on your website. You pay €0.49 excluding VAT per ticket sold, without a subscription.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Add-ons and turn on **Ticket sales**. The tabs Event tickets and Standard tickets turn on automatically. Then turn on **Online ticket sales**: these are the widgets with which a visitor buys a ticket themselves. Online ticket sales only works together with Ticket sales.
- **Step 2.** Open the management of your tickets. In the POS module the menu item is called **Ticketing management**, in a separate ticket module it is called **Ticket sales**. You see the tabs Opening hours, Event tickets, Standard tickets, Ticket types, Products, Fields and Time limitation.
- **Step 3.** Create a **ticket type** (for example Adult or Child), with price and quantity. See [How do I create a ticket type?](ticketsoort-aanmaken.md).
- **Step 4.** Create an **event** for a performance with its own date and time, or a **standard ticket** for a day pass that applies on open days. See [What is the difference between an event ticket and a standard ticket?](verschil-evenementticket-standaardticket.md).
- **Step 5.** Create a widget: go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Widgets, choose Add widget and choose the ticket module as the main module. Select which events and standard tickets go in it. With **View code** you get the code that you paste on your own website.
- **Step 6.** Online payment goes through your own Mollie account. Mollie charges its own rate per payment.
- **What the buyer sees.** A calendar or list of days, the events with "from" the lowest price and, if you want, "N left" places. After the order the buyer receives a confirmation with the tickets as a PDF, each with its own QR code.
- **When does something appear in the widget?** An event or standard ticket only appears in the widget if it is active, not deleted, has Show in widget set to Yes, sales have already started and you have chosen it in the widget. A standard ticket is only for sale on an open day for which a day price exists and which is not blocked for the whole day by a Time limitation. An event is for sale on its dates that have not yet passed, up to 400 days ahead.

**Example:** A theatre creates the ticket types Adult and Child, an event "Summer performance" with three dates and a widget Ticket sales. After pasting the code, visitors buy online; with 600 tickets in a month, the theatre pays Jimani 600 × €0.49 = €294 excl. VAT.

**Related questions:**

- How do I start selling tickets online?
- What does selling tickets in Jimani cost?
- How do I put a ticket widget on my website?
- Which add-ons do I need to turn on for ticket sales?

**Keywords:** sell tickets online, ticket sales website, ticket widget, sell event tickets, sell tickets online, set up ticketing system

**Related:** [What does ticket selling via Jimani cost?](../../prijzen/faq/wat-kost-kaartverkoop.md), [How do I create a ticket type?](ticketsoort-aanmaken.md), [How do I create an event with tickets?](evenement-aanmaken.md), [What can I do with Ticket sales in Jimani?](wat-is-kaartverkoop.md)

---

# What is the difference between an event ticket and a standard ticket?

**Answer:** An event ticket belongs to a performance or day with its own dates and times and with a fixed number of tickets per ticket type. A standard ticket is a pass with a price and a quantity per day, which you sell on the days you are open, such as a day pass. You choose this per ticket type under "Choose your ticket type".

**Explanation:**

- **Event ticket.** You create an event with a Date list: per date a Start time and End time. Per date you choose which ticket types are for sale. The price and the Ticket quantity are on the ticket type. The Ticket quantity applies per ticket type for the whole event, so for all dates together.
- **Standard ticket.** You do not create a date list. The buyer chooses a day on which you are open. You set the price and the Ticket limit per day on the ticket type (Ticket types tab, Prices step), or with Excel. A day without a day price is not for sale.
- **Opening hours.** For a standard ticket, the Opening hours (Opening hours tab) and a Time limitation for a whole day determine which days are for sale. A day that is set to Closed is not for sale.
- **Guest groups.** For a standard ticket, the buyer can choose a quantity per guest group (for example Adults and Children); each group has its own price per day. An event ticket has one price per ticket.
- **Where do you find them?** Event tickets are on the Event tickets tab, standard tickets on the Standard tickets tab (Ticketing management or Ticket sales in the menu). Both tabs belong to the add-ons Events and Standard ticket sales, which turn on together with Ticket sales.
- **Several at once.** You can manage as many events and standard tickets side by side as you like; they are on separate tabs with a tile per item.

**Example:** An amusement park sells a standard ticket Day pass with a different price in the holidays and an event Halloween night with two dates. For the day pass the buyer chooses an open day; for Halloween night they choose a date from the list.

**Related questions:**

- When do I choose an event ticket and when a standard ticket?
- What is a standard ticket?
- What is the difference between a day pass and a performance?
- How do I choose the type of ticket for a ticket type?

**Keywords:** event ticket, standard ticket, day pass, difference event and day ticket, manage multiple events, ticket type

**Related:** [How do I create an event with tickets?](evenement-aanmaken.md), [How do I sell day passes with a price and quantity per day?](dagkaarten-met-dagprijs.md), [How do I create a ticket type?](ticketsoort-aanmaken.md)

---

# How do I create a ticket type, such as Adult, Child or VIP?

**Answer:** Go to Ticketing management (or Ticket sales), open the Ticket types tab, click the plus button at the top right and go through the steps: name, image, colour and validity, kind of ticket and price. Each ticket type has its own price, VAT, quantity and scan rule, so you create an adult, child and VIP ticket as three ticket types.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open the **Ticket types** tab and click the plus button at the top right. You see the "Ticketing settings" window; choose **Ticket types**. This opens the Ticket type window.
- **Step 2.** Under **Ticket type**, enter the name (at most 50 characters) and a description (at most 200 characters, visible in the widget). If your business has more languages, fill them in per language. Under **Image**, add a photo (4:3 ratio, at most 5 MB).
- **Step 3.** Under **Colour and duration**, choose the colour (internal only, for the overview) and the validity: 1 to 6 days, 1 or 2 weeks, 1, 3, 6 or 9 months or 1 year. See [Can I sell annual passes, weekly passes or multi-ride passes?](jaarkaart-en-geldigheid.md).
- **Step 4.** Also choose the scan rule here (default "Same as event"), the VAT and the VAT group. See [How often may a ticket be scanned and how do I set that?](scanregels-instellen.md).
- **Step 5.** Under **Type and category**, choose whether it is a **Standard ticket** or an **Event ticket**. For an event ticket, you enter the price (including VAT) and the ticket quantity right there. For a standard ticket, you set the price and the quantity per day in the **Prices** step.
- **Step 6.** Optionally choose transaction costs (only if you have created them as a product), extra products and fields that belong to this ticket type, and click **Save**.
- **VIP or another variant.** Make it a ticket type of its own with its own name, price, colour and, for example, a smaller ticket quantity. See [Can I set up zones, tiers or VIP tickets?](zones-en-vip-tickets.md).
- **Linking.** A ticket type is only for sale once you link it to an event (per date) or to a standard ticket. See [How do I create an event with tickets, also with multiple dates?](evenement-aanmaken.md).
- **Editing, copying or deleting.** Click the tile to change it. The three-dot menu (Actions) has Deactivate or Activate, Create a Copy and Send to Trash. A deactivated ticket type gets the label Inactive.

**Example:** You create "Adult" (standard ticket, € 12.50 on weekdays) and "Child" (standard ticket, € 7.50). You attach both to the standard ticket Day pass.

**Related questions:**

- How do I create a child rate and an adult rate?
- How do I create a VIP ticket?
- How do I set the price and VAT of a ticket?
- Do I have to create a separate ticket type for every rate?

**Keywords:** create ticket type, adult child ticket type, vip ticket, set up ticket type, price per ticket type, new ticket type

**Related:** [What is the difference between an event ticket and a standard ticket?](verschil-evenementticket-standaardticket.md), [How does the Ticket type window work?](../naslag/ticketsoort-venster.md)

---

# Can I set up zones, tiers or VIP tickets?

**Answer:** Ticket sales has no seating plan with seats or zones. You can, however, create as many ticket types as you like, for example Standing, Grandstand or VIP, each with its own name, price, VAT, quantity, colour and scan rule. In the widget, the buyer chooses the ticket type, not a seat.

**Explanation:**

- **Zone or tier as a ticket type.** Create a ticket type per zone or tier (Ticket types tab) with its own price and ticket quantity. This way you keep track of the quantity per zone.
- **VIP or backstage.** Create a VIP ticket type with a higher price and choose, under Extra products, for example a drink or parking pass that comes with it. Give it its own colour and you will recognise it right away in the overview.
- **Checking access.** Each ticket type has its own scan rule. For VIP you can choose "Unlimited", for example, and "1x" for a regular ticket. See [How often may a ticket be scanned and how do I set that?](scanregels-instellen.md).
- **Linking.** You can only sell a ticket type once you link it to an event (per date) or to a standard ticket. See [How do I create an event with tickets, also with multiple dates?](evenement-aanmaken.md).

**Example:** A concert hall creates the ticket types "Standing € 25" (500 pieces), "Balcony € 35" (120 pieces) and "VIP € 80" (30 pieces, with a welcome drink as an extra product). Each type has its own price and its own quantity.

**Related questions:**

- Can I create seats or a seating plan for my event?
- Can I sell VIP tickets and grandstand tickets separately?
- Can the buyer choose a seat?
- How do I create zones with different prices?

**Keywords:** vip tickets, zones tickets, tiers, grandstand ticket, choose seats, seating plan tickets, backstage ticket

**Related:** [How do I create a ticket type, such as Adult, Child or VIP?](ticketsoort-aanmaken.md), [Can I sell extra products with a ticket, such as a drink or parking pass?](extra-producten-bij-ticket.md)

---

# How do I create an event with tickets, also with multiple dates?

**Answer:** Go to the Event tickets tab, click the plus button at the top right, choose Event tickets and go through the steps: name, date and location, the Date list with your dates and times (with the ticket types per date), colour and scan rule, sales options and optionally a discount. Finish with Save.

**Explanation:**

- **Before you start.** First create the ticket types you want to sell, with "Event ticket" as the kind of ticket and a price and ticket quantity. See [How do I create a ticket type, such as Adult, Child or VIP?](ticketsoort-aanmaken.md).
- **Step 1.** Open Ticketing management (or Ticket sales) > Event tickets tab, click the plus button and choose **Event tickets**. Enter the name (at most 50 characters) and description (at most 350 characters) and optionally add an image.
- **Step 2.** Enter **Date and time** (free text, for example "Saturday 8:00 pm"), **Address** and **Locations**. All three are required.
- **Step 3.** Under **Date list**, add your dates: choose a date, a start time and an end time. The plus button adds an extra date, the minus button removes a line. You need at least one date.
- **Step 4.** After each date comes a step to choose the **Ticket types** for that date. Choose at least one. With **Add Type** you create a new ticket type right away.
- **Step 5.** Choose the colour (internal only), the **Scan rule** and optionally the scan interval and the maximum number of scans.
- **Step 6.** Set the sales options: Show sold out tickets in widget?, Show sale notification, Start time sale, Ticket limit per sale and Show in widget (default Yes).
- **Step 7.** Optionally set Discount 1 and Discount 2 and click **Save**.
- **Afterwards.** The event appears as a tile on the Event tickets tab. Create a widget (or add the event to your existing widget) to sell it online. See [How do I sell online tickets for my event or day pass?](online-tickets-verkopen-stappen.md).
- **Places.** The ticket quantity is set on the ticket type and applies to all dates of the event combined. If you want a separate quantity per date, create a separate ticket type per date.

**Example:** "Summer Show" has three dates: 12, 13 and 14 July, each time from 20:00 to 22:30. For each date you choose the ticket types Adult and Child. Finally, you set the Ticket limit per sale to 8.

**Related questions:**

- How do I create an event with ticket sales?
- Can I create an event with multiple dates and times?
- How do I link ticket types to a date?
- Which steps do I go through for a new event?

**Keywords:** create event, event multiple dates, date list, event tickets, add show, split event

**Related:** [What is the difference between an event ticket and a standard ticket?](verschil-evenementticket-standaardticket.md), [How do I copy an event or standard ticket?](evenement-kopieren.md), [What can you set for an event ticket or standard ticket?](../naslag/evenementticket-venster.md)

---

# How do I copy an event or standard ticket?

**Answer:** On the event tile, click the three-dot menu (Actions) and choose "Create a Copy". Confirm the question "Do you want to make a copy of this item?". Jimani makes a copy with the same settings, dates and ticket types and adds "(copy)" after the name.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to the Event tickets tab (or Standard tickets) in Ticketing management or Ticket sales.
- **Step 2.** On the tile, open the three-dot menu (Actions) and choose **Create a Copy**.
- **Step 3.** Confirm. You see "Copy created successfully." If it does not work, it says "Copying did not work. Please try again."
- **What is copied.** The name and description in all languages, the image, the settings (scan rule, discount, sales options) and, for an event, also the dates, times and chosen ticket types per date. The copy is immediately Active and is placed at the bottom of the order.
- **The name.** The copy is called, for example, "Summer Party (copy)". A second copy is called "Summer Party (copy 2)".
- **Adjust the dates.** The copy has the same dates as the original. Open the copy and adjust the Date list before you put it in the widget.
- **Also for ticket types.** The Actions menu has the same option for Ticket types and for the extra products and transaction costs on the Products tab.

**Example:** An organiser who gives a similar performance every month copies the previous event and only changes the dates and the name.

**Related questions:**

- How do I duplicate an event?
- Can I copy an event with the same dates and tickets?
- How do I make a copy of a standard ticket?
- What happens to the name when I make a copy?

**Keywords:** copy event, duplicate event, make copy event, recurring event, copy standard ticket

**Related:** [How do I create an event with tickets, also with multiple dates?](evenement-aanmaken.md), [How do I temporarily turn off an event or delete it?](evenement-uitzetten-of-verwijderen.md)

---

# How do I temporarily turn off an event or delete it?

**Answer:** On the event tile, choose Deactivate or Send to Trash in the Actions menu (three dots). A deactivated event no longer appears in the widget but is kept. You restore it from the trash with the switch "Show only deleted items".

**Explanation:**

- **Temporarily off sale.** Choose **Deactivate** in the Actions menu of the tile. The event can then no longer be bought in the widget. With **Activate** you put it back. You can also set Show in widget to No in the event settings.
- **Deleting.** Choose **Send to Trash**. You get the question "Do you want to delete the data?" with the title "Delete this object". Inside the event window there is also a Delete button.
- **Restoring.** At the top right, turn on the switch **Show only deleted items**. You then see only deleted items. Activate one with Activate and confirm "This has been deleted, do you want to make it active again?". The switch stays on for a day (or until you turn it off).
- **Also for ticket types.** The Actions menu works the same for Ticket types (a deactivated ticket type gets the label Inactive).

**Example:** A show has been rescheduled. You deactivate the event, adjust the dates and activate it again.

**Related questions:**

- How do I temporarily take an event off my website?
- How do I delete an event?
- Can I get a deleted event back?
- What is the difference between deactivating and sending to the trash?

**Keywords:** delete event, deactivate event, restore event, trash event, remove event from widget

**Related:** [How do I copy an event or standard ticket?](evenement-kopieren.md), [Can I hide an event until sales begin?](evenement-verbergen-tot-verkoopstart.md)

---

# Can I hide an event until sales begin?

**Answer:** Yes. For the event (or standard ticket), set "Start time sale" to Yes and choose the date and time when sales open. Until then, the event does not appear in your ticket widget. If you do not want to show it at all, set "Show in widget" to No.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open the event on the Event tickets tab (or Standard tickets) and use Next to go to the step with the sales options.
- **Step 2.** Set **Start time sale** to Yes. A date field and a time field appear; fill in both. You cannot save without a date or time.
- **Step 3.** Click Save. From the chosen moment, the event appears in the widget automatically.
- **Show in widget.** If this is set to No, the event stays out of the widget even after the start time. Use this to sell an event only through the POS or the dashboard.
- **The event itself stays visible in your management.** You can keep editing it; only the buyer does not see it yet.

**Example:** You announce an event for next month, but only open sales in two weeks: Start time sale set to Yes, date in two weeks, 10:00.

**Related questions:**

- How do I make sure ticket sales only start at a certain moment?
- Can I prepare an event without it being visible?
- How do I set a start time for sales?
- How do I hide an event in the widget?

**Keywords:** hide event, start sales later, start time sale, tickets available later, do not show event widget

**Related:** [How do I create an event with tickets, also with multiple dates?](evenement-aanmaken.md), [How do I temporarily turn off an event or delete it?](evenement-uitzetten-of-verwijderen.md)

---

# Can I set a maximum number of tickets per order?

**Answer:** Yes, in two places. For the event, set "Ticket limit per sale" to Yes and choose a number; under View in the widget, enter "Maximum tickets per order". If the buyer exceeds a limit, they cannot continue. A new ticket widget automatically gets 20.

**Explanation:**

- **Per event.** Open the event or standard ticket, set **Ticket limit per sale** to Yes and use the plus and minus buttons to choose the number. It applies to the number of tickets for that event in one order.
- **Per widget.** Open Settings > Guests and bookings > Widgets, open your ticket widget and choose the **View** tab. Under Ticket sales you find **Maximum tickets per order**. 0 means no limit. The limit applies to all tickets in the whole order combined.
- **Which one applies?** If an event has its own limit, the lower of the two applies.
- **What the buyer sees.** Above the limit, the widget says: "You can buy at most N tickets in one order." The server checks this once more, so bypassing it via the browser does not work.
- **Existing widgets.** A widget that already existed without this setting has no limit until you enter one yourself.
- **How many are left.** In addition, the buyer can never buy more than what is left. If there are too few, the widget says "Only N tickets are still available."
- **In the dashboard.** When you create a ticket reservation yourself, the event's Ticket limit per sale also applies.

**Example:** You set the widget to 10 and a popular event to Ticket limit per sale 6. Someone who buys tickets for only that event may buy 6; someone who also buys for another event may buy 10 in total.

**Related questions:**

- How do I limit the number of tickets someone can buy at once?
- Why can't a buyer order more than 20 tickets?
- Where do I set the ticket limit per sale?
- How do I prevent one person from buying up all the tickets?

**Keywords:** maximum tickets per order, ticket limit, prevent scalpers, limit tickets per purchase, maximum number of tickets

**Related:** [How do I create an event with tickets, also with multiple dates?](evenement-aanmaken.md), [Can I give a discount for multiple tickets at once?](korting-bij-meerdere-tickets.md)

---

# Can I give a discount for multiple tickets at once?

**Answer:** Yes. For each event or standard ticket you can set two discounts: "Discount 1" and "Discount 2". You choose a percentage and from how many tickets in one order it applies. The buyer automatically gets the highest discount their quantity qualifies for.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open the event or standard ticket and use Next to go to the last step. There you find **Discount 1** and **Discount 2**.
- **Step 2.** Set Discount 1 to Yes. You see two fields: a percentage ("% Discount per") and a number of tickets. Enter 10 and 4, for example: 10% discount from 4 tickets. The percentage has at most two digits.
- **Step 3.** Use Discount 2 for a second tier, for example 20% from 8 tickets. Click Save.
- **How is it calculated?** The server counts the tickets for that event in the order (all ticket types combined) and picks the highest discount for which the quantity is large enough. The discount applies to the amount of those tickets, rounded to cents. Extra products and transaction costs get no discount.
- **Where does it work?** In the ticket widget and when you create a ticket reservation yourself in the dashboard.
- **Price tier per ticket type?** No, the discount belongs to the event, not to a ticket type.
- **E-ticket.** After the order, the buyer receives the tickets with a QR code by email. See [How do I resend a ticket to the buyer or print it?](ticket-opnieuw-mailen.md).

**Example:** Discount 1 is 10% from 4 tickets and Discount 2 is 20% from 8 tickets. A group of 5 pays 10% less, a group of 9 pays 20% less.

**Related questions:**

- How do I give a group discount when buying multiple tickets?
- Can I give a discount from five tickets?
- Can I set two discounts with different percentages?
- Which discount does the buyer get automatically?

**Keywords:** group discount tickets, discount multiple tickets, tiered discount event, bulk discount, discount from number of tickets

**Related:** [Can I set a maximum number of tickets per order?](max-tickets-per-bestelling.md), [How do I create an event with tickets, also with multiple dates?](evenement-aanmaken.md)

---

# How do I sell day passes with their own price and quantity per day?

**Answer:** Create a ticket type of the kind Standard ticket and, in the Prices step, enter the price and the Ticket limit per day, or import them with Excel. Attach the ticket type to a standard ticket, set your Opening hours to Open and create a widget. A day without a day price is not for sale.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** In Opening hours, turn on the **Open** switch for the days you are open (see [How do I set the opening hours of ticket sales, also for public holidays?](openingstijden-kaartverkoop.md)). Only open days can be sold.
- **Step 2.** On the Ticket types tab, create a ticket type with kind of ticket **Standard ticket**. In the **Prices** step, you choose a year (this year and the next two) and a month and enter the price per day. If you have more guest groups (for example Adults and Children), you see a price column per group. Also enter the **Ticket limit**: how many tickets there are on that day.
- **Step 3.** It is faster with Excel: click the Excel icon to export all days, adjust the prices and limits, choose the file under **Select Excel file** ("Choose a file") and click the import icon. The file must contain all days of this year and the next two years, so use the export as a basis.
- **Step 4.** If a cell contains something that is not an amount, Jimani reports it with the column name first: "'abc' is not an amount. Write it as 2.50." Correct the cell and import again.
- **Step 5.** On the Standard tickets tab, create a standard ticket and choose the ticket types that belong to it. See [What is the difference between an event ticket and a standard ticket?](verschil-evenementticket-standaardticket.md).
- **Stock.** The number of tickets sold counts per day. Once the Ticket limit of a day is reached, that day is sold out. An empty Ticket limit counts as 0, so nothing is for sale.
- **Day price also as a product.** The same day prices appear on the Products tab as a product of the kind Day price. There you can also open them, adjust the VAT group and import or export the prices.

**Example:** A zoo sets the Adult Day Pass at € 18, and at € 21 in the summer holidays, with a Ticket limit of 1500 per day. A day without a filled-in price does not appear in the widget.

**Related questions:**

- How do I sell day passes with a different price per day?
- How do I set a maximum number of tickets per day?
- Can I fill in day prices in Excel and import them?
- Why is a day not for sale in the widget?

**Keywords:** day price tickets, sell day pass, price per day, excel import prices, ticket limit per day, standard ticket price

**Related:** [How do I set the opening hours of ticket sales, also for public holidays?](openingstijden-kaartverkoop.md), [How do I create a ticket type, such as Adult, Child or VIP?](ticketsoort-aanmaken.md), [What can you set for the products of Ticket sales?](../naslag/producten-kaartverkoop.md)

---

# How do I set the opening hours of ticket sales, also for public holidays?

**Answer:** Go to Ticketing management (or Ticket sales) and open the Opening hours tab. Choose the year and the month and set the switch for each day to Open or Closed, with the times Open from and Open until. Changes are saved automatically. Standard tickets can only be bought on days that are set to Open.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open the **Opening hours** tab. At the top, choose the year (this year and the next two) and the month.
- **Step 2.** For each day you see the Date, Open from, Open until and the Open/Closed switch. Adjust the times and set the switch to **Open** or **Closed**. No Save button is needed: "Changes are saved automatically."
- **Mind the times.** The times Open from and Open until only count if the day is set to Open. A day that is set to Closed is not for sale.
- **Public holiday or exception.** Set that one day to Closed or give it different times. The other days do not change.
- **Fill in quickly with Excel.** Click the Excel icon to export all days of the next three years, edit the file and choose it under **Select Excel file** ("Choose a file"). Then click the import icon. The file must contain all days of this year and the next two years, and for every day Open from must be earlier than Open until.
- **New days.** In the export, days for which nothing has been filled in yet are shown as closed (10:00 to 22:00). So set the days you are open to Open yourself.
- **Today.** After today's closing time, today is no longer for sale (if Open until says 00:00, midnight applies).
- **Blocking days.** If you want to block one day or a time slot without changing the opening hours, use the Time limitation tab. See [How do I block a day or time slot for ticket sales?](dag-of-tijdvak-blokkeren.md).

**Example:** Your park is closed on 25 December. Set the switch for 25 December to Closed; the day pass is not for sale that day, and the other days stay as they were.

**Related questions:**

- How do I set the days on which I sell tickets?
- How do I set a public holiday to closed for ticket sales?
- Can I adjust the opening hours of ticket sales per month?
- Why is a standard ticket not for sale on a certain day?

**Keywords:** opening hours ticket sales, public holiday closed, close day tickets, import opening hours, tickets only on open days

**Related:** [How do I block a day or time slot for ticket sales?](dag-of-tijdvak-blokkeren.md), [How do I sell day passes with their own price and quantity per day?](dagkaarten-met-dagprijs.md), [How does the Opening hours tab work?](../naslag/openingstijden-tabblad.md)

---

# How do I block a day or time slot for ticket sales?

**Answer:** Go to the Time limitation tab, click the plus button at the top right and choose Time limitation. Give the block a name, choose Yes under "Day restriction" for whole days or No for a time slot, choose the ticket types and the dates in the calendar, and click Save.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Ticketing management (or Ticket sales) > **Time limitation** tab and click the plus button at the top right. Choose **Time limitation**.
- **Step 2.** Enter a **Name**. The name is only visible internally. Under **Day restriction**, choose Yes if the block applies for the full duration of the chosen dates. Choose No for a time slot: you then enter **Time from** and **Time to**.
- **Step 3.** If you want to block something until 19:00, for example, set the time to 18:59.
- **Step 4.** Select at least one **ticket type**. Without a ticket type, the screen says "Please select at least one ticket type."
- **Step 5.** In the calendar, choose the **Dates**: single days, whole weeks or whole months by clicking on them. Use the arrows to go to other years. Click Save.
- **On and off.** In the window of an existing block there is Active. If you turn it off, it no longer blocks, without you having to delete it.
- **Overview.** The list shows for each block the Name, the ticket types, the Date ("More than one date has been selected" for many dates), Blocking of and Block up to.
- **Effect on the widget.** A block for a whole day removes that day from the sale of standard tickets in the widget.
- **Fixed closed days.** For days on which you are structurally closed, use the Opening hours. See [How do I set the opening hours of ticket sales, also for public holidays?](openingstijden-kaartverkoop.md).

**Example:** Because of a staff shortage, you do not sell day passes on 3 and 4 March. Create a Time limitation "Staff shortage March", Day restriction Yes, choose the ticket type Day pass and the two dates.

**Related questions:**

- How do I stop ticket sales for a certain day?
- Can I block tickets for a time slot, for example during a staff shortage?
- How do I close sales for one ticket type?
- Where do I create a time limitation for tickets?

**Keywords:** time limitation, block day tickets, stop sales temporarily, staff shortage, block time slot

**Related:** [How do I set the opening hours of ticket sales, also for public holidays?](openingstijden-kaartverkoop.md), [What can you set for a Time limitation for tickets?](../naslag/tijdsbeperking-tabblad.md)

---

# Can I sell extra products with a ticket, such as a drink or parking pass?

**Answer:** Yes. On the Products tab, create an extra product and choose it on the ticket type under "Extra products". The buyer can add it to their tickets and pays for everything in the same order. Extra products do not get the ticket discount.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open the **Products** tab, click the plus button and choose **Products**. Choose the kind **Extra products**.
- **Step 2.** Enter the name and description (visible in the widget), the price (including VAT) and the VAT group. Optionally add an image.
- **Step 3.** Set **Show in widget** to Yes if the buyer should be able to choose it in the widget themselves. If set to No, the product stays out of the widget.
- **Step 4.** Open the ticket type (Ticket types tab) and, under **Extra products**, choose the products that belong to this ticket type. Click Save.
- **When is it offered?** The extra products come from the first ticket type in the order. An extra product that is not attached to that ticket type is rejected ("This extra product does not belong to these tickets.").
- **List view.** Set List view to Yes on the extra product, and the ordered extra products appear in the memo field of the reservation overview. Handy for seeing quickly what was ordered.
- **Turning on and off.** The Actions menu of the tile has Deactivate or Activate and Create a Copy.
- **Transaction costs.** Costs that you pass on to the buyer are a separate kind of product. See [Can I pass on transaction costs to the buyer of a ticket?](transactiekosten-doorrekenen.md).
- **No revenue claim.** How much extra revenue this brings in depends on your offering; Jimani does not state a percentage here.

**Example:** The extra product "Parking pass € 5" is attached to the ticket type Adult Day Pass. The buyer adds it in the widget and pays for everything at once.

**Related questions:**

- Can I sell a drink or parking pass in addition to tickets?
- How do I let buyers add extra products?
- Do extra products also get a discount?
- Where do I create an extra product for a ticket?

**Keywords:** extra products tickets, upsell tickets, parking pass with ticket, drink with ticket, additional sales event

**Related:** [How do I create a ticket type, such as Adult, Child or VIP?](ticketsoort-aanmaken.md), [What can you set for the products of Ticket sales?](../naslag/producten-kaartverkoop.md)

---

# Can I pass on transaction costs to the buyer of a ticket?

**Answer:** Yes, with the Transaction costs add-on (which requires a Mollie connection). On the Products tab, you create a product of the kind Transaction costs with a fixed amount and choose it on the ticket type under "Transaction costs". The costs are added to the customer's bill.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on the **Transaction costs** add-on under Settings > Add-ons. Without a connected Mollie account, it is not available.
- **Step 2.** Open the **Products** tab, click the plus button and choose **Transaction costs**. Enter the name, optionally a description, the price (including VAT) and the VAT group.
- **Step 3.** Open the ticket type (Ticket types tab) and choose the product under **Transaction costs**. "No transaction cost" is on by default. Click Save.
- **How is it charged?** As one fixed amount per order, not per ticket. The amount comes from the first ticket type in the order. It appears separately on the buyer's invoice with its own VAT.
- **Only if the amount is above 0.** If the price is set to 0, no line is added to the order.
- **Mollie.** Mollie also charges you its own rate per payment; that is separate from what you charge the buyer.
- **On/off.** On the product tile, you can deactivate or copy it with the Actions menu.

**Example:** You create "Service costs € 1.50" and link it to all ticket types. A buyer who orders 4 tickets pays for the tickets plus € 1.50 once.

**Related questions:**

- Can I charge the buyer booking fees?
- What do I need to pass on transaction costs?
- How do I set a fixed amount of service costs per ticket?
- Where do I choose transaction costs on a ticket type?

**Keywords:** transaction costs tickets, pass on service costs, administration fee ticket, costs to buyer, pass on mollie costs

**Related:** [Can I pass transaction costs on to my guests?](../../algemeen/faq/transactiekosten-doorberekenen.md), [What does ticket selling via Jimani cost?](../../prijzen/faq/wat-kost-kaartverkoop.md), [Can I sell extra products with a ticket, such as a drink or parking pass?](extra-producten-bij-ticket.md)

---

# How do I ask the buyer of a ticket extra questions, such as a date of birth or allergy?

**Answer:** On the Fields tab, create a field, choose the type (for example Text box, Date or Drop-down) and the events it applies to, and optionally link it to a ticket type. The buyer answers it when ordering and you see the answer in the reservation.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Ticketing management (or Ticket sales) > **Fields** tab, click the plus button and choose **Fields**.
- **Step 2.** For the field, choose the events or standard tickets it applies to (at least one, otherwise the screen says "Please select at least one ticket type."). With **Select all** you choose them all.
- **Step 3.** Choose the **Type**: Text box, Large text box, Time slot, Date, Checkbox, Selection box multiple choices, Radio button, Number field, Phone, Drop-down, Label, Link or Terms and conditions. For a drop-down or radio button, you enter the **Options**.
- **Step 4.** Enter the **Name** (what the buyer sees) and the explanation; this appears as light grey text in the field itself.
- **Step 5.** Adjust the **Settings**: Show field name, Required (default Yes), Show when booking manually, List view and Show in widget. Click Save.
- **Dynamic field.** Set "Do you want to make this field dynamic?" to Yes if the field should only appear after a certain answer to another field. You choose the main field and the value.
- **Where do you see the answers?** With List view set to Yes, the answer appears with the memos in the reservation overview, and the answer is in the reservation itself.
- **Per ticket type.** You can also choose fields on the ticket type itself (Fields step), so that a question only belongs to that kind of ticket, for example a questionnaire for a group reservation.

**Example:** For a film with an age limit, you create the field "Date of birth" (type Date, Required Yes). For a group reservation, you see the answer in the list.

**Related questions:**

- How do I ask buyers for their date of birth when ordering?
- Can I have an allergy filled in with a ticket?
- Where do I see the buyer's answers?
- How do I add a question of my own to the ticket order?

**Keywords:** extra fields ticket, questions at order, date of birth tickets, ticket form, custom fields reservation, ask about allergy

**Related:** [What can you set for a field (extra question) for tickets?](../naslag/velden-tabblad.md), [How do I create a ticket type, such as Adult, Child or VIP?](ticketsoort-aanmaken.md)

---

# How do I scan tickets at the entrance?

**Answer:** Open Scan in the menu, scan the QR code with a handheld scanner or the camera (or type the ticket number) and tap Check. The screen turns big green if the ticket is valid and red if it is rejected, with the reason. Scanning works when the Scanner add-on is turned on.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Under Settings > Add-ons, turn on the **Scanner** add-on. This makes **Scan** appear at the bottom of the menu, unless the scanner button is set to No in the module's menu settings.
- **Step 2.** Open **Scan**. The screen has no menu, so on a tablet or phone at the door it fills the whole screen. If you want to go back, choose "Back to dashboard".
- **Step 3.** Scan the code. A handheld scanner works like a keyboard: it types the code in the "Scan or type a code" field and presses Enter. With the **Camera** button you use the device's camera. With **Check** you run a typed code.
- **Step 4.** Optionally choose one event under **Event**, so that tickets for another event are rejected. "All events" allows everything.
- **Step 5.** Read the result. Green is access, red is rejected. You see the message, the name, the ticket type, "Ticket 2 of 4" for an order of multiple tickets and "Scan 2 of 3" if there is a maximum. Under **Recent scans** is the list for this session.
- **Multiple entrances.** You can scan on multiple devices at the same time. If two devices scan the same ticket at the same moment, only one becomes valid.
- **What is checked?** Whether the ticket belongs to your business, is not cancelled, belongs to the chosen event, has been paid, is valid at this moment (not too early, not expired) and whether the scan rule still allows a scan.
- **Where do you see it again?** A valid scan counts as the arrival of that ticket: in the reservation overview, Total visitors shows, for example, 2/4. In the ticket information, the **QR scan logbook** tab lists every scan with Date and time, Status, Reason, Device and User.
- **Which messages?** See [What do the messages mean when scanning tickets?](scanmeldingen-betekenis.md).
- **Which code?** The ticket number, the QR code on the ticket (also on the ticket receipt from the POS) and the reservation key are recognised. The POS app uses the same check.

![The Scan screen with the Scan or type a code field and the Check and Camera buttons](/kennisbank/beelden/tickets-scannen-bij-de-ingang-1.webp)

**Example:** At the entrance of a concert, an employee scans with a handheld scanner. A buyer with 3 tickets arrives and has each ticket scanned; the screen shows "Ticket 1 of 3", then "Ticket 2 of 3".

**Related questions:**

- How do I scan visitors' tickets?
- Can I scan with my phone's camera?
- Can I enter a ticket number manually?
- Why isn't scanning working?

**Keywords:** scan tickets, access control, scan qr code, handheld scanner tickets, check entrance, scan multiple entrances

**Related:** [How often may a ticket be scanned and how do I set that?](scanregels-instellen.md), [Does every ticket have its own QR code?](qr-code-per-ticket.md), [What do the messages mean when scanning tickets?](scanmeldingen-betekenis.md)

---

# How often may a ticket be scanned and how do I set that?

**Answer:** For the event or the ticket type, choose the Scan rule: 1x, 1x per day, 1x per number of minutes or Unlimited. With "Maximum number of scans" you limit the total. The ticket type's rule takes precedence; if it is set to "Same as event", the event's rule applies.

**Explanation:**

- **1x.** The ticket works once. Every following scan is rejected. This is the default for a new event.
- **1x per day.** The ticket works once per calendar day, handy for a pass that is valid for several days.
- **1x per number of minutes.** Under **Scan interval**, choose how many minutes must at least pass between two scans of the same ticket (1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 45, 60, 120 or 240). The field only appears with this rule.
- **Unlimited.** The ticket may be scanned again and again, for example for a pass with which guests may come and go freely.
- **Maximum number of scans.** An optional total that you can enter for every rule except "1x". If you leave it empty, there is no maximum. Once it is reached, the scanner says "Maximum number of scans reached (N)".
- **Where do you set it?** For an event, in the step with Colour and Scan rule. For a ticket type, in the Colour and duration step; there you can also choose "Same as event". This way VIP can be unlimited while the regular ticket type is set to 1x.
- **Pass valid for several days.** If the rule is set to 1x via the event or standard ticket, such a pass may still enter once per day. Only a rule "1x" of its own on the ticket type is truly once.

**Example:** A swimming pool sells a weekly pass (Validity 1 week) with the scan rule 1x per day. A guest can enter once every day.

**Related questions:**

- How often may a ticket be scanned?
- Can I set a ticket to work only once per day?
- How do I limit the total number of scans of a pass?
- What is the difference between the scan rule of the event and of the ticket type?

**Keywords:** scan rule, scan ticket multiple times, rescan, maximum number of scans, scan interval, prevent double scanning

**Related:** [How do I scan tickets at the entrance?](tickets-scannen-bij-de-ingang.md), [What do the messages mean when scanning tickets?](scanmeldingen-betekenis.md)

---

# Does every ticket have its own QR code?

**Answer:** Yes. Every ticket sold gets its own ticket number and QR code. If someone orders four tickets, that is four QR codes, and you scan each ticket separately. The tickets are in the confirmation email as a PDF and you can also print them yourself.

**Explanation:**

- **Ticket number.** The number is the reservation key with a sequence number after it, for example "…-001". When scanning, the scanner shows "Ticket 2 of 4".
- **View it yourself.** Open a reservation under Tickets (or Reservations) and choose the **Tickets** tab. For each ticket you see Valid from, Valid until, Ticket type, Name, the Status (Valid, Used or Cancelled) and the **QR Code** button. There you can also **Print** the QR code.
- **Cancel one ticket.** If the order has more than one open ticket, you see the **Cancel ticket** button for each ticket. The QR code of that ticket then becomes invalid and the place goes back on sale.
- **Print PDF.** In the ticket information, choose **Print (PDF)** under **More**: the same PDF with the tickets as in the email.
- **Preventing misuse.** A ticket works according to the scan rule; a second scan of a ticket that has already been used is rejected. See [How often may a ticket be scanned and how do I set that?](scanregels-instellen.md).
- **POS.** Tickets that you sell at the door also get a QR code on a receipt, one receipt per ticket, after the bill.

**Example:** A visitor buys two tickets online and receives one PDF with two QR codes. At the entrance, the employee scans each code separately.

**Related questions:**

- Does every visitor get their own QR code?
- With four tickets, is that four QR codes?
- Where are the tickets in the confirmation email?
- Can I print tickets myself?

**Keywords:** qr code ticket, ticket number, unique qr per ticket, ticket pdf, print ticket, cancel single ticket

**Related:** [How do I scan tickets at the entrance?](tickets-scannen-bij-de-ingang.md), [How do I cancel a ticket or a whole ticket order?](ticket-annuleren.md)

---

# What do the messages mean when scanning tickets?

**Answer:** Green means access: "Welcome" at the first scan and "Welcome back" at a following permitted scan. Red means rejected, with the reason in the message, for example "Already scanned at 14:05", "Not paid", "Cancelled" or "Too early: valid from ...". The table below says what to do then.

**Explanation:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Welcome | Valid ticket, first entry | Let the guest in |
| Welcome back | Valid ticket that the scan rule allows once more | Let the guest in |
| Still to pay at the POS | The ticket is valid but not yet paid (only if paying on arrival is allowed) | Have the guest pay first |
| Already scanned at (time) | The scan rule does not allow a new scan | Refuse; the logbook in the ticket information shows the earlier scan |
| Maximum number of scans reached | The ticket has been used as often as allowed | Refuse, or raise the maximum on the ticket type |
| Not paid | The order has not been paid | Have the guest pay via the POS or the dashboard |
| Cancelled | The reservation or that one ticket has been cancelled | Refuse |
| Too early: valid from (time) | The ticket is not valid yet | Ask the guest to come back later |
| Expired: was valid until (time) | The validity has ended | Refuse |
| This ticket is for another event | You have chosen an event on the screen and the ticket belongs to another one | Choose the right event or All events |
| This ticket is from another business | The code does not belong to your business | Refuse |
| Unknown code | The code is not known anywhere | Check the code or type the ticket number |
| Something went wrong, please scan again | A technical error | Scan once more |

- **Below the message.** You see the name, the ticket type, "Ticket 2 of 4" and "Scan 2 of 3" if there is a maximum.
- **User and device.** Every scan, including a rejected one, goes into the QR scan logbook of the reservation.

**Related questions:**

- What does the red message when scanning mean?
- What does welcome back mean when scanning?
- Why is a ticket rejected if it has already been scanned?
- What should I do if a ticket has not been paid at the entrance?

**Keywords:** scan message, already scanned, ticket rejected, not paid scan, scanned too early, expired ticket

**Related:** [How do I scan tickets at the entrance?](tickets-scannen-bij-de-ingang.md), [How often may a ticket be scanned and how do I set that?](scanregels-instellen.md)

---

# How do I sell tickets at the POS or at the door?

**Answer:** With Ticket sales turned on, your ticket types automatically appear as tiles in the POS, in the Tickets category. Tap a tile, choose the day or time slot and the quantities, tap "On the receipt" and pay. After payment, one receipt with a QR code comes out of the receipt printer per ticket. The stock is the same as for online sales.

**Explanation:**

- **Requirement.** The **Ticket sales** add-on is turned on and the ticket type is active. You do not need to create anything in the POS: the POS keeps track of the ticket types itself (new, renamed, off).
- **Step 1.** In the POS, open the **Tickets** category. Each ticket type has a tile with "N left", "Sold out" or "Not for sale today".
- **Step 2.** Tap the tile. A window opens with the days or time slots that are for sale, each with "N left" or "Sold out". A standard ticket shows every open day from today; for an event, you choose the date and the time slot.
- **Step 3.** Use minus and plus to choose the quantity per guest group (for example Adults and Children). You see the number of tickets and the amount. If the quantity equals what is left, it says "There are N tickets left."
- **Step 4.** Tap **On the receipt**. You see "N tickets on the receipt". Then pay as usual with cash, card payment or another payment method.
- **Step 5.** After payment, the POS prints the tickets: one receipt per ticket with a QR code, on this POS's receipt printer. If the POS has no printer, it asks which printer you want to use.
- **If the ticket is not on a paid receipt.** The ticket then stays reserved for at most three hours; after that it goes back into stock.
- **Internet.** Selling and scanning tickets in the POS only works with internet: "Selling tickets only works with an internet connection."
- **Scanning at the bar.** The **Scan ticket** button looks up a ticket ("Scan the QR code or type the ticket number") and lets you put a credit on the receipt, if the ticket has a credit.
- **Viewing it again.** The tickets sold are under Tickets (menu) in the reservation overview. See [How do I see how many tickets I have sold, per day, week or ticket type?](verkochte-tickets-bekijken.md).
- **By phone or at the desk with a name.** If you want to record the guest's details, create a reservation yourself. See [How do I create a ticket reservation myself, for example by phone or at the desk?](ticketreservering-zelf-aanmaken.md).

**Example:** A visitor is at the door and wants 2 adults and 1 child. You tap the Day pass tile, choose today, set 2 for Adults and 1 for Children, tap On the receipt and charge € 40. Three receipts with a QR code come out.

**Related questions:**

- How do I sell tickets at the door?
- Where do I find the tickets in the POS?
- Does a receipt with a QR code come out of the printer after payment?
- Is the stock at the POS the same as online?

**Keywords:** tickets pos, door sales, tickets at the desk, sell tickets at the door, ticket receipt qr, pos tickets

**Related:** [How do I scan tickets at the entrance?](tickets-scannen-bij-de-ingang.md), [What can I do with Ticket sales in Jimani?](wat-is-kaartverkoop.md)

---

# How do I create a ticket reservation myself, for example by phone or at the desk?

**Answer:** Go to Tickets (or Reservations), click the plus button "Create reservation", choose the event, the date, the ticket type and the quantities, fill in the guest details and click Pay. You choose the payment method or "Pay later" and decide whether the guest receives an email.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** In the menu, open **Tickets** (in the POS module) or **Reservations** (in a separate ticket module) and click the plus button **Create reservation**.
- **Step 2.** Under **Event tickets**, choose the event or standard ticket. Under **Arrival date and time**, choose the date (for an event, one of the dates; for a standard ticket, an open day using plus and minus). You see the Opening hours and the number of tickets available.
- **Step 3.** Choose the **Ticket types** and the quantities. For a standard ticket, you enter the quantity per guest group; for an event, the **Quantity**. The Ticket limit per sale and the available tickets limit the quantity.
- **Step 4.** Look up an existing guest under **Search** (by email address or phone number) or fill in the details. Choose the **Language** for the email. For a visitor without details, tick **Passer-by (no guest details)** and enter only the **Reservation name**. With **Check in now** you immediately set the guest to arrived.
- **Step 5.** Under **Products**, choose the extra products and, under **Extra information**, fill in the fields you created for the event. Optionally put a note in **Internal memo**.
- **Step 6.** Under **Your invoice**, you see the Total excluding VAT, the VAT, the Total amount, the Total paid and the Outstanding amount. Click **Pay**.
- **Step 7.** In "Choose a payment method", choose: Cash, Card, Tap to Pay, Pay later, Pay other or Pay on account. Which ones appear depends on your settings. With Pay later, the reservation is booked without payment.
- **Step 8.** After booking, Jimani asks "What action should be taken?": **Send email** sends the confirmation with the tickets, **No email** does not.
- **Editing.** Open the reservation in the overview and choose Open reservation to change it.
- **Unpaid.** A reservation that has not been paid yet appears in the overview as Unpaid; the scanner rejects it with "Not paid", unless paying on arrival is allowed.

**Example:** A customer calls for 4 tickets for Saturday. You choose the event, the date, the ticket type Adult, set Quantity to 4, look up the customer by email address, click Pay and choose Pay later. The customer receives the confirmation with 4 QR codes.

**Related questions:**

- How do I sell tickets to someone who calls?
- How do I create a ticket order at the desk?
- Can I let an order be paid later?
- How do I decide whether the customer gets an email?

**Keywords:** create ticket reservation, manual booking tickets, tickets by phone, desk sales, passer-by, pay later tickets

**Related:** [How do I sell tickets at the POS or at the door?](tickets-aan-de-kassa.md), [How does the Add reservation window for tickets work?](../naslag/ticketreservering-venster.md)

---

# How do I see how many tickets I have sold, per day, week or ticket type?

**Answer:** Open Tickets (or Reservations) in the menu, choose the day and look at the List view, Weekly list or Totals tab. Under Totals you see per ticket type how many tickets were sold per day or per week. For development over a longer period, use the Progress report.

**Explanation:**

- **List view.** Choose a day with the minus button, the date field and the plus button. You see "Overview of reservations on:" the chosen day, with for each reservation the Name, the Quantity, the Ticket type and whether it is Paid or Unpaid. Filter on **Select event** and **Select Type** or search with "Search by:".
- **Weekly list.** The same list for a whole week ("Weekly list … Up to …").
- **Last 100 reservations.** The 100 newest reservations, handy for seeing what has just come in.
- **Totals.** This tab has two parts: **Day totals** and **Week totals**. Per ticket type, you count the number of tickets per guest group and the Total, with a total line at the bottom.
- **Choose columns.** With the filter icon above the list, you choose which columns you see: Total visitors, Date, Date to, Name, Ticket group, Duration, Quantity, Ticket type, Payment, Created and Memo. This icon and the Excel icon are available to the owner and to employees with the Exports permission.
- **Print and export.** The print icon (Printing permission) makes a printout of the list, the Excel icon exports it.
- **Only paid tickets?** For the income, look at the Payment column: Paid or Unpaid.
- **Development over time.** In Settings > Money and figures > Reports, choose the Progress report for tickets. You compare a period with an earlier period, per day, week or month, and filter on Source (Widget, Employee or POS).
- **What counts?** Cancelled tickets do not count by default in the Progress report ("Include cancelled" is set to No).

**Example:** On Friday morning you open Totals > Day totals and see that 143 tickets have been sold for tonight, of which 98 Adult and 45 Child.

**Related questions:**

- How many tickets have I sold today?
- Can I view sales per ticket type?
- Where do I see sales per week?
- Where do I find the development of my ticket sales over a longer period?

**Keywords:** tickets sold, sales figures tickets, tickets per day, totals tickets, insight ticket sales, report tickets

**Related:** [Can I keep track of visitor numbers per day?](bezoekersaantallen-per-dag.md), [How does the Reservations overview for tickets work?](../naslag/reserveringen-overzicht.md)

---

# Can I keep track of visitor numbers per day?

**Answer:** Yes. Every valid scan counts as an arrival. In the reservation overview, you see for each reservation the Total visitors column as "arrived/quantity", for example 2/4. This way you know how many guests are already inside and how many are still to come.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Tickets (or Reservations) and choose the day in the List view.
- **Step 2.** Look at **Total visitors**. The value 2/4 means that 2 of the 4 tickets of that reservation have been scanned. If the column is not in your list, turn it on with the filter icon (choose columns).
- **Hide arrived.** Turn on **Hide "Guest arrived"** to remove the reservations with the status Arrived from the list.
- **Status.** With **Select status** (for the owner and employees with the Filters permission), you filter on the status of the reservations.
- **Who came in when.** Open the reservation (info icon) and choose the **QR scan logbook** tab: Date and time, Status, Reason, Device, User and Ticket key of every scan, including rejected ones.
- **Total over the day.** In the Progress report for tickets, the Tickets series shows the quantities per day, week or month.
- **Scanning is required.** Without a scan, a ticket does not count as arrived. A guest you create yourself can be recorded as arrived right away with **Check in now**.

**Example:** A family booked 4 tickets. After two of the four QR codes have been scanned, their reservation shows 2/4.

**Related questions:**

- How do I see how many visitors are already inside?
- Does every scan count as an arrival?
- What does 2/4 mean under total visitors?
- Can I keep track per day of how many guests have come?

**Keywords:** visitor numbers, how many guests inside, arrived tickets, count visitors, no-show tickets, busyness per day

**Related:** [How do I see how many tickets I have sold, per day, week or ticket type?](verkochte-tickets-bekijken.md), [How do I scan tickets at the entrance?](tickets-scannen-bij-de-ingang.md)

---

# How do I cancel a ticket or a whole ticket order?

**Answer:** Open the reservation under Tickets (or Reservations) and click Cancel, or cancel one ticket via the Tickets tab with "Cancel ticket". You enter a reason. A cancellation of a paid order appears in the Cancellations overview, where you handle the refund. Cancelling is no longer possible once the guest is inside.

**Explanation:**

- **Whole order.** Open the reservation via the info icon in the list. At the bottom, click **Cancel**, enter the **Reason** (required) and confirm. If the order belongs to a combination, Jimani first asks whether you want to cancel only this part or the whole combination.
- **One ticket.** Open the **Tickets** tab of the reservation and click **Cancel ticket** at the ticket. You see "Ticket cancelled, the place is back on sale": the QR code of that ticket is invalid and the place returns to stock. The button is there as long as there is more than one open ticket; you cancel the last ticket with Cancel for the whole reservation.
- **Messages.** If the ticket has already been cancelled, it says "This ticket has already been cancelled". If Jimani cannot find the ticket number, it says "Ticket not found".
- **Already scanned or inside.** A ticket that has been used cannot be cancelled as a ticket, and for a guest who is already inside, the Cancel button is off with the tooltip "Guest is already inside; cancelling is no longer possible".
- **Email to the guest.** If nothing was paid (amount 0), the cancellation email goes to the guest; if something was paid, the email with the request for a refund goes out.
- **Refunding.** Under Cancellations you find the **Refunds overview**: all cancellations on which a payment was made. There you indicate whether you want to process the refund automatically or reject it.
- **Visible in the list.** A cancelled ticket appears in the ticket list with Status Cancelled and can no longer be scanned: the scanner says "Cancelled".

**Example:** A guest calls to say that two of his four tickets are no longer needed. You open his reservation, Tickets tab, and use Cancel ticket on two tickets. The two places are back on sale.

**Related questions:**

- How do I cancel a ticket that someone has bought?
- Can I cancel one ticket from an order?
- Can I cancel a ticket if the guest is already inside?
- Where do I handle the refund of a cancelled order?

**Keywords:** cancel ticket, cancel card, cancel order, refund tickets, cancellation email, invalidate ticket

**Related:** [Does every ticket have its own QR code?](qr-code-per-ticket.md), [How do I resend a ticket to the buyer or print it?](ticket-opnieuw-mailen.md)

---

# How do I resend a ticket to the buyer or print it?

**Answer:** Open the reservation under Tickets (or Reservations), click More and choose Send email. If you have email templates for this ticket type, you choose which email and can adjust the text once. If you choose Print (PDF), you open the PDF with the tickets to print.

**Explanation:**

- **After an order.** The buyer receives the confirmation automatically, with the tickets as a PDF and a QR code per ticket. For a reservation you create yourself, you decide with "Send email" or "No email" whether the email goes out right away.
- **Resending.** Open the reservation via the info icon, click **More** at the bottom and choose **Send email**.
- **Without templates.** You get the question "Send email?" and confirm with Send email; the confirmation goes to the guest again. You see "Sent".
- **With templates.** If you have email templates for the ticket type (for example confirmation, change, cancellation, refund), you choose the kind of email, the recipient is shown under "To:", and with Editing set to Yes you can adjust the subject and the text for this one email. The tickets go along as an attachment. You can only send cancellation and refund for a cancelled reservation.
- **No email address.** If the guest has no email address, Jimani says "This guest has no email address." Add the address via the pencil next to the guest details.
- **Printing.** Under **More**, choose **Print (PDF)** for the confirmation with the tickets, the same PDF as in the email. If it does not exist yet (for example with door sales), Jimani creates it first. This is not available for a passer-by without guest details.
- **Print receipt.** If a printer is connected, **Print receipt** also appears under More.
- **One QR code.** A single ticket can be shown and **Printed** in the Tickets tab under **QR Code**.

**Example:** A buyer has lost their email. You look up the reservation by name, click More and Send email, and the tickets go to their email address again.

**Related questions:**

- The customer has not received their tickets, how do I resend them?
- How do I print tickets as a pdf?
- Can I adjust the email text before I resend the tickets?
- Where do I find the email with a customer's tickets?

**Keywords:** resend ticket, e-ticket email, lost ticket, print ticket, confirmation email tickets, pdf ticket

**Related:** [Does every ticket have its own QR code?](qr-code-per-ticket.md), [How do I cancel a ticket or a whole ticket order?](ticket-annuleren.md)

---

# Can I sell annual passes, weekly passes or multi-ride passes?

**Answer:** Yes, as a pass that you pay for once and that is valid for a certain time. On the ticket type, choose a Validity of up to 1 year and use the Scan rule and the Maximum number of scans to decide how often the pass works. Automatic renewal or periodic charging of a subscription is not part of Ticket sales.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Create a ticket type of the kind **Standard ticket** (Ticket types tab). See [How do I create a ticket type, such as Adult, Child or VIP?](ticketsoort-aanmaken.md).
- **Step 2.** Under **Validity**, choose how long the pass works: 1 to 6 days, 1 or 2 weeks, 1, 3, 6 or 9 months, or 1 year. The validity starts on the day the buyer chooses.
- **Step 3.** Under **Validity follows opening hours**, choose Yes if only the days on which you are open count, or No for consecutive calendar days.
- **Step 4.** Under **Show reservation on each active day**, choose Yes if the pass should appear in the reservation overview on every day of the validity. If set to No, it only appears on the day of issue.
- **Step 5.** Set the **Scan rule**. For an annual pass that may always be used: Unlimited. For a pass with one visit per day: 1x per day. For a multi-ride pass: Unlimited with, under **Maximum number of scans**, the number of rides, for example 10.
- **What the scanner does.** It checks the validity ("Too early: valid from …" and "Expired: was valid until …") and counts the scans ("Scan 3 of 10"). If the maximum is reached, it says "Maximum number of scans reached".
- **What is not possible.** A recurring payment or automatic renewal of a subscription is not part of Ticket sales. The buyer buys a new pass when the old one has expired.

**Example:** A swimming pool sells a Season pass (Validity 1 year, Validity follows opening hours Yes, Scan rule 1x per day) and a Ten-ride pass (Validity 6 months, Scan rule Unlimited, Maximum number of scans 10).

**Related questions:**

- Can I sell annual passes?
- How do I create a multi-ride pass with a maximum number of scans?
- Can a subscription be renewed automatically?
- How do I set how long a pass is valid?

**Keywords:** annual pass, subscription tickets, season pass, multi-ride pass, weekly pass, ticket validity

**Related:** [How often may a ticket be scanned and how do I set that?](scanregels-instellen.md), [What is the difference between an event ticket and a standard ticket?](verschil-evenementticket-standaardticket.md)

---

# How does the management of Ticket sales (Ticketing management) work?

**Answer:** The management of your tickets has seven tabs: Opening hours, Event tickets, Standard tickets, Ticket types, Products, Fields and Time limitation. With the plus button at the top right you add a new item; the tiles are the existing items.

**Where to find it:** Ticketing management (in the POS module) or Ticket sales (in a separate ticket module) in the menu (`/Ticketing`)

**Explanation:** The Event tickets and Standard tickets tabs are there when the Events and Standard ticket sales add-ons are turned on; they are turned on together with Ticket sales (Settings > Add-ons). The tab you chose last stays selected when you come back. Click the plus button at the top right: the "Ticketing settings" window shows six cards (Event tickets, Standard tickets, Ticket types, Products, Fields and Time limitation) and you choose what you want to create.

![The management of Ticket sales with the tabs Opening hours, Event tickets, Standard tickets, Ticket types, Products, Fields and Time limitation](/kennisbank/beelden/kaartverkoop-beheer-1.webp)

![The Ticketing settings window with six cards to create an event, ticket type or field](/kennisbank/beelden/kaartverkoop-beheer-2.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Plus button at the top right | Opens the Ticketing settings window | To create an event, standard ticket, ticket type, product, field or time limitation | On the Opening hours tab, you fill in the days yourself |
| Show only deleted items | Shows only items that are in the trash | To restore something | The browser remembers the choice for a day; the plus button is then hidden |
| Actions (three dots on a tile) | Deactivate or Activate, Create a Copy, Send to Trash | To temporarily turn an item off, copy it or delete it | Under Products, Deactivate and Create a Copy only appear for extra products and transaction costs |
| Inactive | Label on a ticket type that is turned off | To see which ticket types are not offered | The tile is then grey |
| Info icon on a tile | Shows the description of the item | To quickly read what is in it | - |
| "Create an event and link the right ticket types, products and fields." | Explanation above the Event tickets tiles | As a first step | - |
| "View all standard tickets here. Add new standard tickets with the Add button, or edit existing standard tickets. Fill in important details and link all ticket types." | Explanation above the Standard tickets tiles | As a first step | - |
| "View all ticket types here. Add new ticket types with the Add button, or edit existing ticket types. Enter a name and description, choose the duration and link all associated products." | Explanation above the Ticket types tiles | As a first step | - |
| "You can add fields to the ticket order, so that you can ask targeted questions during the booking process. Enter the name of the field." | Explanation above the Fields list | To ask the buyer extra questions | See [How do I ask the buyer of a ticket extra questions, such as a date of birth or allergy?](../faq/vragen-stellen-bij-ticketbestelling.md) |
| "Easily block a time slot or a whole day. You can even choose to temporarily block certain ticket sales, for example during a staff shortage." | Explanation above the Time limitation list | To close days or time slots | See [How do I block a day or time slot for ticket sales?](../faq/dag-of-tijdvak-blokkeren.md) |
| "View all activities here. Add new activities with the Add button, or edit existing activities. Link all types of products, locations, and fill in important details." | Explanation above the Products list (the text says activities, products are meant) | As a first step | The search field and the "Product types" drop-down filter the list |

**Related questions:**

- Which tabs does ticket management have?
- Where do I set up my tickets?
- How do I add a new item in ticket management?
- Where do I find ticket types, products and fields?

**Keywords:** ticketing management, manage ticket sales, tabs ticket sales, event tickets standard tickets, manage tiles, set up tickets

**Related:** [What can I do with Ticket sales in Jimani?](../faq/wat-is-kaartverkoop.md), [How do I create an event with tickets, also with multiple dates?](../faq/evenement-aanmaken.md), [How do I create a ticket type, such as Adult, Child or VIP?](../faq/ticketsoort-aanmaken.md)

---

# What can you set for an event ticket or standard ticket?

**Answer:** In the Event tickets (or Standard tickets) window, you record what the event is, when and where it takes place, which ticket types belong to it, how often a ticket may be scanned, when it appears in the widget and whether there is a discount. You go through the steps with Previous and Next and finish with Save.

**Where to find it:** Ticketing management or Ticket sales > Event tickets or Standard tickets tab > plus button (new) or a tile (edit) (`/Ticketing`)

**Explanation:** The window is called "Event tickets" for an event and "Standard tickets" for a standard ticket. For an event, you see the Date list and choose the ticket types per date; for a standard ticket, you choose the ticket types at once and there is no date list. For an existing item, the last steps show **Active** and a **Delete** button. See also [How do I create an event with tickets, also with multiple dates?](../faq/evenement-aanmaken.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name | Help text: "Enter a name. The name is visible for all kinds of reservations." | Always | At most 50 characters; per language if your business has more languages (Maximum number of characters is shown below) |
| Description | Help text: "Enter a description. The description is visible while booking via the widget." | For the text the buyer reads | At most 350 characters |
| Date and time | Help text: "Enter the date and time at which the ticket can be used." Free text for the buyer | For example "Saturday 8:00 pm" | Required, at most 100 characters |
| Address | Help text: "Enter the address of the location where the ticket can be used." | Always | Required, at most 50 characters |
| Locations | Help text: "Enter the place of the location where the ticket can be used." | Always | Required, at most 50 characters |
| Date list | Help text: "On which days and times can this event be booked?" | For an event: all dates and times | At least one date needed |
| Date | Help text: "Select the date of the event. Add multiple dates with the plus button." | Every date of the event | A duplicate date is rejected |
| Start time | Help text: "Indicate the start time of the event." | Per date | Format HH:mm |
| End time | Help text: "Indicate the end time of the event." | Per date | - |
| Ticket types | The ticket types that belong to this date (event) or to the standard ticket. Under the "Ticket types" heading with the date is the text "Indicate whether the name of the field is shown during booking." That text does not fit this choice | To determine what the buyer can choose | Choose at least one. For an event, only ticket types of the kind Event ticket |
| Add Type | Creates a new ticket type right away | If the right ticket type does not exist yet | The Ticket type window opens on top of this window |
| Colour | Help text: "Select a colour for the display in the reservation overview. The colour is only visible internally." | To tell events apart in the overview | The buyer does not see the colour |
| Scan rule | Help text: "How often a ticket of this event may be validly scanned." Choice: 1x, 1x per day, 1x per number of minutes or Unlimited | For access control | Default 1x. A Scan rule of its own on the ticket type takes precedence |
| Scan interval | Help text: "Indicate how much time must at least pass between scanning the same ticket." You choose "1x per" a number of Minutes (1 to 240) | Only for 1x per number of minutes | The field only appears with that rule |
| Minutes | Unit for the Scan interval | See Scan interval | - |
| Maximum number of scans | "Optional: how often a ticket may be validly scanned in total. Empty means no maximum." | For a ticket that may only be used a few times | Not for 1x |
| Show sold out tickets in widget? | Help text: "Indicate whether the standard ticket is visible in the widget when sold out." Yes or No | To decide whether a sold-out ticket stays visible | Default No. For the ticket widget, the Show sold out choice under View in the widget applies |
| Show sale notification | Help text: "Indicate whether a notification is shown when sold out or when the number of standard tickets drops below a certain number." Yes or No, with a number | To warn buyers that it is almost gone | Default No. For the ticket widget, Show how many are left under View applies |
| Start time sale | Help text: "Indicate on which date and time the standard ticket becomes available." Yes or No, with date and time | To let sales start later | Default No. With Yes, date and time are required |
| Ticket limit per sale | Help text: "Indicate whether there is a limit on the quantity of the standard ticket that can be bought at once." Yes or No, with a number | To prevent bulk buying | Default No. See [Can I set a maximum number of tickets per order?](../faq/max-tickets-per-bestelling.md) |
| Show in widget | Help text: "Indicate whether the standard ticket and linked ticket types are visible in the widget." Yes or No | To sell the event online or not | Default Yes |
| Discount | Help text: "Indicate whether a discount is applied when buying one or more tickets at once. Enter from how many tickets a discount applies and what the percentage of the discount is." There are two tiers, Discount 1 and Discount 2 | For group discount | Default No |
| Discount per | The percentage with the number of tickets: "10 % Discount per 4 Tickets" means 10% from 4 tickets | Next to Discount | At most two digits for the percentage |
| Tickets | Unit for Discount and for Show sale notification | See Discount | - |
| per | Connecting word in "1x per" and "% Discount per" | - | - |
| Active | Whether the event is on; when active, it can be linked to a reservation type | To temporarily turn an event off | Only in the window of an existing item |
| Maximum number of characters | Counts down how many characters you may still type | For Name, Description and the text fields | - |
| Enter a name. The name is visible for all kinds of reservations. | Help text for Name | See Name | - |

**Related questions:**

- Which settings does an event ticket have?
- How do I set the date and location of an event?
- How do I decide when an event appears in the widget?
- Where do I set a discount for an event?

**Keywords:** event settings, event ticket window, set up standard ticket, scan rule event, discount event, start time sale

**Related:** [How do I create an event with tickets, also with multiple dates?](../faq/evenement-aanmaken.md), [What is the difference between an event ticket and a standard ticket?](../faq/verschil-evenementticket-standaardticket.md), [How often may a ticket be scanned and how do I set that?](../faq/scanregels-instellen.md)

---

# What can you set for a ticket type?

**Answer:** In the Ticket type window, you record what the buyer chooses (name, description, image), how long the ticket is valid, what it costs, how many there are, how often it may be scanned and which extra products and fields belong to it. You go through the steps with Previous and Next and finish with Save.

**Where to find it:** Ticketing management or Ticket sales > Ticket types tab > plus button (new) or a tile (edit) (`/Ticketing`)

**Explanation:** The steps are Ticket type, Image, Colour and duration, Type and category, Prices (only for a Standard ticket), Extra products (if you have them) and Fields. For an existing ticket type, there is also the **Active** switch and a Delete button. See also [How do I create a ticket type, such as Adult, Child or VIP?](../faq/ticketsoort-aanmaken.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name | Help text: "Enter a name. The name is visible for all kinds of reservations." | Always | At most 50 characters; per language |
| Description | Help text: "Enter a description. The description is visible while booking via the widget." | For the text with the ticket type | At most 200 characters |
| Maximum number of characters | Counts down how many characters you may still type | For Name and Description | - |
| Choose a file | Chooses an image (4:3 ratio, at most 5 MB) or, for the day prices, an Excel file | For Image and when importing prices | - |
| Colour | Help text: "Select a colour for the display in the reservation overview. The colour is only visible internally." | To recognise the ticket type in the overview | The buyer does not see the colour |
| Validity | Help text: "Indicate how long the ticket is valid." Choices: 1 to 6 days, 1 or 2 weeks, 1, 3, 6 or 9 months, 1 year | For passes that work longer than a day | See [Can I sell annual passes, weekly passes or multi-ride passes?](../faq/jaarkaart-en-geldigheid.md) |
| Show reservation on each active day | Help text: "Indicate whether the ticket, if it is valid for more than one day, can be seen in the overview on every day of the validity period. Otherwise the ticket can only be seen in the overview on the day of issue." Yes or No | Only for a validity of more than one day | Default Yes |
| Validity follows opening hours | Help text: "Indicate whether the validity of the ticket, if it is valid for more than one day, applies to consecutive calendar days or only to days on which you are open." Yes or No | Only for a validity of more than one day | Default Yes |
| Show in manual booking | Help text: "Indicate whether the ticket type is shown during manual booking." Yes or No | To use a ticket type only online or only at the desk | Default Yes |
| Scan rule | Help text: "How often a ticket of this kind may be validly scanned." Choice: Same as event, 1x, 1x per day, 1x per number of minutes or Unlimited | For a ticket type with an access rule of its own | Default "Same as event". The ticket type's rule takes precedence |
| Scan interval | Help text: "Indicate how much time must at least pass between scanning the same ticket." 1 to 240 minutes | Only for 1x per number of minutes | Default 60 minutes |
| Maximum number of scans | "Optional: how often a ticket may be validly scanned in total. Empty means no maximum." | For example for a multi-ride pass | Not for 1x |
| VAT | Help text: "Select the VAT percentage for the product." | Required | Next to the VAT group |
| VAT group | Chooses the VAT group of the product ("Select the VAT group") | Required | The price includes VAT |
| Choose your ticket type | Help text: "Select the product type that applies to the ticket type." The choice is Standard ticket or Event ticket | For every new ticket type | Default Standard ticket. This determines whether there is a Prices step |
| Standard ticket | A pass with a price and a quantity per day | Day pass, weekly pass, annual pass | You set the price and quantity per day under Prices |
| Event ticket | A ticket for an event with a fixed price and quantity | Show or concert | You enter the Price and Ticket quantity directly |
| Price | Help text: "Enter the price. The amount includes VAT." | For an Event ticket | A Standard ticket has prices per day |
| Ticket quantity | Help text: "Indicate how many of this product are available." | For an Event ticket | Applies to all dates of the event combined |
| Transaction costs | Help text: "Choose the transaction costs for this ticket. The costs are added to the customer's bill." You choose a product or "No transaction cost" | To pass on service costs | The field is only there if you have created transaction costs as a product |
| Select Excel file | Chooses the Excel file with day prices to import | In the Prices step | Use the export as a basis; the file must contain all days of three years |
| Extra products | Chooses which extra products are offered with this ticket type | For additional sales such as a drink | Create them first on the Products tab |
| Fields | Chooses which questions the buyer answers for this ticket type | For extra details | See [How do I ask the buyer of a ticket extra questions, such as a date of birth or allergy?](../faq/vragen-stellen-bij-ticketbestelling.md) |
| Active | Whether the ticket type is on | To temporarily turn a ticket type off | Only for an existing ticket type |

**Related questions:**

- Which details does a ticket type have?
- How do I set how long a ticket is valid?
- Where do I set how many tickets there are of a type?
- How do I link extra products and fields to a ticket type?

**Keywords:** set up ticket type, ticket type window, ticket validity, scan rule ticket type, ticket price, set up vip ticket

**Related:** [How do I create a ticket type, such as Adult, Child or VIP?](../faq/ticketsoort-aanmaken.md), [How do I sell day passes with their own price and quantity per day?](../faq/dagkaarten-met-dagprijs.md)

---

# What can you set for the products of Ticket sales?

**Answer:** The Products tab shows four kinds of products: the day price of a standard ticket, the event product (price and quantity of an event ticket), extra products and transaction costs. You open a product to change the name, VAT group and price, or to import day prices with Excel.

**Where to find it:** Ticketing management or Ticket sales > Products tab (`/Ticketing`)

**Explanation:** You usually create the price and quantity of a ticket in the ticket type window; a day price or event product is then created automatically. You see those products here and can change them. Extra products and transaction costs can only be created here. A tile of a day price or event product has no Deactivate: you turn a ticket on or off at the event. See [Can I sell extra products with a ticket, such as a drink or parking pass?](../faq/extra-producten-bij-ticket.md) and [How do I sell day passes with their own price and quantity per day?](../faq/dagkaarten-met-dagprijs.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name | Help text: "Enter a name. The name is visible for all kinds of reservations." | Always | At most 50 characters |
| Description | Help text: "Enter a description. The description is visible while booking via the widget." For transaction costs: "Give the product a description. The description is visible when booking via the widget." | For extra products and transaction costs | Per language if your business has more languages |
| Choose a file | Chooses an image of the product (at most 5 MB) or an Excel file | For Image and when importing day prices | - |
| VAT | Help text: "Select the VAT percentage for the product." | For every product | The percentage follows from the chosen VAT group |
| VAT group | Chooses the VAT group ("Select the VAT group", or "Select the Product group" for extra products) | For every product | Required |
| Price | Help text: "Enter the price. The amount includes VAT." For an event product and an extra product, this is the price per piece; for transaction costs, a fixed amount per order | For every product except the day price | For day prices, you enter the price per day |
| Ticket quantity | Help text: "Indicate how many of this product are available." | For an event product | Counts over the whole event combined |
| Show in widget | Help text: "When Show in Widget is turned on, the product is shown in the reservation widget and can be selected by customers during the booking process. Turn this option off if you do not want the product to be shown in the widget." Yes or No | For extra products | With No, you only sell it yourself |
| List view | Help text: "When List view is active, the products that were ordered during the reservation are shown in the memo field on the reservation page. This is handy when you want to quickly see whether specific products were ordered." Yes or No | For extra products | - |
| Active | Whether the product is on. Help text for a day price: "When the product is active, it can be linked to a reservation type." | To temporarily turn a product off | Only for existing products |
| Select Excel file | Chooses the Excel file with day prices to import | For a day price product | Use the export as a basis. The file must contain all days of three years |
| Choose the products | The name of the worksheet in the Excel file that you export | - | - |
| Delete | Deletes the product after a confirmation | To remove a product | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| The column name, the value and: is not an amount. Write it as 2.50. | A cell in the imported Excel file does not contain an amount | Put a number with a decimal point in the cell, for example 2.50, and import again |
| Choose the products | Name of the worksheet when exporting day prices | No action needed |

**Related questions:**

- Which kinds of products exist in ticket sales?
- How do I change the VAT or price of a product?
- How do I import day prices with Excel?
- What is an event product?

**Keywords:** products ticket sales, day price product, event product, extra product, transaction costs product, excel day prices

**Related:** [Can I sell extra products with a ticket, such as a drink or parking pass?](../faq/extra-producten-bij-ticket.md), [Can I pass on transaction costs to the buyer of a ticket?](../faq/transactiekosten-doorrekenen.md), [How do I sell day passes with their own price and quantity per day?](../faq/dagkaarten-met-dagprijs.md)

---

# What can you set for a field (extra question) for tickets?

**Answer:** A field is an extra question that the buyer answers when ordering a ticket, such as a date of birth or a choice from a list. You choose the type, the name, whether it is required and where it is shown.

**Where to find it:** Ticketing management or Ticket sales > Fields tab > plus button (new) or a tile (edit) (`/Ticketing`)

**Explanation:** The window has the steps Extra field (for which events), Field type, Name and description and Settings. In the first part, choose at least one event or standard ticket ("Please select at least one ticket type."); with Select all you choose them all. See also [How do I ask the buyer of a ticket extra questions, such as a date of birth or allergy?](../faq/vragen-stellen-bij-ticketbestelling.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Type | Help text: "Select the field type." Choices: Text box, Large text box, Time slot, Date, Checkbox, Selection box multiple choices, Radio button, Number field, Phone, Drop-down, Label, Link, Terms and conditions | Always | For a type with choices, you also fill in Options |
| Do you want to make this field dynamic? | Help text: "When you make this field dynamic, you can show this field when a choice has been made in another field. This way, this field only becomes visible if an answer was chosen in a previous question." Yes or No | For a follow-up question that only belongs to a certain answer | Default No |
| Which field is the main field? | The field whose answer determines whether this field is shown. Help text: "For which value should this field be shown? Choose one of the values from the list." | Only for a dynamic field | - |
| Show this field when the following is selected | The value of the main field for which this field appears. Help text: "For which value should this field be shown? Choose one of the values from the list." | Only for a dynamic field | - |
| Name | Help text: "Enter a name." This is the name the buyer sees | Always | At most 50 characters; per language |
| Options | Help text: "View the options here." | For Drop-down, Radio button and Selection box multiple choices | - |
| Label | Help text: "Give the field a tag of its own, or use the automatically generated tag." | For a recognisable code of the field | Required |
| Show field name | Help text: "Indicate whether the name of the field is shown during booking." Yes or No | To show or hide the name above the field | Default Yes |
| Required | Help text: "Indicate whether the field must be filled in during the reservation." Yes or No | For questions the buyer must answer | Default Yes |
| Show when booking manually | Help text: "Showing in "POS" is a handy option, for example, to create questionnaires for a group reservation. You can use fields to create a number of fields intended specifically for a certain kind of ticket." Yes or No | If the field should also appear when you create a reservation yourself | Default Yes |
| List view | Help text: "When active, the answer will be shown with the memos in the reservation overview." Yes or No | To see the answer in the list | Default Yes |
| Show in widget | Whether the field is shown in the widget (the help text is the same as for Show field name: "Indicate whether the name of the field is shown during booking.") Yes or No | To use a field internally only | Default Yes |
| Active | Whether the field is on | To temporarily turn a field off | Only for an existing field |

**Related questions:**

- What is a field when ordering a ticket?
- Which kinds of questions can I ask the buyer?
- How do I make a question required?
- Where do I show a field to the buyer?

**Keywords:** fields ticket, extra question at order, dynamic field, required field, ticket form, questionnaire group reservation

**Related:** [How do I ask the buyer of a ticket extra questions, such as a date of birth or allergy?](../faq/vragen-stellen-bij-ticketbestelling.md)

---

# What can you set for a Time limitation for tickets?

**Answer:** A Time limitation is a block of one or more days (or a time slot on those days) for chosen ticket types, for example during a staff shortage. You give the block a name, choose the ticket types and choose the dates in a calendar.

**Where to find it:** Ticketing management or Ticket sales > Time limitation tab > plus button (new) or a row (edit) (`/Ticketing`)

**Explanation:** The list shows for each block the Name, the ticket types, the Date, Blocking of and Block up to. The window has two steps: Time block (name, whole day or time slot, ticket types) and Dates (the calendar). See also [How do I block a day or time slot for ticket sales?](../faq/dag-of-tijdvak-blokkeren.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Name | Help text: "Enter a name. The name is only visible internally." | Always | The buyer does not see the name |
| Day restriction | Help text: "Indicate whether the time limitation applies for the full duration of the selected dates." Yes or No | Yes for whole days, No for a time slot | Default Yes. A whole day removes that day from the sale of standard tickets |
| Time from | The start of the time slot. Help text: "Indicate from which time to which time you want to block something. Please note, if you want to block something until 19:00, for example, set the time to 18:59." | Only with Day restriction No | Required for a time slot |
| Time to | The end of the time slot | Only with Day restriction No | Set 18:59 for "until 19:00" |
| Ticket types | The ticket types the block applies to | Always | Choose at least one ("Please select at least one ticket type.") |
| Date | Help text: "Indicate on which dates the time limitation is active. Choose single days, weeks or months by clicking on them, and use the arrows to navigate to other years." | Always | You can click single days, whole weeks and whole months |
| Active | Whether the block is on | To temporarily turn a block off | Only for an existing block |

**Related questions:**

- What is a time limitation for tickets?
- How do I block multiple days in a calendar?
- Can I set the block for a specific ticket type?
- How do I give a block a name?

**Keywords:** time limitation, block tickets, day restriction, time from time to, stop sales, staff shortage

**Related:** [How do I block a day or time slot for ticket sales?](../faq/dag-of-tijdvak-blokkeren.md)

---

# How does the Opening hours tab of Ticket sales work?

**Answer:** On the Opening hours tab, you set per day whether ticket sales are Open or Closed and from which time to which time. Standard tickets can only be bought on open days. Changes are saved automatically.

**Where to find it:** Ticketing management or Ticket sales > Opening hours tab (`/Ticketing`)

**Explanation:** At the top, choose the year (this year and the next two) and the month. Each day has a row with the Date, Open from, Open until and an Open/Closed switch. Adjust the times or the switch; no Save button is needed. See also [How do I set the opening hours of ticket sales, also for public holidays?](../faq/openingstijden-kaartverkoop.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Open | The day is open for the sale of standard tickets | For every day that you are open | A day that has never been filled in appears as closed in the export |
| Closed | The day is not for sale; the times do not count | For public holidays or days that you are closed | The times Open from and Open until are only used if the day is Open |
| Choose a file | Chooses the Excel file to import | To change many days at once | First use the export (Excel icon) and edit that file |
| Select Excel file | The label of the import field; then you click the import icon | To read in the adjusted times in one go | The file must contain all days of this year and the next two, each day with an Open from that is earlier than Open until |
| Enter the opening hours per day here. Please note: the times ‘open from’ and ‘open until’ are only used when the business is marked as open. To quickly fill in the opening hours for the next two years, we recommend making an export. This way, the data can be adjusted easily and efficiently in Excel. When the adjustments have been made, click ‘Import’. | The explanation above the list | Read this before you import | In the explanation, reading in is called Import; on the screen it is an icon next to the file field |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I set ticket sales to open or closed per day?
- Are changes to the opening hours saved automatically?
- On which days can I sell standard tickets?
- How do I set times for ticket sales?

**Keywords:** opening hours tab ticket sales, open closed day, excel opening hours, opening hours tickets, close day

**Related:** [How do I set the opening hours of ticket sales, also for public holidays?](../faq/openingstijden-kaartverkoop.md)

---

# How does the Reservations (Tickets) overview in Jimani work?

**Answer:** The Tickets (or Reservations) overview shows all tickets sold per day, per week or as the last 100, with totals per ticket type. You filter on event, type and status, search by name, choose the columns, print and export to Excel.

**Where to find it:** Tickets (in the POS module) or Reservations (in a separate ticket module) in the menu (`/TicketingReservationViews`)

**Explanation:** Choose the day with the minus and plus buttons and the date field. The plus button "Create reservation" creates a new ticket reservation. If your business has more reservation parts (such as restaurant or activities), you choose the part at the top. In the technical list, the screen is called `TicketingReservationViews Index`. See also [How do I see how many tickets I have sold, per day, week or ticket type?](../faq/verkochte-tickets-bekijken.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| List view | The reservations of the chosen day ("Overview of reservations on:") | For the daily planning | - |
| Weekly list | The reservations of the whole week | For the weekly planning | - |
| Last 100 reservations | The 100 newest reservations | To see what has just come in | - |
| Totals | Quantities per ticket type and guest group, with a total line; parts Day totals and Week totals | For the number of tickets sold | - |
| Search by: | Searches in the list | To find a reservation | - |
| Select event | Shows only this event | To look per event | You can then choose a Type |
| Select Type | Shows only this ticket type of the chosen event | To look per ticket type | - |
| Select status | Shows only reservations with this status | For example to see only arrived guests | Only for the owner and employees with the Filters permission |
| Hide "Guest arrived" | Hides reservations with the status Arrived | To see only the rest | - |
| Filter icon | Chooses which columns you see: Total visitors, Date, Date to, Name, Ticket group, Duration, Quantity, Ticket type, Payment, Created and Memo | To tidy up the list | Only for the owner and employees with the Exports permission |
| Print icon | Prints the list | For a paper list | Only for the owner and employees with the Printing permission |
| Excel icon | Exports the list to Excel | For your own editing | Only for the owner and employees with the Exports permission |
| Total visitors | Arrived guests divided by the number of tickets, for example 2/4 | To follow the turnout | Counts valid scans |
| Paid | Label in the Payment column: the order has been paid | To see what has been paid | The info icon of the row then has a paid sign |
| Unpaid | Label in the Payment column: the order has not been paid yet | To find outstanding orders | The scanner rejects an unpaid ticket with "Not paid" |
| Memo | Shows notes, answers to fields with List view Yes and ordered extra products | To quickly see what a guest has ordered | Click the cell for the full text |
| Internal memo | Click the name to read or add an internal note | For notes the guest does not see | - |
| Info icon | Opens the ticket information of the reservation | To change, cancel or email | See [What is in the ticket information of a reservation?](ticketinformatie-venster.md) |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see all tickets sold?
- How do I look up a ticket order by name?
- Can I export the ticket list to Excel?
- How do I filter tickets by event or status?

**Keywords:** reservations tickets overview, tickets per day, weekly list, last 100 reservations, totals tickets, choose columns

**Related:** [How do I see how many tickets I have sold, per day, week or ticket type?](../faq/verkochte-tickets-bekijken.md), [Can I keep track of visitor numbers per day?](../faq/bezoekersaantallen-per-dag.md)

---

# What is in the ticket information of a reservation?

**Answer:** The ticket information is the window that opens when you click the info icon of a reservation in the overview. You see the guest, the tickets with their status, the scans and the payment, and you can cancel the reservation, email it, print it or open it to change it.

**Where to find it:** Tickets or Reservations > info icon at a reservation (`/TicketingReservationViews/TicketingReservationInfo`)

**Explanation:** At the top is the card with the guest name, the email address, the ticket type and the quantity per guest group, the date, the validity, the status and whether the reservation has been paid. Below it, the tabs work. See also [Does every ticket have its own QR code?](../faq/qr-code-per-ticket.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Overview | The card with guest, tickets, payment and status | Default when opening | - |
| Attachment | Documents for the reservation | To add or download a file | - |
| History | The changes and statuses of the reservation | To see what has happened | - |
| Ticket process | Reservation number, Reservation key (with copy button), Created via, Created on and Ticket date | If a guest has lost their code | The Reservation key is the code the scanner also recognises |
| QR scan logbook | Every scan with Date and time, Status, Reason, Device, User and Ticket key; per scan a QR Code button | To see who came in or was rejected when | It says "No scans yet" if nothing has been scanned |
| Tickets | Per ticket Valid from, Valid until, Ticket type, Name, Status (Valid, Used or Cancelled), the buttons QR Code and Cancel ticket | To show, print or cancel a single ticket | Cancel ticket only appears for a ticket that is still open, as long as there is more than one open ticket |
| Reservation list | Other reservations of this guest: Module, Reservation type, Reservation date, Reservation time, Quantity, Revenue and Method | To see the guest's history | - |
| Internal memo | Notes that the guest does not see; you type a text and click Save | For notes from your team | At the top is the original remark of the reservation |
| Cancel | Cancels the whole reservation after you enter a reason | If the guest does not come or wants a refund | If the guest is already inside, the button is off with the explanation "Guest is already inside; cancelling is no longer possible" |
| More | Opens a menu with extra actions | For Order, Send email, Print receipt and Print (PDF) | - |
| Order | Opens the POS for this reservation | Only on the day itself and if the guest has arrived | - |
| Send email | Sends the confirmation or a chosen email with the tickets again | If the guest has lost their email | See [How do I resend a ticket to the buyer or print it?](../faq/ticket-opnieuw-mailen.md) |
| Print receipt | Prints a receipt of the reservation | At the desk | Only if a printer is connected |
| Print (PDF) | Opens the PDF with the tickets in the browser | To hand over on paper | Not for a passer-by without guest details |
| Open reservation | Opens the window to change the reservation | To adjust quantities, date or details | See [How does the Add and edit reservation window for tickets work?](ticketreservering-venster.md) |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see the scans of a ticket?
- How do I see whether an order has been paid?
- How do I view the status of the tickets in an order?
- How do I open the details of a ticket order?

**Keywords:** ticket information, reservation information tickets, qr scan logbook, ticket process, cancel ticket, internal memo ticket

**Related:** [How do I cancel a ticket or a whole ticket order?](../faq/ticket-annuleren.md), [How do I resend a ticket to the buyer or print it?](../faq/ticket-opnieuw-mailen.md)

---

# How does the Add and edit reservation window for tickets work?

**Answer:** In this window, you create a ticket reservation yourself (Add reservation) or edit one (Update reservation): event, date, ticket type, quantities, guest, products, extra information and payment. At the bottom you see "Your invoice" with what the guest pays.

**Where to find it:** Tickets or Reservations > plus button "Create reservation", or open a reservation and choose Open reservation (`/TicketingReservations/AddTicketingReservations`)

**Explanation:** The window works from top to bottom: choose what the guest buys, who the guest is, which products go with it and click Pay. For an existing reservation, the window is called Update reservation and has the tabs Overview, Attachment, History and Tickets. See also [How do I create a ticket reservation myself, for example by phone or at the desk?](../faq/ticketreservering-zelf-aanmaken.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When you use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Event tickets | Chooses the event or standard ticket | Always | A button with a pencil opens the event so you can edit it |
| Arrival date and time | Chooses the date (and for an event the time) | Always | For a standard ticket, you move through the days with plus and minus; you see the opening hours |
| Time | The date or time you have chosen | See Arrival date and time | - |
| Ticket types | Chooses the ticket type | Always | Only ticket types that belong to the event and have Show in manual booking set to Yes |
| Quantity | The number of tickets for an event; for a standard ticket, the guest groups are listed here, each with its own quantity | Always | The available tickets and the Ticket limit per sale limit the quantity |
| Search | Looks up an existing guest by email address or phone number | To choose a known guest | - |
| Language | The language of the email to the guest | Always | - |
| Reservation name | The name under which the reservation is listed | Mainly for a passer-by, where you have no other details | - |
| Passer-by (no guest details) | Records the reservation without guest details | For a visitor at the door | No email is sent and there is no PDF |
| Check in now | Sets the guest to arrived right away | If the guest is already there | Only if your business allows this; the tick box is not always there |
| Internal memo | A note that the guest does not see | For notes | You also see it in the ticket information |
| Your invoice | The amount of the reservation | To check before paying | Contains Total excluding VAT, Total VAT, Discount, Transaction costs, Total amount, Total paid and Outstanding amount |
| Discount | The discount the ticket discount produces | See Your invoice | Only if you have set Discount 1 or 2 |
| Transaction costs | The service costs of the ticket type | See Your invoice | Only if the ticket type has them |
| Total excluding VAT | The amount without VAT | See Your invoice | - |
| Total VAT | The VAT amount | See Your invoice | - |
| Total amount | The total including VAT | See Your invoice | - |
| Outstanding amount | What still has to be paid | See Your invoice | If this is 0, the reservation is Paid |
| Pay | Opens "Choose a payment method" | When everything is correct | See the payment screens below |
| Cash payment | The payment screen for cash: Total amount, the amount received and the Return amount | For cash | The Return amount is calculated automatically |
| Return amount | The change you give back | For cash | - |
| List of devices | The card terminals you choose from under Payment method: Card | For card payments | Only devices that are linked to your business |
| Save | Saves the changes for an existing reservation | For Update reservation | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Payment successful | The payment for this reservation has been processed | No action needed |
| What action should be taken? | After booking: Send email or No email | Choose whether the guest receives the confirmation with tickets |
| The reservation is booked without payment! | With Pay later | Confirm; the guest pays later |
| The payment is booked as paid and the booking is completed | With Pay other | Only confirm if you have really received the money |

**Related questions:**

- Which details do I fill in when creating a ticket reservation myself?
- How do I change an existing ticket order?
- What is under Your invoice?
- Can I add products to a ticket order?

**Keywords:** add reservation tickets, update reservation, pay tickets, passer-by, your invoice, check in now

**Related:** [How do I create a ticket reservation myself, for example by phone or at the desk?](../faq/ticketreservering-zelf-aanmaken.md), [What is in the ticket information of a reservation?](ticketinformatie-venster.md)

---

# How do I turn on my business's online webshop and what do I get?

**Answer:** Set Online webshop to Yes under Settings > Guests and bookings > Online webshop. Then create a webshop widget and set how guests receive their order. The online webshop has no monthly fee.

**Explanation:**

- **What you get.** Your own ordering page where customers order and pay themselves: the online store with its own address, the settings for delivery, pickup and eat here, and the orders straight on the kitchen screen and in Order management.
- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Online webshop and set the question to Yes. You also find the function under Settings > Add-ons.
- **Step 2.** Open Online webshop in Settings and choose Add widget. Give the widget a name (only you see it) and choose the kind of widget. Under What the guest chooses, pick which categories it contains and finish the layout.
- **Step 3.** Adjust the webshop itself with Edit webshop: the front page, the menu, the categories, the products and the colours, with a live preview.
- **Step 4.** Set how guests receive their order: pickup, delivery, shipping or eat here. See [How do I turn on delivery, pickup or eat here in my webshop?](bezorgen-afhalen-hier-eten-aanzetten.md)
- **Step 5.** Place the webshop on your website with View code (the widget code), or use the link. With Test, the webshop opens in a new tab, exactly as the customer sees it.
- **Step 6.** Orders arrive in Order management. See [How do I manage the orders of my webshop?](bestellingen-beheren.md)

The POS and the webshop share the same products and the same orders. What you ring up at the POS and what comes in online, you see together in Order management and in the Financial overview.

![The list of widgets with the Add widget button](/kennisbank/beelden/online-webshop-aanzetten-1.webp)

**Example:** A baker turns on Online webshop, creates a widget Pickup orders with the categories bread and pastry, sets Pickup to Yes and places the code on their website. Customers order online and the order appears on the kitchen screen right away.

**Related questions:**

- How do I turn on an online webshop?
- What does the online webshop cost?
- How do I let customers order and pay online?
- Do online orders automatically appear on the kitchen screen?

**Keywords:** turn on online webshop, activate webshop, order online webshop, create webshop widget, start online store, ordering page customers

**Related:** [How do I turn on delivery, pickup or eat here in my webshop?](bezorgen-afhalen-hier-eten-aanzetten.md), [Can I manage multiple webshops in one account?](meerdere-webshops-beheren.md), [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md)

---

# How do I turn on delivery, pickup or eat here in my webshop?

**Answer:** Open the webshop widget under Settings > Guests and bookings > Online webshop, choose Edit and, on the Settings tab, set Pickup, Delivery and Eat here to Yes or No. For Delivery, you then choose How do you deliver?: yourself by bike, scooter or car, or with a carrier. Choose Save.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Online webshop (or Delivery methods and shipping costs; this opens the same list of widgets). At your webshop widget, choose Edit and open the Settings tab.
- **Step 2.** Under Pickup, Delivery and Eat here, set to Yes what you offer. Pickup: The customer collects the order, with a pickup time. Delivery: The order comes to the customer's home: by yourself or with a carrier. Eat here: The guest orders at the table or at the counter.
- **Step 3.** Under Delivery, choose the question How do you deliver?: Bike, Scooter, Car (you deliver yourself, with a time slot and delivery schedule) or Carrier (a parcel service delivers, without a time slot). With Carrier, you choose Which carrier?: PostNL, DHL, UPS, DPD, GLS or Other.
- **Step 4.** Under When do you deliver? choose Right after the order, The next day or Within 1-2 working days. If you enter a delivery time in working days yourself, the question is set to Custom delivery time. With Right after the order, the standard preparation time applies and the customer chooses a time within your delivery times. Otherwise, the customer sees when their order will arrive and does not choose a time slot.
- **Step 5.** If you have more than one method on, you use When do you ask for delivery or pickup? to decide whether the customer chooses this Before checkout or At the beginning. With exactly one method, you can set Show pre-selection screen to No: the customer then goes straight to the products.
- **Step 6.** Choose Save at the bottom of the widget. The choices are then kept and the preview next to it follows every choice immediately. Only the shipping costs per country are saved immediately per line.

Own delivery and shipping cannot be on at the same time: How do you deliver? has one answer per webshop widget. An order can only be placed for a method that is on; the webshop rejects other choices.

![The list of widgets with the Edit button for each widget](/kennisbank/beelden/bezorgen-afhalen-hier-eten-aanzetten-1.webp)

**Example:** A pizzeria sets Pickup and Delivery to Yes, chooses Scooter and Right after the order, and sets the neighbourhoods it delivers to under Delivery postcodes. A clothing online store sets only Delivery to Yes, chooses Carrier and PostNL and Within 1-2 working days.

**Related questions:**

- How do I turn on delivery in my webshop?
- How do I let customers collect their order themselves?
- Can I choose between own delivery and a carrier?
- How do I turn off eat here in my webshop?

**Keywords:** turn on delivery webshop, turn on pickup, eat here webshop, delivery methods, bike scooter car delivery, set up parcel service shipping, postnl dhl webshop

**Related:** [How do the delivery and pickup options of the webshop widget work?](../naslag/webshopwidget-bezorgen.md), [How do I set delivery costs, free delivery and a minimum order amount?](bezorgkosten-en-minimum-bestelbedrag.md), [How do I set delivery days, delivery times and postcodes?](bezorgdagen-tijden-en-postcodes-instellen.md), [How do I have orders shipped with a parcel service and what does the customer pay?](verzenden-met-pakketdienst.md)

---

# How do I set delivery costs, free delivery and a minimum order amount?

**Answer:** You set the standard Delivery/shipping costs with the limit Delivery costs free after amount, and per postcode range your own Delivery costs and a Minimum order amount under Delivery times and postcodes. An amount for a postcode takes precedence over the standard costs. Above the free limit, the customer pays nothing.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Standard costs: go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Delivery and pickup > Webshop settings (or type "Webshop settings" in Search for a setting…), Delivery settings step. Fill in Delivery/shipping costs and Delivery costs free after amount. The same two fields are in the webshop editor (Edit webshop, View tab) as Delivery costs and Free from; they apply to all webshop widgets of the business.
- **Step 2.** Costs per town or neighbourhood: go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Delivery and pickup (Delivery times and postcodes), Delivery postcodes tab. Fill in Delivery costs and Minimum order amount per range.
- **Step 3.** Minimum for the whole webshop: in the webshop editor, View tab, fill in Minimum order amount. It applies to pickup and delivery, over the products without delivery costs, and not to eat here. 0 means: no minimum.
- **Step 4.** Minimum number of products: under Webshop settings, Delivery settings step, fill in Minimum order quantity.
- **Step 5.** If you ship with a parcel service, the costs per country are with the delivery methods; see [How do I have orders shipped with a parcel service and what does the customer pay?](verzenden-met-pakketdienst.md)

**How the webshop calculates:**

- The delivery costs only apply to delivery or shipping, never to pickup or eat here.
- If the customer's postcode has Delivery costs above 0, those are the costs. Otherwise the webshop's Delivery/shipping costs apply.
- If Delivery costs free after amount is filled in and the amount of products reaches that limit, the costs are 0. A limit of 0 does not count as a limit: delivery is then never free.
- The postcode's minimum order amount applies alongside the webshop's minimum; if the order stays below either one, it does not go through.
- The server recalculates every order itself, even if the customer saw a different amount.

**Example:** Standard € 4.95, free from € 40. Postcodes 9500 to 9510 cost € 2.50 with a minimum of € 15. A customer in 9501 with € 30 of products pays € 2.50; with € 45 they pay nothing. A customer in another range with € 30 pays € 4.95.

**Related questions:**

- How do I set delivery costs?
- How do I let customers have free delivery above an amount?
- Can I set a minimum order amount?
- Can I charge different delivery costs per postcode?

**Keywords:** set delivery costs, free delivery from amount, minimum order amount, delivery costs per postcode, shipping costs webshop, threshold free delivery

**Related:** [How does the Webshop settings window work?](../naslag/webshop-instellingen.md), [How do I set delivery days, delivery times and postcodes?](bezorgdagen-tijden-en-postcodes-instellen.md), [How do I turn on delivery, pickup or eat here in my webshop?](bezorgen-afhalen-hier-eten-aanzetten.md), [What can you set for Delivery?](../naslag/bezorgen-instellen.md)

---

# How do I set delivery days, delivery times and postcodes?

**Answer:** Go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Delivery and pickup (Delivery times and postcodes). There you set Use delivery schedule to Yes, create delivery areas with their delivery days and link the postcodes to an area. The delivery hours per day are with the opening hours of your webshop.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open the Delivery schedule tab and choose Yes under Use delivery schedule. Set Same-day orders until (for example 13:00), choose Today, Tomorrow or Day after tomorrow under Earliest delivery and fill in under Days ahead how far ahead the customer may choose (maximum 120). Every choice is saved immediately.
- **Step 2.** Set the delivery hours per day with the opening hours of the webshop: the columns Delivery from, Delivery to and Delivery (in the Excel export of the opening hours they are called Delivery from and Delivery until). If Delivery is off for a day (a public holiday or holiday), no delivery orders can be placed that day.
- **Step 3.** If you work with different neighbourhoods or towns, open the Delivery areas tab. Click the plus, give the area a Name, set the Delivery days to Yes or No and optionally fill in Delivery from and Delivery until if this area has different hours than the opening hours.
- **Step 4.** Open Delivery postcodes. Use the plus to add a range (Postcode from and Postcode to, the digits of the postcode) and choose the Area. Or import them in one go with an Excel file: Export gives you the format.
- **Step 5.** Test the webshop: enter a postcode and see which days and times you get.

**How the webshop determines the days and times:**

- The customer enters their postcode as soon as they choose delivery (adjustable with Ask for postcode before checkout). If the postcode does not belong to an active area or the range is excluded, they get the message that you do not deliver there.
- Only the delivery days of the area count. Within those, the delivery hours of that day apply, unless the area has its own hours.
- The times come in blocks of 15 minutes. For today, the first block only starts after the preparation time plus the travel time (rounded up to the next quarter of an hour), and choosing today is only possible before the time under Same-day orders until.
- If a maximum is set for a time under Order Restrictions (for the webshop or the kiosk), the block is full when that many deliveries are already scheduled at that time. A day without a free block drops out.
- Without a delivery schedule and without delivery areas, the webshop works as always: only today and no postcode check.

**Example:** Stadskanaal gets delivery on Tuesday and Friday and Westerwolde on Wednesday and Saturday. You create two areas with those days, link the postcodes to the right area and set Same-day orders until to 13:00. A customer from Westerwolde only sees Wednesday and Saturday.

**Related questions:**

- How do I set on which days I deliver?
- Until what time can a customer order for delivery today?
- How do I limit delivery to certain postcodes?
- How do I set delivery areas?
- How far ahead may a customer plan a delivery?

**Keywords:** set delivery days, delivery times webshop, delivery areas, postcodes delivery, delivery schedule, order for today until, delivery from

**Related:** [What can you set for Delivery?](../naslag/bezorgen-instellen.md), [How do I set delivery costs, free delivery and a minimum order amount?](bezorgkosten-en-minimum-bestelbedrag.md), [How do I turn on delivery, pickup or eat here in my webshop?](bezorgen-afhalen-hier-eten-aanzetten.md)

---

# How do I have orders shipped with a parcel service and what does the customer pay?

**Answer:** In the settings of your webshop widget, set Delivery to Yes and choose Carrier under How do you deliver? The customer then sees the delivery time in working days and pays the Shipping costs of their country. When you send the parcel, you enter the code under Track & trace in the order.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open the webshop widget (Settings > Guests and bookings > Online webshop, choose Edit at the widget) and go to the Settings tab. Set Delivery to Yes and choose Carrier under How do you deliver?
- **Step 2.** Under Which carrier? choose PostNL, DHL, UPS, DPD, GLS or Other. From the code you enter with the order, Jimani makes the track & trace link for the customer.
- **Step 3.** Under When do you deliver? choose The next day or Within 1-2 working days, or enter a from and to yourself under Delivery time in working days (for example 1 to 3); the question is then set to Custom delivery time. There is no time slot: the customer only sees when their order will arrive.
- **Step 4.** Optionally fill in Same-day shipping until. Ordered before that time, shipped today. If you leave it empty, it is not shown.
- **Step 5.** Under Shipping costs per country, fill in per country the Shipping costs and Free from. With Add country, a line is added; with the bin you remove a line. Every line is saved immediately. Countries to choose from: the Netherlands, Belgium, Germany, Luxembourg, France, Austria, Denmark, Spain, Italy, Portugal, Sweden, Finland, Poland, the United Kingdom, Ireland, Switzerland, Norway and Greece.
- **Step 6.** Choose Save at the bottom of the widget.
- **Step 7.** When you send the parcel, open the order in Order management (Search order) and fill in the code or the link under Track & trace. The field saves as soon as you leave it, and the link Track the shipment then appears with it.

**How the webshop calculates:**

- If you have filled in at least one country, the webshop looks up the country of the delivery address (without a country: the Netherlands). If that country is not in your list, the customer cannot order: the webshop says you do not ship to this country.
- If there is a Free from amount for the country and the amount of products (incl. VAT) reaches it, the shipping costs are 0. Otherwise the country's shipping costs apply.
- If you have not filled in any countries, the webshop's Delivery/shipping costs and the Delivery costs free after amount limit apply to every address.
- When shipping, the webshop does not check the delivery schedule and the delivery areas: those only apply if you deliver yourself.

**Example:** An online store ships within the Netherlands for € 6.95 (free from € 50) and to Belgium for € 9.95. A customer from Germany cannot order until the store adds Germany.

**Related questions:**

- How do I send webshop orders with PostNL or DHL?
- How do I show the customer a track-and-trace code?
- How do I set shipping costs per country?
- Can I send parcels abroad from my webshop?

**Keywords:** shipping webshop, shipping costs per country, parcel service postnl dhl, track and trace order, free shipping from, delivery time working days

**Related:** [How do I turn on delivery, pickup or eat here in my webshop?](bezorgen-afhalen-hier-eten-aanzetten.md), [How do I set delivery costs, free delivery and a minimum order amount?](bezorgkosten-en-minimum-bestelbedrag.md), [How does Order management work for the orders of my webshop?](../naslag/orderbeheer.md)

---

# How do I manage the orders of my webshop?

**Answer:** Open Order management in the menu. There you set orders to In progress and Done, and complete them on the Delivery, Pickup or Eat here screen. You find an older order with the Search order tab.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Choose Order management. The screen is called Order overview. New orders are on the Orders tab with the status Order received.
- **Step 2.** Click the status of an item: it becomes In progress. Click once more: it becomes Done. When everything in an order is Done, the order appears under Order Status and on the screen of its kind.
- **Step 3.** Give the order to the guest and open the Delivery, Pickup or Eat here screen. Click the status Done of the order. The status becomes Delivered, Picked up or Eat here.
- **Step 4.** If you want to view an order, click the info icon in front of the line. You see the items, the steps of the order, the payment and the buttons Refund, Print receipt and Mark as complete.
- **Step 5.** Find an earlier order with Search order: type an item, order number, amount, name or email, or open Search options for date, category, product, status, payment method, kind of order and user.

What you see is your business's working day. If you also want to see the orders that have already been completed, turn on View completed orders. If no item in your business has a kitchen printer, every order immediately goes to done and you only see Search order. What a line or button means is explained in [How does Order management work for the orders of my webshop?](../naslag/orderbeheer.md)

**Example:** A pickup order comes in with two sandwiches. You click twice on the status of each sandwich: they are Done and the order is on the Pickup screen. The guest collects it and you click Done: the status becomes Picked up.

**Related questions:**

- How do I see new orders from my webshop?
- How do I set an order to done?
- How do I find an older order?
- Where do I complete a delivery or pickup order?

**Keywords:** manage orders, order management, set order ready, order picked up, search order, complete webshop order

**Related:** [How does Order management work for the orders of my webshop?](../naslag/orderbeheer.md), [How do I follow the status of an order and how does the kitchen screen work?](bestelstatus-en-keukenscherm.md), [How do I refund a webshop order?](webshopbestelling-terugbetalen.md)

---

# How do I follow the status of an order and how does the kitchen screen work?

**Answer:** In Order management, you see the status per order: Order received, In progress, Done and then Delivered, Picked up or Eat here. The kitchen screen on a TV or tablet shows the same orders with only the order number, in three columns: New, Being prepared and Done.

**Explanation:**

- **Statuses in Order management.** An item starts at Order received, goes to In progress with a click and to Done with another click. When everything in an order is Done, the order is done. You then complete it as Delivered, Picked up or Eat here. An item that has to wait for a moment is on Hold.
- **The order window.** The steps Order received, Payment, In progress, Done and Completed are shown with the time for each order.
- **Opening the kitchen screen.** On the TV or tablet, open the address `/tv/login` of the Jimani widget environment. Log in with Customer number, Email and Password and choose Log in. With Remember me, the screen saves your customer number and email address. There is no button in the dashboard itself that opens this screen.
- **Choosing a type.** After logging in, you choose under Choose the type of screen: Dine-In (guests who eat here), Pickup (pickup orders) or Both (eat here and pickup together). The screen shows today's orders.
- **What you see.** At the top Jimani and Kitchen screen, below it the columns New, Being prepared and Done with the order number per order (for example #12). Being prepared shows orders of which items are In progress; Done shows orders that are completely done. Each column shows at most 15 orders. The New column is always empty at the moment.
- **Updating.** The screen refreshes by itself as soon as you change a status in Order management. If the connection drops, the screen fetches the orders again regularly.
- **Without a valid login.** The screen shows No access and says that a valid access key is needed.
- **Another kitchen screen.** This TV screen with order numbers is something different from the kitchen screen that you connect as a device under Registers and hardware, on which the cook taps New, In progress and Done per product. See
  [How does the kitchen screen work?](../../kassa/faq/keukenscherm-gebruiken.md).

**Example:** The kitchen hangs up a TV with Both. An employee sets an order to In progress in Order management: the number appears in the Being prepared column. When everything is Done, the number jumps to Done.

**Related questions:**

- Which statuses does an order have?
- What do I see on the kitchen screen on the TV?
- How do I put an item on hold (On-Hold)?
- What do In progress and Done mean for an order?

**Keywords:** kitchen screen, tv screen orders, order status, order ready screen, tv kitchen orders, order number screen

**Related:** [How does the kitchen screen work?](../../kassa/faq/keukenscherm-gebruiken.md), [How do I manage the orders of my webshop?](bestellingen-beheren.md), [How does Order management work for the orders of my webshop?](../naslag/orderbeheer.md)

---

# Can I link a table or table number to an order?

**Answer:** Yes, at the POS, with the Parking tables function. You create tables and use the Tables button to put an order on a table until it is paid. In the online webshop, a guest cannot enter a table number themselves.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on the Parking tables function (Settings > Add-ons). Without this function, the Tables tab is missing.
- **Step 2.** Go to Settings > Till and products > Menu and settings and open the Tables tab. It says: Here you can create tables to park the order for later. This can be handy when you take an order by phone or when you want an order to be paid later.
- **Step 3.** Click the plus. Under Table name, enter a name (maximum 20 characters) and, if you use Restaurant, choose the Location where the table is. With Add as main guest you mark the table as a main guest table when placing an order; in the POS table list, the Show main guests button then shows only those tables. Choose Save.
- **Step 4.** At the POS, ring up the products and choose the Tables button. You see the Choose Parking Table list: Choose the table on which the order should be booked. Without a choice, you get the message Select a table to proceed.
- **Step 5.** When the guest pays, you choose the same table again: the open receipt of that table appears and you take payment.

You can enter many tables at once with Excel: use Select Excel file, Choose a file and the import button, or download the list with Export. In the list, you can per table turn Add as main guest and Active on or off, and delete a table.

**Example:** A guest phones in an order. You ring up the products, choose Tables and put the order on table Phone 1. When the guest collects the order an hour later, you open table Phone 1 and take payment.

**Related questions:**

- Can a customer enter a table number when ordering online?
- How do I link an order to a table at the POS?
- How do I park an order until the guest wants to pay?
- How do I create tables at the POS?

**Keywords:** table number order, link table order, parking tables, put order on table, parking table, table phone order

**Related:** [How do I manage the orders of my webshop?](bestellingen-beheren.md)

---

# Can I manage multiple webshops in one account?

**Answer:** Yes. Under Settings > Guests and bookings > Online webshop, you create as many webshop widgets as you like, each with its own name, its own categories, its own layout and its own delivery methods. All orders come together in Order management.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Choose Add widget and give the widget a name you recognise yourself, for example Terrace or Pickup orders. Only you see the name, in the list of widgets.
- **Step 2.** Under What the guest chooses, pick which categories are in this webshop. Everything is on; remove what the guest may not choose in this widget. This way you make a webshop with only drinks and one with only dishes.
- **Step 3.** Finish the layout. If you already have a webshop in your own house style, use Make a copy: this makes an exact copy of the widget including house style.
- **Step 4.** Set per widget how the guest receives their order (Pickup, Delivery or Eat here). Each widget has its own delivery questions on the Settings tab.
- **Step 5.** Place each webshop in its own spot with View code, and test it with Test.

![The list of widgets with the Add widget button](/kennisbank/beelden/meerdere-webshops-beheren-1.webp)

**This is the same for all webshops:** the products (per widget you only choose which categories it contains), the standard delivery costs and the free limit (which apply to all webshop widgets of the business), the delivery postcodes and delivery areas, the stock and the orders in Order management and in the Financial overview.

**Example:** A lunchroom has a Pickup webshop with sandwiches and soups and a Catering webshop with platters and pastries, each on its own page of the website. Both orders appear in the same list in Order management.

**Related questions:**

- Can I run two webshops side by side?
- How do I create a separate webshop for pickup orders?
- Do all orders from my webshops come in one place?
- Can each webshop have its own categories?

**Keywords:** multiple webshops, second webshop, copy webshop, multiple widgets, separate webshop categories, webshop per department

**Related:** [How do I turn on my business's online webshop and what do I get?](online-webshop-aanzetten.md), [How do I turn on delivery, pickup or eat here in my webshop?](bezorgen-afhalen-hier-eten-aanzetten.md)

---

# Where do I see the revenue and figures of my webshop?

**Answer:** Open Settings > Money and figures > Reports. The Financial overview shows the revenue of the webshop, kiosk and POS over a period, with filters on category, product and employee. From there you also open the Foreign VAT report (OSS) and the Own consumption overview.

**Explanation:**

- **Financial overview.** Choose Date as of and Date to and click the magnifying glass. You see the number of orders, the number of products sold, the total revenue (with the revenue excl. VAT below it), the employee with the highest turnover, the payment methods, the number per order kind (Pickup, Delivery, Eat here) and per channel (Online store, Kiosk, POS), and the VAT per rate. Export gives an Excel file and Print a pdf, with the same filters.
- **Revenue of a product or category.** Choose a Category or a Product. Two amounts are then shown: the Turnover of this selection and the turnover of the Whole orders it was part of. At the bottom are the tables Margin by category and Margin by product with Quantity, Revenue excl., Purchasing and Margin.
- **Revenue per employee.** The Employee with highest turnover block shows the best seller. With the User list, you view the sales of one employee.
- **What does not count.** Under Not included in revenue are Cancelled, Practice and Refunded. A cancelled or practice receipt does not count, just like on the day closing.
- **Foreign VAT report (OSS).** The button is on the Financial overview. Choose the Year and the Quarter; per country and rate you see the revenue excl. VAT, the VAT, the revenue incl. VAT and the number of orders, and Export gives a file for your return. See [How does OSS VAT work in my Jimani webshop?](oss-btw.md)
- **Own consumption.** If the Own consumption function is on, there is a block and a button Own consumption. Choose the Year: per Type of consumption you see the number of receipts, the Quantity, the Cost price excl. VAT, the VAT on cost price and the Sales value (for info), per month and per receipt. Export and Print also work here. See [How do I book own consumption, staff consumption or shrinkage?](../../kassa/faq/eigen-verbruik.md)
- **Returns.** The Refunds overview shows the returns; see [How does the Refunds overview of my webshop work?](../naslag/terugbetaal-overzicht.md)

**Example:** You want to know what you earned from soft drinks in September. Choose Date as of 01-09 and Date to 30-09, choose Soft drinks under Category and click the magnifying glass. Under Margin by product, you see the quantity and the margin per soft drink.

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see the revenue of my webshop?
- How many orders have I had via the webshop?
- How do I see which product sells best?
- Where do I find the VAT report for abroad?

**Keywords:** webshop revenue, financial overview webshop, revenue per product, oss report, own consumption overview, sales statistics, popular products

**Related:** [How does the Financial overview of my webshop work?](../naslag/financieel-overzicht-webshop.md), [How does OSS VAT work in my Jimani webshop?](oss-btw.md), [How do I book own consumption, staff consumption or shrinkage?](../../kassa/faq/eigen-verbruik.md)

---

# How do I refund a webshop order?

**Answer:** Open the order in Order management and choose Refund. The receipt then opens in the POS, where you choose per item what you take back, give a reason and refund. What you take back is then listed in the Refunds overview.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Order management and find the order with Search order, or open it on the Delivery, Pickup or Eat here screen. Click the info icon in front of the line.
- **Step 2.** Choose Refund. The button is missing if there is nothing left to take back and is grey if the Refund function is off. Turn it on under Settings > Add-ons; Refund has no monthly fee.
- **Step 3.** The order opens in the POS, just like when you scan the receipt. So nothing has been booked back yet: you remove what you take back line by line.
- **Step 4.** Under Reason, choose: Ordered incorrectly, Incorrect order, Complaint about the article, Something is missing or Other. If you choose Other, you fill in an Other reason. Always give a reason.
- **Step 5.** Complete the return. If the receipt was paid via Mollie (card payment, Tap to Pay or online), the money can go back to the customer's card or account via Mollie with Refund to card, up to 120 days after the payment. It is in the account within a few days. If that is not possible for the whole sum, you refund the rest in cash. If you choose Gift voucher as the refund and your business works with Gift cards, the customer receives a gift card with a number and the amount as balance.
- **Step 6.** Check the result in the Refunds overview: per return the date, the quantity, the amount, the reason, whether the product went back into stock and who took the return.

The Refunds overview also shows what was struck from a receipt before it was paid. That is not a refund: no money went back.

**Example:** A guest ordered two sandwiches and a coffee via the webshop and brings one sandwich back because it was wrong. You open the order, choose Refund, remove one sandwich from the receipt, choose Ordered incorrectly as the reason and refund the amount.

**Related questions:**

- How do I refund a customer of my webshop?
- How do I take back an item of an online order?
- Why is the Refund button missing?
- Where do I see which refunds have been made?

**Keywords:** refund webshop, return webshop order, take back order, refund to card, refund reason, return to stock

**Related:** [How does the Refunds overview of my webshop work?](../naslag/terugbetaal-overzicht.md), [How do I manage the orders of my webshop?](bestellingen-beheren.md), [Does my webshop need a withdrawal button?](herroepingsknop.md)

---

# Can I connect Uber Eats to Jimani and receive orders?

**Answer:** Not yet for your own business. The dashboard has no screen or button to connect Uber Eats, and orders from Uber Eats do not appear in Order management. Jimani does have a prepared connection, but it is not yet open to customers.

**Explanation:**

- **What does exist.** A sign-up address (`/ubereats/connect`) sends a logged-in user to Uber Eats to grant access. They then return to a page that shows whether connecting succeeded. There is also a receiver for notifications from Uber Eats, which only stores them.
- **What does not exist.** There is no menu entry, no button under Add-ons and no setting. An order from Uber Eats is not created in Jimani and does not appear in Order management.
- **What you can do.** Let guests order directly from you with your own online webshop, with pickup, delivery or eat here. See [How do I turn on my business's online webshop and what do I get?](online-webshop-aanzetten.md)

**Messages:** these texts can appear on the page after connecting.

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| Uber Eats connected. | Uber Eats granted access and Jimani stored it. | Nothing. |
| Uber Eats authorization code is missing. | Uber Eats did not send a code. | Start connecting again. |
| Uber Eats authorization state is invalid. | The connection has expired (after an hour) or does not belong to your business. | Start connecting again, logged in to the right business. |
| The Uber Eats authorization failed | Uber Eats refused access; the reason follows. | Check your Uber Eats account and try again. |
| Exchanging the Uber Eats token failed | Jimani could not record the access; the reason follows. | Try again and contact us if it keeps failing. |

**Example:** A restaurant wants Uber Eats orders on the kitchen screen. That is not possible automatically right now: the Uber Eats orders stay in the Uber Eats app. Orders via your own webshop do appear on the kitchen screen.

**Related questions:**

- Can I connect Uber Eats to my POS?
- Do orders from Uber Eats come into Jimani?
- Can I connect delivery platforms such as Thuisbezorgd or Uber Eats?

**Keywords:** connect uber eats, uber eats orders, delivery platform integration, uber eats pos, uber eats webshop

**Related:** [How do I turn on my business's online webshop and what do I get?](online-webshop-aanzetten.md)

---

# Which details does my webshop ask the customer when ordering?

**Answer:** You decide that yourself under Settings > Guests and bookings > Guest information. For each guest field, you turn on a switch for Eat here, Pickup and Delivery: where the switch is on, the webshop asks the customer for that field. With the plus, you add a question of your own.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Open Guest information. The list shows each field with the columns Name, Eat here, Pickup and Delivery. For a shop, the name Sale appears instead of Eat here.
- **Step 2.** Turn a switch off to stop asking for a field for that kind of order, or on to ask for it. The change is saved immediately; if you see Not saved, try again.
- **Step 3.** Click the plus for a question of your own, for example a delivery instruction. Fill in the Name for every language of your business and turn on Visible In Here-Eating, Visible in delivery and Visible in takeout for the kinds of order for which you want to ask the question. Choose Save.
- **Step 4.** What the customer filled in, you see later in the order window in Order management, with the customer's details.

A field of your own that you have once created cannot be changed or deleted on this screen: the line does not open when you click it. Turn the field off with the switches if you no longer want to ask for it.

![The list of guest fields and the switches Eat here, Pickup and Delivery](/kennisbank/beelden/gegevens-van-klant-bij-bestellen-1.webp)

**Example:** A delivery service adds the field Ring at the door and turns on only Visible in delivery. For pickup and eat here, the customer does not see that question.

**Related questions:**

- Which details does my webshop ask the customer?
- How do I add a question of my own to the order form?
- How do I make sure the customer does not have to fill in their address or phone number?
- Can I ask for different details for pickup or delivery?

**Keywords:** customer details ordering, customer data webshop, extra question at order, fields delivery pickup, add guest field, delivery instruction field

**Related:** [What can you set under Guest information of the webshop?](../naslag/gastinformatie-webshop.md)

---

# How do I let business customers order on account?

**Answer:** Turn on the Customer CRM function (€ 20 per month), create the business customer under Webshop CRM and set Allowed to pay on account to Yes. At the POS, you choose the customer under Tables, On account. From then on, you follow the invoice under Send invoices and Outstanding invoices.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Turn on Customer CRM under Settings > Add-ons. The Webshop CRM entry then appears under Settings > Guests and bookings.
- **Step 2.** Open Webshop CRM and click Customer. On the first step, fill in the company details (all fields are required) and choose Next.
- **Step 3.** On the second step, set Allowed to pay on account to Yes, fill in the Payment term in days and choose the Email template: pay on account. Choose Save.
- **Step 4.** At the POS, you ring up the products and choose the Tables button. With the button Add to regular guests (On account), you see the business customers. Choose the customer and confirm with Customer order. During checkout, you then pay on account (Pay on account).
- **Step 5.** Under Send invoices are the latest orders on account with Invoice date, Due date and Invoice Total. The due date is the invoice date plus the customer's payment term.
- **Step 6.** When the customer has paid, set the invoice to Paid and choose Save. An invoice that has not been paid on time also appears under Outstanding invoices. The payment counts as Others.

You adjust the email with the invoice under Email template. Use the placeholders (such as Customer name, Invoice number, Amount due and Payment link) to insert details. Fill in subject and text in every language, or leave both empty: the standard text is then used.

**Example:** A wholesaler lets a canteen order on account with a 30-day payment term. It appears under Send invoices. After 30 days without payment, the invoice also appears under Outstanding invoices. The wholesaler sets it to Paid as soon as the money is in.

**Related questions:**

- How do I let a company order on account?
- How do I create an invoice for a business customer?
- Where do I see customers' outstanding invoices?
- What does the function for customers on account cost?

**Keywords:** order on account, customer crm, business customer invoice, payment term, outstanding invoices, set invoice as paid

**Related:** [How does the Customer CRM work for business customers who order on account?](../naslag/klant-crm.md), [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md)

---

# How does Order management work for the orders of my webshop?

**Answer:** In Order management you see today's orders from your webshop, kiosk and POS. You move them from received to done and then to Delivered, Picked up or eaten here. Delivery, Pickup and Eat here each have their own screen.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Order management (`/WebshopOrderManagement`), with below it Delivery (`/WebshopOrderManagement/Delivery`), Pickup (`/WebshopOrderManagement/Pickup`) and Eat here (`/WebshopOrderManagement/DineIn`). If you don't see a menu entry, you lack the permission for it; the owner sets this under Settings > Your business > Users and permissions.

**Explanation:** On the screen, Order management is called Order overview and has three tabs: Orders, Order Status and Search Order. If none of the items in your business has a kitchen printer, every order goes straight to done and Orders and Order Status disappear: you then only see Search Order. For a shop or treatment business, Eat here is called Sale on the screen. The screens show the orders of your business's working day. You find older orders with Search Order.

- **Step 1.** Open Orders. Each line is an item of an order with the status Order received. Click the status to set the item to In progress and click again to set it to Done. An item with the status Hold goes back to In progress with one click.
- **Step 2.** When all items of an order are set to Done, the order is done. It then appears under Order Status and on the Delivery, Pickup or Eat here screen, depending on the order type.
- **Step 3.** Hand the order to the guest. On the Delivery, Pickup or Eat here screen, click the status Done. The status becomes Delivered, Picked up or (for Eat here) Eat here. The order window also has the button Mark as complete for this.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Orders (tab) | Shows the items of orders that are still being handled, with a status button per item. | For the kitchen or the counter preparing orders. | Only orders of the current working day. If your business has no kitchen work, this tab is not shown. |
| Order Status (tab) | Shows the orders that are completely done and still have to be picked up by or delivered to the guest. | To see what is ready. | View only: the status Done has no button here. You finish an order on Delivery, Pickup or Eat here. |
| Search Order (tab) | Searches orders by item, order number, amount, name, email and more, including earlier days. | To find an order again, for example for a question from a guest. | Click the info icon for the window with the order. |
| View completed orders | Adds the orders that are already finished to the list. | When you also want to see what has already been delivered, picked up or eaten. | Without this you only see what is still ready for the guest. |
| Select Type | Drop-down above the search field: Order number, Email or Customer Name. | Together with the Search field, to find an order quickly. | The Clear button empties the search. |
| Status | The status of the item or the order: Order received, In progress, Done, Hold, Completed, Delivered, Picked up or Refund. | In Orders to move things along, in the other lists to read. | A line with Refund is an item that was refunded; it has no button. |
| Desired time | The time at which the guest wants to have their order. | To decide the order of the work. | The lists are sorted by this time. |
| Order type | Delivery, Pickup or Eat here. | To see how the order is handled. | In a shop, Sale is shown instead of Eat here. |
| Order number | The number by which the guest recognises their order. | When handing over the order. | Also shown on the guest's receipt. |
| Buzzer | The number of the buzzer the guest receives. | Only if you use buzzers. | The column is only shown if the Buzzers feature is on. |
| Customer Name | The name of the guest. | When handing over the order. | In Search Order this column is only shown if your online store is on. If the name is not on the order, it was rung up at the POS. |
| Taken by | The employee who took the order. | To see who did it. | If you click a status in Orders, your name is added to the order. If it says Auto Set, the order was set automatically. |
| Address | The guest's address. | Only on the Delivery screen. | Comes from the details the guest entered. |
| Postal code | The guest's postal code. | Only on the Delivery screen. | Must match your Delivery settings if you use delivery areas. |
| City | The guest's city. | Only on the Delivery screen. | - |
| Delivery time | The time at which the order was delivered. | On the Delivery screen. | Stays empty as long as the order is still ready. |
| Pick-up time | The time at which the order was picked up. | On the Pickup screen. | Stays empty as long as the order is still ready. |
| Time Handled | The time at which the order was finished. | On the Eat here screen. | Stays empty as long as the order is still ready. |
| Date | The date of the order. | In Search Order. | - |
| Order time | The time of the order. | In Search Order. | - |
| Price | The amount of the order. | In Search Order and in the side panel. | The side panel on the right shows today's orders; click a line for the window with the order. |
| Payment method | How the order was paid. | In Search Order. | See the Payment method filter below. |

**Search options (Search Order tab):** expand Search options to filter. All fields work together.

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Search | One field for the text: item, order number, amount, name or email. | When you don't know what you are looking for. | A scanned barcode from a receipt is simply the order number. |
| Date as of and Date to | The period of the orders. | To view a day or a week. | Use the - and + buttons to move one day. |
| Category and Product | Limits to a category or a product. | For example to see what you sold of one product. | Choose Make a selection to leave the filter empty. |
| Price from and Price to | Limits by the amount of the order. | To find large or small orders. | - |
| Status | Order received, Done, Delivered, Picked up, Eat here (or Sale) or Cancelled. | For example to see cancelled orders. | Only shown if your online store is on. |
| Time from and Time to | Limits by the time of the order. | To view one part of the day. | - |
| Payment method | Cash, Card, Card payment (external), Tap to Pay, Gift voucher, Tokens, Pay on account or Others. | To see what came in by cash or card. | - |
| Desired time | Limits by the guest's desired time. | To view pickup or delivery times. | Only shown if your online store is on. |
| Order type | Delivery, Pickup or Eat here. | To view one type. | Only shown if your online store is on. |
| User | The employee who took the order, or POS. | To see what one employee did. | POS means the orders without a name, so rung up at the POS. |
| Print | Prints the list. | For an overview on paper. | The title on the printout is Orders. |

**The window of an order:** click the info icon in front of a line.

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Order Status (steps) | Shows the steps Order received, Payment, In progress, Done and Completed with the time. | To see where the order is. | An order from the POS shows Open, Paid or Completed. |
| Order type, Payment method, Ordered via | How the order is handled, how it was paid and where it comes from: Online store, Manual or Kiosk orders. | For questions from the guest. | - |
| Track & trace | A field for the code or link of the parcel carrier; next to it the link Track the shipment appears. | For an order that is shipped with a parcel carrier. | The field saves as soon as you leave it. For PostNL, DHL, UPS, DPD or GLS, Jimani turns a code into a link, provided you chose that carrier under the delivery methods. |
| Refund | Opens the receipt in the POS to take items back. | When a guest returns an item. | Greyed out if the Refund feature is not on. See [How do I refund a webshop order?](../faq/webshopbestelling-terugbetalen.md) |
| Print receipt | Prints the receipt of the order. | When the guest wants a receipt. | - |
| Reprint tickets | Prints the tickets of the order again. | Only for a receipt with tickets. | - |
| Mark as complete | Sets the order to delivered, picked up or eaten here and all items to Completed. | When the guest has their order. | You get the message Order is complete. |
| Delivery costs, VAT, Discount, Total incl. VAT | The amounts at the bottom of the order. | To check what the guest paid. | Delivery costs is only shown for a delivery order. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| No data found. | There are no orders for this selection. | Change your search, or turn on View completed orders. |
| Loading Order Data | The window of the order is being fetched. | Wait a moment. |
| Order is complete | You set the order to completed. | Nothing, choose OK. |

**Related questions:**

- What do I see in Order management?
- Why do I only see Search Order in Order management?
- What is the difference between Orders and Order Status?
- Where do I see the orders from the kiosk and POS?

**Keywords:** order management, manage webshop orders, set order to done, order pickup delivery, order overview, search order

**Related:** [How do I follow the status of an order and how does the kitchen screen work?](../faq/bestelstatus-en-keukenscherm.md), [How do I manage the orders of my webshop?](../faq/bestellingen-beheren.md)

---

# What can you set under Delivery (delivery schedule, delivery areas and postcodes)?

**Answer:** Under Delivery you set on which days and until what time customers of your online webshop can choose a delivery, which delivery areas you have and what delivery costs per postcode. The screen has three tabs: Delivery schedule, Delivery areas and Delivery postcodes.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Delivery and pickup (Delivery times and postcodes) (`/Settings/DeliveryZipcodes`). With a POS, the entry is there if your online webshop is on. A link with `#bezorggebieden` or `#bezorgpostcodes` after it opens that tab straight away.

**Explanation:** Every choice on Delivery schedule is saved immediately; you briefly see Saved. If the schedule is off and you have no delivery areas, the webshop works as it always did: today only and no postcode check. The delivery hours per day are not here but with the opening hours of the webshop (columns Delivery from, Delivery to and Delivery). A day on which delivery is off there is always dropped.

- **Step 1.** On the Delivery schedule tab, set the question Use delivery schedule to Yes and set Same-day orders until, Earliest delivery and Days ahead.
- **Step 2.** If you want different days per area, choose the Delivery areas tab, click the plus and fill in the window.
- **Step 3.** On Delivery postcodes, choose for each postcode range the Area it belongs to. Outside the areas, the customer cannot order.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Delivery | The title of the screen: delivery times, delivery areas and postcodes of your online webshop. | - | - |
| Delivery schedule (tab) | Here you set on which days and times customers in the online webshop can choose a delivery. | When you want customers to choose a delivery day. | Applies to the whole webshop. |
| On which days and times customers in the online webshop can choose a delivery. | The explanation above the Delivery schedule tab. | - | - |
| Use delivery schedule | Yes: the customer chooses a delivery day from the coming days. No: today only, as always (unless there are delivery areas). | Set to Yes as soon as you work with days or areas. | If you have delivery areas, the schedule also applies when this is set to No. |
| Same-day orders until | After this time, today can no longer be chosen. | To prevent orders for today after closing time. | Leaving it empty means: no limit. The customer then gets the message that they can no longer order for today after this time. |
| Earliest delivery | The first day the customer can choose: Today, Tomorrow or Day after tomorrow. | When you need time to prepare or plan. | - |
| Days ahead | How many days ahead the customer can choose a delivery day. | To avoid opening the calendar too far. | Maximum 120, and never lower than the earliest day. |
| Delivery areas (tab) | The list of areas. The delivery days per area. A postcode belongs to an area through the Area column at the delivery postcodes; outside the areas, ordering is not possible. | When you deliver to different places on different days. | Without areas, the delivery days apply to all postcodes. |
| The delivery days per area. A postcode belongs to an area through the Area column at the delivery postcodes; outside the areas, ordering is not possible. | The explanation above the Delivery areas tab. | - | - |
| Add delivery area | The plus above the list opens the window Add delivery area. | For a new area. | You open an existing area by clicking the line. |
| Delivery postcodes (tab) | The list of postcode ranges, with costs, minimum, delivery time and area. | To set the costs and conditions per postcode range. | - |
| Manage delivery areas, delivery costs and minimum order quantities. | The explanation above the Delivery postcodes tab. | - | - |
| Select Excel file | The field to choose an Excel file for an import. | To load many postcodes at once. | Supported: .xlsx and .xls. |
| Choose a file | The button to choose the file on your computer. | For the import. | After choosing, the file name is shown on the button. |
| Import | Reads the chosen file and adds the ranges or updates them. | After choosing the file. | Row 1 is the header. From row 2: Zipcode from, Zipcode to, Delivery costs, Minimum order amount, Delivery time (hh:mm), Exclude (TRUE or FALSE, as in the export file) and Area. An existing range with the same from and to is updated. A row with an error is skipped. |
| Export | Downloads all postcodes, including the excluded ones, as DeliveryZipcodes.xlsx. | To edit in Excel and load back. | An old export file with six columns leaves the areas as they are. |
| Show excluded | Yes: the excluded ranges are also in the list. | To check or restore them. | The list refreshes immediately. |
| Add zipcodes | The plus above the list opens the window Add zipcodes. | For a single range. | You open an existing range by clicking the line. |
| Area (in the list) | A drop-down per range to choose the area; the choice is saved immediately. | To link ranges to an area. | An excluded range shows a dash: it belongs to no area. |
| Delete delivery area? | The question at the trash icon of an area. | When you no longer use an area. | The postcodes of this area remain, but then belong to no area. |

**The Add zipcodes window:** the window is called Add zipcodes, even if you open an existing range. The Delivery area block says: A postcode where you deliver, with the costs and the amount above which it is free.

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Set the postcode area, the delivery time, the costs, the minimum order amount and whether this area is excluded. | The explanation at the top of the window. | - | - |
| Zipcode from: | The first postcode number of the range. | Always. | Digits only: 9501 for 9501 AB. |
| Zipcode to: | The last postcode number of the range. | Always. | For a single postcode, enter the same number twice. If ranges overlap, the narrowest range wins. |
| Delivery time | A time in hh:mm that is stored with the range. | To record an expected delivery time per range. | The times the customer can choose in the webshop come from the delivery hours and the time slots, not from this field. |
| Minimum order amount | The minimum amount of products for delivery to these postcodes. | To avoid small orders at a distance. | 0 means: no minimum. An order below it does not go through: the customer gets the message that the minimum order amount has not been reached. |
| Delivery costs | The delivery costs for this range. | When the costs differ per place. | Above zero, they take precedence over the standard delivery costs. The limit Delivery costs free after amount of the webshop still applies. |
| Exclude | Yes: you do not deliver to this range. | To carve a piece out of a larger area. | An excluded range always wins over another range. |
| Area | The delivery area of the range. No area detaches the range. | When you work with delivery areas. | With delivery areas, only a range that belongs to an active area counts. |

**The Delivery area window:** the window is called Add delivery area or Edit delivery area. At the top it says: The name, the delivery days and, if applicable, own delivery hours of this area.

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Area (block) | The customer sees the name when choosing a delivery day. | - | - |
| Name | The name of the area, for example the name of the municipality. | Always. | Maximum 100 characters. Two areas cannot have the same name. |
| Active | No: this area is temporarily not counted; ordering is then not possible for its postcodes. | For example during a holiday period. | - |
| Delivery days (block) | On which days delivery takes place in this area, with a Yes or No per day from Monday to Sunday. | Always. | Choose at least one day. If delivery is off that day in the opening hours, the day is dropped anyway. |
| Delivery hours (block) | Empty: the delivery hours of that day from the opening hours. Filled in: these hours, for this area only. | When this area has different hours. | Fill in both times or neither, and the end time must be after the start time. |
| Delivery from | The start time of the delivery hours of this area. | Only with own hours. | - |
| Delivery until | The end time of the delivery hours of this area. | Only with own hours. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Saved | The choice on Delivery schedule has been stored. | Nothing. |
| Not saved | The choice has not been stored. | Try again. |
| Delivery zipcode saved | The range has been stored. | Nothing, choose OK. |
| Unable to save delivery zipcode | The range has not been stored. | Check the fields and try again. |
| Select a file | You clicked Import without a file. | Choose a file first. |
| Saving did not work. Please try again. | The import failed. | Check the file and try again. |
| The delivery postcodes were not downloaded. Please try again. | The export failed. | Try again. |
| Enter a time as hh:mm. | The time was not filled in correctly. | Type the time as 13:30. |
| Choose today, tomorrow or the day after tomorrow. | The earliest day is not valid. | Choose Today, Tomorrow or Day after tomorrow. |
| Days ahead must be between the earliest day and 120. | The number of days is not valid. | Enter a number from the earliest day up to 120. |
| Enter a name. | The area has no name. | Enter the name. |
| A delivery area with this name already exists. | The name already exists. | Choose another name. |
| Choose at least one delivery day. | All days are set to No. | Set at least one day to Yes. |
| For the delivery hours, fill in both times, or leave both empty. | You filled in only one time. | Fill in the other one too, or clear the first. |
| The end time must be after the start time. | The hours run backwards. | Adjust the times. |

**Related questions:**

- What is on the Delivery schedule, Delivery areas and Delivery postcodes tabs?
- What happens if I don't use a delivery schedule?
- Where do I set the delivery hours per day?
- How do I set delivery costs per postcode?

**Keywords:** delivery postcodes, delivery areas, delivery schedule, set delivery days, add postcode, delivery until, import postcodes from excel

**Related:** [How do I set delivery days, delivery times and postcodes?](../faq/bezorgdagen-tijden-en-postcodes-instellen.md), [How do I set delivery costs, free delivery and a minimum order amount?](../faq/bezorgkosten-en-minimum-bestelbedrag.md)

---

# What can you set under Delivery settings, Pickup and Eat here?

**Answer:** Three short settings screens determine per ordering channel (kiosk, widget and POS) whether delivery, pickup and eat here are on, and how long and how fast delivery is. The same settings are in the Webshop settings window; preferably use that window. Whether the webshop widget offers pickup and delivery is chosen in the widget itself; see [How do the delivery and pickup options of the webshop widget work?](webshopwidget-bezorgen.md).

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Delivery and pickup > Webshop settings (or type "Webshop settings" in Search for a setting…), with the steps Delivery settings, Eat here settings and Pickup settings. The separate screens are also at `/Settings/DeliverySettings`, `/Settings/DineInSettings` and `/Settings/PickupSettings`. No menu entry leads to them; they can be reached by anyone who has the permission (Delivery settings, Settings for "Eat here" and Pickup settings under Users and permissions) and knows the address.

**Explanation:** Each screen has switches per channel and one Save button. After saving you get Your details have been saved! and you go back to Settings. A channel is the place where the guest orders: the kiosk in your business, the widget (your online webshop) or the POS (manual ordering). If you want to manage the delivery methods of your webshop (Pickup, Delivery and Eat here with the delivery questions), you do that in the widget window; see [How do I turn on delivery, pickup or eat here in my webshop?](../faq/bezorgen-afhalen-hier-eten-aanzetten.md)

![The Delivery settings screen with the switches per channel and the fields for time and costs](/kennisbank/beelden/bezorg-afhaal-hier-eten-instellingen-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Delivery settings | The title of the first screen. | - | Shown in the Webshop settings window as the step Delivery settings. |
| Delivery active for an order via the kiosk. | On: delivery is a choice on the kiosk. | When guests want to order a delivery at the kiosk. | - |
| Delivery active for an order via the widget. | On: delivery is a choice in the widget of your webshop. | For online ordering with delivery. | - |
| Delivery active for an order via the POS. | On: delivery is a choice for manual ordering at the POS. | For delivery orders by phone. | - |
| Standard order processing time | The standard time in minutes an order needs to reach the guest: 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 45, 60 or 90 minutes. | To determine the expected delivery time. | In the widget window this field is called Delivery travel time. It is required. |
| Delivery/shipping costs | The standard costs for delivery or shipping. | When every delivery costs the same. | An amount per postcode range takes precedence over this. Required; enter 0 for free. |
| Delivery costs free after amount | From this amount of products, the delivery costs are zero. | To deliver larger orders for free. | A limit of 0 means: never free. Required. |
| Minimum order quantity | The minimum number of products the guest must have in the cart to check out. | If you only deliver from a certain number of products. | The widget reports (currently in English) that the guest must choose at least that many products to continue. Required; 0 means no minimum. |
| Show desired delivery time in the Widget | On: the guest sees and chooses their desired delivery time in the widget. | When guests may choose a time themselves. | - |
| Eat Here settings | The title of the second screen. | - | Shown in the Webshop settings window as the step Eat here settings. |
| Eat here active for an order via the widget. | On: eat here is a choice in the widget. | For ordering at the table or at the counter via the webshop. | This label appears twice on this screen: the first checkbox belongs to the kiosk. |
| Eat here active for an order via the POS. | On: eat here is a choice for manual ordering. | For ordering at the POS. | - |
| Pickup settings | The title of the third screen. | - | Shown in the Webshop settings window as the step Pickup settings. |
| Pickup active for an order via the kiosk. | On: pickup is a choice on the kiosk. | For pickup orders at the kiosk. | - |
| Pickup active for an order via the widget. | On: pickup is a choice in the widget. | For online pickup. | - |
| Pickup active for an order via the POS. | On: pickup is a choice for manual ordering. | For pickup orders by phone. | - |
| Show pickup as an option in the widget | On: pickup is an option in the widget. | Next to the switch for the widget. | - |
| Save | Stores the switches and fields of this screen. | After every change. | There is no separate cancel button; the Previous button at the bottom left takes you back to Settings without saving. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Your details have been saved! | The settings have been stored. | Choose OK; you go back to Settings. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I turn on delivery or pickup for the kiosk or the POS?
- Where do I set what is possible per ordering channel?
- What is an ordering channel?
- How do I set how fast delivery is?

**Keywords:** delivery settings, pickup settings, eat here settings, delivery costs free after amount, minimum order quantity, order processing time

**Related:** [How does the Webshop settings window work?](webshop-instellingen.md), [How do I set delivery costs, free delivery and a minimum order amount?](../faq/bezorgkosten-en-minimum-bestelbedrag.md), [How do I turn on delivery, pickup or eat here in my webshop?](../faq/bezorgen-afhalen-hier-eten-aanzetten.md)

---

# What can you set under Guest information of the webshop?

**Answer:** Under Guest information you decide which details a customer fills in when ordering in your webshop, and whether they are asked for eat here, pickup or delivery. With the plus you add a question of your own.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Guest information (`/Settings/WebshopGuestDetails`).

**Explanation:** The list shows each guest field with three switches: Eat here, Pickup and Delivery. A switch that is on means the customer sees that field for that type of order. Each switch is saved immediately, without a Save button. If it fails, you see Not saved with the reason. For a shop or treatment business, the name Sale appears instead of Eat here.

- **Step 1.** Click the plus at the top right to create a new field.
- **Step 2.** Under Name, enter the question, for each language of your business on its own tab.
- **Step 3.** Turn on the switches Visible In Here-Eating, Visible in delivery and Visible in takeout for the order types where you want to ask the question, and choose Save.

![The list of guest fields and the switches Eat here, Pickup and Delivery](/kennisbank/beelden/gastinformatie-webshop-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Guest information | The title of the screen. | - | - |
| Plus (new field) | Opens the window Add customer details. | For an extra question to the customer, for example a delivery instruction. | - |
| Name | The name of the field as the customer sees it. | Always. | Required, in every language your business uses. |
| Eat here | On: the field is asked for eat here. | To decide per order type what you ask. | Saved immediately. |
| Pickup | On: the field is asked for pickup. | Same. | Saved immediately. |
| Delivery | On: the field is asked for delivery. | Same. | Saved immediately. |
| Add customer details | The window for a new field. At the top it says: Here you decide which details a customer fills in when ordering. | For a new question. | The block is called Guest field. |
| Guest field | A question the guest answers when ordering, and whether it is required. | - | This window has no option for required. |
| Visible In Here-Eating | On: the question appears for eat here. | Per new field. | - |
| Visible in delivery | On: the question appears for delivery. | Per new field. | - |
| Visible in takeout | On: the question appears for pickup. | Per new field. | - |
| Save | Creates the field. | After filling it in. | You see a confirmation and return to the list. |
| Previous | Closes the window without saving. | To cancel. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Not saved | A switch could not be stored. | Try again. |
| Saved failed! | The new field could not be stored. | Check the name for all languages and try again. |
| Your details have been saved! | The new field is in the list. | Choose OK. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I set which fields the customer fills in when ordering?
- How do I add an extra question to the order form?
- Why does it say Not saved at a guest field?
- What is the difference between the switches Eat here, Pickup and Delivery?

**Keywords:** webshop guest information, customer details ordering, extra question at order, fields delivery pickup, add guest field

**Related:** [Which details does my webshop ask the customer when ordering?](../faq/gegevens-van-klant-bij-bestellen.md)

---

# How does the Customer CRM work for business customers who order on account?

**Answer:** In the CRM you manage your business customers who order on account, see the invoices of those orders and decide the email with which the invoice is sent to the customer. You set an invoice to Paid as soon as the customer has paid.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Customer CRM (`/Settings/WebshopCRM`). The entry is only there if the Customer CRM add-on is on (Settings > Add-ons).

**Explanation:** The screen is called CRM and says: Your business customers who order on account, their invoices and the email with which the invoice is sent to the customer. Above the tabs is the Customer button to add a customer. There are four tabs: Customers, Send Invoices, Outstanding invoices and Email template.

- **Step 1.** Click Customer and fill in the company's details. Choose Next.
- **Step 2.** Set Allowed to pay on account to Yes, enter the Payment term in days and choose the Email template: pay on account. Choose Save.
- **Step 3.** If the customer orders on account, the order appears under Send Invoices. As soon as the customer has paid, choose Paid at that invoice and then Save.
- **Step 4.** An invoice that was not paid on time also appears under Outstanding invoices.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Customer | Opens the CRM Customer window to add a business customer. | For every new customer who may order on account. | - |
| Customers (tab) | The list of your CRM customers: Company name, First name, Last name, Address, Postal code, City and Invoicing e-mail. | To find or edit a customer. | Click a line to open the customer. The list has a search field. |
| Send Invoices (tab) | The recent orders on account, with Company name, Order number, Invoice date, Due date, Invoice Total and Status. | To see which invoices there are and whether they are paid. | These are the last 700 orders on account. The due date is the invoice date plus the customer's payment term. |
| Outstanding invoices (tab) | The same list, only orders that have not been paid yet and whose due date has passed. | To track down arrears. | The same columns as Send Invoices. |
| Status | A drop-down per invoice: Unpaid or Paid. | As soon as a customer has paid. | After a change the Save button appears; only then is the status stored. A paid invoice counts as a payment with Others. |
| Email template (tab) | The emails to your CRM customers: Email template with the Edit button. | To adjust the text of the invoice email. | Without your own text, the default text is sent. |
| CRM Customer | The window for a customer: Someone who orders from you, with the details that end up on the invoice and the delivery. | For new and existing customers. | The window has two steps: Customer and On account. |
| Language | The customer's language. | Always. | Required. The email to the customer is sent in this language. |
| Salutation | Family., Mr. or Mrs. | Always. | Required. |
| First name | The contact person's first name. | Always. | Required. |
| Last name | The contact person's last name. | Always. | Required. |
| Email | The customer's email address; the invoice goes here. | Always. | Required. For an existing customer the field cannot be changed. |
| Phone | The phone number. | Always. | Required. A valid number is stored neatly with the country code. |
| Address | Street and house number. | Always. | Required. |
| Postal code | The postal code. | Always. | Required. |
| City | The city where the company is based. | Always. | Required. |
| Company name | The name of the company. | Always. | Required; a CRM customer is always a company. |
| VAT number | The company's VAT number. | Always. | Required. |
| KvK | The company's KvK number. | Always. | Required. |
| Next | Goes to the On account step. | After the customer details. | All fields of the first step must be filled in. |
| Allowed to pay on account | Yes: the customer may order on account instead of paying in advance. | For customers you trust. | Set to No to withdraw it again. |
| Payment term | The number of days the customer has to pay an invoice. | Always. | Minimum 1 day. |
| Email template: pay on account | The email used when invoicing this customer for orders on account. | Always. | By default there is the template Invoice to the customer. |
| Previous | Back to the previous step, or close at the first step. | - | - |
| Save | Stores the customer. | In the second step. | If the email address already belongs to a company, you get the message Customer already exists. |
| Edit | Opens the window Invoice to the customer with the text of the email per language. | To adjust the text. | - |
| Placeholders | A list with Name and Label: the details filled in in the email, such as Customer’s name, Customer’s company name, Name of the store, Invoice number, Invoice date, Due date, Amount due, Payment term in days and Payment link. | To insert a detail at the cursor position. | Click a placeholder to insert it. When the email is sent, the real value replaces it. |
| Email template (in the window) | A Subject and a Text per language. | To write the email. | In every language, fill in the subject and the text, or leave both empty: the default text then applies for that language. Under Text it says whether you use Your own text or The default text. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Customer already exists. | There is already a CRM customer with this email address. | Open that customer in the list and edit them there. |
| A customer with this email address already exists who is not linked to a company. Do you want to load the customer details? | The email address is already known as a regular guest. | Choose Yes to take over the details and add the company details, or No. |
| Your details have been saved! | The customer has been stored. | Choose OK. |
| That did not work. Please try again. | Saving failed. | Try again. |
| In every language, fill in the subject and the text, or leave both empty. | In one language there is only a subject or only a text. | Fill in the missing one, or clear the other. |
| Saved. | The email text has been stored. | Nothing. |
| Something went wrong. Please try again. | Saving the email text failed. | Try again. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I add a business customer?
- How do I set an invoice to paid?
- How do I adjust the email with which the invoice is sent to the customer?
- Where do I see which invoices are still outstanding?

**Keywords:** customer crm, order on account, send invoice to customer, outstanding invoices, payment term, business customer webshop

**Related:** [How do I let business customers order on account?](../faq/zakelijke-klanten-op-rekening.md)

---

# How does the Financial overview of my webshop work?

**Answer:** The Financial overview shows the revenue, payments, VAT and margin of your webshop and POS orders over a period. You filter by date, category, product and employee and export it to Excel or PDF.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Money and figures > Reports (`/Settings/WebshopFinancialReport`). The page is called Financial overview.

**Explanation:** At the top, choose the period and optionally a category, product or user and click the magnifying glass. Below the filter bar are blocks with the number of orders, the number of products sold, the revenue, the employee with the highest turnover, the payment methods, the order types, the channel, the VAT by rate, what is not included in revenue, the margin and at the bottom the orders themselves. For Export and Print, without a date, today applies in your shop.

- **Step 1.** Choose Date as of and Date to. Use the - and + buttons to move one day.
- **Step 2.** Optionally choose a Category; the Product list then shows only the products of that category.
- **Step 3.** Click the magnifying glass to load the overview. Click the eraser (Clear) to empty all filters.
- **Step 4.** Use Export for an Excel file (one sheet per part) or Print for a PDF, with the same filters.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Date as of | The first day of the period. | Always, if you are not looking at today. | Date in the form dd-mm-yyyy. |
| Date to | The last day of the period. | Same. | - |
| Category | Limits the overview to one product category: All categories or a name. | To see the revenue of a group. | If you choose a category, the Product list changes with it. |
| Product | Limits the overview to one product: Select products or a name. | To check one product. | If you search on a product or category, there are two revenue amounts: Turnover of this selection and below it Whole orders, the revenue of the complete orders that contained the product. |
| User | Limits the overview to the sales of one employee: All users or a name. | To see what one employee sold. | The list comes from the chosen period and is updated with every search. |
| Search (magnifying glass) | Loads the overview with the chosen filters. | After every change of the filters. | - |
| Clear | Empties the filters. | To start over. | - |
| Export | Downloads the overview as an Excel file. | For your accountant. | Not shown in the POS view. |
| Print | Creates a PDF of the overview. | For a printout. | Not shown in the POS view. |
| Own consumption | Opens the Own consumption overview per month and per year. | If the Own consumption feature is on. | See [Where do I see the revenue and figures of my webshop?](../faq/webshopcijfers-bekijken.md) |
| Foreign VAT report (OSS) | Opens the quarterly report per country for the OSS return. | If you sell to other EU countries. | See [How does OSS VAT work in my Jimani webshop?](../faq/oss-btw.md) |
| Quantity of orders and Quantity of products sold | The counters at the top. | For a quick picture. | - |
| Total revenue | The revenue of the period, with Excl. VAT below it. | For the revenue. | The same revenue (excl. VAT) as on the end-of-day receipt. |
| Employee with highest turnover | The name and revenue of the best seller in this selection. | For an overview per employee. | The Employees block shows all employees from high to low. |
| Payment method | The amount per payment method, as on the end-of-day receipt, with Of which tips. | To check cash and card. | - |
| Order type | The number of orders per type: Pickup, Delivery and Eat here (for a shop Sale). | To see how guests order. | - |
| Channel | The number of orders via Online store, Kiosk and POS. | To see where the revenue comes from. | - |
| VAT by rate | Per VAT rate the VAT and the revenue excl. VAT. | For your VAT return. | - |
| Not included in revenue | Cancelled, Practice and Refunded with quantity and amount. | To see what does not count. | Cancelled and practice receipts do not count in the revenue, just like on the end-of-day closing. Refunded amounts have already been deducted from the revenue. |
| Margin and register result | The revenue excl. VAT with cost price, the Cost of goods, the Gross margin, the Transaction fees (card fees) and the Register result. | To see what you earn. | The margin only concerns revenue with a known cost price; enter the cost price at the product. Fixed costs such as rent and staff are not included. |
| Total, Quantity, Revenue excl., Cost, Margin | The columns of the margin per category or per product. | To see which group yields the most. | An asterisk means the cost price is not known for part of the sales. |
| Orders (list at the bottom) | Every order with Payment method, Date, Order number, Channel, Quantity, Product, Price and Order type. | To find an order again. | Use Back and Next to page through. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| No data found. | There are no orders for this selection. | Adjust the period or the filters. |
| These products are not counted in the margin. Enter the cost price at the product, then they count. | No cost price is known for these products. | Enter the cost price at the product. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I see the revenue and margin of my webshop?
- How do I filter the revenue by product or employee?
- Can I export the financial overview to Excel or PDF?
- Where do I see the VAT by rate of my orders?

**Keywords:** webshop financial overview, revenue per product, revenue per employee, VAT by rate, POS margin, export report

**Related:** [Where do I see the revenue and figures of my webshop?](../faq/webshopcijfers-bekijken.md)

---

# How does the Refunds overview of my webshop work?

**Answer:** The Refunds overview shows all returns from your POS and webshop: what was taken back, by whom, why and whether the product went back into stock. You filter by date, product and employee.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Money and figures > Reports, the overview Refunds overview (`/Settings/WebshopRefunds`). The Refund feature must be on (Settings > Add-ons; it is free). The permission is called Returns at the POS.

**Explanation:** The screen says: View all returns by date, product and by whom these returns were taken. When you open it, From and To are set to today. Choose a period and click Search. Below the filters are five counters and the list of refunds. Items that were removed from a table before payment appear in a separate block below. You do not book a return itself here: you do that at the POS, see [How do I refund a webshop order?](../faq/webshopbestelling-terugbetalen.md)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| From | The first day of the period. | Always, if you are not only looking at today. | A date in the future cannot be chosen. Use - and + to move one day. |
| To | The last day of the period. | Same. | Cannot be before From. |
| Product | Limits the list to one product. | To see how often a product comes back. | The list contains the products that have ever been refunded. Product shows all products. |
| User | Limits the list to the employee who took the return. | To see who books many returns. | The list contains the employees who have ever booked a return. |
| Search | Loads the list with the chosen filters. | After every change. | - |
| Clear | Empties Product and User and sets From and To to today. | To start over. | The list is only refreshed when you click Search. |
| Print | Prints the page. | For a printout. | - |
| Total refund value | The total amount of the refunds in the period. | To see how much money went back. | - |
| Quantity of refunds | The number of returns. | For a quick picture. | - |
| Total products refunded | The number of products that were taken back. | Same. | - |
| Total quantity of products in stock | How many of those products went back into stock. | To check the stock. | - |
| Total quantity of lost products | How many of those products were written off because they can no longer be sold. | To see shrinkage. | - |
| Order number | The order the return belongs to. | To find the receipt again. | - |
| Refund date | When the return was taken. | Always. | - |
| Quantity | The number of pieces. | Always. | - |
| Name | The name of the product. | Always. | - |
| Price | The amount refunded. | Always. | - |
| Reason | The reason that was chosen or entered. | To see patterns. | - |
| Return in stock | Yes or No: whether the product was put back into stock. | For the stock. | - |
| Repayment method | Cash or Others. | To see how the money went back. | For card payments this shows Others. |
| Repaid by | The employee who took the return. | Always. | - |
| Removed before payment | Items that were on a table and were removed from the receipt before payment. | To see what was removed from the receipt without any money going back. | With Date, Order number, Quantity, Total amount, Reason, By whom and a Total. If there is no name under By whom, it was done at the POS. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| No data found. | There are no refunds in this period. | Choose another period or other filters. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I see all returns of my POS and webshop?
- How do I see who made a refund and why?
- Did a returned product go back into stock?
- How do I filter returns by product or employee?

**Keywords:** refunds overview, returns overview, webshop refunds, return in stock, removed before payment, lost products

**Related:** [How do I refund a webshop order?](../faq/webshopbestelling-terugbetalen.md)

---

# What does the Ordering and payment tab do for the QR codes?

**Answer:** The Ordering and payment tab is next to QR codes, Call waiter to table and Show menu at the QR codes. It belongs to ordering and paying by the guest at the table, but currently has no settings that save anything.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Till and products > QR codes (`/Settings/QRCodes`), fourth tab Ordering and payment. The QR codes are an add-on of €10 per month that requires the online webshop.

**Explanation:** The tab shows the title Ordering and payment, an explanation line where the screen still shows a technical text instead of an explanation, and a drop-down for the widget the guest gets to see. The drop-down only contains Select Widget, and there is no button to save anything. So you cannot set anything here yet. With the QR code on the table, the guest calls the staff; if you want guests to order at the table, turn on Eat here in the webshop widget. See [Can a guest order and pay at the table with a QR code?](../../kassa/faq/qr-code-op-tafel.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Ordering and payment | The title of the tab. | - | The tab has no save button. |
| Explanation line | The line below the title. | - | The screen still shows a technical text instead of an explanation; this is not a setting. |
| Select the widget to display | The label of a drop-down with widgets. | Meant for choosing which widget the guest sees. | The list only shows Select Widget; there is nothing to choose. The info icon says: Choose the widget the guest gets to see. |

**Related questions:**

- Can a guest order and pay at the table via a QR code?
- Which settings are there on the Ordering and payment tab?
- Why can't I set anything under Ordering and payment?

**Keywords:** ordering and payment qr, qr code table ordering, select widget qr, qr codes tab

**Related:** [Can a guest order and pay at the table with a QR code?](../../kassa/faq/qr-code-op-tafel.md), [How does Set up QR codes work in Jimani?](../../kassa/naslag/qr-codes-tafels.md), [How does Order management work for the orders of my webshop?](orderbeheer.md)

---

# How does My website work in Jimani?

**Answer:** In My website you edit the ready-made website of your business: on the left you see the site, on the right is the panel with the tabs Edit, Blocks, Style, Pages, Languages, Address and More. Your changes are only visible to visitors once you click Publish.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Your business > Website (`/Mijnwebsite`)

**Explanation:** A new business gets the website already completely ready as a draft. You click a text, photo, button, the menu or the footer in the site to edit that part on the right. Prices, products and opening hours come from Jimani: you change them under Products and Opening hours, not here. If the website is not on yet, the top says "Your website is ready as a draft. View it and edit texts and photos; visitors only see it once you turn it on." and the main button is called **Turn on website**. After that it is called **Publish**. While the site is being made, it says "We are making your website. This usually takes less than a minute; you will see it appear here automatically." More about the costs is in [What does the Jimani website cost?](../faq/wat-kost-de-website.md).

![The My website screen with your own website on the left and on the right the panel with the tabs Edit, Blocks, Style, Pages, Languages, Address and More](/kennisbank/beelden/mijn-website-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Test your website | Opens your site in a new tab; if it is not published yet, you see the draft. | To see what a visitor will see. | - |
| Undo / Redo | Undoes a change from this session or restores it (also Ctrl+Z and Ctrl+Y). | When you change your mind. | Applies to the site and the webshop together, only in the session in which you are working. |
| Computer, Tablet, Phone | Shows the site at 100%, 768 or 390 pixels wide. | To check the site on a phone. | Only changes your preview. |
| Collapse menu / Expand menu | Collapses or expands the panel on the right. | For more room for the site. | - |
| Turn on website | Turns the website on and publishes the draft. | Once, when your site has to go live. | After this the 14-day trial starts and then the price of the website. If the site has already been chosen or published once, you turn it on via Settings > Add-ons. |
| Publish | Puts the draft live for visitors and stores a version. | After every series of changes. | Next to the button is the status: Published, Unpublished changes or Not published yet. |
| Edit | First tab: choose a text, photo, button or part in the site. | For everyday editing. | First click in the site, then the panel appears. |
| Title | The title of a part, for example an info card (maximum 60 characters, per language). | To change a heading. | Empty or own text: see Content. |
| Content: From Jimani / Own text | Chooses whether a part takes its details from Jimani or shows an own text. | For the info cards Opening hours, Address and Contact and the footer. | Back to the details from Jimani restores it. |
| Extra lines | A text box (maximum 1000 characters) with extra lines below the details from Jimani. | For an extra remark, for example "Terrace closed when it rains". | Only for parts with details from Jimani. |
| Rewrite with AI | Lets the AI rewrite the text in the tone Friendly, Professional, Short and punchy or Enthusiastic, with the button Rewrite. | Under More options at a text. | Costs AI credit (see [What does using AI in Jimani cost?](../../prijzen/faq/ai-tegoed.md)). Back to the default text restores the original text. |
| Button text | The text on a button of the site (maximum 60 characters, per language). | To give a button its own wording. | Each language has its own text. |
| Link | Where the button goes: Default (as set by Jimani), Page of the site, Webshop / Order, Book a table (widget), Phone, Email or Own address (https). | When a button has to go somewhere else. | For Phone and Email, leave the field empty for your business's number or email address. An invalid link is rejected: "This link isn't valid. Check the number, the email address or the address (https://...)." |
| Open in new tab | Opens the link of a button in a new tab. | For a link to another website. | Under More options. |
| Formatting | Button color, Text color, Background color, Style (Filled, Outlined, Text link), Font size (Small, Normal, Large, Extra large), Bold and Alignment (Left, Middle, Right). | To make one button or text different from the rest. | If a text is hard to read, Jimani says so and suggests a readable color with Use a readable colour. For each color you can go back to the color from your branding or the theme. |
| Choose photo | Chooses a photo from your computer (jpg, png or webp, maximum 10 MB). | For the large photo at the top, the photo at the welcome or the gallery. | For the gallery you choose several photos at once and put them in order with the arrows; the Gallery block on Home shows the first 12. |
| Let AI create a photo | Creates a photo based on what you type at "What should be in the photo? (may be left empty)". | When you have no photo of your own. | There are 3 attempts per photo, after that you upload a photo yourself. Costs AI credit. |
| Delete | Removes the photo. | - | - |
| Map | Height (Low, Normal, Tall); under More options Width (Within the content, Full width), Map type (Default, Grey), Zoom level (Close up, Neighbourhood, City) and Show map straight away. | For the route map. | Show map straight away loads Google Maps immediately, with cookies from Google. By default the map only loads after a click by the visitor. |
| Social media | A link per channel (Facebook, Instagram, TikTok, LinkedIn, YouTube, Tripadvisor, X) or your WhatsApp number. | For the buttons to your pages. | Remove link removes it. Show the block "Follow us on Instagram" turns the block on or off. |
| Blocks | Tab with the blocks of your homepage as a drag list: drag them into the order you want and set them On or Off. | To put Home together. | Add block chooses from, among others, Menu, Book, Order, Appointment, Tickets, Activities, Photos, Opening hours, Map, Reviews, Text, Button, Instagram and Newsletter. Remove block removes it again. |
| On your website | Sets a block On or Off. | When you don't want to show a block for the time being. | - |
| Blocks on your Contact page | Choose Yes or No per block and drag them in the order you want: Contact form, Opening hours, Phone, Map and WhatsApp button. | For the Contact page. | Saved immediately and shown in the preview. |
| Open today | Turns the "Open today" item at the top right of your site's menu on or off. | When visitors should immediately see your opening hours for today. | The times come from Jimani. |
| Menu block | Window with View (List or Tiles), Show prices, Show photos and What's shown (All on, All off or per product). | To choose which products are on the site. | New products from Jimani are added automatically. You change prices and products under Products. |
| Main color | The color of buttons and accents; the other colors adjust automatically. | On the Style tab. | If your business uses Branding, you see "The color comes from your branding. Change it there; your site, widgets, emails and POS then follow." and a Branding button. |
| Logo | The logo at the top of the site; empty is the logo of your shop. | On the Style tab. | Use shop logo restores it. |
| Font | The font of the site. | Under More options on the Style tab. | - |
| Pages | Turns pages on or off and sets the order of the menu. Expand a page for Name in the menu, Title in Google and Description in Google. | To steer the menu and the search results in Google. | Add page offers Gallery, Opening hours and Blog. A page for a module without an active widget is not yet visible to visitors. |
| Languages | Shows your Main language and lets you add a maximum of two extra languages with Add language and the button Translate with AI (Dutch, English, German, French, Spanish or Italian). | For international guests. | Only works with the Multilingual (website) integration. Translating again overwrites the texts of that language. See [How do I put my website in more languages?](../faq/website-meer-talen.md). |
| Address | Your Jimani address (the part before .jimani.site) and your own domain with the button Check. | For an address of your own. | Steps: see [How do I connect my own domain to my Jimani website?](../faq/eigen-domein-koppelen.md). |
| Google Analytics or Tag Manager | Your measurement ID (only the ID, for example G-AB12CD34EF). | On the More tab, to measure visitors. | The site has no cookie banner: consent is set to declined in advance, so Analytics places no cookies and you only see estimated visitor numbers. |
| Newsletter sign-ups | Shows how many people signed up and offers the button Export (CSV with email, language and date). | To use the list in another program. | Anyone who signs up first receives a confirmation email and then your newsletters from Newsletters. |
| Versions | Every time you Publish, a version of your website and your webshop is stored. With Restore you put an earlier version back into your draft. | When you want to go back to an earlier state. | Visitors only see the restored version after Publish. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| That didn't work | Saving or the action failed. | Try again. |
| This address is already in use. | Someone else has that address under .jimani.site. | Choose another address. |
| Use only lowercase letters, numbers and hyphens (2 to 63 characters). | The address contains other characters. | Adjust the address. |
| This photo is too large (maximum 10 MB). | The photo is larger than 10 MB. | Choose a smaller photo. |
| This is not a usable photo (jpg, png or webp). | The file is not a jpg, png or webp. | Choose another photo. |
| The AI did not work just now. Try again. | The AI gave no answer. | Try again later. |
| Turn on the Multilingual integration first. | You want an extra language without the integration. | Turn on Multilingual (website) under Settings > Add-ons. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I edit my website?
- How do I publish my changes on the website?
- Where do I change the prices and opening hours of the website?
- What do the tabs Blocks, Style and Pages do?

**Keywords:** my website, edit website, publish website, blocks, pages, measurement code, google analytics, rewrite with ai

**Related:** [How do I get a ready-made website from Jimani?](../faq/kant-en-klare-website.md), [What does the Jimani website cost?](../faq/wat-kost-de-website.md), [How do I connect my own domain to my Jimani website?](../faq/eigen-domein-koppelen.md), [How does Branding work in Jimani?](huisstijl.md)

---

# How does Branding work in Jimani?

**Answer:** In Branding you set the logo, the eight colors, the corner radius and the font of your business in one place. Your widgets use this branding, unless you choose own colors for a widget. On the right you see a Preview of your Website, Widget, Mail and Receipt.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Your business > Branding (`/Huisstijl`)

**Explanation:** First change something and then look at the preview on the right; you only make it final with Save (bottom right). You can start with a ready-made brand style, or have the colors and fonts of your own website fetched. Jimani then checks whether the colors are easy to read according to WCAG 2.1 AA. A separate step-by-step guide is in [How do I set my logo, colors and font?](../faq/huisstijl-instellen.md).

![The Branding screen with the blocks Choose a brand style, Logo, From your website and Colours and fonts, and on the right the Preview](/kennisbank/beelden/huisstijl-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Choose a brand style | Thirty ready-made brand styles, for example Warm bistro, Fresh green, Black and gold, Sea, Pastel and Night. One tap fills the eight colors, the corner radius and the font. | When you want a neat style quickly. | You save yourself; the preview on the right changes immediately. |
| Logo / Choose logo | Uploads your logo (png, jpg, webp or gif, at most 5 MB). It is the same logo as in your business details: you see it on your widgets, emails and receipts. | Once, or when your logo changes. | The logo is stored immediately. It says "No logo yet." as long as there is none. |
| From your website: Website | The address of your website, for example www.yourbusiness.com. | For Get from my website. | The field is prefilled with the website address from your business details. |
| Get from my website | Reads the colors and fonts of your website and makes a readable brand style from them. | When you already have a website with a style of its own. | Costs AI credit. You first see the result in the preview. If Jimani finds no usable colors, they come from your logo or you get a neat default for your type of business. |
| Main color | The color of buttons, the chosen date and time, and accents. | Always, it is your most important brand color. | A color swatch with the code (for example #8C2F1B) next to it. |
| Text on main color | The text and icons on a button in the main color. | Usually white or black. | - |
| Background | The background of the screens. | - | - |
| Card | Boxes, cards and input fields on that background. | - | - |
| Text | Headings and regular text. | - | - |
| Border | Borders and dividing lines. | - | - |
| Disabled | What cannot (yet) be chosen. | - | WCAG sets no contrast requirement here. |
| Error | Error messages and a field that is not filled in correctly. | - | - |
| Corner radius | How round the corners of buttons and boxes are, in pixels (0 is square, at most 24). | For a sleek or a soft style. | With the minus and plus buttons or by typing. |
| Font | Chooses a font from a list. | - | Only fonts that work on every device and fetch nothing from Google. |
| Make readable | Appears when a color pair has too little contrast (with "contrast x:1, needed y:1"). Jimani then suggests a color ("Suggestion: ..."). | As soon as a message is shown. | If everything is fine, you see "All colors are easy to read (WCAG AA)." |
| Preview | On the right a choice between Website, Widget, Mail and Receipt. | To see where the branding appears. | The preview changes with every change, even before you Save. |
| Website | Preview of the header of your site with the menu (Menu, About us, Contact) and the opening with a button. | - | - |
| Widget | Preview of a booking widget with times, a field with an error message and the Book button. | - | - |
| Mail | Preview of a confirmation email: a card with a stripe in the main color, the logo (or the name) above it. | - | - |
| Receipt | Preview of a POS receipt: logo in shades of grey and the name of your business. | - | A receipt printer prints in black and white, so the brand colors do not appear on the receipt. |
| Apply to all widgets | Puts widgets with own colors back on the branding. | When you want to give all widgets the same style. | You first get the question "Make all widgets follow the branding?" with Yes and No. The widgets' own colors are kept but no longer used; per widget you can later choose own colors again. Only visible if one or more widgets have own colors. |
| Previous / Save | Previous goes back to Settings; Save stores the branding. | Save after every series of changes. | You see "Saved" when it worked. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| {0} widget(s) still use their own colors and do not follow this branding. | One or more widgets have Custom colours set to Yes under Change colors. | Choose Apply to all widgets, or leave them as they are. |
| The colors of your website are ready. Check the preview and choose Save. | Get from my website worked. | Check the preview and choose Save. |
| We found no usable colors on your website. The colors now come from your logo. Check the preview and choose Save. | The website gave no usable colors. | Check the preview and choose Save, or choose colors yourself. |
| Only an image (png, jpg, gif or webp) of at most 5 MB. | The logo is not an image or is too large. | Choose another file. |
| Saving did not work. Please try again. | Saving failed. | Try again. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I set my colors and font?
- Can a widget have different colors than my branding?
- How do I see what my branding looks like on the website, email and receipt?
- Does Jimani check whether my colors are easy to read?

**Keywords:** branding, brand style, logo, colors, font, brand colors, corner radius, get from my website, widget colors

**Related:** [How do I set my logo, colors and font?](../faq/huisstijl-instellen.md), [How does My website work in Jimani?](mijn-website.md), [Is the widget accessible to people with a disability?](../faq/toegankelijkheid-widget.md)

---

# How does the Widgets overview work in Jimani?

**Answer:** In the Widgets overview, every widget of your business is shown as a tile (for the webshop the screen is called Online webshop). A click on a tile opens the widget overview with everything you do with that widget: view code, make a copy, test, edit, change colors and add scripts. At the top right you add a new widget with Add widget.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Widgets (`/Settings/WidgetsetupList`)

**Explanation:** At the top of the overview it says: "View all widgets here. Create endless new widgets with the Add button, or edit an existing one. Test and integrate all widgets easily via the overview." If you have more than one module with widgets, you choose the module at the top. With multiple modules, each module gets its own heading (Restaurant, Tickets, Activities, Salon, Online webshop or Hotel); the main widget of the module comes first. If you have no widget yet, it says "You have no widget here yet. Create one and put it on your website." A click on a tile opens the widget overview with the explanation: "In this overview you can place the widget on the website by pasting the widget code into the site. You can also make a copy of the widget here; this is handy because the branding is taken along automatically. You can also test and edit the widget and adjust the branding as you like." Placing a widget on your site is explained step by step in [How do I put the widget on my own website?](../faq/widget-op-eigen-website-zetten.md).

![The Widgets overview with the Add widget button and the widgets as tiles](/kennisbank/beelden/widgets-overzicht-1.webp)

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Add widget | Opens the three steps to make a new widget (Step 1 of 3: name and type, Step 2 of 3: what the guest chooses, Step 3 of 3: layout). | For an extra widget, for example a separate one for a landing page. | See [How do Add widget and Edit widget work in Jimani?](widget-toevoegen-en-bewerken.md). You can make as many as you like. |
| Edit webshop | Opens the webshop editor (only for a webshop widget): front page, menu, categories, products and colors, with a live preview. | To adjust the webshop. | See [How does the webshop editor work in Jimani?](../../webshop/naslag/webshop-editor.md). |
| View widget code: View code | Shows the code you paste on your website. | To put the widget on a page. | The text with the code is "Copy and paste this code into the website to integrate the widget." With Copy code you put it on the clipboard (the button then briefly says Copied). |
| Link | Below the code is a separate link to the widget, with Copy: "Use this link behind a button or in the menu of your website." | When you cannot paste code, for example in a menu or behind a button. | The link contains the widget number, your key, the language and the widget type; it contains no table. |
| Send to web developer | Emails the code and the link to the address you enter, with the name of your business: "We email the code and the link, with the name of your business." Then you click Send. | When someone else manages your website. | The reply address in the email is that of your business. An invalid address gives "Enter a valid email address." |
| Copy widget: Make a copy | Makes an exact copy of the widget, including branding. "Make an exact copy of the widget. This way you can easily test settings and your branding is kept." Give the new widget a name (maximum 50 characters) and click Save. | To try settings without changing your working widget. | A copy is a new widget with its own code and link. |
| Name the new widget | The name field at Make a copy. | For every copy. | - |
| Test your widget: Test | Opens the widget in a new tab, exactly as the customer sees it. | Before you place the code or after a change. | - |
| Edit widget: Edit | Opens the settings and the layout of the widget. | To adjust the widget. | See [How do Add widget and Edit widget work in Jimani?](widget-toevoegen-en-bewerken.md) and [How does the View tab of a widget work?](widget-weergave.md). |
| Change colors: Edit | Opens the colors page of the widget with a live preview. | When this widget needs different colors than your branding. | See [How do I set my logo, colors and font?](../faq/huisstijl-instellen.md). |
| Google tag & Meta Pixel: Add scripts | Stores two scripts with the widget: "At the start of the widget" and "At the success screen". Paste your script in the box. | For tracking code on the widget. | Jimani stores the scripts with the widget. After placing them, check with the test tool of Google or Meta that they really run. |
| Delete Widget | Deletes the widget after the questions "Remove widget?" and "Are you sure?" with Yes and No. | When you no longer need the widget. | Also remove the code from your website, otherwise an empty spot remains there. |
| Close | Closes the widget overview. | - | - |
| Live preview (On/Off) | On the colors page: shows or hides the live preview next to the settings. | For more room. | Your choice is remembered. |
| Guest groups (tab) | Tab next to Widgets, only visible with the Guest groups integration. | To manage guest groups such as Adults and Children. | See also the View tab. |
| Advanced settings | For Activities, Tickets and Salon, Menu and settings > Advanced settings opens the screen "Manage the advanced settings" with the buttons Cancel and Save. | For settings such as the time interval and no-show. | For the restaurant they are in the Reservation settings window (cogwheel in Reservations). |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I find all my widgets?
- How do I make a copy of a widget?
- How do I test my widget?
- How do I add a script to my widget?
- How do I change the colors of a widget?

**Keywords:** widgets, widget overview, widget code, make copy widget, test widget, send to web developer, delete widget

**Related:** [How do I put the widget on my own website?](../faq/widget-op-eigen-website-zetten.md), [How do Add widget and Edit widget work in Jimani?](widget-toevoegen-en-bewerken.md), [Can I create multiple widgets?](../faq/meerdere-widgets-aanmaken.md)

---

# How do Add widget and Edit widget work in Jimani?

**Answer:** With Add widget you make a new widget in three steps: name and type, what the guest chooses, and layout. With Edit you adjust an existing widget on two tabs: Settings and View. What you see depends on the widget type and the module.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Widgets > Add widget, or open a widget and choose Edit (`/Settings/WidgetsetupList`)

**Explanation:** With Add widget, first choose a name and the widget type. Only you see the name, in the list of widgets. The most used type is already selected. Then you choose what the guest may choose in this widget, and finally the layout with a live preview on the right ("On the right you see what the widget looks like. With Save you turn it on."). With Edit, the widget looks slightly different per module; below are all the fields that occur anywhere. The View tab (language, texts, booking) is in [How does the View tab of a widget work?](widget-weergave.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Add widget | Three steps: Step 1 of 3: name and type, Step 2 of 3: what the guest chooses, Step 3 of 3: layout. | For a new widget. | Step 3 has the colors page with a live preview; Save turns the widget on. |
| Name | The name of the widget in the list, for example Booking on the website or Terrace. | Always. | Required: "Enter a name." Only you see the name. |
| Widget type | The type of widget: Book a table, Buy tickets, Book an activity, Make an appointment, Online ordering, Opening hours, Cancel reservation, Survey, Kiosk, Preparation screen, Scan, Confirm, Combination or (for a hotel) Book a room. | Step 1. | You only see the types that belong to your module. |
| Main module | The module you are making the widget for: "Select the module you want to make the widget for." | For a business with more than one module. | With Add widget, the module comes from the filter at the top of Widgets. |
| Widget type (choice) | The choice of widget type: "select a Widget type". | Only in the old layout of the window (without modules); with Edit you skip this step. | It says "No widgets were found." if your module has no types. |
| What the guest chooses | Per type a list of what the guest can choose (reservation types, treatments, categories or events). Everything is on; remove what is not allowed, or use Add all and Remove all. | Step 2. | For a type without a list, it says "For this type the guest does not need to choose anything from a list." |
| Reservation types | A grid of tiles you click on and off; chosen = border in the accent color: "Select the reservation types that are shown in the widget." | To decide which types the guest sees. | With Select all and Deselect all you turn them all on or off. |
| Widgets in the combination | Combines several widgets into one: per line choose a Title and a widget (Select a widget), add lines with Add widget and remove them with Delete. | For the type Combination. | Each widget in the combination gets a title. |
| Widget description | The name of the widget in the list (maximum 50 characters, required). | Always. | The field shows the hint Description. |
| Link to the widget | For activities, tickets and the webshop: the page the guest returns to after paying (maximum 255 characters). | When the widget is on a page of its own and you want to send the guest back there. | Empty is the default: the page on your Jimani website where the widget is, otherwise the widget itself. On a page of your own, it stays there. For table and appointment widgets, use Redirect on the View tab. |
| Months to display | For the type Opening hours: 1 Month, 3 Months, 6 Months or 1 Year. | Only for an Opening hours widget. | In the old layout of the window, only the word Description appears under this field; that is a default text, not an explanation. |
| Could be in the future | Yes or No, for the type Opening hours. | Only for an Opening hours widget. | This choice currently has no visible effect in the widget. |
| Pay afterwards | If Yes, the guest does not have to pay while booking. They only see an overview of the total costs that still have to be paid on arrival. | For higher amounts. | Not for a webshop widget. Default No. |
| Min and max guest count | If Yes, you fill in Min and Max; the guest can then only book within that number. | For Book a table and Book an activity. | Not for Tickets, Salon and the webshop. Use the minus and plus steppers or type the number. |
| Image | An image at the top of the widget (at most 5 MB). The image that is already there is in the box, with Replace. | For atmosphere in the widget. | Not for the webshop. |
| Create with AI | Creates an image: briefly describe what should be in the photo; the AI makes it in a 4:3 ratio. Choose Generate, then Use or Try again. | When you have no photo. | Costs AI credit. Example of a description: a set table by candlelight in a cosy restaurant. |
| Widget Position | Position of the widget (the image): the default is Bottom. | Only with an image. | Not for the webshop. |
| Image height | The height of the image in pixels (0 to 1080). | When the image is too tall or too short. | Not for the webshop. |
| Live preview | On the right the widget as the guest sees it; you see changes immediately, they only apply after Save. | While adjusting. | Without a key for the widget, it says "There is no preview yet: your business has no key for the widget yet." |
| Settings / View | The two tabs of Edit widget. | - | View has its own article. |
| Previous / Next / Save | Navigate through the steps; Save stores the widget. | - | Delete (bottom left) deletes the widget after a confirmation question. |
| Kiosk mode | Puts the widget in kiosk mode: "When you use the widget on our ordering kiosks, choose Kiosk mode on." | Only on an ordering kiosk. | In the current window the choice is hidden. |
| Delivery and pickup (webshop) | For a webshop widget you choose the delivery methods here; see [How does the Webshop settings window work?](../../webshop/naslag/webshop-instellingen.md). | For Online ordering. | The questions "Do you want to enable pickup?" and "Do you want to enable delivery?" are only for a new webshop widget; after that you arrange it with the delivery methods. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Enter a name. | The name of the widget is missing. | Enter a name. |
| There's nothing to choose yet. You can add this later at the widget. | Your module has no list to choose from yet. | Add the products, treatments or events later and edit the widget. |
| No widgets were found. | There are no types for this module. | Check your module or contact the helpdesk. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I create a new widget?
- What can I adjust when I edit a widget?
- What is the difference between the Settings and View tabs?
- Can I test the widget before guests see it?

**Keywords:** add widget, edit widget, widget type, reservation types, pay afterwards, min max guests, widget image

**Related:** [How does the Widgets overview work in Jimani?](widgets-overzicht.md), [How does the View tab of a widget work?](widget-weergave.md), [Can I create multiple widgets?](../faq/meerdere-widgets-aanmaken.md)

---

# How does the View tab of a widget work?

**Answer:** On the View tab of Edit widget you set which language the guest sees, which texts appear, how far ahead they can book, which details they must fill in and where they go afterwards. At the bottom is a block for the module itself (Restaurant, Activities, Ticket sales, Salon or the webshop). On the right you see a live preview.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Widgets > open the widget > Edit > View tab

**Explanation:** Everything is optional: if you leave a field empty, the widget does what it always did. A webshop widget only shows the webshop block here. You see changes immediately in the preview; they only apply to guests after Save.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Language | Chooses the language of the widget: Default (the language from the code on your website) or Automatic (the language of the guest's browser, if your business has that language) or a fixed language. | When your website is multilingual, or when the widget must always be in one language. | |
| Show logo | Puts your business logo at the top of the widget (Yes) or not (No). | For a recognisable widget. | Default No. The logo comes from your Branding. |
| Headline | The title at the top of the widget (maximum 120 characters), per language. | To replace the default title. | Empty is the default text of the widget, already translated into every language. |
| Intro text | A short text below the headline, for example what the guest can expect (maximum 1000 characters). | For an explanation or a welcome message. | Its own text per language. |
| Start button | The button on the first screen, for example Reserve now (maximum 60 characters). | To change the button text. | - |
| Booking button | The last button, below the guest's details (maximum 60 characters). | To change the button text. | - |
| Confirmation text | What the guest sees when the booking succeeded (maximum 2000 characters). | For a personal thank-you or explanation. | - |
| Checkbox text | The text next to the checkbox for the terms (maximum 300 characters). | When the checkbox is on. | - |
| Color of the headline / Color of the intro text | The color of the headline and the intro text, for all languages. | When the default color is hard to read on your photo. | Empty is the color of your branding, or white on a photo. With Default you clear the color. |
| Maximum days ahead | How many days ahead the guest can book (at most 730). | To prevent guests from booking too far ahead. | 0 = no limit. This comes on top of your opening hours. |
| Booking cutoff | How long before the start time a guest can still book: No limit, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 1 day, 2 days, 3 days or 1 week. | When you need preparation time. | Default No limit. |
| Required fields | Which fields the guest must fill in: Salutation, Last name, Phone number, Address, Postal code, City and Country. | When you need more details from the guest. | Name and email address are always required. A field you don't ask for doesn't count. |
| Terms checkbox | The guest must agree to your terms before they can book. | If you want that by law or by choice. | Default No. |
| Link to your terms | The address of your terms. | When the checkbox is on. | By default the terms and conditions that Jimani makes for your business. If you have terms of your own, put the address (https) here. |
| Redirect | Sends the guest after five seconds to a page of your own website, for example a thank-you page. | When you have a thank-you page of your own, for example to measure. | For a booking widget (table, tickets, activity, appointment, ordering or combination) Yes is the default, not for a kiosk or hotel. |
| Redirect address | The address of that page. | When Redirect is set to Yes. | By default the thank-you page of your website at Jimani. Only a complete http or https address is accepted. |
| Restaurant | The block for the restaurant widget (see the rows below). | For Book a table. | - |
| Show times as | Choose Buttons (side by side) or List (stacked). | To decide the time selection. | - |
| Only available times | Yes: full times are not included. No: they are included crossed out, so the guest sees that it is busy. | To show or hide how busy it is. | - |
| Choose types | Takes you to the Settings tab to choose the types. | When no type has been chosen yet ("No type selected yet."). | - |
| Activities | The block for the activities widget (see below). | For Book an activity. | The guest chooses people, date, time and then the duration with the price. Extra products come after that. |
| Show price as | Per person (the amount divided by the number of people) or Total (what the group pays together). | To choose how the price is shown. | Default Total. |
| Let guest choose duration | Yes: the guest chooses the duration. No: the widget uses the first duration of the activity. | When you only want to offer one duration. | Default Yes. |
| Extra products | The Extra products step after the guest's choice. | For upselling. | Default Yes. |
| Ticket sales | The block for ticket sales (see below). | For Buy tickets. | - |
| Choose a day | Automatic: an event with 1 date shows the tickets immediately, with 2 to 8 dates a list, with more dates a calendar. Or always choose a Calendar or List yourself. | To decide the date selection. | - |
| Show sold out | Yes: a sold-out ticket stays visible in grey with Sold out. No: it disappears. | To show that it is busy. | - |
| Show how many are left | For tickets that are almost sold out, it says for example: 4 left. | To create urgency. | - |
| Threshold | The number appears as soon as this number or fewer are left. | Only when Show how many are left is set to Yes. | - |
| Maximum tickets per order | The highest number of tickets in one order. | To limit bulk buying. | 0 = no limit. If an event has a limit of its own, the lowest applies. |
| Salon | The block for the salon widget: Let guest choose practitioner, Show duration, Show price and Group by category (each Yes or No). | For Make an appointment. | With No for Let guest choose practitioner, the appointment goes to whoever is free (No preference). By default everything is set to Yes. |
| Open the webshop editor | For a webshop widget: opens the webshop editor. | To adjust the webshop. | See [How does the webshop editor work in Jimani?](../../webshop/naslag/webshop-editor.md). |
| Guest groups in this widget | Which guest groups the guest sees; the first guest group is always in the widget. | When there is more than one guest group. | Manage with Manage guest groups on the Guest groups tab of Widgets. |
| Live preview | On the right the widget in a Computer or Phone window. | To check your changes. | - |
| Save | Stores all settings of the tab. | After your changes. | - |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| The options for ticket sales were not saved. Please try again. | Saving the Ticket sales block failed. | Click Save again. |
| The appearance can't be saved yet. | The widget could not store the view. | Try again or contact the helpdesk. |
| There is no preview yet: your business has no key for the widget yet. | There is no widget key for your business. | Contact the helpdesk. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I set how far ahead guests can book?
- Which details can I ask the guest for in the widget?
- Where does the guest go after booking?
- How do I set the language of the widget?

**Keywords:** widget view, widget texts, booking cutoff, required fields widget, redirect after booking, widget language, ticket sales options

**Related:** [How do Add widget and Edit widget work in Jimani?](widget-toevoegen-en-bewerken.md), [How does the Widgets overview work in Jimani?](widgets-overzicht.md), [How do I change the texts and buttons of my widget?](../faq/widget-teksten-aanpassen.md)

---

# Which pages does a visitor see on the Jimani website?

**Answer:** A visitor to yourbusiness.jimani.site (or your own domain) sees the pages of your site and a few fixed pages: the terms and conditions, a confirmation page for the newsletter, the withdrawal page of the webshop and a calm message if a page does not exist or the site is not active yet. These pages are for the visitor, not the dashboard; you adjust them in My website.

**Where to find it:** Visible on your website (`jouwzaak.jimani.site`); adjust in Settings > Your business > Website (`/Mijnwebsite`)

**Explanation:** The pages get the colors, the font and the logo of your business. Which pages your menu has, you choose on the Pages tab in My website. A standard restaurant has Home, Menu, Book, Opening hours & contact and About us; a salon Home, Treatments & prices, Appointment, Team and Contact; a hotel Home, Rooms, Book your stay, Contact and About us. You can add Gallery, Opening hours and Blog as a page yourself.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Page | A page of your website: header with logo and menu, the content per type of page (text, products, widget, contact, gallery, blog) and the footer. | Every time a visitor opens a page. | In My website you see the same page in edit mode. For a draft there is a draft bar at the top; visitors only see a draft after Turn on website and Publish. |
| Terms | The fixed page Terms and conditions (/voorwaarden) with the default text and the details of your business, and the thank-you page (/bedankt) for businesses without a live website. | For the link at the bottom of every page and in the checkout route of the widget. | Not a page in the menu and not editable in the editor. If you have your own terms, the links point there. |
| Confirm | The page behind the link in the confirmation email of the newsletter block. The visitor confirms their sign-up (double opt-in). | After filling in the newsletter form. | The link itself confirms nothing: the page does the confirming with a button, so that mail scanners confirm nothing. The page says whether it worked, was already confirmed, has expired or is unknown. |
| Withdraw | The withdrawal function of the webshop at /herroepen: a form with name, order number, email address and comments and the button Confirm withdrawal. | When a customer wants to withdraw an order. | No account needed. The customer gets an acknowledgement on the screen and by email. See [Does my webshop need a withdrawal button, and how does it work in Jimani?](../../webshop/faq/herroepingsknop.md). |
| Legal | Jimani's public data processing agreement (/verwerkersovereenkomst) and subprocessor list (/subverwerkers). | For anyone looking for Jimani's GDPR documents. | These are pages of Jimani, not of your business. |
| Not found | The message for a page that does not exist, or for a site that is not active yet, with a link back to Home. | When a visitor opens a wrong or old address. | The page is calm and shows nothing of the dashboard. |

**Related questions:**

- Which pages does a visitor see on my website?
- Where are the terms and conditions on my website?
- What does a visitor see if a page does not exist?
- Which pages does a restaurant or salon website have by default?

**Keywords:** website pages, terms page, confirm newsletter, withdrawal page, page not found, jimani.site

**Related:** [How does My website work in Jimani?](mijn-website.md), [How do I get a ready-made website from Jimani?](../faq/kant-en-klare-website.md)

---

# How does the webshop editor work in Jimani?

**Answer:** In Edit webshop you adjust your online webshop with the real webshop on the left and a panel on the right with the tabs Edit, Homepage, Menu, Categories, Products, Product tile, Style, View and Versions. Save stores your changes as a draft; your guests only see them after Publish.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Online webshop > open the webshop widget > Edit webshop (`/Webshopeditor`), or in My website by clicking the Order block

**Explanation:** The editor has the same layout as My website. In the webshop, click the pencil at a tile, text, category, product or the menu to adjust that part on the right. What you adjust you see immediately on the left. At the top are the name of the widget with the status (Draft or Published), Test your webshop (opens the webshop in a new tab), the choice Computer, Tablet or Phone to see what the webshop looks like, and Publish. On a phone you switch between the webshop and the panel with View and Edit. If you have unsaved changes and click Previous, the panel asks "You have changes that have not been saved yet." with the choices Don't save and Save.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Edit | First tab with explanation and quick choices under "Or choose what you want to edit". | To begin. | In your webshop, click the pencil at a part. |
| Homepage | The welcome text (Title and Text above the tiles) with Rewrite with AI, and the Ways to order: Pickup, Own delivery, Shipping and Eat here. | For the first page where the guest chooses how to receive their order. | On or off works immediately, without Publish. The order and how a tile looks go along with Publish. Rewrite with AI costs AI credit. |
| All tiles | Shape (Card, Wide, Round, Bar) and Layout (Side by side, Stacked) of the tiles. | For the look of the tiles. | Per tile you also adjust Title, Subtitle, Image (Icon, Photo or None), Color and Text color. |
| Choose photo / Image library / Let AI create a photo | Chooses a photo of your own, searches the Image library (Search) or lets the AI create a photo. | For the image on a tile. | AI costs AI credit. Without a result: "No photos found." |
| Menu | Menu position (Top or Left; Horizontal or Vertical), Size (Small, Normal, Large), Menu style (Tabs, Pills, Underlined, Tiles with photo), Menu stays at the top and Show search bar. | For the layout of the categories. | Vertical is a list on the left on the computer and the tablet; on the phone the menu is always horizontal. Goes along with Publish. |
| Categories | Per category the Name, Image and order, and Show in this webshop. | To arrange categories. | Name, image and order apply immediately, also in the POS and your other webshops. Show in this webshop only applies here and goes along with Publish. |
| Products | Per product Featured, Show in this webshop, the order, the Name, the Main photo and Extra photos. | To choose which products are in this webshop and which come first. | Name and photos apply immediately, also in the POS and your other webshops, and appear in the log. Price, description, labels and allergens you adjust at the product (button Edit product). |
| Product tile | Product display (Tiles, List or Compact), Guest can switch, What appears on the tile (Name, Price, Short description, Brand, Content / unit, Article number, Labels, Allergens, Popular), Open product first (Always, Only with extras, Never), Size (Tile size and Text size), Columns and Image (Square, Wide or Without). | For the look of a product in the webshop. | A line only appears if the product has it. With Open product first, a set or a required choice always opens first. With Columns, ∞ is as many tiles side by side as fit. |
| Style | Colors: Branding or Custom colours, with a color per part (Front page background, Title colour, Text colour, Tile background, Screen background, Tile title, Tile on hover, Button, Button text, Button on hover) and the Corner radius (0 to 24). | For the colors of the homepage and the buttons. | With Branding the webshop follows your branding; with Edit brand style you go there. |
| View | Webshop type (Same as the business, Hospitality or Retail), Product display (Grid, List or Compact), Columns on desktop (2 to 6) and Columns on phone (1 or 2), Photo shape (Square, Round, Wide or No photo), Sorting (As in the dashboard, By name, Price low to high, Price high to low, Most popular first), Categories (Tabs or Sidebar) and switches Show description, Show allergens, Show stock, Show Popular, Show search bar, Note per product and Order note. | For how the products are shown and what the guest can fill in. | Show allergens is only for hospitality. Popular shows a label on the best-selling products of a category. |
| Minimum order amount | For pickup and delivery the order must be at least this amount (excluding delivery costs). | To prevent small orders. | 0 = no minimum. |
| Delivery costs / Shipping costs | The costs for delivery or shipping. | For the price of delivery. | Applies to all webshop widgets of the business. The server recalculates every order with it. |
| Free from | From this amount of products, delivery and shipping are free. | For a free-delivery threshold. | 0 = never free. |
| Delivery time | Text for shipping in the webshop, for example 1-3 working days (maximum 100 characters). | Only for shipping. | For delivery with a time slot, use the delivery times. |
| Versions | Every time you Publish, a version is stored. Restore as draft puts an earlier version back. | To go back to an earlier state. | Your guests only see it after Publish. Without a published version it says "You haven't published anything yet." |
| Publish | Puts the draft live, makes a version and also writes the welcome text, custom colors and webshop options into the settings of the webshop. | When you are done adjusting. | Afterwards it says "Your webshop has been published." |
| Save / Previous | Save stores the draft; Previous goes back to the list or to the site. | - | The changes that apply directly (on or off per way of ordering, product name and photo, categories) have already been stored. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Couldn't save. Please try again. | Saving failed. | Try again. |
| Your webshop has no way of ordering turned on yet. | All ways of ordering are off. | Turn on a way under Homepage. |
| This webshop has no categories yet. | There are no categories to show. | Create categories under Products. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I change the look of my webshop?
- How do I publish my webshop changes?
- How do I test my webshop before customers see it?
- How do I change the product tiles or the menu of my webshop?

**Keywords:** edit webshop, webshop editor, product tile, webshop colors, publish webshop, webshop menu, webshop view

**Related:** [How does My website work in Jimani?](../../algemeen/naslag/mijn-website.md), [How does the Widgets overview work in Jimani?](../../algemeen/naslag/widgets-overzicht.md), [How do the delivery and pickup options of the webshop widget work?](webshopwidget-bezorgen.md)

---

# How do the delivery and pickup options of the webshop widget work?

**Answer:** In Edit widget of a webshop widget (Online ordering) you choose with Yes or No which ways of ordering there are: Pickup, Delivery and Eat here. For Delivery you then choose How do you deliver? (Bike, Scooter, Car or Carrier), When do you deliver? and what goes with it: travel time, delivery areas, delivery time or shipping costs per country.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Online webshop > open the webshop widget > Edit > Settings tab (`/Settings/WidgetsetupList`)

**Explanation:** At the top are the ways of ordering. A way that is off is not shown to the guest. If you have only one way on, you can skip the pre-selection screen. What you choose here applies to this widget; Jimani stores the shipping costs per country per line immediately. You store all other fields with Save of the widget. Delivery with time slots and postcodes (Delivery postcodes) and the texts of the ordering process are elsewhere; see [How does the Webshop settings window work?](webshop-instellingen.md).

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Pickup | The customer picks up the order, with a pick-up time. | If you offer pickup. | Yes or No. |
| Delivery | The order comes to the customer's home: by yourself or with a carrier. | If you deliver. | Yes or No. If own delivery and shipping were both on, own delivery applies. |
| Eat here | The guest orders at the table or at the counter. | For hospitality. | Yes or No. |
| How do you deliver? | Chooses Bike, Scooter or Car (own delivery) or Carrier (a parcel service). | As soon as Delivery is on. | The vehicle is the icon on the Delivery card in the webshop. |
| Which carrier? | PostNL, DHL, UPS, DPD, GLS or Other. | Only for Carrier. | From the code you enter at the order, Jimani makes the track-and-trace link for the customer. |
| When do you deliver? | Right after the order, The next day, Within 1-2 working days or Custom delivery time. | For Delivery. | With Right after the order, the default preparation time applies and the customer chooses a time within your delivery times. With the other choices the customer sees when their order will come and does not choose a time slot. |
| Ask for postcode before checkout | Yes: the customer enters their postcode when they choose delivery, before the products, and immediately sees whether you deliver there. No: only at checkout. | If you have delivery areas. | Default Yes. |
| Delivery travel time | Minutes on the road; added to the preparation time for the first delivery time. | For own delivery that is immediate. | A stepper with minus and plus. |
| Delivery days, areas and order cut-off | Button Delivery postcodes: set areas, days per area and until what time orders can be placed for today. | If you work with areas. | Opens Settings, Delivery postcodes. |
| Delivery time in working days | From and to, for example 1 to 3 working days. | For shipping. | Default 1 to 3. |
| Same-day shipping until | Ordered before this time, shipped today. | For shipping. | Empty: not shown. |
| Shipping costs per country | Per country the shipping costs and from what amount shipping is free (Free from). Add a line with Add country. | For shipping abroad. | No countries: the shipping costs apply to every address. A country appears once. Empty at Free from is never free. |
| Opening hours and delivery times | Per way what applies for the coming week, with Edit to the place where you set them. | To check whether guests can choose a time. | Edit opens a new tab. Without times it says "You have no opening hours yet; guests then cannot choose a time." or "You have no delivery times yet; guests then cannot choose a time". |
| Show pre-selection screen | The screen where the customer chooses how to receive their order. With No they go straight to the products and automatically get the only way that is on. | If you offer only one way. | Can only be chosen if exactly one way is on. |
| When do you ask for delivery or pickup? | Before checkout or At the beginning. | If more than one way is on. | - |
| Default preparation time | In minutes. This lets a customer know when their order is ready. | For pickup, eat here and own delivery that is immediate. | With the next day or within 1-2 working days, the delivery time counts. |
| How many of the same item may a customer order? | The maximum per item in an order. | To limit bulk buying or mistakes. | ∞ is no limit. |
| How many items may an order contain? | The maximum number of items in an order. | Same. | ∞ is no limit. |
| Do you want to enable pickup? / Do you want to enable delivery? | The two old questions with Yes and No. | Only for a new webshop widget that has no options yet. | Existing widgets use the ways above. |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Saved | The line or field has been stored. | Nothing. |
| Couldn't save. Please try again. | The change was not stored. | Try again. |

**Related questions:**

- How do I choose whether customers can have delivery, pickup or eat here?
- How do I set up delivery by bike, scooter or car?
- How do shipping costs per country work?
- Can I skip the pre-selection if I only offer one way of ordering?

**Keywords:** webshop delivery, set up pickup, shipping costs per country, delivery method, carrier, delivery time, postcode in advance

**Related:** [How does the Webshop settings window work?](webshop-instellingen.md), [How does the webshop editor work in Jimani?](webshop-editor.md), [How do Add widget and Edit widget work in Jimani?](../../algemeen/naslag/widget-toevoegen-en-bewerken.md)

---

# How does the Webshop settings window work?

**Answer:** In Webshop settings you set which texts the customer sees while ordering, what is shown in the POS and the widget, and how delivery, eat here and pickup work. The window runs in steps: Order and pickup settings, POS settings, Delivery settings, Eat here settings and Pickup settings. At the top are the Webshop legal rules.

**Where to find it:** Settings > Guests and bookings > Delivery and pickup > Webshop settings (or type "Webshop settings" in Search for a setting…); for the webshop module also Menu and settings > Webshop settings

**Explanation:** The window opens with the text "Set all settings here, such as the information shown in the widget during the ordering process, the settings for before and after receiving orders and their handling." You walk through the steps with the arrow to the right and store with Save on the last step; Previous goes back. Which ways of ordering (pickup, delivery, eat here) the widget offers is arranged per widget; see [How do the delivery and pickup options of the webshop widget work?](webshopwidget-bezorgen.md). Fill in the texts per language for every language of your business.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| Webshop legal rules | Block at the top with Withdrawal button and OSS active (VAT of the buyer's country), with the link Foreign VAT report (OSS). | For the legal choices of your webshop. | See [Does my webshop need a withdrawal button, and how does it work in Jimani?](../faq/herroepingsknop.md) and [How does OSS VAT work in my Jimani webshop?](../faq/oss-btw.md). Always at the top, outside the steps. |
| Pickup or delivery screen header | The title of the screen where the customer chooses pickup or delivery (maximum 100 characters), per language. | To give the screen a title of your own. | Required. |
| Information about the pickup or delivery screen | A text on that screen, per language. | For an explanation such as a pickup address. | - |
| Pickup or delivery screen footer | The line at the bottom of that screen, per language. | For example for a phone number. | Required. |
| Order Finished Header | The title of the screen after the order succeeded (maximum 100 characters), per language. | To thank the customer. | Required. |
| Order Completed Info | The text below that title, per language. | For what the customer can expect now. | - |
| Show active supplements in the main menu | Yes or No: shows the active supplements on the main menu. | For products with supplements. | Not for a free POS. |
| Show items that are out of stock in the Kiosk | Yes or No: shows sold-out items in the kiosk. | If you work with stock. | Not for a free POS. |
| Show items that are out of stock in the widget | Yes or No: same in the webshop widget. | If you work with stock. | Not for a free POS. |
| Show home screen? | Yes or No: shows the start screen of the widget. | To let the customer choose how they order. | See also Show pre-selection screen. |
| Show opening hours in the widget? | Yes or No: shows your opening hours in the widget. | For clarity for the customer. | Not for a free POS. |
| Delivery active for an order via the kiosk. | Yes or No: delivery can be chosen for an order via the kiosk. | For an ordering kiosk. | On the Delivery settings step. |
| Delivery active for an order via the widget. | Same via the widget. | - | Whether the webshop widget offers pickup and delivery is chosen in the widget itself; see [How do the delivery and pickup options of the webshop widget work?](webshopwidget-bezorgen.md). |
| Delivery active for an order via the POS. | Same for manual ordering in the POS. | - | - |
| Standard order processing time | The standard time for processing an order, in minutes (1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 45, 60 or 90). | To determine the expected time. | - |
| Delivery/shipping costs | The standard delivery or shipping costs. | When all deliveries cost the same. | Value from 0 to 10,000,000. |
| Delivery costs free after amount | From this amount the delivery costs are free. | For a threshold. | A limit of 0 means: never free. See [How do I set delivery costs, free delivery and a minimum order amount?](../faq/bezorgkosten-en-minimum-bestelbedrag.md). |
| Minimum order quantity | The minimum quantity in an order. | To prevent small orders. | - |
| Show desired delivery time in the Widget | Yes or No: lets the customer choose a desired delivery time. | For delivery with a time. | - |
| Show eat here option at the kiosk. | Yes or No: Eat here can be chosen at the kiosk. | On the Eat here settings step. | - |
| Show eat here option on the Online Store widget. | Same in the online store widget. | - | - |
| Show here food option in manual ordering. | Same for manual ordering in the POS. | - | - |
| Pickup active for an order via the kiosk. | Yes or No: pickup can be chosen via the kiosk. | On the Pickup settings step. | - |
| Pickup active for an order via the widget. | Same via the widget. | - | - |
| Pickup active for an order via the POS. | Same for manual ordering in the POS. | - | - |
| Show pickup as an option in the widget | Yes or No: shows pickup as a choice in the widget. | For webshops with pickup. | - |
| Save / Previous | Save stores all steps; Previous goes back one step. | On the last step. | If it fails, it says "Saving failed. Please try again." |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What to do |
|---|---|---|
| Saving failed. Please try again. | The legal choice or the settings were not stored. | Try again. |

**Related questions:**

- Where do I set the texts the customer sees while ordering?
- What are the Webshop legal rules?
- Where do I set delivery, pickup and eat here?
- Which settings are there for the POS and the widget of the webshop?

**Keywords:** webshop settings, pickup screen text, order completed text, delivery kiosk widget POS, free delivery amount, stock sold out webshop

**Related:** [How do the delivery and pickup options of the webshop widget work?](webshopwidget-bezorgen.md), [How does the webshop editor work in Jimani?](webshop-editor.md)

---

# How do I get a ready-made website from Jimani?

**Answer:** Jimani makes a website for your business at yourbusiness.jimani.site, with your menu or offer, opening hours and booking or ordering. You open it in Settings > Your business > Website, adjust texts and photos and click Turn on website. The website costs €29 per month and the first 14 days are free.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Your business > Website. You end up in My website. A draft was already made when you signed up: the AI writes the texts based on your old website (if you entered one) and the details from the sign-up, and looks for photos from your old site or makes an atmosphere photo. If the AI fails, there are default texts that you adjust yourself.
- **Step 2.** Click a text, photo, button, the menu or the footer in the site and adjust it on the right. See [How does My website work in Jimani?](../naslag/mijn-website.md) for all the tabs.
- **Step 3.** Click Test your website to view the site in a new tab. As long as you don't turn it on, visitors see nothing.
- **Step 4.** Click **Turn on website**. The website is then online and the first 14 days are free. After that the button is called **Publish**: use it after every change, so visitors see the new state.
- **Your address.** Your site is at yourbusiness.jimani.site; you change the part before .jimani.site on the Address tab. Connecting your own domain is also possible: see [How do I connect my own domain to my Jimani website?](eigen-domein-koppelen.md).
- **What comes from Jimani.** The site takes prices, products and opening hours from Jimani itself. If you change them under Products or Opening hours, the site is automatically correct.
- **Booking and ordering.** The blocks Book, Order, Appointment, Tickets and Activities show the widget of that module on your homepage. If you have a module without an active widget, that page is not yet visible to visitors: first create a widget (see [How do I put the widget on my own website?](widget-op-eigen-website-zetten.md)).
- **More languages.** With the Multilingual (website) integration, the AI translates your texts into a maximum of two extra languages.
- **Stopping.** You can always stop: Website is a paid feature that you can turn off again. A paid feature then stays on until the last day of the month; see [Can I try a paid feature first, and how do I cancel it?](../../prijzen/faq/betaalde-functie-proberen-en-opzeggen.md).

**Example:** A restaurant opens My website, adjusts the welcome text, chooses the main color under Style and clicks Turn on website. An hour later it changes the opening hours under Opening hours; the site shows them immediately.

**Related questions:**

- Can Jimani make a website for my business?
- What does a website cost and how do I turn it on?
- How do I adjust the texts and photos of my website?
- Is there a trial period for the website?
- At which address will my website be?

**Keywords:** make a website, own website, jimani.site, ready-made website, turn on website, homepage

**Related:** [What does the Jimani website cost?](wat-kost-de-website.md), [How does My website work in Jimani?](../naslag/mijn-website.md), [How do I connect my own domain to my Jimani website?](eigen-domein-koppelen.md)

---

# What does the Jimani website cost?

**Answer:** The ready-made website costs €29 per month, excluding VAT. The first 14 days are free and you can stop at any time. If you want the site in extra languages, Multilingual (website) is added: €10 per month for a maximum of two extra languages.

**Explanation:**

- **Website: €29 per month.** You get the site at yourbusiness.jimani.site or on your own domain, with your texts, photos, color, font and pages. Prices, products and opening hours come from Jimani.
- **Multilingual (website): €10 per month.** The AI translates all your texts into a maximum of two extra languages; visitors choose their language at the top of the site. It only works together with Website, and you can only turn it on when Website is on.
- **Free trial.** In My website the draft says: "Website: €29 per month, the first 14 days free. You can stop at any time." If you turn on the website with Turn on website, the 14-day trial begins; after that the website is added to your monthly invoice.
- **What is free.** Editing the draft costs nothing: you see your site first and visitors only see it after Turn on website. The widgets (online booking, online ordering, ticket sales) are also free and keep working on your own website, without a Jimani website.
- **AI.** Having texts written, making an AI photo and translating with AI are deducted from your AI credit; see [What does using AI in Jimani cost?](../../prijzen/faq/ai-tegoed.md).
- **Cancelling.** Turn off the Website feature. A paid feature stays on until the last day of the month; see [Can I try a paid feature first, and how do I cancel it?](../../prijzen/faq/betaalde-functie-proberen-en-opzeggen.md).
- **Overview.** All paid features are in [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md).

**Example:** A salon turns on the website and pays nothing for the first 14 days. After that she pays €29 per month. If she also wants the site in English and German, €10 per month is added: together €39 per month excl. VAT.

**Related questions:**

- What does a website via Jimani cost?
- Can I try the Jimani website for free?
- What does a multilingual website cost?
- Can I cancel my website at any time?

**Keywords:** website price, website cost, jimani.site cost, multilingual website price, what does a website cost, website trial

**Related:** [How do I get a ready-made website from Jimani?](kant-en-klare-website.md), [How does My website work in Jimani?](../naslag/mijn-website.md)

---

# How do I connect my own domain to my Jimani website?

**Answer:** In My website, go to the Address tab, enter your domain under Custom domain (preferably with www, for example www.yourbusiness.com) and add the two DNS records that Jimani shows at your domain registrar: a CNAME and a TXT. Then click Check now. As soon as the records are correct and the secure connection is there, your website is on your own domain.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Your business > Website and open the Address tab. The website must be on; otherwise Jimani first asks for Turn on website.
- **Step 2.** Under Custom domain, enter your domain, for example www.yourbusiness.com. An address from Jimani itself (under .jimani.site) is not a custom domain. It is also possible without www, but most domain registrars cannot set a CNAME on a domain without www. Jimani then advises using www (button Use www.yourbusiness.com) and having your registrar forward the domain without www to www.
- **Step 3.** You see the step-by-step plan Connect domain. Under "Step 1: where is your domain registered?" choose your domain registrar: TransIP, Hostnet, Strato, Versio, one.com, GoDaddy or Other. You get a short explanation of where to find the DNS settings and a button to the login page of that party.
- **Step 4.** Under "Step 2: add these records at your domain registrar" are two records with Type, Name and Value, each with a Copy button. Record 1 is a CNAME with your domain as the name; record 2 is a TXT with `_jimani.` before your domain as the name and a code starting with `jimani-` as the value. Add both records exactly like this at your registrar.
- **Step 5.** Under "Step 3: check that it works" you click **Check now**. DNS changes can take a few hours. Jimani also checks itself every hour and emails you as soon as your website is on your own domain.
- **Steps and messages.** The status goes from "Waiting for DNS" to "Security (SSL) is being created" and then "Active". If a record isn't there yet, you see "The CNAME record isn't there yet." or "The TXT record isn't there yet." If checking doesn't work, it says "Checking didn't work just now. Try again later." Below the steps it says when it was last checked.
- **Afterwards.** As soon as the domain is active, the widget links of your site move along to the custom domain (where you haven't entered a link of your own for the widget).
- **Remove domain.** With the Remove domain button you detach the custom domain again; your site stays at yourbusiness.jimani.site.
- **Help.** If you can't work it out, contact the helpdesk via the Contact the helpdesk button. Never send your login details.

**Example:** Your domain www.bistro-voorbeeld.nl is with TransIP. You choose TransIP, copy the CNAME record and the TXT record `_jimani.www.bistro-voorbeeld.nl` to the DNS tab at TransIP and click Check now. After a few hours you get an email that your website is on your own domain.

**Related questions:**

- How do I connect my own domain name to my website?
- Which DNS records do I have to add at my domain registrar?
- How do I make sure my website is at www.mybusiness.com?
- Why doesn't my domain work yet after connecting it?

**Keywords:** connect own domain, set up dns website, cname txt, jimani.site, domain name website, forward www

**Related:** [How do I get a ready-made website from Jimani?](kant-en-klare-website.md), [How does My website work in Jimani?](../naslag/mijn-website.md)

---

# How do I set my logo, colors and font?

**Answer:** Go to Settings > Your business > Branding. Upload your logo, choose a ready-made brand style or take the colors from your own website, adjust the eight colors, the corner radius and the font if needed and click Save. Your widgets, website, emails and receipt follow that branding.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Your business > Branding.
- **Step 2.** Under Logo, click Choose logo and choose a png, jpg, webp or gif of at most 5 MB. The logo is stored immediately and is the same logo as in your business details.
- **Step 3.** Under Choose a brand style, choose one of the thirty examples, or under From your website enter the address of your website and click Get from my website. The latter costs AI credit (see [What does using AI in Jimani cost?](../../prijzen/faq/ai-tegoed.md)). You first see the result on the right in the preview.
- **Step 4.** If needed, under Colours and fonts adjust the Main color and the other seven colors, the Corner radius and the Font. Type a color code or choose with the color swatch.
- **Step 5.** On the right under Preview, look at Website, Widget, Mail and Receipt. If there is a message about too little contrast, click Make readable.
- **Step 6.** Click Save.
- **What follows the branding.** Widgets follow it by default. Per widget you can choose own colors: go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Widgets, open the widget, choose Change colors > Edit and set Custom colours to Yes. If Custom colours is set to No, the widget changes along when you adjust the branding.
- **All widgets the same again.** If widgets have own colors, there is a message at the top of Branding with the button Apply to all widgets.
- **Website and webshop.** The website uses the main color from your branding and then shows "The color comes from your branding. Change it there; your site, widgets, emails and POS then follow." The webshop editor has the choice Branding or Custom colours under Style.
- **Receipt.** A receipt printer prints in black and white: your logo (in shades of grey) and your name appear on the receipt, no colors.

**Example:** You choose the brand style Warm bistro, upload your logo and click Save. Your booking widget then has the same red buttons and the same font as your confirmation email.

**Related questions:**

- How do I put my logo and colors in Jimani?
- How do I change the font of my widget and website?
- Can I take over the colors of my own website?
- Where do I upload my business logo?
- How do I make my receipt and emails appear in my branding?

**Keywords:** set branding, upload logo, widget colors, font, brand color, change colors

**Related:** [How does Branding work in Jimani?](../naslag/huisstijl.md), [How do I put the widget on my own website?](widget-op-eigen-website-zetten.md)

---

# How do I put the widget on my own website?

**Answer:** Go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Widgets, click the tile of your widget and choose View code. Copy the code with Copy code and paste it into your website where the widget should appear. If you can't paste code, use the separate Link, or have Jimani email the code to your web developer with Send to web developer.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Widgets. For the webshop the screen is called Online webshop. If you have widgets for more modules, choose the module at the top.
- **Step 2.** If you don't have a widget yet, click Add widget and go through the three steps (see [Can I create multiple widgets?](meerdere-widgets-aanmaken.md)).
- **Step 3.** Click the tile of the widget. The widget overview opens.
- **Step 4.** Choose View code. You see a piece of code with `<script src='.../v2/script.js'>`, a spot `<div id='jimaniReservation'></div>` and below it `CallWidget({ ... })` with the number of the widget (id), the language of your business (lang), the type (restype), `fixed: 'relative'` and your key (key). Click Copy code.
- **Step 5.** Paste the code into your website where the widget should appear, for example in an HTML block of your website builder. The widget then sits in the middle of the page and grows with the content.
- **Step 6.** In the widget overview, click Test to see the widget in a new tab as a guest sees it.
- **Only a link.** Below the code is Link, with the Copy button: "Use this link behind a button or in the menu of your website." The guest then lands on the widget page itself.
- **Web developer.** Under Send to web developer, enter the email address and click Send. Jimani emails the code and the link, with the name of your business. The reply address is that of your business.
- **Return page.** For activities, tickets and the webshop, the guest returns after paying to the page from the field Link to the widget (Edit). If you leave this empty, it is the page on your Jimani website where the widget is, otherwise the widget itself. For table and appointment widgets you redirect the guest afterwards with Redirect on the View tab.
- **Your Jimani website.** If you have the Jimani website, you don't need to paste anything: the blocks Book, Order, Appointment, Tickets and Activities show the widget themselves. See [How do I get a ready-made website from Jimani?](kant-en-klare-website.md).
- **QR code.** Jimani does not make a QR code of the widget itself: there is no button for it in the widget overview. If you want one, put the Link in a QR generator. The QR codes under Settings are for tables, see [Can a guest order and pay at the table with a QR code?](../../kassa/faq/qr-code-op-tafel.md).
- **Colors and texts.** The widget follows your Branding; see [How do I set my logo, colors and font?](huisstijl-instellen.md). You adjust texts and buttons on the View tab.

**Example:** A restaurant copies the code of the Book a table widget and pastes it into an HTML block on the Book page of its website. The booking screen appears on the page in the style of the restaurant.

**Related questions:**

- How do I get the booking button on my website?
- How do I paste the widget code on my site?
- My web developer has to place the code, how does he get it?
- Can I also just share a link to my widget?
- Where do I find the embed code of my widget?

**Keywords:** widget on website, embed widget, widget code, widget link, booking on own website, webshop on website

**Related:** [How does the Widgets overview work in Jimani?](../naslag/widgets-overzicht.md), [Can I create multiple widgets?](meerdere-widgets-aanmaken.md), [How do I get a ready-made website from Jimani?](kant-en-klare-website.md)

---

# Can I create multiple widgets?

**Answer:** Yes, you can create as many widgets as you like. Each widget has its own name, its own settings, its own code and its own link. Handy for example for a separate widget for your homepage, a landing page or the terrace. Go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Widgets and click Add widget.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Widgets (for the webshop the screen is called Online webshop). If you have more than one module with widgets, choose the module at the top.
- **Step 2.** Click **Add widget** at the top right. You go through three steps: Step 1 of 3: name and type, Step 2 of 3: what the guest chooses, Step 3 of 3: layout.
- **Step 3.** Give the widget a name (only you see it, in the list of widgets) and choose the type. In step 2, choose what the guest may choose in this widget; everything is on and you remove what is not allowed. In step 3, choose the colors and click Save.
- **Or copy.** If you want a widget with the same settings, click the tile of the widget and choose Make a copy. The copy takes over the settings and the branding; give it a name and click Save.
- **Different per widget.** Each widget has its own reservation types (for the restaurant), its own texts on the View tab, its own Link to the widget and its own colors (Custom colours).
- **Which types.** Depending on your module: Book a table, Buy tickets, Book an activity, Make an appointment, Online ordering, Opening hours, Cancel reservation, Survey, Kiosk, Preparation screen, Scan, Confirm, Combination or Book a room (hotel). With Combination you merge several widgets into one, each with a title.
- **Main widget.** Per module the main widget comes first in the list: the oldest active widget of the main type of that module.
- **Placing.** You place each widget separately; see [How do I put the widget on my own website?](widget-op-eigen-website-zetten.md).

**Example:** A restaurant makes a widget Booking on the website for lunch and dinner and a second widget Terrace with only the reservation types for the terrace. Each widget gets its own code for its own page.

**Related questions:**

- Can I have more than one booking widget?
- How do I make a separate widget for my terrace?
- How do I add a new widget?
- Is there a limit to the number of widgets?

**Keywords:** multiple widgets, add widget, widget copy, extra widget, widget limit, widget terrace

**Related:** [How does the Widgets overview work in Jimani?](../naslag/widgets-overzicht.md), [How do Add widget and Edit widget work in Jimani?](../naslag/widget-toevoegen-en-bewerken.md)

---

# How do I change the texts and buttons of my widget?

**Answer:** Open your widget in Settings > Guests and bookings > Widgets, choose Edit and go to the View tab. Under Texts, fill in per language the Headline, Intro text, Start button, Booking button, Confirmation text and Checkbox text. If you leave a field empty, the default text stays, already translated into every language. Then click Save.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Widgets and click the tile of the widget.
- **Step 2.** Choose Edit and open the View tab (next to Settings).
- **Step 3.** Under Language and logo, choose which language the guest sees: Default (the language from the code on your website), Automatic (the language of the guest's browser, if your business has that language) or a fixed language. Set Show logo to Yes if your logo should be at the top.
- **Step 4.** Under Texts, choose the tab of the language and fill in the fields. Each language of your business has its own tab. Maximum lengths: Headline 120 characters, Intro text 1000, the two buttons 60, Confirmation text 2000, Checkbox text 300.
- **Step 5.** If you want to change the color of the headline or the intro text, enter a color code under Color of the headline or Color of the intro text. Empty is the color of your branding, or white on a photo.
- **Step 6.** Check in the Live preview on the right that it is right and click **Save**. Guests only see the change after Save.
- **What the guest has to fill in.** Under Guest details you choose which fields are required (Salutation, Last name, Phone number, Address, Postal code, City, Country) and whether there is a checkbox for your terms. Name and email address are always required.
- **Afterwards.** Under Afterwards you choose whether the guest goes after five seconds to a page of your own website (Redirect), for example a thank-you page.
- **Webshop.** For a webshop widget you adjust the homepage and the menu in the webshop editor (Edit webshop). The texts for the pickup or delivery screen and the confirmation screen are in Settings > Guests and bookings > Delivery and pickup > Webshop settings (or type "Webshop settings" in Search for a setting…). See [How does the Webshop settings window work?](../../webshop/naslag/webshop-instellingen.md).

**Example:** For Start button you enter "Reserveer een tafel" in Dutch and "Book a table" in English. The guest sees the button text in the language that suits them.

**Related questions:**

- How do I change the text on the button of my booking widget?
- How do I adjust the confirmation text of a reservation?
- Can I set the texts in the widget per language?
- How do I change the headline or intro text of my widget?

**Keywords:** widget texts, widget button text, confirmation text, widget welcome text, widget language, change widget text

**Related:** [How does the View tab of a widget work?](../naslag/widget-weergave.md), [How does the Widgets overview work in Jimani?](../naslag/widgets-overzicht.md)

---

# Is the Jimani widget accessible to people with a disability?

**Answer:** Partly. Since 14-10-2026 the Jimani widgets have been adapted to the European accessibility rules (EAA, WCAG 2.1 AA): they can be operated with the keyboard, buttons have a name for screen readers and fields clearly show the focus. An accessibility statement and a full measurement of all screens do not exist yet. Jimani does check the colors you choose yourself for readability.

**Explanation:**

- **What is built into the widget.** Categories, the category grid and product choices in the webshop can be chosen with Tab and Enter or space. Buttons without text have a name for a screen reader: the arrows in the menu, Back, the language choice and the country code at the phone number. The name of the fields Guests and Date contains the visible value and a date is read out as a date (also with day 1 up to and including 9). An input field clearly shows the focus. The widget has a main area (main landmark), so a screen reader can jump straight to it. A chosen type, time or date gets readable text: if the set text color is too weak (less than 4.5:1), it becomes dark or white.
- **Your colors.** In Settings > Your business > Branding and on the colors page of a widget (Change colors > Edit), Jimani tests the colors against WCAG 2.1 AA. If a color pair is too weak, you see "contrast x:1, needed y:1" with the button Make readable and a suggestion. If everything is fine, it says "All colors are easy to read (WCAG AA)." In My website, Jimani warns at a button or text: "This text is hard to read on this background." with the button Use a readable colour. Jimani does not force the readable color: the choice stays with you.
- **What does not exist yet.** An accessibility statement with a contact point (for example a page /toegankelijkheid) does not exist yet. Only the start and checkout screens of six widgets have been measured (hospitality, salon, ticketing, activities, webshop and webshop checkout); the steps after that, hotel, the kiosk and the websites of customers have not been measured yet. At the last measurement, small points remained; the biggest was the contrast in colors that a business chooses itself.
- **Do you have to comply?** The European directive has applied since 28-06-2025 to, among others, online shops and booking. Micro-enterprises (fewer than 10 employees and at most €2 million turnover or balance sheet total) are exempt. This is not legal advice; if in doubt, ask an adviser.
- **What you can do yourself.** Choose readable colors and have Jimani check them, and test your own page with the keyboard.

**Example:** A restaurant chooses orange with white text for its buttons. On the Branding page it sees the message about too little contrast, clicks Make readable and gets a darker orange suggested.

**Related questions:**

- Is my booking widget accessible to blind and visually impaired people?
- Can the widget be operated with the keyboard?
- Does my website have to comply with the accessibility law (EAA)?
- Does the widget work with a screen reader?
- Does Jimani have an accessibility statement?

**Keywords:** accessibility, eaa, wcag, screen reader, keyboard widget, color contrast, accessibility statement

**Related:** [How does Branding work in Jimani?](../naslag/huisstijl.md), [How do I set my logo, colors and font?](huisstijl-instellen.md)

---

# Can I have my own app made for my guests in Jimani?

**Answer:** Not via Settings. The Your App module, with which guests could download an app of your business via the Google Play Store and the Apple App Store, is marked as outdated and is no longer shown in Settings. Your guests now book and order via the widget on your own website or via the Jimani website, which also works on a phone.

**Explanation:**

- **What Your App was.** The screen promised: "Launch your own app that guests can download via the Google Play Store and the Apple App Store. With this app guests can book directly, follow the latest news and easily find all your business information." It had parts such as App data (logos, icon and menu or price list as a pdf), blogs and a final check.
- **What there is now.** The Your App tile no longer appears in the Settings list and there is no menu entry or button to it anymore.
- **Alternative 1: the widget.** Put the booking or ordering widget on your own website; it adapts to phone and computer. See [How do I put the widget on my own website?](widget-op-eigen-website-zetten.md).
- **Alternative 2: the Jimani website.** A ready-made website with news (blocks and a blog), opening hours and booking, which you can view on a phone with the Phone choice in My website. See [How do I get a ready-made website from Jimani?](kant-en-klare-website.md).
- **Branding.** You set your logo and colors in one place: [How do I set my logo, colors and font?](huisstijl-instellen.md).

**Example:** A restaurant wanted an app with news and booking. It turns on the Jimani website and adds the Book block; guests book there from their phone.

**Related questions:**

- Can I have my own app made for my business?
- Where did the Your App module go?
- How can guests book or order via their phone?
- Can my business be in the App Store or Google Play?

**Keywords:** own app, app for guests, your app, app store, google play, guest app

**Related:** [How do I put the widget on my own website?](widget-op-eigen-website-zetten.md), [How do I get a ready-made website from Jimani?](kant-en-klare-website.md)

---

# How do I put my website in more languages?

**Answer:** First turn on the Multilingual (website) feature (€10 per month, only together with Website). Then in My website go to the Languages tab, choose a language under Add language and click Translate with AI. The AI translates all your texts; you can add a maximum of two extra languages. Visitors choose their language at the top of the site.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** If Multilingual (website) is still off, you see on the Languages tab: "Do you want your website in more languages? Turn on the Multilingual integration." with the button Go to Integrations. Turn on the feature. It costs €10 per month excl. VAT and is only possible when Website is on; see [What does the Jimani website cost?](wat-kost-de-website.md).
- **Step 2.** Go to Settings > Your business > Website and open the Languages tab. At the top is your Main language.
- **Step 3.** Under **Add language**, choose a language from the list and click **Translate with AI**. You see "Translating..." and then the language is in the list. The translation costs AI credit; see [What does using AI in Jimani cost?](../../prijzen/faq/ai-tegoed.md).
- **Step 4.** Adjust texts per language. Click a text or button in the site; the panel shows above the text which language you are editing (for example Language: EN). Each language has its own text and button text.
- **Step 5.** Click Publish. Visitors choose their language at the top of the site.
- **Translate again.** The magic wand icon at a language translates that language again. Note: that overwrites all texts of that language, including what you had adjusted yourself. With the trash icon you remove a language.
- **Maximum.** If you have two extra languages, it says "You have reached the maximum of two extra languages."
- **Which languages.** The website knows six languages: Dutch, English, German, French, Spanish and Italian. Your main language plus a maximum of two extra languages.
- **Widgets.** You set the language of the booking or ordering widget separately on the View tab of the widget; see [How do I change the texts and buttons of my widget?](widget-teksten-aanpassen.md).

**Example:** A hotel with Dutch as its main language adds English and German. The AI translates the texts; the hotel improves the German welcome text by hand and publishes. If the hotel translates German again later, that also overwrites that improvement of its own.

**Related questions:**

- How do I put my website in English?
- Can my website be translated automatically?
- How many languages can my website have?
- What does a bilingual website cost?

**Keywords:** multilingual website, website in english, translate with ai, extra languages website, multilingual website

**Related:** [What does the Jimani website cost?](wat-kost-de-website.md), [How does My website work in Jimani?](../naslag/mijn-website.md)

---

# How do I measure the visitors of my Jimani website with Google Analytics?

**Answer:** In My website, go to the More tab and enter your measurement ID under Google Analytics or Tag Manager, for example G-AB12CD34EF. Then publish your website. Jimani then loads Google Analytics on your published site. The site has no cookie banner, so consent is set to declined in advance: Analytics places no cookies and you only see estimated visitor numbers.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Look up your measurement ID in Google Analytics. It starts with G-, GT-, AW- or DC- followed by 4 to 15 letters and digits.
- **Step 2.** Go to Settings > Your business > Website and open the More tab.
- **Step 3.** Enter the ID under **Google Analytics or Tag Manager**. Only the measurement ID, no script or code: the field takes a maximum of 20 characters.
- **Step 4.** Click Publish. The ID is stored with your draft and only works on the published site, not in the draft view.
- **An invalid ID.** If the ID doesn't fit the pattern, Jimani ignores it without a message. A container ID of Google Tag Manager (starts with GTM-) is therefore not accepted.
- **What you see in Analytics.** When loading, Jimani sets consent for storage, advertising and personalisation to declined (Google Consent Mode v2). No cookies and no advertising data come in; you see estimated numbers.
- **Do you want to measure with cookies?** That is only possible once the site gets a cookie banner. There isn't one now.
- **Map.** The route map loads Google Maps by default only after a click by the visitor; with Show map straight away it loads immediately, with cookies from Google. See [How does My website work in Jimani?](../naslag/mijn-website.md).

**Example:** You enter G-AB12CD34EF, publish and after a day look at the visitor numbers of your site in Google Analytics, without visitors getting a cookie message.

**Related questions:**

- How do I connect Google Analytics to my website?
- How do I see how many visitors my website has?
- Where do I enter my Analytics measurement ID?
- Does my Jimani website need a cookie banner?
- How do I use Google Tag Manager on my site?

**Keywords:** google analytics website, measurement id, tag manager, measure visitors, cookie banner, consent mode

**Related:** [How does My website work in Jimani?](../naslag/mijn-website.md), [How do I get a ready-made website from Jimani?](kant-en-klare-website.md)

---

# Can a guest pay on arrival instead of online when booking?

**Answer:** Yes. Set Pay afterwards to Yes at the widget. The guest then does not have to pay anything online while booking and only sees an overview of the total costs that still have to be paid on arrival. It is possible for the widgets for tables, activities, salon and tickets, not for the webshop.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Guests and bookings > Widgets and click the tile of the widget.
- **Step 2.** Choose Edit. On the Settings tab, in the first step, is **Pay afterwards** with Yes or No.
- **Step 3.** Set it to Yes and click Next and then Save. By default it is set to No.
- **What the guest sees.** The payment screen shows an overview of the total costs; the reservation is recorded with the payment method "pay later" instead of online.
- **When handy.** For higher amounts, for example a package or a group booking, where you would rather settle at the door.
- **Per widget.** The choice applies to that one widget. So you can have a widget with and a widget without online payment; see [Can I create multiple widgets?](meerdere-widgets-aanmaken.md).

**Example:** A restaurant makes a separate widget Group dinner and sets Pay afterwards to Yes there: the group books online and pays on arrival.

**Related questions:**

- Can a guest pay only when they are there, instead of online in advance?
- How do I let guests pay on the spot for a reservation?
- How do I turn off online prepayment?
- Can I turn on pay afterwards for my webshop?

**Keywords:** pay afterwards, pay on arrival, no online payment, pay later widget, no payment when booking

**Related:** [How do Add widget and Edit widget work in Jimani?](../naslag/widget-toevoegen-en-bewerken.md), [How does the Widgets overview work in Jimani?](../naslag/widgets-overzicht.md)

---

# Can a guest order and pay at the table with a QR code?

**Answer:** Not yet. With the QR codes add-on (€10 per month, only together with the online webshop), every table gets its own QR code that the guest uses to call the waiter. Ordering and paying through that same QR code is not finished yet: the Ordering and payment tab under QR codes has no settings yet. If you want guests to order at the table, turn on Eat here in the webshop widget.

**Explanation:**

- **Price and conditions.** QR codes cost €10 per month, excluding VAT, and only work together with the online webshop (which is free). Without the online webshop you cannot turn on QR codes. See [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md).
- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Till and products > QR codes. There is also the Buy table QR codes button ("Order QR codes for your tables in our webshop. You can link each QR code to a table later."), but it does not work yet: print the cards yourself (step 4). To set them up, choose Set up next to Set up QR codes. The QR codes page also has the tabs QR codes, Call waiter to table, Show menu and Ordering and payment.
- **Step 2.** You see all your active hospitality tables. If there are none, it says "There are no active hospitality tables. Create tables first in the hospitality settings."
- **Step 3.** For each table, turn on **Call the waiter**, create a Connection key (with the "Create connection keys for all tables" button you do all tables at once) and choose the Point of sale (the receipt printer) where the request is printed. Click Save.
- **Step 4.** Click Create QR code next to a table. You see a card "Scan to call the waiter" with the QR code and the table. Use the download button to save the card so you can print it.
- **What the guest sees.** The guest scans the code with their phone and sees "Sending your request", then "Someone is on the way" with their table. If they scan again while the request is still open, it says "We already have your request."
- **What you see.** On the dashboard you get the notification "Service requested" and on the floor plan the table shows "Waiting for service". If a printer is linked to the table, a receipt "Call waiter to table" is printed. A request is completed when you mark it as handled, or as soon as an order comes in for that table after the request.
- **Against misuse.** A table can only call again 60 seconds after the previous request. Per device there are at most 6 scans per table and 60 scans in total per 10 minutes.
- **If the add-on is turned off.** Then the codes that are still on the tables stop working too.
- **Ordering yourself at the table.** Turn on Eat here in the webshop widget; see [How do the delivery and pickup options of the webshop widget work?](../../webshop/naslag/webshopwidget-bezorgen.md). A QR code from Widgets (the Link) does not know a table. For the Ordering and payment tab, see [What does the Ordering and payment tab do for the QR codes?](../../webshop/naslag/bestellen-en-betalen-qr.md).

![The QR codes screen with the tabs QR codes, Call waiter to table, Show menu and Ordering and payment](/kennisbank/beelden/qr-code-op-tafel-1.webp)

**Example:** A café turns on QR codes, leaves Call the waiter on for every table and chooses the bar printer. A guest scans the code on table 7; a receipt "Call waiter to table" is printed at the bar and the dashboard shows the notification Service requested for Table 7.

**Related questions:**

- Can guests order by themselves at the table via a QR code?
- How does a guest call the waiter with a QR code?
- How much does the QR codes add-on cost?
- Can a guest pay via the QR code on the table?

**Keywords:** qr code table, call waiter, call server, qr ordering, table qr, qr codes price

**Related:** [Which features cost money?](../../prijzen/faq/welke-functies-kosten-geld.md), [How does Set up QR codes work in Jimani?](../naslag/qr-codes-tafels.md), [What does the Ordering and payment tab do for the QR codes?](../../webshop/naslag/bestellen-en-betalen-qr.md)

---

# In which countries does the Jimani POS meet the fiscal POS law?

**Answer:** At the moment only in the Netherlands, where no signature per receipt is required. For ten other EU countries Jimani has built or researched a link with a fiscal provider (fiskaltrust or fiskaly), but it is not switched on in any country yet. How far it is differs per country.

**Explanation:**

- **How it works.** In most EU countries every receipt has to be signed or reported to the tax authority. Jimani does this through a fiscal provider in the cloud. Jimani sets up this link per POS for you; you cannot switch it on yourself.
- **No device in your business.** Jimani only offers countries where it works without a fiscal printer, smart card or other device in the business. A country that only works with such a device stays off.
- **Status per country:**

| Country | What the law requires | Status in Jimani |
|---|---|---|
| Netherlands | No signature per receipt | Available |
| Germany | TSE signature on every receipt | In preparation |
| Austria | RKSV signature and QR code | In preparation |
| Spain | VERI*FACTU or TicketBAI | In preparation |
| Portugal | Certified program, ATCUD and QR code | In preparation |
| Greece | Every receipt to myDATA | In preparation |
| France | NF525: chain, closings and archive | Not available yet: certification needed |
| Belgium | Registered cash register system with FDM | Not available yet: certification needed |
| Italy | Documento commerciale via RT or AdE | Not available yet: only with POS hardware |
| Poland | Fiscal cash register in the business | Not available yet: only with POS hardware |
| Sweden | Control unit (kontrollenhet) | Not available yet |

- **In preparation** means: built and tested in the provider's test environment, but not yet in use at businesses. There are still open questions for the provider or for a tax adviser in that country.
- **Price.** The price per POS per month has not been set yet.
- **Until then.** If you use the POS in one of these countries, ask your adviser what is allowed. Jimani makes no commitment about this.

**Example:** A restaurant in Cologne asks whether it may use the Jimani POS. The answer is: not yet; the German link with a TSE has been built, but is not switched on yet.

**Related questions:**

- Can I use the Jimani POS abroad?
- Does Jimani work in Germany, Austria, Belgium or France?
- Does Jimani have a fiscal link such as fiskaltrust or fiskaly?
- In which countries can I use the POS with the legal requirements?

**Source:** `docs/europa/fiskaltrust-kern.md` (sectie 18), `docs/europa/fiskaly.md`, `tools/fiskalisering.sql`, `tools/fiskalisering-fiskaly.sql`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** fiscal POS abroad, fiscal POS law Europe, fiskaltrust, fiskaly, TSE, POS Germany, POS Belgium, POS France, POS Spain

**Related:** [Does the Jimani POS meet the requirements of the Belastingdienst (Dutch Tax Authority)?](../kassa/faq/eisen-belastingdienst.md), [Can I use the Jimani POS in Germany?](fiscale-kassa-duitsland.md), [Which accounting packages does Jimani connect to in my country?](boekhoudkoppeling-per-land.md)

---

# Can I use the Jimani POS in Germany?

**Answer:** Not yet. The German POS law (KassenSichV) requires the signature of a technical security system (TSE) on every receipt. Jimani has built this link with a cloud TSE via fiskaltrust or fiskaly, without a device in your business, but it is not yet in use at businesses.

**Explanation:**

- **Every receipt signed.** Every receipt becomes a TSE transaction, including a credit receipt, tips, a cash movement and the settlement of a receipt on account.
- **On the receipt.** The TSE data (transaction number, start and end time, counter, serial numbers and signature) and a QR code.
- **Day close.** At every day close (Z receipt) Jimani creates a Kassenabschluss according to DSFinV-K.
- **Export for an audit.** Jimani creates the DSFinV-K export (zip) and the TSE export (TAR).
- **Outage.** If signing fails, the POS simply completes the payment and the receipt says "TSE ausgefallen". Jimani signs the receipt later.
- **Registering with the Finanzamt.** Every POS has to be registered via ELSTER within one month of purchase. Jimani prepares all the data, see [How do I register my POS with the Finanzamt via ELSTER?](kassa-aanmelden-elster.md).
- **What is still open.** The choice of the cloud TSE and the price, questions for a Steuerberater (including table rounds on account) and keeping the exports for ten years.

**Example:** A café in Aachen rings up a coffee. The receipt shows the transaction number and the QR code of the TSE. If the connection drops for a moment, it says "TSE ausgefallen" and the receipt is signed later.

**Related questions:**

- Do I need a TSE for the Jimani POS in Germany?
- Does Jimani work with DSFinV-K?
- What happens if the TSE fails?
- Do I need a box or USB stick in my business?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Fiscalisatie/FiskaltrustDuitsland.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Fiscalisatie/FiskalyDuitsland.cs`, `docs/europa/fiskaltrust-kern.md` (secties 4 en 18), `docs/europa/fiskaly.md` (sectie 4)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** POS Germany, TSE POS, KassenSichV, DSFinV-K, cloud TSE, fiskaltrust, fiskaly, Kassenabschluss

**Related:** [In which countries does the Jimani POS meet the fiscal POS law?](fiscale-kassa-per-land.md), [Can I connect Jimani to DATEV, Lexware Office or sevDesk?](boekhoudkoppeling-duitsland.md)

---

# How do I register my POS with the Finanzamt via ELSTER?

**Answer:** In Germany you register every POS yourself in Mein ELSTER within one month of purchase. Jimani prepares all fields of that form under Settings > Till and products > Fiscalisation, with a button to copy each field. This screen only appears once your business has a fiscal POS; that link is still in preparation.

**Explanation:**

- **Where.** Settings > Till and products > Fiscalisation, window Registration details for the tax authority. You only see it if your business is in Germany or Austria and the add-on Fiscalisation is switched on.
- **Per POS** every field of the form is listed with its official German name, the value and the source.
- **What you fill in yourself.** The Steuernummer from the Finanzamt (not the VAT number) and the Purchase date of the register: the date of the invoice or delivery, for rent or lease the start.
- **What Jimani fills in.** Name and address of the business (Betriebsstätte), the number of POS systems, the type of POS, the software Jimani, the serial number of the POS and of the TSE, the BSI certification code and "Cloud" as the type of TSE. The BSI code comes with the first signed receipt.
- **Copying.** Choose Copy next to a field or Copy all, or choose Download as PDF or Download as CSV.
- **Keeping track.** Set Registered with the tax authority to Yes once you have registered the POS; you can change the date.
- **Sending it yourself.** Jimani and fiskaltrust do not send the registration to ELSTER on your behalf; that remains your task. A file to import directly into ELSTER does not exist yet.
- **Deregistering.** If a POS is taken out of use, you report that too; the date of decommissioning then appears in the overview.

**Example:** A bakery in Cologne gets two POS systems. It fills in the Steuernummer and the purchase date, chooses Copy all, pastes the data into Mein ELSTER and then sets Registered with the tax authority to Yes.

**Related questions:**

- How do I register my POS with the Finanzamt?
- Where do I find the serial number of the TSE?
- Does Jimani do the ELSTER registration for me?
- Which data do I need for the Kassenmeldung?

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Views/Fiscaalaanmelding/Index.cshtml`, `Jimani.MVC/Views/Shared/_Fiscaalaanmelding.cshtml`, `Jimani.Application/Fiscalisatie/Fiscaalaanmelding.cs`, `docs/europa/fiskaltrust-kern.md` (sectie 18, aanmelden)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** register POS ELSTER, Kassenmeldung, Finanzamt POS, 146a AO, TSE serial number, Mein ELSTER, fiscalisation

**Related:** [Can I use the Jimani POS in Germany?](fiscale-kassa-duitsland.md), [Can I use the Jimani POS in Austria?](fiscale-kassa-oostenrijk.md)

---

# Can I use the Jimani POS in Austria?

**Answer:** Not yet. The Austrian cash register obligation (RKSV) requires a signature and a QR code on every receipt. Jimani has built this link with a cloud signature via fiskaltrust or fiskaly, without a smart card in your business, but it is not yet in use at businesses.

**Explanation:**

- **What has been built.** Every receipt gets an RKSV signature and a QR code. Jimani creates the Startbeleg, the Monatsbeleg and in December the Jahresbeleg, and the Schlussbeleg when stopping. The export for an audit is DEP7.
- **Outage.** If signing fails, the receipt says "Sicherheitseinrichtung ausgefallen". Jimani signs the receipt later.
- **FinanzOnline.** The POS and the signature creation unit are registered in FinanzOnline (Eingaben > Registrierkassen); after that you check the Startbeleg with the app BMF Belegcheck. The recommended route is for fiskaltrust to do the FinanzOnline registrations with a FinanzOnline web service user of your business.
- **Data ready.** Jimani prepares the data for FinanzOnline under Settings > Till and products > Fiscalisation: including the Kassenidentifikationsnummer, the Vertrauensdiensteanbieter and the Seriennummer des Zertifikats, each with a Copy button.
- **What is still open.** Creating the Austrian POS at the provider and a full test with it, and who does the FinanzOnline registration.

**Example:** A pizzeria in Salzburg takes a payment. The receipt shows the RKSV QR code. At the end of the month Jimani automatically creates the Monatsbeleg.

**Related questions:**

- Does Jimani comply with the RKSV in Austria?
- Do I need a smart card for the POS?
- How do I register my POS in FinanzOnline?
- Does Jimani create the Monatsbeleg and Jahresbeleg?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Fiscalisatie/FiskaltrustOostenrijk.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Fiscalisatie/FiskalyOostenrijk.cs`, `docs/europa/fiskaltrust-kern.md` (secties 4 en 18), `docs/europa/fiskaly.md` (sectie 5)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** POS Austria, RKSV, Registrierkasse, FinanzOnline, Startbeleg, Monatsbeleg, DEP7, fiskaltrust, fiskaly

**Related:** [In which countries does the Jimani POS meet the fiscal POS law?](fiscale-kassa-per-land.md), [Can I connect Jimani to BMD, RZL or DATEV in Austria?](boekhoudkoppeling-oostenrijk.md)

---

# Can I use the Jimani POS in Spain?

**Answer:** Not yet. In Spain, POS software has to record every invoice in a chain and send it to the tax authority: VERI*FACTU to the AEAT, or TicketBAI in the Basque Country. Jimani has built this link via fiskaltrust or fiskaly, but it is not yet in use at businesses.

**Explanation:**

- **What the receipt becomes.** Every receipt becomes a factura simplificada with a sequential number. With the customer's name, address and NIF it becomes a factura. A return becomes a new invoice that refers to the original one.
- **On the receipt.** The type of invoice, the number, the NIF of the business and, with VERI*FACTU, the QR code at the top with "QR tributario:".
- **Outage.** Without a connection the customer gets a provisional receipt ("Justificante provisional, no es una factura"). Jimani records the invoice later.
- **No training receipt and no day close.** Spain does not have them.
- **When it becomes mandatory.** Companies subject to corporate tax from 1-1-2027, everyone else from 1-7-2027 (Real Decreto-ley 15/2025). TicketBAI already applies in the Basque Country.
- **What is still open.** A line with 0% VAT needs an exemption reason and is currently rejected; the electronic certificate of the business; questions for an asesor fiscal.

**Example:** A tapas bar in Valencia takes a payment. The customer gets a factura simplificada with the QR code at the top, which they can check with the AEAT.

**Related questions:**

- Does Jimani comply with VERI*FACTU?
- Does the Jimani POS work with TicketBAI?
- When does VERI*FACTU become mandatory?
- What is on a Spanish Jimani receipt?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Fiscalisatie/FiskaltrustSpanje.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Fiscalisatie/FiskalySpanje.cs`, `docs/europa/fiskaltrust-kern.md` (secties 9 en 18), `docs/europa/fiskaly.md` (sectie 6)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** POS Spain, VERI*FACTU, TicketBAI, factura simplificada, AEAT, QR tributario, fiskaltrust, fiskaly

**Related:** [In which countries does the Jimani POS meet the fiscal POS law?](fiscale-kassa-per-land.md), [Can I connect Jimani to Holded, a3 or ContaSol?](boekhoudkoppeling-spanje.md)

---

# Can I use the Jimani POS in Portugal?

**Answer:** Not yet. In Portugal every document has to be created by a program certified by the tax authority (AT), with ATCUD, QR code and a hash chain. Jimani uses the certified program of fiskaltrust (certificate 3535/AT) or fiskaly for this; the link has been built and tested, but is not yet in use at businesses.

**Explanation:**

- **Type of document.** A paid receipt up to €100 net becomes a Fatura simplificada (FS); above that or on account a Fatura (FT). A return becomes a Nota de crédito (NC) and the settlement of a receipt on account a Recibo (RG).
- **On the receipt.** Type and number, the ATCUD, "Processado por programa certificado n.º 3535/AT" and the QR code at the top.
- **Customer NIF.** Only a valid NIF is included; otherwise the receipt says "Consumidor final".
- **SAF-T (PT).** Jimani creates the export; the business or the accountant submits it to the AT every month.
- **Outage.** The customer gets a provisional document ("Documento provisório, não serve de fatura"). Jimani has the receipt signed later.
- **What is still open.** The AT also approves the layout of the receipt; that has to be agreed with fiskaltrust. A line with 0% VAT needs an exemption reason and is currently rejected. The Azores and Madeira are not supported.

**Example:** A café in Lisbon rings up €12. The customer gets a Fatura simplificada with ATCUD and QR code; at the end of the month the accountant downloads the SAF-T.

**Related questions:**

- Is the Jimani POS certified in Portugal?
- Does Jimani put the ATCUD and the QR code on the receipt?
- How do I get the SAF-T for the AT?
- What happens with a receipt above €100?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Fiscalisatie/FiskaltrustPortugal.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Fiscalisatie/FiskalyUnified.cs`, `docs/europa/fiskaltrust-kern.md` (secties 10 en 18), `docs/europa/fiskaly.md` (sectie 7)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** POS Portugal, ATCUD, SAF-T PT, fatura simplificada, programa certificado, QR code invoice, fiskaltrust

**Related:** [In which countries does the Jimani POS meet the fiscal POS law?](fiscale-kassa-per-land.md), [Can I connect Jimani to Primavera, PHC or TOConline?](boekhoudkoppeling-portugal.md)

---

# Can I use the Jimani POS in France?

**Answer:** Not yet. In France a POS system has to record receipts in a way that cannot be altered, secure them, keep them and archive them, and the business has to prove this with a certificate (NF525 or LNE) or an attestation from the supplier. Jimani has built the link via fiskaltrust and fiskaly, but without that certification it will not go live.

**Explanation:**

- **What has been built.** Every receipt goes into a signed chain. A reprint gets "DUPLICATA" and its own signature. Jimani creates the clôtures per day, month and year and an archive every month.
- **Fiscal day.** The day close follows the Z receipt; a day without a Z receipt is still closed (06:00 to 06:00).
- **Outage.** The receipt says "Signature électronique différée (mode dégradé)"; Jimani signs later.
- **VAT.** The rates 20%, 10%, 5.5% and 2.1%. The rates of Corsica and the overseas territories are not supported.
- **What is still open.** The certification or attestation, SIRET instead of the Chamber of Commerce number in the header of the receipt, and questions for an expert-comptable (including whether an interim bill has to be signed).

**Example:** A bistro in Lille reprints a receipt. The reprint says "DUPLICATA" with its own number, and the reprint is in the chain.

**Related questions:**

- Is the Jimani POS NF525 certified?
- Does Jimani comply with the French POS law?
- Does Jimani create the clôture journalière?
- What is on a reprint of the receipt?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Fiscalisatie/FiskaltrustFrankrijk.cs`, `docs/europa/fiskaltrust-kern.md` (secties 15 en 18), `docs/europa/fiskaly.md` (sectie 7)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** POS France, NF525, loi anti-fraude TVA, attestation caisse, clôture, duplicata, fiskaltrust, fiskaly

**Related:** [In which countries does the Jimani POS meet the fiscal POS law?](fiscale-kassa-per-land.md), [Can I connect Jimani to Pennylane, Sage or Cegid?](boekhoudkoppeling-frankrijk.md)

---

# Can I use the Jimani POS in Belgium?

**Answer:** Not yet. In Belgium a hospitality business with more than €25,000 a year from meals served on the premises has to use a registered cash register system (GKS, the "white cash register") with an FDM. Jimani has built the link with the FDM in the cloud via fiskaltrust, but the POS system first has to be certified by the FPS Finance. Until then it is not available.

**Explanation:**

- **What has been built.** Sale, tips, credit receipt, copy (`KOPIE KASTICKET`), cash movement, settlement of a receipt on account and signing afterwards after an outage, tested with the FDM test environment.
- **Outage.** The receipt says `DIT IS GEEN GELDIG BTW-KASTICKET`, in Wallonia `CECI N'EST PAS UN TICKET DE CAISSE TVA VALABLE`; Jimani has the receipt signed later.
- **Language of the receipt.** Dutch, and French in Wallonia; in Brussels the language of the business.
- **VAT.** The rates 21%, 12%, 6% and 0%.
- **What is still open.** The certification as GKS 2.0, the national register number (INSZ) of every cashier that the FDM asks for with every receipt, the Z report and the receipt on account at fiskaltrust, and rounding to 5 cents for cash.

**Example:** A brasserie in Ghent asks whether it has a white cash register with Jimani. The answer is: not yet; the link has been built, but Jimani has not yet been certified as a GKS.

**Related questions:**

- Is Jimani a white cash register?
- Does the Jimani POS work with an FDM?
- Is Jimani certified as a registered cash register system?
- Do I need a GKS as a hospitality business in Belgium?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Fiscalisatie/FiskaltrustBelgie.cs`, `docs/europa/fiskaltrust-kern.md` (secties 16 en 18)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** white cash register, registered cash register system, GKS, FDM, POS Belgium, VAT receipt, FPS Finance, fiskaltrust

**Related:** [In which countries does the Jimani POS meet the fiscal POS law?](fiscale-kassa-per-land.md), [Can I connect Jimani to Exact Online, Yuki or WinBooks in Belgium?](boekhoudkoppeling-belgie.md), [Can Jimani create e-invoices, such as Peppol in Belgium?](e-facturen-per-land.md)

---

# Can I use the Jimani POS in Italy?

**Answer:** No, that is not available yet. In Italy every sale has to go to the Agenzia delle Entrate (AdE) as a documento commerciale, via a registratore telematico (RT) in the business or via the AdE portal. Jimani only offers solutions without POS hardware in the business, and there is no good route for that in Italy yet. The Italian link has been built, but is switched off.

**Explanation:**

- **RT printer or RT server.** It sits in the business; a link in the cloud cannot reach it. This route is ruled out.
- **Via the portal.** The only route without hardware logs in to the AdE portal on behalf of the business, with a power of attorney (delega). There is no official API; no decision has been made on this route yet.
- **What has been built.** Documento commerciale, chiusura giornaliera, reso and the codice lotteria; entering the code is not possible yet.
- **Still in preparation.** The accounting link with Fatture in Cloud, TeamSystem and Zucchetti, and e-invoices via SDI.

**Example:** A gelateria in Rimini asks whether the Jimani POS may be used in Italy. The answer is: no, not yet; an Italian fiscal POS currently still needs hardware or a login to the AdE portal.

**Related questions:**

- Can I use the Jimani POS in Italy?
- Does Jimani work with a registratore telematico?
- Does Jimani create a documento commerciale?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Fiscalisatie/FiskaltrustItalie.cs`, `docs/europa/fiskaltrust-kern.md` (secties 12 en 18), `docs/europa/fiskaly.md` (sectie 7)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** POS Italy, registratore telematico, documento commerciale, Agenzia delle Entrate, RT, lotteria degli scontrini

**Related:** [In which countries does the Jimani POS meet the fiscal POS law?](fiscale-kassa-per-land.md), [Can I connect Jimani to Fatture in Cloud, TeamSystem or Zucchetti?](boekhoudkoppeling-italie.md)

---

# Can I use the Jimani POS in Greece?

**Answer:** Not yet. In Greece every receipt goes via an approved provider to myDATA of the AADE and gets a MARK. Jimani has built this link via fiskaltrust (under the licence of Viva) and tested it with the myDATA test environment, but it is not yet in use at businesses.

**Explanation:**

- **What has been built.** The sales receipt, the credit receipt with the MARK of the original, tips, the receipt on account and signing afterwards after an outage.
- **On the receipt.** The type of document, series and number, MARK, UID, the authentication code and a QR code. In case of an outage the legal text "Απώλεια Διασύνδεσης Οντότητας - Παρόχου".
- **VAT.** The rates 24%, 13% and 6%, and on the islands 17% and 9%.
- **Card payments.** In Greece a card payment has to go through a terminal that is connected to the POS and certified by the AADE. Jimani's card terminals (Mollie) cannot do that; no decision has been made on this yet.
- **Hospitality.** An order slip per table round has not been built yet.
- **Notification.** The business notifies the AADE within ten days that it issues receipts via a provider.

**Example:** A taverna on Crete takes a cash payment. The receipt gets a MARK from myDATA and the VAT rate of the islands.

**Related questions:**

- Does the Jimani POS work with myDATA?
- Does every receipt get a MARK?
- Can I take card payments in Greece with the Jimani card terminal?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Fiscalisatie/FiskaltrustGriekenland.cs`, `docs/europa/fiskaltrust-kern.md` (secties 13 en 18)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** POS Greece, myDATA, AADE, MARK, Viva, ηλεκτρονική απόδειξη, fiskaltrust

**Related:** [In which countries does the Jimani POS meet the fiscal POS law?](fiscale-kassa-per-land.md), [Can I connect Jimani to Epsilon Net, SoftOne or Galaxy?](boekhoudkoppeling-griekenland.md)

---

# Can I use the Jimani POS in Poland?

**Answer:** No. In Poland every sale has to go through a certified fiscal cash register (kasa online) in the business, which prints the paragon fiskalny. That is not possible without hardware, and Jimani only offers solutions without hardware. The Polish link is therefore switched off and will not be developed further.

**Explanation:**

- **Why not.** The only fiscal cash register the provider supports is a POSNET printer in the business's network. A link in the cloud cannot reach it.
- **Selling without a cash register.** Polish law forbids selling without a working fiscal cash register; that does not fit a POS in the cloud either.
- **Still in preparation.** The accounting link with inFakt, JPK_KR and Comarch ERP Optima.
- **E-invoices via KSeF.** Jimani does not have a link for that yet.

**Example:** A restaurant in Kraków asks whether it can use the Jimani POS. The answer is: no; in Poland a fiscal printer in the business is mandatory.

**Related questions:**

- Can I use the Jimani POS in Poland?
- Does Jimani work with a kasa fiskalna?
- Does Jimani print a paragon fiskalny?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Fiscalisatie/FiskaltrustPolen.cs`, `docs/europa/fiskaltrust-kern.md` (secties 14 en 18)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** POS Poland, kasa fiskalna, kasa online, paragon fiskalny, POSNET, KSeF

**Related:** [In which countries does the Jimani POS meet the fiscal POS law?](fiscale-kassa-per-land.md), [Can I connect Jimani to inFakt, JPK_KR or Comarch ERP Optima?](boekhoudkoppeling-polen.md)

---

# Can I use the Jimani POS in Sweden?

**Answer:** Not yet. In Sweden a cash register has to be connected to a control unit (kontrollenhet) that records every receipt, and the business registers both with Skatteverket. Jimani has built the Swedish link via fiskaly, but the control unit still refuses the start in the test environment; fiskaly still has to activate Sweden for Jimani. Until then it is not available.

**Explanation:**

- **What has been built.** The sales receipt (kassakvitto), the return receipt (returkvitto), the training receipt (övningskvitto) and the day close.
- **Registering.** The business registers the control unit and the cash register (with the manufacturing number) with Skatteverket within 14 days.
- **Outage.** In Sweden only a handwritten cash note on paper is allowed during an outage; an electronic receipt without a connection is not allowed.
- **Accounting.** Jimani does not yet have its own accounting package for Sweden; Odoo works in every country.

**Example:** A café in Malmö asks whether the Jimani POS may be used in Sweden. The answer is: not yet; the link has been built, but the control unit has not been activated yet.

**Related questions:**

- Can I use the Jimani POS in Sweden?
- Does Jimani work with a kontrollenhet?
- How do I register my POS with Skatteverket?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Fiscalisatie/FiskalyUnified.cs`, `docs/europa/fiskaly.md` (secties 3 en 7)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** POS Sweden, kontrollenhet, kassaregister, Skatteverket, kassakvitto, fiskaly

**Related:** [In which countries does the Jimani POS meet the fiscal POS law?](fiscale-kassa-per-land.md), [Which accounting packages does Jimani connect to in my country?](boekhoudkoppeling-per-land.md)

---

# Which accounting packages does Jimani connect to in my country?

**Answer:** Right now Jimani connects to Exact Online, Twinfield, SnelStart and Odoo. For the Netherlands, Belgium, Germany, Austria, Spain, Portugal, France, Italy, Greece and Poland the most common packages per country have been built; they are in preparation and not available yet. Odoo works in every country.

**Explanation:**

- **Two ways.** Via the API the day's revenue goes to the package automatically every day. Via a file Jimani prepares the entry every day in the package's import format; you download it per month or Jimani emails it to your accountant every month.
- **What is sent.** One journal entry per day close: revenue per VAT rate, VAT, payment methods, tips and cash difference.
- **Packages per country:**

| Country | Via the API | Via a file |
|---|---|---|
| Netherlands | Exact Online, Twinfield, SnelStart, Odoo, Moneybird, e-Boekhouden.nl, Yuki | - |
| Belgium | Exact Online, Yuki | WinBooks |
| Germany | Lexware Office, sevDesk | DATEV |
| Austria | Lexware Office, sevDesk | BMD NTCS, RZL, DATEV Österreich |
| Spain | Holded | a3, ContaSol |
| Portugal | - | Primavera, PHC, TOConline (SAF-T) |
| France | Pennylane | Sage, Cegid (FEC) |
| Italy | Fatture in Cloud | TeamSystem, Zucchetti |
| Greece | - | Epsilon Net, SoftOne, Galaxy |
| Poland | inFakt | JPK_KR, Comarch ERP Optima |

- **Available now** are only Exact Online (Netherlands), Twinfield, SnelStart and Odoo; the rest is in preparation.
- **Monitoring.** After connecting, Jimani checks the connection and suggests the general ledger accounts from your package; you can change them. Every night Jimani checks whether the key is still valid and whether the last entry has arrived. You only get a notification if you need to do something yourself.
- **Price.** The add-on Accounting link costs €15 per month, excl. VAT.
- **Sweden.** There is no dedicated package for Sweden yet.

**Example:** A hotel in Innsbruck works with BMD NTCS. Jimani prepares the entry every day and on the first of the month emails the file for the previous month to the accountant.

**Related questions:**

- Which accounting packages does Jimani support abroad?
- Can I connect Jimani to my German, Spanish or French accounting package?
- What is the difference between a link via the API and via a file?
- Does Jimani send the file to my accountant?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/Pakketcatalogus.cs`, `docs/europa/boekhoudkoppelingen.md`, `Jimani.MVC/Views/Settings/Boekhouding.cshtml`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** accounting link abroad, accounting package per country, DATEV, Lexware, Pennylane, Holded, Fatture in Cloud, inFakt, Exact Online Belgium

**Related:** [Can I connect Jimani to my accounting package?](../kassa/faq/boekhoudkoppeling-en-export.md), [In which countries does the Jimani POS meet the fiscal POS law?](fiscale-kassa-per-land.md)

---

# Can I connect Jimani to Moneybird, e-Boekhouden.nl or Yuki?

**Answer:** Not yet. These three links have been built and are in preparation. Right now Jimani connects in the Netherlands to Exact Online, Twinfield, SnelStart and Odoo. Moneybird, e-Boekhouden.nl and Yuki will also work via the API: every day the day's revenue goes to the package as a journal entry.

**Explanation:**

- **Moneybird.** You need the number of your administration (it is in the address bar of Moneybird) and an API token: `Moneybird > Instellingen > Ontwikkelaars > Nieuw token`.
- **e-Boekhouden.nl.** You need an API token: `e-Boekhouden.nl > Beheer > Inrichting > API-tokens`.
- **Yuki.** You need a web service access key (`Yuki > Instellingen > Webservices`) and, if needed, the ID of your administration. Yuki also works for Belgium.
- **Where.** Settings > Money and figures > Accounting, tab Administration, under Package. The list shows the most common packages in your country.
- **Available now.** For Exact Online, Twinfield, SnelStart and Odoo, see [Can I connect Jimani to my accounting package?](../kassa/faq/boekhoudkoppeling-en-export.md).

**Example:** A hair salon in Utrecht works with Moneybird. As soon as the link is available, it creates an API token in Moneybird, pastes it into Key and fills in the number of its administration.

**Related questions:**

- Can I connect Jimani to Moneybird?
- Does Jimani work with e-Boekhouden.nl?
- Is there a link with Yuki?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/Pakketcatalogus.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/MoneybirdKoppeling.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/EBoekhoudenKoppeling.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/YukiKoppeling.cs`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** Moneybird link, e-Boekhouden link, Yuki link, POS accounting link, journal entry

**Related:** [Which accounting packages does Jimani connect to in my country?](boekhoudkoppeling-per-land.md)

---

# Can I connect Jimani to DATEV, Lexware Office or sevDesk?

**Answer:** These links have been built and are in preparation, not available yet. DATEV works via a file in the DATEV format (EXTF) that your Steuerberater imports; Lexware Office and sevDesk work via the API, with the day's revenue as a Beleg per VAT rate every day.

**Explanation:**

- **DATEV.** Jimani prepares the Buchungen every day in the DATEV format. You download the file per month, or Jimani emails it to your Steuerberater on the first of the month. You choose the Kontenrahmen SKR03 or SKR04.
- **Lexware Office.** The day's revenue goes as a Beleg (Einnahme) per VAT rate. The Public API is included in the XL plan. You create the key in Lexware Office > Erweiterungen > Public API.
- **sevDesk.** The day's revenue goes as a Beleg per VAT rate. You find the API token in sevDesk > Einstellungen > Benutzer > API-Token.
- **Where.** Settings > Money and figures > Accounting, tab Administration, under Package.
- **Emailing the file.** Fill in Your accountant's email address and switch on Email automatically every month, or choose Email now.

**Example:** A restaurant in Munich works with a Steuerberater who uses DATEV. On the first of the month the Steuerberater receives the file for the previous month and imports it into DATEV.

**Related questions:**

- Can I connect Jimani to DATEV?
- Does Jimani work with Lexware Office or sevDesk?
- Can Jimani email the export to my Steuerberater?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/Pakketcatalogus.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/LexwareKoppeling.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/SevDeskKoppeling.cs`, `docs/europa/boekhoudkoppelingen.md`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** DATEV export POS, DATEV Buchungsstapel, Lexware Office POS, sevDesk POS, Steuerberater, SKR03, SKR04

**Related:** [Which accounting packages does Jimani connect to in my country?](boekhoudkoppeling-per-land.md), [Can I use the Jimani POS in Germany?](fiscale-kassa-duitsland.md)

---

# Can I connect Jimani to BMD, RZL or DATEV in Austria?

**Answer:** These links have been built and are in preparation, not available yet. BMD NTCS, RZL and DATEV Österreich work via a file that your accountant imports; Lexware Office and sevDesk also work in Austria, via the API.

**Explanation:**

- **BMD NTCS.** Jimani prepares the entry every day as a Buchungsimport (CSV).
- **RZL and DATEV Österreich.** Jimani creates the file in the DATEV format (EXTF), which RZL imports via the DATEV interface.
- **Getting the file.** You download the file per month, or Jimani emails it to your accountant on the first of the month.
- **Lexware Office and sevDesk.** Every day the day's revenue goes to the package as a Beleg per VAT rate.
- **Chart of accounts.** By default the Austrian chart of accounts; you can change every account.
- **Where.** Settings > Money and figures > Accounting, tab Administration, under Package.

**Example:** A ski hut in Tyrol works with BMD NTCS. On the first of the month the accountant receives the file for the previous month.

**Related questions:**

- Can I connect Jimani to BMD NTCS?
- Does Jimani work with RZL?
- Which accounting package can I use in Austria?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/Pakketcatalogus.cs`, `docs/europa/boekhoudkoppelingen.md`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** BMD NTCS POS, RZL POS, DATEV Österreich, Buchungsimport, Lexware Office Austria, sevDesk Austria

**Related:** [Which accounting packages does Jimani connect to in my country?](boekhoudkoppeling-per-land.md), [Can I use the Jimani POS in Austria?](fiscale-kassa-oostenrijk.md)

---

# Can I connect Jimani to Exact Online, Yuki or WinBooks in Belgium?

**Answer:** These links have been built and are in preparation, not available yet. Exact Online (the Belgian version) and Yuki work via the API, with the day's revenue as an entry every day; WinBooks works via a file that you import.

**Explanation:**

- **Exact Online Belgium.** Jimani uses the Belgian address of Exact Online and the Belgian chart of accounts.
- **Yuki.** You need a web service access key: `Yuki > Instellingen > Webservices`.
- **WinBooks.** Jimani prepares the entry every day; you download the file per month or Jimani emails it to your accountant, who imports it into WinBooks.
- **Where.** Settings > Money and figures > Accounting, tab Administration, under Package.

**Example:** A chip shop in Antwerp works with Yuki. After connecting, every closed day is in Yuki as an entry the next morning.

**Related questions:**

- Does Jimani work with Exact Online in Belgium?
- Can I connect Jimani to Yuki?
- Is there a link with WinBooks?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/Pakketcatalogus.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/YukiKoppeling.cs`, `docs/europa/boekhoudkoppelingen.md`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** accounting link Belgium, Exact Online Belgium, Yuki link, WinBooks link, POS accounting Belgium

**Related:** [Which accounting packages does Jimani connect to in my country?](boekhoudkoppeling-per-land.md), [Can I use the Jimani POS in Belgium?](fiscale-kassa-belgie.md)

---

# Can I connect Jimani to Holded, a3 or ContaSol?

**Answer:** These links have been built and are in preparation, not available yet. Holded works via the API, with the day's revenue as an entry (asiento) every day; a3 and ContaSol work via a file that your accountant imports.

**Explanation:**

- **Holded.** The API is included in every paid Holded plan. You create the key in Holded > Configuración > Desarrolladores > Nueva API Key.
- **a3 (Wolters Kluwer).** Jimani creates the file for the Enlace contable of a3ASESOR or a3innuva.
- **ContaSol.** Jimani creates the file for the Importación Excel of ContaSol.
- **Getting the file.** You download the file per month, or Jimani emails it to your accountant on the first of the month.
- **Where.** Settings > Money and figures > Accounting, tab Administration, under Package.

**Example:** A beach bar in Málaga works with Holded. After connecting, every closed day is in Holded as an asiento the next morning.

**Related questions:**

- Can I connect Jimani to Holded?
- Does Jimani work with a3 or ContaSol?
- Which accounting package can I use in Spain?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/Pakketcatalogus.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/HoldedKoppeling.cs`, `docs/europa/boekhoudkoppelingen.md`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** Holded POS, a3 Enlace contable, ContaSol import, accounting software Spain, asiento contable

**Related:** [Which accounting packages does Jimani connect to in my country?](boekhoudkoppeling-per-land.md), [Can I use the Jimani POS in Spain?](fiscale-kassa-spanje.md)

---

# Can I connect Jimani to Primavera, PHC or TOConline?

**Answer:** These links have been built and are in preparation, not available yet. All three work via a file: the SAF-T (PT) for accounting (contabilidade), which your accountant imports.

**Explanation:**

- **Why no API.** In Portugal the fiscal POS itself is the certified program. An invoice that Jimani would put into Moloni or TOConline via the API would make the same sale fiscal a second time. That is why accounting goes via the SAF-T.
- **Getting the file.** You download the file per month, or Jimani emails it to your accountant on the first of the month.
- **Separately.** The SAF-T that the business submits to the AT every month comes from the fiscal POS.
- **Where.** Settings > Money and figures > Accounting, tab Administration, under Package.

**Example:** A pastelaria in Porto works with an accountant who uses TOConline. On the first of the month the accountant receives the SAF-T for the previous month.

**Related questions:**

- Can I connect Jimani to Primavera or PHC?
- Does Jimani work with TOConline?
- Why does accounting in Portugal go via the SAF-T?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/Pakketcatalogus.cs`, `docs/europa/boekhoudkoppelingen.md`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** SAF-T contabilidade, Primavera, PHC, TOConline, accounting software Portugal, invoicing software

**Related:** [Which accounting packages does Jimani connect to in my country?](boekhoudkoppeling-per-land.md), [Can I use the Jimani POS in Portugal?](fiscale-kassa-portugal.md)

---

# Can I connect Jimani to Pennylane, Sage or Cegid?

**Answer:** These links have been built and are in preparation, not available yet. Pennylane works via the API, with the day's revenue as an écriture every day; Sage and Cegid work via an FEC file that your accountant imports.

**Explanation:**

- **Pennylane.** You need an API token: Pennylane > Paramètres > Connectivité > Développeurs. Under Administration you fill in the journal (for example VT); empty means the first sales journal.
- **Sage and Cegid.** Jimani creates the file in the FEC format, which Sage 50, Sage 100, Cegid Loop and Quadra import.
- **Getting the file.** You download the file per month, or Jimani emails it to your expert-comptable on the first of the month.
- **Where.** Settings > Money and figures > Accounting, tab Administration, under Package.

**Example:** A boulangerie in Lyon works with Pennylane. After connecting, every closed day is in the sales journal as an écriture the next morning.

**Related questions:**

- Can I connect Jimani to Pennylane?
- Does Jimani create an FEC file?
- Does Jimani work with Sage or Cegid?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/Pakketcatalogus.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/PennylaneKoppeling.cs`, `docs/europa/boekhoudkoppelingen.md`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** Pennylane POS, FEC file, Sage import, Cegid import, accounting software POS France, écriture comptable

**Related:** [Which accounting packages does Jimani connect to in my country?](boekhoudkoppeling-per-land.md), [Can I use the Jimani POS in France?](fiscale-kassa-frankrijk.md)

---

# Can I connect Jimani to Fatture in Cloud, TeamSystem or Zucchetti?

**Answer:** These links have been built and are in preparation, not available yet. Fatture in Cloud works via the API, with the corrispettivi per VAT rate every day; TeamSystem and Zucchetti work via a file (prima nota, Excel) that your accountant imports.

**Explanation:**

- **Fatture in Cloud.** You need a token: Fatture in Cloud > Impostazioni > Applicazioni collegate. Under Administration you fill in the ID of your company; empty means the first one.
- **TeamSystem and Zucchetti.** Jimani prepares the prima nota every day as an Excel file.
- **Getting the file.** You download the file per month, or Jimani emails it to your commercialista on the first of the month.
- **Where.** Settings > Money and figures > Accounting, tab Administration, under Package.
- **POS.** The Italian fiscal POS is not available yet; see [Can I use the Jimani POS in Italy?](fiscale-kassa-italie.md).

**Example:** A trattoria in Bologna works with Fatture in Cloud. Every morning the corrispettivi of the previous day are in Fatture in Cloud per VAT rate.

**Related questions:**

- Can I connect Jimani to Fatture in Cloud?
- Does Jimani work with TeamSystem or Zucchetti?
- Does Jimani send the corrispettivi to my accounting?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/Pakketcatalogus.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/FattureInCloudKoppeling.cs`, `docs/europa/boekhoudkoppelingen.md`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** Fatture in Cloud POS, corrispettivi, prima nota, TeamSystem, Zucchetti, commercialista

**Related:** [Which accounting packages does Jimani connect to in my country?](boekhoudkoppeling-per-land.md)

---

# Can I connect Jimani to Epsilon Net, SoftOne or Galaxy?

**Answer:** These links have been built and are in preparation, not available yet. All three work via an Excel journal that your accountant imports, because these packages have no public API.

**Explanation:**

- **Packages.** Epsilon Net (Pylon), SoftOne and Galaxy (SingularLogic).
- **What Jimani creates.** Every day a journal entry with revenue per VAT rate, VAT, payment methods, tips and cash difference, per month in one Excel file.
- **Getting the file.** You download the file per month, or Jimani emails it to your accountant on the first of the month.
- **Where.** Settings > Money and figures > Accounting, tab Administration, under Package.

**Example:** A beach bar on Rhodes works with an accountant who uses Epsilon Net. On the first of the month the accountant receives the Excel journal for the previous month.

**Related questions:**

- Can I connect Jimani to Epsilon Net?
- Does Jimani work with SoftOne or Galaxy?
- How does my accountant in Greece get the revenue?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/Pakketcatalogus.cs`, `docs/europa/boekhoudkoppelingen.md`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** Epsilon Net, Pylon, SoftOne, Galaxy SingularLogic, λογιστικό πρόγραμμα, Excel journal

**Related:** [Which accounting packages does Jimani connect to in my country?](boekhoudkoppeling-per-land.md), [Can I use the Jimani POS in Greece?](fiscale-kassa-griekenland.md)

---

# Can I connect Jimani to inFakt, JPK_KR or Comarch ERP Optima?

**Answer:** These links have been built and are in preparation, not available yet. inFakt works via the API, with the day's revenue as a raport fiskalny per VAT rate every day; JPK_KR and Comarch ERP Optima work via a file that your accountant imports.

**Explanation:**

- **inFakt.** You need an API key: inFakt > Ustawienia > Integracje > Klucz API.
- **JPK_KR.** Jimani creates the JPK_KR file, which the accounting package of your biuro rachunkowe imports.
- **Comarch ERP Optima.** Jimani creates an Excel journal for Comarch ERP Optima.
- **Getting the file.** You download the file per month, or Jimani emails it to your accountant on the first of the month.
- **Where.** Settings > Money and figures > Accounting, tab Administration, under Package.
- **POS.** Jimani cannot provide the Polish fiscal POS; see [Can I use the Jimani POS in Poland?](fiscale-kassa-polen.md).

**Example:** A pierogi restaurant in Gdańsk works with inFakt. Every morning the revenue of the previous day is in inFakt as a raport fiskalny.

**Related questions:**

- Can I connect Jimani to inFakt?
- Does Jimani create a JPK_KR file?
- Does Jimani work with Comarch ERP Optima?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/Pakketcatalogus.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Boekhouding/Pakketten/InfaktKoppeling.cs`, `docs/europa/boekhoudkoppelingen.md`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** inFakt integration, JPK_KR, Comarch ERP Optima, accounting software Poland, biuro rachunkowe

**Related:** [Which accounting packages does Jimani connect to in my country?](boekhoudkoppeling-per-land.md)

---

# Does Jimani charge VAT on my subscription if my business is in another EU country?

**Answer:** If your business has a VAT number in another EU country that is valid according to VIES, the VAT on Jimani's invoices is reverse charged: 0% with the note `Btw verlegd / Reverse charge`. This arrangement has been built, but is not in use yet.

**Explanation:**

- **The rules:**

| Your business | VAT on Jimani's invoice |
|---|---|
| In the Netherlands | 21% Dutch VAT |
| In another EU country, VAT number valid according to VIES | 0%, reverse charged, with your VAT number on the invoice |
| In another EU country, without a valid VAT number | 21% Dutch VAT |
| Outside the EU | 0%, VAT not applicable |

- **VIES check.** Jimani checks your VAT number with VIES, the EU's VAT database. If VIES does not answer, the VAT is not reverse charged; the next invoice checks again. An invoice with VAT is not automatically credited afterwards.
- **Where it applies.** The monthly invoice and the invoices for add-ons, quotes and the starter package, Jimani's web shop and payment requests.
- **What you do yourself.** Make sure the country and the VAT number of your business are correct under Settings > Your business > Company details.

**Example:** A restaurant in Brussels with a valid Belgian VAT number receives the monthly invoice with 0% VAT and the note `Btw verlegd / Reverse charge`. The business declares the VAT itself in Belgium.

**Related questions:**

- Do I have to pay VAT on Jimani if my business is in Belgium?
- Is the VAT reverse charged on Jimani's invoice?
- Why is there VAT on my invoice when I have a foreign VAT number?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Helpers/Jimanibtw.cs`, `docs/europa/btw-verlegd.md`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** reverse charge VAT, reverse charge, VIES check, foreign VAT number, Jimani invoice VAT, intra-community

**Related:** [Where do I find my invoices from Jimani and how do I pay an open invoice?](../prijzen/faq/facturen-van-jimani-bekijken-en-betalen.md)

---

# Can Jimani create e-invoices, such as Peppol in Belgium?

**Answer:** Not yet. Jimani has built e-invoices according to the European standard EN 16931 (Peppol BIS 3.0, XRechnung and Factur-X/ZUGFeRD), with sending via Peppol and via SDI in Italy, but this feature is still switched off. Until then Jimani creates invoices as PDF; you send e-invoices via your accounting package.

**Explanation:**

- **Formats.** UBL for Peppol and XRechnung, and a PDF with the e-invoice embedded (Factur-X/ZUGFeRD) for Germany and France.
- **Route.** Jimani chooses per invoice: an Italian business via SDI; a consumer gets the PDF; if the buyer is on Peppol, via Peppol; otherwise by email with the e-invoice as an attachment.
- **Check.** Every e-invoice is checked against the rules of the standard before it is sent. If it fails the check, the normal PDF is sent.
- **Obligation per country:**

| Country | Obligation |
|---|---|
| Belgium | Business invoices via Peppol since 1-1-2026 |
| Germany | Receiving since 1-1-2025, sending from 2027 or 2028 |
| France | Receiving from 1-9-2026, sending for SMEs from 1-9-2027 |
| Italy | Everything via SDI since 2019 |
| Poland | Via KSeF since 2026; Jimani does not have a link yet |
| Netherlands | No obligation between businesses before 2030 |

- **What still needs to be done.** The link with the POS, web shop and quotes, and the fields for your customer's Peppol ID.

**Example:** A Belgian business delivers catering to a company. The PDF invoice from Jimani is not yet a Peppol invoice; the business creates the invoice in its accounting package and sends it from there via Peppol.

**Related questions:**

- Can I send e-invoices via Peppol?
- Can Jimani create an XRechnung or ZUGFeRD?
- I have to send e-invoices in Belgium, can I do that with Jimani?
- Can Jimani create UBL invoices?

**Source:** `Jimani.Application/Efacturen/Efactuur.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Efacturen/Ublschrijver.cs`, `Jimani.Application/Efacturen/Ciischrijver.cs`, `docs/europa/e-facturen.md`, `tools/efacturen.sql`

**Last verified:** 2026-10-17

**Keywords:** Peppol, e-invoice, UBL invoice, XRechnung, ZUGFeRD, Factur-X, SDI, KSeF, e-invoicing Belgium

**Related:** [Can I connect Jimani to my accounting package?](../kassa/faq/boekhoudkoppeling-en-export.md), [Does Jimani charge VAT on my subscription if my business is in another EU country?](btw-verlegd-buitenland.md)

---

# How do I schedule a visit at the customer's home, for example to take measurements?

**Answer:** Switch on the add-on Customer visits (€10 per month). Set up your visit types, the travel time and your service area under Customer visits > Settings and give your employees working hours. Then you schedule in the Customer visits menu with New visit: customer, visit address, type, employee and a free time. Jimani keeps the travel time before and after the visit free.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Go to Settings > Add-ons and switch on Customer visits. The menu item Customer visits is added.
- **Step 2.** Open Customer visits > Settings, tab Visit types, and choose Add. Fill in the name (such as Measuring curtains), the Duration (minutes), the Price or call-out fee (may be 0), the Travel time before (minutes) and the Travel time after (minutes). By default the travel time is 30 minutes. Tick the employees who do this visit; nothing ticked = all employees.
- **Step 3.** Tab Employees: these are the same employees as in Salon. Add them with Add and set the working hours of each employee to Open, with breaks and days off. Visits are only scheduled within those working hours.
- **Step 4.** Tab Service area: fill in the four digits of the postcodes, individually or as a range, separated by commas (for example 4300-4399, 4400). Empty means everywhere.
- **Step 5.** Open the Customer visits menu and choose New visit. Search for the customer by name, phone, email or postcode, or choose New customer. The Visit address is the customer's address by default; change it if the visit is somewhere else. The address is required.
- **Step 6.** Choose the Visit type, the Employee (or No preference) and the Date. Under Time you only see the times at which the visit, with the travel time before and after, fits into the employee's schedule. Choose a time and Save.
- **Outside the service area.** If the address is outside your service area, you see a warning. You can still save.
- **The schedule.** One row per employee, time from left to right. Grey with a little car is the Travel time; hatched is Not scheduled (outside working hours, a break or a day off).
- **The customer.** If the customer has an email address, they immediately get a confirmation ("Our employee will come on ... at ... to ...") and a reminder the day before the visit.

![The day schedule of Customer visits with the visits and the travel time per employee](/kennisbank/beelden/klantbezoeken-planning-1.webp)

**Example:** Measuring curtains takes 75 minutes with 30 minutes of travel time before and after. If there is already a visit at 10:00, the employee is busy from 09:30 to 11:45 and the next visit can start at 12:15 at the earliest.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Views/Klantbezoeken/Index.cshtml` en `Instellingen.cshtml` (vensters en knoppen); `Jimani.Application/Helpers/Klantbezoekregels.cs` (reistijd, werkgebied); `Jimani.Application/Features/Klantbezoeken/Klantbezoekdienst.cs` (plannen, mails); `tools/klantbezoeken.sql` (prijs)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** customer visit, taking measurements, home visit, on location, travel time, service area, technician, adviser

**Related:** [How does Customer visits work in Jimani?](../naslag/klantbezoeken.md), [How do I let customers schedule a home visit themselves?](klantbezoeken-online-boeken.md)

---

# How do I let customers schedule a home visit themselves?

**Answer:** In addition to Customer visits, also switch on Online booking (Customer visits) (€10 per month). For the visit types that customers may schedule themselves, set Bookable online to Yes, and place the widget from Customer visits > Settings > Book online on your website. The customer chooses the visit, fills in postcode and house number and chooses a free day and time.

**Explanation:**

- **Step 1.** Settings > Add-ons: switch on Online booking (Customer visits). This is only possible together with Customer visits.
- **Step 2.** Customer visits > Settings > Visit types: open a type and set Bookable online to Yes. Only those types appear in the widget.
- **Step 3.** Tab Book online: copy the Link to the widget or the Code for your website and put it on your website.
- **What the customer does.** They choose the visit, fill in postcode and house number (street and city usually fill in automatically), choose a day and a time, fill in their details and choose Schedule visit.
- **Service area.** If the address is outside your service area, the widget stops with the message "Unfortunately we do not come to this address. Please contact us." and your phone number.
- **Times.** The widget only shows times at which an employee who does the visit is free, including the travel time before and after. When scheduling, Jimani checks this once more.
- **Confirmation.** The customer sees "Our employee will come on ... at ... to ..." and gets a confirmation by email and a reminder the day before. The visit is immediately in your schedule.

**Example:** A customer in 4331 AB chooses Measuring curtains on Saturday at 09:30. The visit goes to the first employee who is free then, with the travel time before and after blocked.

**Source:** `Jimani.React/jimani.react.client/src/widgets/KlantbezoekWidget/KlantbezoekWidget.js` (stappen, meldingen); `Jimani.API/Controllers/KlantbezoekwidgetController.cs`; `Jimani.Application/Features/Klantbezoeken/Klantbezoekdienst.cs`; `tools/klantbezoeken.sql` (prijs)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** online booking, widget, schedule home visit, measuring appointment, customer schedules themselves, website

**Related:** [How do I schedule a visit at the customer's home?](klantbezoeken-plannen.md), [How does Customer visits work in Jimani?](../naslag/klantbezoeken.md)

---

# How does Customer visits work in Jimani?

**Answer:** With Customer visits you schedule visits by your employees at the customer's home, such as taking measurements, advice or installation. You see the schedule per employee, your employee has a day overview on their phone, and on the POS you see the visits and create the quote or order after the visit.

**Where to find it:** Menu > Customer visits (`/Klantbezoeken`); Settings > Guests and bookings > Customer visits (`/Klantbezoeken/Instellingen`)

**Explanation:** Customer visits is an add-on of €10 per month; Online booking (Customer visits) is an option on top of it for €10 per month. The employees, working hours, breaks and days off are the same as in Salon.

**Buttons and settings:**

| Name | What it does | When to use it | Note |
|---|---|---|---|
| New visit | Opens the window with Customer, Visit address and Type, employee and time | A customer wants a home visit | Only times at which the visit plus travel time fits into the schedule |
| Day overview | Opens My visits: an employee's visits in order | On the employee's phone or handheld | Without a choice, the employee with your email address |
| Route | Opens Google Maps with the visit address | On the way to the customer | - |
| Call | Calls the customer's phone number | To let them know you are running late | Grey if there is no number |
| Completed | Sets the visit to Completed | After the visit | - |
| Customer not home | Sets the visit to Customer not home | Nobody opens the door | The time stays occupied |
| Rescheduled | Sets the visit to Rescheduled and frees up the time | The visit has to move to another day | Then choose a new day and time in the schedule |
| Create quote or order | Opens the POS with the customer and the visit address on the receipt | After the visit, for the quote or order | The visit address goes into the receipt note |
| Visit types | Name, Duration (minutes), Price or call-out fee, Travel time before and Travel time after, Employees, Bookable online, Active | When setting up | Travel time 30 minutes by default |
| Service area | Postcodes and ranges you travel to | When setting up | Empty = everywhere |
| Book online | The Link to the widget and the Code for your website | Letting customers schedule themselves | Only with Online booking (Customer visits) on |

**Messages:**

| Message | What it means | What you do |
|---|---|---|
| This address is outside your service area. You can still save. | The postcode is not in your service area | Save if you are going anyway, or choose another address |
| This time is no longer available. Choose another time. | Someone else has just scheduled that time | Choose another time |
| No free time on this day. Choose another day or staff member. | On that day the visit with travel time fits nowhere | Choose another day or employee |
| Enter the visit address: postcode, house number, street and city. | The visit address is incomplete | Complete the address |

**On the POS:** under Other and in the header bar of the POS you find Customer visits with today's visits and those of the coming days. Choose Create quote or order: the customer and the visit address are at the top of the receipt. After payment the receipt belongs to the visit.

**Source:** `Jimani.MVC/Views/Klantbezoeken/*.cshtml`; `Jimani.MVC/Views/Shared/_KassaKlantbezoeken.cshtml`; `Jimani.MVC/wwwroot/js/jimani/klantbezoeken-planning.js`; `Jimani.MVC/Controllers/WebshopOrderController.cs` (bon aan bezoek)

**Last verified:** 2026-10-16

**Keywords:** customer visits, schedule, day overview, travel time, service area, taking measurements, technician, POS

**Related:** [How do I schedule a visit at the customer's home?](../faq/klantbezoeken-plannen.md), [How do I let customers schedule a home visit themselves?](../faq/klantbezoeken-online-boeken.md)